Yamaha DRX-730BL Handleiding

Merk: Yamaha

Model: DRX-730BL

Categorie: Synthesizer

Type: Handleiding

Deze handleiding is ook geschikt voor

IMPORTANT NOTICE: DO NOT MODIFY THIS UNIT!

This product, when installed as indicated in the instructions contained in

this manual, meets FCC requirements. Modifications not expressly ap-

proved by Yamaha may void your authority, granted by the FCC, to use

the product.

IMPORTANT:

When connecting this product to accessories and/or another product use

only high quality shielded cables. Cable/s supplied with this product

MUST be used. Follow all installation instructions. Failure to follow in-

structions could void your FCC authorization to use this product in the

USA.

NOTE:

This product has been tested and found to comply with the requirements

listed in FCC Regulations, Part 15 for Class “B” digital devices. Compli-

ance with these requirements provides a reasonable level of assurance

that your use of this product in a residential environment will not result in

harmful interference with other electronic devices. This equipment gener-

ates/uses radio frequencies and, if not installed and used according to

the instructions found in the users manual, may cause interference

harmful to the operation of other electronic devices. Compliance with

FCC regulations does not guarantee that interference will not occur in

all installations. If this product is found to be the source of interference,

which can be determined by turning the unit “OFF” and “ON”, please try

to eliminate the problem by using one of the following measures:

• Relocate either this product or the device that is being affected by the

interference.

• Utilize power outlets that are on different branch (circuit breaker or

fuse) circuits or install AC line filter/s.

• In the case of radio or TV interference, relocate/reorient the antenna.

If the antenna lead-in is 300 ohm ribbon lead, change the lead-in to

co-axial type cable.

If these corrective measures do not produce satisfactory results, please

contact the local retailer authorized to distribute this type of product. If

you can not locate the appropriate retailer, please contact Yamaha

Corporation of America, Electronic Service Division, 6600

Orangethorpe Ave, Buena Park, CA90620

FCC INFORMATION (U.S.A.)

• This applies only to products distributed by Yamaha Corporation of America.

This product utilizes batteries or an external power supply (adapter). DO

NOT connect this product to any power supply or adapter other than

one described in the manual, on the name plate, or specifically recom-

mended by Yamaha.

This product should be used only with the components supplied or; a

cart, rack, or stand that is recommended by Yamaha. If a cart, etc., is

used, please observe all safety markings and instructions that accom-

pany the accessory product.

SPECIFICATIONS SUBJECT TO CHANGE:

The information contained in this manual is believed to be correct at the

time of printing. However, Yamaha reserves the right to change or

modify any of the specifications without notice or obligation to update

existing units.

This product, either alone or in combination with an amplifier and head-

phones or speaker/s, may be capable of producing sound levels that

could cause permanent hearing loss. DO NOT operate for long periods

of time at a high volume level or at a level that is uncomfortable. If you

experience any hearing loss or ringing in the ears, you should consult

an audiologist.

IMPORTANT: The louder the sound, the shorter the time period before

damage occurs.

NOTICE:

Service charges incurred due to a lack of knowledge relating to how a

function or effect works (when the unit is operating as designed) are not

covered by the manufacturer’s warranty, and are therefore the owners

responsibility. Please study this manual carefully and consult your

dealer before requesting service.

ENVIRONMENTAL ISSUES:

Yamaha strives to produce products that are both user safe and envi-

ronmentally friendly. We sincerely believe that our products and the

production methods used to produce them, meet these goals. In keep-

ing with both the letter and the spirit of the law, we want you to be

aware of the following:

Battery Notice:

This product MAY contain a small non-rechargeable battery which (if

applicable) is soldered in place. The average life span of this type of

battery is approximately five years. When replacement becomes nec-

essary, contact a qualified service representative to perform the re-

placement.

This product may also use “household” type batteries. Some of these

may be rechargeable. Make sure that the battery being charged is a

rechargeable type and that the charger is intended for the battery

being charged.

When installing batteries, do not mix batteries with new, or with batter-

ies of a different type. Batteries MUST be installed correctly. Mis-

matches or incorrect installation may result in overheating and battery

case rupture.

Warning:

Do not attempt to disassemble, or incinerate any battery. Keep all

batteries away from children. Dispose of used batteries promptly and

as regulated by the laws in your area. Note: Check with any retailer of

household type batteries in your area for battery disposal information.

Disposal Notice:

Should this product become damaged beyond repair, or for some

reason its useful life is considered to be at an end, please observe all

local, state, and federal regulations that relate to the disposal of prod-

ucts that contain lead, batteries, plastics, etc. If your dealer is unable

to assist you, please contact Yamaha directly.

NAME PLATE LOCATION:

The name plate is located on the bottom of the product. The model

number, serial number, power requirements, etc., are located on this

plate. You should record the model number, serial number, and the

date of purchase in the spaces provided below and retain this manual

as a permanent record of your purchase.

Model

Serial No.

Purchase Date

SPECIAL MESSAGE SECTION

PLEASE KEEP THIS MANUAL

92-BP

• Do not use the instrument near other electrical products such as televi-

sions, radios, or speakers, since this might cause interference which can

affect proper operation of the other products.

• Do not place the instrument in an unstable position where it might acci-

dentally fall over.

• Before moving the instrument, remove all connected adaptor and other

cables.

• When cleaning the instrument, use a soft, dry cloth. Do not use paint

thinners, solvents, cleaning fluids, or chemical-impregnated wiping cloths.

Also, do not place vinyl or plastic objects on the instrument, since this

might discolor the panel or keyboard.

• Do not rest your weight on, or place heavy objects on the instrument,

and do not use excessive force on the buttons, switches or connectors.

• Use only the stand specified for the instrument. When attaching the

stand, use the provided screws only. Failure to do so could cause dam-

age to the internal components or result in the instrument falling over.

• Do not operate the instrument for a long period of time at a high or

uncomfortable volume level, since this can cause permanent hearing

loss. If you experience any hearing loss or ringing in the ears, consult a

physician.

■ SAVING USER DATA

• Always save data to a floppy disk frequently, in order to help prevent

the loss of important data due to a malfunction or user operating error.

Yamaha cannot be held responsible for damage caused by improper use or

modifications to the instrument, or data that is lost or destroyed.

Always turn the power off when the instrument is not in use.

Make sure to discard used batteries according to local regulations.

PRECAUTIONS

PLEASE READ CAREFULLY BEFORE PROCEEDING

* Please keep these precautions in a safe place for future reference.

• Do not open the instrument or attempt to disassemble the internal parts

or modify them in any way. The instrument contains no user-serviceable

parts. If it should appear to be malfunctioning, discontinue use immedi-

ately and have it inspected by qualified Yamaha service personnel.

• Do not expose the instrument to rain, use it near water or in damp or

wet conditions, or place containers on it containing liquids which might

spill into any openings.

• If the AC adaptor cord or plug becomes frayed or damaged, or if there is

a sudden loss of sound during use of the instrument, or if any unusual

smells or smoke should appear to be caused by it, immediately turn off

the power switch, disconnect the adaptor plug from the outlet, and

have the instrument inspected by qualified Yamaha service personnel.

• Use the specified adaptor (PA-6 or an equivalent recommended by

Yamaha) only. Using the wrong adaptor can result in damage to the

instrument or overheating.

• Before cleaning the instrument, always remove the electric plug from

the outlet. Never insert or remove an electric plug with wet hands.

• Check the electric plug periodically and remove any dirt or dust which

may have accumulated on it.

CAUTION

Always follow the basic precautions listed below to avoid the possibility of physical injury to you or others, or damage to the

instrument or other property. These precautions include, but are not limited to, the following:

• Do not place the AC adaptor cord near heat sources such as heaters or

radiators, and do not excessively bend or otherwise damage the cord,

place heavy objects on it, or place it in a position where anyone could

walk on, trip over, or roll anything over it.

• When removing the electric plug from the instrument or an outlet, al-

ways hold the plug itself and not the cord.

• Do not connect the instrument to an electrical outlet using a multiple-

connector. Doing so can result in lower sound quality, or possibly cause

overheating in the outlet.

• Unplug the AC power adaptor when not using the instrument, or during

electrical storms.

• Always make sure all batteries are inserted in conformity with the +/–

polarity markings. Failure to do so might result in overheating, fire, or

battery fluid leakage.

• Always replace all batteries at the same time. Do not use new batteries

together with old ones. Also, do not mix battery types, such as alkaline

batteries with manganese batteries, or batteries from different makers,

or different types of batteries from the same maker, since this can

cause overheating, fire, or battery fluid leakage.

• Do not dispose of batteries in fire.

• Do not attempt to recharge batteries that are not intended to be charged.

• If the instrument is not to be in use for a long time, remove the batteries

from it, in order to prevent possible fluid leakage from the battery.

• Keep batteries away from children.

• Before connecting the instrument to other electronic components, turn

off the power for all components. Before turning the power on or off for

all components, set all volume levels to minimum.

• Do not expose the instrument to excessive dust or vibrations, or ex-

treme cold or heat (such as in direct sunlight, near a heater, or in a car

during the day) to prevent the possibility of panel disfiguration or dam-

age to the internal components.

WARNING

Always follow the basic precautions listed below to avoid the possibility of serious injury or even death from electrical shock,

short-circuiting, damages, fire or other hazards. These precautions include, but are not limited to, the following:

(4)

Congratulations!

Important Features

Touch-sensitive 61-key keyboard for a wide

range of dynamic musical expression (page 115).

A variety of voices, 215 panel voices (200

panel voices for PSR-630), 12 drum kits and 480

XG voices, with the maximum polyphony of 64

voices (32 voices for PSR-630).

Voice set feature automaticaly selects the

appropriate voice parameter settings for the panel

voices (page 116).

Advanced auto-accompaniment technol-

ogy gives you 100 fully-orchestrated accompani-

ment “styles” to back up what you play on the

keyboard (page 22).

One Touch Setting feature automatically

selects appropriate voice, effect, and other set-

tings for the selected accompaniment style — all

you have to do is select a style and play (page 40).

Large multi-function LCD display panel

makes it easy to select and edit parameters.

Registration Memory saves your favorite

panel settings for instant recall when needed

(page 57).

Digital effects (reverb, chorus, DSP and

harmony) add depth and ambiance to your sound

(page 42).

You are the proud owner of a fine electronic keyboard. The Yamaha PSR-730/630 PortaTone

combines the most advanced tone generation technology with state-of-the-art digital electronics

and features to give you stunning sound quality with maximum musical enjoyment. A large graphic

display and easy-to-use interface also greatly enhance the operability of this advanced instrument.

In order to make the most of your PortaTone’s features and extensive performance potential, we

urge you to read the manual thoroughly while trying out the various features described. Keep the

manual in a safe place for later reference.

Virtual Arranger feature lets you add chord

progressions to any of the auto-accompaniment

styles for more musical, refined accompaniment

(page 29).

The Groove & Dynamics function lets you

individualize your arrangement of any style of

music (page 35).

PSR-730

The functional layout of the track buttons

below the panel display makes operation easy.

Minus-one and Repeat functions are ideal

for learning new songs and polishing your key-

board technique (page 79).

The Multi Effect function lets you combine

two digital effects (page 48).

PSR-730

001

Piano

STRATION MEMORY

FREEZE

●The LCD displays as illustrated in this owner’s manual are for instructional purposes only, and may appear somewhat

different from those on your instrument. The displays from the PSR-730 are used for the instructions and descriptions

in this manual.

User Song recording feature makes it easy

to record and playback four melody tracks with an

accompaniment track (page 83).

A total of sixteen tracks can be recorded

with the Multi recording function, including key-

board, harmony and accompaniment (page 88).

Multi Pads record and play short rhythmic

and melodic sequences that can be used to add

impact and variety to your performances (page

106).

The floppy disk drive plays XG disks and

lets you easily manage User Song, User Style,

User Pad and Registration data (page 64).

Create original accompaniment styles with

the User Style feature (you can also establish

your own rules for changing pitch based on chord

changes (page 98).

With the Digital Equalizer you can fine

tune the sound of your performance on five differ-

ent frequency bands (page 51).

PSR-730

A range of MIDI functions for expanded

musical enjoyment (XG format compatible), and a

TO HOST terminal for easy connection to a per-

sonal computer (page 121)

MIDI templates for easy MIDI settings

(page 129).

◆ Packing List

• PSR-730/630

GM System Level 1

“GM System Level 1” is an addition to the MIDI

standard which ensures that any GM-compatible music

data can be accurately played by any GM-compatible

tone generator, regardless of manufacturer. The GM

mark is affixed to all software and hardware products that

support the “GM System Level 1”.

PSR-730/630 supports GM System Level 1.

Please check that these items are packed with your PSR-730/630.

XG is a new MIDI format created by Yamaha which

significantly improves and expands upon the “GM Sys-

tem Level 1” standard by providing a greater variety of

high-quality voices plus considerably enhanced effect

operation while being fully compatible with GM.

PSR-730/630 supports the XG format.

15 16

MULTI PAD

DISK

• Music Stand (page 7)

• Sample Disk

• Owner’s manual

Contents

Panel Controls 6

The Music Stand ........................................................7

Basic Display Operation 8

The Display Icons............................................................8

The Menus .....................................................................10

Shortcuts .................................................................11

Setting Up 12

Power Supply.................................................................12

Using An Optional AC Power Adaptor.........................12

Using Batteries............................................................12

Connections ..................................................................13

PHONES Jack.............................................................13

SUSTAIN Pedal Jack...................................................13

FOOT VOLUME Jack ..................................................13

AUX OUT R and L/L+R Jacks .....................................13

MIDI IN/OUT and TO HOST Connectors ....................13

The Demonstration 14

Playing the PSR-730/630 16

A Word About the “R1”, “R2”, and “L” Voices .............16

Selecting & Playing R1 Voices .....................................17

Keyboard Percussion ................................................19

The Dual Voice Mode.....................................................19

The Split Voice Mode.....................................................20

Changing the SPLIT VOICE Split Point.......................21

Auto Accompaniment 22

What is Auto Accompaniment? ...................................22

Using Auto Accompaniment ........................................22

Changing Tempo......................................................26

The Beat Indicator....................................................26

Accompaniment Sections..........................................27

Accompaniment Track Muting ..................................28

The Synchro Stop Function .......................................28

Using Virtual Arranger ..................................................29

Accompaniment Volume Control .................................29

Changing the Accompaniment Split Point..................30

Interaction Between the AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT

and SPLIT VOICE Split Points..............................31

The Auto Accompaniment Fingering Modes..............31

The Stop Accompaniment Function ...........................35

Groove and Dynamics (PSR-730) ................................35

Applying Groove & Dynamics......................................36

Arranging the Groove & Dynamics Effect

(User Settings).......................................................36

One Touch Setting ......................................................... 40

Digital Effects 42

Reverb ...........................................................................43

Selecting a Reverb Type..............................................43

Reverb Return Level....................................................43

Chorus ...........................................................................44

Selecting a Chorus Type .............................................44

Chorus Return Level ...................................................44

DSP ...........................................................................45

Select the DSP Type ...................................................45

DSP Return Level........................................................46

Harmony.........................................................................47

Selecting a Harmony Type ..........................................47

Adjusting the Harmony Volume ...................................48

Multi Effect (PSR-730) ...................................................48

How Multi Effect Works ...............................................48

Applying Multi Effect (PSR-730) ..................................49

Setting Parts for Effect 1/2 ..........................................49

Select the Effect Type for Effect 1/2.............................50

Adjust the Dry/Wet Settings for Effect 1/2 ...................50

The Digital Equalizer (PSR-730)...................................51

Using the Digital Equalizer (PSR-730).........................51

Selecting a Digital EQ Type. ........................................52

Setting the Gain (User Setting) ...................................53

The Pitch Bend Wheel 54

Setting the Pitch Bend Range ......................................54

The Modulation Wheel (PSR-730) 55

Changing the Modulation Wheel Function .................55

Transpose 56

Setting Transposition ....................................................56

Registration Memory 57

Registering the Panel Settings ....................................57

Naming the Registration Banks ...................................58

Recall the Registered Panel Settings ..........................60

The Accompanient Freeze Function ...........................60

The Multi Pads 61

Selecting a MULTI PAD Set...........................................61

Playing the MULTI PADs ...............................................62

Turning the CHORD MATCH Function On/Off ............63

Disk Operations 64

Floppy Disk Handling Precautions.............................64

User Song Data...........................................................65

User Style/User Pad/Registration Memory Data .........65

Data that Can be Saved or Loaded with the

PSR-730/630 ........................................................65

Using Commercially Available Music Collections

(Sold Separately)...................................................66

The Sample Disk ...........................................................66

Format ...........................................................................67

Save ...........................................................................68

Load ...........................................................................70

Disk Copy.......................................................................72

Song Copy .....................................................................73

Delete File ......................................................................75

Song Playback 76

Song Playback Procedure ............................................76

Song Volume Control...................................................78

Play from a Specified Measure ...................................78

Minus-one Practice .......................................................79

Repeat Play....................................................................80

Song Repeat ..................................................................81

Next Song ......................................................................82

Song Recording 83

Quick Recording Procedure.........................................84

Rehearsal Mode .......................................................86

Multi Recording Procedure ..........................................88

About the Recording with the Digital Effects Applied . 90

Punch In/Punch Out ....................................................92

Quantize ......................................................................93

Naming User Songs ....................................................94

Clearing Song Data .....................................................94

Song Edit.....................................................................96

Style Recording 98

Style Recording Procedure ..........................................98

Rehearsal Mode .....................................................101

Drum Cancel .............................................................103

Quantize ....................................................................103

Naming Styles ...........................................................104

Clearing User Style Data...........................................105

Multi Pad Recording 106

Multi Pad Recording Procedure.................................106

Naming Pads .............................................................109

Clearing User Pad Data ............................................109

Revoicing 110

Revoicing the R1, R2, and L Voices ...........................110

Revoicing a Style.........................................................112

Overall Functions 114

Touch Sensitivity........................................................115

Pitch Bend Range .....................................................115

Modulation Wheel......................................................115

Master Tuning ............................................................115

Scale Tuning ..............................................................115

Song Transpose.........................................................116

Metronome ................................................................116

Split Voice Split Point.................................................116

Accompaniment Split Point .......................................116

Fingering Mode .........................................................116

Voice Set ...................................................................116

Pedal .........................................................................117

MIDI Functions 119

What’s MIDI?................................................................119

MIDI Terminal/TO HOST Terminal .........................121

What You Can Do with MIDI ........................................121

Connecting to a Personal Computer

(TO HOST Terminal/HOST SELECT Switch)....................122

Connect using the PSR-730/630 MIDI terminals ......122

Connect using the TO HOST terminal.......................124

The PSR-730/630 MIDI Functions ..............................125

Transmit Channel & Transmit Track ...........................125

Receive Channel & Receive Mode...........................126

Local Control .............................................................127

Clock .........................................................................128

Initial Data Send ........................................................128

MIDI Template ...........................................................129

Appendix 130

PSR-730/630 Display MENU/SUB MENU Structure ..130

Voice List .....................................................................133

Maximum Polyphony .................................................133

Drum Kit List................................................................140

Style List ......................................................................142

About Digital Effects (Reverb/Chorus/DSP) .............143

When DSP type Is Selected as a System Effect .......143

When DSP type Is Selected as a Insertion Effect .....144

Harmony Type List ...................................................... 147

Refining User Styles with Style File Format .............148

Style File (Auto Accompaniment) Format..................148

About the Source Chord Type ...................................150

Troubleshooting ..........................................................151

Data Backup & Initialization .......................................152

Data Backup..............................................................152

Data Initialization .......................................................152

MIDI Data Format.........................................................153

MIDI Implementation Chart ........................................168

Specifications..............................................................171

Index.............................................................................172

Panel Controls

CLICK

PHONES

PITCH BEND MODULATION

MAX

MIN

T S R 1 1 2 32 3 L H L HRS

HLHLHLHL

HLSLHLMO

36 37 39 41 4238 40 43 45 46 50 51 5244 47 48 49 53 55 5754 5856 6259 60 61 69 7063 716564 66 67 7268 73 7574 76 77 78 79 80

81 82

84 85 86 8887 89 90 91 93 9492 95

G1 A1

B1 C2 D2 E2

G2 A2 B2 C3 D3 E3 F3 G3 A3 B3 C4 D4 E4 F4 G4 A4 B4 C5 D5 E5 F5 G5 A5 B5

STYLE

031 ~ 034

035 ~ 041

052 ~ 060

061 ~ 065

066 ~ 070

071 ~ 081

042 ~ 047

048 ~ 051

001 ~ 011

012 ~ 019

020 ~ 022

023 ~ 030

8BEAT

16BEAT

6/8 BALLAD

DANCE

DISCO

ROCK

PANEL VOICE

055 ~ 061

062 ~ 081

001 ~ 019

020 ~ 031

032 ~ 054

PIANO

CHROMATIC

PERCUSSION

ORGAN

ACCORDION

GUITAR

138 ~ 153

082 ~ 096

097 ~ 108

129 ~ 137

109 ~ 128

BASS

SOLO STRINGS

ENSEMBLE

SOLO BRASS

BRASS ENSEMBLE

216 ~ 227

154 ~ 168

169 ~ 176

195 ~ 215

177 ~ 194

REED

PIPE

SYNTH LEAD

SYNTH PAD

DRUM KITS

XG VOICE

323 ~ 351

352 ~ 393

228 ~ 266

267 ~ 286

287 ~ 322

PIANO

CHROMATIC

PERCUSSION

ORGAN

GUITAR

BASS 493 ~ 528 SYNTH LEAD

666 ~ 707 SFX

PSR-730

485 ~ 492

394 ~ 405

406 ~ 439

472 ~ 484

440 ~ 471

STRINGS

ENSEMBLE

BRASS

REED

PIPE

658 ~ 665

529 ~ 557

558 ~ 613

635 ~ 657

614 ~ 634

SYNTH PAD

SYNTH EFFECTS

ETHNIC

PERCUSSIVE

SOUND EFFECTS

RHYTHM&BLUES

GROOVE&DYNAMICS

ROCK&ROLL

COUNTRY&WESTERN

TRADITIONAL JAZZ

CONTEMPORARY JAZZ

LATIN

084 ~ 087

088 ~ 091

092 ~ 095

096 ~ 100

082 ~ 083

CARIBBEAN

BALLROOM LATIN

BALLROOM STANDARD

MARCH

WALTZ

VOICE

STYLE

SONG

VOICE

STYLE

SONG

KEYBOARD

SPLIT VOICE DUAL VOICE

STOP

ONE TOUCH SETTING

12341234

123

456

789

–

/ NO

/ YES

MULTI PAD

AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT

SYNC STOP START

DEMO

RESET

TEMPO

TRANSPOSE

ACMP / SONG

VOLUME

ACCOMPANIMENT

ON / OFF

INTRO

MAIN / AUTO FILL

ENDING

RECORD

START / STOP

SUB MENU

DIGITAL MULTI EFFECT

DIGITAL EQ MULTI EFFECT

REVERB HARMONY

CHORUS

DSP

VARIATION

BANK

MEMORY

REGISTRATION MEMORY

FREEZE

ACCOMPANIMENT TRACK

SONG TRACK

R2 R1

REVOICE

DISK

MULTI PAD

REGIST MEMORY

MIDI

DIGITAL EFFECT

OVERALL

161 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

MIN

MAX

STAND BY

MASTER

VOLUME

REPEAT

ACMP VOICEVOICEVOICERHYTHM

BASS CHORD

CHORD

PAD PHRASE

PHRASE

FINGERING mM

augsus

dim

RHYTHM

R1R2

REVERB HARMONYCHORUS DSP SYNC STOP

ONE TOUCH

SETTING

MELODY

REGISTRATION MULTI PAD

BEAT

GROOVE & DYNAMICS

TEMPO

TRANSPOSE

MEASURE

MEMORY

12345678910111213141516

213

1234

FREEZE

VOICE

DUALSPLIT

DISK

STYLE

SONG

ACMP/SONG

VOLUME

MULTI

EFFECT

DIGITAL EQ

001

100

116

000

001001001001001001001001001001001001001001001001

nd Pianop1 Gra8Beat Po

001

119

513

VARIATION

q w

(

)

CLICK

PHONES

PITCH BEND

T S R 1 1 2 32 3 L H L HRS

HLHLHLHL

HLSLHLMO

36 37 39 41 4238 40 43 45 46 50 51 5244 47 48 49 53 55 5754 5856 6259 60 61 69 7063 716564 66 67 7268 73 7574 76 77 78 79 80

81 82

84 85 86 8887 89 90 91 93 9492 95

G1 A1

B1 C2 D2 E2

G2 A2 B2 C3 D3 E3 F3 G3 A3 B3 C4 D4 E4 F4 G4 A4 B4 C5 D5 E5 F5 G5 A5 B5

STYLE

031 ~ 034

035 ~ 041

052 ~ 060

061 ~ 065

066 ~ 070

071 ~ 081

042 ~ 047

048 ~ 051

001 ~ 011

012 ~ 019

020 ~ 022

023 ~ 030

8BEAT

16BEAT

6/8 BALLAD

DANCE

DISCO

ROCK

PANEL VOICE

052 ~ 057

058 ~ 073

001 ~ 018

019 ~ 030

031 ~ 051

PIANO

CHROMATIC

PERCUSSION

ORGAN

ACCORDION

GUITAR

127 ~ 140

074 ~ 088

089 ~ 100

119 ~ 126

101 ~ 118

BASS

SOLO STRINGS

ENSEMBLE

SOLO BRASS

BRASS ENSEMBLE

201 ~ 212

141 ~ 155

156 ~ 163

182 ~ 200

164 ~ 181

REED

PIPE

SYNTH LEAD

SYNTH PAD

DRUM KITS

XG VOICE

308 ~ 336

337 ~ 378

213 ~ 251

252 ~ 271

272 ~ 307

PIANO

CHROMATIC

PERCUSSION

ORGAN

GUITAR

BASS 478 ~ 513 SYNTH LEAD

651 ~ 692 SFX

PSR-630

470 ~ 477

379 ~ 390

391 ~ 424

457 ~ 469

425 ~ 456

STRINGS

ENSEMBLE

BRASS

REED

PIPE

643 ~ 650

514 ~ 542

543 ~ 598

620 ~ 642

599 ~ 619

SYNTH PAD

SYNTH EFFECTS

ETHNIC

PERCUSSIVE

SOUND EFFECTS

RHYTHM&BLUES

ROCK&ROLL

COUNTRY&WESTERN

TRADITIONAL JAZZ

CONTEMPORARY JAZZ

LATIN

084 ~ 087

088 ~ 091

092 ~ 095

096 ~ 100

082 ~ 083

CARIBBEAN

BALLROOM LATIN

BALLROOM STANDARD

MARCH

WALTZ

VOICE

STYLE

SONG

VOICE

STYLE

SONG

KEYBOARD

SPLIT VOICE DUAL VOICE

STOP

ONE TOUCH SETTING

12341234

123

456

789

–

/ NO

/ YES

MULTI PAD

AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT

SYNC STOP START

DEMO

RESET

TEMPO

TRANSPOSE

ACMP / SONG

VOLUME

ACCOMPANIMENT

ON / OFF

INTRO

MAIN / AUTO FILL

ENDING

RECORD

START / STOP

SUB MENU

DIGITAL EFFECT

REGISTRATION MEMORY

REVERB HARMONY

CHORUS

DSP

VARIATION

MEMORY

FREEZE

ACCOMPANIMENT TRACK

SONG TRACK

R2 R1

REVOICE

DISK

MULTI PAD

REGIST MEMORY

MIDI

DIGITAL EFFECT

OVERALL

161 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

MIN

MAX

STAND BY

MASTER

VOLUME

REPEAT

ACMP VOI CEVOICEVOICERHYTHM

BASS CHORD

CHORD

PAD PHRASE

PHRASE

FINGERING mM

augsus

dim

RHYTHM

R1R2

REVERB HARMONYCHORUS DSP SYNC STOP

ONE TOUCH

SETTING

MELODY

REGISTRATION MULTI PAD

BEAT

TEMPO

TRANSPOSE

MEASURE

MEMORY

12345678910111213141516

213

1234

FREEZE

VOICE

DUALSPLIT

DISK

STYLE

SONG

ACMP/SONG

VOLUME

001

100

116

000

001001001001001001001001001001001001001001001001

nd Pianop1 Gra8Beat Po

001

119

513

VARIATION

(

)

DC IN 10-12V

MIDI

OUT SUSTAINTO HOSTFOOT VOL

MAC PC1 PC2 MIDI

AUX OUT

RL / L

tyuiopQ

PSR-730

PSR-630

PSR-730/630

Panel Controls

■

Top Panel Controls

q STAND BY/ON Switch .........................page 14

w MASTER VOLUME Control..................page 14

e DEMO Button .......................................page 14

r TEMPO Buttons ...................................page 26

t TRANSPOSE Buttons..........................page 56

y ACCOMPANIMENT/SONG VOLUME

Buttons.......................................... pages 29,78

u AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT SECTION

• AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT

ON/OFF Button .................................page 23

• SYNC STOP Button ..........................page 28

• SYNC START Button ........................page 24

• INTRO Button ...................................page 24

• MAIN/AUTO FILL A & B Buttons.......page 24

• ENDING Button.................................page 25

i RECORD Button .................... pagse 84,99,106

o START/STOP Button................ pages 15,23,25

DIGITAL MULTI EFFECT SECTION (PSR-730)

DIGITAL EFFECT SECTION (PSR-630)

• DIGITAL EQ Button (PSR-730).........page 51

• REVERB Button ................................page 43

• CHORUS Button ...............................page 44

• DSP Button .......................................page 45

• VARIATION Button ............................page 46

• MULTI EFFECT Button (PSR-730) ...page 49

• HARMONY Button ............................page 47

!1 DISPLAY & RELATED CONTROLS

• DISPLAY .............................................page 8

• MENU Buttons ..................................page 10

• SUB MENU Buttons..........................page 10

• VOICE Button....................................page 10

• STYLE Button ...................................page 10

• SONG Button ....................................page 10

• REVOICE Button.............................page 110

• TRACK Buttons......... pages 19,20,28,86,111

!2 REGISTRATION MEMORY SECTION

• BANK [+], [ –] Buttons (PSR-730) .....page 58

• MEMORY Button...............................page 58

• 1, 2, 3, 4 Buttons...............................page 58

• FREEZE Button ................................page 60

!3 ONE TOUCH SETTING Button............page 41

◆ The Music Stand

The PSR-730/630 is supplied with a music

stand that can be attached to the instrument

by inserting it into the slot at the rear of the

control panel.

GROOVE & DYNAMICS Button

(PSR-730) ......................................... page 36

!5 NUMBER Buttons ................................ page 10

!6 + and – Buttons.................................... page 10

!7 Data Dial ..............................................page 10

!8 KEYBOARD SECTION

• DUAL VOICE Button ......................... page 19

• SPLIT VOICE Button......................... page 20

!9 MULTI PAD SECTION

• STOP Button .....................................page 62

• 1, 2, 3, 4 Buttons...............................page 62

@0 Keyboard..............................................page 18

@1 PITCH BEND Wheel ............................page 54

@2 MODULATION Wheel (PSR-730) ........page 55

@3 PHONES Jack......................................page 13

@4 Disk Drive.............................................page 64

■

Rear Panel Controls

@5 FOOT VOL Jack ...................................page 13

@6 TO HOST Connector..........................page 121

@7 HOST SELECT Switch ......................page 122

@8 MIDI IN and OUT Connectors............page 121

@9 SUSTAIN Jack......................................page 13

#0 AUX OUT R, L/L+R Jacks....................page 13

#1 DC IN 10-12V Jack ..............................page 12

ACCOMPANIMENT TRACK

SONG TRACK

R2 R1

REPEAT

ACMP VOICEVOICEVOICERHYTHM

BASS CHORD

CHORD

PAD PHRASE

PHRASE

FINGERING mM

augsus

dim

RHYTHM

R1R2

REVERB HARMONYCHORUS DSP SYNC STOP

ONE TOUCH

SETTING

MELODY

REGISTRATION MULTI PAD

BEAT

GROOVE & DYNAMICS

TEMPO

TRANSPOSE

MEASURE

MEMORY

12345678910111213141516

213

1234

FREEZE

VOICE

DUALSPLIT

DISK

STYLE

SONG

ACMP/SONG

VOLUME

MULTI

EFFECT

DIGITAL EQ

001

100

116

000

001001001001001001001001001001001001001001001001

nd Pianop1 Gra8Beat Po

001

119

513

VARIATION

Basic Display Operation

The PSR-730/630 LCD panel is a large multi-function type that simultaneously displays and

provides access to a number of important parameters. Basic operation of the display as well

as the MENU and SUB MENU buttons, and the meaning of the icons which appear in the

display, are summarized briefly below.

The Display Icons

ACCOMPANIMENT TRACKS

These icons display the on/off status and volume/velocity settings

for each of the 8 accompaniment tracks. They are also used to

specify tracks when using the REVOICE function (page 110). When

doing Multi recording/playback of songs, the on/off status and

volume settings are shown for tracks 1-8 (page 89).

Style/Song Number

The style number or song number is dis-

played here when in the Song/Style Mode.

Disk

Appears when a floppy disk song is selected

(page 76).

Appears when XG voices are used in a

floppy disk song.

Voice Number (R1 Voice)

The currently selected R1 voice num-

ber (page 17) appears here.

Appears when one of the PSR-730/

630’s XG voices is selected (page

16).

MELODY TRACKS 1 … 4, ACCOMPANIMENT TRACK

In Song Quick Record mode, the recording track is indicated(page

86). When doing Multi recording/playback of songs, the on/off

status and volume settings are shown for tracks 9-13 (page 89).

RHYTHM

BASS CHORD

CHORD

PAD PHRASE

PHRASE

RHYTHM

12345678

347324407324322340219219

DISK

ACMP

MELODY

910111213

213213252201471

001

Basic Display Operation

TEMPO

Shows the current tempo of accompani-

ment/song playback (page 26).

TRANSPOSE

The current transpose value (page 56).

ACMP/SONG VOLUME

In Song/Style Mode (page 11), the ac-

companiment or song volume is displayed

(pagse 29,78).

REPEAT

Indicates the “A” and “B” repeat points

when programming a repeat section, and

whether REPEAT PLAY is on or off (page

80).

ONE TOUCH SETTING

Appears when the ONE TOUCH SET-

TING feature is engaged (page 41).

REGISTRATION 1 … 4

(Registration Memory)

Indicates the currently selected REGIS-

TRATION MEMORY or ONE TOUCH

SETTING number (page 57).

FREEZE

Appears when the REGISTRATION

MEMORY “FREEZE” function is on (page

60).

MEASURE

Indicates the current measure number

during song recording and playback (page

78).

BEAT

Flashes at the current tempo and indi-

cates the current beat during accompa-

niment and song playback. (page 26)

MULTI PAD 1 … 4

Indicates the currently playing MULTI PAD

numbers (page 62).

Keyboard Settings (VOICE R1/VOICE R2/VOICE L)

These icons indicate the on/off status and volume settings for the L, R2, and

R1 voices when the DUAL VOICE and/or SPLIT VOICE functions are used

(pages 19,20). They are also used to specify tracks when using the REVOICE

function (page 110).

During Multi recording/playback of songs, they indicate the on/off status,

volume/velocity and voice settings for tracks 14-16 (page 86).

116

DIGITAL EQ (PSR-730)

Appears when the DIGITAL EQUALIZER is

turned on (page 51).

MULTI EFFECT (PSR-730)

Appears when the MULTI EFFECT is turned

on (page 49).

REVERB

Appears when the PSR-730/630 REVERB

effect is turned on (page 43).

CHORUS

Appears when the CHORUS effect is turned

on (page 44).

DSP

Appears when the DSP effect is turned on

(page 45).

DSP VARIATION

Appears when the DSP VARIATION effect

is turned on (page 46).

HARMONY

Appears when the HARMONY effect is

turned on (page 47).

SYNC STOP

Appears when AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT

SYNC STOP function is engaged (page

28).

FINGERING

Shows the currently selected fingering

mode (page 32).

CHORD

Displays the current chord name during

AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT playback or

SONG recording/playback (page 25).

GROOVE & DYNAMICS

(PSR-730)

Appears when the GROOVE & DYNAMICS

function is engaged (page 36).

100

VARIATION

FREEZE

1234

ONE TOUCH

SETTING

VOICEVOICEVOICE

R1R2

14 15 16

DUALSPLIT

00 1048064

213

GROOVE&DYNAMICS

VOICE

STYLE

SONG

ACCOMPANIMENT TRACK

SONG TRACK

R2 R1

DISK

MULTI PAD

REGIST MEMORY

MIDI

DIGITAL EFFECT

OVERALL

REPEAT

ACMP VOICEVOICEVOICERHYTHM

BASS CHORD

CHORD

PAD PHRASE

PHRASE

FINGERING mM

augsus

dim

RHYTHM

R1R2

REVERB HARMONYCHORUS DSP SYNC STOP

ONE TOUCH

SETTING

MELODY

REGISTRATION MULTI PAD

BEAT

GROOVE & DYNAMICS

TEMPO

TRANSPOSE

MEASURE

MEMORY

12345678910111213141516

213

1234

FREEZE

VOICE

DUALSPLIT

DISK

STYLE

SONG

ACMP/SONG

VOLUME

MULTI

EFFECT

DIGITAL EQ

001

100

116

000

00100100 100100100 100100100 100100100 100100100 1001

nd Pianop1 Gra8Beat Po

001

119

513

VARIATION

VOICE

STYLE

SONG

SUB MENU

123

456

789

–

/ NO

/ YES

Basic Display Operation

The Menus

Main Menu Selection (VOICE/STYLE/SONG Buttons)

You can select one of the three main VOICE/STYLE/SONG menus by pressing the appropriate

button to the right of the display. The menu icon

will move to indicate the menu you have

selected.

Selecting Other Menus (MENU [▲], [▼] Buttons)

You can select one of the seven “DISK” “MULTI PAD” “REGIST MEMORY” “MIDI” “DIGITAL

EFFECT” “OVERALL” “GROOVE & DYNAMICS” menus on the left of the display by pressing

the [▲], [▼] MENU buttons at the lower left. The menu icon

will move to indicate the menu

you have selected.

SUB MENU Selection (SUB MENU [▲], [▼] Buttons)

You can select one of the sub menus within the selected menu by pressing the [▲], [▼] SUB

MENU buttons at the upper left of the display. At the top of the display, the MENU/SUB MENU

you selected will displayed on the left and the current setting or value for that item on the right.

Number Buttons [1]-[0], [+] (YES), [–] (NO) Buttons

The number buttons [1] – [0], [+],[–], are used to change

settings (values). Pressing the [+] button increases the dis-

played value by 1. Pressing the [–] button decreases it by 1.

Pressing and holding either button causes a continuous in-

crease or decrease. Pressing the [+] (YES) or [–] (NO) buttons

also switches between on and off settings. For items that have

initial default values, pressing the [+] and [–] buttons together

at the same time will return the setting to the initial value.

• When the value displayed is a number like a style number, press-

ing and holding either the [+] or [–] button will cause the number to

continue to the lowest value after the highest is reached or vice-

versa (...99

100

2..., ...2

100

99...). If the number dis-

played is a value like a transpose value, it will stop changing when

the maximum or minimum value is reached.

Dial

Like the number buttons [1]-[0], [+],[–], the

dial is used to change settings and values.

Rotating it to the right (clockwise) increases

the value, while rotating it to the left (counter-

clockwise) decreases it. The dial can also be

used to toggle on/off settings.

Shortcuts

To make operation as easy and as efficient as possible, the PSR-730/630 features a number of

“shortcuts” which allow you to jump directly to certain functions without having to use the MENU

and SUB MENU buttons. All of these shortcuts work in the same way: press and hold a panel

button for a few seconds to go to the related function. For example, if you press and hold the

[REVERB] button for a few seconds, you will go directly to the REVERB type selection function.

The shorcuts will also be described where appropriate throughout this manual.

Basic Display Operation

There are two modes in the PSR-730/630: Style Mode and Song Mode, and normally one of them is selected. Pressing

the STYLE button selects Style Mode, lighting the STYLE icon, while pressing the Song button selects Song Mode and

lights the SONG icon, displaying the current mode.

STYLE

Style Mode * Pressing the START/STOP button will start accompaniment playback.

Currently selected

style name and style

number

Accompaniment

volume

Information for accompaniment tracks 1-8

SONG

Song Mode * Pressing the START/STOP button will start song playback.

Currently selected

song name and song

number

Song volume

Information for song tracks 1-16

• When in Song Mode, AUTO ACCOM-

PANIMENT ON/OFF , SYNC START,

SYNC STOP and other buttons con-

nected with accompaniment will not

function.

ACCOMPANIMENT TRACK

SONG TRACK

R2 R1

REPEAT

ACMP VOICEVOICEVOICERHYTHM

BASS CHORD

CHORD

PAD PHRASE

PHRASE

FINGERING mM

augsus

dim

RHYTHM

R1R2

REVERB HARMONYCHORUS DSP SYNC STOP

ONE TOUCH

SETTING

MELODY

REGISTRATION MULTI PAD

BEAT

GROOVE & DYNAMICS

TEMPO

TRANSPOSE

MEASURE

MEMORY

12345678910111213141516

213

1234

FREEZE

VOICE

DUALSPLIT

DISK

STYLE

SONG

ACMP/SONG

VOLUME

MULTI

EFFECT

DIGITAL EQ

001

100

116

000

213213213213213252219471442468434259391337213213

nd Pianorid GraLondon B

001

119

513

VARIATION

ACCOMPANIMENT TRACK

SONG TRACK

R2 R1

REPEAT

ACMP VOICEVOICEVOICERHYTHM

BASS CHORD

CHORD

PAD PHRASE

PHRASE

FINGERING m M

augsus

dim

RHYTHM

R1R2

REVERB HARMONYCHORUS DSP SYNC STOP

ONE TOUCH

SETTING

MELODY

REGISTRATION MULTI PAD

BEAT

GROOVE & DYNAMICS

TEMPO

TRANSPOSE

MEASURE

MEMORY

12345678910111213141516

213

1234

FREEZE

VOICE

DUALSPLIT

DISK

STYLE

SONG

ACMP/SONG

VOLUME

MULTI

EFFECT

DIGITAL EQ

001

100

116

000

001109084888888888888888362324407339337355219219

nd Pianop1 Gra8Beat Po

001

119

513

VARIATION

Setting Up

This section contains information about setting up your PSR-730/630 and preparing to play.

Be sure to go through this section carefully before using your PSR-730/630.

Power Supply

Although the PSR-730/630 will run either from an optional AC adaptor or

batteries, Yamaha recommends use of the more environmentally safe AC adaptor.

Follow the instructions below according to the power source you intend to use.

• Never interrupt the power

supply (e.g. remove the

batteries or unplug the

AC adaptor) during any

PSR-730/630 record op-

eration! Doing so can re-

sult in a loss of data.

■ Using An Optional AC Power Adaptor

z Plug an optional Yamaha PA-6 Power Adaptor into a wall AC outlet.

x Then plug the DC output cable from the PA-6 into the DC IN 10-12V jack on

the rear panel of the PSR-730/630. The internal batteries are automatically

disconnected when an AC Power Adaptor is used.

• Use ONLY a Yamaha PA-6 AC

Power Adaptor (or other

adaptor specifically recom-

mended by Yamaha) to power

your instrument from the AC

mains. The use of other adap-

tors may result in irreparable

damage to both the adaptor

and the PSR-730/630.

• Unplug the AC Power Adap-

tor when not using the PSR-

730/630, or during electrical

storms.

■ Using Batteries

For battery operation the PSR-730/630 requires six 1.5V SUM-1, “D” size, R-

20 or equivalent batteries.

When the batteries need to be replaced “Lo Battery!!” may appear on top of the

display, the volume may be reduced, the sound may be distorted, and other problems

may occur. When this happens, turn the power off and replace the batteries.

Replace the batteries as follows:

z Open the battery compartment cover located on the instrument’s bottom panel.

x Insert the six new batteries, being careful to follow the polarity markings on

the inside of the compartment.

c Replace the compartment cover, making sure that it locks firmly in place.

DC IN 10-12V

PA-6

• When the batteries run

down, replace them with a

complete set of six new

batteries. NEVER mix old

and new batteries.

• Do not use different kinds

of batteries (e.g. alkaline

and manganese) at the

same time.

• If the instrument is not to

be in use for a long time,

remove the batteries from

it, in order to prevent pos-

sible fluid leakage from

the battery.

• Plugging or unplugging

the AC power adaptor

while the batteries are in-

stalled will reset the PSR-

730/630 to the defaults.

When turning the power OFF, simply reverse the procedure.

◆ Important Notes on Battery Use

• Since the PSR-730 and PSR-630 consume a considerable

amount of power, Yamaha recommends the use of an AC power

adaptor rather than batteries. The batteries should be consid-

ered an auxiliary power source for data backup.

• The floppy disk drive, in particular, uses a large amount of

power, so it is important to always use an AC power adaptor

when performing disk-intensive operations such as song re-

cording/playback or data load/save. If you attempt to use

battery power for these operations and the batteries do fail, you

will lose not only the data you’re recording or saving, but also

other data in internal memory including user styles, user pads,

registration memory, etc.

• Taking the above precautions into consideration, always use an

AC power adaptor when using the PSR-630/730 for an impor-

tant performance or when creating important data.

• When using batteries and the “Lo Battery!!” warning initially

appears on the display, the volume will drop a little but you will

be able to use the instrument for a while longer. When the “Lo

Battery!!” warning begins to appear every few seconds, re-

place the batteries as soon as possible.

Setting Up

Connections

■ PHONES Jack

■ SUSTAIN Pedal Jack

• Be sure that you do not

press the footswitch while

turning the power on. If

you do, the ON/OFF sta-

tus of the footswitch will

be reversed.

• When the sustain or

sostenuto pedal func-

tions are being used

(page 117), some

voices may sound con-

tinuously or have a long

decay after the notes

have been released

while the pedal is held.

■ MIDI IN/OUT and TO HOST Connectors

See page 121.

SUSTAIN

■ AUX OUT R and L/L+R Jacks

• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

AUX OUT

L/L+R

Stereo

System

• Connecting PSR-

730/630 to external

equipment only after

turning off power for

all devices. To pre-

vent damage to the

speakers, set the

volume of the exter-

nal devices at the

minimum setting be-

fore connecting

them. Failure to ob-

serve these cautions

may result in elec-

tric shock or equip-

ment damage.

A standard pair of stereo headphones can be

plugged in here for private practice or late-night

playing. The internal stereo speaker system is

automatically shut off when a pair of head-

phones is plugged into the PHONES jack.

Do not listen with the headphones at high vol-

ume for long periods of time. Doing so may

cause hearing loss.

The sustain function causes the sound from a

depressed key to continue, even after the key is

released. Plug an optional Yamaha FC4 or FC5

footswitch into the sustain jack and use it to

switch sustain on and off. The footswitch con-

nected to this jack can also be set to replicate the

functions of some panel buttons, doing things

like starting and stopping accompaniment (page

117).

The rear-panel AUX OUT R and L/L+R jacks

deliver the output of the PSR-730/630 for con-

nection to a keyboard amplifier, stereo sound

system, a mixing console, or tape recorder. If

you will be connecting the PSR-730/630 to a

monaural sound system, use only the L/L+R

jack. When a plug is inserted into the L/L+R jack

only, the left- and right-channel signals are com-

bined and delivered via the L/L+R jack so you

don’t lose any of the PSR-730/630 sound. (Use

phone plugs).

■ FOOT VOLUME Jack

Connecting an optional Yamaha FC7 foot con-

troller lets you use your foot to change the

volume as you play the PSR-730/630 (expres-

sion function). The foot controller connected to

this jack can also be set to replicate the functions

of the main volume controls, such as accompani-

ment or song volume (page 117).

FOOT VOL

The Demonstration

Once you’ve set up your PSR-730/630, try listening to the pre-programmed demonstration

songs. A total of 15 demo songs are provided.

• You can either have all the

demo songs played continu-

ously, or have only one song

play (page 77).

STAND BY

MIN

MAX

MASTER

VOLUME

tTrumpet

DEMO

Switch ON

Turn the power ON by pressing the [STAND BY/ON] switch.

Set an Initial Volume Level

Turn the [MASTER VOLUME] control up (clockwise) about a quarter-turn

from its minimum position. You can re-adjust the [MASTER VOLUME]

control for the most comfortable overall volume level after playback begins.

Press the [DEMO] Button

Press the [DEMO] button to start demo playback. The PSR-730/630 SONG

menu will automatically be selected and the number and name of the first demo

song will appear on the top line of the display. The demo will begin playing

automatically. The demo songs will play in sequence, and the sequence will

repeat until stopped.

• If you play the PSR-730/630

with the volume at its maxi-

mum level when the batteries

are used, the life of the bat-

teries will be shorter.

• Even when the switch is in

the “STAND BY” position,

electricity is still flowing to

the instrument at the mini-

mum level. When you are

not using the PSR-730/630

for a long time, make sure

you unplug the AC power

adoptor from the wall AC

outlet, and/or remove the

batteries from the instru-

ment.

The Demonstration

• Stopping demo song

playback, then start-

ing it again by press-

ing the [START/

STOP] button will

cause demo song

playback to automati-

cally stop at the end

of that song.

• If the [DEMO] button

is pressed in Style

Mode (page 11), the

instrument will auto-

matically switch to

Song Mode (page 11).

dR&B

123

456

789

–

/ NO

/ YES

DEMO

START / STOP

Skip to the Beginning Of a Different Demo Song

While the demonstration is playing you can select any of the demo songs by

using the [–] and [+] buttons. Playback will skip to the beginning of the selected

song.

Stop When Done

Press the [DEMO] button or the [START/STOP] button to stop demo playback.

VOICEVOICEVOICE

R1R2

DUALSPLIT

VOICEVOICEVOICE

R1R2

DUALSPLIT

The PSR-730/630 actually includes two voice sets: the “panel” voices and percussion kits,

and the XG voices. The panel voices include 215 “pitched” voices (200 “pitched” voices for

PSR-630) and 12 drum kits, while the XG voice set includes 480 voices.

When an XG voice is selected, an XG icon

is displayed under the voice number at the top

of the display.

Playing the PSR-730/630

A Word About the “R1”, “R2”, and “L” Voices

PSR-730 PSR-630

Panel Voices Voice numbers 1-215 Voice numbers 1-200

Drum Kits Voice numbers 216-227 Voice numbers 201-212

XG Voices Voice numbers 228-707 Voice numbers 213-692

R1 Voice

R1 Voice + R2 Voice

R1 Voice

L Voice

R1 Voice + R2 Voice

L Voice

(Split Voice Mode + Dual Voice Mode)

The PSR-730/630 allows up to three voices to be selected at the same time: “R1”

(Right-hand 1), “R2”, (Right-hand 2) and “L” (Left-hand). The “R1” voice is the basic

voice of the PSR-730/630 and it’s used when you’re playing a single voice over the

entire range of the keyboard as with an acoustic piano. You can also have two voices

play together at the same time (R1 voice and R2 voice) or play different voices with

the right and left hands (R1 voice and L voice) (pages 19, 20). The numbers of the

currently selected R1, R2, and L voices are all shown at the lower right of on the

display panel. Normally, the R1 voice number is also shown at the upper right of the

display panel.

Choose a voice you like, and try it out!

• Refer to the panel voice list or XG voice list when selecting voices (page 133).

• See page 3 for information about XG.

The R1 (Right-hand 1), the R2 (Right-hand 2) and the L

(Left hand) voices are shown.

● Playing with a Single Voice

● Playing with Two Voices

(Dual Voice Mode m page 19).

●

Playing Separate Voices with the Right and Left Hands (Split Voice Mode m page 20)

VOICEVOICEVOICE

R1R2

DUALSPLIT

VOICEVOICEVOICE

R1R2

DUALSPLIT

VOICEVOICEVOICE

R1R2

DUALSPLIT

001109084

Playing the PSR-730/630

Selecting & Playing R1 Voices

Select the VOICE Menu

Press the [VOICE] button so that the triangular indicator appears in the display next

to “VOICE” to the right of the display. The number and name of the currently selected

“R1” voice appears on the top right of the display panel when the VOICE menu is

selected.

VOICE

001

nd Pianop1 Gra

Select a Panel Voice

The PSR-730/630 voices can be selected by using the [–] and [+] buttons, the

number buttons, the data dial, or the [VOICE] button.

● The [–] and [+] Buttons

When the VOICE menu is selected these buttons step up or down through the PSR-

730/630’s voices. Press either button briefly to step to the next voice in the

corresponding direction, or hold the button to scroll rapidly through the voices in

the corresponding direction.

● The Number Buttons

The number buttons can be used to directly enter the number of the desired voice,

thereby immediately selecting that voice without having to step through a number

of other voices. To select voice number 109, for example, press the [1], [0], and [9]

number buttons in sequence.

002

ghtPianop1 Bri

789

–

/ NO

/ YES

109

ingsp1 Str

123

456

789

–

/ NO 0

/ YES

* The above illustration shows the display of the PSR-730.

Playing the PSR-730/630

One- or two-digit voice numbers can be entered without leading zeros. To select

voice number “23”, for example, simply press the [2] button and then the [3] button.

The bars below the voice number on the display will flash for a few seconds, and

then disappear when the selected voice number has been recognized by the PSR-

730/630.

One- or two-digit voice numbers can also be entered with leading zeroes: e.g. “23”

can be entered as “023” by pressing the [0], [2], and [3] buttons. In this case the

specified voice number will be immediately recognized by the PSR-730/630.

● The [VOICE] Button

Pressing the [VOICE] button increments the voice number. Press briefly to

increment by one, or hold for continuous incrementing.

Play & Adjust Volume

You can now play the selected voice on the PSR-730/630 keyboard. Use the

[MASTER VOLUME] control to adjust the overall volume level.

If the Voice Set function (page 116) is turned “on”, whenever a panel voice is

selected appropriate “R2” and “L” voices (i.e. DUAL VOICE and SPLIT VOICE

modes) as well as digital effects, etc., will be automatically selected at the same time.

• When a XG voice is

selected the XG icon

will appear below the

voice number.

• Refer to page 133 for

a complete list of the

panel and XG voices.

● The Data Dial

Simply rotate the dial clockwise to increment the voice number, or counter-

clockwise to decrement the voice number.

023

ophonep1 Xyl

123

456

789

–

/ NO

/ YES

VOICE

MIN

MAX

MASTER

VOLUME

* The above illustration shows the display of

the PSR-730.

Playing the PSR-730/630

◆Keyboard Percussion

When one of the 12 panel DRUM KIT voices are selected you can play different

drums and percussion instruments on the keyboard. The drums and percussion

instruments played by the various keys are marked by symbols below the keys.

● The Drum Kits

PSR-730 PSR-630 Kit Name

216 201 Standard Kit1

217 202 Standard Kit2

218 203 Room Kit

219 204 Rock Kit

220 205 Electronic Kit

221 206 Analog Kit

PSR-730 PSR-630 Kit Name

222 207 Dance Kit

223 208 Jazz Kit

224 209 Brush Kit

225 210 Classic Kit

226 211 SFX Kit 1

227 212 SFX Kit 2

The Dual Voice Mode

When the DUAL VOICE mode is engaged you can play two voices (the R1 and R2

voices) simultaneously across the entire keyboard.

The DUAL VOICE mode is turned on and off by pressing the [DUAL VOICE]

button. When the DUAL VOICE mode is turned on both R1 and R2 icons in the display

will light. Press the [DUAL VOICE] button a second time to turn the DUAL VOICE

mode off: the R2 icon in the display will go out leaving only the R1 icon lit.

In the Syle mode, the R2 TRACK button below the display (second from the right)

can also be used to turn the R2 voice on or off as required.

• The HARMONY effect

(page 47) cannot be

turned on while a

drum kit is selected

for the “R1” voice, and

will automatically be

turned off if a drum kit

is selected while

HARMONY is on.

• The TRANSPOSE pa-

rameter (page 56) has

no effect on the drum

kit voices.

• See page 140 for a

complete listing of the

keyboard percussion

drum instrument as-

signments.

• The R1/R2 voice set-

tings (voice param-

eters) can be changed

as required by using

the REVOICE function,

described on page

110.

• The R1 voice cannot

be turned off.

• The DUAL VOICE

mode can be used at

the same time as the

SPLIT VOICE mode,

described below. In

this case the L voice is

played on the left-hand

section of the key-

board while both the

R1 and R2 voices are

played on the right-

hand section of the

keyboard. See the

“The Split Voice Mode”

section, below, for

more information.

216

.Kit1p1 Std

VOICE

VOICEVOICEVOICE

R1R2

DUALSPLIT

001109084

1614 15 16

R2 R1

VOICEVOICEVOICE

R1R2

DUALSPLIT

001109084

DUAL VOICE

* The above illustration shows the display of the PSR-730.

Playing the PSR-730/630

The Split Voice Mode

The SPLIT VOICE mode lets you play different voices with the left and right hands.

The “split point” forms a boundary on the keyboard with the R voice playing on the

right side, and the L voice on the left.

• The L voice settings

(voice parameters)

can be changed as

required by using the

REVOICE function,

described on page

110.

• The split point can be

changed as required

as described below.

Split Point

In the Syle mode, the L TRACK button below the display (third from the right) can

also be used to turn the L voice on or off as required.

The SPLIT VOICE mode is engaged by pressing the [SPLIT VOICE] button.

When turned on, the L icon in the display will light in addition to the R1 or R1 and R2

icons. Press the [SPLIT VOICE] button a second time to disengage the SPLIT VOICE

mode: the L icon will go out leaving only the R voice.

VOICEVOICEVOICE

R1R2

DUALSPLIT

001109084

1614 15 16

R2 R1

SPLIT VOICE

VOICEVOICEVOICE

R1R2

DUALSPLIT

001109084

Playing the PSR-730/630

Then use the SUB MENU [▲] and [▼] buttons to select the “Split Point” function

from within the OVERALL menu . The MIDI note number (see the bottom of the

keyboard) corresponding to the current split point will appear to the right of “Split

Point” on the top line of the display.

Changing the SPLIT VOICE Split Point

The SPLIT VOICE split point can be set to any key on the PSR-730/630 keyboard

to match your individual playing requirements.

Select the SPLIT VOICE Split Point Function

Use the MENU [▲] and [▼] buttons to the left of the display to move the triangular

indicator next to “OVERALL” on the left side of the display.

123

456

789

–

/ NO

/ YES

[ B2 ]nt: 59SplitPoi

GROOVE&DYNAMICS

MIDI

DIGITAL EFFECT

OVERALL

Set As Required

Simply press the key you want to assign as the split point. The key number of the

key you press will appear to the right of “SplitPoint” on the top line of the display. You

can also use the [–] and [+] buttons, number buttons, or data dial to enter the split point

key number. The lowest key on the keyboard (C1) is key number “36”, middle C (C3)

is “60”, and the highest key (C5) is 96. The split point can be set at any key number

from 0 through 127, allowing the split point to be set outside the range of the PSR-730/

630 keyboard for MIDI applications.

• The split point key be-

comes the highest

key in the left-hand

section of the key-

board.

• The default split point

(54 for PSR-730 and

59 for PSR-630) can

be instantly recalled

by pressing the [–]

and [+] buttons at the

same time.

• For the relationship

between the SPLIT

VOICE split point and

the AUTO ACCOM-

PANIMENT split

point, see page 31.

• When setting the split

point, that is, the sub

menu “SplitPoint” is

shown on the display,

pressing the key on

the keyboard doesn’t

either produce notes

or detect chords in the

accompaniment sec-

tion, but only desig-

nates the split point.

Auto Accompaniment

The PSR-730/630 has 100 different accompaniment “styles” from every musical type that can

be used to provide fully-orchestrated or rhythm-only accompaniment. Just select one of the

many styles available and play along.

Using Auto Accompaniment

Select a Style

Press the [STYLE] button to select the STYLE menu (the triangular indicator will

appear next to “STYLE” to the right of the display). The number and name of the

currently selected style will appear on the top left of the display, and the

STYLE

icon will light, indicating that the PSR-730/630 is in Style Mode.

What is Auto Accompaniment?

AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT

split point (54)

“auto accompaniment”

section

With the Auto Accompaniment feature, all you have to do is play the chords in your

song and the accompaniment style that matches your music will automatically play

along following the same chord progression. Using Auto Accompaniment, even a

solo performer can enjoy playing with an entire band or orchestra backing them up.

● When Auto Accompaniment is turned on...

The specified left-hand section of the keyboard becomes the “Auto Accompa-

niment” section, and chords played in this section are automatically detected

and used as a basis for fully automatic accompaniment with the selected style.

• The default setting for

the Auto Accompani-

ment split point is [54]

(the Auto Accompani-

ment sections ex-

tends to the left of key

[54]). To change the

Auto Accompaniment

split point, see page

30.

ACCOMPANIMENT TRACK

SONG TRACK

R2 R1

REPEAT

ACMP VOICEVOICEVOICERHYTHM

BASS CHORD

CHORD

PAD PHRASE

PHRASE

FINGERING m M

augsus

dim

RHYTHM

R1R2

REVERB HARMONYCHORUS DSP SYNC STOP

ONE TOUCH

SETTING

MELODY

REGISTRATION MULTI PAD

BEAT

GROOVE & DYNAMICS

TEMPO

TRANSPOSE

MEASURE

MEMORY

12345678910111213141516

213

1234

FREEZE

VOICE

DUALSPLIT

DISK

STYLE

SONG

ACMP/SONG

VOLUME

MULTI

EFFECT

DIGITAL EQ

001

100

116

000

001109084888888888888888362324407339337355219219

nd Pianop1 Gra8Beat Po

001

119

513

VARIATION

VOICE

STYLE

SONG

VOICE

STYLE

SONG

Auto Accompaniment

Find the style you want by referring to the style list (page 142), then pressing the [1]–

[0] number buttons, enter the 1-3 digits of its style number.

• Just like the voice

numbers, when se-

lecting 1 or 2 digit

style numbers, if you

add [0] at the begin-

ning and enter a 3

digit number, it will be

immediately recog-

nized. For example, to

select style number

“95” (Polka) press

buttons [0], [9], [5] in

sequence.

Turn AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT On

Press the AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT [ON/OFF] so that its indicator lights.

• If AUTO ACCOMPA-

NIMENT is off (not lit),

only rhythm (drums

and percussion) ac-

companiment will be

produced.

• For information about

the accompaniment

tracks, see page 28.

Example: Select style number “24” (Dance Pop 2)

Press number buttons [2], [4] in sequence.

You can also change style numbers using the [+], [–] buttons or the Data Dial. Also you

can increment the style number by pressing the [STYLE] button. Press briefly to

increment by one, or hold for continuous incrementing.

Start the Accompaniment

There are several ways to start the accompaniment:

p2Dance Po

024

123

456

789

–

/ NO

/ YES

ACCOMPANIMENT

ON / OFF

789

–

/ NO

+ / YES

STYLE

• It is possible to select

the MAIN A or B sec-

tion prior to a straight

start — refer to “7.

Select the MAIN A

and B Sections as

Required,” below.

● Straight start

Press the [START/STOP] button. The rhythm will begin playing immediately

without bass and chord accompaniment. The currently selected MAIN [A] or [B]

section will play.

AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT

SYNC STOP START

INTRO

MAIN / AUTO FILL

ENDING

START / STOP

● Start with an introduction followed by the MAIN A section

Press the [INTRO] button so that its indicator lights, press the MAIN/AUTO

FILL [A] button (not necessary if its indicator is already flashing), then press

[START/STOP].

● Start with an introduction followed by the MAIN B section

Press the [INTRO] button so that its indicator lights, press the MAIN/AUTO

FILL [B] button (not necessary if its indicator is already flashing), then press

[START/STOP].

● Synchronized start

Any of the above start types can be synchronized to the first note or chord

played on the left-hand section of the keyboard (i.e. keys to the left of and

including the split-point key — normally 54) by first pressing the [SYNC

START] button.

• If you press the [SYNC

START] button while the

accompaniment is playing,

the accompaniment will

stop and the synchro start

mode will be engaged.

• The [INTRO] button can be

used to select the INTRO

section even while the ac-

companiment is playing.

• The accompaniment split

point can be changed via

the “Accompaniment Split

Point” function in the

OVERALL menu — see

page 30.

Pressing the [SYNC START] button alone causes a straight start to occur

when the first note or chord is played. Press the [SYNC START] button and

then the appropriate [INTRO] and [MAIN/AUTO FILL] buttons for a

synchronized introduction start. The BEAT indicator will flash at the current

tempo when a synchronized start mode has been selected. The synchro start

mode can be disengaged prior to actually starting the accompaniment by

pressing the [SYNC START] button a second time.

• When the AUTO ACCOM-

PANIMENT split point and

SPLIT VOICE split point are

set at different keys, the L

voice can be played be-

tween the AUTO ACCOM-

PANIMENT split point and

SPLIT VOICE split point

when the AUTO ACCOM-

PANIMENT function is on.

• When the AUTO ACCOM-

PANIMENT split point and

SPLIT VOICE split point are

set to the same key, the L

voice can be played any-

where to the left of the

AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT

split point and SPLIT

VOICE split point while

AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT

is not playing.

MENT

SYNC STOP START

INTRO

MAIN / AUTO FILL

ENDING

START / STOP

MENT

SYNC STOP START

INTRO

MAIN / AUTO FILL

ENDING

START / STOP

IMENT

SYNC STOP START

INTRO

MAIN / AUTO FILL

ENDING

MENT

SYNC STOP START

INTRO

MAIN / AUTO FILL

ENDING

Auto Accompaniment

Play the Melody with the Accompaniment

As soon as you play any chord that the PSR-730/630 can “recognize” on the left-

hand section of the keyboard, the PSR-730/630 will automatically begin to play the

chord along with the selected rhythm and an appropriate bass line. The name of the

current chord will appear on the display.

The chord will be recognized according to the rules set in the Fingering Mode.

• For the method for entering chords, see page 32 “Auto Accompaniment Fingering Modes.”

The Auto Accompaniment will continue playing even if the left hand releases the

keys. As you press each chord in the song, you can play the melody along with the

accompaniment.

• When the Fingering Mode

is set for “Single Finger,”

“Fingered 1,” “Fingered 2,”

or “Multi-Finger,” playing a

chord in the auto accom-

paniment section while

the rhythm is stopped will

cause Bass + Chord to be

played (for all styles).

However, when the Auto

Accompaniment split point

and the Split Voice split

point are the same key,

playing a chord in the ac-

companiment section with

the rhythm stopped will

cause Bass + L voice to

be played.

FINGERING mM

augsus

dim

MULTI PAD

GROOVE & DYNAMICS

1234

VOICE

119

513

Changing Accompaniment Sections

You can vary the song by pressing [INTRO], MAIN/AUTO FILL [A]/[B] or

[ENDING] buttons and changing to a different accompaniment section (page 27).

Try pressing the different buttons and see what happens.

Stop the Accompaniment

Press the [START/STOP] button to stop the accompaniment.

If you want to stop after playing the ending, press the [ENDING] button.

The accompaniment will stop after playing the ending .

• The ending will begin

playing immediately when

you press the ENDING

button while the accompa-

niment is playing the first

beat of the measure.

The ending will begin

playing from the next

measure when you press

the button while the ac-

companiment is playing

the second or larger num-

bered beat.

• If you press the INTRO

button while the ending is

playing, the intro section

will begin playing after the

ending is finished.

• If you press a MAIN/

AUTO FILL (A,B) button

while the ending is play-

ing, fill-in accompaniment

will immediately start play-

ing, continuing with the

main section.

• If you press the SYNC

START while an accom-

paniment is playing, the

accompaniment will stop

and the PSR-730/630 will

enter Synchronized Start

standby status.

INTRO

MAIN / AUTO FILL

ENDING

START / STOP

ENDING

Auto Accompaniment

4/4 time 3/4 time

1st beat

2nd beat

3rd beat

4th beat

◆ The Beat Indicator

When Auto Accompaniment or song playback is started, the four dots of the BEAT

indicator provide a visual indication of the selected tempo as shown below.

REPEAT

ONE TOUCH

SETTING

TEMPO

100

116

116Tempo:

001

TEMPO

◆ Changing Tempo

You can change the tempo for accompaniment or song playback.

When you select a different style while the accompaniment is not playing, the

“default” tempo for that style is also selected, and the tempo is displayed immediately

above “TEMPO” in the display in quarter-note beats per minute. If the accompaniment

is playing, the same tempo is maintained even if you select a different style.

You can change the tempo to any value between 32 and 280 beats per minute,

however, by using the TEMPO [▼] and [▲] buttons. Press either button briefly to

decrement or increment the tempo value by one, or hold the button for continuous

decrementing or incrementing.

When either of the TEMPO buttons is pressed the current tempo value will appear

on the top line of the display for a few seconds — during this time the [–] and [+]

buttons, number buttons, or data dial can also be used to set the tempo. The default

tempo for the selected style can be recalled at any time by pressing both the TEMPO

[▼] and [▲] buttons simultaneously (or by pressing the [–] and [+] buttons simulta-

neously while the tempo value is showing on the top line of the display).

◆ Accompaniment Sections

There are 8 types of Auto Accompaniment sections that allow you to vary the

arrangement of the accompaniment to match the song you are playing. They are:

Intro, Main A and B, Fill-in (AA, AB, BA, BB) and Ending. By switching between

them while playing you can put together a single song.

● INTRO Section

This is the beginning of the song. When the intro finishes playing, accompa-

niment shifts to the main section.

● MAIN Section

There are two variations that can play in the main section of the song: A and

B. The Auto Accompaniment will automatically play following along with the

chords that you play.

● FILL-IN Section

Fill-in livens up pauses in the song. Whenever you press the MAIN/AUTO

FILL [A] or [B] button during accompaniment, the PSR-730/630 will generate

an appropriate “fill-in” (one of four types: AA, AB, BA, and BB) which will

smoothly connect the current section to the selected section — even if it is the

same section.

● ENDING Section

This is the ending portion of the song. When the ending is finished, Auto

Accompaniment will stop.

• The MAIN A section is

automatically selected

whenever the PSR-730/

630 power is initially

turned on.

• The indicator of the desti-

nation section (MAIN A

or B) will flash while the

corresponding fill-in is

playing. During this time

you can change the des-

tination section by press-

ing the appropriate

MAIN/AUTO FILL [A] or

[B] button.

• You can use the intro

section even in the

middle of the song by

pressing the INTRO but-

ton during the song.

• If the MAIN/AUTO FILL

A/B button is pressed af-

ter the final half beat

(eighth note) of the mea-

sure, fill-in will begin from

the next measure.

• You can begin the ac-

companiment by using

the ending instead of the

intro section.

INTRO

MAIN / AUTO FILL

ENDING

Auto Accompaniment

◆ The Synchro Stop Function

When the Synchro Stop function is engaged, accompaniment playback will stop

completely when all keys in the auto-accompaniment section of the keyboard are

released. Accompaniment playback will start again as soon as a chord is played.

The BEAT indicators in the display will flash while the accompaneiment is

stopped.

The Synchro Stop function is engaged by pressing the [SYNC STOP] button

so that the SYNC STOP icon in the display appears. Press the [SYNC STOP]

button again so that the icon disappears to turn the Synchro Stop function off.

• The Synchro Stop

function can not be

turned on when the

FULL KEYBOARD

AUTO ACCOMPANI-

MENT fingering mode

is selected. The Syn-

chro Stop function will

be automatically

turned off if the FULL

KEYBOARD fingering

mode is selected while

the Synchro Stop func-

tion is on.

◆ Accompaniment Track Muting

The PSR-730/630 has eight accompaniment tracks — RHYTHM 1, RHYTHM 2,

BASS, CHORD 1, CHORD 2, PAD, PHRASE 1, and PHRASE 2 — that you can

control to modify the “orchestration” and therefore the overall sound of the accompa-

niment. When a style is selected the icons corresponding to the tracks which contain

data for any section of that style will light.

● What’s in the Tracks

RHYTHM 1 & 2 These are the main rhythm tracks. The RHYTHM

tracks produce the drum and percussion sounds.

BASS The BASS track always plays a bass line, but the

voice will change to fit the selected style … acoustic

bass, synth bass, tuba, etc.

CHORD 1 & 2 These tracks provide the rhythmic chordal accom-

paniment required by each style. You’ll find guitar,

piano, and other chordal instruments here.

PAD This track plays long chords where necessary, using

sustained instruments such as strings, organ, choir.

PHRASE 1 & 2 This is where the musical embellishments reside.

The PHRASE tracks are used for punchy brass

stabs, arpeggiated chords, and other extras that

make the accompaniment more interesting.

• Individual track voic-

es, volume, and

other parameters

can be changed by

using the REVOICE

function — page

112.

Individual accompaniment tracks can be turned OFF (muted) or ON by pressing the

TRACK buttons corresponding to the target tracks. The track icon will disappear

when a track is muted. By turning the tracks OFF and ON in different combinations,

you can create various arrangements from a single accompaniment style.

ACCOMPANIMENT TRACK

RHYTHM

BASS CHORD

CHORD

PAD PHRASE

PHRASE

RHYTHM

12345678

347324407324322340219219

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

FINGERING m M

augsus

dim

SYNC STOP

ONE TOUCH

SETTING

MULTI PAD

BEAT

GROOVE & DYNAMICS

MEASURE

MEMORY

1234

FREEZE

VOICE

001

nd Pianop1 Gra

119

513

AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT

SYNC STOP START

Auto Accompaniment

Accompaniment Volume Control

The volume of the accompaniment in relation to the keyboard can be adjusted for

the best overall balance by using the ACMP/SONG VOLUME [▼] and [▲] buttons.

When either button is pressed the current accompaniment volume setting will appear

on the top line of the display for a few seconds.

The accompaniment volume range is from “0” (no sound) to “127” (maximum

volume). The default setting is “100”. Press the ACMP/SONG VOLUME [▼] button

to decrease the volume or the [▲] button to increase the volume. Press the button

briefly to single step, or hold to continuously decrement or increment.

Using Virtual Arranger

When the Virtual Arranger function is turned on while Auto Accompaniment is

active, simply pressing chords in the auto accompaniment section causes the Auto

Accompaniment to automatically play slightly different chord variations, which

creates a livelier and more melodic accompaniment. Turning the Virtual Arranger

function off returns to normal Auto Accompaniment.

Press the [STYLE] button to select the STYLE menu. The triangular indicator will

appear next to “STYLE” to the right of the display, and the PSR-730/630 will enter

Style Mode (the

STYLE

icon will light).

Change the on/off status using the [+], [–] buttons or the Data Dial.

• While the accompani-

ment volume setting

appears on the top

line of the display the

[–] and [+] buttons,

number buttons, or

Data Dial can also be

used to set the ac-

companiment volume.

REPEAT

ONE TOUCH

SETTING

TEMPO

100

116

me: 100AcmpVolu

001

TRANSPOSE

STYLE

ACMP/SONG

VOLUME

000

ACMP / SONG

VOLUME

Auto Accompaniment

• Simultaneously press-

ing the [SYNC STOP]

and [SYNC START]

buttons causes the

Virtual Arranger to

switch between off

and on. The current

on/off status will be

shown at the top right

of the display. (The

on/off display will re-

turn to its original con-

dition after a few sec-

onds.)

SUB MENU

er: OffV.Arrang

When Style Mode is selected with the Style Menu (the

STYLE

icon is lit), the

on/off setting of the Virtual Arranger can be changed with the Sub Menu. Select the

“V.Arranger” sub menu using the SUB MENU [▼], [▲] keys. The current on/off

status will be shown at the top right of the display.

STYLE

Changing the Accompaniment Split Point

The AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT split point (the boundary point between the

melody section and accompaniment section) can be set to any key on the PSR-730/630

keyboard to match your individual playing requirements.

Select the Accompaniment Split Point Function

Use the MENU [▲] and [▼] buttons to the left of the display to move the triangular

indicator next to “OVERALL” on the left side of the display.

Then use the SUB MENU [▲] and [▼] buttons to select the “AcmpSplit” function

from within the OVERALL menu . The MIDI note number corresponding to the

current split point will appear to the right of “AcmpSplit” on the top line of the display.

Set As Required

Simply press the key you want to assign as the split point. The key number of the

key you press will appear to the right of “AcmpSplit” on the top line of the display. You

can also use the [–] and [+] buttons, number buttons, or Data Dial to enter the split point

key number. The split point can be set at any key number from 0 through 127.

• The split point key be-

comes the highest

key in the Auto Ac-

companiment section

of the keyboard.

• When setting the split

point, that is, the sub

menu “AcmpSplit” is

shown on the display,

pressing the key on

the keyboard doesn’t

either produce notes

or detect chords in the

accompaniment sec-

tion, but only desig-

nates the split point.

GROOVE&DYNAMICS

MIDI

DIGITAL EFFECT

OVERALL

[F#2 ]t: 54AcmpSpli

123

456

789

–

/ NO

/ YES

Auto Accompaniment

R Voice

L Voice

Accompaniment

R Voice

Accompaniment/

L Voice

The Auto Accompaniment Fingering Modes

The PSR-730/630 AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT feature has five different fingering

modes which can be selected as follows.

Select the Fingering Mode Function

Use the MENU [▲] and [▼] buttons to the left of the display to move the triangular

indicator next to “OVERALL” on the left side of the display.

• You can jump directly

to the “FingerMode”

function by pressing

and holding the AUTO

ACCOMPANIMENT

[ON/OFF] button for a

few seconds.

GROOVE&DYNAMICS

MIDI

DIGITAL EFFECT

OVERALL

Auto Accompaniment

◆Interaction Between the AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT and

SPLIT VOICE Split Points

The SPLIT VOICE split point (page 21) and AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT split point

can be independently specified, with the following limitations. The SPLIT VOICE

split point cannot be set at a lower key than the AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT split point

(if you attempt to do this the AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT split point will be set to the

same key as the SPLIT VOICE split point). Conversely, the AUTO ACCOMPANI-

MENT split point cannot be set at a higher key than the SPLIT VOICE split point (if

you attempt to do this the SPLIT VOICE split point will be set to the same key as the

AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT split point).

AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT

split point

SPLIT VOICE

split point

AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT split point/

SPLIT VOICE split point

Then use the SUB MENU [▲] and [▼] buttons to select the “FingerMode” function

from within the OVERALL menu. The abbreviated name of the current fingering

mode will appear to the right of “FingerMode” on the top line of the display.

Select the Required Fingering Mode

Use the [–] and [+] buttons or Data Dial to select the desired fingering mode:

● The SINGLE FINGER Mode

● Single (Single Finger)

● Fingered 1

● Fingered 2

● Full Key

(Full Keyboard)

● Multi (Multi-finger)

■ For a major chord, press the root key only.

■ For a minor chord, simultaneously press the root key

and a black key to its left.

■ For a seventh chord, simultaneously press the root

key and a white key to its left.

■ For a minor-seventh chord, simultaneously press the

root key and both a white and black key to its left.

Single-finger accompaniment makes it simple to produce beautifully orchestrated

accompaniment using major, seventh, minor and minor-seventh chords by pressing

a minimum number of keys on the AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT section of the

keyboard. The abbreviated chord fingerings described below are used:

• The default Fingering

Mode is “Multi”.

Root Key Diagram

tide: MulFingerMo

glede: SinFingerMo

Auto Accompaniment

CDEFGABCDEF

CE FAB CE F

#b #bb #b #

Auto Accompaniment

Split Point [54]

Accompaniment

Section

● The FINGERED 1 Mode

The Fingered 1 mode lets you finger your own chords on the AUTO ACCOMPA-

NIMENT section of the keyboard (i.e. all keys to the left of and including the split-

point key — normally 54) while the PSR-730/630 supplies appropriately orches-

trated rhythm, bass, and chord accompaniment in the selected style.

The FINGERED 1 mode recognizes the following chords:

• Notes in parentheses

can be omitted.

• If you play any three

adjacent keys (includ-

ing black keys), the

chord sound will be

canceled and only the

rhythm instruments

will continue playing

(CHORD CANCEL

function).

• Playing a single key

or two same root keys

in the adjacent oc-

taves produces ac-

companiment based

only on the root.

• A perfect fifth (1 + 5)

produces accompani-

ment based only on

the root and fifth

which can be used

with both major and

minor chords.

• The chord fingerings

listed are all in “root”

position, but other in-

versions can be used

— with the following

exceptions:

m7, m7

5, 6, m6,

sus4, aug, dim7,

5, 6(9), m7(11),

1+2+5.

• Inversion of the 7sus4

chord is not recog-

nized if the 5th is

omitted.

• The AUTO ACCOM-

PANIMENT will some-

times not change

when related chords

are played in se-

quence (e.g. some

minor chords followed

by the minor seventh).

• Two-note fingerings

will produce a chord

based on the previ-

ously played chord.

Chord Name/[Abbreviation] Normal Voicing

Major [M] 1 - 3 - 5

Add ninth [(9)] 1 - 2 - 3 - 5

Sixth [6] 1 - (3) - 5 - 6

Sixth ninth [6(9)] 1 - 2 - 3 - (5) - 6

Major seventh [M7] 1 - 3 - (5) - 7 or

1 - (3) - 5 - 7

Major seventh ninth [M7(9)] 1 - 2 - 3 - (5) - 7

Major seventh add sharp eleventh [M7(#11)] 1 - (2) - 3 - #4 - 5 - 7 or

1 - 2 - 3 - #4 - (5) - 7

Flatted fifth [(b5)] 1 - 3 - b5

Major seventh flatted fifth [M7b5] 1 - 3 - b5 - 7

Suspended fourth [sus4] 1 - 4 - 5

Augmented [aug] 1 - 3 - #5

Major seventh augmented [M7aug] 1 - (3) - #5 - 7

Minor [m] 1 - b3 - 5

Minor add ninth [m(9)] 1 - 2 - b3 - 5

Minor sixth [m6] 1 - b3 - 5 - 6

Minor seventh [m7] 1 - b3 - (5) - b7

Minor seventh ninth [m7(9)] 1 - 2 - b3 - (5) - b7

Minor seventh eleventh [m7(11)] 1 - (2) - b3 - 4 - 5 - (b7)

Minor major seventh [mM7] 1 - b3 - (5) - 7

Minor major seventh ninth [mM7(9)] 1 - 2 - b3 - (5) - 7

Minor seventh flatted fifth [m7b5] 1 - b3 - b5 - b7

Minor major seventh flatted fifth [mM7b5] 1 - b3 - b5 - 7

Diminished [dim] 1 - b3 - b5

Diminished seventh [dim7] 1 - b3 - b5 - 6

Seventh [7] 1 - 3 - (5) - b7 or

1 - (3) - 5 - b7

Seventh flatted ninth [7(b9)] 1 - b2 - 3 - (5) - b7

Seventh add flatted thirteenth [7(b13)] 1 - 3 - 5 - b6 - b7

Seventh ninth [7(9)] 1 - 2 - 3 - (5) - b7

Seventh add sharp eleventh [7(#11)] 1 - (2) - 3 - #4 - 5 - b7 or

1 - 2 - 3 - #4 - (5) - b7

Seventh add thirteenth [7(13)] 1 - 3 - (5) - 6 - b7

Seventh sharp ninth [7(#9)] 1 - #2 - 3 - (5) - b7

Seventh flatted fifth [7b5] 1 - 3 - b5 - b7

Seventh augmented [7aug] 1 - 3 - #5 - b7

Seventh suspended fourth [7sus4] 1 - 4 - (5) - b7

One plus two plus five [1+2+5] 1 - 2 - 5

Chord (C) Display

C(9) C(9)

C6 C6

C6(9) C6(9)

CM7 CM7

CM7(9) CM7(9)

CM7(#11) CM7(#11)

C(b5) C(b5)

CM7b5 CM7(b5)

Csus4 Csus4

Caug Caug

CM7aug CM7aug

Cm Cm

Cm(9) Cm(9)

Cm6 Cm6

Cm7 Cm7

Cm7(9) Cm7(9)

Cm7(11) Cm7(11)

CmM7 CmM7

CmM7(9) CmM7(9)

Cm7b5 Cm7(b5)

CmM7b5 CmM7(b5)

Cdim Cdim

Cdim7 Cdim7

C7 C7

C7(b9) C7(b9)

C7(b13) C7(b13)

C7(9) C7(9)

C7(#11) C7(#11)

C7(13) C7(13)

C7(#9) C7(#9)

C7b5C7b5

C7aug C7aug

C7sus4 C7sus4

C1+2+5 C

gered 1de: FinFingerMo

Auto Accompaniment

( )

(9)

( )

(9)

Caug

( )

CmM

( )

(9)

CmM

( )

CmM

(9)

( )

Cdim

(9)

( )

(13)

( )

(b9)

( )

(b13)

Csus

1+2+5

( )

(9)

(#11)

( )

(b5)

( )

(

#11)

(#9)

( )

C aug

(11)

( )

CM aug

( )

C sus

( )

● The FINGERED 2 Mode

This is essentially the same as the FINGERED 1 mode, described above, except

that the FINGERED 2 mode additionally allows you to specify the lowest note

of each chord — simply, the lowest note played in the AUTO ACCOMPANI-

MENT section of the keyboard is used as the accompaniment bass note. This

means you can specify “on-bass” chords in which the main bass note for the

chord is not the root of the chord. For a C major chord, for example, you could

use E (the third) or G (the fifth) as the bass note rather than C.

C C on E C on G

Example for “C” chords

● The FULL KEYBOARD Mode (Full Key)

When the FULL KEYBOARD Mode is selected, the PSR-730/630 will auto-

matically create appropriate accompaniment while you play just about anything

using both hands, anywhere on the keyboard. You do not have to worry about

specifying the accompaniment chords. The name of the detected chord will

appear in the display.

• When the FULL KEY-

BOARD mode is se-

lected, the split point set-

ting (see page 30) for the

auto accompaniment will

be ignored.

• Chord detection occurs

at approximately 8th-note

intervals. Extremely short

chords — less than an

8th note in length — may

not be detected.

gered 2de: FinFingerMo

l Keyde: FulFingerMo

Auto Accompaniment

◆ The Stop Accompaniment Function

While the SINGLE FINGER, FINGERED 1, FINGERED 2, or MULTI-FIN-

GER mode is selected chords played in the AUTO ACCOMPNIMENT section of

the keyboard are also detected and played by the PSR-730/630 Auto Accompani-

ment system when the accompaniment is stopped (except when the FULL KEY-

BOARD mode is engaged). In this case the bass note and chord voices are selected

automatically.

• When the AUTO AC-

COMPANIMENT split

point and SPLIT

VOICE split point are

set to the same key,

the L voice and the

automatically selected

bass note will sound.

● The MULTI-FINGER Mode (Multi)

This is the default accompaniment mode. The MULTI-FINGER mode auto-

matically detects SINGLE FINGER or FINGERED 1 chord fingerings, so you

can use either type of fingering without having to switch fingering modes.

Groove and Dynamics (PSR-730)

The PSR-730 Groove & Dynamics function lets you temporarily change the

timing, velocity and gate time of notes during playback of any of the preset

accompaniment styles (style numbers 1-100).

● Groove .......... Lets you play the music with some swing or put a little groove

in the beat by making subtle shifts in the timing (clock) of the

accompaniment.

● Dynamics...... Changes the impression of the accompaniment by varying the

velocity of the notes in relation to the timing.

The Groove & Dynamics function is composed of the four items below. When you

choose an accompaniment style, the most appropriate template or value for each

item will be automatically set.

• Beat Groove Template (Automatically selected from 49 types)

• Measure Groove Template (Automatically selected from 25 types)

• Dynamics Template (Automatically selected from 17 types)

• Dynamics Rate (Automatically set within a range of 0-100%)

• Expand Rate (Automatically set within a range of 0-400%)

• Boost Rate (Automatically set within a range of 0-400%)

tide: MulFingerMo

Auto Accompaniment

• If you want to play minor,

seventh or minor seventh

chords using the SINGLE

FINGER operation in the

MULTI-FINGER Mode, al-

ways press the closest

white/black key(s) to the

root of the chord.

■ Applying Groove & Dynamics

When you press the [GROOVE & DYNAMICS] button, the GROOVE & DYNAM-

ICS icon will light, and the Groove & Dynamics effect will be applied to the

accompaniment.

■ Arranging the Groove & Dynamics Effect (User Settings)

You can arrange any of the Groove & Dynamics settings (Beat Groove Template,

Measure Groove Template, Dynamics Template, Dynamics Rate, Expand Rate or

Boost Rate) that have been preset for each accompaniment style, and apply any kind

of effect you want.

Use the MENU [s] and [t] buttons to the left of the display to move the triangular

indicator next to “GROOVE & DYNAMICS” on the left side of the display.

Referring to the “Beat Groove Template List” below, use the [+], [–] buttons or the

Data Dial to select one of the 49 template types.

● Select the Beat Groove Template

Use the SUB MENU [s] and [t] buttons to select the “BeatGroove” function from

within the GROOVE & DYNAMICS menu. The name of the currently selected

Beat Groove Template will appear on the right of the top line of the display.

001

nd Pianop1 Gra

GROOVE & DYNAMICS

VOICE

GROOVE&DYNAMICS

MIDI

DIGITAL EFFECT

OVERALL

SUB MENU

ve: ThruBeatGroo

Auto Accompaniment

Beat Groove Template List

The templates in this list shift the timing of the accompaniments by beats.

These templates add lifelike effect to your accompaniments by converting a specific beat to

another and slightly shifting the converted beat.

Name: Indicates each template name.

No.1"Thru” (No.1) adds no effect as its name implies.

Targeted Beat: Beats to be converted.

8 = Eighth note

12 = Eighth note triplet

16 = 16th note

24 = 16th note triplet

Converted Beat: Converted results.

For example, selecting one of the templates, 12-17 (16 as Targeted Beat and 8 as Converted

Beat), indicates every 16th note will be converted to eighth notes.

Swing: Delays the timing of the converted beat. There are six types: A

(Min.), B, C, D, E (Max.) and off (no effect).

No.

Name

Targeted Converted Swing

Beat Beat

1 Thru 8 off off

2 8_off_A 8 off A

3 8_off_B 8 off B

4 8_off_C 8 off C

5 8_off_D 8 off D

6 8_off_E 8 off E

7 16_off_A 16 off A

8 16_off_B 16 off B

9 16_off_C 16 off C

10 16_off_D 16 off D

11 16_off_E 16 off E

12 16_16to8_off 16 8 off

13 16_16to8_A 16 8 A

14 16_16to8_B 16 8 B

15 16_16to8_C 16 8 C

16 16_16to8_D 16 8 D

17 16_16to8_E 16 8 E

18 16_16to12_off 16 12 off

19 12_12to8_off 12 8 off

20 12_12to8_A 12 8 A

21 12_12to8_B 12 8 B

22 12_12to8_C 12 8 C

23 12_12to8_D 12 8 D

24 12_12to8_E 12 8 E

25 12_12to16A_off 12 16A off

No.

Name

Targeted Converted Swing

Beat Beat

26 12_12to16A_A 12 16A A

27 12_12to16A_B 12 16A B

28 12_12to16A_C 12 16A C

29 12_12to16A_D 12 16A D

30 12_12to16A_E 12 16A E

31 12_12to16B_off 12 16B off

32 12_12to16B_A 12 16B A

33 12_12to16B_B 12 16B B

34 12_12to16B_C 12 16B C

35 12_12to16B_D 12 16B D

36 12_12to16B_E 12 16B E

37 24_24to8_off 24 8 off

38 24_24to8_A 24 8 A

39 24_24to8_B 24 8 B

40 24_24to8_C 24 8 C

41 24_24to8_D 24 8 D

42 24_24to8_E 24 8 E

43 24_24to16_off 24 16 off

44 24_24to16_A 24 16 A

45 24_24to16_B 24 16 B

46 24_24to16_C 24 16 C

47 24_24to16_D 24 16 D

48 24_24to16_E 24 16 E

49 24_24to12_off 24 12 off

Referring to the “Measure Groove Template List” below, use the [+], [–] buttons

or the Data Dial to select one of the 25 template types.

● Select the Measure Groove Template

Use the SUB MENU [s] and [t] buttons to select the “MeasGroove” function

from within the GROOVE & DYNAMICS menu. The name of the currently

selected Measure Groove Template will appear on the right of the top line of the

display.

ve: ThruMeasGroo

● Select the Dynamics Template

Use the SUB MENU [s] and [t] buttons to select the “Dynamics” function from

within the GROOVE & DYNAMICS menu. The name of the currently selected

Dynamics Template will appear on the right of the top line of the display.

Referring to the “Dynamics Template List” below, use the [+], [–] buttons or the

Data Dial to select one of the 17 template types.

: ThruDynamics

Auto Accompaniment

No. Name Time Signature

1 Thru -

2 2_PushA 2

3 2_PushB 2

4 2_PushC 2

5 2_HeavyA 2

6 2_HeavyB 2

7 2_HeavyC 2

8 3_PushA 3

9 3_PushB 3

No. Name Time Signature

10 3_PushC 3

11 3_HeavyA 3

12 3_HeavyB 3

13 3_HeavyC 3

14 4_PushA 4

15 4_PushB 4

16 4_PushC 4

17 4_HeavyA 4

No. Name Time Signature

18 4_HeavyB 4

19 4_HeavyC 4

20 5_PushA 5

21 5_PushB 5

22 5_PushC 5

23 5_HeavyA 5

24 5_HeavyB 5

25 5_HeavyC 5

Dynamics Template List

The templates in this list strengthen or weaken the notes on a specific timing. The stress

degree can be determined by changing the Dynamics Rate.

Name: Indicates each template name.

No.1"Thru” (No.1) adds no effect as its name implies.

The templates from No.7 to No.17 are programmed to put an emphasis on a specific timing.

Measure Groove Template List

The templates in this list shift the timing of the accompaniments by measures. These

templates add lifelike effect to your accompaniments by hastening or delaying the timing of

the first beat of every measure.

Name: Indicates each template name and content.

No.1"Thru” (No.1) adds no effect as its name implies.

“Push” in the template names indicates those templates hasten the timing.

“Heavy” indicates the templates delay the timing. The suffixes “A”, “B” and

“C” indicate min., med. and max., respectively.

Time Signature: Indicates the appropriate time signatures for you to use.

Be sure to match the time signature here to your song.

● Set the Expand Rate

The Expand Rate widens or narrows the dynamic range of the Accompaniment

within the range, 0-100 (original)-400%.

Use the SUB MENU [s] and [t] buttons to select the “ExpandRate” function

from within the GROOVE & DYNAMICS menu. The currently set Expand Rate

value will appear on the right of the top line of the display.

Use the [1]–[0] number buttons, the [+], [–] buttons or the Data Dial to set the

Expand Rate value within a range of 0-400%.

te: 100%ExpandRa

Auto Accompaniment

No. Name

1 Thru

2 8beat_on

3 8beat_off

4 16beat_on

5 16beat_off

6 2nd Beat_Off

7 Dance

8 Disco

9 Techno

10 Fusion

11 Reggae

12 BossaNova

13 Tango

14 Rhumba Bass

15 Rhumba Chord

16 Latin

17 Samba

● Set the Dynamics Rate

The Dynamics Rate sets the amount of the Dynamics template applied to the PSR-

730/630 within the range, 0-100%.

Use the SUB MENU [s] and [t] buttons to select the “DynamcsRate” function

from within the GROOVE & DYNAMICS menu. The currently set Dynamics Rate

value will appear on the right of the top line of the display.

Use the [1]–[0] number buttons, the [+], [–] buttons or the Data Dial to set the

Dynamics Rate value within a range of 0-100%.

ate:100%DynamcsR

• Though Expand Rate

can be adjusted by a

rate of 1 in 100, the

rate actually applied

will be rounded down

to nearest 10. For ex-

ample, the rates 1

through 9 result in 0,

no effect. The rates

29 and 53 result in 20

and 50, respectively.

When using the Reg-

istration Memory func-

tion, the result rate

will be memorized.

● Set the Boost Rate

The Boost Rate strengthens or weakens the Accompaniment by offsetting the velocity

value of the Style data, within the range, 0-100 (original)-400%.

Use the SUB MENU [s] and [t] buttons to select the “BoostRate” function from

within the GROOVE & DYNAMICS menu. The currently set Boost Rate value will

appear on the right of the top line of the display.

Use the [1]–[0] number buttons, the [+], [–] buttons or the Data Dial to set the Boost

Rate value within a range of 0-400%.

• You can jump directly

to the “BeatGroove”

sub menu of the

GROOVE & DYNAM-

ICS menu (Beat

Groove Template se-

lection screen) by

pressing and holding

the GROOVE & DY-

NAMICS button for a

few seconds.

• User settings will be

lost when another ac-

companiment style is

selected. To be able

to recall your original

settings anytime, save

them using the Regis-

tration Memory func-

tion (page 57).

• Though Boost Rate

can be adjusted by a

rate of 1 in 100, the

rate actually applied

will be rounded down

to nearest 10. For ex-

ample, the rates 1

through 9 result in 0,

no effect. The rates

29 and 53 result in 20

and 50, respectively.

When using the Reg-

istration Memory func-

tion, the result rate

will be memorized.

One Touch Setting

The PSR-730/630’s 100 internal styles each have four recommended “panel setups”

that can be instantly selected via the [ONE TOUCH SETTING] and REGISTRA-

TION MEMORY [1] … [4] buttons. The One Touch Setting feature automatically sets

the following parameters:

● One Touch Setting Parameter List

• R1 Voice

(Voice number, volume, octave, pan, reverb depth,

chorus depth, DSP depth)

• Dual Voice ON/OFF

• R2 Voice

(Voice number, volume, octave, pan, reverb depth,

chorus depth, DSP depth)

• Split Voice ON/OFF

• L Voice

(Voice number, volume, octave, pan, reverb depth,

chorus depth, DSP depth)

• Split Point : Split Voice=54

: Auto Accompaniment=54

• Auto Accompaniment=ON

• Main A/B section

• Accompaniment Track=ON

• Synchro start=ON

• Accompaniment volume=100

• Harmony ON/OFF, type, volume

• Reverb ON/OFF

• Chorus ON/OFF

• DSP ON/OFF, type, variation ON/OFF

• Multi Pad Set number

• Chord Match ON/OFF=Default (Multi Pad1…4)

e: 100%BoostRat

Auto Accompaniment

Select a Style

Select the STYLE menu and select an accompaniment style as described on page

22.

Press the [ONE TOUCH SETTING] Button

Press the [ONE TOUCH SETTING] button. The ONE TOUCH SETTING and

REGIST [1] icons will appear in the display, and the One Touch Setting type 1 panel

settings will be recalled. At the same, Auto Accompaniment will automatically be

turned on if it was off, and the Sync Start mode will be engaged.

Turn ONE TOUCH SETTING Off When Done

Press the [ONE TOUCH SETTING] button again and the ONE TOUCH SET-

TING icon in the display will disappear and the One Touch Setting feature will turn

off.

• If the style is changed

when One Touch Set-

ting is on, the panel

settings appropriate to

the selected style that

have the same One

Touch Setting number

will immediately be

set.

• You can also try

changing the estab-

lished One Touch

Setting data, making

your own original set-

tings. To be able to

recall your original

settings anytime, save

them using the Regis-

tration Memory func-

tion (page 57).

• If you press ONE

TOUCH SETTING

buttons [1]–[4] when a

user style is selected,

the voice data won’t

be changed, but the

style data will change

to the user style set-

tings (values).

Select a ONE TOUCH SETTING Type, as Required

If you want to select a different REGISTRATION MEMORY, use the REGISTRA-

TION MEMORY buttons to select the desired ONE TOUCH SETTING type. The

corresponding number will appear in the display, and all setting will change according

to the recalled data.

REPEAT

ONE TOUCH

SETTING

REGISTRATION MEMORY

213

FREEZE

ONE TOUCH SETTING

1234

REGISTRATION MEMORY

REPEAT

ONE TOUCH

SETTING

REGISTRATION MEMORY

213

FREEZE

Auto Accompaniment

Digital Effects

With the digital effects built into the PSR-730/630 you can add ambiance and depth to your

music in a variety of ways—such as adding reverb that makes you sound like you are playing

in a concert hall or adding harmony notes for a full, rich sound

With the PSR-730, you can take advantage of even more sophisticated features like the Multi

Effect function that lets apply several effects together or the Digital Equalizer that lets you

adjust volume for each of 5 frequency bands.

Digital Effects

REVERB Button You can create a reverb effect that makes you sound like

you are playing in places like a concert hall, or live in a

club.

CHORUS Button You can add a chorus effect that makes your playing

sound as though multiple parts were being played to-

gether at the same time.

DSP Button In addition to the reverb and chorus types, the effects

usually used to a specific part, such as the distortion and

tremolo, can be selected.

PSR-730

MULTI-EFFECT Button You can apply reverb, chorus or DSP effects to particular

parts, or combine them together.

PSR-730

DIGITAL EQ Button You can apply volume adjustments to the output of the

PSR-730, to five different frequency bands, enhancing

the impression your music gives.

HARMONY Button You can add a variety of harmony notes to the R1 voice,

or to your playing in the right-hand section, as well as

adding an tremolo or other effect.

• For details about using Digital Effects (Reverb, Chorus, DSP, Multi-Effect, Digital Equalizer) see page 143.

REVERB

CHORUS

DSP

VARIATION

MULTI EFFECT

DIGITAL EQ

HARMONY

Then use the SUB MENU [▲] and [▼] buttons to select “Reverb”. The name of

the currently selected Reverb type will appear on the right of the top line of the

display.

Referring to the Reverb Type List on page 145, use the [–] and [+] buttons, [1]–[0]

number buttons, or Data Dial to select the desired Reverb effect from 1-13.

Digital Effects

■ Selecting a Reverb Type

Select one of the 13 Reverb types.

Use the MENU [▲] and [▼] buttons to move the triangular indicator in the

display next to “DIGITAL EFFECT”.

• You can also jump directly

to the DIGITAL EFFECT

REVERB TYPE function

by pressing and holding

the [REVERB] button for a

few seconds.

Reverb

If you press the [REVERB] button, the REVERB icon will light up, and the

Reverb effect will be turned on. After setting the Reverb type, the effect will be

applied to the R1 voice from the keyboard.

• The REVERB ON/OFF

status will be set auto-

matically according to the

selected R1 panel voice.

• When you select a differ-

ent Style, the appropriate

Reverb type will be se-

lected accordingly. Some

of the Styles contain Re-

verb types which cannot

be selected on the PSR-

730/630. In this case “XG

Reverb” will be displayed

when you select the SUB

MENU Reverb of the

DIGITAL EFFECT.

• If you don’t want to apply

the Reverb effect to Styles

or Songs, select “13:

OFF” from the Reverb

types, or set the Reverb

Return Level to [0]. In ei-

ther case no Reverb will

be applied to the entire

system. If you use the

Revoice function, you can

set the Reverb Depth for

each track of the Style in-

dependently (see page

110).

■ Reverb Return Level

The Rev.Return (Reverb Return Level) parameter sets the amount of reverb

effect returned from the reverb effect stage, thus making it possible to adjust the

degree of reverb effect applied to the overall sound.

Use the [–] and [+] buttons, the [1]–[0] number buttons, or Data Dial to set the

desired reverb return level (the current return level value appears to the right of

“Rev.Return” on the display). The range is from “0” to “127”. The higher the value

the greater the return level.

REVERB

REVERB CHORUS DSP

VARIATION

GROOVE&DYNAMICS

MIDI

DIGITAL EFFECT

OVERALL

SUB MENU

8 RooReverb: m 4

rn: 64Rev.Retu

Use the MENU [▲] and [▼] buttons to move the triangular indicator in the

display next to “DIGITAL EFFECT”, then use the SUB MENU [▲] and [▼]

buttons to select “Rev.Return”. The currently set return level will be displayed on

the right of the top line of the display.

■ Chorus Return Level

The Cho.Return (Chorus Return Level) parameter sets the amount of

chorus effect returned from the chorus effect stage, thus making it possible to

adjust the degree of chorus effect applied to the overall sound.

Use the MENU [▲] and [▼] buttons to move the triangular indicator in the

display next to “DIGITAL EFFECT”, then use the SUB MENU [▲] and [▼]

buttons to select “Cho.Return”.

Digital Effects

Use the [–] and [+] buttons, the [1]–[0] number buttons, or Data Dial to set

the desired chorus return level (the current return level value appears to the

right of “Cho.Return” on the display). The range is from “0” to “127”. The

higher the value the greater the return level.

Then use the SUB MENU [▲] and [▼] buttons to select “Chorus”. The

name of the currently selected Chorus type will appear on the right of the top

line of the display.

Referring to the Chorus Type List on page 145, use the [–] and [+] buttons, the

[1]–[0] number buttons, or Data Dial to select the desired Chorus effect from

1-10.

• When you select a different

Style, the appropriate Chorus

type will be selected accordingly.

Some of the Styles contain Cho-

rus types which cannot be se-

lected on the PSR-730/630. In

this case “XG Chorus” will be

displayed when you select the

SUB MENU Chorus of the DIGI-

TAL EFFECT.

• If you don’t want to apply the

Chorus effect to Styles or Songs,

select “10: OFF” from the Chorus

types, or set the Chorus Return

Level to [0]. In either case no

Chorus will be applied to the en-

tire system. If you use the

Revoice function, you can set

the Chorus Depth for each track

of the Style independently (see

page 110).

SUB MENU

1 ChoChorus: rus 1

rn: 64Cho.Retu

■ Selecting a Chorus Type

Select one of the 10 Chorus types.

Use the MENU [▲] and [▼] buttons to move the triangular indicator in the

display next to “DIGITAL EFFECT”.

• You can also jump directly to the

DIGITAL EFFECT Chorus func-

tion by pressing and holding the

[CHORUS] button for a few sec-

onds.

GROOVE&DYNAMICS

MIDI

DIGITAL EFFECT

OVERALL

Chorus

If you press the [CHORUS] button, the CHORUS icon will light up, and

the Chorus effect will be turned on. After setting the Chorus type, the effect

will be applied to the R1 voice from the keyboard.

• The CHORUS ON/OFF status

will be set automatically accord-

ing to the selected R1 panel

voice.

CHORUS

REVERB CHORUS DSP

VARIATION

Digital Effects

DSP

If you press the [DSP] button, the DSP icon will light up, and the DSP effect will

be turned on. After setting the DSP type, the effect will be applied when you play the

R1, R2 and L voice from the keyboard.

● System Effect:

Applies to all of the parts input to the mixer. You can set the DSP Depth and DSP

Return Level. The System Effect includes Reverb and Chorus types.

● Insertion Effect:

Applies only to a designated part before inputting the signal to the mixer. You can

effectively use the digital effects by applying the effect to the specific part. With

the Insertion Effect, you can only designate the DSP Depth. The Insertion Effect

includes Distortion and Tremolo.

Insertion Effect System Effect

Amp

Mixer

Speaker

(See page 143, “About Digital Effects” and the Type List)

• The DSP effect and

variation settings may

change according to

the selected R1 panel

voice.

• You can also jump di-

rectly to the DIGITAL

EFFECT DSP func-

tion by pressing and

holding the [DSP] but-

ton for a few seconds.

■ Select the DSP Type

The PSR-730/630 features an extensive range of 46 DSP (Digital Signal Processor)

effects. There are two types of digital effects, system effects and insertion effects. The

illustration below will give you an idea of how DSP effects work, centering on the

mixer.

DSP

VARIATION

REVERB CHORUS DSP

VARIATION

(Depth)

RETURNSEND

• DSP Depth cannot be

modified for some In-

sertion effects. In this

case the display

shows “- - -”, indicat-

ing that it’s not acces-

sible.

Digital Effects

■ DSP Return Level

The DSP Return (DSP Return Level) parameter sets the amount of DSP effect

returned from the DSP effect stage, thus making it possible to adjust the degree of DSP

effect applied to the overall sound.

Use the MENU [▲] and [▼] buttons to move the triangular indicator in the display

next to “DIGITAL EFFECT”, then use the SUB MENU [▲] and [▼] buttons to select

“DSP Return” (the current return level value appears to the right of “DSP Return” on

the display).

Use the [–] and [+] buttons, the [1]–[0]number buttons, or Data Dial to set the

desired DSP return level. The range is from “0” to “127”. The higher the value the

greater the return level.

Referring to the DSP Type List on page 145, use the [–] and [+] buttons, the [1]–

[0] number buttons, or Data Dial to select the desired DSP effect from 1-46

For each DSP type, there is a variation. Pressing the DSP VARIATION button will

cause the VARIATION icon to display, and the variation type will be applied.

Use the MENU [▲] and [▼] buttons to move the triangular indicator in the display

next to “DIGITAL EFFECT”.

Then use the SUB MENU [▲] and [▼] buttons to select “DSP”. After a few seconds

the name of the currently selected DSP effect will appear on the right of the top line

of the display.

• If DSP Insertion Effect

is selected (page

145), you won’t be

able to set the DSP

Return Level. In this

case, “- - -” will be

shown on the display.

• When the Voice Set

function is ON (page

116), selecting the

panel voice for the R1

voice will reset the

DSP Return level to

64 (fixed at 64).

SUB MENU

10 StaDSP: ge 2

DSP

VARIATION

REVERB CHORUS DSP

VARIATION

rn: 64DSP Retu

• Harmony can not be

turned on when a drum kit

is selected for the R1

voice.

• Harmony can not be

turned on when the Full

Keyboard Auto accompa-

niment fingering mode is

selected even if Auto Ac-

companiment is on. Har-

mony will be automatically

turned off if the Full Key-

board fingering mode is

selected while the Har-

mony effect is on.

• If a drum kit voice is se-

lected for R1 when Har-

mony is turned on, Har-

mony will be automatically

be turned off.

Digital Effects

■ Selecting a Harmony Type

Select one of the 16 Harmony types. There are various harmony effects,

depending on the Harmony type, with some adding a number of higher notes to the

note of the pressed key, and some adding a number of lower notes.

Harmony

If you press the [HARMONY] button, the HARMONY icon will light up, and

the Harmony effect will be turned on. After setting the Harmony type, it will be

applied to the R1 voice.

The Harmonies except for the types 6, 7 and 9 are applied to the R1 voice

according to the chords detected in the Accompaniment section.

Use the MENU [▲] and [▼] buttons to move the triangular indicator in the

display next to “DIGITAL EFFECT”.

Then use the SUB MENU [▲] and [▼] buttons to select “Harmony”. The name

of the currently selected Harmony type will appear on the right of the top line of

the display.

Referring to the Harmony Type List on page 147, use the [–] and [+] buttons, the

[1]–[0] number buttons, or Data Dial to select the desired Harmony effect from 1-

16.

• When the Voice Set func-

tion is ON (see page 116),

the HARMONY type may

change according to the

selected R1 panel voice.

HARMONY

CHORUS DSP

VARIATION

HARMONY

GROOVE&DYNAMICS

MIDI

DIGITAL EFFECT

OVERALL

SUB MENU

1 DueHarmony: t

• You can also jump directly

to the DIGITAL EFFECT

HARMONY TYPE function

by pressing and holding

the [HARMONY] button

for a few seconds.

■ Adjusting the Harmony Volume

The volume of the harmony sound in relation to the keyboard sound can be adjusted

for Harmony types 1 through 16 as follows:

Use the MENU [▲] and [▼] buttons to move the triangular indicator in the display

next to “DIGITAL EFFECT”, then use the SUB MENU [▲] and [▼] buttons to select

“Harm.Vol”. The current harmony volume setting will appear to the right of “Harm.Vol”

on the display.

Use the [–] and [+] buttons, the [1]–[0] number buttons, or Data Dial to adjust the

harmony volume as required. The range is from “0” to “127”.

• When the Voice Set

function is ON (see

page 116), the Har-

mony Volume may

change according to

the selected R1 panel

voice.

• Changing the volume

of the harmony sound

may not produce au-

dible effect for some

R1 voices (ex. organ

sounds) when you se-

lect Harmony types 1

through 6.

Multi Effect (PSR-730)

• By adding Multi-Effect

to Reverb, Chorus

and DSP, the PSR-

730 can have up to 5

system effects.

• Since Multi-Effect is

installed closer to the

tone generator than

Reverb, Chorus or

DSP, it can function

as an insertion effect.

See page 143, “About

Digital Effects.”

Multi Effect allows you to apply three types of effects (reverb, chorus and DSP) more

powerfully and effectively.

■ How Multi Effect Works

With Multi Effect, you can combine 2 effects (Effect 1/2) and apply them to the output

from the keyboard (R1/R2/L parts).

There are 2 ways to combine the effects; in series or in parallel.

Example 1) Applying Effects 1 and 2 to separate parts (parallel)

Example 2) Applying Effects 1 and 2 to a single part (series)

Digital Effects

: 127Harm.Vol

Part

Effect1 In

Effect 2

Left

Effect1

Effect2 In Effect2

Part

Right1

Dist. Hard

Rotary SP.4

Part

Effect1 In

Effect 2

Effect1

Effect2 In Effect2

Right1

Auto Pan

Auto Wah

Pressing the [MULTI EFFECT] button will cause the Multi Effect icon to light on the

display. After making part settings for Effect 1/2 and type settings, the Multi Effect

will be applied.

Applying Multi Effect (PSR-730)

• The MULTI EFFECT

ON/OFF status will be

set automatically ac-

cording to the se-

lected R1 panel voice.

• Some of the song files

may contain Multi Ef-

fect settings. When

you play back such

songs, Multi Effect

button on the panel

will automatically be

turned off.

■ Setting Parts for Effect 1/2

Select a part each for Effect 1 and Effect 2

● Effect 1 ...... Select Right 1 (R1 part), Right 2 (R2 part), Left (L part) .

● Effect 2 ...... Right 1 (R1 part), Right 2 (R2 part), Left (L part) or Effect 1

(Effect 1 in series).

Use the MENU [▲] and [▼] buttons to move the triangular indicator in the display

next to “DIGITAL EFFECT”.

• You can jump directly

to the “Effect1 IN” sub

menu of the DIGITAL

EFFECTS menu by

pressing and holding

the MULTI-EFFECT

button for a few sec-

onds.

• The Effect 1/2 part

settings may auto-

matically change ac-

cording to the se-

lected R1 panel voice.

• “- - -” may appear on

the display if you play

back the songs con-

taining Multi Effect

settings.

Then use the SUB MENU [▲] and [▼] buttons to select “Effect1 In” or “Effect2

In”. The name of the currently selected part will appear on the right of the top line of

the display.

Use the [–] and [+] buttons or Data Dial to select the part you want to apply the effect

to.

Digital Effects

MULTI EFFECT

MULTI

EFFECT

DIGITAL EQ

GROOVE&DYNAMICS

MIDI

DIGITAL EFFECT

OVERALL

In; RigEffect1 ht 1

In; LefEffect2 t

■ Select the Effect Type for Effect 1/2

Select one of the 42 effect types for Effect 1 and Effect 2

Use the MENU [▼] and [▲] buttons to move the triangular indicator in the display

next to “DIGITAL EFFECT”. The icon for “DIGITAL EFFECT” will light.

Then use the SUB MENU [▼] and [▲] buttons to select “Effect1” or “Effect2”. The

name of the currently selected type will appear on the right of the top line of the

display.

Referring to the Multi-Effect Type List on page 146, use the [–] and [+] buttons, [1]–

[0] number buttons, or Data Dial to select the desired effect type.

• The Effect 1/2 type

settings may automati-

cally change when a

panel voice is selected

for R1.

• “** XG Ins Eff” may ap-

pear on the display if

you play back the

songs containing Multi

Effect settings.

■ Adjust the Dry/Wet Settings for Effect 1/2

Set the Dry/Wet settings for Effect 1 and Effect 2

Dry refers to an original sound that has no effects applied to it, while Wet means that

effects are applied to a sound. Dry/Wet is a setting value that regulates the level of

effects that are applied.

● Dry/Wet [0]............Only dry sound is output.

● Dry/Wet [64] .........Output with the same amount of the dry/wet sounds.

● Dry/Wet [127].......Only wet sound is output.

Use the MENU [▼] and [▲] buttons to move the triangular indicator in the display

next to “DIGITAL EFFECT”. The icon for “DIGITAL EFFECT” will light.

Then use the SUB MENU [▼] and [▲] buttons to select “Eff1 Dry/Wet” or “Eff2

Dry/Wet”. The currently set Dry/Wet value will appear on the right of the top line of

the display.

Use the [–] and [+] buttons, the [1]–[0] number buttons, or Data Dial to select the

Dry/Wet value within a range of 0-127.

• The dry/wet settings

cannot be done for

some of the Effect 1/2

types. In that case, “-

- -” will be displayed.

• The Dry/Wet settings

for Effect 1/2 may au-

tomatically change

when a panel voice is

selected for R1.

Digital Effects

01 HalEffect1: l 1

18 FlaEffect2: nger 1

Wet: 64Eff1Dry/ 

Wet: 48Eff2Dry/ 

The Digital Equalizer (PSR-730)

Usually an equalizer is used to correct the sound output from amps or speakers to

match the special character of the room. The sound is divided into several frequency

bands, then by raising or lowering the level for each band, the correction is made.

Adjusting the sound you play according to the genre—classical music more refined,

pops music more crisp, and rock music more dynamic—can also serve to draw out the

special characteristics of the music and make your performance more enjoyable.

The PSR-730 possesses a high grade 5 band digital equalizer function. With this

function, a final effect—tone control—can be added to the output of your instrument.

Example) 04 (Bright)

If you press the [DIGITAL EQ] button, the DIGITAL EQ icon will light up, and

the Digital EQ effect will be turned on. After setting the Digital EQ type, the equalizer

effect will be applied to the overall output of the PSR-730.

Using the Digital Equalizer (PSR-730)

Frequency Bands (5 bands)

LowGain 80 Hz

LowMidGain 500 Hz

MidGain 1.0 kHz

HighMidGain 4.0 kHz

HighGain 8.0 kHz

The digital equalizer adjusts the gain (amplitude change) in each of the 5 frequency

bands within a range of -12 to 0 to +12 decibels [dB]. Try listening to each of the five

preset equalizer settings and compare them.

Digital Effects

LowGain

+12

+7 -2 0 +2 +7

-12

LowMidGain MidGain HighMidGain HighGain

DIGITAL EQ

MULTI

EFFECT

DIGITAL EQ

• The range of each fre-

quency band can be

changed by transmit-

ting the system exclu-

sive message from an

external MIDI device

to the PSR-730/630

(see page 156).

■ Selecting a Digital EQ Type.

Select one of the 5 Digital EQ types.

Use the MENU [▼] and [▲] buttons to move the triangular indicator in the display

next to “DIGITAL EFFECT”.

• You can jump directly

to the “Digital EQ” sub

menu of the DIGITAL

EFFECTS menu by

pressing and holding

the DIGITAL EQ but-

ton for a few seconds.

Then use the SUB MENU [▼] and [▲] buttons to select “EQ Type”. The name of

the currently selected Digital EQ type will appear on the right of the top line of the

display.

Referring to the Equalizer Type List below, use the [–] and [+] buttons, the [1]–[5]

number buttons, or Data Dial to select the desired equalizer type.

05 Lo Fi

● Equalizer Type List

Digital Effects

GROOVE&DYNAMICS

MIDI

DIGITAL EFFECT

OVERALL

SUB MENU

04 BriEQ Type: ght

01 Standard

02 Disco

03 Mild

04 Bright

LowGain

+12

+3 0 -1 0 +5

-12

LowMidGain MidGain HighMidGain HighGain

LowGain

+12

+7 -2 -1 +2 +7

-12

LowMidGain MidGain HighMidGain HighGain

LowGain

+12

+2 +2 -2 -5 0

-12

LowMidGain MidGain HighMidGain HighGain

LowGain

+12

+7 -2 0 +2 +7

-12

LowMidGain MidGain HighMidGain HighGain

LowGain

+12

-12

-3 +10 -2

-10

-12

LowMidGain MidGain HighMidGain HighGain

■ Setting the Gain (User Setting)

You can change the settings for any of the 5 preset equalizer types, adjusting the output

to meet your own needs.

Select the equalizer type you wish to use as a base for your settings, then use the

SUB MENU [▼] and [▲] buttons to select “LowGain”.The current LowGain value for

the type you selected will be shown on the right of the upper line of the display.

Use the [–] and [+] buttons, the [1]–[0] number buttons, or Data Dial to set the

LowGain amplitude change within a range of -12 to 0 to +12 decibels [dB].

Switch to each of the other bands: “LowMidGain,” “MidGain,” “HighMidGain,”

and “HighGain”, and set them in the same way as the “LowGain.”

After finishing the gain settings, use the SUB MENU [▼] and [▲] buttons to select

“EQ Type”. “** User” will appear on the right of the top line of the display.

Digital Effects

** UseEQ Type: r

+ 4LowGain:

Use the PSR-730/630 pitch bend wheel to bend notes up (roll the wheel away from you) or

down (roll the wheel toward you) while playing the keyboard. The pitch bend wheel is self-

centering and will automatically return to nornal pitch when released.

Setting the Pitch Bend Range

The maximum pitch bend range can be set via the PITCH BEND RANGE function

in the OVERALL function group. Use the MENU [▼] and [▲] buttons to move the

triangular indicator in the display next to “OVERALL”.

The Pitch Bend Wheel

Then use the SUB MENU [▼] and [▲] buttons to select “PB Range”. The current

pitch bend range setting will appear to the right of the function name on the top line

of the display. Use the [–] and [+] buttons, the [1]–[0] number buttons, or Data Dial

to set the pitch bend range from “01” to “12” as required. Each increment corresponds

to one semitone.

• When the Voice Set

function is ON (page

116), the Pitch Bend

Range will be

changed according to

the selected R1 panel

voice.

• The default pitch bend

range can be instantly

recalled by pressing

the [+] and [–] buttons

simultaneously.

PITCH BEND

: 2PB Range

GROOVE&DYNAMICS

MIDI

DIGITAL EFFECT

OVERALL

The Modulation function applies a vibrato effect to notes played on the keyboard (R1, R2, L

voices). Rolling the MODULATION wheel all the way towards yourself minimizes the depth

of the effect, while rotating it away from yourself increases it.

Changing the Modulation Wheel Function

The Modulation Wheel (PSR-730)

It’s possible to change the effect that is applied when you rotate the MODULA-

TION Wheel. You can select from 3 types: modulation, brightness or resonance

● Modulation...........Applies vibrato effects to the voices from the keyboard.

● Brightness ...........Adjusts the brightness of the R1 voice played on the keyboard.

Increasing the depth makes the sound brighter, while decreas-

ing it makes it softer.

● Resonance...........Adds resonance to the R1 voices played on the keyboard.

Use the MENU [▼] and [▲] buttons to move the triangular indicator in the display

next to “OVERALL”.

Then use the SUB MENU [▼] and [▲] buttons to select “ModWheel”. The effect

currently set for the modulation wheel will appear to the right of the top line of the

display.

• In order to avoid acci-

dentally applying

modulation when you

don’t intend to, set the

depth at its minimum

setting.

• You can also assign

other functions to the

MODULATION Wheel

(see below).

Referring to the information above, use the [–] and [+] buttons or the Data Dial to

select one of the 3 effects.

MODULATION

MAX

MIN

: ModulationModWheel

Transpose

Setting Transposition

• The Transpose func-

tion cannot be applied

when a drum kit is the

selected voice (page

19).

• Press the TRANS-

POSE [

▼

] and [

▲

]

buttons simulta-

neously to instantly

reset the transpose

value to “0”.

• The new TRANS-

POSE value will take

effect from the next

key played.

• When the Transpose

value is shown at the

top of the display, you

can use the [1]–[0]

number keys, the

[+],[–] buttons or the

Data Dial to change it.

REPEAT

ONE TOUCH

SETTING

TEMPO

100

116

e: 0Transpos

001

TRANSPOSE

STYLE

ACMP/SONG

VOLUME

000

TRANSPOSE

This functions allow the overall pitch of the PSR-730/630 to be transposed up or down by a

maximum of one octave in semitone increments.

Use the TRANSPOSE [▼] and [▲] buttons to set the desired degree of transposi-

tion. Press either button briefly to decrement or increment by one, or hold for

continuous decrementing or incrementing. The current transpose value will appear on

the top line of the display for a few seconds whenever one of the TRANSPOSE buttons

is pressed — during this time the [–] and [+] buttons, number buttons, or data dial can

also be used to set the transpose value (the transpose value also appears continuously

above “TRANSPOSE” in the display).

The transpose range is from –12 to +12. Each step corresponds to one semitone,

allowing a maximum upward or downward transposition of 1-octave. A setting of “0”

produces the normal pitch.

Registration Memory

The PSR-730/630 Registration Memory feature can be used to memorize 128 complete

control-panel setups (32 banks, 4 setups each) that you can recall whenever needed.

Set Up the Controls as Required

Make the desired control settings. The following settings are memorized by the

Registration Memory function:

Registering the Panel Settings

VOICE PARAMETERS

• Split Point (Split Voice)

• Touch Sensitivity

• Reverb ON/OFF

• Chorus ON/OFF

• DSP ON/OFF, variation

ON/OFF

• DSP type

• Multi Effect (ON/OFF,

Effect 1/2: part, type, dry/

wet)

• Harmony ON/OFF, type,

volume

• Pitch bend range

• Modulation wheel

function

• Scale Tuning

● Data Stored By the Registration Memory

ACCOMPANIMENT PARAMETERS

• Transpose

• Reverb type

• Chorus type

• Groove & Dynamics (ON/

OFF, templates, rates)

• Style number (Style

names [page 104] for the

user styles)

• R1 Voice (Voice number,

volume, octave, pan, reverb

depth, chorus depth, DSP

depth)

• Dual Voice ON/OFF

• R2 Voice (Voice number,

volume, octave, pan, reverb

depth, chorus depth, DSP

depth)

• Split Voice ON/OFF

• L Voice (Voice number,

volume, octave, pan, reverb

depth, chorus depth, DSP

depth)

• Pedal 1 function

• Pedal 2 function

• Auto Accompaniment ON/OFF

• Fingering mode

• Tempo

• Split point

(Auto Accompaniment)

• Accompaniment volume

• Track data (Track ON/OFF,

voice, volume, pan, reverb

depth, chorus depth)

• Accompaniment section (Main

A/B)

• Multi Pad Set number

• Chord Match ON/OFF (Multi

Pad1…4)

Select a Registration Bank (if necessary)

Use the MENU [▲] and [▼] buttons to move the triangular indicator next to

“REGIST MEMORY “ in the menu list to the left of the display — the currently

selected registration bank number and name will appear on the top line of the display.

Then use the [–] and [+] buttons, [1]–[0] number buttons, or Data Dial to select the

desired bank (1 through 32).

• Press and hold the

REGISTRATION

MEMORY [MEMORY]

button for a few sec-

onds to go directly to

the REGIST

MEMORY display.

ist1 RegBank 01:

• The PSR-730/630’s initial Registration Memory [1]–[4] settings (when it shipped from the

factory) are the same panel settings as when the power switch is first turned on.

While holding the [MEMORY] button, press one of the REGISTRATION

MEMORY buttons — [1] through [4]. The corresponding REGISTRATION MEMORY

number will appear below “REGISTRATION” in the display.

• Any data that was

previously recorded in

the Registration

Memory location you

selected will be

erased and replaced

by the new settings.

• The Registration

Memory contents will

be retained even after

turning the power off.

See page 152 for the

details.

On the PSR-730, there are BANK [▼] and [▲] buttons. Pressing these buttons will

directly bring up the registration bank sub menu (example: Bank 1) of the “Regist

Memory”, main menu item, and all you have to do is add the correct number.

Registration Memory

BANK

MEMORY

REGISTRATION MEMORY

You can give your own names (up to 8 characters) to the registration banks where

you have stored settings.

After recalling the registration settings you wish to name, use the MENU [▲] and

[▼] buttons to move the triangular indicator next to “REGIST MEMORY“ in the menu

list to the left of the display.

Then use the SUB MENU [▲] and [▼] buttons to select “Reg Naming”. The current

name will appear on the top right of the display.

Naming the Registration Banks

ist1ng: Reg

Reg Nami

1234

MEMORY

REGISTRATION MEMORY

REPEAT

ONE TOUCH

SETTING

REGISTRATION MEMORY

213

FREEZE

ist1 RegBank 01:

Referring to the information below, use the [1]–[0] number buttons, the [+], [–]

buttons or the Data Dial to enter the name.

[+].................. Select letter (cursor moves right)

[–].................. Select letter (cursor moves left)

Dial ............... Change Character

[1]–[0]........... ”Jump” entry

[Character List]

• When entering letters with the Dial

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V

W X Y Z - –

• When doing “jump” entry with the [1]–[0] number buttons

[1].......... 1 A B C

[2].......... 2 D E F

[3].......... 3 G H I

[4].......... 4 J K L

[5].......... 5 M N O

[6].......... 6 P Q R

[7].......... 7 S T U

[8].......... 8 V W X

[9].......... 9 Y Z @

[0].......... 0 - –

• Lower case letters

can’t be entered with

the naming function.

The same method can be used to give your own names to user songs (page 94), user

pads (page 109), or user styles (page 104).

E 01ng: LIV

Reg Nami

Registration Memory

Recall the Registered Panel Settings

• Registration data can-

not be recalled when

the One Touch Set-

ting function is on.

• When power is turned

on, or the bank is

changed, all of the

numbers in the REG-

ISTRATION

MEMORY section of

the display will be

blank.

The Accompanient Freeze Function

When the FREEZE function is engaged, the accompaniment parameters listed

above will not be changed when a REGISTRATION MEMORY is recalled. This

allows you to recall different REGISTRATION MEMORY settings while using Auto

Accompaniment, without suddenly disturbing the flow of the accompaniment. The

FREEZE function is turned on and off by pressing the [FREEZE] button. The

“FREEZE” icon appears in the display when it is turned on.

• FREEZE remains on

even if a different reg-

istration bank is se-

lected.

• The Freeze function

will automatically be

turned on when one

of the following

modes, Song, Record

or Style Revoice, is

engaged.

1234

REGISTRATION MEMORY

REPEAT

ONE TOUCH

SETTING

REGISTRATION MEMORY

213

FREEZE

ist3 RegBank 03:

MORY

REPEAT

ONE TOUCH

SETTING

REGISTRATION MEMORY

213

FREEZE

Simply select the appropriate bank as described above, then press the desired

REGISTRATION MEMORY button at any time to recall the memorized settings. The

corresponding Registration Memory number will appear above “REGISTRATION”

in the display, and the appropriate setting changes will appear in the display.

The Multi Pads

The PSR-730/630 MULTI PADS can be used to play a number of short pre-recorded rhythmic

and melodic sequences that can be used to add impact and variety to your keyboard

performances. You can also record your own MULTI PAD phrases as described in “MULTI PAD

Recording” on page 106.

Some pad phrases simply play back as programmed, while others are “chord match” types

which, if the CHORD MATCH function is turned on, are automatically transposed to match

chords played using the PSR-730/630 Auto Accompaniment feature.

Selecting a MULTI PAD Set

The PSR-730/630 has 36 multi pad sets, each containing a complete set of 4 MULTI

PAD phrases — 144 phrases in all. Before using the MULTI PADS, select the MULTI

PAD set containing the phrases you want to use as follows:

Select the Multi Pad Function

To select a multi pad set first use the MENU [▲] and [▼] buttons to select the

MULTI PAD function so that the triangular indicator in the display appears next to

“MULTI PAD” to the left of the display.

Select a Multi Pad Set Number

If necessary use the SUB MENU [▲] and [▼] buttons so that the name of the

currently selected MULTI PAD set appears on the display (see list on page 62), then

use the [–] and [+], number buttons, or data dial to select the MULTI PAD set you want

to use.

• Press and hold the

MULTI PAD [STOP]

button for a few sec-

onds to go directly to

the MULTI PAD SET

display.

GROOVE&DYNAMICS

DISK

MULTI PAD

REGIST MEMORY

MIDI

DIGITAL EFFECT

OVERALL

SUB MENU

fare1 FanBank 01:

The Multi Pads

Playing the MULTI PADs

Simply tap any of the MULTI PADs at any time to play back the corresponding

phrase at the currently set tempo. MULTI PAD playback begins as soon as the button

is pressed. You can even play two, three, or four MULTI PADs at the same time. Also,

you can create “retriggered sample” effects by repeatedly pressing a pad before its

contents are completely played back.

The MULTI PAD voices are indepedent from the voices you have currently selected

for keyboard performance. You could, for example, play piano on the keyboard while

a MULTI PAD plays a brass chord stab.

When the CHORD MATCH function (page 63) for a pad is turned on, the

corresponding phrase will be automatically transposed to match chords played using

the PSR-730/630 Auto-accompaniment feature.

MULTI PAD playback can be terminated by pressing the MULTI PAD [STOP]

button.

● The Multi Pad Sets

Chord Match

Set Pad 1 Pad 2 Pad 3 Pad 4

1 Fanfare1 OOO –

2 Fanfare2 OOO –

3 Brassy1 OOOO

4 Brassy2 OOOO

5 Synth Brass OOOO

6 Guitar Play1 OOOO

7 Guitar Play2 OOOO

8 Guitar Play3 OOOO

9 Guitar Play4 OOOO

10 Techno Synth1 OOOO

11 Techno Synth2 OOOO

12 Arpeggio OOOO

13 Crystal OOOO

14 Twinkle OOOO

15 Magical OOOO

16 Piano Sequence OOOO

17 Banjo Sequence OOOO

18 Gothic OOOO

Chord Match

Set Pad 1 Pad 2 Pad 3 Pad 4

19 Classic OOOO

20 Jingle OOOO

21 Horror SE ––––

22 Racing SE ––––

23 Stormy SE ––––

24 Water SE ––––

25 Animal SE ––––

26 Haha SE ––––

27Rock Kit ––––

28 Techno Kit ––––

29 Analog Kit ––––

30 Tom Flam ––––

31 Latin Percusion1 ––––

32 Latin Percussion2 ––––

33 Timbales ––––

34 Analog Sequence ––––

35 Conga Sequence ––––

36 Techno Sequence ––––

MULTI PAD

BEAT

1234

STOP

1234

MULTI PAD

STOP

1234

MULTI PAD

• Pressing the pad dur-

ing its playback will

stop playing and be-

gin playing from the

top again.

The Multi Pads

Turning the CHORD MATCH Function On/Off

The CHORD MATCH function can be individually turned on or off for each of the

MULTI PADs, as described below.

• The chord match

function has no effect

with pads that contain

percussion phrases.

Select the MULTI PAD Function

Use the MENU [▲] and [▼] buttons to select the MULTI PAD function so that the

triangular indicator in the display appears next to “MULTI PAD” to the left of the

display.

Select a CHORD MATCH Function

Use the SUB MENU [▲] and [▼] buttons to select “P1ChdMatch”, “P2ChdMatch”,

“P3ChdMatch”, or “P4ChdMatch”, depending on the pad for which you want to turn

the CHORD MATCH function on or off.

Turn the CHORD MATCH Function On or Off

Use the [–] and [+] buttons or data dial to turn the CHORD MATCH function for

the selected pad “on” or “off” as required.

• The CHORD MATCH

ON/OFF setting is re-

stored to its original

status whenever a

preset MULTI PAD

set is selected.

• When the CHORD

MATCH ON/OFF sta-

tus of a user MULTI

PAD (see page 107)

set is changed, the

new status is re-

corded with the

MULTI PAD data.

• The chord match on/

off status depends on

the selected Multi

Pad.

GROOVE&DYNAMICS

DISK

MULTI PAD

REGIST MEMORY

MIDI

DIGITAL EFFECT

OVERALL

SUB MENU

ch: OnP1ChdMat

123

456

789

–

/ NO

/ YES

Disk Operations

There is a disk drive installed in the PSR-730/630. By inserting a floppy disk into it, you can

do many things: record and playback user songs, save and load user styles (page 98), user

pads (page 106), or registration memory data (page 57).

You can save any number of user styles and registration data on floppy disks, make song

libraries or find many other ways to make playing the PSR-730/630 more efficient.

There is a sample disk packed with the PSR-730/630. It contains 20 XG songs and 8 style

files. To play back the songs see page 76. To load the styles see page 70.

◆ Floppy Disk Handling Precautions

Floppy disks are an inexpensive, convenient, and reliable way to

store your music data. They are not indestructable, however, and

should be handled with care. Observe the following points to

ensure the long-term safety of your disks and data.

Type of Disk

• Use the 3.5-inch 2DD or 2HD floppy disks with the PSR-730/

630.

Taking Care of Your Floppy Disks

• Never attempt to eject a disk during a read or write operation (i.e.

while the disk drive is operating). Doing so can damage both the

disk and the drive.

• Never turn the power ON or OFF while a disk is in the drive.

Always eject the disk before turning the power OFF.

• To eject a floppy disk from the disk drive press the eject button

slowly as far as it will go. Then when the disk is fully ejected,

remove it by hand. The disk may not be ejected properly if the

eject button is pressed too quickly or if it is not pressed in far

enough (the eject button may become stuck halfway with the

disk extending from the slot by only a few millimeters). If this is

the case, do not attempt to pull out the partially ejected disk.

Doing so may damage the disk drive mechanism and/or the

floppy disk. To remove a partially ejected disk, try pressing the

eject button once again or push the disk back into the slot, then

repeat the eject procedure carefully.

• Do not store disks in places exposed to direct sunlight or other

sources of heat. The acceptable storage temperature range is

approximately 4° to 53° C (39° to 127° F).

• Do not store disks in areas subject to extreme dryness or

humidity. The acceptable relative humidity range is approxi-

mately 8 to 90%.

• Do not store disks in areas contaminated with dust, sand, smoke,

etc.

• Do not place heavy objects such as books on top of a disk.

• Avoid getting floppy disks wet, particularly with oily or sticky

fluids. A disk that has been wet with water should be allowed to

dry naturally before use. Disks contaminated by other fluids can

cause damage to the disk drive and should be discarded.

• Be sure to apply the disk label at the proper position. When

changing the label never cover the old label with a new label;

always remove the old label first.

Head Cleaning

• With extended use the read/write head of the disk drive will pick

up dust and other particles that will eventually cause data errors.

If this occurs, clean the head with a 3.5 inch head cleaning disk

available from most computer supply stores.

Data Backup

• For maximum data security we strongly recommended that you

keep two copies of important data on separate floppy disks.

These disks should ideally be stored in separate locations. This

gives you a backup if one disk is lost or damaged.

Protecting Your Data (Write Protect Tab)

• To prevent accidental erasure of important data, slide the disk’s

write-protect tab to the “protect” position (tab open). If you

attempt to modify the disk when the write-protect tab is set to ON

position, “Disk Write Protected!!” will appear on the display

indicating that the operation is not possible.

• Do not insert anything but floppy disks into the disk drive. Other

objects can damage the disk drive or floppy disk.

• Never open the disk shutter by hand or touch the internal surface

of the disk. Dirt, dust, or grease on the disk’s magnetic surface

can cause data errors.

• Never leave disks near a speaker, TV, or other device that emits

a strong magnetic field. Strong magnetic fields can partially

erase the data on the disk.

Write protect tab ON

(locked-write protected)

Write protect tab OFF

(unlocked- write enabled)

This lamp is always on when the

power is on, regardless of Disk

operation.

Disk Operations

■ User Song Data

User song data is saved directly to the disk without saving it in the PSR-730/630 itself.

Data Type Extension Save Load

User Style (101-104) .USR OO

[Style File Format]

User Pad (bank 37-40) .USR OO

Registration Memory (bank 01-32) .USR OO

User Style + Registration Memory .USR OO

User Pad + Registration Memory .USR OO

User Style + User Pad .USR OO

User Song .MID — —

Maximum of 60 files can

be saved.

User Song

Floppy

Disk

Record

(Direct save)

Playback

(Direct read)

Save or load individually

or gathered together

User Style

User Pad

Registration Memory

Floppy

Disk

Load

Save

• When saving data,

use a floppy disk for-

matted on the PSR-

730/630.

• The three letters after

the file name (after

the period) are called

the extension. The ex-

tension shows the

type of file.

• Since the user songs

are directly recorded

to the disk as you play

during recording and

read from the disk

during playback, the

Save/Load functions

are not available. The

Disk Copy, Song

Copy and Delete File

operations related to

the user songs can be

executed.

■ User Style/User Pad/Registration Memory Data

The PSR-730/630 has User Style, User Pad and Registration Memory functions

installed. The data recorded with these functions can also be saved individually or

gathered together to floppy disks and also the data (files) saved on disks can be loaded

individually or gathered together into the PSR-730/630.

■ Data that Can be Saved or Loaded with the PSR-730/630

Up to 43 “All” type files (page 68)

can be recorded on a 2HD disk.

Up to 21 “All” type files can be

recorded on a 2DD disk.

• It may not be possible

to record the full 60

files to a disk, de-

pending on the legnth

of the recorded files.

• The maximum num-

ber of files may vary

according to the type

and volume of the

saved files (page 68).

Try playing some of the songs on the included Sample Disk.

Insert the Sample Disk into the Disk Drive.

Once the disk is inserted, the menu icon on the display will automatically switch to

the song menu, and the currently selected song name and song number will appear at

the upper left of the display. The PSR-730/630 will switch into Song Mode. The

SONG icon will light along with the DISK (floppy disk) icon and the XG icon.

The Sample Disk

■ Using Commercially Available Music Collections

(Sold Separately)

The PSR-730/630 can playback commercially available XG/GM music collection or

YAMAHA DOC collection (Disk Orchestra Collection) disk files. It can also load

styles collected on YAMAHA style file disks.

The PSR-730/630 can handle music disks (floppy disks) that bear the following

marks:

You can playback song files collected on these disks using the voices defined

in the GM standard.

You can playback songs using the XG format, an extension of the GM standard

that allows for much higher sound quality.

You can playback song files collected on these disks using the voices defined

in Yamaha’s DOC format.

You can load and play with the style files collected on these disks.

Start and Stop the Song

Press the [START/STOP] button, and playback of the Sample Disk song will begin.

For details, see page 76 “Song Playback.”

REPEAT

ONE T

SET

REGISTRATION

TEMPO

TRANSPOSE ME

213

DISK

STYLE

ACMP/SONG

VOLUME

100

116

000

G PSR-730X

001

SONG

START / STOP

Disk Operations

• With song data soft-

ware that includes lyr-

ics, you can view the

lyrics in the display

during playback. Con-

sult your Yamaha

dealer for information

on song data that is

compatible with the

Lyrics Display func-

tion of the PSR-730/

630.

Setting up commercially available floppy disks (3.5 inch, 2HD/2DD

type) for use with the PSR-730/630 is called formatting

Follow the steps below to format a disk.

Insert the Disk into the Disk Drive

Insert a commercially available 3.5 inch floppy disk (unformatted) into

the disk drive, with the shutter on the disk towards the drive, and with the

label side facing upward.

The “DISK” menu will be automatically selected, and the Sub Menu

item “Format Disk? NO/YES” will appear on the top line of the display.

Format

• After formatting, the capacity of a

2HD disk will be 1 Mbyte, and of

a 2DD disk will be 720 Kbyte.

• If you insert an unformatted disk

with the write protect tab in the

ON position into the drive, “For-

mat Disk? NO/YES” will appear,

but when you try to format it,

“Disk Write Protected!!” will be

displayed. Eject the disk, move

the protect tab to the OFF posi-

tion, and reinsert it in the drive.

• The “DISK” menu won’t be se-

lected automatically when you in-

sert the formatted disk. If you

want to format the formatted disk

to record from scratch, first insert

the disk you want to format, then

press the Menu button, next

press the Sub Menu button to

show the “Format Disk? YES” on

the display.

• If data is already saved on the

disk, be careful not to format it. If

you format the disk, all the previ-

ously recorded data will be de-

leted.

• While formatting is in progress

(while “Now Formatting” is dis-

played) , never eject the disk or

turn off the power to the PSR-

730/630.

• If a disk that cannot be read by

the PSR-730/630 is inserted into

the disk drive, it will be treated

the same as an unformatted

floppy disk. Take care not to

erase important data by acciden-

tally formatting a disk.

• If you want to reformat a disk

that already has been formatted

for the PSR-730/630, insert the

disk in the drive, select the “For-

mat Disk? YES” item from the

sub menu of the “DISK” menu,

then proceed as for a normal for-

mat.

• If you insert the formatted disk

and you press the [-] (NO) button

or eject the disk in the step 2, the

display will return to the “Format

Disk?”.

NO/YESisk?Format D

Press the [+] (YES) Button

When the [+] button is pressed, “Execute? NO/YES” will appear on the

display.

Start Formatting

Press the [+] (YES) button and disk formatting will begin. Once started,

formatting cannot be canceled. During formatting, the display will read “Now

Formatting... xx%.”

When formatting is finished, the display will return to the one which was

selected before inserting the disk.

If you don’t want to format, press the [–] (NO) button before the step 3 or

simply eject the disk. The display will return to the one which was selected

before inserting the disk.

NO/YESisk?Execute?

.. 20%atting.Now Form

Disk Operations

You can save PSR-730/630 user styles, user pad (banks 37-40) and registration

memory data (banks 01-32) on floppy disks.

Insert a Formatted Floppy Disk.

If a disk has not been already inserted in the drive, insert a formatted floppy disk.

Select a Save Function

Save

• After formatting, the

capacity of a 2HD

disk will be 1 Mbyte,

and of a 2DD disk will

be 720 Kbyte.

• If the DISK menu is

selected when there

is no floppy disk in-

serted into the disk

drive, “- - -” will be

displayed at the top of

the display, and disk

operations won’t be

possible.

• Although all User

Style (101-104), User

Pad (bank 37-40),

and Registration

Memory (bank 01-32)

data can be saved

gathered into one

single file, the data

can be recalled indi-

vidually when loaded

back into the PSR-

730/630.

Select the File Type

Press the [+] (YES) button, and the file type select screen “File Type: All” will

appear on the display.

Use the SUB MENU [▲] and [▼] buttons so

that “Save To Disk? YES” appears on the display.

Use the [–] and [+] buttons or the Data Dial to select the file type for the data you

want to save. Refer to the file type list below:

All Save all User Style (101-104), User Pad (bank 37-40), and Registration

Memory (bank 01-32) data into one single file.

Style Save all User Style (101-104) data gathered together into one single file.

Pad

Save all User Pad (bank 37-40) data gathered together into one single file.

Regist Save all Registration Memory (bank 01-32) data gathered together into

one single file.

Style + Reg. Save all User Style (101-104) and Registration Memory (bank 01-32)

data gathered together into one single file.

Pad + Regist Save all User Pad (bank 37-40), and Registration Memory (bank 01-32)

data gathered together into one single file.

Style + Pad Save all User Style (101-104) and User Pad (bank 37-40) data gathered

together into one single file.

SUB MENU

YESDisk?Save To

e: AllFile Typ

GROOVE&DYNAMICS

DISK

MULTI PAD

REGIST MEMORY

MIDI

DIGITAL EFFECT

OVERALL

SUB MENU

Use the MENU [▲] and [▼] buttons to select

the Disk function so that the triangular indicator

in the display appears next to “DISK” to the left

of the display.

Disk Operations

Save File Confirmation

Use the SUB MENU [▼] button so that “Save File....” appears on the display,

showing the new file the data will be saved to.

0001.USRe: UF–0Save Fil

-001.USR LIVERename:

-001.USRng...ENow Savi

• Even if you chose a

file where data is al-

ready saved because

you want to overwrite

the data, renaming

the file will cause the

new data to be saved

in a different file, and

the old data won’t be

overwritten.

• While data is being

saved (“Now Saving”

is displayed), never

eject the floppy disk

or turn off power to

the PSR-730/630.

To overwrite the data already saved to an existing file, use the [–] and [+] buttons

or the Data Dial to select the file you want to overwrite.

If Necessary Change the File Name

Use the SUB MENU [▼] button so that “Rename:.....” appears on the display, and

you can change the name of the file (the 8 characters before the extension).

Execute the File Save

Use the SUB MENU [▼] button so that “Execute: NO/YES” appears on the display.

• If you press the SUB

MENU [

] button the

sub menu display will

return to “Save To

Disk? YES.”

• If there isn’t enough

space on the disk,

“Disk Full” will be dis-

played, and you won’t

be able to save any

data. You can delete

unneeded files on the

disk (page 75), or ex-

change the disk for a

new one and repeat

the save operation.

• If a write error occurs

during a save opera-

tion, “Disk Error” will

be displayed. If the er-

ror reoccurs after re-

peating the save op-

eration, there could

be something wrong

with the disk. Insert a

different disk in the

drive and repeat the

save operation.

Press the [+] (YES) button and the save operation will begin. While it is in progress,

“Now Saving...” will appear at the top of the display.

When the save operation is finished, the sub menu will return to “Save To Disk?

YES.”

NO/YESisk?Execute?

Disk Operations

After saving User Style (101-104), User Pad (bank 37-40), and Registration

Memory (bank 01-32) data onto a floppy disk, you can reload them into the PSR-730/

630.

You can also load style data from the included Sample Disk or commercially

available Yamaha Style File disks.

Load

• If the DISK menu is

selected when there

is no floppy disk in-

serted into the disk

drive, “- - -” will be

displayed at the top of

the display, and disk

operations won’t be

possible.

• If the disk contains no

file, the display shows

“File Not Found!!” in-

dicating that the Load

function is not pos-

sible.

Select the File to Load

Press the [+] (YES) button, and “Load File.....” file select screen will appear on the

display.

Use the [–] and [+] buttons or the Data Dial to select the file to load.

Select the File Type (Data Type) to Load

Press the SUB MENU [▼] button and the sub menu “File Type:....” will be

displayed.

Select a Load Function

Use the MENU [▲] and [▼] buttons to select the Disk function so that the triangular

indicator in the display appears next to “DISK” to the left of the display.

Use the SUB MENU [▲] and [▼] buttons so that “Load To Disk? YES” appears

on the display.

Use the [–] and [+] buttons or the Data Dial to select the file type (data type) to load.

The file types that you can load at this point will depend on the types of files that

were originally saved to this file.

SUB MENU

YESm Disk?Load Fro

0001.USRe: UF–0Load Fil

e: AllFile Typ

File types that were saved File types that can be loaded

All All, Style, Pad, Regist

Style Style

Pad Pad

Regist Regist

Style+Reg. Style, Regist, Style+Reg.

Pad+Regist Pad, Regist, Pad+Regist

Style+Pad Style, Pad , Style+Pad

Disk Operations

Insert the Floppy Disk into the Disk Drive.

Insert the floppy disk that has the data you want to load into the floppy disk drive.

• When the selected file

type is “All,” “Style +

Reg,” “Pad + Regist,”

“Style + Pad,” step 5

is not necessary. Pro-

ceed from step 6.

Select the Data to Be Loaded If Necessary

If the file type selected in step 4 was “Style,” “Pad,” or “Regist,” press the SUB

MENU [▼] button so that the sub menu “Source:....” (load data selection screen) is

displayed.

File Type Source Destination

Style Style 1-4, All Style 1-4 (User Style 101-104)

Pad Pad bank 1-4, All Pad bank 1-4 (User Pad 37-40)

Regist Regist bank 1-32 All Reg. bank 1-32

● Source Selection

Use the [–] and [+] buttons or the Data Dial to select the load source.

If “All” is selected, all the data will be loaded.

By setting the “source” and “destination,” the data can be individually loaded (or

loaded as a group).

Style ....... A single Style can be extracted from the file 4 Styles saved together on the

disk and loaded into one of the PSR-730/630 User Style 101-104.

Pad ......... A single bank can be extracted from the file 4 banks saved together on the

disk and loaded into one of the PSR-730/630 User Pad banks 37-40.

Regist .... A single bank can be extracted from the file 32 banks saved together on the

disk and loaded into one of the PSR-730/630 Registration banks 1-32.

le 1 AllSource:

le 2 StySource:

● Select the Destination

Press the SUB MENU [▼] button so that “Destination:....” appears on the display.

Use the [–] and [+] buttons, [1]–[0] number buttons, or the Data Dial to select the

destination for the data.

Press the SUB MENU [▼] button so that “Execute NO/YES” (load execution

screen) appears on the display.

le 4ion:StyDestinat

Disk Operations

Execute the Load Operation

Press the [+] (YES) button, and the load operation will start. Once started, the

operation can’t be canceled.

As the file is loading, “Now Loading” will appear on the top line of the display.

When the load operation is finished, the display will return to the “Load From Disk?

YES” sub menu.

If you aren’t going to load, press the [–] (NO) button instead of the [+] (YES) button,

or eject the disk. The display will return back to the previous “Load From Disk? YES”.

NO/YESisk?Execute?

-001.USRing...ENow Load

• When data is loaded

from a floppy disk to

the PSR-730/630, the

data already in the

memory of the instru-

ment will be replaced

by the data on the disk.

Save important data

into a disk file before

doing the load opera-

tion.

• While data is loading

(“Now Loading” is dis-

played), never eject

the floppy disk or turn

the power off.

• “Not Enough Memory!!”

may appear on the dis-

play, if a problem oc-

curs that prevents the

data from being loaded

(the capacity of the

PSR-730/630 [RAM] is

exceeded, something

is wrong with the

floppy disk, or the data

from the disk is cor-

rupted, etc.).

You can copy the entire data saved on a floppy disk onto another one using the disk

copy feature. It’s a good idea to use disk copy to create backup disks of your important

data.

Disk Copy

• If the DISK menu is

selected when there

is no floppy disk in-

serted into the disk

drive, “- - -” will be

displayed at the top of

the display, and disk

operations won’t be

possible.

Select a Disk Copy Function

Use the MENU [▲] and [▼] buttons to select the Disk function so that the triangular

indicator in the display appears next to “DISK” to the left of the display.

Use the SUB MENU [▲] and [▼] buttons so that “Disk Copy? YES” appears on

the display.

Insert the Disk to Copy From (Source Disk) into the Disk

Drive

Insert the disk that you want to copy from (source disk) into the disk drive.

nd PiYESy? GraDisk Cop

SUB MENU

Disk Operations

• While data is copying

(“Now Copying” or

“Now Reading” is dis-

played), never eject

the floppy disk or turn

the power off.

Press the [+] (YES) Button

Make sure that the disk you wish to copy from (source disk) is inserted in the disk

drive, then press the [+] (YES) button. “Now Reading” will appear on the display.

The contents of the disk will be copied to the PSR-730/630, and when reading is

finished, “Insert Copy Disk” will be displayed.

Insert the Destination Disk into the Floppy Drive

Insert the destination disk for the copy operation into the disk drive. “Now

Copying” will appear on the display.

Data will be copied from the PSR-730/630 to the destination disk, and when

copying is finished, the display will return to the “Disk Copy? YES”.

If the quantity of data is large, it may be necessary for the data to be copied in parts.

In such a case, “Insert Source Disk” will appear again on the display.

• If you want to cancel

the Disk Copy func-

tion in this step, press

the [–] (NO) button to

cancel the operation,

returning to “Disk

Copy? YES” display.

Eject the copy (destination) disk and insert the source disk. Follow the messages on

the display and repeat to change the disks. The number of times you repeat the disk

changes depend on the size of the data to be copied. Once all the data has been copied,

the display will return to the “Disk Copy? YES” .

nd PiYESing...Now Read

kd PiYESopy DisInsert C

nd PiYESing...Now Copy

iskPiYESource DInsert S

The songs recorded on a floppy disk can be copied in file units to another location

on the same disk.

Song Copy

Insert the Floppy Disk into the Disk Drive

Insert the disk with the songs you want to copy into the disk drive.

Disk Operations

• The disk type of both

source disk and desti-

nation disk must be

the same (2DD or

2HD). If the source

disk is 2HD type, use

2HD blank disk for the

destination. If you in-

sert a wrong type,

“Disk Media Type Er-

ror!!” will be shown on

the display.

• If you insert a wrong

disk, different from the

source or destination

disk, during the disk

copy operation, “Disk

Type Error!!” will be

shown on the display.

• If the DISK menu is

selected when there

is no floppy disk in-

serted into the disk

drive, “- - -” will be

displayed at the top of

the display, and disk

operations won’t be

possible.

Select a Song Copy Function

Use the MENU [▲] and [▼] buttons to select the Disk function so that the triangular

indicator in the display appears next to “DISK” to the left of the display.

Use the SUB MENU [▲] and [▼] buttons so that “Song Copy? YES” appears on

the display.

Select the (Source) Song File to Be Copied

Press the [+] (YES) button, and the file select screen “File Name:.....” will appear

on the display.

Use the [–] and [+] buttons or the Data Dial to select the song file you wish to copy.

Confirm the Name of the (Destination) Song File to Copy

Use the SUB MENU [▼] button so that “Copy File....” appears on the display,

showing the name that will be given to the new song file being made.

To overwrite an already recorded song, use the [–] and [+] buttons or the Data Dial

to select the file you want to overwrite.

Use the SUB MENU [▼] button so that “Rename:.....” appears on the display, and

you can change the name of the file (8 characters before the extension).

• When the floppy

disk’s write-protect

tab is set to ON (see

page 64) or the disk is

a “purposely copy-

protected” disk, the

display shows “Disk

Write Protected!!” in-

dicating that the Song

Copy function is not

possible.

Execute the Copy Operation

After changing the file name, or when you don’t want to change the name, use the

SUB MENU [▼] button so that “Execute: NO/YES” appears on the display.

Press the [+] (YES) button and the save operation will begin. While it is in progress,

“Now Copying...” will appear at the top of the display.

When the copy operation is finished, the sub menu will return to “Song Copy?

YES.”

• While the song is

copying (“Now Copy-

ing” is displayed),

never eject the floppy

disk or turn the power

off.

_002e: SONGCopy Fil

_001e: SONGFile Nam

_002YES COPYRename:

NO/YESisk?Execute?

nd PiYESy? GraSong Cop

SUB MENU

Disk Operations

• If the DISK menu is

selected when there

is no floppy disk in-

serted into the disk

drive, “- - -” will be

displayed at the top of

the display, and disk

operations won’t be

possible.

Insert the Floppy Disk into the Disk Drive

Insert the disk with the files you want to delete into the disk drive.

Select a Delete File Function

Use the MENU [▲] and [▼] buttons to select the Disk function so that the triangular

indicator in the display appears next to “DISK” to the left of the display.

Use the SUB MENU [▲] and [▼] buttons so that “Delete File? YES” appears on

the display.

Select the File to Be Deleted

Press the [+] (YES) button, and the file select screen “File Name:.....” will appear

on the display.

Use the [–] and [+] buttons or the Data Dial to select the file you wish to delete.

Execute the Delete Operation

Press the SUB MENU [▼] button so that “Execute: NO/YES” appears on the

display.

Press the [+] (YES) button and the delete operation will begin. While it is in

progress, “Now Deleting...” will appear at the top of the display.

• While the file is being

deleted (“Now Delet-

ing” is displayed),

never eject the floppy

disk or turn the power

off.

Delete File

You can delete saved data (User Songs, User Styles, User Pads, or Registration

Memory) from the floppy disk in file units.

When the delete operation is finished, the sub menu will return to “Delete File?

YES.”

0001.USRe: UF_0File Nam

NO/YESisk?Execute?

_002ting...Now Dele

nd PiYESile?Delete F

SUB MENU

Disk Operations

• When the floppy disk’s

write-protect tab is set

to ON (see page 64) or

the disk is a “purposely

copy-protected” disk,

the display shows

“Disk Write Pro-

tected!!” indicating that

the Delete File function

is not possible.

Song Playback

You can playback a wonderful variety of songs on the PSR-730/630, including the preset

demo songs, the songs on the included Sample Disk, the User Songs you record on a floppy

disk and the songs on commercially available XG/GM song collection disks. Except for the

preset demo songs, a floppy disk must be inserted in the disk drive to playback a song.

Select the Song Menu

Press the [SONG] button to select the SONG menu (the triangular indicator will

appear next to “SONG” to the right of the display). The name and number of the

currently selected song will appear on the left of the top line of the display, and the

PSR-730/630 will switch to Song Mode, lighting the

SONG

icon on the display.

Song Playback Procedure

Enter the Song Number

Use the [–] and [+] buttons, [1]–[0] number buttons, or the Data Dial to select the

song to be played back. The SONG button can also be pushed to increment the song

number, and holding it down will cause the number to increment continuously.

• Entering the Song

Mode automatically

selects the following

settings: Auto Accom-

paniment Off, Syn-

chro Start Off, Syn-

chro Stop Off, and

Registration Memory

Freeze On. These

settings cannot be al-

tered in Song Mode.

When playing back a song recorded on a floppy disk, insert the disk into the disk

drive.

Inserting the disk will cause the PSR-730/630 to automatically change to the

“SONG” menu, and the name and number of the currently selected song will appear

on the left of the top line of the display. The PSR-730/630 will switch to Song Mode,

lighting the

SONG

icon on the display, and the

DISK

(floppy disk icon) will be shown.

REPEAT

ONE TOUCH

SETTING

REGISTRATION

TEMPO

TRANSPOSE MEMORY

213

FREEZE

DISK

STYLE

ACMP/SONG

VOLUME

100

116

000

tTrumpet

001

SONG

REPEAT

ONE T

SET

REGISTRATION

TEMPO

TRANSPOSE ME

213

DISK

STYLE

ACMP/SONG

VOLUME

100

116

000

G PSR-730X

001

SONG

• Inserting the disk con-

taining no song data

won’t automatically

select the “SONG”

menu.

REPEAT

ONE TOUCH

SETTING

REGISTRATION

TEMPO

TRANSPOSE MEMORY

213

FREEZE

DISK

STYLE

ACMP/SONG

VOLUME

100

116

000

dAlways

002

SONG

123

456

789

–

/ NO

/ YES

Select Play Mode

Press the SUB MENU [▲] and [▼] buttons so that “Play Mode” appears on the

display. On the right of the top line of the display, the current play mode will be

displayed. Use the [–] and [+] buttons, or the Data Dial to select the play mode for

playback.

Song Playback

Start/Stop the Song

Press the [START/STOP] button, and start playback of the song. To stop playback

part way through the song, press the [START/STOP] button one more time.

The songs will be displayed in sequence, as follows:

Demo Song (001) m Disk Song (001) m Demo Song (001)....

● Selecting a Disk Song Quickly

When selecting a Demo Song, hold the [3] button down until the

DISK

icon lights, then

enter the Disk Song number using the [1]–[0] number buttons.

Example) Selecting Disk Song number 2

Press [3] and hold until the DISK icon lights

Press [2]

REPEAT

ONE TOUCH

SETTING

REGISTRATION

TEMPO

TRANSPOSE MEMORY

213

FREEZE

DISK

STYLE

ACMP/SONG

VOLUME

100

116

000

dAlways

002

SONG

123

456

789

–

/ NO

/ YES

Single............... Play through the selected song, then stop.

All...................... Continue playback through all the songs on the floppy disk. If there

is no floppy disk inserted in the drive, this setting will be ignored.

glee: SinPlay Mod

START / STOP

• Selecting “All” here

cancels the Next song

setting (see page 82).

• Song data of a certain

commercially avail-

able song disk may

use the voices which

are not built in the

PSR-730/630. In this

case nothing will be

shown on the voice

number display of the

appropriate track.

Song Playback

■ Play from a Specified Measure

Press the [SONG] button to select the SONG menu (the triangular indicator will

appear next to “SONG” to the right of the display). Use the SUB MENU [▲] and [▼]

buttons to select the “Measure” parameter in the display. The current measure number

will appear to the right of “Measure” on the top line of the display (the current measure

number is also continuously displayed next to “MEASURE” in the display).

■ Song Volume Control

The volume of song playback can be adjusted for the best balance in relation to notes

from the keyboard. While in Song Mode (the

SONG

icon is lit) press the ACMP/

SONG VOLUME [▲] and [▼] buttons. When either button is pressed the current song

volume setting will appear on the top line of the display for a few seconds. The song

volume is also shown on the display when in the Song Mode (the

SONG

icon is lit).

Press the ACMP/SONG VOLUME [▲] or [▼] buttons to button to decrease or

increase the volume within a range of 0-127. Press briefly to single step, or hold for

continuous decrementing/incrementing.

• While the song vol-

ume setting appears

on the top line of the

display the [–] and [+]

buttons, number but-

tons, or data dial can

also be used to set

the song volume.

REPEAT

ONE TOUCH

SETTING

REGISTRATION

TEMPO

TRANSPOSE MEMORY

213

FREEZE

DISK

STYLE

ACMP/SONG

VOLUME

100

116

000

me 100SongVolu

001

SONG

ACMP / SONG

VOLUME

Use the [–] and [+] buttons, [1]–[0] number buttons, or the Data Dial to specify the

measure from which to begin playback, then press the [START/STOP] button to start

from that measure.

REPEAT

ONE TOUCH

SETTING

REGISTRATION

TEMPO

TRANSPOSE MEMORY

213

FREEZE

DISK

STYLE

ACMP/SONG

VOLUME

100

116

000

001Measure:

001

SONG

MEASURE

001

REPEAT

ONE TOUCH

SETTING

REGISTRATION

TEMPO

TRANSPOSE MEMORY

213

FREEZE

DISK

STYLE

ACMP/SONG

VOLUME

100

116

000

009Measure:

001

SONG

MEASURE

009

123

456

789

–

/ NO 0 + / YES

• You can move the

measure number for

playback back and

forth even during the

song playback.

Song Playback

Minus-one Practice

You can turn-off (mute) any of the parts of a song while it is playing, then practice

playing that part yourself along with the other tracks of the song. This is called Minus-

one playback.

Choose any one of the demo or sample disk songs, press one of the TRACK buttons

1-16 below the display, muting the part you want to play, and then try playing yourself.

Selecting the Song for Minus-one Playback

To select the song, see (page 76).

Select the track for Minus-one playback

Press one of the TRACK buttons below the display, and its number

–

will

disappear from the display. The track you selected will go OFF and the part will be

muted.

Select the R1 Voice

When you are going to play in place of the muted part, set the voice for the part you

muted (listed under the TRACK Number

–

) as the R1 voice.

To select the R1 voice, see page (page 17).

START/STOP Minus-one Playback

Just like starting regular song playback, press the [START/STOP] button to start

and stop Minus-one playback. You can play the muted part yourself.

Pressing one of the TRACK buttons corresponding to the muted parts during song

playback turns on that track/part again.

ACCOMPANIMENT TRACK

SONG TRACK

R2 R1

ACMP VOICEVOICEVOICERHYTHM

BASS CHORD

CHORD

PAD PHRASE

PHRASE

RHYTHM

R1R2

MELODY

12345678910111213141516

DUALSPLIT

213213213213213252219471442468434259391337213213

161 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

START / STOP

Repeat Play

This function allows you to specify any section of a Demo or Sample disk song for

continuous repeat playback.

Select the A-B Repeat Parameter

While the SONG menu is selected, but no recording is in progress, use the SUB

MENU [▲] and [▼] buttons to select the “A-B Repeat” parameter in the display. The

MAIN/AUTO FILL [A] and [B] button indicators will flash.

Start Playback

Press the [START/STOP] button to start song playback.

Specify the Repeat “A” and “B” Points

While the song is playing, press the MAIN/AUTO FILL [A] button at the beginning

of the section to be repeated (the [A] button indicator will light continuously, and the

“A” repeat icon will appear in the display), then press the MAIN/AUTO FILL [B]

button at the end of the section to be repeated (the [B] button indicator will light

continuously, and the “B” repeat icon will appear in the display). Repeat playback will

begin automatically from the A point as soon as the B point has been specified, and

will continue until either the MAIN/AUTO FILL [A] button is pressed again to cancel

the repeat function, or until song playback is stopped.

• If only the “A” repeat

point is specified, re-

peat playback will oc-

cur between the “A”

point and the end of

the song.

• If the MAIN/AUTO

FILL [B] button is

pressed during repeat

playback, the previ-

ously specified “B”

point will be cancelled

and a new “B” point

can be specified as

required.

• Repeat playback will

continue even if a dif-

ferent menu is se-

lected during repeat

playback.

• Repeat playback will

be cancelled if a dif-

ferent SONG number

selected or the record

mode is engaged.

Song Playback

atA-B Repe

MAIN / AUTO FILL

REPEAT

ONE TOUCH

SETTING

REGISTRATION MEMORY

213

FREEZE

MAIN / AUTO FILL

REPEAT

ONE TOUCH

SETTING

REGISTRATION MEMORY

213

FREEZE

START / STOP

Song Playback

Song Repeat

The Song Repeat feature is handy when you want to repeat playback of a particular

song.

Select a Song Number

To select the song, see (page 76).

Turn on the Song Repeat

After making sure that the “SONG” menu is selected, use the SUB MENU [▲] and

[▼] buttons so that “SongRepeat” appears on the display. The current SongRepeat

setting will be shown on the top line of the display.

Start Playback

Playback will begin as soon as the [START/STOP] button is pressed. Until you

press the [START/STOP] button once again, Song Repeat playback will continue.

• If the Song Repeat

feature is ON, the

song will replay re-

peatedly regardless of

whether the play

mode is set for Single

or All.

• Doing any of the fol-

lowing operations will

automatically cause

the song repeat func-

tion to turn off.

• Changing the song

number.

• Specifying the Next

Song function (page

82).

• Setting the Play

Mode to “All” (page

77).

Use the [–] and [+] buttons or the Data Dial to set the on/off state to the Song Repeat

function.

at: OffSongRepe

at: OnSongRepe

START / STOP

Next Song

The Next Song feature is handy when the next song you want to play isn’t the one

with the next song number.

Select the first song you want to play

To select the song, see (page 76).

Select the next song

After making sure that the “SONG” menu is selected, use the SUB MENU [▲] and

[▼] buttons so that “NextSong” appears on the display. The current NextSong setting

will be shown on the top line of the display.

Start Playback

Playback will begin as soon as the [START/STOP] button is pressed. When the first

song is finished, playback will continue with the next song.

If the [START/STOP] button is pressed once again, or when the next song finishes,

playback will automatically stop.

• If the Song Repeat

feature is ON, the

next song will play af-

ter the first song re-

gardless of whether

the play mode is set

for Single or All.

• While the selected

next song is playing,

the song to play after

it finishes can be se-

lected in the same

way using the Next

Song function.

• If the first song and

the next song are the

same, the Next Song

feature won’t work.

• Doing any of the fol-

lowing operations will

automatically cause

the song repeat func-

tion to turn off.

• Changing the song

number.

• Turning on the Song

Repeat function

(page 81).

• Setting the Play

Mode to “All” (page

77).

START / STOP

Use the [–] and [+] buttons, [1]–[0] number buttons, or the Data Dial to select the

next song.

mpet:01 TruNextSong

iano:04 E.PNextSong

• When “All” is selected

in the Play mode (see

page 77), setting the

Next song will auto-

matically change the

Play mode from “All”

to “Single”

Song Playback

Song Recording

You can record your own music performance on a floppy disk as a user song.

• User Songs are recorded on floppy disks. They can’t be recorded unless a floppy disk is in-

serted into the disk drive.

• The Shortcut functions are not available when one of the Record modes is engaged.

• The quick recording

method is different

from the multi record-

ing method but for

both of them, the re-

corded data is re-

corded on tracks 1–

16.

● Quick Recording

You can easily record four tracks from the PSR-730/630 keyboard together with on

track of Auto Accompaniment.

ACMP VOICEVOICEVOICERHYTHM

BASS CHORD

CHORD

PAD PHRASE

PHRASE

RHYTHM

L R1R2

MELODY

12345678910111213141516

DUALSPLIT

001109084204064133124001442468434259391337213213

● Multi Recording

In Multi Recording, the different parts of the some are divided among tracks 1–16,

with keyboard playing on tracks 1–5, harmony notes on tracks 6–8, and auto

accompaniment (RHYTHM1-PHRASE2) on tracks 9–16. This lets you fine tune

the recording settings for each track, then carefully edit.

ACMP VOICEVOICEVOICERHYTHM

BASS CHORD

CHORD

PAD PHRASE

PHRASE

RHYTHM

L R1R2

MELODY

12345678910111213141516

DUALSPLIT

213213213213213252216471442468434259391337213001

After finishing your recording of a user song, you can play it back in the same way

as one of the preset demo songs.

• Being able to record

note on/off and velocity

means being able to

record forte or piano,

crescendo or diminu-

endo, and other subtle

elements of expression

from the keyboard as

you play them.

• Note ON (key press),

note OFF (key release),

and velocity (strength of

key press) are MIDI

data events (playing

information)(page 119).

• Be careful to avoid the

song data loss that will

occur during recording

if the power is turned

off, the AC adaptor is

unplugged from the out-

let, or the batteries lose

power.

The data you can record in user songs using Quick Recording or Multi Recording are

as follows:

The accompaniment tracks record the following and data:

• Accompaniment style number*

• Accompaniment track changes*

(8 tracks: track on/off, voice number, volume, pan,

reverb depth, chorus depth)

• Section changes and their timing

• Chord changes and their timing.

• Accompaniment volume

• Reverb type.

• Chorus type.

• Tempo and time signature*

The keyboard (R1/R2/L) tracks record the following and data:

• Note on/off (key press and release)

• Velocity (strength of key press)

• R1/R2/L voice number, volume, octave*, pan, reverb

depth, chorus depth, DSP depth.

• Reverb on/off and type

• Chorus on/off and type

• DSP (including variation) on/off and type

• Multi effect on/off, type and set-

tings (PSR-730)

• Harmony on/off, type

• Sustain pedal on/off

• Pitch bend, pitch bend range.

• Tempo

The maximum amount of song memory is 65,000 notes for 2DD disks and 130,000 notes for 2HD disks.

* Recorded only at the beginning of a song; changes cannot be made during recording.

Insert Floppy Disk and Change to Record Mode

Insert the floppy disk you will use to record the user song into the floppy disk

drive.

Quick Recording Procedure

With quick recording, you can use 5 tracks for recording each song.

● ACMP track....................... Used to record auto accompaniment notes (such

as chord change and section change data).

● MELODY 1–4 track ......... Used to record keyboard melody notes.

Press the [RECORD] button to engage the Record Ready Mode. The [RECORD]

button indicator will light, and the SONG, STYLE, and MULTI PAD [1] … [4]

icons will flash, indicating that you must select one of the corresponding record

modes.

The

SONG

icon will be lit on the display indicating that the Song mode is

engaged and the User song number will be shown above the icon.

ACMP VO ICEVOICEVOICE

FINGERING mM

7aug sus4

dim

R1R2

MELODY

MULTI PAD

BEAT

GROOVE & DYNAMICS

11 12 13 14 15 16

1234

VOICE

DUALSPLIT

001

213213213213213252

and Piano

119

513

STYLE

SONG

RECORD

nd Pianop1 Gra8Beat Po

001

SONG

DISK

Song Recording

Select the SONG Record Mode

Press the [SONG] button to select the SONG record mode. The SONG menu

icon will light.

The beat indicator dots will flash at the currently set tempo, indicating that

the record ready (Synchro Start) mode is engaged.

The track bars for MELODY 1–4 and ACMP tracks will flash at the bottom

of the display (Record Ready Mode).

• In Song Record Ready Mode,

the track numbers (9-13) for

corresponding to tracks where

data is already recorded will

light.

• If the [RECORD] button is

pressed, the lowest-numbered

user song which does not con-

tain any recorded data will au-

tomatically be selected.

• The following panel setting

changes will occur when the

record ready mode is engaged:

• The measure number will be re-

set to “1”.

• If the Metronome function is on

(page 116), the metronome will

sound at the current tempo.

• The Registration Memory Freeze

function will be turned on (it

cannot be turned off while the

record mode is engaged).

• The SYNCHRO STOP function

wil be turned off.

If Necessary, Select a User Song Number

When you want to change the user song number selected in step two, use the

[–] and [+] buttons, [1]–[0] number buttons, or Data Dial to change it as

required.

Select the Track to be Recorded

● When recording a melody track.

Use the TRACK buttons to select a MELODY 1–4 track to record.

For example, if you press the track button below the MELODY 1 track, the

MELODY 1 track bar will stop flashing, and the track bars for the other tracks

will go out. This shows that you have selected the MELODY 1 track as the

track for recording.

Song Recording

Record

Recording will begin as soon as you play a note on the keyboard or press the

[START/STOP] button, and the BEAT indicator dots will begin to indicate the

current beat as in the Auto Accompaniment mode. The MEASURE parameter will

also show the current measure number during recording.

• If you start recording

without selecting a spe-

cific track while the

panel AUTO ACCOM-

PANIMENT button is

ON, the MELODY 1 and

ACMP tracks will auto-

matically be selected for

recording.

● Recording the ACMP track

If you press the TRACK button below the ACMP track, the ACMP track bar will

light and the ACMP track will be selected as the recording track. (If you do this

when AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT is off, AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT will

automatically be turned on.)

• The ACMP track and

one MELODY track can

be recorded together at

the same time.

• If the ACMP track is

turned off, AUTO AC-

COMPANIMENT on the

panel will also be turned

off.

• If AUTO ACCOMPANI-

MENT is turned on, the

ACMP track will be auto-

matically selected for re-

cording.

• AUTO ACCOMPANI-

MENT cannot be turned

on or off during record-

ing.

ACMP VOICEVOICEVOICEPHRASE

PHRASE

R1R2

MELODY

78910111213141516

DUALSPLIT

001109084213213252201471442468

SONG TRACK

R2 R1

169 10 11 12 13 14 15 167 8

ACMP VOICEVOICEVOICEPHRASE

PHRASE

R1R2

MELODY

78910111213141516

DUALSPLIT

001109084213213252201471442468

SONG TRACK

R2 R1

169 10 11 12 13 14 15 167 8

MULTI PAD

BEATMEASURE

1234

009

START / STOP

◆ Rehearsal Mode

If the SYNC START button is pressed while in Record Ready Mode, it will be

canceled (the beat indicator dots will go out) and the PSR-730/630 will enter

Rehearsal Mode. In this mode, you can try playing your song before actually

recording it. Pressing the SYNC START button will return to Record Ready Mode.

IMENT

SYNC STOP START

Song Recording

• Before actually starting to record you can try playing the

PSR-730/630 the way it is set up by using the “Rehearsal

Mode”: press the [SYNC START] button to temporarily disen-

gage the record ready mode, rehearse as necessary, then

press the [SYNC START] button again to return to the record

ready mode.

• Whenever you record using a SONG, any previously re-

corded material in the same track will be erased.

• If the SONG memory becomes full while recording, “Disk

FULL!!” will appear on the display and recording will stop (the

“Rehearsal Mode” will be engaged).

• Recording is carried out in 1-measure increments. If you stop

recording in the middle of a measure, rests will automatically

be recorded until the end of that measure.

• If you start recording by pressing the [START/STOP] button,

nothing will be recording on a MELODY track until you begin

playing on the keyboard. Only rhythm accompaniment will be

recorded on the ACCOMPANIMENT track until you play a

chord in the auto accompaniment section of the keyboard.

• During recording you can use the TRACK buttons to turn

playback of previously-recorded MELODY tracks or the AC-

COMPANIMENT track on or off as required.

Stop Recording

Stop recording by pressing the [START/STOP] button. If you press the [ENDING]

button while recording the ACCOMPANIMENT track, recording will stop automati-

cally after the ending section has finished. When recording is stopped the MEASURE

number on the display will return to “1” and the record-ready mode will be engaged.

• You can also press

the [SYNC START]

button to stop record-

ing and return to the

record ready mode.

Record Additional Tracks as Required

By repeating steps 4 through 6, above, you can select and record additional tracks

as required.

• While the record

ready mode is en-

gaged you can press

the [VOICE] button to

go to the VOICE

menu and change the

R1 voice as required.

The R2 voice, how-

ever, cannot be

changed (If the Voice

Set function is on —

page 116 — the R2

voice will automati-

cally be changed

when an R1 panel

voice is selected).

The record-ready

mode must be disen-

gaged in order to

change the R2 voice

and other settings.

• You can rerecord a

part of an already re-

corded track if de-

sired, using the Punch

In/Punch Out feature

(page 92)

Exit From the Record Mode

When you’re finished recording a song, press the [RECORD] button so that its

indicator goes out, to exit from the record mode. The recorded user song can now be

played back in the same way as the demonstration songs.

• You can edit the data

recorded in user

songs (page 96).

• You can edit the re-

corded accompani-

ment data recorded

on accompaniment

tracks (page 96).

RECORD

ENDING

START / STOP

● Recording from the Middle of the Song

It is possible to initiate recording from the middle of the song. If you want to change

the latter half of the song (track), select the Measure number from which you want

to record and start recording. When the AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT is on, this

method is not available for the quick recording procedure.

Engage the Song Record Mode and Select the User Song

In the same way as steps 1–3 for Quick Recording, engage the Song Recording

Mode and select the user song number.

Multi Recording Procedure

Select the Record Method

Use the SUB MENU [▲] and [▼] buttons so that “Quick Record” or “Multi

Record” (record method selection screen) appears on the display.

With Multi Recording, you can record up to 16 tracks for a single song.

The default settings for the tracks are as follows:

Track 1............... For recording keyboard playing (R1 part).

Track 2............... For recording keyboard playing (R2 part).

Track 3............... For recording keyboard playing (L part).

Tracks 4,5 ......... For recording keyboard playing (R1 part).

Tracks 6–8 ........ For recording harmony notes (Harmony type 7–16).

Tracks 9–16...... For recording Auto Accompaniment notes (RHYTHM 1–

PHRASE 2)

• If you begin recording

without selecting the

record method, Quick

Record Mode will auto-

matically be selected.

Select the Track and Part to Record

Select the track and the part to be recorded on that track.. Default parts are

already set for recording, but you can change them as needed.

Use the SUB MENU [▲] and [▼] buttons so that “Part Select” (record part

selection screen) appears on the display.

Song Recording

• Even though three tracks,

track 1, 4 and 5, are pre-

pared for R1 part as the

default, the R1 part perfor-

mance cannot be re-

corded to the multiple

tracks at the same time. In

such cases, the last track

you select is designated

for the R1 part recording.

Use the [–] and [+] buttons or the Data Dial to select Multi Record as the record

method.

cordMulti Re

ect:VoiPart Sel ce R1

• When you insert an com-

mercially available song

disk and try to record and

overwrite one of the song

files which is not write-

protected, “Convert NO/

YES” will appear and the

recording will not be initi-

ated. If you select “YES”

to execute recording,

“Don’t remove the disk”

appears and the PSR-

730/630 starts converting

the selected song’s format

to the PortaTone’s. After

completing the conver-

sion, Record-ready mode

is engaged to indicate re-

cording becomes pos-

sible.

Song Recording

Press the TRACK button to select one of the tracks 1–16 for recording. For

example, if you press the Track button below the track 1, the track 1 bar will light,

showing that the track 1 is selected for recording. If you press the same TRACK button

once again, the track bar will go out and that track will not be recorded.

At this time, the part to be recorded for that track will be shown at the top of the

display. As needed, use the [–] and [+] buttons or the Data Dial to change the part.

Track Default Part Other Parts that Can Be Set

1 R1 R2, L

2 R2 R1,L

3 L R1, R2

4 R1 R2, L

5 R1 R2, L

6 Harmony 1 R1, R2, L

7 Harmony 2 R1, R2, L

8 Harmony 3 R1, R2, L

9 ACMP 1ch (RHYTHM2) R1, R2, L

10 ACMP 2ch (RHYTHM1) —

11 ACMP 3ch (BASS) R1, R2, L

12 ACMP 4ch (CHORD1) R1, R2, L

13 ACMP 5ch (CHORD2) R1, R2, L

14 ACMP 6ch (PAD) R1, R2, L

15 ACMP 7ch (PHRASE1) R1, R2, L

16 ACMP 8ch (PHRASE2) R1, R2, L

ACMP VOICEVOICEVOICERHYTHM

BASS CHORD

CHORD

PAD PHRASE

PHRASE

RHYTHM

R1R2

MELODY

123456789101112131415 16

DUALSPLIT

213213213213213252216471442468434259391337213001

ACCOMPANIMENT TRACK

SONG TRACK

R2 R1

161 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

When recording accompaniment tracks (9–16), first turn Auto Accompaniment on

and then press the TRACK buttons numbered 9–16 to select 9–16 tracks for recording.

Pressing any of the TRACK buttons under the tracks will let you select any tracks

(such as RHYTHM 1 track and BASS track only) for recording.

ACMP VOICEVOICEVOICEPHRASE

PHRASE

R1R2

MELODY

789101112131415 16

DUALSPLIT

213213213213213252216471442468

SONG TRACK

R2 R1

167 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

ACCOMPANIMENT

ON / OFF

• If the part selected for

a track is the same

one as that being re-

corded, that track

cannot be set for re-

cording at the same

time. Only one track

can be selected, with

the last chosen hav-

ing priority.

• Auto Accompaniment

cannot be turned on

or off once recording

has started.

Start/Stop Recording

Record the track(s) in the same way as steps 5-7 for Quick Recording.

Since the recorded accompaniment data is recorded on each accompaniment

track, it can be edited using the Song Edit function (page 97).

• You can also use Re-

hearsal Mode to prac-

tice before recording

when doing Multi Re-

cording.

The harmony notes (type 7–16) can be recorded to the tracks 6–8. To record

harmony notes, first turn Harmony on and then press the TRACK buttons numbered

6–8 to select 6–8 tracks for recording.

ACMP VOICEVOICEVOICERHYTHM

BASS CHORD

CHORD

PAD PHRASE

PHRASE

RHYTHM

R1R2

MELODY

123456789101112131415 16

DUALSPLIT

213213213213213252216471442468434259391337213001

ACCOMPANIMENT TRACK

SONG TRACK

R2 R1

161 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

ACCOMPANIMENT

ON / OFF

HARMONY

■ About the Recording with the Digital Effects Applied

Only one type of each of the Digital Effects, Reverb, Chorus, DSP and Multi Effect

(PSR-730) can be set at one time. Be aware of the following facts, especially when

recording a song with different effects applied to the different tracks.

Reverb type and Chorus type effects can be set and recorded independently for

each of the 16 tracks. However, only the latest settings made (one each) will be

effective if several effects are used in a song (the latest setting priority).

[EX.] While the panel REVERB button is turned on:

1. Select the Hall 1 (Reverb) for the Accompaniment track, and record the Accompa-

niment track for ten measures from the beginning.

2. Start recording the keyboard (R1) track with the Hall 1 (Reverb) selected from the

beginning and then change the effect type to Room 1 (Reverb) respectively from

the fifth measure through the end.

When you play back the song recorded as above, the first four measures will be

played back with the Hall 1 applied to both the Accompaniment track and

keyboard (R1) track, and the remaining six measures, from fifth through the end,

with the Room 1 applied to both tracks. The effect types set for the Accompani-

ment track are replaced with the latest settings. Only the Depth for each track

remains the same.

Song Recording

DSP type effects can be set and recorded for R1/R2/L part(s) when used as System

effect and for R1 part when used as Insertion effect. They can’t be recorded for the

track used as the Accompaniment and/or Harmony part. During playback, only the

latest setting will be effective if several types are used for the tracks in a song (the

latest setting priority).

[EX.]

1. Turn on the panel DSP button, and start recording on the track 1 with the Distortion

(DSP type: No.42 Dist.Hard) selected for ten measures from the beginning.

2. Turn off the panel DSP button, and start recording on the track 2 without any effect

from the beginning. Then turn on the panel DSP button again at the fifth measure,

and continue recording to the end with the Rotary Speaker (DSP type: No.28 Rotary

SP.1) selected.

When you play back the song recorded with the above condition, the first four

measures will be played back with the Distortion applied only to track 1, and the

remaining six measures, from the fifth through the end, with the Rotary Speaker

applied only to track 2. The DSP type set for track 1 is replaced by the one set for

the track 2.

(PSR-730)

Multi effects can be set and recorded for R1/R2/L part(s). They can’t be recorded

for the track used as the Accompaniment and/or Harmony part. During playback,

only the latest setting will be effective if several types are used for the tracks in a

song (the latest setting priority).

[EX.] Two Multi Effect types set in series for R1

1. Multi Effect is turned on and 10 measures are recorded for R1 on track 1.

2. Recording is started for R1 on track 2 with Multi effect off, and then it is turned on

at the fifth measure.

When you play back the song recorded with the above conditions, the first four

measures will be played back with the Multi Effect applied only to track 1, and the

remaining six measures, from the fifth through the end, with Multi Effect applied

only to track 2.

Song Recording

Punch In/Punch Out

The data recorded on tracks for keyboard playing (R1/R2/L) can be re-recorded in

parts with the Punch In/Punch Out feature.

Start and Stop Recording

Start recording as usual. Even though you start playing from the beginning, only the

data played within the Punch In/Punch Out range will be re-recorded.

Use the SUB MENU [▼] button so that “Punch Out:Off” appears on the display.

In the Record Ready Mode (page 88) for the track you will re-record or in the

Rehearsal Mode, use the SUB MENU [▲] and [▼] buttons so that “Punch In:Off”

appears on the display.

12345678

Previously played

data

● Before re-recording

● After Re-recording

Recording start

(Punch In)

Recording stop

(Punch Out)

Previously

played data

Newly played data

Use the [–] and [+] buttons, [1]–[0] number buttons, or the Data Dial to enter the

measure number for using the Punch In feature.

: 3Punch In

t: 5Punch Ou

Use the [–] and [+] buttons, [1]–[0] number buttons, or the Data Dial to enter the

measure number for using the Punch Out feature.

• You can use Punch

In/Punch Out to re-

record multiple tracks

at the same time.

• Punch In/Punch Out

cannot be used for

songs that have no

data recorded in

them. “Punch In: - - -”

will be shown on the

display.

• The Punch Out mea-

sure number cannot

be set lower than the

Punch In measure

number.

Song Recording

• Punch In/Punch Out

recording is available

only when Multi

record mode is en-

gaged. When in the

Quick record-ready

mode, “Punch In: - - -”

or “Punch Out: - - -”

appears on the dis-

play and Punch In/

Punch Out recording

is not accessible.

• If you select the

tracks set as the Ac-

companiment or Har-

mony, “Punch In: - - -”

or “Punch Out: - - -”

appears on the dis-

play and Punch In/

Punch Out recording

is not accessible.

Quantize

With the Quantize feature, the timing of data recorded in a user songs can be

adjusted.

In the Record Ready Mode for the track you want to quantize (page 88) or in the

Rehearsal Mode, use the SUB MENU [▲] and [▼] buttons so that “Quantize: YES”

appears on the display.

Quantize Value Note

4 Quarter note

6 Quarter note triplet

8 Eighth note

12 Eighth note triplet

16 Sixteenth note

24 Sixteenth note triplet

32 Thirty-second note

After making the setting in step 2, use the SUB MENU [▼] button so that “Execute?

No/Yes” appears on the display.

Press the [+] YES button and “Quantize” will be displayed, with the value at the

upper right of the display.

One measure of 8th notes before quantization

After quantization

Use the [–] and [+] buttons, or the Data Dial to select the Quantize value (4, 6, 8,

12, 16, 24, 32).

Set the Quantize value to correspond to the smallest notes in the track you are

working with. For example, if the data was recorded with quarter notes and eighth

notes, use 1/8 for the quantize value. If the quantize function is applied in this case

with the value set to 1/4, the eighth notes would be moved on top of the quarter notes.

YES?Quantize

2: 32Quantize

NO/YES: 1/3Execute?

Pressing the [+] YES button to execute the quantize function.

Press the [–] (NO) button, and the quantize function won’t execute. The display will

return to “Quantize?”.

When Quantize is finished, the display will return to “Quantize? YES”

Song Recording

• Quantize setting is

available only when

Multi record-ready

mode is engaged.

When in the Quick

record-ready mode,

“Quantize? - - -” ap-

pears on the display

and Quantize setting

is not accessible.

Naming User Songs

You can give your own name (8 characters or less) to user songs.

In the Record Ready Mode (pages 84, 88) for the song you want to name, or in the

Rehearsal Mode, use the SUB MENU [▲] and [▼] buttons so that “Song Name”

appears on the display. The current name for the song will be displayed at the upper

right of the display.

The method of setting the characters is the same as for Registration Naming (page

58).

001

SONSongName

SON01

LESSongName

Clearing Song Data

You can clear unneeded song data in two different ways: Clearing Selected Tracks

or Clearing an Entire Song. In either Quick Record or Multi Record Mode, this

operation is done in Record Ready Mode or in Rehearsal Mode.

● Clearing Selected Tracks

While the Song record ready or rehearsal mode is engaged use the SUB MENU [▲]

and [▼] buttons to select the “Track Clear?” function. The track bars for tracks which

contain data will flash, showing that those tracks can be cleared.

YESear?Track Cl

ACMP VOICEVOICEVOICERHYTHM

BASS CHORD

CHORD

PAD PHRASE

PHRASE

RHYTHM

R1R2

MELODY

123456789101112131415 16

DUALSPLIT

213213213219213252016001442468434259391337213001

ACMP VOICEVOICEVOICERHYTHM

BASS CHORD

CHORD

PAD PHRASE

PHRASE

RHYTHM

R1R2

MELODY

123456789101112131415 16

DUALSPLIT

213213213213213252216471442468434259391337213001

● Quick Record

● Multi Record

• When in Quick

Record Mode, Clear

Selected Track will

clear data as follows:

• If the ACMP track is

cleared, data that

would be in tracks 9-

16 in the Multi Record

mode will be cleared

at the same time.

• If Melody tracks that

were recorded with

Dual Voice are

cleared, tracks re-

corded with Multi

Record Mode R1/R2

parts will be cleared at

the same time.

• The tracks recorded

by Quick recording

can be cleared using

the Multi recording

Track Clear function,

and vice versa.

• Demo song tracks

cannot be cleared.

Song Recording

Use the TRACK buttons to select the track you want to clear. The track bar for the

track you selected will light steadily and the track bars for the other tracks will be

turned off.

Once the desired track has been selected, “Are You Sure?” will appear on the

display.

● Quick Record

● Multi Record

Press the [+] (YES) button to actually clear the currently selected track.

While the track is being cleared, “Now Deleting” will appear in the top of the

display.

NO/YESSure?Are You

NO/YESting...Now Dele

When track clear is finished, the display will return to “Track Clear?”

If you press the [–] (NO) button, track clear will not be executed and the display will

return to “Track Clear?”

• While the track is

being cleared, (“Now

Deleting” is dis-

played) never eject

the floppy disk or

turn off the power to

the PSR-730/630.

Song Recording

ACMP VOICEVOICEVOICERHYTHM

BASS CHORD

CHORD

PAD PHRASE

PHRASE

RHYTHM

R1R2

MELODY

123456789101112131415 16

DUALSPLIT

213213213213213252216471442468434259391337213001

ACCOMPANIMENT TRACK

SONG TRACK

R2 R1

161 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

ACCOMPANIMENT TRACK

SONG TRACK

R2 R1

161 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

ACMP VOICEVOICEVOICERHYTHM

BASS CHORD

CHORD

PAD PHRASE

PHRASE

RHYTHM

R1R2

MELODY

123456789101112131415 16

DUALSPLIT

213213213219213252016001442468434259391337213001

● Clearing an Entire Song

Use the song selection sub menu (pages 85, 88) to be sure that you have selected the

song that you want to clear.

While the SONG record-ready or rehearsal mode (page 87) is engaged use the SUB

MENU [▲] and [▼] buttons to select the “Song Clear? YES” function.

Press the [+] (YES) button and “Are You Sure? NO/YES” will appear on the display.

Press the [+] (YES) button a second time to actually clear the currently selected user

song.

NO/YESar?Song Cle

While the song is being cleared, “Now Deleting” will appear at the top of the

display.

When the operation is finished, the display will show “Song Clear? - - -”

Press [–] (NO) if you want to abort the clear operation. The display will return to

“Song Clear? YES”

NO/YESSure?Are You

• While the track is

being cleared, (“Now

Deleting” is dis-

played) never eject

the floppy disk or

turn off power to the

PSR-730/630.

• Demo Songs cannot

be cleared.

Song Edit

The data in user songs can be edited in a way similar to using the Revoice function

for Voices and Styles (page 110). The edited data can be written into the user song data.

While the SONG record-ready or rehearsal mode (page 87) is engaged use the SUB

MENU [▲] and [▼] buttons to select the “Song Edit? YES” function.

When the [+] YES button is pressed, the track bar will flash under the lowest

numbered track that has data in it. This shows that this is the track that is selected

for editing. On the top line of the display, the current voice parameter and value for

the track will be displayed.

ACMP VOICEVOICEVOICERHYTHM

BASS CHORD

CHORD

PAD PHRASE

PHRASE

RHYTHM

R1R2

MELODY

123456789101112131415 16

DUALSPLIT

213213213213213252216471442468434259391337213001

nd Piano1 GraVoice:00

NO/YESt?Song Edi

Song Recording

Press the TRACK button to select the track you will edit. The track bar for the

selected track will light.

Use the SUB MENU [▼] button so that the voice parameter you wish to change

appears on the display. The parameter and value will appear at the top of the display.

In the same way as for the revoice function (page 111), use the [–] and [+] buttons,

[1]–[0] number buttons, or the Data Dial to change the setting.

See page 110 for information about each value.

Repeat steps 3–4 as needed.

When editing is finished, press the SUB MENU [▲] button so that “Disk Save?

YES” is shown on the display. Press the [+] YES button and the song data will be

replaced.

Exit the Record Mode and try playing the song.

ACMP VOICEVOICEVOICERHYTHM

BASS CHORD

CHORD

PAD PHRASE

PHRASE

RHYTHM

R1R2

MELODY

123456789101112131415 16

DUALSPLIT

213213213213213252216471442468434259391337213001

ACCOMPANIMENT TRACK

SONG TRACK

R2 R1

161 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

nd Piano1 GraVoice:00

nd Piano 127Volume:

0 Pan;

nd Pianopth: 0ReverbDe

nd Pianopth: 0ChorusDe

nd Piano: 26DSPDepth

nd Piano 0Octave:

NO/YESe?Disk Sav

• When in Quick

Record Mode, if both

R1 and R2 voices are

recorded on one

track, only the R1

voice can be edited.

• When in Quick

Record Mode, you

cannot edit the ACMP

track.

• If a track with no data

is selected, [- - -] will

appear at the top of

the display and you

won’t be able to edit.

• Each parameter can

be recorded for one

track (one each for a

track). The parameter

changes done in the

middle of the song will

be lost.

Style Recording

The PSR-730/630 lets you record up to three original “user styles” which can be used for auto-

accompaniment in the same way as the preset styles. The user styles are recorded as style

numbers 101, 102, 103, and 104, and each style can be recorded with the full complement

of 8 tracks (RHYTHM 1, RHYTHM 2, BASS, CHORD 1, CHORD 2, PAD, PHRASE 1,

PHRASE 2) and 5 sections (INTRO, MAIN A, MAIN B, ENDING, FILL).

• Material recorded on the STYLE tracks will be retained even after turning the power

off. See page 152 for the details.

• The recorded data will be lost if the power is turned off, the AC adaptor is unplugged,

or the batteries fail during recording.

• The REGISTRATION MEMORY cannot be recalled during style recording.

• The Shortcut functions are not available when one of the Record modes is engaged.

● The STYLE tracks record the following operations and data:

• Note on/off.

• Velocity.

• Voice number (drum kit number).*

• Pitch bend.

Only one event of the item marked with * can be recorded for each track of the sections.

• Up to approximately

1,980 notes for a section

(totally ca. 5,940 notes)

can be recorded in the

PSR-730/630 STYLE

tracks.

Select a Style To Begin With

Select the style from one of the 100 presets that is closest to the type of style

you want to create. You will use this style as a starting point for the user style you

will create.

Style Recording Procedure

• If none of the preset styles

is appropriate, select one

that has the same time sig-

nature and number of mea-

sures as the one you want

to create, then use the “All

Clear” function (page 105)

to clear all preset data be-

fore entering your own.

• If you select a blank user

style to begin with (101 …

104), the style will be in 4/4

time and all sections except

FILL will be 2 measures

long. FILL will be 1 mea-

sure long.

Example 1) When you want to create a user style with 8

beats in 4/4 time, select style number 001 “8 Beat Pop.”

Example 2) When you want to create a user style with 3/4 waltz

time, select user style 099 “Vien. Waltz.”

p18Beat Po

001

ltzVien. Wa

099

Style Recording

Select the Style Record Mode

Press the [STYLE] button to select the Style record mode. The STYLE menu

will automatically be selected and a user style number will appear on the top line

of the display. The beat indicator dots will flash at the currently set tempo,

indicating that the record ready (synchro start) mode is engaged. Also, the

indicators for the auto-accompaniment section buttons (INTRO, MAIN A, MAIN

B, and ENDING) will flash, indicating that a section and track must be selected

before recording can begin.

• The icons of tracks which

already contain data will

appear continuously

rather than flashing when

the style record mode is

selected.

• If the style record mode is

selected while a preset

style is selected, a user

style which does not con-

tain any recorded data will

automatically be selected.

If all user styles already

contain data, however,

user style number 101

(user style number 1) will

be selected.

• If the style record mode is

engaged when a user

style has already been se-

lected, that user style

number will be used for

recording.

• The following panel set-

ting changes will occur

when the style record

mode is engaged:

• The measure number will

be reset to “1”.

• If the Metronome function

is on (page 116), the met-

ronome will sound at the

current tempo.

• The Synchro Stop function

will be turned off.

Engage the Record Ready Mode

Press the [RECORD] button to engage the record ready mode. The [RECORD]

button indicator will light, and the SONG, STYLE, and MULTI PAD [1] … [4]

icons will flash, indicating that you must select one of the corresponding record

modes.

VOICEVOICERHYTHM

BASS CHORD

CHORD

PAD PHRASE

PHRASE

RHYTHM

R1R2

MELODY

123456789 15 16

DUAL

213213471442468434324322340219219

STYLE

INTRO

MAIN / AUTO FILL

ENDING

ACMP VOICEVOICEVOICE

FINGERING mM

augsus

dim

R1R2

MELODY

MULTI PAD

BEAT

GROOVE & DYNAMICS

11 12 13 14 15 16

1234

VOICE

DUALSPLIT

001

213213213213213252

and Piano

119

513

STYLE

SONG

RECORD

100

Style Recording

If Necessary, Select a User Style Number

If the desired user style is not already selected, use the [–] and [+] buttons, [1]–[0]

number buttons, or the Data Dial to select it.

Select a Section to Record

Press the [INTRO], MAIN [A]/[B], [ENDING], or [FILL] button to select a

section for recording.

• Multiple sections can-

not be recorded at the

same time.

• If you don’t specifi-

cally select a section,

the MAIN A section

will automatically be

selected for recording.

• Although the preset

FILL sections have 4

variations (refer to

page 27), user-style

FILL sections can

have only 1. When

using a preset style

as a basis for a user

style, the AA FILL

variation is used.

For example, press the [INTRO] button, lighting the INTRO indicator. The

indicators for the other sections will go out. This shows that the INTRO section has

been selected as the section for recording.

Select a Track to Record

When using a preset style as a basis for a user style, the BASS, CHORD 1, CHORD

2, PAD, PHRASE 1, and PHRASE 2 tracks must be cleared before they can be selected

for recording (see page 105). The RHYTHM 1 and RHYTHM 2 tracks can be

“overdubbed” — i.e. new notes can be added without erasing the original data.

• Only one track can be

recorded at a time.

• If you don’t specifi-

cally select a track,

the RHYTHM 1 track

will automatically be

selected when you

start recording.

To select the INTRO section

Press the INTRO button ....................... the INTRO lamp will light

To select the MAIN A section

Press the MAIN A button...................... the MAIN A lamp will light

To select the MAIN B section

Press the MAIN B button...................... the MAIN B lamp will light

To select the ENDING section

Press the ENDING button .................... the ENDING lamp will light

To select the FILL section

Press the MAIN A/B button twice ......... the MAIN A /B lamp will light

INTRO

MAIN / AUTO FILL

ENDING

At the bottom of the display, the RHYTHM1 track bar will appear (not flashing).

This shows that RHYTHM1 has been selected as the recording track.

RHYTHM

BASS CHORD

CHORD

PAD PHRASE

PHRASE

RHYTHM

MELODY

123456789

471442468434324322340219219

Use the TRACK buttons to select RHYTHM 1, BASS, CHORD 1/2, PAD, or

PHRASE 1/2 as the style track you want to record.

101

Select a Voice, If Necessary

If necessary, select a voice for the track to be recorded by pressing the

[VOICE] button and selecting in the normal way.

Record

Recording will begin as soon as you play a note on the keyboard or press the

[START/STOP] button. The BEAT indicator dots will begin to indicate the

current beat, and the MEASURE parameter will show the current measure

number during recording.

The style will repeat continuously when recording is started, so you can

continue to add (“overdub”) notes until the current track is complete. The style

should be recorded based on a CM7 chord (C Major Seven) in order for it to

function properly when used for auto-accompaniment.

CSC CSC

C = chord tone

C, S = scale tones

• Before actually starting to

record you can try playing

the PSR-730/630 the way it

is set up by using the “Re-

hearsal Mode”: press the

[SYNC START] button to

temporarily disengage the

record ready mode, re-

hearse as necessary, then

press the [SYNC START]

button again to return to the

record ready mode.

• If the memory becomes full

while recording, “Full” will

appear on the display and

recording will stop (the re-

hearsal mode will be en-

gaged).

• Even though you can start

recording with the user style

memory space thoroughly

consumed, “Full” will be

shown on the display and

the recording will forcibly be

stopped. In this case, first

exit from the record mode,

next select the unnecessary

user style, and then enter

the record mode again and

execute the Clear function

(see page 105) to secure the

free space to record.

Style Recording

• The Registration Memory

buttons will be disabled in

the Style record mode.

◆ Rehearsal Mode

If the [SYNC START] button is pressed while in Record Ready Mode, it

will be canceled (the beat lamps will go out) and the PSR-730/630 will enter

Rehearsal Mode. In this mode, you can try playing your song before actually

recording it. Pressing the [SYNC START] button will return to Record

Ready Mode.

IMENT

SYNC STOP START

MULTI PAD

BEATMEASURE

1234

009

START / STOP

RHYTHM

BASS CHORD

CHORD

PAD PHRASE

PHRASE

RHYTHM

MELODY

123456789

471442468434324322340219219

ACCOMPANIMENT TRACK

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

102

• During recording you

can use the TRACK

buttons to turn play-

back of previously-re-

corded tracks on or

off as required.

• For recording the

RHYTHM 1/2 tracks,

the instrument sym-

bols printed on the

front edge of the

panel show you the

instrument assign-

ments to each key.

See Keyboard Per-

cussion on page 140

for playing each drum/

percussion sound.

Observe the following rules when recording the MAIN and FILL sections:

• Use only the CM7 scale tones when recording the BASS and PHRASE tracks (i.e.

C, D, E, G, A, and B).

• Use only the chord tones when recording the CHORD and PAD tracks (i.e. C, E,

G, and B).

Any appropriate chord or chord progression can be used for the INTRO and

ENDING sections.

The basic chord for the accompaniment is called the source chord. The default

source chord is set as CM7, but you can change it to whatever chord is easy for you

to play. For details, see “Refining User Styles with Style File Format” (page 148).

Stop Recording

Stop recording by pressing the [START/STOP] button. The PSR-730/630 will

return to Record Ready Mode.

When recording is stopped the MEASURE number on the display will return to “1”.

• You can also press

the [SYNC START]

button to stop record-

ing and return to the

Record Ready Mode.

Style Recording

Record Additional Sections & Tracks as Required

By repeating steps 5 through 9, above, you can select and record additional sections

and tracks as required.

Exit From the Record Mode

When you’re finished recording a style, press the [RECORD] button so that its

indicator goes out to exit from the record mode. The recorded user style can now be

used in the same way as the preset styles (page 22).

• The voice data in spe-

cific user style tracks

can be “revoiced” in

the same way as the

preset styles, as de-

scribed on page 112.

This, however, does

not actually rewrite

the user style data. In

order to actually

change the user style

data first use the

revoice function, then

immediately engage

and disengage the

style record mode

without recording any

data.

START / STOP

RECORD

103

Style Recording

Drum Cancel

This function makes it possible to erase specific drum instruments from the

RHYTHM 1 and RHYTHM 2 tracks. It’s handy, for example, when you want to erase

just the bass drum recorded on the RHYTHM 1 track.

While recording either the RHYTHM 1 or RHYTHM 2 track, use the SUB MENU

[▲] and [▼] buttons to select “Drum Cancel”.

Then, press the key on the key board corresponding to the instrument you want to

cancel.

celDrum Can

• Drum Cancel cannot

be used for the BASS,

CHORD 1/2, PAD, or

PHRASE 1/2 tracks.

Quantize

Quantize can be used to align notes to the nearest specified beat to tighten up loose

timing.

With the style Record Ready Mode (or Rehearsal Mode) engaged and the target

style and its section selected, use the SUB MENU [▲] and [▼] buttons to select

“Quantize? YES”.

Press the [+] (YES) button to engage the quantize function (or [–] to abort) . The

current quantize value will appear to the left of “Quantize:” on the top line of the

display. Use the [–] and [+] buttons, or the Data Dial to select the desired quantize

value (4, 6, 8, 12, 16, 24, 32). When the quantize function is executed, all notes in

the target track will be aligned with the nearest note of the corresponding value.

YES?Quantize

2: 32Quantize

104

Quantize Value Note

4 Quarter note

6 Quarter note triplet

8 Eighth note

12 Eighth note triplet

16 Sixteenth note

24 Sixteenth note triplet

32 Thirty-second note

Press the SUB MENU [▼] button once so that “Execute? NO/YES” appears on the

display. Then press the [+] (YES) button to execute the quantize function, or the

[–] (NO) button to cancel (the display will return to “Quantize? YES”).

One measure of 8th notes before quantization

After quantization

Style Recording

After the quantize operation is completed, “Undo” will appear on the top line of the

display. Undo lets you undo the effect of applying the quantize function.

Pressing the [START/STOP] button will cause the quantized style to replay so that

you can check it.

Press the [+] (YES) button to undo the quantize operation.

Press the [–] (NO) button and the undo won’t be executed. The display will return

to “Quantize? YES.”

• After exiting from the

“Undo” screen, the

undo function cannot

be applied.

nd PiYESUndo?

Naming Styles

You can give your own name (8 characters or less) to user styles.

With the Style Record Ready Mode (or Rehearsal Mode) engaged and the target

style selected, use the SUB MENU [▲] and [▼] buttons so that “UserStyle...” appears

on the display. The current name for the style will be displayed at the upper right of

the display.

The method of setting the characters is the same as for Registration Naming (page

58).

rSty1e: UseUserStyl

GINALe: ORIUserStyl

105

Style Recording

Clearing User Style Data

This function makes it possible to clear unneeded data from the PSR-730/630 User

Style tracks.

● Clearing an Entire Style

While the STYLE record-ready or rehearsal mode is engaged use the SUB MENU

[▲] and [▼] buttons to select the “All Clear? YES” function, then press the [+] (YES)

button: “Are You Sure? NO/YES” will appear on the display. Press the [+] (YES)

button a second time to actually clear the currently selected user style (the preset styles

cannot be cleared). Press [–] (NO) if you want to abort the clear operation.

● Clearing Selected Style Tracks

While the STYLE record-ready or rehearsal mode is engaged and a section is

selected, use the SUB MENU [▲] and [▼] buttons to select the “Track Clear?”

function. The style track icons corresponding to tracks which contain data will flash.

Use the TRACK buttons to select track(s) you want to clear (the selected tracks will

be bracketed by two horizontal bars).

Once the desired tracks have been selected, “Are You Sure? NO/YES” will appear

on the display. Press the [+] (YES) button to actually clear the currently selected

track(s). Press [–] (NO) if you want to abort the clear operation.

ACMP VOICE

MELODY

11 12 13 14

SPLIT

213213213252

VOICEVOICERHYTHM

BASS CHORD

CHORD

PAD PHRASE

PHRASE

RHYTHM

R1R2

MELODY

123456789 15 16

DUAL

213213471442468434324322340219219

MELODY

201

nd PiYESear?Track Cl

nd PiYESr? GraAll Clea

NO/YESSure?Are You

RHYTHM

BASS CHORD

CHORD

PAD PHRASE

PHRASE

RHYTHM

MELODY

123456789

471442468434324322340219219

ACCOMPANIMENT TRACK

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

106

In addition to the preset MULTI PAD sets, the PSR-730/630 has 16 user-recordable sets that

you can use to store your own creations.

• Material recorded in the MULTI PADs will be retained even after turning the power

off. See page 152 for the details.

• The recorded data will be lost if the power is turned off, the AC adaptor is unplugged,

or the batteries fail during recording.

• The Shortcut functions are not available when one of the Record modes is engaged.

● The MULTI PADs record the following operations and data:

• Note on/off.

• Velocity.

• R1 voice (voice number, volume, reverb depth, chorus depth, pan).

• Chord match on/off.

• Pitch bend, pitch bend range.

• Modulation.

• Sustain on/off.

• Expression ( with Pedal2 ).

• Brightness ( with Pedal2 ).

• Resonance ( with Pedal2 ).

Engage the Record Ready Mode

Press the [RECORD] button to engage the record-ready mode. The [RECORD]

button indicator will light, and the SONG, STYLE, and MULTI PAD [1] … [4] icons

will flash, indicating that you must select one of the corresponding record modes.

Multi Pad Recording Procedure

Multi Pad Recording

• Up to approximately

100 notes for each pad

can be recorded in the

PSR-730/630 MULTI

PADs.

ACMP VOICEVOICEVOICE

FINGERING mM

augsus

dim

R1R2

MELODY

MULTI PAD

BEAT

GROOVE & DYNAMICS

11 12 13 14 15 16

1234

VOICE

DUALSPLIT

001

213213213213213252

and Piano

119

513

STYLE

SONG

RECORD

107

Select the MULTI PAD Record Mode

Press any MULTI PAD button ([1] … [4]) to select the MULTI PAD record mode

(the MULTI PAD button you press will be selected for recording). The MULTI PAD

menu will automatically be selected and a user pad set number will appear on the top

line of the display. The beat indicator dots will flash at the currently set tempo,

indicating that the record ready (synchro-start) mode is engaged.

• If the [RECORD] but-

ton is pressed while a

preset pad set is se-

lected, the lowest-

numbered user pad

set which does not

contain any recorded

data will automatically

be selected. If other

user pad sets already

contain data, how-

ever, user pad num-

ber 1 will be selected.

• The DSP effect can-

not be turned on dur-

ing MULTI PAD re-

cording or the MULTI

PAD record standby

mode. If the DSP ef-

fect is on when the

MULTI PAD record

mode is engaged, it

will automatically be

turned off.

• If the Metronome

function is on (page

116), the metronome

will sound at the cur-

rent tempo.

If Necessary, Select a User Pad Set Number

If the desired user pad set is not already selected, use the [–] and [+] buttons, [1]–

[0] number buttons, or the Data Dial to select as required.

If Necessary, Select a MULTI PAD to Record

If the MULTI PAD you pressed in step 2, above, is not the one you want to record,

you can select any other pad at this point simply pressing the appropriate MULTI PAD

button. The selected MULTI PAD icon will appear in the display.

REPEAT

ONE TOUCH

SETTING

REGISTRATION MULTI PAD

BEAT

TEMPO

TRANSPOSE

MEASURE

MEMORY

213

1234

FREEZE

VOICE

DISK

STYLE

SONG

ACMP/SONG

VOLUME

001

100

116

000

rPad1 UseBank 37:

007

DISK

MULTI PAD

REGIST MEMORY

STOP

1234

MULTI PAD

1234

MULTI PAD

BEAT

1234

Specify Chord Match if Required

If you record a MULTI PAD with a pitched voice, the Chord Match function (see

page 63) can be specified for that pad by using the SUB MENU buttons to select the

Chord Match function for the corresponding pad (“P1ChdMatch” … “P4ChdMatch”)

while in the record standby or rehearsal mode, and then using the [+] button to turn

it “On” or “Off” as you like.

• The Chord Match on/

off status can be

changed in the SUB

MENU “MULTI PAD”

even after exiting the

recording mode.

eggioch: OnP1ChdMat

Multi Pad Recording

108

Record

Recording will begin as soon as you play a note on the keyboard (synchro

start) or press the [START/STOP] button, and the BEAT indicator dots will

begin to indicate the current beat as in the Auto Accompaniment mode. If you

are recording a Chord Match phrase, be sure to base your phrase on a CM7 chord

to ensure proper Chord Match operation. See page 101 for more details on

recording around a CM7 chord.

Stop Recording

Stop recording by pressing the [START/STOP] button. When recording is

stopped, the record-ready mode will be engaged.

• Before actually starting to

record you can try playing the

PSR-730/630 the way it is set

up by using the “Rehearsal

Mode”: press the [SYNC

START] button to temporarily

disengage the record ready

mode, rehearse as necessary,

then press the [SYNC START]

button again to return to the

record ready mode.

• Whenever you record a

MULTI PAD, any previously

recorded material in the same

MULTI PAD will be erased.

• If the memory becomes full

while recording, “Full” will ap-

pear on the display and re-

cording will stop (the record-

ready mode will be engaged).

Record Additional Pads as Required

By repeating steps 3 through 7, above, you can select and record additional

pads as required.

Exit From the Record Mode

When you’re finished recording pads, press the [RECORD] button so that its

indicator goes out to exit from the record mode. The recorded user pad can now

be played back in the same way as the preset pads (page 61).

Multi Pad Recording

MULTI PAD

BEATMEASURE

1234

009

START / STOP

RECORD

109

Multi Pad Recording

Naming Pads

You can give your own name (8 characters or less) to user pad sets.

With the Pad Record Ready Mode (or Rehearsal Mode) engaged and the target Pad

set selected, use the SUB MENU [▲] and [▼] buttons so that “Pad Naming...” appears

on the display. The current name for the Pad set will be displayed at the upper right

of the display.

The method of setting the characters is the same as for Registration Naming (page

58).

rPad1

ng: UsePad Nami

EPAD1ng: LIVPad Nami

This function makes it possible to clear unneeded data from the PSR-730/630

MULTI PADs.

● Clearing an Entire Pad Set

While the MULTI PAD record-ready or rehearsal mode is engaged use the SUB

MENU [▲] and [▼] buttons to select the “Bank Clear? YES” function, then press the

[+] (YES) button: “Are You Sure? NO/YES” will appear on the display. Press the [+]

(YES) button a second time to actually clear the currently selected pad set (the preset

pad sets cannot be cleared). Press [–] (NO) if you want to abort the clear operation.

• If the pad you se-

lected has already

been cleared, “Bank

Clear? - - -” will ap-

pear on the display.

● Clearing Selected MULTI PADs

While the MULTI PAD record-ready or rehearsal mode is engaged use the SUB

MENU [▲] and [▼] buttons to select the “Pad Clear?” function. The MULTI PAD

icons corresponding to pads which contain data will flash (preset pad set data cannot

be cleared).

Use the MULTI PAD buttons to select the pad you want to clear (the icon

corresponding to the selected pad will appear continuously on the display). “Are You

Sure? NO/YES” will appear on the display. Press the [+] (YES) button to actually clear

the currently selected pad. Press [–] (NO) if you want to abort the clear operation.

• If the pad you se-

lected has already

been cleared, “Pad

Clear? - - -” will ap-

pear on the display.

YESar?Bank Cle

YESr?Pad Clea

Clearing User Pad Data

110

The PSR-730/630 REVOICE function lets you change the following parameters for the R1,

R2 and L voices and the AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT tracks.

● Revoice Parameters

Parameter Display Range Comments

Voice Voice Name Assigns a voice number to the specified

PSR-730/630 voice or track.

Volume Volume 0 … 127 Sets the volume of the specified PSR-730/

630 voice or track.

Octave Octave –2 … 2 Shifts the pitch of the specified voice or track

up or down by one or two octaves. A setting of

“0” produces normal pitch.

Pan Pan –7 … 7 Positions the sound of the specified voice or

track from left to right in the stereo sound field.

“–7” is full left, “7” is full right, “0” is center, and

all other settings are corresponding positions

in between.

Reverb Depth RevDepth 0 … 127 Sets the reverb depth for the specified voice

or track, and thus the amount of reverb effect

applied to that voice or track.

Chorus Depth ChoDepth 0 … 127 Sets the chorus depth for the specified voice

or track, and thus the amount of chorus effect

applied to that voice or track.

DSP Depth DspDepth 0 … 127 Sets the DSP depth for the specified voice or

track, and thus the amount of DSP effect

applied to that voice or track.

Select the VOICE REVOICE Mode

While the VOICE menu is selected, press the [REVOICE] button (actually, the

order here is not important: you can also press the [VOICE] button after pressing the

[REVOICE] button). The [REVOICE] button indicator will light and the R1 voice

track will be bracketed by two horizontal bars (i.e. the R1 voice is initially selected for

revoicing).

• The VOICE REVOICE

mode will automati-

cally be selected if the

[REVOICE] button is

pressed while any

menu other than

STYLE or SONG is

selected.

• The VOICE REVOICE

mode cannot be se-

lected while one of

the record modes is

engaged.

Revoicing the R1, R2, and L Voices

Revoicing

• You cannot enter

Revoice Mode when

one of the Record

Modes is engaged.

• With Style Revoice,

the octave and the

DSP depth cannot be

changed.

• When using Style

Revoice for the

RHYTHM1 track, only

drum kit voices (see

page 19) can be se-

lected.

• When using Style

Revoice for the

RHYTHM2 track, any

of the voices can be

selected but no chord

changes will occur

when using Auto Ac-

companiment.

REVOICE

VOICE

STYLE

SONG

VOICE

STYLE

SONG

VOICEVOICEVOICE

R1R2

GROOVE & DYNAMICS

14 15 16

VOICE

DUALSPLIT

001

00 1109084

nd Piano

Gra

PSR-730:

1 … 707

PSR-630:

1 … 692

111

Revoicing

If Necessary Select a Voice to Revoice

Use the three rightmost TRACK buttons to select the voice you want to

revoice: L, R2, or R1. The selected tracks will be bracketed by two horizontal bars.

• The TRACK button below

the selected voice can be

used to turn the voice on or

off. Make sure that the

voice is turned on if you

want to monitor the sound

while revoicing (the R1

voice cannot be turned off).

Select and Edit the Revoice Parameters

Use the SUB MENU [▲] and [▼] buttons to select the desired parameter. The

name of the selected parameter will appear on the top line of the display to the

right of the parameter’s current value. Use the [–] and [+] buttons, the number

buttons, or the data dial to set the parameter’s value as required. Refer to the

“Revoice Parameters” chart on page 111.

• You can jump directly to the

REVOICE R2 VOICE dis-

play by pressing and hold-

ing the [DUAL VOICE] but-

ton for a few seconds.

• You can jump directly to the

REVOICE L VOICE display

by pressing and holding the

[SPLIT VOICE] button for a

few seconds.

Repeat as Required and Exit When Done

Repeat steps 2 and 3, above, to revoice the voices as required, then press the

[REVOICE] button so that its indicator goes out to exit from the REVOICE

mode.

• Minus settings for the Oc-

tave and Pan parameters

can be directly entered by

pressing the appropriate

number button while hold-

ing the [–] button.

• When the DSP type is set

as insertion, the DSP depth

parameter cannot be

changed.

• The REVOICE mode will

automatically be exited if

the MENU [

▲

] and [

▼

] but-

tons are used to select any

of the menus to the left of

the display.

• Save any revoice settings

you want to keep to the

PSR-730/630 REGISTRA-

TION MEMORY (page 57).

The revoice setting are tem-

porary and will be lost if the

power is turned off, a differ-

ent R1 panel voice is se-

lected while the Voice Set

function is on, or a REGIS-

TRATION MEMORY is re-

called.

VOICEVOICEVOICE

L R1R2

14 15 16

DUALSPLIT

001109084

R2 R1

1614 15 16

nd Piano001 GraR1Voice:

: 100R1Volume

: 0R1Octave

: 0R1Pan:

th: 28R1RevDep

th: 70R1ChoDep

th: 26R1DspDep

REVOICE

112

Revoicing

Select the STYLE REVOICE Mode

While the STYLE menu and the style you want to revoice are selected, press the

[REVOICE] button (actually, the order here is not important: you can also press

the [STYLE] button after pressing the [REVOICE] button). The [REVOICE]

button indicator will light and the RHYTHM 1 track will be bracketed by two

horizontal bars (i.e. the RHYTHM 1 track is initially selected for revoicing).

Revoicing a Style

If Necessary Select a Track to Revoice

Use the TRACK buttons to select the accompaniment track you want to revoice:

RHYTHM 1, RHYTHM 2, BASS, CHORD 1, CHORD 2, PAD, PHRASE 1, or

PHRASE 2. The selected tracks will be bracketed by two horizontal bars.

Select the Section(s) to be Revoiced

Press INTRO, MAIN A/B or ENDING button(s) to select the section(s).

• The TRACK button below

the selected track can be

used to turn the track on

or off. Make sure that the

track is turned on if you

want to monitor the sound

while revoicing.

• Only drum kits (see page

19) can be selected for

the RHYTHM 1 track.

• Any voice can be selected

for the RHYTHM 2 track,

but please note that the

RHYTHM 2 track is not af-

fected by the AUTO AC-

COMPANIMENT feature.

• The OCTAVE parameter

and the DSP depth cannot

be edited in the STYLE

REVOICE mode.

• Style revoicing affects all

sections of the selected

style.

• The STYLE REVOICE

mode can even be se-

lected by pressing the

[REVOICE] button while

an accompaniment is

playing.

• The STYLE REVOICE

mode cannot be selected

while one of the record

modes is engaged.

• The STYLE REVOICE

mode cannot be selected

while a voice is being

revoiced during song play-

back.

• The Registration Memory

Freeze function will auto-

matically be turned on

when entering the Style

Revoice Mode.

REVOICE

VOICE

STYLE

SONG

VOICE

STYLE

SONG

REPEAT

REVERB HARMONYCHORUS DSP SYNC STOP

ONE TOUCH

SETTING

MELODY

REGISTRATION

TEMPO

TRANSPOSE MEMORY

123456789

213

FREEZE

DISK

STYLE

SONG

ACMP/SONG

VOLUME

MULTI

EFFECT

DIGITAL EQ

100

116

000

888

p1 Sra8Beat Po

001

VARIATION

RHYTHM

BASS CHORD

CHORD

PAD PHRASE

PHRASE

RHYTHM

362228406339337355219219

MELODY

123456789

888

ACCOMPANIMENT TRACK

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

RHYTHM

BASS CHORD

CHORD

PAD PHRASE

PHRASE

RHYTHM

362228406339337355219219

113

Repeat as Required and Exit When Done

Repeat steps 2 and 4, above, to revoice the tracks as required, then press the

[REVOICE] button so that its indicator goes out to exit from the REVOICE mode.

• The REVOICE mode will

automatically be exited if

the MENU [

▲

] and [

▼

]

buttons are used to select

any of the menus to the

left of the display.

• Save any revoice settings

you want to keep to the

PSR-730/630 REGISTRA-

TION MEMORY (page

57). The revoice setting

are temporary and will be

lost if the power is turned

off, a different style is se-

lected, or a REGISTRA-

TION MEMORY is re-

called.

Select and Edit the Revoice Parameters

Use the SUB MENU [▲] and [▼] buttons to select the desired parameter. The

name of the selected parameter will appear on the top line of the display to the right

of the parameter’s current value. Use the [–] and [+] buttons, the number buttons,

or the data dial to set the parameter’s value as required. Refer to the “Revoice

Parameters” chart on page 110.

Revoicing

REVOICE

• “- - -” will appear on the

top line of the display if

you select an accompani-

ment track which contains

no data for revoicing, and

revoicing will not be pos-

sible.

• Minus settings for the Oc-

tave and Pan parameters

can be directly entered by

pressing the appropriate

number button while hold-

ing the [–] button.

• When a voice (especially

bass voices) used for a

Style is changed from the

XG Voice to the Panel

Voice using the Revoice

function, the octave

played for the voice may

change.

114

Some of the functions in the OVERALL function group have already been described in

appropriate sections of this manual. Others will be introduced for the first time in this section.

Refer to the chart below for the page numbers on which each function is described. The chart

also lists the full name of each function, the abbreviated name which appears on the display,

and the available settings or range of settings. Ranges are indicated by two or more values

separated by ellipsis (…).

Function Display Settings Page

Touch Sensitivity TouchSense 0 … 127 115

Pitch Bend Range PB Range 01 … 12 54

Master Tuning Tuning –50 … +50 115

Scale Tuning Note S.TuneNote C … B 115

Scale Tuning S.TuneValue –64 … 63 115

Song Transpose SongTrans –12 … +12 116

Metronome Metronome Off, On 116

Split Voice Split Point SplitPoint 0 … 127 21

Accompaniment Split Point AcmpSplit 0 … 127 30

Fingering Mode FingerMode Multi,Single, 31

Fingered1, Fingered2,

Full Key, Multi

Voice Set VoiceSet Off, On 116

Pedal1 Pedal1 Sustain … 117

Groove&Dyn.

Pedal2 Pedal2 Expression … 117

Groove&Dyn.

Pedal1 Polarity P1 Polarity Normal, Revers 118

Pedal2 Polarity P2 Polarity Normal, Revers 118

Modulation Wheel ModWheel Modulation, 55

Brightness,

Resonance

To access an OVERALL function first use the MENU [▲] and [▼] buttons to move

the triangular indicator in the display next to “OVERALL”.

Then use the SUB MENU [▲] and [▼] buttons to select the desired function from

within the OVERALL menu. When a function is selected the current setting will

appear to the right of the function name on the top line of the display. Once the function

has been selected, use the [–] and [+] buttons or data dial (or number buttons, where

applicable) to set the function as required.

Overall Functions

GROOVE&DYNAMICS

MIDI

DIGITAL EFFECT

OVERALL

SUB MENU

se: 100TouchSen

115

■ Touch Sensitivity

This function sets the keyboard touch sensitivity. The range is from “0” to “127”.

The higher the value the higher the sensitivity. When the touch sensitivity value is set

to “0”, “Off” appears in the display and the same volume is produced no matter how

hard you play the keys. — this setting can produce a more realistic effect with voices

that normally do not have touch response: e.g. organ and harpsichord.

■ Master Tuning

The Tuning function sets the overall pitch of the PSR-730/630 over a ±100 cent

range (from –100 to +100) in 1-cent increments. Since 1 cent is 1/100th of a semitone,

the total tuning range is from a semitone below normal pitch to a semitone above

normal pitch.

• The “normal” tuning

value (“0”) can be re-

called by simulta-

neously pressing the

[–] and [+] buttons.

• Minus values can be

entered by using the

number buttons while

holding the [–] button.

■ Scale Tuning

Scale tuning allows each individual note of the octave to be tuned over range from

–64 to +63 cents in 1-cent increments (1 cent = 1/100th of a semitone). This makes it

possible to produce subtle tuning variations, or tune the instrument to totally different

scales (e.g. classic or Arabic scales).

First use the S.TuneNote function to select the note to be tuned. The range is from

C to B: C, C#, D, D#, E, F, F#, G, G#, A, A#, B.

• The scale tuning set-

tings are common to

each octave on the

keyboard.

• The Accompaniment

and Multi Pad sound

is affected by Scale

Tuning.

• The “normal” tuning

value (“0”) can be re-

called by simulta-

neously pressing the

[–] and [+] buttons.

• Minus values can be

entered by using the

number buttons while

holding the [–] button.

Then use the S.TuneValue function to tune the selected note as required.

note

■ Pitch Bend Range

See page 54.

■ Modulation Wheel

See page 55.

se: 100TouchSen

te: CS.TuneNo

lue:-50S.TuneVa

0Tuning:

Db Eb

C# D#

Gb Ab Bb

F# G# A#

C# D# F# G# A#

C D E F G A B

Overall Functions

116

■ Metronome

When turned “on” the PSR-730/630 metronome will sound during AUTO ACCOM-

PANIMENT playback as well as SONG playback and recording.

■ Split Voice Split Point

See page 21.

■ Accompaniment Split Point

See page 30.

■ Fingering Mode

See page 31.

■ Voice Set

The VOICE SET feature brings out the best in each individual voice by automati-

cally setting a range of important voice-related parameters whenever an R1 panel

voice is selected. The parameters that may be set by the VOICE SET feature are listed

below. This function lets you turn VOICE SET on or off, as required.

● Voice Set parameter list

■ Song Transpose

This function allows you to transpose only the song to be played back. That means

you can play along with your desired song (Minus-one function) in the desired key

without affecting your performance.

• R1 Voice (Volume, pan)

• R2 Voice (Voice number, volume, octave,

pan, reverb depth, chorus depth, DSP depth)

• Harmony type, volume

• Pitch Bend Range

• DSP Return Level

The parameter below is set whether or not

the voice set function is on or off.

• R1 Voice (Octave, reverb depth, chorus

depth, DSP depth)

• Reverb ON/OFF

• Chorus ON/OFF

• DSP ON/OFF, variation ON/OFF

• DSP type

• Multi Effect ON/OFF

• Multi Effect Part setting

• Multi Effect 1 type, Dry/Wet

• Multi Effect 2 type, Dry/Wet

Overall Functions

s.: 0SongTran

e: OffMetronom

: OnVoiceSet

• The Voice Set func-

tion is on by default

when the power is ini-

tially turned on.

• Since the Transpose

function (page 56)

sets the overall trans-

pose value, if it is

changed, the Song

Transpose value will

be changed by the

same amount at the

same time.

• The “normal” trans-

pose value (“00”) can

be recalled by simul-

taneously pressing

the [–] and [+] but-

tons.

• Minus values can be

entered by using the

number buttons while

holding the [–] button.

• The Song Transpose

value is automatically

set to “00” when the

user song record

mode is engaged.

117

Overall Functions

■ Pedal

The various functions can be assigned to the Pedals 1/2: the footswitch connected

to the SUSTAIN jack (Pedal 1) and the foot controller connected to the FOOT VOL.

jack (Pedal 2) on the rear panel.

● Select the Functions to Be Controlled by the Pedals

Select one of the 16 functions that can be controlled by Pedal 1, and one of the 24

functions that can be controlled by Pedal 2.

Pedal 1/2 Functions

SUSTAIN When you step on the foot switch, sustain is applied to the keyboard notes.

SOSTENUTO When you step on the foot switch, the sostenuto effect is applied to the keyboard notes.

SOFT When you step on the foot switch, the soft effect is applied to the keyboard notes.

REGIST.+ When you step on the foot switch, a register with one number higher is recalled. For

example, if you step on the foot switch with bank 1-3 recalled, 1-4 will be recalled, then

next 1-1 will be recalled.

REGIST. - When you step on the foot switch, a register with one number lower is recalled. For

example, if you step on the foot switch with bank 3-2 recalled, 3-1 will be recalled, then

next 3-4 will be recalled.

TAP TEMPO When the accompaniment is stopped (including synchro start standby), stepping on

the switch the number of beats in a measure will cause the tempo value to be set at

the actual speed at which you tapped the switch, and the accompaniment will start.

For 3/4 time, tap three times, and for 4/4 time, tap 4 times. The tempo can be set in a

range from 32-280.

START/STOP Stepping on the foot switch has the same effect as pressing the START/STOP button

on the panel.

BREAK When you step on the foot switch, accompaniment will stop. Releasing the switch with

the foot will cause it to play again from the next measure.

BASS HOLD When one of the Fingering Modes other than Full Keyboard is selected, the bass root

note will be held as long as you step on the footswitch.

INTRO Stepping on the foot switch has the same effect as pressing the INTRO button on the

panel.

MAIN A/AUTO FILL Stepping on the foot switch has the same effect as pressing the MAIN A/AUTO FILL

button on the panel.

MAIN B/AUTO FILL Stepping on the foot switch has the same effect as pressing the MAIN B/AUTO FILL

button on the panel.

ENDING Stepping on the foot switch has the same effect as pressing the ENDING button on

the panel.

DSP VARIATION Stepping on the foot switch has the same effect as pressing the DSP VARIATION

button on the panel.

HARMONY Stepping on the foot switch has the same effect as pressing the HARMONY button on

the panel.

GROOVE & DYNAMICS Stepping on the foot switch has the same effect as pressing the GROOVE &

DYNAMICS button on the panel.

Pedal Function List

tain SusPedal1:

ression ExpPedal2:

118

Only Pedal 2 Functions

EXPRESSION Simultaneously controls the volume of the R1, R2 and L voices

(your performance).

R1 VOLUME Controls the R1 voice volume.

R2 VOLUME Controls the R2 voice volume.

L VOLUME Controls the L voice volume.

ACMP/SONG VOLUME

Controls the accompaniment/song volume in the same way as the

ACMP/SONG VOLUME [▼] and [▲] buttons.

HARMONY VOLUME Controls the harmony volume.

BRIGHTNESS Controls the brightness of the R1 voice.

RESONANCE Controls the resonance of the R1 voice.

Overall Functions

● Polarity Change (Normal/Reverse)

You can change the polarity of PEDAL 1/2 (foot switch/foot controller).

For example, when you are controlling volume with the foot controller, you can set

whether it increases or decreases when you step on the pedal.

mality:NorP1 Polar

ersity:RevP2 Polar

119

In the rear panel of your PSR-730/630, there are MIDI terminals (MIDI IN, MIDI OUT), a TO

HOST terminal, and a HOST SELECT switch. By using the MIDI functions you can expand

your musical possibilities. This section explains what MIDI is, and what it can do, as well as

how you can use MIDI on your PSR-730/630.

MIDI Functions

What’s MIDI?

No doubt you have heard the terms “acoustic instrument” and “digital instrument.”

In the world today, these are the two main categories of instruments. Let’s consider an

acoustic piano and a classical guitar as representative acoustic instruments. They are

easy to understand. With the piano, you strike a key, and a hammer inside hits some

strings and plays a note. With the guitar, you directly pluck a string and the note

sounds. But how does a digital instrument go about playing a note?

As shown in the illustration above, in an electronic instrument the sampling note

(previously recorded note) stored in the tone generator section (electronic circuit) is

played based on information received from the keyboard. So then what is the

information from the keyboard that becomes the basis for note production?

For example, let’s say you play a “C” quarter note using the grand piano sound on

the PSR-730/630 keyboard. Unlike an acoustic instrument that puts out a resonated

note, the electronic instrument puts out information from the keyboard such as “with

what voice,” “with which key,” “about how strong,” “when was it pressed,” and “when

was it released.” Then each piece of information is changed into a number value and

sent to the tone generator. Using these numbers as a basis, the tone generator plays the

stored sampling note.

● Acoustic guitar note production

● Digital instrument note production

Pluck a string and the body resonates the

sound.

Based on playing information from the keyboard, a

sampling note stored in the tone generator is played

through the speakers.

Example of Keyboard Information

Voice number (with what voice) 01 (grand piano)

Note number (with which key) 60 (C3)

Note on (when was it pressed) and Timing expressed numerically (quarter note)

note off (when was it released)

Velocity (about how strong) 120 (strong)

Tone Generator

(Electronic circuit)

Playing the keyboard

Sampling

Note

Sampling

Note

120

MIDI is an acronym that stands for Musical Instrument Digital Interface, which

allows electronic musical instruments to communicate with each other, by sending

and receiving compatible Note, Control Change, Program Change and various other

types of MIDI data, or messages.

The PSR-730/630 can control a MIDI device by transmitting note related data and

various types of controller data. The PSR-730/630 can be controlled by the incoming

MIDI messages which automatically determine tone generator mode, select MIDI

channels, voices and effects, change parameter values and of course play the voices

specified for the various parts.

MIDI messages can be divided into two groups: Channel messages and System

messages. Below is an explanation of the various types of MIDI messages which the

PSR-730/630 can receive/transmit.

● System Messages

This is data that is used in common by the entire MIDI system. System messages

include messages like Exclusive Messages that transmit data unique to each

instrument manufacturer and Realtime Messages that control the MIDI device.

The messages transmitted/received by the PSR-730/630 are shown in the MIDI

Data Format and MIDI Implementation Chart on pages 168 and 169.

Message Name PSR-730/630 Operation/Panel Setting

Note ON/OFF Messages which are generated when the keyboard is played.

Each message includes a specific note number which corre-

sponds to the key which is pressed, plus a velocity value based

on how hard the key is stuck.

Program Change Voice setting (control change bank select MSB/LSB setting)

Control Change Revoice setting(volume, pan pot, etc.)

Message Name PSR-730/630 Operation/Panel Setting

Exclusive Message Reverb/chorus/DSP settings, etc.

Realtime Messages Clock setting

Start/stop operation

● Channel Messages

The PSR-730/630 is an electronic instrument that can handle 16 channels. This is

usually expressed as “it can play 16 instruments at the same time.” Channel

messages transmit information such as Note ON/OFF, Program Change, for each

of the 16 channels.

MIDI Functions

121

◆ MIDI Terminal/TO HOST Terminal

In order to exchange MIDI data between multiple devices, each device must

be connected by a cable.

There are two ways to connect: from the MIDI terminals of the PSR-730/630

to the MIDI terminals of an external device using a MIDI cable, or from the TO

HOST port of the PSR-730/630 to the serial port of a personal computer using

a special cable.

If you connect from the PSR-730/630 TO HOST terminal to a personal

computer, the PSR-730/630 will be used as a MIDI interface device, meaning

that a specialized MIDI interface device is not necessary.

In the rear panel of the PSR-730/630, there are two kinds of terminals, the

MIDI terminals and the TO HOST terminal.

• MIDI IN ......... Receives MIDI data from another MIDI device.

• MIDI OUT ..... Transmits the PSR-730/630’s keyboard information as MIDI data to

another MIDI device.

• TO HOST ...... Transmits and receives MIDI data to and from a personal computer.

● Remotely play another PSR-730/630

INTO HOST

• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

MIDI

OUT

What You Can Do with MIDI

MIDI transmit

Personal computer,

QY700, etc.

Initial send transmit/receive (page 128).

● Use the PSR-730/630 as a multi tone generator (playing 16 channels at one time).

MIDI receive settings (page 126).

MIDI OUTMIDI IN

PSR-730/630

MIDI INMIDI OUT

MIDI OUTMIDI IN

PSR-730/630 PSR-730/630

MIDI receive

Receive mode for all channels

set to “normal.”

MIDI Receive

MIDI Functions

• When using the TO HOST

terminal to connect to a

personal computer using

Windows, a Yamaha MIDI

driver must be installed in

the personal computer.

The Yamaha MIDI driver

can be obtained at

Yamaha’s home page on

the World Wide Web,

<http://www.yamaha.co.jp/

english/xg/>.

• Special MIDI cables (sold

separately) must be used

for connecting to MIDI de-

vices. They can be bought

at music stores, etc.

• Never use MIDI cables

longer than about 15

meters. Cables longer

than this can pick up

noise which can cause

data errors.

122

● Play music from another keyboard (no tone generator) using the PSR-730/630 XG

tone generator.

MIDI keyboard with

no tone generator

MIDI receive settings (page 126).

MIDI OUTMIDI IN

PSR-730/630

MIDI receive

● Record performance data (1-16 channels) using the PSR-730/630 Auto Accompa-

niment and Multi Pad features on a external sequencer (such as a personal

computer). After recording, edit the data with the sequencer, then play it again on

the PSR-730/630 (playback).

MIDI transmit setting (page 125).

Initial send (page 128).

Personal computer,

QY700, etc.

MIDI INMIDI OUT

MIDI OUTMIDI IN

PSR-530PSR-730/630

Can be used to edit and arrange

after recording

MIDI transmit

MIDI receive (playback)

• When using a per-

sonal computer, spe-

cial software (se-

quencer software) is

needed.

You can enjoy using personal computer music software when you connect your

PSR-730/630’s TO HOST terminal or MIDI terminals to a personal computer.

There are two ways to connect.

● Connect using the PSR-730/630 MIDI terminals.

● Connect using the TO HOST terminal.

■ Connect using the PSR-730/630 MIDI terminals

Using a MIDI interface device installed in the personal computer, connect the MIDI

terminals of the personal computer and the PSR-730/630.

For the connection cable, use a special MIDI cable.

● When the computer has a MIDI interface installed, connect the MIDI OUT terminal

of the personal computer to the MIDI IN terminal of the PSR-730/630. Set the

HOST SELECT switch to “MIDI.”

Connecting to a Personal Computer

(TO HOST Terminal/HOST SELECT Switch)

MIDI Functions

123

● When using a MIDI interface with a Macintosh series computer, connect the RS-

422 terminal of the computer (modem or printer terminal) to the MIDI interface,

then connect the MIDI OUT terminal on the MIDI interface to the MIDI IN terminal

of the PSR-730/630, as show in the diagram below.

Set the HOST SELECT switch on the PSR-730/630 to “MIDI.”

Computer (sequencer software)

MIDI INMIDI OUT

MIDI OUTMIDI IN

PSR-730/630

MAC PC1 PC2 MIDI

MIDI IN

RS-422

MIDI OUT

PSR-730/630

MAC PC1 PC2 MIDI

MIDI interface

• When the HOST SELECT switch is set in the “MIDI” position, input and output in the TO HOST

switch is ignored.

• When using a Macintosh series computer, set the MIDI interface clock setting in the

application software to match the setting of the MIDI interface you are using. For details,

carefully read the owner’s manual for the software you are using.

Macintosh is a registered trademark of Apple Computer, Inc.

IBM PC/AT is a trademark of International Business Machines Corp.

Other company names and product names, etc. in this manual are registered trademarks or trademarks

of those companies.

MIDI Functions

124

■ Connect using the TO HOST terminal

Connect the serial port of the personal computer (RS-232C terminal or RS-422

terminal) to the TO HOST terminal of the PSR-730/630.

For the connection cable, use the cable below (sold separately) that matches the

personal computer type.

• If you connect from

the PSR-730/630 TO

HOST terminal to a

personal computer,

the PSR-730/630 will

be used as a MIDI in-

terface device, mean-

ing that a specialized

MIDI interface device

is not necessary.

• When the HOST SE-

LECT switch is set to

“MAC,” “PC-1,” or

“PC-2,” don’t use the

MIDI IN/OUT termi-

nals. (MIDI data can-

not be sent or re-

ceived through the

MIDI terminals).

• “Host is Offline!!” will

be shown on the dis-

play, when the Host

Select switch is set

appropriately and the

serial cable is con-

nected to the PSR-

730/630 TO HOST

but not to the PC’s se-

rial port (or the cable

is properly connected

to the PC which is

currently turned off).

Macintosh Series

Connect the RS-422 terminal (modem or printer terminal) on the computer to the TO HOST terminal

on the PSR-730/630 using a serial cable (system peripheral cable, 8 bit). Set the PSR-730/630

HOST SELECT switch in the “MAC” position.

• Set the MIDI interface clock in the sequencer software you are using to 1 MHz. For details, carefully read

the owner’s manual for the software you are using.

IBM-PC/AT Series

Connect the RS-232C terminal on the computer to the TO HOST terminal on the PSR-730/630

using a serial cable (D-SUB 9P—>MINI DIN 8P cross cable). Set the PSR-730/630 HOST SELECT

switch in the “PC-2” position.

mini DIN 8-pin mini DIN 8-pin

MAC PC1 PC2 MIDI

• When using a D-SUB 25P—>MINI DIN 8P cross cable, connect using a D-SUB 9P plug adaptor on the

computer side of the cable.

For details about the necessary MIDI settings for computer and sequence software

you are using, see the owner’s manuals for each of them.

mini DIN 8-pin

D-SUB 9-pin

mini DIN 8-pin

D-SUB 25-pin

D-SUB 9-pin

MAC PC1 PC2 MIDI

MIDI Functions

125

The PSR-730/630 MIDI Functions

The PSR-730/630 has the following MIDI functions.

To access a MIDI function first use the MENU [▲] and [▼] buttons to move the

triangular indicator in the display next to “MIDI”, then use the SUB MENU [▲] and

[▼] buttons to select the desired function from within the MIDI menu. When a

function is selected the current setting will appear on the top line of the display. Once

the function has been selected, use the [–] and [+] buttons or data dial (or number

buttons, where applicable) to set the function as required.

Function Display Settings Page

Transmit Channel TransmitCh~ 1 ... 16 125

Transmit Track TransmitTr Right1 ... Off 126

Receive Channel Receive Ch 1 ... 16 126

Receive Mode ReceiveMode Normal, Off, Remote, Bass, Chord 127

Local Control Local~~~ Off, On 127

External Clock Ext.Clock Off, On 128

Initial Data Send Init.Send None 128

Template Template User ... Song Out 129

Ch: 1Transmit

GROOVE&DYNAMICS

DISK

MULTI PAD

REGIST MEMORY

MIDI

DIGITAL EFFECT

OVERALL

SUB MENU

■ Transmit Channel & Transmit Track

The PSR-730/630 can simultaneously transmit data on all 16 MIDI channels. The

Transmit Channel and Transmit Track functions determine what PSR-730/630 data is

transmitted via which MIDI channels.

●Transmit Channel

The “TransmitCh” function selects a MIDI channel to which a PSR-730/630 track

can be assigned via the Transmit Track function, below. First select a transmit

channel, then the transmit track for that channel. Different tracks can be assigned

to each of the 16 MIDI channels. Any of the standard MIDI channels - 1 through 16

— can be specified.

ht1Ch: 1Transmit

MIDI Functions

126

■ Receive Channel & Receive Mode

The PSR-730/630 can simultaneously receive data on all 16 MIDI channels,

allowing it to function as a 16-channel multi-timbral tone generator. The Receive

Channel and Receive Mode functions determine how each channel will respond to

received MIDI data.

●Receive Channel

The “Receive Ch” function selects a MIDI channel to which a receive mode is to

be assigned via the Receive Mode function, below. First select a receive channel,

then the receive mode for that channel. Any of the standard MIDI channels — 1

through 16 — can be specified.

MIDI Functions

● Transmit Track

The “Transmit Tr” function selects the track to be transmitted via the transmit

channel specified by the Transmit Channel function, above. The available settings

are as follows:

Right1 Right-hand keyboard playing (R1 voice)

Right2 Right-hand keyboard playing (R2 voice)

Left Left-hand keyboard playing (L voice)

Harmony1 Harmony notes 1

Harmony2 Harmony notes 2

Harmony3 Harmony notes 3

Rhythm2/Tr2 Auto Accompaniment RHYTHM2 track/Track 2

Rhythm1/Tr1 Auto Accompaniment RHYTHM1 track/Track 1

Bass/Tr3 Auto Accompaniment BASS track/Track 3

Chord1/Tr4 Auto Accompaniment CHORD1 track/Track 4

Chord2/Tr5 Auto Accompaniment CHORD2 track/Track 5

Pad/Tr6 Auto Accompaniment PAD track/Track 6

Phrase1/Tr7 Auto Accompaniment PHRASE1 track/Track 7

Phrase2/Tr8 Auto Accompaniment PHRASE2 track/Track 8

Track 9-16 Track 9-16

Off Off (nothing is transmitted)

• When a track is as-

signed to more than

one MIDI channel, the

data from that track is

transmitted via the

lowest-numbered

channel.

• To avoid MIDI loops

which can cause op-

erational errors, check

the PSR-730/630 Lo-

cal Control setting

(page 127), and the

MIDI THRU settings

of any external MIDI

devices.

• MIDI transmit track

settings will be re-

tained even after turn-

ing the power off. See

page 152 for the de-

tails.

• The channels set for

Rhythm1/Tr1-

Phrase2/Tr8 will be

used to transmit ac-

companiment data

when the PSR-730/

630 is in Style Mode,

and to transmit song

track data when the

PSR-730/630 is in

Song Mode.

• The initial default channel/track settings are:

Channel 1 = R1 voice

Channel 2 = L voice

Channel 3 = Bass / Track3

Channel 4 = Chord1 / Track4

Channel 5 = Chord2 / Track5

Channel 6 = Pad / Track6

Channel 7 = Phrase1 / Track7

Channel 8 = Phrase2 / Track8

Channel 9 = Rhythm1 / Track1

Channel 10 = Rhythm2 / Track2

Channel 11 = R2 voice

Channel 12 = Harmony1

Channel 13 = Harmony2

Channel 14 = Harmony3

Channel 15 = Off

Channel 16 = Off

ht1Tr: RigTransmit

nd PianoCh: 1Receivee

127

●Receive Mode

The “ReceiveMode” function specifies the receive mode for the channel selected

via the Receive Channel function, above. The receive mode settings are as follows:

• MIDI receive mode

settings will be re-

tained even after turn-

ing the power off. See

page 152 for the de-

tails.

• The initial default set-

ting for all channels is

“Normal.”

• In the Record mode,

the Receive mode

cannot be set.

Normal Received MIDI data is sent directly to the PSR-730/630 tone generator. If all

channels are set to “Normal”, the PSR-730/630 functions as a 16-channel

multi-timbral tone generator.

Off No MIDI data is received on channels set to “Off”.

Remote Received MIDI data is handled in the same way as data generated by the

PSR-730/630’s own keyboard. In other words, a remote keyboard could be

used to control the PSR-730/630 AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT functions, etc.

Bass The note on/off messages received at the channel(s) set to “Bass” are

recognized as the bass notes in the accompaniment section. The bass notes

will be detected regardless of the accompaniment on/off and split point

settings on the PSR-730/630 panel.

Chord The note on/off messages received at the channel(s) set to “Chord” are

recognized as the fingerings in the accompaniment section. The chords to

be detected depend on the fingering mode on the PSR-730/630. The chords

will be detected regardless of the accompaniment on/off and split point

settings on the PSR-730/630 panel.

MIDI Functions

nd Pianoode:NormalReceiveM

■ Local Control

“Local Control” refers to the fact that, normally, the PSR-730/630 keyboard

controls the internal tone generator, allowing the internal voices to be played directly

from the keyboard. This situation is “Local Control on” since the internal tone

generator is controlled locally by its own keyboard. Local control can be turned off,

however, so that the keyboard does not play the internal voices, but the appropriate

MIDI information is still transmitted via the MIDI OUT connector when notes are

played on the keyboard. At the same time, the internal tone generator can respond to

MIDI information received on channels set to the “Normal” mode via the MIDI IN

connector. This means that while an external MIDI sequencer, for example, plays the

PSR-730/630 internal voices, an external tone generator can be played from the PSR-

730/630 keyboard. The default Local Control setting is “On”.

nd PianoCh; OnLocal:::

128

■ Initial Data Send

Transmits all current panel settings to a second PSR-730/630 or a MIDI data storage

device. To send the initial data select the “Init.Send Sure?”. Then press the [+] (YES)

to begin transmission of the initial data.

If you want to have the song play back with the panel settings used for recording,

execute the Initial Data Send function before recording the performance on the PSR-

730/630 to an external sequencer.

MIDI Functions

■ Clock

Reception of an external MIDI clock signal can be enabled or disabled as required.

When disabled (“Off”), all of the time-based functions (Auto Accompaniment, SONG

recording and playback, etc.) are controlled by its own internal clock. When MIDI

clock reception is enabled (“On”), however, all timing is controlled by an external

MIDI clock signal received via the MIDI IN terminal (in this case the PSR-730/630

TEMPO setting has no effect). The default setting is “Off”.

• External Clock is “Off”

be default when the

power is initially turnd

on.

• When External Clock

is turned “On”, AUTO

ACCOMPANIMENT

playback cannot be

started via the panel

[START/STOP] but-

ton, or started via the

synchro start function.

Also, the MULTI PAD

playback cannot be

initiated by pressing

the MULT PADs.

• When External Clock

is turned “On”, “EC”

will appear on the

TEMPO display, and

tempo cannot be

changed with the

panel button.

• During Style/Song/

Multi Pad playback, in

the synchro start

mode and in one of

the Record modes,

the display shows

“Init.Send Sure? - - -”

indicating that you

cannot execute the

initial data send op-

eration.

nd Pianok: OffExt.Cloc

nd PiYESd Sure?Init.Sen

129

MIDI Functions

■ MIDI Template

The MIDI settings can be collected into a template (pattern). Just by selecting the

template that fits your purpose, you can set all the MIDI settings in one operation.

Use the MENU [▲] and [▼] buttons to select the MIDI menu so that the triangular

indicator in the display appears next to “MIDI” to the left of the display.

Use the SUB MENU [▲] and [▼] buttons so that “Template” appears on the display.

Referring to the template list below, use the [–] and [+] buttons or the Data Dial to

select a template.

• When you change the

transmit/receive chan-

nel settings after se-

lecting one of the tem-

plates other than the

“User”, the “User”

Template will auto-

matically be selected.

MIDI Template list

Module: XG Template

1. XG Module All receive channels are set to “Normal.”

When using the PSR-730/630 as the multi-timbral XG tone

generator.

2. Accordion The receive channels are set as follows:

1ch: Remote, 2ch: Chord, 3ch: Bass, 4-16ch: Off

When playing the PSR-730/630 by an external MIDI Accordion.

The connected MIDI accordion can play the PSR-730/630 and

detect chords and basses in the auto accompaniment section.

3. MIDI Pedal All receive channels are set to “Bass.”

When playing the PSR-730/630 using a connected (optional) MIDI

pedal. The connected MIDI pedal detects chords and basses in the

auto accompaniment section, allowing you to play on-bass chords.

4. Keyboard Out The transmit channels are set as follows:

1ch: Right1, 2ch: Right2, 4ch: Left, 3ch, 5-16ch: Off

When outputting the performance data (note on/off messages).

Used to play the PSR-730/630 note on/off data with an external

tone generator and to record the PSR-730/630 note on/off data to

an external sequencer.

5. Acmp.Out The transmit channels 9-16 are set with the Accompaniment

tracks.

9-10ch: Rhythms, 11ch: Bass, 12-13ch: Chords, 14ch: Pad, 15-

16ch: Phrases

When outputting the style data. Used to play the PSR-730/630

auto accompaniment data with an external tone generator and to

record the PSR-730/630 auto accompaniment data to an external

sequencer.

6. Song Out All transmit channels are set with the Song tracks 1-16.

When outputting the song data. Used to play the PSR-730/630

song data with an external tone generator and to record your entire

performance on the PSR-730/630 to an external sequencer.

7. User Other than the above settings 1-6.

130

Appendix

PSR-730/630 Display MENU/SUB MENU Structure

MENU SUB MENU FUNCTION PAGE

VOICE Grand Piano (R1 voice name) ...............................R1 voice selection ..........................................17

STYLE 8Beat Pop1 (Style name) ........................................Accompaniment style selection ...................... 22

V.Arranger .............................................................Virtual Arranger on/off ....................................29

STYLE REC UserSty1 ...................................................................User style selection ......................................100

S.ChordRoot ...........................................................Source chord root setting .............................148

S.ChordType ...........................................................Source chord type setting.............................148

NTR ...........................................................................Note transposition rule setting ...................... 148

NTT ...........................................................................Note transposition table setting ....................149

HighestKey .............................................................Highest key setting .......................................149

LowLimit ...................................................................Note range (Low limit) setting.......................149

HighLimit ................................................................Note range (high limit) setting ......................149

RTR ...........................................................................Retrigger rule setting ....................................149

Quantize? ................................................................Quantize .......................................................103

UserStyle ................................................................User style name ...........................................104

All Clear? .............................................................User style clear.............................................105

Track Clear? ........................................................Track clear....................................................105

Drum Cancel ...........................................................Drum cancel .................................................103

SONG Trumpet (Song name) ...............................................Song selection ................................................76

Play Mode ................................................................Play mode selection .......................................77

Measure .....................................................................Measure from which to start playback ............78

A-B Repeat .............................................................Repeat playback setting .................................80

SongRepeat .............................................................Song repeat setting ........................................81

NextSong ...................................................................Next song setting............................................82

SONG REC SONG–001 ...................................................................User Song selection .................................85, 88

QuickRecord ...........................................................Record mode (Quick/Multi) selection ............. 88

Part Select ...........................................................Part selection (Multi record) ...........................88

Punch In ...................................................................Measure selection (Multi record) ....................92

Punch Out ................................................................Measure selection (Multi record) ................... 92

Quantize? ................................................................Quantize .........................................................93

SongName ...................................................................User song name .............................................94

Song Clear? ...........................................................Song clear ......................................................96

Track Clear? ........................................................Track clear......................................................94

Measure .....................................................................Measure from which to start playback ............78

Song Edit? .............................................................Song edit ........................................................96

Voice ...........................................................................Voice selection (Song edit).............................97

Volume ........................................................................Volume setting (Song edit) .............................97

Pan ...........................................................................Pan setting (Song edit)................................... 97

ReverbDepth ...........................................................Reverb depth setting (Song edit)....................97

ChorusDepth ...........................................................Chorus depth setting (Song edit)....................97

DSPDepth ...................................................................DSP depth setting (Song edit) ........................ 97

Octave ........................................................................Octave setting (Song edit) ..............................97

131

PSR-730/630 Display MENU/SUB MENU Structure

MENU SUB MENU FUNCTION PAGE

DISK Load From Disk? ................................................Loading data from a disk ................................ 70

Save To Disk? ..................................................... Saving data to a disk ......................................68

Format Disk? ........................................................Formatting a disk............................................ 67

Disk Copy? .............................................................Copying disk ................................................... 72

Song Copy? .............................................................Copying a song in a disk ................................ 73

Delete File? ........................................................Deleting a file in a disk ................................... 75

REGISTRATION Bank 01 (Bank name)................................................Registration bank selection ............................ 57

REGISTRATION MEMORY Button

Reg Naming .............................................................Registration bank name ................................. 58

MULTI PAD Bank 01 (Multi Pad set name) ...................................Multi pad set selection ....................................61

MULTI PAD STOP Button

P1ChdMatch .............................................................Chord match on/off (pad 1) ............................ 63

P2ChdMatch .............................................................Chord match on/off (pad 2) ............................ 63

P3ChdMatch .............................................................Chord match on/off (pad 3) ............................ 63

P4ChdMatch .............................................................Chord match on/off (pad 4) ............................ 63

MULTI PAD REC Bank 37 (Multi Pad set name) ...................................User pad set selection ..................................107

P1ChdMatch .............................................................Chord match on/off (user pad 1) ..................107

P2ChdMatch .............................................................Chord match on/off (user pad 2) ..................107

P3ChdMatch .............................................................Chord match on/off (user pad 3) ..................107

P4ChdMatch .............................................................Chord match on/off (user pad 4) ..................107

Bank Clear? ...........................................................Bank clear ....................................................109

Pad Clear? .............................................................Pad clear ......................................................109

Pad Naming .............................................................User pad name .............................................109

MIDI TransmitCh .............................................................Transmit channel setting .............................. 125

TransmitTr .............................................................Transmit track setting ...................................126

Receive Ch .............................................................Receive channel setting ...............................126

ReceiveMode ...........................................................Receive mode setting...................................127

Local ...........................................................................Local on/off ...................................................127

Ext.Clock ................................................................External/internal clock selection ...................128

Init.Send ................................................................Initial data send ............................................ 128

Template ...................................................................MIDI template selection................................ 129

DIGITAL EFFECT Reverb: 1 Hall 1 ..............................................Reverb type selection ..................................... 43

REVERB Button

Rev.Return .............................................................Reverb return level setting .............................43

Chorus: 1 Chorus1 ...........................................Chorus type selection ..................................... 44

CHORUS Button

Cho.Return .............................................................Chorus return level setting .............................44

DSP: 1 Hall 1 ..................................................... DSP type selection .........................................46

DSP Button

DSP Return .............................................................DSP return level setting.................................. 46

132

PSR-730/630 Display MENU/SUB MENU Structure

MENU SUB MENU FUNCTION PAGE

Harmony: 1 Duet ................................................Harmony type selection ..................................47

HARMONY Button

Harm.Vol ...................................................................Harmony volume setting.................................48

Effect1 In (PSR-730) ...........................................Effect1 part setting .........................................49

MULTI EFFECT Button

Effect2 In (PSR-730) ...........................................Effect2 part setting .........................................49

Effect1 (PSR-730) ...................................................Effect1 type selection ..................................... 50

Effect2 (PSR-730) ...................................................Effect2 type selection ..................................... 50

Eff1Dry/Wet (PSR-730).........................................Effect1 dry/wet setting ....................................50

Eff2Dry/Wet (PSR-730).........................................Effect2 dry/wet setting ....................................50

EQ Type (PSR-730) ...................................................Equalizer type selection .................................52

DIGITAL EQ Button

LowGain (PSR-730) ...................................................Low Gain setting (Equalizer) .......................... 53

LowMidGain (PSR-730) ...........................................LowMidGain setting (Equalizer) .....................53

MidGain (PSR-730) ...................................................MidGain setting (Equalizer) ............................ 53

HighMidGain (PSR-730).........................................HighMidGain setting (Equalizer).....................53

HighGain (PSR-730).................................................HighGain setting (Equalizer) .......................... 53

OVERALL TouchSense .............................................................Touch sensitivity setting ...............................115

PB Range ...................................................................Pitch bend range setting.................................54

Tuning ........................................................................Overall tuning ...............................................115

S.TuneNote .............................................................Scale tuning (note) setting............................115

S.TuneValue ...........................................................Scale tuning (value) setting ..........................115

SongTrans. .............................................................Song transposition setting ............................116

Metronome ................................................................Metronome on/off .........................................116

SplitPoint .............................................................Split point setting (Split voice) ........................ 21

AcmpSplit ................................................................Split point setting (Auto accompaniment) .......30

FingerMode .............................................................Fingering mode selection ............................... 31

AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT ON/OFF Button

VoiceSet ...................................................................Voice set on/off.............................................116

Pedal1 ........................................................................Selecting Pedal1 function ............................. 117

Pedal2 ........................................................................Selecting Pedal2 function ............................. 117

P1 Polarity ...........................................................Pedal1 polarity setting ..................................118

P2 Polarity ...........................................................Pedal2 polarity setting ..................................118

ModWheel (PSR-730).................................................Selecting modulation wheel function ..............55

GROOVE & DYNAMICS BeatGroove .............................................................Beat groove template selection ......................36

(PSR-730)

GROOVE & DYNAMICS Button

MeasGroove .............................................................Measure groove template selection ............... 37

Dynamics ...................................................................Dynamics template selection..........................38

DynamcsRate ...........................................................Dynamics rate setting..................................... 39

ExpandRate .............................................................Expand rate setting ........................................ 39

BoostRate ................................................................Boost rate setting ...........................................40

• Sub-menu items with “

” have shortcut access (press and hold the specified button for a few seconds to

jump directly to the associated sub-menu function). In addition to the shortuts listed above, the [DUAL VOICE]

button can be held to jump to the R2 voice revoice function, and the [SPLIT VOICE] button can be held to jump

to the L voice revoice function.

133

Voice List

Voice

Bank Select

MIDI

Voice Name

Number

MSB LSB

Program

Change

Number

Piano

1 0 112 0 Grand Piano

2 0 112 1 BrightPiano

3 0 112 3 Honky Tonk

4 0 112 2 Midi Grand

5 0 113 2 CP 80

6 0 114 4 Galaxy EP

7 0 117 5 Super DX

8 0 112 5 DX Modern

9 0 112 4 Funk EP

10 0 115 5 Modern EP

11 0 113 5 Hyper Tines

12 0 116 5 New Tines

13 0 114 5 Venus EP

14 0 113 4 Tremolo EP

15 0 114 2 Rock Piano

16 0 112 7 Clavi

17 0 113 7 Wah Clavi

18 0 112 6 Harpsichord

19 0 113 6 GrandHarpsi

Chromatic Percussion

20 0 112 11 Vibraphone

21 0 113 11 Jazz Vibes

22 0 112 12 Marimba

23 0 112 13 Xylophone

24 0 112 114 Steel Drums

25 0 112 8 Celesta

26 0 112 9 Glocken

27 0 112 10 Music Box

28 0 112 14 TubularBells

29 0 112 108 Kalimba

30 0 112 47 Timpani

31 0 112 15 Dulcimer

Organ

32 0 112 16 Jazz Organ1

33 0 113 16 Jazz Organ2

34 0 112 17 Click Organ

35 0 113 17 Dance Organ

36 0 115 16 Drawbar Org

37 0 115 17 Mellow Draw

38 0 116 16 Bright Draw

39 0 112 18 Rock Organ1

40 0 113 18 Rock Organ2

41 0 114 18 Purple Org

42 0 116 17 60’s Organ

43 0 117 17 Blues Organ

44 0 120 16 Mellow Org

45 0 120 17 Perc.Organ

46 0 117 16 16+1 Organ

47 0 118 16 16+2 Organ

48 0 119 16 16+4 Organ

49 0 118 17 Elec.Organ

50 0 114 16 TheatreOrg1

51 0 114 17 TheatreOrg2

Voice

Bank Select

MIDI

Voice Name

Number

MSB LSB

Program

Change

Number

■Maximum Polyphony

The PSR-730 has 64-note maximum polyphony and the PSR-630 has 32.

Auto Accompaniment uses a number of the available notes, so when Auto

Accompaniment is used the total number of notes that can be played on the

keyboard is correspondingly reduced. The same applies to the Dual Voice,

Split Voice, Multi Pad, and Song functions.

When the maximum polyphony is exceeded, notes are played using last-

note priority.

• The Voice List includes MIDI program

change numbers for each voice. Use

these program change numbers when

playing the PSR-730/630 via MIDI from an

external device.

• When the sustain or sostenuto pedal

functions are being used (page 117),

some voices may sound continuously or

have a long decay after the notes have

been released while the pedal is held.

[PSR-730] Panel Voice List

52 0 112 19 Pipe Organ

53 0 113 19 ChapelOrgan

54 0 112 20 Reed Organ

Accordion

55 0 112 21 Musette

56 0 115 21 Accordion

57 0 113 21 Trad. Accrd

58 0 112 23 Tango Accrd

59 0 113 23 Bandoneon

60 0 114 21 Soft Accrd

61 0 112 22 Harmonica

Guitar

62 0 112 24 Classic Gtr

63 0 113 24 Spanish Gtr

64 0 112 25 Folk Guitar

65 0 113 25 12StrGuitar

66 0 112 26 Jazz Guitar

67 0 113 26 Octave Gtr

68 0 114 26 HawaiianGtr

69 0 116 27 BrightClean

70 0 118 27 SolidGuitar

71 0 112 27 CleanGuitar

72 0 119 27 Elec.12Str

73 0 113 27 Tremolo Gtr

74 0 114 27 Slap Guitar

75 0 113 28 Funk Guitar

76 0 112 28 MutedGuitar

77 0 113 29 FeedbackGtr

78 0 112 29 Overdrive

79 0 112 30 Distortion

80 0 115 27 PedalSteel

81 0 114 25 Mandolin

Bass

82 0 112 32 Aco.Bass

83 0 114 32 Bass&Cymbal

84 0 112 33 FingerBass

85 0 112 34 Pick Bass

86 0 112 35 Fretless

87 0 113 35 Jaco Bass

88 0 119 17 Organ Bass

89 0 112 36 Slap Bass

90 0 112 37 Funk Bass

91 0 113 36 Fusion Bass

92 0 112 38 Synth Bass

93 0 112 39 Analog Bass

94 0 113 39 Dance Bass

95 0 113 38 Hi Q Bass

96 0 114 38 Rave Bass

Solo Strings

97 0 112 40 Solo Violin

98 0 113 40 Soft Violin

99 0 112 110 Fiddle

100 0 112 41 Viola

101 0 112 42 Cello

134

102 0 112 43 Contrabass

103 0 112 46 Harp

104 0 113 46 Hackbrett

105 0 112 106 Shamisen

106 0 112 107 Koto

107 0 112 104 Sitar

108 0 112 105 Banjo

Ensemble

109 0 112 48 Strings

110 0 113 48 OrchStrings

111 0 114 48 Symphon. Str

112 0 113 49 SlowStrings

113 0 114 49 Str.Quartet

114 0 115 48 ConcertoStr

115 0 115 49 MarcatoStrs

116 0 112 49 ChamberStrs

117 0 116 48 Mellow Orch

118 0 112 44 TremoloStrs

119 0 112 45 PizzStrings

120 0 112 50 Syn Strings

121 0 112 51 Analog Strs

122 0 112 52 Choir

123 0 112 54 Air Choir

124 0 113 52 Vocal Ensbl

125 0 112 53 Vox Humana

126 0 113 53 Gothic Vox

127 0 113 54 Voices

128 0 112 55 Orch.Hit

Solo Brass

129 0 115 56 Sweet Trp

130 0 112 56 SoloTrumpet

131 0 114 56 SoftTrumpet

132 0 113 56 Flugel Horn

133 0 112 59 Muted Trp

134 0 112 57 Trombone

135 0 114 57 MelTrombone

136 0 112 60 French Horn

137 0 112 58 Tuba

Brass Ensemble

138 0 112 61 BrasSection

139 0 113 61 BigBandBrs

140 0 116 61 MellowBrass

141 0 117 61 Small Brass

142 0 118 61 Pop Brass

143 0 119 61 MellowHorns

144 0 113 59 BallroomBrs

145 0 114 61 Full Horns

146 0 115 61 High Brass

147 0 120 61 BrightBrass

148 0 121 61 Big Brass

149 0 113 57 Trb.Section

150 0 112 62 Synth Brass

151 0 112 63 Analog Brs

152 0 113 62 Jump Brass

153 0 114 62 TechnoBrass

Reed

154 0 112 64 Soprano Sax

155 0 112 65 Alto Sax

156 0 113 65 BreathyAlto

157 0 112 66 Tenor Sax

158 0 114 66 BreathTenor

159 0 112 67 BaritoneSax

160 0 116 66 Sax Section

161 0 112 71 Clarinet

162 0 113 71 MelClarinet

163 0 113 66 WoodwindEns

164 0 115 66 Brass Combo

Voice

Bank Select

MIDI

Voice Name

Number

MSB LSB

Program

Change

Number

Voice

Bank Select

MIDI

Voice Name

Number

MSB LSB

Program

Change

Number

165 0 112 68 Oboe

166 0 112 69 EnglishHorn

167 0 112 70 Bassoon

168 0 112 109 Bagpipe

Pipe

169 0 112 73 Flute

170 0 112 75 Pan Flute

171 0 112 72 Piccolo

172 0 113 73 EthnicFlute

173 0 112 77 Shakuhachi

174 0 112 78 Whistle

175 0 112 74 Recorder

176 0 112 79 Ocarina

Synth Lead

177 0 112 80 Square Lead

178 0 112 81 Saw.Lead

179 0 113 81 Big Lead

180 0 112 98 Stardust

181 0 114 81 Blaster

182 0 115 81 Analogon

183 0 113 80 Vintage Ld

184 0 113 98 Sun Bell

185 0 112 83 Aero Lead

186 0 116 81 Fire Wire

187 0 114 80 Mini Lead

188 0 115 80 Vinylead

189 0 117 81 Warp

190 0 116 80 Hi Bias

191 0 117 80 Meta Wood

192 0 118 80 Tiny Lead

193 0 118 81 Sub Aqua

194 0 119 81 Fargo

Synth Pad

195 0 113 94 Insomnia

196 0 112 90 Krypton

197 0 113 99 Cyber Pad

198 0 112 95 Wave 2001

199 0 112 94 Equinox

200 0 114 88 Stargate

201 0 112 92 DX Pad

202 0 112 93 Loch Ness

203 0 112 88 Fantasia

204 0 115 88 Golden Age

205 0 112 91 Xenon Pad

206 0 112 89 Area 51

207 0 112 99 Atmosphere

208 0 113 89 Dark Moon

209 0 115 94 Ionosphere

210 0 113 93 Phase IV

211 0 113 88 Symbiont

212 0 114 94 Solaris

213 0 116 88 Time Travel

214 0 117 88 Millenium

215 0 113 95 Transform

Drum Kits

216 127 0 0 Std.Kit1

217 127 0 1 Std.Kit2

218 127 0 8 Room Kit

219 127 0 16 Rock Kit

220 127 0 24 Electro Kit

221 127 0 25 Analog Kit

222 127 0 27 Dance Kit

223 127 0 32 Jazz Kit

224 127 0 40 Brush Kit

225 127 0 48 Classic Kit

226 126 0 0 SFX Kit1

227 126 0 1 SFX Kit2

Voice List

135

Piano

1 0 112 0 Grand Piano

2 0 112 1 BrightPiano

3 0 112 3 Honky Tonk

4 0 112 2 Midi Grand

5 0 113 2 CP 80

6 0 114 4 Galaxy EP

7 0 112 5 DX Modern

8 0 112 4 Funk EP

9 0 115 5 Modern EP

10 0 113 5 Hyper Tines

11 0 116 5 New Tines

12 0 114 5 Venus EP

13 0 113 4 Tremolo EP

14 0 114 2 Rock Piano

15 0 112 7 Clavi

16 0 113 7 Wah Clavi

17 0 112 6 Harpsichord

18 0 113 6 GrandHarpsi

Chromatic Percussion

19 0 112 11 Vibraphone

20 0 113 11 Jazz Vibes

21 0 112 12 Marimba

22 0 112 13 Xylophone

23 0 112 114 Steel Drums

24 0 112 8 Celesta

25 0 112 9 Glocken

26 0 112 10 Music Box

27 0 112 14 TubularBells

28 0 112 108 Kalimba

29 0 112 47 Timpani

30 0 112 15 Dulcimer

Organ

31 0 112 16 Jazz Organ1

32 0 113 16 Jazz Organ2

33 0 112 17 Click Organ

34 0 113 17 Dance Organ

35 0 115 16 Drawbar Org

36 0 115 17 Mellow Draw

37 0 116 16 Bright Draw

38 0 112 18 Rock Organ1

39 0 113 18 Rock Organ2

40 0 114 18 Purple Org

41 0 116 17 60’s Organ

42 0 117 17 Blues Organ

43 0 117 16 16+1 Organ

44 0 118 16 16+2 Organ

45 0 119 16 16+4 Organ

46 0 118 17 Elec.Organ

47 0 114 16 TheatreOrg1

48 0 114 17 TheatreOrg2

49 0 112 19 Pipe Organ

50 0 113 19 ChapelOrgan

51 0 112 20 Reed Organ

Accordion

52 0 113 21 Trad. Accrd

53 0 112 21 Musette

54 0 112 23 Tango Accrd

55 0 113 23 Bandoneon

56 0 114 21 Soft Accrd

57 0 112 22 Harmonica

Guitar

58 0 112 24 Classic Gtr

Voice

Bank Select

MIDI

Voice Name

Number

MSB LSB

Program

Change

Number

Voice

Bank Select

MIDI

Voice Name

Number

MSB LSB

Program

Change

Number

59 0 113 24 Spanish Gtr

60 0 112 25 Folk Guitar

61 0 113 25 12StrGuitar

62 0 112 26 Jazz Guitar

63 0 113 26 Octave Gtr

64 0 114 26 HawaiianGtr

65 0 112 27 CleanGuitar

66 0 113 27 Tremolo Gtr

67 0 114 27 Slap Guitar

68 0 113 28 Funk Guitar

69 0 112 28 MutedGuitar

70 0 113 29 FeedbackGtr

71 0 112 29 Overdrive

72 0 112 30 Distortion

73 0 115 27 PedalSteel

Bass

74 0 112 32 Aco.Bass

75 0 114 32 Bass&Cymbal

76 0 112 33 FingerBass

77 0 112 34 Pick Bass

78 0 112 35 Fretless

79 0 113 35 Jaco Bass

80 0 119 17 Organ Bass

81 0 112 36 Slap Bass

82 0 112 37 Funk Bass

83 0 113 36 Fusion Bass

84 0 112 38 Synth Bass

85 0 112 39 Analog Bass

86 0 113 39 Dance Bass

87 0 113 38 Hi Q Bass

88 0 114 38 Rave Bass

Solo Strings

89 0 112 40 Solo Violin

90 0 113 40 Soft Violin

91 0 112 110 Fiddle

92 0 112 41 Viola

93 0 112 42 Cello

94 0 112 43 Contrabass

95 0 112 46 Harp

96 0 113 46 Hackbrett

97 0 112 106 Shamisen

98 0 112 107 Koto

99 0 112 104 Sitar

100 0 112 105 Banjo

Ensemble

101 0 112 48 Strings

102 0 113 48 OrchStrings

103 0 114 48 Symphon. Str

104 0 113 49 SlowStrings

105 0 114 49 Str.Quartet

106 0 115 48 ConcertoStr

107 0 115 49 MarcatoStrs

108 0 112 49 ChamberStrs

109 0 112 44 TremoloStrs

110 0 112 45 PizzStrings

111 0 112 50 Syn Strings

112 0 112 51 Analog Strs

113 0 112 52 Choir

114 0 112 54 Air Choir

115 0 113 52 Vocal Ensbl

116 0 112 53 Vox Humana

117 0 113 53 Gothic Vox

118 0 112 55 Orch.Hit

Voice List

[PSR-630] Panel Voice List

136

Solo Brass

119 0 112 56 SoloTrumpet

120 0 114 56 SoftTrumpet

121 0 113 56 Flugel Horn

122 0 112 59 Muted Trp

123 0 112 57 Trombone

124 0 114 57 MelTrombone

125 0 112 60 French Horn

126 0 112 58 Tuba

Brass Ensemble

127 0 113 61 BigBandBrs

128 0 112 61 BrasSection

129 0 116 61 MellowBrass

130 0 117 61 Small Brass

131 0 118 61 Pop Brass

132 0 119 61 MellowHorns

133 0 113 59 BallroomBrs

134 0 114 61 Full Horns

135 0 115 61 High Brass

136 0 113 57 Trb.Section

137 0 112 62 Synth Brass

138 0 112 63 Analog Brs

139 0 113 62 Jump Brass

140 0 114 62 TechnoBrass

Reed

141 0 112 64 Soprano Sax

142 0 112 65 Alto Sax

143 0 113 65 BreathyAlto

144 0 112 66 Tenor Sax

145 0 114 66 BreathTenor

146 0 112 67 BaritoneSax

147 0 116 66 Sax Section

148 0 112 71 Clarinet

149 0 113 71 MelClarinet

150 0 113 66 WoodwindEns

151 0 115 66 Brass Combo

152 0 112 68 Oboe

153 0 112 69 EnglishHorn

154 0 112 70 Bassoon

155 0 112 109 Bagpipe

Pipe

156 0 112 73 Flute

157 0 112 75 Pan Flute

158 0 112 72 Piccolo

159 0 113 73 EthnicFlute

160 0 112 77 Shakuhachi

161 0 112 78 Whistle

162 0 112 74 Recorder

163 0 112 79 Ocarina

Synth Lead

164 0 112 80 Square Lead

165 0 112 81 Saw.Lead

166 0 113 81 Big Lead

167 0 112 98 Stardust

168 0 114 81 Blaster

169 0 115 81 Analogon

170 0 113 80 Vintage Ld

171 0 113 98 Sun Bell

172 0 112 83 Aero Lead

173 0 116 81 Fire Wire

174 0 114 80 Mini Lead

175 0 115 80 Vinylead

176 0 117 81 Warp

Voice

Bank Select

MIDI

Voice Name

Number

MSB LSB

Program

Change

Number

177 0 116 80 Hi Bias

178 0 117 80 Meta Wood

179 0 118 80 Tiny Lead

180 0 118 81 Sub Aqua

181 0 119 81 Fargo

Synth Pad

182 0 113 94 Insomnia

183 0 112 90 Krypton

184 0 113 99 Cyber Pad

185 0 112 95 Wave 2001

186 0 112 94 Equinox

187 0 114 88 Stargate

188 0 112 92 DX Pad

189 0 112 93 Loch Ness

190 0 112 88 Fantasia

191 0 115 88 Golden Age

192 0 112 91 Xenon Pad

193 0 112 89 Area 51

194 0 112 99 Atmosphere

195 0 113 89 Dark Moon

196 0 115 94 Ionosphere

197 0 113 93 Phase IV

198 0 113 88 Symbiont

199 0 114 94 Solaris

200 0 113 95 Transform

Drum Kits

201 127 0 0 Std.Kit1

202 127 0 1 Std.Kit2

203 127 0 8 Room Kit

204 127 0 16 Rock Kit

205 127 0 24 Electro Kit

206 127 0 25 Analog Kit

207 127 0 27 Dance Kit

208 127 0 32 Jazz Kit

209 127 0 40 Brush Kit

210 127 0 48 Classic Kit

211 126 0 0 SFX Kit1

212 126 0 1 SFX Kit2

Voice

Bank Select

MIDI

Voice Name

Number

MSB LSB

Program

Change

Number

Voice List

137

[PSR-730/630] XG Voice List

Piano

228 213 0 0 0 GrandPno

229 214 0 1 0 GrndPnoK

230 215 0 18 0 MelloGrP

231 216 0 40 0 PianoStr

232 217 0 41 0 Dream

233 218 0 0 1 BritePno

234 219 0 1 1 BritPnoK

235 220 0 0 2 E.Grand

236 221 0 1 2 ElGrPnoK

237 222 0 32 2 Det.CP80

238 223 0 40 2 ElGrPno1

239 224 0 41 2 ElGrPno2

240 225 0 0 3 HnkyTonk

241 226 0 1 3 HnkyTnkK

242 227 0 0 4 E.Piano1

243 228 0 1 4 El.Pno1K

244 229 0 18 4 MelloEP1

245 230 0 32 4 Chor.EP1

246 231 0 40 4 HardEl.P

247 232 0 45 4 VX El.P1

248 233 0 64 4 60sEl.P

249 234 0 0 5 E.Piano2

250 235 0 1 5 El.Pno2K

251 236 0 32 5 Chor.EP2

252 237 0 33 5 DX Hard

253 238 0 34 5 DXLegend

254 239 0 40 5 DX Phase

255 240 0 41 5 DX+Analg

256 241 0 42 5 DXKotoEP

257 242 0 45 5 VX El.P2

258 243 0 0 6 Harpsi.

259 244 0 1 6 Harpsi.K

260 245 0 25 6 Harpsi.2

261 246 0 35 6 Harpsi.3

262 247 0 0 7 Clavi.

263 248 0 1 7 Clavi. K

264 249 0 27 7 ClaviWah

265 250 0 64 7 PulseClv

266 251 0 65 7 PierceCl

Chromatic Percussion

267 252 0 0 8 Celesta

268 253 0 0 9 Glocken

269 254 0 0 10 MusicBox

270 255 0 64 10 Orgel

271 256 0 0 11 Vibes

272 257 0 1 11 VibesK

273 258 0 45 11 HardVibe

274 259 0 0 12 Marimba

275 260 0 1 12 MarimbaK

276 261 0 64 12 SineMrmb

277 262 0 97 12 Balafon2

278 263 0 98 12 Log Drum

279 264 0 0 13 Xylophon

280 265 0 0 14 TubulBel

281 266 0 96 14 ChrchBel

282 267 0 97 14 Carillon

283 268 0 0 15 Dulcimer

284 269 0 35 15 Dulcimr2

285 270 0 96 15 Cimbalom

286 271 0 97 15 Santur

Organ

287 272 0 0 16 DrawOrgn

PSR-730 PSR-630

Bank Select

MIDI

Voice Name

Voice Voice

MSB LSB

Program

Number Number

Change

Number

288 273 0 32 16 DetDrwOr

289 274 0 33 16 60sDrOr1

290 275 0 34 16 60sDrOr2

291 276 0 35 16 70sDrOr1

292 277 0 36 16 DrawOrg2

293 278 0 37 16 60sDrOr3

294 279 0 38 16 EvenBar

295 280 0 40 16 16+2’2/3

296 281 0 64 16 Organ Ba

297 282 0 65 16 70sDrOr2

298 283 0 66 16 CheezOrg

299 284 0 67 16 DrawOrg3

300 285 0 0 17 PercOrgn

301 286 0 24 17 70sPcOr1

302 287 0 32 17 DetPrcOr

303 288 0 33 17 LiteOrg

304 289 0 37 17 PercOrg2

305 290 0 0 18 RockOrgn

306 291 0 64 18 RotaryOr

307 292 0 65 18 SloRotar

308 293 0 66 18 FstRotar

309 294 0 0 19 ChrchOrg

310 295 0 32 19 ChurOrg3

311 296 0 35 19 ChurOrg2

312 297 0 40 19 NotreDam

313 298 0 64 19 OrgFlute

314 299 0 65 19 TrmOrgFl

315 300 0 0 20 ReedOrgn

316 301 0 40 20 Puff Org

317 302 0 0 21 Acordion

318 303 0 32 21 AccordIt

319 304 0 0 22 Harmnica

320 305 0 32 22 Harmo 2

321 306 0 0 23 TangoAcd

322 307 0 64 23 TngoAcd2

Guitar

323 308 0 0 24 NylonGtr

324 309 0 16 24 NylonGt2

325 310 0 25 24 NylonGt3

326 311 0 43 24 VelGtHrm

327 312 0 96 24 Ukulele

328 313 0 0 25 SteelGtr

329 314 0 16 25 SteelGt2

330 315 0 35 25 12StrGtr

331 316 0 40 25 Nyln&Stl

332 317 0 41 25 Stl&Body

333 318 0 96 25 Mandolin

334 319 0 0 26 Jazz Gtr

335 320 0 18 26 MelloGtr

336 321 0 32 26 JazzAmp

337 322 0 0 27 CleanGtr

338 323 0 32 27 ChorusGt

339 324 0 0 28 Mute.Gtr

340 325 0 40 28 FunkGtr1

341 326 0 41 28 MuteStlG

342 327 0 43 28 FunkGtr2

343 328 0 45 28 Jazz Man

344 329 0 0 29 Ovrdrive

345 330 0 43 29 Gt.Pinch

346 331 0 0 30 Dist.Gtr

347 332 0 40 30 FeedbkGt

348 333 0 41 30 FeedbGt2

349 334 0 0 31 GtrHarmo

350 335 0 65 31 GtFeedbk

351 336 0 66 31 GtrHrmo2

Bass

352 337 0 0 32 Aco.Bass

353 338 0 40 32 JazzRthm

354 339 0 45 32 VXUprght

355 340 0 0 33 FngrBass

356 341 0 18 33 FingrDrk

357 342 0 27 33 FlangeBa

358 343 0 40 33 Ba&DstEG

359 344 0 43 33 FngrSlap

360 345 0 45 33 FngBass2

361 346 0 65 33 ModAlem

362 347 0 0 34 PickBass

363 348 0 28 34 MutePkBa

364 349 0 0 35 Fretless

365 350 0 32 35 Fretles2

366 351 0 33 35 Fretles3

367 352 0 34 35 Fretles4

368 353 0 96 35 SynFretl

369 354 0 97 35 Smooth

370 355 0 0 36 SlapBas1

371 356 0 27 36 ResoSlap

372 357 0 32 36 PunchThm

373 358 0 0 37 SlapBas2

374 359 0 43 37 VeloSlap

375 360 0 0 38 SynBass1

376 361 0 18 38 SynBa1Dk

377 362 0 20 38 FastResB

378 363 0 24 38 AcidBass

379 364 0 35 38 Clv Bass

380 365 0 40 38 TeknoBa

381 366 0 64 38 Oscar

382 367 0 65 38 SqrBass

383 368 0 66 38 RubberBa

384 369 0 96 38 Hammer

385 370 0 0 39 SynBass2

386 371 0 6 39 MelloSB1

387 372 0 12 39 Seq Bass

388 373 0 18 39 ClkSynBa

389 374 0 19 39 SynBa2Dk

390 375 0 32 39 SmthBa 2

391 376 0 40 39 ModulrBa

392 377 0 41 39 DX Bass

393 378 0 64 39 X WireBa

Strings

394 379 0 0 40 Violin

395 380 0 8 40 SlowVln

396 381 0 0 41 Viola

397 382 0 0 42 Cello

398 383 0 0 43 Contrabs

399 384 0 0 44 Trem.Str

400 385 0 8 44 SlowTrStr

401 386 0 40 44 Susp Str

402 387 0 0 45 Pizz.Str

403 388 0 0 46 Harp

404 389 0 40 46 YangChin

405 390 0 0 47 Timpani

Ensemble

406 391 0 0 48 Strings1

407 392 0 3 48 S.Strngs

408 393 0 8 48 SlowStr

409 394 0 24 48 ArcoStr

PSR-730 PSR-630

Bank Select

MIDI

Voice Name

Voice Voice

MSB LSB

Program

Number Number

Change

Number

PSR-730 PSR-630

Bank Select

MIDI

Voice Name

Voice Voice

MSB LSB

Program

Number Number

Change

Number

Voice List

138

410 395 0 35 48 60sStrng

411 396 0 40 48 Orchestr

412 397 0 41 48 Orchstr2

413 398 0 42 48 TremOrch

414 399 0 45 48 VeloStr

415 400 0 0 49 Strings2

416 401 0 3 49 S.SlwStr

417 402 0 8 49 LegatoSt

418 403 0 40 49 Warm Str

419 404 0 41 49 Kingdom

420 405 0 64 49 70s Str

421 406 0 65 49 Str Ens3

422 407 0 0 50 Syn.Str1

423 408 0 27 50 ResoStr

424 409 0 64 50 Syn Str4

425 410 0 65 50 SS Str

426 411 0 0 51 Syn.Str2

427 412 0 0 52 ChoirAah

428 413 0 3 52 S.Choir

429 414 0 16 52 Ch.Aahs2

430 415 0 32 52 MelChoir

431 416 0 40 52 ChoirStr

432 417 0 0 53 VoiceOoh

433 418 0 0 54 SynVoice

434 419 0 40 54 SynVox2

435 420 0 41 54 Choral

436 421 0 64 54 AnaVoice

437 422 0 0 55 Orch.Hit

438 423 0 35 55 OrchHit2

439 424 0 64 55 Impact

Brass

440 425 0 0 56 Trumpet

441 426 0 16 56 Trumpet2

442 427 0 17 56 BriteTrp

443 428 0 32 56 WarmTrp

444 429 0 0 57 Trombone

445 430 0 18 57 Trmbone2

446 431 0 0 58 Tuba

447 432 0 16 58 Tuba 2

448 433 0 0 59 Mute.Trp

449 434 0 0 60 Fr.Horn

450 435 0 6 60 FrHrSolo

451 436 0 32 60 FrHorn2

452 437 0 37 60 HornOrch

453 438 0 0 61 BrasSect

454 439 0 35 61 Tp&TbSec

455 440 0 40 61 BrssSec2

456 441 0 41 61 HiBrass

457 442 0 42 61 MelloBrs

458 443 0 0 62 SynBras1

459 444 0 12 62 QuackBr

460 445 0 20 62 RezSynBr

461 446 0 24 62 PolyBrss

462 447 0 27 62 SynBras3

463 448 0 32 62 JumpBrss

464 449 0 45 62 AnaVelBr

465 450 0 64 62 AnaBrss1

466 451 0 0 63 SynBras2

467 452 0 18 63 Soft Brs

468 453 0 40 63 SynBrss4

469 454 0 41 63 ChoirBrs

470 455 0 45 63 VelBrss2

471 456 0 64 63 AnaBrss2

PSR-730 PSR-630

Bank Select

MIDI

Voice Name

Voice Voice

MSB LSB

Program

Number Number

Change

Number

Reed

472 457 0 0 64 SprnoSax

473 458 0 0 65 Alto Sax

474 459 0 40 65 Sax Sect

475 460 0 43 65 HyprAlto

476 461 0 0 66 TenorSax

477 462 0 40 66 BrthTnSx

478 463 0 41 66 SoftTenr

479 464 0 64 66 TnrSax 2

480 465 0 0 67 Bari.Sax

481 466 0 0 68 Oboe

482 467 0 0 69 Eng.Horn

483 468 0 0 70 Bassoon

484 469 0 0 71 Clarinet

Pipe

485 470 0 0 72 Piccolo

486 471 0 0 73 Flute

487 472 0 0 74 Recorder

488 473 0 0 75 PanFlute

489 474 0 0 76 Bottle

490 475 0 0 77 Shakhchi

491 476 0 0 78 Whistle

492 477 0 0 79 Ocarina

Synth Lead

493 478 0 0 80 SquareLd

494 479 0 6 80 Square 2

495 480 0 8 80 LMSquare

496 481 0 18 80 Hollow

497 482 0 19 80 Shmoog

498 483 0 64 80 Mellow

499 484 0 65 80 SoloSine

500 485 0 66 80 SineLead

501 486 0 0 81 Saw.Lead

502 487 0 6 81 Saw 2

503 488 0 8 81 ThickSaw

504 489 0 18 81 DynaSaw

505 490 0 19 81 DigiSaw

506 491 0 20 81 Big Lead

507 492 0 24 81 HeavySyn

508 493 0 25 81 WaspySyn

509 494 0 40 81 PulseSaw

510 495 0 41 81 Dr. Lead

511 496 0 45 81 VeloLead

512 497 0 96 81 Seq Ana

513 498 0 0 82 CaliopLd

514 499 0 65 82 Pure Pad

515 500 0 0 83 Chiff Ld

516 501 0 64 83 Rubby

517 502 0 0 84 CharanLd

518 503 0 64 84 DistLead

519 504 0 65 84 WireLead

520 505 0 0 85 Voice Ld

521 506 0 24 85 SynthAah

522 507 0 64 85 VoxLead

523 508 0 0 86 Fifth Ld

524 509 0 35 86 Big Five

525 510 0 0 87 Bass &Ld

526 511 0 16 87 Big&Low

527 512 0 64 87 Fat&Prky

528 513 0 65 87 SoftWurl

Synth Pad

529 514 0 0 88 NewAgePd

530 515 0 64 88 Fantasy2

531 516 0 0 89 Warm Pad

532 517 0 16 89 ThickPad

533 518 0 17 89 Soft Pad

534 519 0 18 89 SinePad

535 520 0 64 89 Horn Pad

536 521 0 65 89 RotarStr

537 522 0 0 90 PolySyPd

538 523 0 64 90 PolyPd80

539 524 0 65 90 ClickPad

540 525 0 66 90 Ana Pad

541 526 0 67 90 SquarPad

542 527 0 0 91 ChoirPad

543 528 0 64 91 Heaven2

544 529 0 66 91 Itopia

545 530 0 67 91 CC Pad

546 531 0 0 92 BowedPad

547 532 0 64 92 Glacier

548 533 0 65 92 GlassPad

549 534 0 0 93 MetalPad

550 535 0 64 93 Tine Pad

551 536 0 65 93 Pan Pad

552 537 0 0 94 Halo Pad

553 538 0 0 95 SweepPad

554 539 0 20 95 Shwimmer

555 540 0 27 95 Converge

556 541 0 64 95 PolarPad

557 542 0 66 95 Celstial

Synth Effects

558 543 0 0 96 Rain

559 544 0 45 96 ClaviPad

560 545 0 64 96 HrmoRain

561 546 0 65 96 AfrcnWnd

562 547 0 66 96 Caribean

563 548 0 0 97 SoundTrk

564 549 0 27 97 Prologue

565 550 0 64 97 Ancestrl

566 551 0 0 98 Crystal

567 552 0 12 98 SynDrCmp

568 553 0 14 98 Popcorn

569 554 0 18 98 TinyBell

570 555 0 35 98 RndGlock

571 556 0 40 98 GlockChi

572 557 0 41 98 ClearBel

573 558 0 42 98 ChorBell

574 559 0 64 98 SynMalet

575 560 0 65 98 SftCryst

576 561 0 66 98 LoudGlok

577 562 0 67 98 XmasBell

578 563 0 68 98 VibeBell

579 564 0 69 98 DigiBell

580 565 0 70 98 AirBells

581 566 0 71 98 BellHarp

582 567 0 72 98 Gamelmba

583 568 0 0 99 Atmosphr

584 569 0 18 99 WarmAtms

585 570 0 19 99 HollwRls

586 571 0 40 99 NylonEP

587 572 0 64 99 NylnHarp

588 573 0 65 99 Harp Vox

589 574 0 66 99 AtmosPad

590 575 0 67 99 Planet

591 576 0 0 100 Bright

592 577 0 64 100 FantaBel

593 578 0 96 100 Smokey

594 579 0 0 101 Goblins

595 580 0 64 101 GobSyn

596 581 0 65 101 50sSciFi

PSR-730 PSR-630

Bank Select

MIDI

Voice Name

Voice Voice

MSB LSB

Program

Number Number

Change

Number

PSR-730 PSR-630

Bank Select

MIDI

Voice Name

Voice Voice

MSB LSB

Program

Number Number

Change

Number

Voice List

139

597 582 0 66 101 Ring Pad

598 583 0 67 101 Ritual

599 584 0 68 101 ToHeaven

600 585 0 70 101 Night

601 586 0 71 101 Glisten

602 587 0 96 101 BelChoir

603 588 0 0 102 Echoes

604 589 0 8 102 EchoPad2

605 590 0 14 102 Echo Pan

606 591 0 64 102 EchoBell

607 592 0 65 102 Big Pan

608 593 0 66 102 SynPiano

609 594 0 67 102 Creation

610 595 0 68 102 Stardust

611 596 0 69 102 Reso Pan

612 597 0 0 103 Sci-Fi

613 598 0 64 103 Starz

Ethnic

614 599 0 0 104 Sitar

615 600 0 32 104 DetSitar

616 601 0 35 104 Sitar 2

617 602 0 96 104 Tambra

618 603 0 97 104 Tamboura

619 604 0 0 105 Banjo

620 605 0 28 105 MuteBnjo

621 606 0 96 105 Rabab

622 607 0 97 105 Gopichnt

623 608 0 98 105 Oud

624 609 0 0 106 Shamisen

625 610 0 0 107 Koto

626 611 0 96 107 T. Koto

627 612 0 97 107 Kanoon

628 613 0 0 108 Kalimba

629 614 0 0 109 Bagpipe

630 615 0 0 110 Fiddle

631 616 0 0 111 Shanai

632 617 0 64 111 Shanai2

633 618 0 96 111 Pungi

634 619 0 97 111 Hichriki

Percussive

635 620 0 0 112 TnklBell

636 621 0 96 112 Bonang

637 622 0 97 112 Gender

638 623 0 98 112 Gamelan

639 624 0 99 112 S.Gamlan

640 625 0 100 112 Rama Cym

641 626 0 101 112 AsianBel

642 627 0 0 113 Agogo

643 628 0 0 114 SteelDrm

644 629 0 97 114 GlasPerc

645 630 0 98 114 ThaiBell

646 631 0 0 115 WoodBlok

647 632 0 96 115 Castanet

648 633 0 0 116 TaikoDrm

649 634 0 96 116 Gr.Cassa

650 635 0 0 117 MelodTom

651 636 0 64 117 Mel Tom2

652 637 0 65 117 Real Tom

653 638 0 66 117 Rock Tom

654 639 0 0 118 Syn.Drum

655 640 0 64 118 Ana Tom

656 641 0 65 118 ElecPerc

657 642 0 0 119 RevCymbl

Sound Effects

658 643 0 0 120 FretNoiz

PSR-730 PSR-630

Bank Select

MIDI

Voice Name

Voice Voice

MSB LSB

Program

Number Number

Change

Number

659 644 0 0 121 BrthNoiz

660 645 0 0 122 Seashore

661 646 0 0 123 Tweet

662 647 0 0 124 Telphone

663 648 0 0 125 Helicptr

664 649 0 0 126 Applause

665 650 0 0 127 Gunshot

SFX

666 651 64 0 0 CuttngNz

667 652 64 0 1 CttngNz2

668 653 64 0 3 Str Slap

669 654 64 0 16 Fl.KClik

670 655 64 0 32 Rain

671 656 64 0 33 Thunder

672 657 64 0 34 Wind

673 658 64 0 35 Stream

674 659 64 0 36 Bubble

675 660 64 0 37 Feed

676 661 64 0 48 Dog

677 662 64 0 49 Horse

678 663 64 0 50 Bird 2

679 664 64 0 54 Ghost

680 665 64 0 55 Maou

681 666 64 0 64 Tel.Dial

682 667 64 0 65 DoorSqek

683 668 64 0 66 Door Slam

684 669 64 0 67 Scratch

685 670 64 0 68 Scratch 2

686 671 64 0 69 WindChm

687 672 64 0 70 Telphon2

688 673 64 0 80 CarEngin

689 674 64 0 81 Car Stop

690 675 64 0 82 Car Pass

691 676 64 0 83 CarCrash

692 677 64 0 84 Siren

693 678 64 0 85 Train

694 679 64 0 86 Jetplane

695 680 64 0 87 Starship

696 681 64 0 88 Burst

697 682 64 0 89 Coaster

698 683 64 0 90 SbMarine

699 684 64 0 96 Laughing

700 685 64 0 97 Scream

701 686 64 0 98 Punch

702 687 64 0 99 Heart

703 688 64 0 100 FootStep

704 689 64 0 112 MchinGun

705 690 64 0 113 LaserGun

706 691 64 0 114 Xplosion

707 692 64 0 115 FireWork

PSR-730 PSR-630

Bank Select

MIDI

Voice Name

Voice Voice

MSB LSB

Program

Number Number

Change

Number

Voice List

140

13 C#-1 *3 Surdo Mute <—— <—— <—— <—— <——

14 D-1 *3 Surdo Open <—— <—— <—— <—— <——

15 D#-1 Hi Q <—— <—— <—— <—— <——

16 E-1 Whip Slap <—— <—— <—— <—— <——

17 F-1 *4 Scratch Push <—— <—— <—— <—— <——

18 F#-1 *4 Scratch Pull <—— <—— <—— <—— <——

19 G-1 Finger Snap <—— <—— <—— <—— <——

20 G#-1 Click Noise <—— <—— <—— <—— <——

21 A-1 Metronome Click <—— <—— <—— <—— <——

22 A#-1 Metronome Bell <—— <—— <—— <—— <——

23 B-1 Seq Click L <—— <—— <—— <—— <——

24 C0 Seq Click H <—— <—— <—— <—— <——

25 C#0 Brush Tap <—— <—— <—— <—— <——

26 D0 Brush Swirl L <—— <—— <—— <—— <——

27 D#0 Brush Slap <—— <—— <—— <—— <——

28 E0 Brush Swirl H <—— <—— <—— Reverse Cymbal Reverse Cymbal

29 F0 Snare Roll Snare Roll 2 <—— <—— <—— <——

30 F#0 Castanet <—— <—— <—— Hi Q Hi Q

31 G0 Snare L Snare L 2 <—— SD Rock M Snare M SD Rock H

32 G#0 Sticks <—— <—— <—— <—— <——

33 A0 Bass Drum L <—— <—— Bass Drum M Bass Drum H 4 Bass Drum M

34 A#0 Open Rim Shot Open Rim Shot 2 <—— <—— <—— <——

35 B0 Bass Drum M Bass Drum M 2 <—— Bass Drum H 3 BD Rock BD Analog L

36 C1 Bass Drum H Bass Drum H 2 BD Room BD Rock BD Gate BD Analog H

37 C#1 Side Stick <—— <—— <—— <—— Analog Side Stick

38 D1 Snare M Snare M 2 SD Room L SD Rock SD Rock L Analog Snare L

39 D#1 Hand Clap <—— <—— <—— <—— <——

40 E1 Snare H Snare H 2 SD Room H SD Rock Rim SD Rock H Analog Snare H

41 F1 Floor Tom L <—— Room Tom 1 Rock Tom 1 E Tom 1 Analog Tom 1

42 F#1 *1 Hi-Hat Closed <—— <—— <—— <—— Analog HH Closed 1

43 G1 Floor Tom H <—— Room Tom 2 Rock Tom 2 E Tom 2 Analog Tom 2

44 G#1 *1 Hi-Hat Pedal <—— <—— <—— <—— Analog HH Closed 2

45 A1 Low Tom <—— Room Tom 3 Rock Tom 3 E Tom 3 Analog Tom 3

46 A#1 *1 Hi-Hat Open <—— <—— <—— <—— Analog HH Open

47 B1 Mid Tom L <—— Room Tom 4 Rock Tom 4 E Tom 4 Analog Tom 4

48 C2 Mid Tom H <—— Room Tom 5 Rock Tom 5 E Tom 5 Analog Tom 5

49 C#2 Crash Cymbal 1 <—— <—— <—— <—— Analog Cymbal

50 D2 High Tom <—— Room Tom 6 Rock Tom 6 E Tom 6 Analog Tom 6

51 D#2 Ride Cymbal 1 <—— <—— <—— <—— <——

52 E2 Chinese Cymbal <—— <—— <—— <—— <——

53 F2 Ride Cymbal Cup <—— <—— <—— <—— <——

54 F#2 Tambourine <—— <—— <—— <—— <——

55 G2 Splash Cymbal <—— <—— <—— <—— <——

56 G#2 Cowbell <—— <—— <—— <—— Analog Cowbell

57 A2 Crash Cymbal 2 <—— <—— <—— <—— <——

58 A#2 Vibraslap <—— <—— <—— <—— <——

59 B2 Ride Cymbal 2 <—— <—— <—— <—— <——

60 C3 Bongo H <—— <—— <—— <—— <——

61 C#3 Bongo L <—— <—— <—— <—— <——

62 D3 Conga H Mute <—— <—— <—— <—— Analog Conga H

63 D#3 Conga H Open <—— <—— <—— <—— Analog Conga M

64 E3 Conga L <—— <—— <—— <—— Analog Conga L

65 F3 Timbale H <—— <—— <—— <—— <——

66 F#3 Timbale L <—— <—— <—— <—— <——

67 G3 Agogo H <—— <—— <—— <—— <——

68 G#3 Agogo L <—— <—— <—— <—— <——

69 A3 Cabasa <—— <—— <—— <—— <——

70 A#3 Maracas <—— <—— <—— <—— Analog Maracas

71 B3 Samba Whistle H <—— <—— <—— <—— <——

72 C4 Samba Whistle L <—— <—— <—— <—— <——

73 C#4 Guiro Short <—— <—— <—— <—— <——

74 D4 Guiro Long <—— <—— <—— <—— <——

75 D#4 Claves <—— <—— <—— <—— Analog Claves

76 E4 Wood Block H <—— <—— <—— <—— <——

77 F4 Wood Block L <—— <—— <—— <—— <——

78 F#4 Cuica Mute <—— <—— <—— Scratch Push Scratch Push

79 G4 Cuica Open <—— <—— <—— Scratch Pull Scratch Pull

80 G#4 *2 Triangle Mute <—— <—— <—— <—— <——

81 A4 *2 Triangle Open <—— <—— <—— <—— <——

82 A#4 Shaker <—— <—— <—— <—— <——

83 B4 Jingle Bell <—— <—— <—— <—— <——

84 C5 Bell Tree <—— <—— <—— <—— <——

85 C#5

86 D5

87 D#5

88 E5

89 F5

90 F#5

91 G5

PSR-730 Voice# 216 217 218 219 220 221

PSR-630 Voice# 201 202 203 204 205 206

Bank MSB# 127 127 127 127 127 127

Bank LSB# 000000

Program Change# 0 1 8 16 24 25

MIDI

Standard Kit 1 Standard Kit 2 Room Kit Rock Kit Electronic Kit Analog Kit

Note# Note

Drum Kit List

• “<——” indicates that the drum kit is the same as “Standard Kit1”.

• Each percussion voice uses one note.

• The note numbers and note names printed on the keyboard are one octave higher than the

MIDI note numbers and note names shown in the list. For example, the note number and

note name, #36 and C1, on the keyboard correspond to the MIDI note number and note

name, #24 and C0, shown in the list.

• Voices with the same Alternate Note Number (*1 … 4) cannot be played simultaneously.

141

13 C#-1 *3 <—— <—— <—— <——

14 D-1 *3 <—— <—— <—— <——

15 D#-1 <—— <—— <—— <——

16 E-1 <—— <—— <—— <——

17 F-1 *4 <—— <—— <—— <——

18 F#-1 *4 <—— <—— <—— <——

19 G-1 <—— <—— <—— <——

20 G#-1 <—— <—— <—— <——

21 A-1 <—— <—— <—— <——

22 A#-1 <—— <—— <—— <——

23 B-1 <—— <—— <—— <——

24 C0 <—— <—— <—— <——

25 C#0 <—— <—— <—— <——

26 D0 <—— <—— <—— <——

27 D#0 <—— <—— <—— <——

28 E0 Reverse Cymbal <—— <—— <——

29 F0 <—— <—— <—— <——

30 F#0 Hi Q <—— <—— <——

31 G0 AnSD Snappy <—— Brush Slap L <——

32 G#0 <—— <—— <—— <——

33 A0 AnBD Dance-1 <—— <—— Bass Drum L2

34 A#0 AnSD OpenRim <—— <—— <——

35 B0 AnBD Dance-2 <—— <—— Gran Casa

36 C1 AnBD Dance-3 BD Jazz BD Soft Gran Casa Mute Guitar Cutting Noise Dial Tone

37 C#1 Analog Side Stick <—— <—— <—— Guitar Cutting Noise 2 Door Creaking

38 D1 AnSD Q SD Jazz L Brush Slap Marching Sn M Door Slam

39 D#1 <—— <—— <—— <—— String Slap Scratch

40 E1 AnSD Ana+Acoustic SD Jazz H Brush Tap Marching Sn H Scratch 2

41 F1 Analog Tom 1 Jazz Tom 1 Brush Tom 1 Jazz Tom 1 Windchime

42 F#1 *1 AnHH Closed-3 <—— <—— <—— Telephone Ring2

43 G1 Analog Tom 2 Jazz Tom 2 Brush Tom 2 Jazz Tom 2

44 G#1 *1 Analog HH Closed 2 <—— <—— <——

45 A1 Analog Tom 3 Jazz Tom 3 Brush Tom 3 Jazz Tom 3

46 A#1 *1 AnHH Open-2 <—— <—— <——

47 B1 Analog Tom 4 Jazz Tom 4 Brush Tom 4 Jazz Tom 4

48 C2 Analog Tom 5 Jazz Tom 5 Brush Tom 5 Jazz Tom 5

49 C#2 Analog Cymbal <—— <—— Hand Cym.Open L

50 D2 Analog Tom 6 Jazz Tom 6 Brush Tom 6 Jazz Tom 6

51 D#2 <—— <—— <—— Hand Cym.Closed L

52 E2 <—— <—— <—— <—— FL.Key Click Engine Start

53 F2 <—— <—— <—— <—— Tire Screech

54 F#2 <—— <—— <—— <—— Car Passing

55 G2 <—— <—— <—— <—— Crash

56 G#2 Analog Cowbell <—— <—— <—— Siren

57 A2 <—— <—— <—— Hand Cym.Open H Train

58 A#2 <—— <—— <—— <—— Jetplane

59 B2 <—— <—— <—— Hand Cym.Closed H Starship

60 C3 <—— <—— <—— <—— Burst Noise

61 C#3 <—— <—— <—— <—— Coaster

62 D3 Analog Conga H <—— <—— <—— SvMarine

63 D#3 Analog Conga M <—— <—— <——

64 E3 Analog Conga L <—— <—— <——

65 F3 <—— <—— <—— <——

66 F#3 <—— <—— <—— <——

67 G3 <—— <—— <—— <——

68 G#3 <—— <—— <—— <—— Rain Laughing

69 A3 <—— <—— <—— <—— Thunder Screaming

70 A#3 Analog Maracas <—— <—— <—— Wind Punch

71 B3 <—— <—— <—— <—— Stream Heartbeat

72 C4 <—— <—— <—— <—— Bubble Footsteps

73 C#4 <—— <—— <—— <—— Feed

74 D4 <—— <—— <—— <——

75 D#4 Analog Claves <—— <—— <——

76 E4 <—— <—— <—— <——

77 F4 <—— <—— <—— <——

78 F#4 Scratch Push <—— <—— <——

79 G4 Scratch Pull <—— <—— <——

80 G#4 *2 <—— <—— <—— <——

81 A4 *2 <—— <—— <—— <——

82 A#4 <—— <—— <—— <——

83 B4 <—— <—— <—— <——

84 C5 <—— <—— <—— <—— Dog Machine Gun

85 C#5 Horse Gallop Laser Gun

86 D5 Bird 2 Explosion

87 D#5 FireWork

88 E5

89 F5

90 F#5 Ghost

91 G5 Maou

PSR-730 Voice# 222 223 224 225 226 227

PSR-630 Voice# 207 208 209 210 211 212

Bank MSB# 127 127 127 127 126 126

Bank LSB# 000000

Program Change# 27 32 40 48 0 1

MIDI

Dance Kit Jazz Kit Brush Kit Classic Kit SFX 1 SFX 2

Note# Note

Drum Kit List

142

Style List

8BEAT

1 8Beat Pop 1

2 8Beat Pop 2

3 8Beat Uptempo

4 8Beat Standard

5 Folkrock

6 Pop Rock 1

7 Pop Rock 2

8 8Beat Medium

9 8Beat Ballad

10 Epic Ballad

11 Piano Ballad

16BEAT

12 16Beat Pop

13 16Beat Shuffle 1

14 16Beat Shuffle 2

15 16Beat Ballad 1

16 16Beat Ballad 2

17 16Beat Ballad 3

18 Funk 1

19 Soul Ballad

6/8 BALLAD

20 Slow Rock 1

21 Slow Rock 2

22 6/8 Ballad

DANCE

23 Dance Pop 1

24 Dance Pop 2

25 Techno

26 Eurobeat

27 Euro House

28 Hip Hop

29 Trip Hop

30 Synth Boogie

DISCO

31 70s Disco

32 Disco Tropical

33 Party Pop

34 Polka Pop

ROCK

35 8Beat Rock Ballad

36 16Beat Rock Ballad

37 Hard Rock

38 Rock Shuffle

39 6/8 Heavy Rock

40 US Rock

41 16Beat Rock

RHYTHM&BLUES

42 R&B

43 Funk 2

44 Soul

45 Gospel Shuffle

46 6/8 Gospel

47 4/4 Blues

ROCK & ROLL

48 Rock & Roll 1

49 Rock & Roll 2

50 Boogie

51 Twist

COUNTRY&WESTERN

52 Bluegrass 1

53 Bluegrass 2

54 Country 2/4

55 8Beat Country

56 Country Rock

57 Cowboy Boogie

58 Country Ballad

59 Country Shuffle

60 Country Waltz

TRADITIONAL JAZZ

61 Swing

62 Big Band Swing

63 Big Band Ballad

64 Jazz Quartet

65 Dixieland

CONTEMPORARY JAZZ

66 Cool Jazz

67 Jazz Ballad

68 Jazz Waltz

69 Fusion

70 Funky Fusion

LATIN

71 Bossa Nova 1

72 Bossa Nova 2

73 Bossa Nova 3

74 Salsa

75 Samba

76 Mambo

77 Beguine

78 Merengue

79 Bolero Lento

80 Espagnole

81 Cajun

CARIBBEAN

82 Reggae 12

83 Pop Reggae

BALLROOM LATIN

84 Cha Cha

85 Rhumba

86 Pasodoble

87 Tango Continental

BALLROOM STANDARD

88 Foxtrot

89 Jive

90 Hully Gully

91 Big Band Quickstep

MARCH

92 March 1

93 March 2

94 6/8 March 1

95 Polka

WALTZ

96 Standard Waltz

97 Pop Waltz

98 German Waltz

99 Viennese Waltz

100 Musette Waltz

No Name No Name

No Name

143

About Digital Effects (Reverb/Chorus/DSP)

There are three types of digital effects installed in the PSR-630: the reverb effect (system

effect), the chorus effect (system effect) and the DSP effect (can be set as either as a system effect

or insertion effect).

In the PSR-730, the Multi Effect (EFFECT 1/2: insertion) is added to the three PSR-630

effects, for a total of five effects.

There are basically two ways to use the effects: with the DSP effect set as a system effect or

as a insertion effect. Each different way will be explained here.

Although not all the effect settings cannot be made by operating the PSR-730/630 panel

manually, some of them may be accessible through MIDI.

■ When DSP type Is Selected as a System Effect

Effect 2 part

Effect 2 is valid for

only one part.

Effect 1 part

Effect 1 is valid for

only one part.

Effect 2

on/off

Effect 2

on/off

Effect 2

on/off

Effect 2

on/off

Effect 1

on/off

Effect 1

on/off

Effect 1

on/off

Effect 1

on/off

DSP

(VARIATION)

REVERB

send chorus to reverb

send variation to chorus

send variation to reverb

DRY LINE

PAN

reverb

pan

reverb

return

OUT

The bold lines are stereo lines.

CHORUS

chorus

pan

chorus

return

variation

pan

DSP

return

dry level

DSP send

rev send

cho send

dry level

DSP send

rev send

cho send

dry level

DSP send

rev send

cho send

dry level

DSP send

rev send

cho send

EFF1

EFF2

Dry/Wet

Digital

Equalizer

(PSR-730)

Multi Effect

(PSR-730)

L Voice

All tracks that can

be revoiced.

R1 Voice

R2 Voice

MIDI

Channel 1

Channel 16

• The three PSR-630 effects or the five PSR-730 effects will be connected as shown below.

• Since the PSR-730 Multi Effect (EFFECT 1/2) is an insertion effect, it will be applied to only one part from

among the R1/R2/L parts.

• The signal will enter reverb/chorus/DSP according to the send level (Depth) set for each, and the signal with

the effect applied will be output according to the return level that is set. The reverb/chorus/DSP send levels

(Depth) are set for each part (track) with the Revoice mode. The reverb/chorus/DSP return levels value are

set in common for all the parts.

• The stereo panning is available for each of the reverb, chorus and DSP at the output for their signals. Using

MIDI, the panning position for the effect can be set (page 158).

• If a “Send Chorus to Reverb” (page 158) signal is transmitted to the PSR-730/630 from an external MIDI

device, a signal can be sent from the chorus to the reverb (connected in series). Also, if a “Send Variation

(DSP) to Reverb” (page 159) signal is transmitted, a signal can be sent from the DSP to the reverb and in the

same way if a “Send Variation (DSP) to Chorus” signal (page 159) is transmitted a signal can be sent from

DSP to the chorus. If these signals are used, the three effects can be connected in series, or used separately,

and a lot of different effects can be produced.

144

■ When DSP type Is Selected as a Insertion Effect

• The three PSR-630 effects or the five PSR-730 effects will be connected as shown below.

• Since the PSR-730 Multi Effect (EFFECT 1/2) is an insertion effect, it will be applied to only one part from

among the R1/R2/L parts.

• The signal will enter reverb and chorus according to the send level (Depth) set for each, and the signal with

the effect applied will be output according to the return level that is set. The reverb and chorus send levels

(Depth) are set for each part (track) with the Revoice mode. The reverb and chorus return level value is set

in common for all the parts.

• The stereo panning is available for each of the reverb and chorus at the output for their signals. Using MIDI,

the panning position for the effect can be set (page 158).

• If a “Send Chorus to Reverb” (page 158) signal is transmitted to the PSR-730/630 from an external MIDI

device, a signal can be sent from the chorus to the reverb (connected in series).

• The signal will enter DSP with the Dry/Wet (Depth) that is set, and a signal with the effect applied will be

output. The DSP Dry/Wet (Depth) are set for only R1 voice with the revoice mode. The DSP return level cannot

be set.

rev send

cho send

dry

rev send

cho send

dry

rev send

cho send

dry

rev send

cho send

dry

Effect 2 part

variation part

REVERB

reverb

pan

send chorus to reverb

DRY LINE

PAN

chorus

pan

PAN

reverb

return

chorus

return

OUT

The bold lines are stereo lines.

CHORUS

Effect 1 part

Effect 1 is valid for

only one part.

Effect 2 is valid for

only one part.

Variation is valid for

only one part.

EFF2

Effect 2

on/off

Effect 1

on/off DSP on/off

Effect 2

on/off

Effect 1

on/off

Effect 2

on/off

Effect 1

on/off

Effect 2

on/off

Effect 1

on/off DSP on/off

EFF2

DSP

EFF1

EFF2

DSP

Digital

Equalizer

(PSR-730)

Multi Effect

(PSR-730)

DSP

Dry/Wet (Depth)

DSP

Dry/Wet (Depth)

Dry/Wet

L Voice

All tracks that can

be revoiced.

R1 Voice

R2 Voice

MIDI

Channel 1

Channel 16

EFF1

About Digital Effects (Reverb/Chorus/DSP)

145

About Digital Effects (Reverb/Chorus/DSP)

The Digital Effect List

No. Effect Type Features

REVERB

01~04 Hall1~4 System Concert hall reverb.

05~08 Room1~4 System Small room reverb.

09, 10 Stage1, 2 System Reverb for solo instruments.

11, 12 Plate1, 2 System Simulated steel plate reverb.

13 OFF — No effect.

CHORUS

01~05 Chorus1~5 System Conventional chorus program with rich, warm chorusing.

06~09 Flanger1~4 System Pronounced three-phase modulation with a slight metallic sound.

10 OFF — No effect.

DSP

01~04 Hall1~4 System Concert hall reverb.

05~08 Room1~4 System Small room reverb.

09, 10 Stage1, 2 System Reverb for solo instruments.

11, 12 Plate1, 2 System Simulated steel plate reverb.

13, 14 Early Reflection1, 2 System Early reflections only.

15 Gate Reverb System Gated reverb effect, in which the reverberation is quickly cut off for special

effects.

16 Reverse Gate System Similar to Gate Reverb, but with a reverse increase in reverb.

17~21 Chorus1~5 System Conventional chorus program with rich, warm chorusing.

22~25 Flanger1~4 System Pronounced three-phase modulation with slight metallic sound.

26 Symphonic System Exceptionally rich & deep chorusing.

27 Phaser System Pronounced, metallic modulation with periodic phase change.

28~32 Rotary Speaker 1~5 Insertion Rotary speaker simulation.

33, 34 Tremolo 1, 2 Insertion Rich Tremolo effect with both volume and pitch modulation.

35 Guitar Tremolo Insertion Simulated electric guitar tremolo.

36 Auto Pan Insertion Several panning effects that automatically shift the sound position (left, right,

front, back).

37 Auto Wah Insertion Repeating filter sweep “wah” effect.

38 Delay L, C, R System Three independent delays, for the left, right and center stereo positions.

39 Delay L, R System Initial delay for each stereo channel, and two separate feedback delays.

40 Echo System Stereo delay, with independent Feedback Level controls for each channel.

41 Cross Delay System Complex effect that sends the delayed repeats “bouncing” between the left and

right channels.

42 Distortion Hard Insertion Hard-edge distortion.

43 Distortion Soft Insertion This type is not so hard compared with Distortion Hard.

44 EQ Disco Insertion Discotype equalizer program to boost high and low frequencies.

45 EQ Telephone Insertion Equalizer program which eliminates higher and lower frequencies to simulate

the sounds through telephone.

46 OFF — No effect.

146

The Multi Effect List (PSR-730)

No. Effect Type Features

01~04 Hall1~4 Concert hall reverb.

05~08 Room1~4 Small room reverb.

09, 10 Stage1, 2 Reverb for solo instruments.

11, 12 Plate1, 2 Simulated steel plate reverb.

13~17 Chorus1~5 Conventional chorus program with rich, warm chorusing.

18~21 Flanger1~4 Pronounced three-phase modulation with a slight metallic sound.

22 Symphonic Exceptionally rich & deep chorusing.

23 Phaser Pronounced, metallic modulation with periodic phase change.

24~28 Rotary Speaker 1~5 Rotary speaker simulation.

29, 30 Tremolo 1, 2 Rich Tremolo effect with both volume and pitch modulation.

31 Guitar Tremolo Simulated electric guitar tremolo.

32 Auto Pan Several panning effects that automatically shift the sound position (left, right, front, back).

33 Auto Wah Repeating filter sweep “wah” effect.

34 Delay L, C, R Three independent delays, for the left, right and center stereo positions.

35 Delay L, R Initial delay for each stereo channel, and two separate feedback delays.

36 Echo Stereo delay, with independent Feedback Level controls for each channel.

37 Cross Delay Complex effect that sends the delayed repeats “bouncing” between the left and right

channels.

38 Distortion Hard Hard-edge distortion.

39 Distortion Soft This type is not so hard compared with Distortion Hard.

40 EQ Disco* Discotype equalizer program to boost high and low frequencies.

41 EQ Telephone* Equalizer program which eliminates higher and lower frequencies to simulate the sounds

through telephone.

42 Off No effect.

• When the effect type marked with * is selected, Dry/Wet section on the display

will show “- - -” indicating that Dry/Wet setting is disabled.

About Digital Effects (Reverb/Chorus/DSP)

147

Harmony Type List

No. Type Description

1 Duet This harmony type produces a duophonic melody with the second voice below the

melody line.

2 Trio This harmony type generates two voices in addition to the melody voice.

3 4Part Three harmony notes are generated to produce a four-note chord.

4 4 Part Jazz Similar to the preceding type, but depending on the chords played this type will

sometimes produce a more colorful sound.

5 Country Similar to Duet, but the second voice is above the melody line.

6 Octave One note is added an octave below the melody.

7 Tremolo The note(s) pressed and held is(are) repeatedly played at the preset tempo.

8 Tremolo Duet Combination of Tremolo and Duet; produces a duophonic melody with two voices played

alternately.

9 Tremolo Octave Combination of Tremolo and Octave; produces a duophonic melody with two voices

played alternately (the second voice is an octave below the melody).

10 Strumming This type adds arpeggiated pattern to the melody.

11 Trio Delay Two notes slightly below the melody are added to create three parts. Additional notes are

delayed slightly.

12 Vibraphone & Jazz Guitar Two voices, Vibraphone and Jazz Guitar, below the melody are added to create three

parts.

13 Trumpet & Sax Two voices, Trumpet and Saxophone, below the melody are added to create three parts.

14 Back Vocal “Vocal” voice is added to the melody to get a vocal part in the background.

15 Strings “Strings” voice is added to the melody to create an orchestral atmosphere.

16 Forest “Twitterings” of a bird are added to the melody to create an effect as if you were playing

outside.

• The Harmonies except for the types 6,7 and 9

are applied to the R1 voice according to the

chords detected in the Accompaniment sec-

tion.

148

Refining User Styles with Style File Format

Source Pattern

Source chord root setting

XSource chord type setting

NTR (Note Transposition Rule)

CNote Transposition rule setting

NTT (Note Transposition Table)

VNote Transposition table setting

Other Settings

Highest Key setting

NNote range (Low Limit, High Limit) settings

MRetrigger Rule (RTR) setting

Chord change

Accompaniment

Source Pattern Settings

Source Chord Root setting

X Source Chord Type setting

Set the key in which the source pattern will be played when the

user style is created. The default setting is CM7. (The source

chord root is “C” and the source chord type is “M7.”

After finishing recording, with the recorded track selected, select

the “S.ChordRoot” sub menu and use the [–] and [+] buttons or

the Data Dial to select the chord root.

nd Poot:AS.ChordR

After setting the source chord root, select the “S.Chord Type” sub

menu and use the [–] and [+] buttons or the Data Dial to select

the chord type.

nd Pype:mS.ChordT

See page 150 for the available chord types, chord notes and

scale notes.

• The SFF settings can be done only when the Record Ready Mode or

Rehearsal Mode is engaged.

• The SFF settings cannot be made for the RHYTHM 1/2 tracks.

■ Style File (Auto Accompaniment) Format

The Style File Format (SFF) is a compilation of all of Yamaha’s auto

accompaniment know-how into a single unified format.

Since the PSR-730/630 supports the SFF format, you can enjoy

many styles in addition to the 100 preset SFF styles. Just insert a disk

with SFF styles on it into the disk drive and you can load them into the

PSR-730/630.

By using the user style function, you can take advantage of the power

of the SFF format and freely create your own user styles.

With the Auto Accompaniment function, chord changes (transposi-

tions) are applied to the source pattern that forms the basis for the

accompaniment. The “Note Transposition Rule” and “Note Transpo-

sition Table” that are set for each track are used for this. After the

transposition is made, the transposed notes are checked to see if

they can be correctly played within the range of the instrument, then

the accompaniment is played.

The following SFF settings can be executed only after recording each

track (still in the Record Ready Mode or Rehearsal Mode).

NTR (Note Transposition Rule) Setting

Note Transposition rule setting

Set the transposition rule for using the transposition table (see

item 4 below) when transposing. There are two types of rules.

Root Transposition Rule

This rule maintains the mutual relationship in pitch between

each note when transposing. Set this for tracks that contain

melody-like phrases.

Root Fixed Rule

To the extent possible, this rule maintains the pitch of each note

in the source pattern. Set it for piano-type or guitar-type chord

picking tracks.

After finishing recording, with the recorded track selected, select

“NTR” from the sub menu and use the [–] and [+] buttons or the

Data Dial to select the transposition rule.

ixedooooooFNTR:::::

149

NTT (Note Transposition Table) Setting

Note Transposition table setting

Set the table for making the chord change (transposition) in the

source pattern. There are 6 tables, as explained below.

Bypass

No transposition is done.

Melody

This table is suitable for melody line transposition. Use it for

tracks with melodies like PHRASE 1/2.

Bass

This table is suitable for bass line transposition. The table

contents are the same as for “Melody,” but it recognizes on-bass

chords such as in the Fingered2 mode. Use it for tracks with low

pitched instruments such as bass tracks.

Chord

This table is suitable for chord transposition. Use it for tracks like

the CHORD 1/2 tracks, with piano-type or guitar-type chord

picking tracks.

M-m Only (M)

This table lowers the third by a semitone when changing from a

major chord to a minor chord or raises the minor third by a

semitone when changing from a minor chord to a major chord.

It doesn’t change any other notes.

M-m Only (H)

When changing from a major chord to a minor chord, this flattens

both the third and the sixth by a semitone. When changing from

a minor chord to a major, it raises the flatted third and sixth by a

semitone. It doesn’t change any other notes.

After finishing recording, with the recorded track selected, select

“NTT” from the sub menu and use the [–] and [+] buttons or the

Data Dial to select the transposition table.

sooBypasNTT:::::

Other Settings

Highest Key setting

Set the highest key (upper limit of the octaves) of the note

transposing for the Source Chord Root setting [1]. The notes

designated higher than the highest key will actually be played

back in the octave just below the highest key. This setting is

effective only when you select the Root Transposition Rule from

the item [3].

Example) When highest key is “F”.

Root change CM C#M DM .... FM F#M

Notes played C3-E3-G3 C#3-F3-G#3 D3-F#3-A3 .... F3-A3-C4 F#2-A#2-C#3

After finishing recording, with the recorded track selected, select

“HighestKey” from the submenu and use the [-] and [+] buttons

or the Data Dial to select the highest key.

nd Pey: D#HighestK

N Note range (Low Limit, High Limit) settings

Set the note range (low and high limits) for the voices recorded

on user style tracks. By setting the note range, you can prevent

unrealistic notes (such as high notes from a bass or low notes

from a piccolo) from being produced and have them shifted to an

octave within the note range.

Example) When low limit is “C3” and high limit is “D4.”

Root change CM C#M .... FM

Notes played E3-G3-C4 F3-G#3-C#4 .... F3-A3-C4

After finishing recording, with the recorded track selected, select

“LowLimit” and “HighLimit” from the submenu and use the [-] and

[+] buttons or the Data Dial to set the note range.

nd P: 28LowLimit

nd Pt: 127HighLimi

M Retrigger Rule (RTR) setting

Set the method for handling notes as they are being produced

during chord change (transposition). There are 5 rule types, as

explained below.

Stop

The note is stopped while being produced, and the next note is

sounded.

PitchShift

The pitch of the note being produced is shifted to match the new

chord type.

PShftToRoot

The pitch of the note being produced is shifted to the note of the

new chord root. The octave of the note is not changed by the shift.

Retrigger

The note is stopped while being produced, and it is sounded

again with its pitch matching that of the new chord type.

Ret.ToRoot

The note is stopped while being produced, and it is sounded

again with the note of the new chord root.

After finishing recording, with the recorded track selected, select

“RTR” from the sub menu and use the [–] and [+] buttons or the

Data Dial to select the retrigger rule.

po oStoRTR:::::

Refining User Styles with Style File Format

150

■ About the Source Chord Type

When you change the chord of the source pattern from the default CM7 to others

(see “Source Pattern Settings” on page 148), the chord notes and scale notes will

change depending on the currently selected chord type.

See page 101 for the information on the chord note and scale note.

Refining User Styles with Style File Format

[ex.] Source Chord Root of “C”

CSC CS CSC C SC CSC C CS CSC C CS

CCC CS

CCC C CS CCC C SC CSC

SCS

CS CS

CS CCS

CCS

SSCCC

CC SC

CS CC

CS C CS

CC SC C

CCS

CS S SC

CCS

CCC

CSC

CCC C

CSC CS

CSC CC

CCC

CCCS

SCC

CCC

SCC

CSC CSS

CSC

SCC

CCCS CC CCS CS

(9)

Caug Cm

7 77

(9)

(11)

CmM

(9)

Cdim

(9)

(13)

(b9)

Csus

1+2+5

1+8

1+5

(9)

(#11)

(

#11)

(#9)

C aug

CM aug

C sus

add9

(

b13)

[Maj]

[Maj7(9)] [Maj6(9)] [aug] [min] [min6]

[min7] [min7b5] [min(9)] [min7(9)]

[minMaj7]

[7sus4]

[7(b9)]

[1+8] [1+5] [1+2+5][sus4]

[7(b13)] [7(#9)] [Maj7aug] [7aug]

[7b5] [7(9)] [7(#11)] [7(13)]

[dim] [dim7] [7]

[minMaj7(9)]

[min7(11)]

[Maj6]

[Maj7] [Maj(9)][Maj7(#11)]

151

Troubleshooting

Something not working as it should? In many cases what appears to be a malfunction can

be traced to a simple error that can be remedied immediately. Before assuming that your PSR-

730/630 is faulty, please check the following points.

PROBLEM POSSIBLE CAUSE/SOLUTION

The speakers produce a “pop” sound whenever the power is

turned ON or OFF.

This is normal and is no cause for alarm.

The volume is reduced or the sound is distorted.

The registration memory doesn’t work properly.

Recorded song data will not play back properly.

The display goes bland and all panel controls are reset.

The batteries probably need to be replaced. Either replace all six

batteries, or use an AC power adaptor.

No sound when the keyboard is played.

The R1/R2/L voice volume settings could be set too low. Make sure

the voice volumes are set at appropriate levels (pages 14, 111).

The Local Control function could be turned off. Make sure Local

Control is turned on (page 127).

Not all simultaneously-played notes sound.

Auto Accompaniment seems to “skip” when the keyboard is

played.

You are probably exceeding the maximum polyphony of the

PSR-730/630. The PSR-730 can play up to 64 notes (32 notes

for PSR-630) at the same time — including split, dual, auto-

accompaniment, song, and multi pad notes. Notes exceeding

this limit will not sound.

Auto Accompaniment doesn’t sound when started.

The MIDI Clock mode may be set to “on”. Make sure it is turned

“off” (page 128).

Auto accompaniment won’t function properly. No lower key-

board sound.

Make sure that all accompaniment tracks are turned on, and that

the they are all set to appropriate volume levels.

Make sure you are using fingerings recognized by the selected

fingering mode, and are playing in the Auto Accompaniment

section of the keyboard.

Are you sure you’re playing in the Auto-Accompaniment section

of the keyboard? Make sure that the Auto Accompaniment split

point is set appropriately (page 30).

Are you playing chords that the PSR-730/630 can recognize

(see chord types on page 31~)?

The Harmony function will not turn on.

Harmony cannot be turned on when the FULL KEYBOARD

fingering mode is selected or if a percussion kit voice is selected.

Select an appropriate fingering mode or voice.

Certain notes sound at the wrong pitch.

Make sure that the scale tuning value for those notes is set to “0”

(page 115).

152

Data Backup & Initialization

■ Data Initialization

All data can be initialized and restored to the factory preset condition by turning on the

power while holding the highest (rightmost) white key on the keyboard. “Backup RAM

Clear” will appear briefly on the display.

• All registration and

User Style/Pad

memory data, plus

the other settings

listed above, will be

erased and/or

changed when the

data initialization

procedure is carried

out.

• Carrying out the

data initialization

procedure will usu-

ally restore normal

operation if the PSR-

730/630 freezes or

begins to act errati-

cally for any reason.

STAND BY

rAM CleaBackup R

■ Data Backup

Except for the data listed below, all PSR-730/630 panel settings are reset to their initial

settings whenever the power is turned on.

• Registration Memory

• User Style Data

• User Pad Data

• MIDI Transmit Settings

• MIDI Receive Settings

The data listed above can be backed up — i.e. retained in memory — as long as a

working set of batteries is installed and you keep the following Off/On procedure.

z Turn the power OFF by pressing the [STAND BY/ON] switch.

x Unplug the DC output cable of the PA-6 from the DC IN 10-12V jack on the rear

panel of the PSR-730/630.

c Then unplug the PA-6 Power Adaptor from the wall AC outlet.

When turning the power ON, simply reverse the procedure.

153

(2) RECEIVE FLOW

MIDI → NOTE OFF 8nH

NOTE ON/OFF 9nH

CONTROL CHANGE

BANK SELECT MSB BnH,00H

BANK SELECT LSB BnH,20H

MODULATION BnH,01H

PORTAMENTO TIME BnH,05H

DATA ENTRY MSB BnH,06H

DATA ENTRY LSB BnH,26H

MAIN VOLUME BnH,07H

PANPOT BnH,0AH

EXPRESSION BnH,0BH

SUSTAIN BnH,40H

PORTAMENTO BnH,41H

SOSTENUTO BnH,42H

SOFT PEDAL BnH,43H

HARMONIC CONTENT BnH,47H

RELEASE TIME BnH,48H

ATTACK TIME BnH,49H

BRIGHTNESS BnH,4AH

PORTAMENTO CONTROL BnH,54H

REVERB SEND LEVEL BnH,5BH

CHORUS SEND LEVEL BnH,5DH

VARIATION SEND LEVEL BnH,5EH

DATA INCREMENT BnH,60H

DATA DECREMENT BnH,61H

NRPN LSB BnH,62H

NRPN MSB BnH,63H

VIBRATO RATE BnH,63H,01H,62H,08H,06H,mmH

VIBRATO DEPTH BnH,63H,01H,62H,09H,06H,mmH

VIBRATO DELAY BnH,63H,01H,62H,0AH,06H,mmH

FILTER CUTOFF FREQ. BnH,63H,01H,62H,20H,06H,mmH

FILTER RESONANCE BnH,63H,01H,62H,21H,06H,mmH

AEG ATTACK TIME BnH,63H,01H,62H,63H,06H,mmH

AEG DECAY TIME BnH,63H,01H,62H,64H,06H,mmH

AEG RELEASE BnH,63H,01H,62H,66H,06H,mmH

DRUM INST

CUTOFF FREQ. BnH,63H,14H,62H,rrH,06H,mmH

FILTER RESONANCE BnH,63H,15H,62H,rrH,06H,mmH

AEG ATTACK RATE BnH,63H,16H,62H,rrH,06H,mmH

AEG DECAY RATE BnH,63H,17H,62H,rrH,06H,mmH

PITCH COARSE BnH,63H,18H,62H,rrH,06H,mmH

(1) TRANSMIT FLOW

MIDI ← NOTE ON/OFF 9nH

OUT

CONTROL CHANGE BnH

BANK SELECT MSB BnH,00H

BANK SELECT LSB BnH,20H

DATA ENTRY MSB BnH,06H

DATA ENTRY LSB BnH,26H

MAIN VOLUME BnH,07H

PANPOT BnH,0AH

EXPRESSION BnH,0BH

SUSTAIN BnH,40H

SOSTENUTE BnH,42H

SOFT PEDAL BnH,43H

REVERB SEND LEVEL BnH,5BH

VARIATION SEND LEVEL BnH,5EH

PROGRAM CHANGE CnH

PITCH BEND EnH

SYSTEM EXCLUSIVE MESSAGE

UNIVERSAL REALTIME F0H 7FH.....F7H

UNIVERSAL NON-REALTIME F0H 7EH.....F7H

XG PARAMETER CHANGE F0H 43H 1nH 4CH aaH aaH aaH ddH

.....ddH F7H

XG BULK DUMP F0H 43H 0nH 4CH bbH bbH aaH aaH

aaH ddH.....ddH ccH F7H

SPECIAL OPERATORS

SYSTEM REALTIME MESSAGE

MIDI CLOCK F8H

START FAH

STOP FCH

ACTIVE SENSING FEH

Many MIDI messages listed in the MIDI Data Format are expressed in decimal

numbers, binary numbers and hexadecimal numbers. Hexadecimal numbers

may include the letter “H” as a suffix. Also, “n” can freely be defined as any

whole number.

To enter data/values, refer to the table below.

• Except the table above, for example 144-159(decimal)/9nH/1001 0000-1001

1111(binary) displays the Note On Message for each channel (1-16). 176-191/

BnH/1011 0000-1011 1111 displays the Control Change Message for each

channel (1-16). 192-207/CnH/1100 0000-1100 1111 displays the Program

Change Message for each channel (1-16). 240/FOH/1111 0000 denotes the

start of a System Exclusive Message. 247/F7H/1111 0111 denotes the end of

a System Exclusive Message.

• aaH (hexidecimal)/0aaaaaaa (binary) denotes the data address. The address

contains High, Mid, and Low.

• bbH/0bbbbbbb denotes the byte count.

• ccH/0ccccccc denotes the check sum.

• ddH/0ddddddd denotes the data/value.

Decimal Hexadecimal Binary

0 00 0000 0000

1 01 0000 0001

2 02 0000 0010

3 03 0000 0011

4 04 0000 0100

5 05 0000 0101

6 06 0000 0110

7 07 0000 0111

8 08 0000 1000

9 09 0000 1001

10 0A 0000 1010

11 0B 0000 1011

12 0C 0000 1100

13 0D 0000 1101

14 0E 0000 1110

15 0F 0000 1111

16 10 0001 0000

17 11 0001 0001

18 12 0001 0010

19 13 0001 0011

20 14 0001 0100

21 15 0001 0101

22 16 0001 0110

23 17 0001 0111

24 18 0001 1000

25 19 0001 1001

26 1A 0001 1010

27 1B 0001 1011

28 1C 0001 1100

29 1D 0001 1101

30 1E 0001 1110

31 1F 0001 1111

32 20 0010 0000

33 21 0010 0001

34 22 0010 0010

35 23 0010 0011

36 24 0010 0100

37 25 0010 0101

38 26 0010 0110

39 27 0010 0111

40 28 0010 1000

41 29 0010 1001

42 2A 0010 1010

43 2B 0010 1011

44 2C 0010 1100

45 2D 0010 1101

46 2E 0010 1110

47 2F 0010 1111

48 30 0011 0000

49 31 0011 0001

50 32 0011 0010

51 33 0011 0011

52 34 0011 0100

53 35 0011 0101

54 36 0011 0110

55 37 0011 0111

56 38 0011 1000

57 39 0011 1001

58 3A 0011 1010

59 3B 0011 1011

60 3C 0011 1100

61 3D 0011 1101

62 3E 0011 1110

63 3F 0011 1111

Decimal Hexadecimal Binary

64 40 0100 0000

65 41 0100 0001

66 42 0100 0010

67 43 0100 0011

68 44 0100 0100

69 45 0100 0101

70 46 0100 0110

71 47 0100 0111

72 48 0100 1000

73 49 0100 1001

74 4A 0100 1010

75 4B 0100 1011

76 4C 0100 1100

77 4D 0100 1101

78 4E 0100 1110

79 4F 0100 1111

80 50 0101 0000

81 51 0101 0001

82 52 0101 0010

83 53 0101 0011

84 54 0101 0100

85 55 0101 0101

86 56 0101 0110

87 57 0101 0111

88 58 0101 1000

89 59 0101 1001

90 5A 0101 1010

91 5B 0101 1011

92 5C 0101 1100

93 5D 0101 1101

94 5E 0101 1110

95 5F 0101 1111

96 60 0110 0000

97 61 0110 0001

98 62 0110 0010

99 63 0110 0011

100 64 0110 0100

101 65 0110 0101

102 66 0110 0110

103 67 0110 0111

104 68 0110 1000

105 69 0110 1001

106 6A 0110 1010

107 6B 0110 1011

108 6C 0110 1100

109 6D 0110 1101

110 6E 0110 1110

111 6F 0110 1111

112 70 0111 0000

113 71 0111 0001

114 72 0111 0010

115 73 0111 0011

116 74 0111 0100

117 75 0111 0101

118 76 0111 0110

119 77 0111 0111

120 78 0111 1000

121 79 0111 1001

122 7A 0111 1010

123 7B 0111 1011

124 7C 0111 1100

125 7D 0111 1101

126 7E 0111 1110

127 7F 0111 1111

MIDI Data Format

154

PITCH FINE BnH,63H,19H,62H,rrH,06H,mmH

LEVEL BnH,63H,1AH,62H,rrH,06H,mmH

PANPOT BnH,63H,1CH,62H,rrH,06H,mmH

REVERB SEND BnH,63H,1DH,62H,rrH,06H,mmH

CHORUS SEND BnH,63H,1EH,62H,rrH,06H,mmH

VARIATION SEND BnH,63H,1FH,62H,rrH,06H,mmH

RPN LSB BnH,64H

RPN MSB BnH,65H

PITCH BEND SENS. BnH,65H,00H,64H,00H,06H,mmH

FINE TUNING BnH,65H,00H,64H,01H,06H,mmH,

26H,llH

COARSE TUNING BnH,65H,00H,64H,02H,06H,mmH

NULL BnH,65H,7FH,64H,7FH

ALL SOUND OFF BnH,78H,00H

RESET ALL CONTROLLERS BnH,79H,00H

ALL NOTES OFF BnH,7BH,00H

OMNI OFF BnH,7CH,00H

OMNI ON BnH,7DH,00H

MONO BnH,7EH

POLY BnH,7FH

PROGRAM CHANGE CnH

CHANNEL AFTER TOUCH DnH

PITCH BEND CHANGE EnH

SYSTEM EXCLUSIVE MESSAGE

UNIVERSAL REALTIME F0H 7FH.....F7H

UNIVERSAL NON-REALTIME F0H 7EH.....F7H

XG PARAMETER CHANGE F0H 43H 1nH 4CH aaH aaH aaH ddH

.....ddH F7H

XG BULK DUMP F0H 43H 0nH 4CH bbH bbH aaH aaH

aaH ddH.....ddH ccH F7H

PARAMETER REQUEST F0H 43H 3nH 4CH aaH aaH aaH F7H

DUMP REQUEST F0H 43H 2nH 4CH aaH aaH aaH F7H

SYSTEM REALTIME MESSAGE

MIDI CLOCK F8H

START FAH

STOP FCH

ACTIVE SENSING FEH

(3) TRANSMIT/RECEIVE DATA

(3-1) CHANNEL VOICE MESSAGES

(3-1-1) NOTE OFF (Recive only)

STATUS 1000nnnn (8nH) n = 0 - 15 VOICE CHANNEL NUMBER

NOTE NUMBER 0kkkkkkk k = 0 (C-2) - 127 (G8)

VELOCITY 0vvvvvvv v: ignored

(3-1-2) NOTE ON/OFF

STATUS 1001nnnn (9nH) n = 0 - 15 VOICE CHANNEL NUMBER

NOTE NUMBER 0kkkkkkk k = 0 (C-2) - 127 (G8)

VELOCITY 0vvvvvvv (v π 0) NOTE ON

00000000 (v = 0) NOTE OFF

(3-1-3) PROGRAM CHANGE

STATUS 1100nnnn (CnH) n = 0 - 15 VOICE CHANNEL NUMBER

PROGRAM NUMBER 0ppppppp p = 0 - 127

* PROGRAM NUMBER: XG DRUM VOICE number correspondence

P = 1 Standard Kit

P = 2 Standard2 Kit

P = 9 Room Kit

P = 17 Rock Kit

P = 25 Elctrnic Kit

P = 26 Analog Kit

P = 28 Dance Kit

P = 33 Jazz Kit

P = 41 Brush Kit

P = 49 Classic Kit

* PROGRAM NUMBER: XG SFX KIT number correspondence

P = 1 SFX1 Kit

P = 2 SFX2 Kit

When DRUM VOICE is selected and program change data for a different DRUM

VOICE is received, the currently selected DRUM VOICE will be replaced with the

new DRUM VOICE.

(3-1-4) CHANNEL AFTER TOUCH (Recive only)

STATUS 1101nnnn (DnH) n = 0 - 15 VOICE CHANNEL NUMBER

VALUE 0vvvvvvv v = 0 - 127 AFTER TOUCH VALUE

(3-1-5) PITCH BEND CHANGE

STATUS 1110nnnn (EnH) n = 0 - 15 VOICE CHANNEL NUMBER

LSB 0vvvvvvv PITCH BEND CHANGE LSB

MSB 0vvvvvvv PITCH BEND CHANGE MSB

(3-1-6) CONTROL CHANGE

STATUS 1011nnnn (BnH) n = 0 - 15 VOICE CHANNEL NUMBER

CONTROL NUMBER 0ccccccc

CONTROL VALUE 0vvvvvvv

* Transmit CONTROL NUMBER.

c = 0 BANK SELECT MSB ; v = 0:XG NORMAL,

64:SFX NORMAL,

126:XG SFX KIT,

127:XG DRUM

c = 32 BANK SELECT LSB ; v = 0 - 127 *3

c = 6 DATA ENTRY MSB ; v = 0 - 127 *1

c = 38 DATA ENTRY LSB ; v = 0 - 127 *1

c = 7 MAIN VOLUME ; v = 0 - 127

c = 10 PANPOT ; v = 0 - 127

c = 11 EXPRESSION ; v = 0 - 127

c = 64 SUSTAIN ; v = 0-63:OFF , 64-127:ON *2

c = 66 SOSTENUTO ; v = 0-63:OFF , 64-127:ON *2

c = 67 SOFT PEDAL ; v = 0-63:OFF , 64-127:ON *2

c = 91 REVERB SEND LEVEL ; v = 0 - 127

c = 94

VARIATION SEND LEVEL

; v = 0 - 127

(When only Connection = 1[System])

* Receive CONTROL NUMBER.

c = 0 BANK SELECT MSB ; v = 0:XG NORMAL,

64:SFX NORMAL,

126:XG SFX KIT,

127:XG DRUM

c = 32 BANK SELECT LSB ; v = 0 - 127 *3

c = 1 MODULATION ; v = 0 - 127 *2

c = 5 PORTAMENTO TIME ; v = 0 - 127 *2

c = 6 DATA ENTRY MSB ; v = 0 - 127 *1

c = 38 DATA ENTRY LSB ; v = 0 - 127 *1

c = 7 MAIN VOLUME ; v = 0 - 127

c = 10 PANPOT ; v = 0 - 127

c = 11 EXPRESSION ; v = 0 - 127

c = 64 SUSTAIN ; v = 0-63:OFF , 64-127:ON *2

c = 65 PORTAMENTO ; v = 0-63:OFF , 64-127:ON *2

c = 66 SOSTENUTO ; v = 0-63:OFF , 64-127:ON *2

c = 67 SOFT PEDAL ; v = 0-63:OFF , 64-127:ON *2

c = 71 HARMONIC CONTENT ; v = 0:-64 - 64:0 - 127:+63 *2

c = 72 RELEASE TIME ; v = 0:-64 - 64:0 - 127:+63 *2

c = 73 ATTACK TIME ; v = 0:-64 - 64:0 - 127:+63 *2

c = 74 BRIGHTNESS ; v = 0:-64 - 64:0 - 127:+63 *2

c = 84 PORTAMENT CONTROL ; v = 0 - 127 *2

c = 91 REVERB SEND LEVEL ; v = 0 - 127

c = 93 CHORUS SEND LEVEL ; v = 0 - 127

c = 94

VARIATION SEND LEVEL

; v = 0 - 127

(When only Connection = 1[System])

c = 96 DATA INCREMENT ; v = 127 *1

c = 97 DATA DECREMENT ; v = 127 *1

*1 Only when setting the appointed parameter with RPN, NRPN.

*2 Does not effect Rhythm Voice.

*3 MSB=0, anything other than 63 is 0.

• Until a PROGRAM CHANGE message is received, the BANK SELECT

operation will be suspended. When a Voice, including VOICE BANK, is

changed, set the BANK SELECT and Program Change Message, and

transmit in the following order, BANK SELECT MSB, LSB, PROGRAM

CHANGE.

• MODULATION controls the Vibrato Depth.

• PORTAMENTO TIME controls the Pitch Change Speed when the

Portamento Switch = ON. 0 being the shortest time, and 127 being the

longest.

• PANPOT changes the value for the melody voice and rhythm voice in

relation to the preset value.

• Portamento time is fixed to 0 when the PORTAMENTO CONTROL is

used.

• HARMONIC CONTENT applies adjustment to the resonance value that

is set by the voice. This parameter specifies relative change with the

value of 64 producing 0 adjustment. As values get higher the sound

becomes increasingly eccentric. Note that for some voices the effective

parameter range is narrower than the legal parameter range.

• RELEASE TIME applies adjustment to the envelope release time set by

the voice. This parameter specifies relative change with the value of 64

producing 0 adjustment.

MIDI Data Format

155

• ATTACK TIME applies adjustment to the envelope attack time set by the

voice. This parameter specifies relative change with the value of 64

producing 0 adjustment.

• BRIGHTNESS applies adjustment to the cut-off frequency set by the

voice. This parameter specifies relative change with the value of 64

producing 0 adjustment. Lower voices produce a softer sound. For some

voices the effective parameter range is narrower than the legal

parameter range.

(3-2) CHANNEL MODE MESSAGES

STATUS 1011nnnn (BnH) n = 0 - 15 VOICE CHANNEL NUMBER

CONTROL NUMBER 0ccccccc c = CONTROL NUMBER

CONTROL VALUE 0vvvvvvv v = DATA VALUE

(3-2-1) ALL SOUND OFF (Recive only)

(CONTROL NUMBER = 78H , DATA VALUE = 0)

Switches off all sound from the channel. Does not reset Note On and Hold On

conditions established by Channel Messages.

(3-2-2) RESET ALL CONTROLLERS (Recive only)

(CONTROL NUMBER = 79H , DATA VALUE = 0)

Resets controllers as follows.

PITCH BEND CHANGE 0 (Center)

AFTER TOUCH 0 (min.)

MODULATION 0 (min.)

EXPRESSION 127 (max.)

SUSTAIN 0 (off)

SOSTENUTO 0 (off)

SOFT PEDAL 0 (off)

NRPN Sets number to null. (Internal data remains unchanged)

RPN Sets number to null. (Internal data remains unchanged)

PORTAMENT CONTROL Resets portamento source note number

PORTAMENTO 0 (off)

(3-2-3) ALL NOTES OFF (Recive only)

(CONTROL NUMBER = 7BH , DATA VALUE = 0)

Switches off all of the channel’s “on” notes. However, any notes being held by

SUSTAIN or SOSTENUTO continue to sound until SUSTAIN/SOSTENUTO goes off.

(3-2-4)

OMNI OFF (Recive only) (CONTROL NUMBER = 7CH , DATA VALUE = 0)

Same processing as for All Notes Off.

(3-2-5)

OMNI ON (Recive only) (CONTROL NUMBER = 7DH , DATA VALUE = 0)

Same processing as for All Notes Off. Omni On is not executed.

(3-2-6)

MONO (Recive only) (CONTROL NUMBER = 7EH , DATA VALUE = 0)

Same processing as for All Notes Off. If the 3rd byte is in a range of 0-16 the

corresponding channel will be changed to Mode 4 (m=1).

(3-2-7) POLY (Recive only) (CONTROL NUMBER = 7FH , DATA VALUE = 0)

Same processing as for All Sounds Off and the corresponding channel will be

changed to Mode 3.

(3-3) REGISTERED PARAMETER NUMBER (RPN)

STATUS 1011nnnn (BnH) n = 0 - 15 VOICE CHANNEL NUMBER

RPN LSB 01100100 (64H)

RPN LSB NUMBER 0ppppppp p = RPN LSB(refer to the list below)

RPN MSB 01100101 (65H)

RPN MSB NUMBER 0qqqqqqq q = RPN MSB(refer to the list below)

DATA ENTRY MSB 00000110 (06H)

DATA VALUE 0mmmmmmm m = Data Value

DATA ENTRY LSB 00100110 (26H)

DATA VALUE 0lllllll l = Data Value

First appoints the parameter for RPN MSB/LSB, then sets the parameter value for

data entry MSB/LSB.

RPN D.ENTRY

LSB MSB MSB LSB PARAMETER NAME DATA RANGE

00H 00H mmH — PITCH BEND SENSITIVITY 00H - 18H (0 - 24 semitones)

01H 00H mmH llH FINE TUNE

{mmH,llH} = {00H,00H} - {40H,00H} - {7FH,7FH}

(-8192*100/8192) - 0 - (+8192*100/8192)

02H 00H mmH — COARSE TUNE

28H - 40H - 58H (-24 - 0 - +24 semitones)

7FH 7FH — — NULL

Clears the current RPN number setting. Does not change the internal parameter settings.

(3-4) NON-REGISTERED PARAMETER NUMBER (NRPN) (Recive only)

STATUS 1011nnnn (BnH) n = 0 - 15 VOICE CHANNEL NUMBER

NRPN LSB 01100010 (62H)

NRPN LSB NUMBER 0ppppppp p = NRPN LSB(refer to the list below)

NRPN MSB 01100011 (63H)

NRPN MSB NUMBER 0qqqqqqq q = NRPN MSB(refer to the list below)

DATA ENTRY MSB 00000110 (06H)

DATA VALUE 0mmmmmmm m = Data Value

First appoints the parameter for NRPN MSB/LSB, then sets the parameter value for data

entry MSB/LSB.

NRPN D.ENTRY

MSB LSB MSB LSB PARAMETER NAME DATA RANGE

01H 08H mmH — VIBRATO RATE 00H - 40H - 7FH (-64 - 0 - +63)

01H 09H mmH — VIBRATO DEPTH 00H - 40H - 7FH (-64 - 0 - +63)

01H 0AH mmH — VIBRATO DELAY 00H - 40H - 7FH (-64 - 0 - +63)

01H 20H mmH —

FILTER CUTOFF FREQUENCY

00H - 40H - 7FH (-64 - 0 - +63)

01H 21H mmH — FILTER RESONANCE 00H - 40H - 7FH (-64 - 0 - +63)

01H 63H mmH — EG ATTACK TIME 00H - 40H - 7FH (-64 - 0 - +63)

01H 64H mmH — EG DECAY TIME 00H - 40H - 7FH (-64 - 0 - +63)

01H 66H mmH — EG RELEASE 00H - 40H - 7FH (-64 - 0 - +63)

14H rrH mmH —

DRUM FILTER CUTOFF FREQ.

00H - 40H - 7FH (-64 - 0 - +63)

15H rrH mmH —

DRUM FILTER RESONANCE

00H - 40H - 7FH (-64 - 0 - +63)

16H rrH mmH — DRUM AEG ATTACK RATE 00H - 40H - 7FH (-64 - 0 - +63)

17H rrH mmH — DRUM AEG DECAY RATE 00H - 40H - 7FH (-64 - 0 - +63)

18H rrH mmH — DRUM PITCH COARSE 00H - 40H - 7FH (-64 - 0 - +63)

19H rrH mmH — DRUM PITCH FINE 00H - 40H - 7FH (-64 - 0 - +63)

1AHrrH mmH — DRUM LEVEL 00H - 7FH (0 - max.)

1CH rrH mmH — DRUM PANPOT 00H ,01H - 40H - 7FH

(random,left - center - right)

1DHrrH mmH —

DRUM REVERB SEND LEVEL

00H - 7FH (0 - max.)

1EH rrH mmH —

DRUM CHORUS SEND LEVEL

00H - 7FH (0 - max.)

1FH rrH mmH —

DRUM VARIATION SEND LEVEL

00H - 7FH (0 - max.)

The MSG14H-1FH (for drums) message is accepted as long as the channel is set

with a drum voice.

rrH : drum instrument note number

(3-5) SYSTEM REALTIME MESSAGES

(3-5-1) MIDI CLOCK

STATUS 11111000 (F8H)

Transmission: 96 clocks per measure are transmitted.

Reception: If the instrument’s clock is set to external, after FAH is received from the

external device the instrument’s clock will sync with the 96 beats per measure

received from the external device.

Decides whether the internal clock, or Timing Clocks received via the MIDI IN will

be used.

(3-5-2) START

STATUS 11111010 (FAH)

Transmission: Transmitted when instrument’s Rhythm or Song playback is started.

Reception: Depending upon the condition, Rhythm, Song Playback, or Song Rec will

start.

(3-5-3) STOP

STATUS 11111100 (FCH)

Transmission: Transmitted when instrument’s Rhythm or Song playback is stopped.

Reception: Depending upon the condition, Rhythm, Song Playback, or Song Rec will

stop.

(3-5-4) ACTIVE SENSING

STATUS 11111110 (FEH)

Transmission: Transmitted approximately once every 200msec.

Reception: Sensing is started once this Code is received. If Status or Data is not

received within 400ms, the MIDI Receive Buffer will be cleared, and all notes,

including those being sustained, will be cut OFF. Also, all control values will be reset

to their factory defaults.

(3-6) SYSTEM EXCLUSIVE MESSAGE

(3-6-1) YAMAHA MIDI FORMAT

(3-6-1-1) SECTION CONTROL

binary hexadecimal

11110000 F0 Exclusive status

01000011 43 YAMAHA ID

01111110 7E Style

00000000 00

0sssssss SS Switch No.

00H : INTRO A

01H~07H : INTRO B

08H : MAIN A

09H~0FH : MAIN B

10H : FILL IN AA

11H~17H : FILL IN BB

18H : FILL IN AB

19H~1FH : FILL IN BA

20H : ENDING A

21H~27H : ENDING B

0ddddddd DD Switch On/Off : 00H (Off),7FH (On)

11110111 F7 End of Exclusive

When an ON code is received, the appointed section will be changed.

MIDI Data Format

156

(3-6-1-2) TEMPO CONTROL

binary hexadecimal

11110000 F0 Exclusive status

01000011 43 YAMAHA ID

01111110 7E Style

00000000 01

0ttttttt TT Tempo4

0ttttttt TT Tempo3

0ttttttt TT Tempo2

0ttttttt TT Tempo1

11110111 F7 End of Exclusive

The internal clock will be set to the received Tempo value.

Tempo Meta Event is a large data block (24-bit), it is divided into 4 groups with 7-bits

going into each of the Tempos 1-4 (4 receives the remaining 3 bits).

(3-6-2) UNIVERSAL SYSTEM EXCLUSIVE

(3-6-2-1) UNIVERSAL REALTIME MESSAGE

(3-6-2-1-1) MIDI MASTER VOLUME (Recive only)

binary hexadecimal

11110000 F0 Exclusive status

01111110 7F Universal Realtime

01111111 7F ID of target Device

00001001 04 Sub-ID #1=Device Control Message

00000001 01 Sub-ID #2=Master Volume

0sssssss SS Volume LSB

0ttttttt TT Volume MSB

11110111 F7 End of Exclusive

11110000 F0 Exclusive status

01111110 7F Universal Realtime

0xxxnnnn XN When N is received N=0-F, whichever is received.

When N is transmitted N always=0.

X = don’t care

00001001 04 Sub-ID #1=Device Control Message

00000001 01 Sub-ID #2=Master Volume

0sssssss SS Volume LSB

0ttttttt TT Volume MSB

11110111 F7 End of Exclusive

The volume for all channels will be changed simultaneously.

The TT value is used as the MIDI Master Volume value. (the ss value is ignored.)

(3-6-2-2) UNIVERSAL NON REALTIME MESSAGE

(3-6-2-2-1) GENERAL MIDI SYSTEM ON

binary hexadecimal

11110000 F0 Exclusive status

01111110 7E Universal Non-Realtime

01111111 7F ID of target Device

00001001 09 Sub-ID #1=General MIDI Message

00000001 01 Sub-ID #2=General MIDI On

11110111 F7 End of Exclusive

11110000 F0 Exclusive status

01111110 7E Universal Non-Realtime

0xxxnnnn XN When N is received N=0-F, whichever is received.

When N is transmitted N always=0.

X = don’t care

00001001 09 Sub-ID #1=General MIDI Message

00000001 01 Sub-ID #2=General MIDI On

11110111 F7 End of Exclusive

Depending upon the received ON message, the System Mode will be changed to XG.

Except MIDI Master Tuning, all control data be reset to default values.

This message requires approximately 50ms to execute, so sufficient time should be

allowed before the next message is sent.

(3-6-3) XG STANDARD

(3-6-3-1) XG PARAMETER CHANGE

(3-6-3-1-1) XG SYSTEM ON

binary hexadecimal

11110000 F0 Exclusive status

01000011 43 YAMAHA ID

0001nnnn 1N Device Number

01001100 4C Model ID

00000000 00 Address High

00000000 00 Address Mid

01111110 7E Address Low

00000000 00 Data

11110111 F7 End of Exclusive

Depending upon the received ON message, the SYSTEM MODE will be changed to

XG.Controllers will be reset, all values of Multi Part and Effect, and All System values

denoted by “XG” data within All System will be reset to default values in the table.

This message requires approximately 50ms to execute, so sufficient time should be

allowed before the next message is sent.

(3-6-3-1-2) XG PARMETER CHANGE

binary hexadecimal

11110000 F0 Exclusive status

01000011 43 YAMAHA ID

0001nnnn 1N Device Number

01001100 4C Model ID

0aaaaaaa AA Address High

0aaaaaaa AA Address Mid

0aaaaaaa AA Address Low

0ddddddd DD Data

| |

11110111 F7 End of Exclusive

For parameters with data size of 2 or 4, transmit the appropriate number of data bytes.

For more information on Address and Parameters, refer to < Table 1-2 > ~ < Table

1-8 > (pages 157-162).

The 4 data types listed below are transmitted and received.

(These are transmitted only after a Parameter change request is received.)

XG System Data

Multi Effect Data

Multi EQ Data

Multi Part Data

Drums Setup Data

(3-6-3-2) XG BULK DUMP

binary hexadecimal

11110000 F0 Exclusive status

01000011 43 YAMAHA ID

0000nnnn 0N Device Number

01001100 4C Model ID

0bbbbbbb BB ByteCount

0aaaaaaa AA Address High

0aaaaaaa AA Address Mid

0aaaaaaa AA Address Low

0ddddddd DD Data

| |

0ccccccc CC Check sum

11110111 F7 End of Exclusive

For more information on Address and Byte Count, refer to < Table 1-2 > ~ < Table 1-8 >

(pages 157-162).

The Check Sum value is set such that the sum of Byte Count, Address, Data, and

Check Sum has value zero in its seven least significant bits.

If the top of the block is appointed to the Address the XG Bulk Dump, Bulk Request

will be received.

The Block is a unit that consists of the data, arranged in the list, as the Total Size.

The 5 data types listed below are transmitted and received.

(These are transmitted only after a Bulk Dump request is received.)

System Data

Multi Effect Data(Individual effect unit)

Multi EQ Data

Multi Part Data(Individual part unit)

Drums Setup Data(Individual note unit)

System Information(Individual only)

(3-6-3-3) XG PARAMETER REQUEST (Recive only)

binary hexadecimal

11110000 F0 Exclusive status

01000011 43 YAMAHA ID

0011nnnn 3n Device Number

01001100 4C Model ID

0aaaaaaa AA Address High

0aaaaaaa AA Address Mid

0aaaaaaa AA Address Low

11110111 F7 End of Exclusive

For more information on Address and Byte Count refer to < Table 1-2 > ~ < Table

1-8 > (pages 157-162).

The 4 data types listed below are received.

System Data

Multi Effect Data

Multi EQ Data

Multi Part Data

Drums Setup Data

(3-6-3-4) XG DUMP REQUEST (Recive only)

binary hexadecimal

11110000 F0 Exclusive status

01000011 43 YAMAHA ID

0010nnnn 2n Device Number

01001100 4C Model ID

0aaaaaaa AA Address High

0aaaaaaa AA Address Mid

0aaaaaaa AA Address Low

11110111 F7 End of Exclusive

For more information on Address and Byte Count refer to < Table 1-2 > ~ < Table 1-8 >

(pages 157-162).

MIDI Data Format

157

The 5 data types listed below are received.

System Data

Multi Effect Data(Individual module unit)

Multi EQ Data

Multi Part Data(Individual part unit)

Drums Setup Data(Individual note unit)

System Information

(3-6-4) SPECIAL OPERATORS

(3-6-4-1) VOLUME ,EXPRESSION AND PAN REALTIME CONTROL OFF

binary hexadecimal

11110000 F0 Exclusive status

01000011 43 YAMAHA ID

01110011 73 Clavinova ID

01000101 45 CVP-98/96/94/92 ID

00010001 11 Sub ID

0000nnnn 0N N = MIDI Channel

01001001 45 Volume and Expression Realtime Control Off

0vvvvvvv VV Value VV: off=7FH, on=00H

11110111 F7 End of Exclusive

When “On” is received, subsequent volume, expression, and PAN changes are only

valid after the reception of the next key on. Normal operation resumes when “Off” is

received.

< Table 1-1> Parmeter Basic Address

Parameter Change

Address

(H) (M) (L) Description

SYSTEM 00 00 00 System

00 00 7D Drum Setup Reset

00 00 7E XG System On

00 00 7F All Parameter Reset

INFORMATION 01 00 00 System Information

EFFECT 1 02 01 00 Effect1(Reverb,Chorus,Variation)

MULTI EQ 02 40 00 Multi EQ(PSR-730 ONLY)

EFFECT 2 03 00 00 Effect2(PSR-730 ONLY)

MULTI PART 08 00 00 Multi Part 1

08 0F 00 Multi Part 16

DRUM 30 0B 00 Drum Setup 1 → Address Parameter

31 0B 00 Drum Setup 2 : :

3n 0B 00 note number 13

3n 0C 00 note number 14

::: :

3n 5B 00 note number 91

< Table 1-2 > MIDI Parameter Change table ( SYSTEM )

Address Size Data Prameter Name Description Default

(H) (H) (H) Value(H)

00 00 00 4 0000 Master Tune -102.4..+102.3[cent] 00 04 00 00

01 ..07FF 1st bit3-0 -> bit15-12 (0400)

02 2nd bit3-0 -> bit11-8 (With XG, GM On, it will not reset.)

03 3rd bit3-0 -> bit7-4

4th bit3-0 -> bit3-0

04 1 00..7F Master Volume 0..127 7F

05 1 Not Used

06 1 28..58 Transpose -24..+24[semitones] 40

7D n Drum Setup Reset n=Drum Setup Number

7E 00 XG System On 00=XG Sytem on

7F 00 All Parameter Reset 00=on (receive only)

TOTAL SIZE 6

(3-6-5) Others

(3-6-5-1) MIDI MASTER TUNING (Recive only)

binary hexadecimal

11110000 F0 Exclusive status

01000011 43 YAMAHA ID

0001nnnn 1N When N is received N=0-F, whichever is received.

00100111 27 Model ID

00110000 30 Sub ID

00000000 00

0mmmmmmm MM Master Tune MSB

0lllllll LL Master Tune LSB

0ccccccc CC don’t care

11110111 F7 End of Exclusive

Changes tuning of all channels.

MM, LL values are used to define the MIDI Master Tuning value.

T = M-128

T : Tuning value (-99cent - +99cent)

M :

A single byte value (28-228) consists of bytes 0-3 of MM = MSB, bytes 0-3 of LL = LSB.

In this setting, GM System ON, XG System ON will not be reset.

MIDI Data Format

158

< Table 1-3 > MIDI Parameter table ( System information )

Address Size Data Prameter Name Description

(H) (H) (H)

01 00 00 D 20..7F Model Name 32..127(ASCII)

0E 1 00

0F 1 00

TOTAL SIZE 10

(Transmitted by Dump Request. Not received. Bulk Dump Only)

< Table 1-4 > MIDI Parameter Change table (EFFECT 1)

Address Size Data Prameter Name Description Default

(H) (H) (H) Value(H)

02 01 00 2 00..7F Reverb Type MSB Refer to the Ef. Type List 01(=HALL1)

00..7F Reverb Type LSB 00 : basic type 00

02 1 00..7F Reverb Parameter 1 Refer to the Ef. Parameter List Depend on Reverb type

03 1 00..7F Reverb Parameter 2 Refer to the Ef. Parameter List Depend on Reverb type

04 1 00..7F Reverb Parameter 3 Refer to the Ef. Parameter List Depend on Reverb type

05 1 00..7F Reverb Parameter 4 Refer to the Ef. Parameter List Depend on Reverb type

06 1 00..7F Reverb Parameter 5 Refer to the Ef. Parameter List Depend on Reverb type

07 1 00..7F Reverb Parameter 6 Refer to the Ef. Parameter List Depend on Reverb type

08 1 00..7F Reverb Parameter 7 Refer to the Ef. Parameter List Depend on Reverb type

09 1 00..7F Reverb Parameter 8 Refer to the Ef. Parameter List Depend on Reverb type

0A 1 00..7F Reverb Parameter 9 Refer to the Ef. Parameter List Depend on Reverb type

0B 1 00..7F Reverb Parameter 10 Refer to the Ef. Parameter List Depend on Reverb type

0C 1 00..7F Reverb Return -∞..0..+6dB(0..96..127) 60

0D 1 01..7F Reverb Pan L63..C..R63(1..64..127) 40

TOTAL SIZE 0E

02 01 10 1 00..7F Reverb Parameter 11 Refer to the Ef. Parameter List Depend on Reverb type

11 1 00..7F Reverb Parameter 12 Refer to the Ef. Parameter List Depend on Reverb type

12 1 00..7F Reverb Parameter 13 Refer to the Ef. Parameter List Depend on Reverb type

13 1 00..7F Reverb Parameter 14 Refer to the Ef. Parameter List Depend on Reverb type

14 1 00..7F Reverb Parameter 15 Refer to the Ef. Parameter List Depend on Reverb type

15 1 00..7F Reverb Parameter 16 Refer to the Ef. Parameter List Depend on Reverb type

TOTAL SIZE 6

02 01 20 2 00..7F Chorus Type MSB Refer to the Ef. Type List 41(=Chorus1)

00..7F Chorus Type LSB 00 : basic type 00

22 1 00..7F Chorus Parameter 1 Refer to the Ef. Parameter List Depend on Chorus Type

23 1 00..7F Chorus Parameter 2 Refer to the Ef. Parameter List Depend on Chorus Type

24 1 00..7F Chorus Parameter 3 Refer to the Ef. Parameter List Depend on Chorus Type

25 1 00..7F Chorus Parameter 4 Refer to the Ef. Parameter List Depend on Chorus Type

26 1 00..7F Chorus Parameter 5 Refer to the Ef. Parameter List Depend on Chorus Type

27 1 00..7F Chorus Parameter 6 Refer to the Ef. Parameter List Depend on Chorus Type

28 1 00..7F Chorus Parameter 7 Refer to the Ef. Parameter List Depend on Chorus Type

29 1 00..7F Chorus Parameter 8 Refer to the Ef. Parameter List Depend on Chorus Type

2A 1 00..7F Chorus Parameter 9 Refer to the Ef. Parameter List Depend on Chorus Type

2B 1 00..7F Chorus Parameter 10 Refer to the Ef. Parameter List Depend on Chorus Type

2C 1 00..7F Chorus Return -∞..0..+6dB(0..96..127) 60

2D 1 01..7F Chorus Pan L63..C..R63(1..64..127) 40

2E 1 00..7F Send Chorus To Reverb -∞..0..+6dB(0..96..127) 00

TOTAL SIZE 0F

02 01 30 1 00..7F Chorus Parameter 11 Refer to the Ef. Parameter List Depend on Chorus Type

31 1 00..7F Chorus Parameter 12 Refer to the Ef. Parameter List Depend on Chorus Type

32 1 00..7F Chorus Parameter 13 Refer to the Ef. Parameter List Depend on Chorus Type

33 1 00..7F Chorus Parameter 14 Refer to the Ef. Parameter List Depend on Chorus Type

34 1 00..7F Chorus Parameter 15 Refer to the Ef. Parameter List Depend on Chorus Type

35 1 00..7F Chorus Parameter 16 Refer to the Ef. Parameter List Depend on Chorus Type

TOTAL SIZE 6

02 01 40 2 00..7F Variation Type MSB Refer to the Ef. Type List “05(=DELAY L,C,R)”

00..7F Variation Type LSB 00 : basic type 00

42 2 00..7F Vari. Param. 1 MSB Refer to the Ef. Parameter List Depend on Vari. Type

00..7F Vari. Param. 1 LSB Refer to the Ef. Parameter List Depend on Vari. Type

44 2 00..7F Vari. Param. 2 MSB Refer to the Ef. Parameter List Depend on Vari. Type

00..7F Vari. Param. 2 LSB Refer to the Ef. Parameter List Depend on Vari. Type

46 2 00..7F Vari. Param. 3 MSB Refer to the Ef. Parameter List Depend on Vari. Type

00..7F Vari. Param. 3 LSB Refer to the Ef. Parameter List Depend on Vari. Type

48 2 00..7F Vari. Param. 4 MSB Refer to the Ef. Parameter List Depend on Vari. Type

00..7F Vari. Param. 4 LSB Refer to the Ef. Parameter List Depend on Vari. Type

4A 2 00..7F Vari. Param. 5 MSB Refer to the Ef. Parameter List Depend on Vari. Type

00..7F Vari. Param. 5 LSB Refer to the Ef. Parameter List Depend on Vari. Type

MIDI Data Format

159

4C 2 00..7F Vari. Param. 6 MSB Refer to the Ef. Parameter List Depend on Vari. Type

00..7F Vari. Param. 6 LSB Refer to the Ef. Parameter List Depend on Vari. Type

4E 2 00..7F Vari. Param. 7 MSB Refer to the Ef. Parameter List Depend on Vari. Type

00..7F Vari. Param. 7 LSB Refer to the Ef. Parameter List Depend on Vari. Type

50 2 00..7F Vari. Param. 8 MSB Refer to the Ef. Parameter List Depend on Vari. Type

00..7F Vari. Param. 8 LSB Refer to the Ef. Parameter List Depend on Vari. Type

52 2 00..7F Vari. Param. 9 MSB Refer to the Ef. Parameter List Depend on Vari. Type

00..7F Vari. Param. 9 LSB Refer to the Ef. Parameter List Depend on Vari. Type

54 2 00..7F Vari. Param. 10 MSB Refer to the Ef. Parameter List Depend on Vari. Type

00..7F Vari. Param. 10 LSB Refer to the Ef. Parameter List Depend on Vari. Type

56 1 00..7F Variation Return -∞..0..+6dB(0..96..127) 60

57 1 01..7F Variation Pan L63..C..R63(1..64..127) 40

58 1 00..7F Send Vari. To Reverb -∞..0..+6dB(0..96..127) 00

59 1 00..7F Send Vari. To Chorus -∞..0..+6dB(0..96..127) 00

5A 1 00..01 Variation Connection 0:insertion,1:system 00

5B 1 00..1F Variation Part part1..32(0..31),off(127) 7F

5C 1 01..7F MW Vari. Ctrl Depth -63..+63 40

5D 1 01..7F PB Vari. Ctrl Depth -63..+63 40

5E 1 01..7F CAT Vari. Ctrl Depth -63..+63 40

5F 1 01..7F Not Used

60 1 01..7F Not Used

TOTAL SIZE 21

02 01 70 1 00..7F Variation Parameter 11 option Parameter Depend on Variation Type

71 1 00..7F Variation Parameter 12 option Parameter Depend on Variation Type

72 1 00..7F Variation Parameter 13 option Parameter Depend on Variation Type

73 1 00..7F Variation Parameter 14 option Parameter Depend on Variation Type

74 1 00..7F Variation Parameter 15 option Parameter Depend on Variation Type

75 1 00..7F Variation Parameter 16 option Parameter Depend on Variation Type

TOTAL SIZE 6

< Table 1-5 > MIDI Parameter Change table ( MULTI EQ )(PSR-730 ONLY)

Address Size Data Prameter Name Description Default

(H) (H) (H) Value(H)

02 40 00 1 34..4C EQ Type 0:FLAT 0

1:JAZZ

2:POPS

3:ROCK

4:CLASSIC

01 1 34..4C EQ Gain1 -12..+12[dB] 40

02 1 04..28 EQ Frequency1 32..2000[Hz] 0C

03 1 01..78 EQ Q1 0.1..12.0 07

04 1 00..01 EQ Shape1 00:Shelving,01:Peaking 00

05 1 34..4C EQ Gain2 -12..+12[dB] 40

06 1 0E..36 EQ Frequency2 0.1..10[KHz] 1C

07 1 01..78 EQ Q2 0.1..12.0 07

08 1 Not Used

09 1 34..4C EQ Gain3 -12..+12[dB] 40

0A 1 0E..36 EQ Frequency3 0.1..10[KHz] 22

0B 1 01..78 EQ Q3 0.1..12.0 07

0C 1 Not Used

0D 1 34..4C EQ Gain4 -12..+12[dB] 40

0E 1 0E..36 EQ Frequency4 0.1..10[KHz] 2E

0F 1 01..78 EQ Q4 0.1..12.0 07

10 1 Not Used

11 1 34..4C EQ Gain5 -12..+12[dB] 40

12 1 1C..3A EQ Frequency5 0.5..16.0[KHz] 3C

13 1 01..78 EQ Q5 0.1..12.0 07

14 1 00..01 EQ Shape5 00:Shelving,01:Peaking 00

TOTAL SIZE 15

< Table 1-6 > MIDI Parameter change table (Effect2))(PSR-730 ONLY)

Address Size Data Prameter Name Description Default

(H) (H) (H) Value(H)

03 0n 00 2 00..7F Insertion Type MSB

Refer to the Ef. Type List “49(=DISTORTION)”

00..7F Insertion Type LSB 00 : basic type 00

02 1 00..7F Insertion Parameter1 Refer to the Ef. Parameter List

03 1 00..7F Insertion Parameter2 Refer to the Ef. Parameter List

04 1 00..7F Insertion Parameter3 Refer to the Ef. Parameter List

05 1 00..7F Insertion Parameter4 Refer to the Ef. Parameter List

06 1 00..7F Insertion Parameter5 Refer to the Ef. Parameter List

07 1 00..7F Insertion Parameter6 Refer to the Ef. Parameter List

Address Size Data Prameter Name Description Default

(H) (H) (H) Value(H)

MIDI Data Format

160

08 1 00..7F Insertion Parameter7 Refer to the Ef. Parameter List

09 1 00..7F Insertion Parameter8 Refer to the Ef. Parameter List

0A 1 00..7F Insertion Parameter9 Refer to the Ef. Parameter List

0B 1 00..7F Insertion Parameter10 Refer to the Ef. Parameter List

0C 1 00..7F Insertion Part Part1..16,OFF 7F

0D 1 00..7F MW INS CTRL DPT

0E 1 00..7F BEND INS CTRL DPT

0F 1 00..7F CAT INS CTRL DPT

10 1 00..7F Not Used

11 1 00..7F Not Used

TOTAL SIZE 12

03 0n 20 1 00..7F Insertion Parameter11 Refer to the Ef. Parameter List

21 1 00..7F Insertion Parameter12 Refer to the Ef. Parameter List

22 1 00..7F Insertion Parameter13 Refer to the Ef. Parameter List

23 1 00..7F Insertion Parameter14 Refer to the Ef. Parameter List

24 1 00..7F Insertion Parameter15 Refer to the Ef. Parameter List

25 1 00..7F Insertion Parameter16 Refer to the Ef. Parameter List

TOTAL SIZE 06

03 0n 30 2 00..7F Ins. Param.1 MSB Refer to the Ef. Parameter List

00..7F Ins. Param.1 LSB Refer to the Ef. Parameter List

03 0n 32 2 00..7F Ins. Param.2 MSB Refer to the Ef. Parameter List

00..7F Ins. Param.2 LSB Refer to the Ef. Parameter List

03 0n 34 2 00..7F Ins. Param.3 MSB Refer to the Ef. Parameter List

00..7F Ins. Param.3 LSB Refer to the Ef. Parameter List

03 0n 36 2 00..7F Ins. Param.4 MSB Refer to the Ef. Parameter List

00..7F Ins. Param.4 LSB Refer to the Ef. Parameter List

03 0n 38 2 00..7F Ins. Param.5 MSB Refer to the Ef. Parameter List

00..7F Ins. Param.5 LSB Refer to the Ef. Parameter List

03 0n 3A 2 00..7F Ins. Param.6 MSB Refer to the Ef. Parameter List

00..7F Ins. Param.6 LSB Refer to the Ef. Parameter List

03 0n 3C 2 00..7F Ins. Param.7 MSB Refer to the Ef. Parameter List

00..7F Ins. Param.7 LSB Refer to the Ef. Parameter List

03 0n 3E 2 00..7F Ins. Param.8 MSB Refer to the Ef. Parameter List

00..7F Ins. Param.8 LSB Refer to the Ef. Parameter List

03 0n 40 2 00..7F Ins. Param.9 MSB Refer to the Ef. Parameter List

00..7F Ins. Param.9 LSB Refer to the Ef. Parameter List

03 0n 42 2 00..7F Ins. Param.10 MSB Refer to the Ef. Parameter List

00..7F Ins. Param.10 LSB Refer to the Ef. Parameter List

TOTAL SIZE 14

For effect types that do not require MSB, the Parameters for Address 02-0B will be received. Address 30-42 will not be received.

For effect types that require MSB, the Parameters for Address 30-42 will be received. Address 02-0B will not be received.

When Bulk Dumps that include Effect Type data are transmitted, the Parameters for Address 02 - 0B will always be transmitted. But, effects that require MSB, when the bulk dump is

received the Parameters for Address 02 - 0B will not be received.

n=Insertion Effect No.(0-1)

< Table 1-7 > MIDI Parameter Change table (MULTI PART)

Address Size Data Prameter Name Description Default

(H) (H) (H) Value(H)

08 nn 00 1 00..20 Element Reserve 0..32 0(Part10),2(Others)

nn 01 1 00..7F Bank Select MSB 0..127 7F(Part10),00(Others)

nn 02 1 00..7F Bank Select LSB 0..127 00

nn 03 1 00..7F Program Number 1..128 00

nn 04 1 00..0F, Rcv Channel 0..16;1..16,127;off Part No.

nn 05 1 00..01 Mono/Poly Mode 0:mono,1:poly 01

nn 06 1 00..02 Same Note Number 0:single 00

Key On Assign 1:multi

2:inst (for DRUM)

nn 07 1 00..02 Part Mode 0:normal 00 (Except Part10)

1..3:drum thru,drum1..2 01 (Part10)

nn 08 1 28..58 Note Shift -24..+24[semitones] 40

nn 09 2 00..FF Detune -12.8..+12.7[Hz] 08 00

nn 0A 1st bit3..0 -> bit7..4 (80)

2nd bit3..0 -> bit3..0

nn 0B 1 00..7F Volume 0..127 64

nn 0C 1 00..7F Velocity Sense Depth 0..127 40

nn 0D 1 00..7F Velocity Sense Offset 0..127 40

nn 0E 1 00..7F Pan 0:random 40

L63..C..R63(1..64..127)

nn 0F 1 00..7F Note Limit Low C-2..G8 00

nn 10 1 00..7F Note Limit High C-2..G8 7F

nn 11 1 00..7F Dry Level 0..127 7F

nn 12 1 00..7F Chorus Send 0..127 00

Address Size Data Prameter Name Description Default

(H) (H) (H) Value(H)

MIDI Data Format

161

nn 13 1 00..7F Reverb Send 0..127 28

nn 14 1 00..7F Variation Send 0..127 00

nn 15 1 00..7F Vibrato Rate -64..+63 40

nn 16 1 00..7F Vibrato Depth -64..+63 40

nn 17 1 00..7F Vibrato Delay -64..+63 40

nn 18 1 00..7F Filter Cutoff Freq. -64..+63 40

nn 19 1 00..7F Filter Resonance -64..+63 40

nn 1A 1 00..7F EG Attack Time -64..+63 40

nn 1B 1 00..7F EG Decay Time -64..+63 40

nn 1C 1 00..7F EG Release Time -64..+63 40

nn 1D 1 28..58 MW Pitch Control -24..+24[semitones] 40

nn 1E 1 00..7F MW Filter Control -9600..+9450[cent] 40

nn 1F 1 00..7F MW Amp. Control -100..+100[%] 40

nn 20 1 00..7F MW LFO PMod Depth 0..127 0A

nn 21 1 00..7F MW LFO FMod Depth 0..127 00

nn 22 1 00..7F MW LFO AMod Depth 0..127 00

nn 23 1 28..58 Bend Pitch Control -24..+24[semitones] 42

nn 24 1 00..7F Bend Filter Control -9600..+9450[cent] 40

nn 25 1 00..7F Bend Amp. Control -100..+100[%] 40

nn 26 1 00..7F Bend LFO PMod Depth 0..127 00

nn 27 1 00..7F Bend LFO FMod Depth 0..127 00

nn 28 1 00..7F Bend LFO AMod Depth 0..127 00

TOTAL SIZE 29

nn 30 Not Used

nn 40 Not Used

nn 41 1 00..7F Scale Tuning C -64..+63[cent] 40

nn 42 1 00..7F Scale Tuning C# -64..+63[cent] 40

nn 43 1 00..7F Scale Tuning D -64..+63[cent] 40

nn 44 1 00..7F Scale Tuning D# -64..+63[cent] 40

nn 45 1 00..7F Scale Tuning E -64..+63[cent] 40

nn 46 1 00..7F Scale Tuning F -64..+63[cent] 40

nn 47 1 00..7F Scale Tuning F# -64..+63[cent] 40

nn 48 1 00..7F Scale Tuning G -64..+63[cent] 40

nn 49 1 00..7F Scale Tuning G# -64..+63[cent] 40

nn 4A 1 00..7F Scale Tuning A -64..+63[cent] 40

nn 4B 1 00..7F Scale Tuning A# -64..+63[cent] 40

nn 4C 1 00..7F Scale Tuning B -64..+63[cent] 40

nn 4D 1 28..58 CAT Pitch Control -24..+24[semitones] 40

nn 4E 1 00..7F CAT Filter Control -9600..+9450[cent] 40

nn 4F 1 00..7F CAT Amplitude Control -100..+100[%] 40

nn 50 1 00..7F CAT LFO PMod Depth 0..127 00

nn 51 1 00..7F CAT LFO FMod Depth 0..127 00

nn 52 1 00..7F CAT LFO AMod Depth 0..127 00

nn 53 Not Used

66 Not Used

nn 67 1 00..01 Portamento Switch off/on 00

nn 68 1 00..7F Portamento Time 0..127 00

nn 69 Not Used

6E Not Used

TOTAL SIZE 3F

nn = PartNumber

If there is a Drum Voice assigned to the Part, the following parameters are ineffective.

• Bank Select LSB

• Pitch EG

• Portamento

• Soft Pedal

• Mono/Poly

• Scale Tuning

Address Size Data Prameter Name Description Default

(H) (H) (H) Value(H)

MIDI Data Format

162

< Table 1-8 > MIDI Parameter Change table ( DRUM SETUP )

Address Size Data Prameter Name Description Default

(H) (H) (H) Value(H)

3n rr 00 1 00..7F Pitch Coarse -64..+63 40

3n rr 01 1 00..7F Pitch Fine -64..+63[cent] 40

3n rr 02 1 00..7F Level 0..127 Depend on the Note

3n rr 03 1 00..7F Alternate Group 0:off,1..127 Depend on the Note

3n rr 04 1 00..7F Pan 0:random Depend on the Note

L63..C..R63(1..64..127)

3n rr 05 1 00..7F Reverb Send Level 0..127 Depend on the Note

3n rr 06 1 00..7F Chorus Send Level 0..127 Depend on the Note

3n rr 07 1 00..7F Variation Send Level 0..127 7F

3n rr 08 1 00..01 Key Assign 0:single,1:multi 00

3n rr 09 1 00..01 Rcv Note Off off/on Depend on the Note

3n rr 0A 1 00..01 Rcv Note On off/on 01

3n rr 0B 1 00..7F Filter Cutoff Freq. -64..63 40

3n rr 0C 1 00..7F Filter Resonance -64..63 40

3n rr 0D 1 00..7F EG Attack Rate -64..63 40

3n rr 0E 1 00..7F EG Decay1 Rate -64..63 40

3n rr 0F 1 00..7F EG Decay2 Rate -64..63 40

TOTAL SIZE 10

n:Drum Setup Number(0 - 1)

rr:note number(0DH - 5BH)

If XG SYSTEM ON and/or GM On message is received, all Drum Setup Parameter will be reset to default values.

According to the Drum Setup Reset message, individual Drum Setup Parameters can be reset to default values.

XG ESSENTIAL EFFECT

Same as LSB=0

XG OPTION EFFECT

* If the received value does not contain an effect type in the TYPE LSB, the LSB will be directed to TYPE 0.

* Panel Effects are based on the “[Number] Effect Name”.

* Using an external sequencer, capable of editing and transmitting the system exclusive messages and parameter changes, allows you to select the reverb, chorus and DSP effect types

which are not accessible from the PSR-730/630 panel operation. When one of the effects is selected by the external sequencer, “XG Rev.,” “XG Cho.” or “XG Eff.” will be shown on

the display.

< Table 1-9 > Effect Type List

REVERB TYPE

TYPE TYPE LSB

MSB 00 01 02 03...07 08 09...15 16 17 18 19 20 21...

000 NO EFFECT

001 [1]HALL1 [2]HALL2 [3]HALL3 [4]HALL4 [5]HALL5

002 [6]ROOM1 ROOM2 [8]ROOM2 [7]ROOM3 ROOM ROOM [9]ROOM4

003 [10]STAGE1 [11]STAGE2 STAGE [12]STAGE3

004 [13]PLATE PLATE PLATE

005..015 NO EFFECT

016 [14]WHITE ROOM

017 [15]TUNNEL

018 CANYON

019 [16]BASEMENT

020..127 NO EFFECT

CHORUS TYPE

TYPE TYPE LSB

MSB 00 01 02 03...07 08 09...15 16 17 18 19 20 21...

000 NO EFFECT

001..064 NO EFFECT

065 CHORUS1 CHORUS2 CHORUS3 CHORUS4

066 CELESTE1 CELESTE2 CELESTE3 CELESTE4 CELESTE CELESTE

067 FLANGER 1 FLANGER2 FLANGER3 FLANGER FLANGER

068 SYMPHONIC

069..071 NO EFFECT

072 PHASER 1

073..086 NO EFFECT

087

ENSEMBLE DETUNE

088..127 NO EFFECT

MIDI Data Format

163

DSP(VARIATIOM) EFFECT TYPE

TYPE TYPE LSB

MSB 00 01 02 03...07 08 09...15 16 17 18 19 20 21...

000 NO EFFECT

001 [1]HALL1 [2]HALL2 [3]HALL3 HALL HALL

002 [4]ROOM1 ROOM2 [5]ROOM2 [6]ROOM3 ROOM ROOM ROOM

003 [7]STAGE1 [8]STAGE2 STAGE [9]STAGE3

004 PLATE PLATE PLATE

005 DELAY L,C,R [17]DELAY LCR

006 [18]DELAY L,R

007 [19]ECHO

008

[20]CROSS DELAY

009 ER1 ER2

010 GATE REVERB

011 REVERS GATE

012..015 NO EFFECT

016 WHITE ROOM

017 TUNNEL

018 CANYON

019 BASEMENT

020 KARAOKE 1 KARAOKE 2 KARAOKE 3

021..063 NO EFFECT

064 THRU

065 CHORUS1 CHORUS2 CHORUS CHORUS

066 [13]CELESTE [12]CHORUS3 CELESTE3 [11]CHORUS2 CHORUS [10]CHORUS1 [22]ROTARY [23]ROTARY

FAST SLOW

067 FLANGER 1 FLANGER FLANGER [14]FLANGER FLANGER

068 SYMPHONIC [15]SYMPHONIC

069 ROTARY SP. Rotary Sp

070 TREMOLO [21]TREMOLO Rotary Sp

071 AUTO PAN [16]AUTO PAN Rotary Sp Rotary Sp Tremolo Gtr Tremolo

072 [24]PHASER PHASER

073 DISTORTION COMP+

DISTORTION

074 OVER DRIVE

075 AMP SIM. DIST.HARD DIST.SOFT

076 3BAND EQ EQ DISCO EQ TEL

077 2BAND EQ

078 AUTO WAH AUTO WAH+ AUTO WAH+ [25]WAH

DIST OVERDRIVE

079 THRU

080 PITCH CHANGE PITCH CHANGE2

081 THRU

082 TOUCH WAH 1 TOUCH WAH+ TOUCH WAH+ TOUCH WAH 2

DIST OVERDRIVE

083 COMPRESSOR

084 NOISE GATE

085 VOICE CANCEL

086

2WAY ROTARY SP

087

ENSEMBLE DETUNE

088 AMBIENCE

089..127 THRU

MULTI EFFECT (INSERTION) TYPE

TYPE TYPE LSB

MSB 00 01 02 03...07 08 09...15 16 17 18 19 20 21...

000 THRU

001 HALL 1 HALL 2 HALL HALL HALL

002 ROOM 1 ROOM 2 ROOM 3 ROOM ROOM ROOM ROOM

003 STAGE 1 STAGE 2 STAGE STAGE

004 PLATE PLATE PLATE

005 DELAY L,C,R Delay LCR

006 DELAY L,R

007 ECHO

008 CROSS DELAY

009..019 THRU

020 KARAOKE 1 KARAOKE 2 KARAOKE 3

021..064 THRU

065 CHORUS 1 CHORUS 2 CHORUS 3 CHORUS 4

066 CELESTE 1 CELESTE 2 CELESTE 3 CELESTE 4 CHORUS CHORUS Rotary Sp

067 FLANGER 1 FLANGER 2 FLANGER 3 FLANGER FLANGER

068 SYMPHONIC Symphonic

069

ROTARY SPEAKER 1

Rotary Sp

070 TREMOLO Tremolo Rotary Sp

071 AUTO PAN AutoPan Rotary Sp Rotary Sp Tremolo Gtr Tremolo

072 PHASER 1

073 DISTORTION

074 OVER DRIVE

075 AMP SIMULATOR DIST.HARD DIST.SOFT

076 3BAND EQ EQ DISCO EQ TEL

077 2-BAND EQ

078 AUTO WAH(LFO) Auto Wah

079..081 THRU

082 TOUCH WAH 1 TOUCH WAH 2

083 COMPRESSOR

084 NOISE GATE

085..086 THRU

087

ENSEMBLE DETUNE

088..127 THRU

MIDI Data Format

164

HALL1,HALL2, ROOM1,ROOM2,ROOM3, STAGE1,STAGE2

PLATE (reverb, variation, insertion block)

No. Parameter Value See Table Control

1 Reverb Time 0.3–30.0s 0–69 table#4

2 Diffusion 0–10 0–10

3 Initial Delay 0–63 0–63 table#5

4 HPF Cutoff Thru–8.0kHz 0–52 table#3

5 LPF Cutoff 1.0k–Thru 34–60 table#3

10 Dry/Wet D63>W – D=W – D<W63 1–127 ●

11 Rev Delay 0–63 0–63 table#5

12 Density 0–4 (reverb, variation block) 0–4

0–2 (insertion block) 0–2

13 Er/Rev Balance E63>R – E=R – E<R63 1–127

14 High Damp 0.1–1.0 1–10

15 Feedback Level -63–+63 1–127

WHITE ROOM, TUNNEL, CANYON, BASEMENT (reverb, variation block)

No. Parameter Value See Table Control

1 Reverb Time 0.3–30.0s 0–69 table#4

2 Diffusion 0–10 0–10

3 Initial Delay 0–63 0–63 table#5

4 HPF Cutoff Thru–8.0kHz 0–52 table#3

5 LPF Cutoff 1.0k–Thru 34–60 table#3

6 Width 0.5–10.2m 0–37 table#11

7 Heigt 0.5–20.2m 0–73 table#11

8 Depth 0.5–30.2m 0–104 table#11

9 Wall Vary 0–30 0–30

10 Dry/Wet D63>W – D=W – D<W63 1–127 ●

11 Rev Delay 0–63 0–63 table#5

12 Density 0–4 0–4

13 Er/Rev Balance E63>R – E=R – E<R63 1–127

14 High Damp 0.1–1.0 1–10

15 Feedback Level -63–+63 1–127

DELAY L,C,R (variation, insertion block)

No. Parameter Value See Table Control

1 Lch Delay 0.1–1486.0ms (variation block) 1–14860

0.1–742.9ms (insertion block) 1–7429

2 Rch Delay 0.1–1486.0ms (variation block) 1–14860

0.1–742.9ms (insertion block) 1–7429

3 Cch Delay 0.1–1486.0ms (variation block) 1–14860

0.1–742.9ms (insertion block) 1–7429

4 Feedback Delay 0.1–1486.0ms (variation block) 1–14860

0.1–742.9ms (insertion block) 1–7429

5 Feedback Level -63–+63 1–127

6 Cch Level 0–127 0–127

7 High Damp 0.1–1.0 1–10

10 Dry/Wet D63>W – D=W – D<W63 1–127 ●

13 EQ Low Frequency 32Hz–2.0kHz 4–40 table#3

14 EQ Low Gain -12–+12dB 52–76

15 EQ High Frequency 500Hz–16.0kHz 28–58 table#3

16 EQ High Gain -12–+12dB 52–76

DELAY L,R (variation, insertion block)

No. Parameter Value See Table Control

1 Lch Delay 0.1–1486.0ms (variation block) 1–14860

0.1–742.9ms (insertion block) 1–7429

2 Rch Delay 0.1–1486.0ms (variation block) 1–14860

0.1–742.9ms (insertion block) 1–7429

3 Feedback Delay 1 0.1–1486.0ms (variation block) 1–14860

0.1–742.9ms (insertion block) 1–7429

4 Feedback Delay 2 0.1–1486.0ms (variation block) 1–14860

0.1–742.9ms (insertion block) 1–7429

5 Feedback Level -63–+63 1–127

6 High Damp 0.1–1.0 1–10

10 Dry/Wet D63>W – D=W – D<W63 1–127 ●

13 EQ Low Frequency 32Hz–2.0kHz 4–40 table#3

14 EQ Low Gain -12–+12dB 52–76

15 EQ High Frequency 500Hz–16.0kHz 28–58 table#3

16 EQ High Gain -12–+12dB 52–76

ECHO (variation, insertion block)

No. Parameter Value See Table Control

1 Lch Delay1 0.1–743.0ms (variation block) 1–7430

0.1–371.4ms (insertion block) 1–3714

2 Lch Feedback Level -63–+63 1–127

3 Rch Delay1 0.1–743.0ms (variation block) 1–7430

0.1–371.4ms (insertion block) 1–3714

4 Rch Feedback Level -63–+63 1–127

5 High Damp 0.1–1.0 1–10

6 Lch Delay2 0.1–743.0ms (variation block) 1–7430

0.1–371.4ms (insertion block) 1–3714

7 Rch Delay2 0.1–743.0ms (variation block) 1–7430

0.1–371.4ms (insertion block) 1–3714

8 Delay2 Level 0–127 0–127

10 Dry/Wet D63>W – D=W – D<W63 1–127 ●

13 EQ Low Frequency 32Hz–2.0kHz 4–40 table#3

14 EQ Low Gain -12–+12dB 52–76

15 EQ High Frequency 500Hz–16.0kHz 28–58 table#3

16 EQ High Gain -12–+12dB 52–76

< Table 1-10 > Effect Parameter List

CROSS DELAY (variation, insertion block)

No. Parameter Value See Table Control

1 L->R Delay 0.1–743.0ms (variation block) 1–7430

0.1–371.4ms (insertion block) 1–3714

2 R->L Delay 0.1–743.0ms (variation block) 1–7430

0.1–371.4ms (insertion block) 1–3714

3 Feedback Level -63–+63 1–127

4 Input Select L,R,L&R 0–2

5 High Damp 0.1–1.0 1–10

10 Dry/Wet D63>W – D=W – D<W63 1–127 ●

13 EQ Low Frequency 32Hz–2.0kHz 4–40 table#3

14 EQ Low Gain -12–+12dB 52–76

15 EQ High Frequency 500Hz–16.0kHz 28–58 table#3

16 EQ High Gain -12–+12dB 52–76

EARLY REF1,EARLY REF2(variation block)

No. Parameter Value See Table Control

1 Type S-H, L-H, Rdm, Rvs, Plt, Spr 0–5

2 Room Size 0.1–7.0 0–44 table#6

3 Diffusion 0–10 0–10

4 Initial Delay 0–63 0–63 table#5

5 Feedback Level -63–+63 1–127

6 HPF Cutoff Thru–8.0kHz 0–52 table#3

7 LPF Cutoff 1.0k–Thru 34–60 table#3

10 Dry/Wet D63>W – D=W – D<W63 1–127 ●

11 Liveness 0–10 0–10

12 Density 0–3 0–3

13 High Damp 0.1–1.0 1–10

GATE REVERB, REVERSE GATE (variation block)

No. Parameter Value See Table Control

1 Type TypeA,TypeB 0–1

2 Room Size 0.1–20.0 0–127 table#6

3 Diffusion 0–10 0–10

4 Initial Delay 0–127 0–127 table#5

5 Feedback Level -63–+63 1–127

6 HPF Cutoff Thru–8.0kHz 0–52 table#3

7 LPF Cutoff 1.0k–Thru 34–60 table#3

10 Dry/Wet D63>W – D=W – D<W63 1–127 ●

11 Liveness 0–10 0–10

12 Density 0–3 0–3

13 High Damp 0.1–1.0 1–10

KARAOKE1,2,3 (variation, insertion block)

No. Parameter Value See Table Control

1 Delay Time 0–127 0–127 table#7

2 Feedback Level -63–+63 1–127

3 HPF Cutoff Thru–8.0kHz 0–52 table#3

4 LPF Cutoff 1.0k–Thru 34–60 table#3

10 Dry/Wet D63>W – D=W – D<W63 1–127 ●

CHORUS1,2,3,4, CELESTE1,2,3,4 (chorus, variation, insertion block)

No. Parameter Value See Table Control

1 LFO Frequency 0.00Hz–39.7Hz 0–127 table#1

2 LFO Depth 0–127 0–127

3 Feedback Level -63–+63 1–127

4 Delay Offset 0–127 0–127 table#2

6 EQ Low Frequency 32Hz–2.0kHz 4–40 table#3

7 EQ Low Gain -12–+12dB 52–76

8 EQ High Frequency 500Hz–16.0kHz 28–58 table#3

9 EQ High Gain -12–+12dB 52–76

10 Dry/Wet D63>W – D=W – D<W63 1–127 ●

11 EQ Mid Frequency 100Hz–10.0kHz (variation block) 14–54 table#3

12 EQ Mid Gain -12–+12dB (variation block) 52–76

13 EQ Mid Width 1.0–12.0 (variation block) 10–120

15 Input Mode mono/stereo 0–1

FLANGER1,2,3 (chorus, variation, insertion block)

No. Parameter Value See Table Control

1 LFO Frequency 0.00Hz–39.7Hz 0–127 table#1

2 LFO Depth 0–127 0–127

3 Feedback Level -63–+63 1–127

4 Delay Offset 0–127 0–127 table#2

6 EQ Low Frequency 32Hz–2.0kHz 4–40 table#3

7 EQ Low Gain -12–+12dB 52–76

8 EQ High Frequency 500Hz–16.0kHz 28–58 table#3

9 EQ High Gain -12–+12dB 52–76

10 Dry/Wet D63>W – D=W – D<W63 1–127 ●

11 EQ Mid Frequency 100Hz–10.0kHz (variation block) 14–54 table#3

12 EQ Mid Gain -12–+12dB (variation block) 52–76

13 EQ Mid Width 1.0–12.0 (variation block) 10–120

14 LFO Phase Difference -180–+180deg(resolution=3deg.) 4–124

MIDI Data Format

165

SYMPHONIC (chorus, variation, insertion block)

No. Parameter Value See Table Control

1 LFO Frequency 0.00Hz–39.7Hz 0–127 table#1

2 LFO Depth 0–127 0–127

3 Delay Offset 0–127 0–127 table#2

6 EQ Low Frequency 32Hz–2.0kHz 4–40 table#3

7 EQ Low Gain -12–+12dB 52–76

8 EQ High Frequency 500Hz–16.0kHz 28–58 table#3

9 EQ High Gain -12–+12dB 52–76

10 Dry/Wet D63>W – D=W – D<W63 1–127 ●

11 EQ Mid Frequency 100Hz–10.0kHz (variation block) 14–54 table#3

12 EQ Mid Gain -12–+12dB (variation block) 52–76

13 EQ Mid Width 1.0–12.0 (variation block) 10–120

ENSEMBLE DETUNE (chorus, variation, insertion block)

No. Parameter Value See Table Control

1 Detune -50–+50cent 14–114

2 Lch Init Delay 0–127 0–127 table#2

3 Rch Init Delay 0–127 0–127 table#2

10 Dry/Wet D63>W – D=W – D<W63 1–127 ●

11 EQ Low Frequency 32Hz–2.0kHz 4–40 table#3

(variation, insertion block)

12 EQ Low Gain -12–+12dB 52–76

(variation, insertion block)

13 EQ High Frequency 500Hz–16.0kHz 28–58 table#3

(variation, insertion block)

14 EQ High Gain -12–+12dB 52–76

(variation, insertion block)

AMBIENCE (variation block)

No. Parameter Value See Table Control

1 Delay Time 0–127 0–127 table#2

2 Output Phase normal/invers 0–1

6 EQ Low Frequency 32Hz–2.0kHz 4–40 table#3

7 EQ Low Gain -12–+12dB 52–76

8 EQ High Frequency 500Hz–16.0kHz 28–58 table#3

9 EQ High Gain -12–+12dB 52–76

10 Dry/Wet D63>W – D=W – D<W63 1–127 ●

ROTARY SPEAKER (variation, insertion block)

No. Parameter Value See Table Control

1 LFO Frequency 0.00Hz–39.7Hz 0–127 table#1 ●

2 LFO Depth 0–127 0–127

6 EQ Low Frequency 32Hz–2.0kHz 4–40 table#3

7 EQ Low Gain -12–+12dB 52–76

8 EQ High Frequency 500Hz–16.0kHz 28–58 table#3

9 EQ High Gain -12–+12dB 52–76

10 Dry/Wet D63>W – D=W – D<W63 1–127

11 EQ Mid Frequency 100Hz–10.0kHz (variation block) 14–54 table#3

12 EQ Mid Gain -12–+12dB (variation block) 52–76

13 EQ Mid Width 1.0–12.0 (variation block) 10–120

2WAY ROTARY SPEAKER (variation block)

No. Parameter Value See Table Control

1 Rotor Speed 0.0Hz–39.7Hz 0–127 table#1 ●

2 Drive Low 0–127 0–127

3 Drive High 0–127 0–127

4 Low/High L63>H – L=H – L<H63 1–127

6 EQ Low Frequency 32Hz–2.0kHz 4–40 table#3

7 EQ Low Gain -12–+12dB 52–76

8 EQ High Frequency 500Hz–16.0kHz 28–58 table#3

9 EQ High Gain -12–+12dB 52–76

11 Crossover Frequency 100Hz–10.0kHz 14–54 table#3

12 Mic L-R Angle 0deg–180deg(resolution=3deg.) 0–60

TREMOLO (variation, insertion block)

No. Parameter Value See Table Control

1 LFO Frequency 0.00Hz–39.7Hz 0–127 table#1 ●

2 AM Depth 0–127 0–127

3 PM Depth 0–127 0–127

6 EQ Low Frequency 32Hz–2.0kHz 4–40 table#3

7 EQ Low Gain -12–+12dB 52–76

8 EQ High Frequency 500Hz–16.0kHz 28–58 table#3

9 EQ High Gain -12–+12dB 52–76

11 EQ Mid Frequency 100Hz–10.0kHz (variation block) 14–54 table#3

12 EQ Mid Gain -12–+12dB (variation block) 52–76

13 EQ Mid Width 1.0–12.0 (variation block) 10–120

14 LFO Phase Difference -180–+180deg(resolution=3deg.) 4–124

15 Input Mode mono/stereo 0–1

AUTO PAN (variation, insertion block)

No. Parameter Value See Table Control

1 LFO Frequency 0.00Hz–39.7Hz 0–127 table#1 ●

2 L/R Depth 0–127 0–127

3 F/R Depth 0–127 0–127

4 PAN Direction L<->R,L->R,L<-R,Lturn,Rturn,L/R 0–5

6 EQ Low Frequency 32Hz–2.0kHz 4–40 table#3

7 EQ Low Gain -12–+12dB 52–76

8 EQ High Frequency 500Hz–16.0kHz 28–58 table#3

9 EQ High Gain -12–+12dB 52–76

11 EQ Mid Frequency 100Hz–10.0kHz (variation block) 14–54 table#3

12 EQ Mid Gain -12–+12dB (variation block) 52–76

13 EQ Mid Width 1.0–12.0 (variation block) 10–120

PHASER 1 (chorus, variation, insertion block)

No. Parameter Value See Table Control

1 LFO Frequency 0.00Hz–39.7Hz 0–127 table#1

2 LFO Depth 0–127 0–127

3 Phase Shift Offset 0–127 0–127

4 Feedback Level -63–+63 1–127

6 EQ Low Frequency 32Hz–2.0kHz 4–40 table#3

7 EQ Low Gain -12–+12dB 52–76

8 EQ High Frequency 500Hz–16.0kHz 28–58 table#3

9 EQ High Gain -12–+12dB 52–76

10 Dry/Wet D63>W – D=W – D<W63 1–127 ●

11 Stage 4,5,6 (chorus, insertion block) 4–6

4–12 (variation block) 4–12

12 Diffusion mono/stereo 0–1

PHASER 2 (variation block)

No. Parameter Value See Table Control

1 LFO Frequency 0.00Hz–39.7Hz 0–127 table#1

2 LFO Depth 0–127 0–127

3 Phase Shift Offset 0–127 0–127

4 Feedback Level -63–+63 1–127

6 EQ Low Frequency 32Hz–2.0kHz 4–40 table#3

7 EQ Low Gain -12–+12dB 52–76

8 EQ High Frequency 500Hz–16.0kHz 28–58 table#3

9 EQ High Gain -12–+12dB 52–76

10 Dry/Wet D63>W – D=W – D<W63 1–127 ●

11 Stage 3,4,5,6 3-6

13 LFO Phase Difference

-180deg–+180deg(resolution=3deg.)

4–124

DISTORTION, OVERDRIVE (variation, insertion block)

No. Parameter Value See Table Control

1 Drive 0–127 0–127 ●

2 EQ Low Frequency 32Hz–2.0kHz 4–40 table#3

3 EQ Low Gain -12–+12dB 52–76

4 LPF Cutoff 1.0k–Thru 34–60 table#3

5 Output Level 0–127 0–127

7 EQ Mid Frequency 100Hz–10.0kHz 14–54 table#3

8 EQ Mid Gain -12–+12dB 52–76

9 EQ Mid Width 1.0–12.0 10–120

10 Dry/Wet D63>W – D=W – D<W63 1–127

11 Edge(Clip Curve) 0–127 0–127 mild–sharp

COMP+DIST (variation block)

No. Parameter Value See Table Control

1 Drive 0–127 0–127 ●

2 EQ Low Frequency 32Hz–2.0kHz 4–40 table#3

3 EQ Low Gain -12–+12dB 52–76

4 LPF Cutoff 1.0k–Thru 34–60 table#3

5 Output Level 0–127 0–127

7 EQ Mid Frequency 100Hz–10.0kHz 14–54 table#3

8 EQ Mid Gain -12–+12dB 52–76

9 EQ Mid Width 1.0–12.0 10–120

10 Dry/Wet D63>W – D=W – D<W63 1–127

11 Edge(Clip Curve) 0–127 0–127 mild–sharp

12 Attack 1ms–40ms 0–19 table#8

13 Release 10ms–680ms 0–15 table#9

14 Threshold -48dB–-6dB 79–121

15 Ratio 1.0–20.0 0–7 table#10

MIDI Data Format

166

AMP SIMULATOR (variation, insertion block)

No. Parameter Value See Table Control

1 Drive 0–127 0–127 ●

2 AMP Type Off,Stack,Combo,Tube 0–3

3 LPF Cutoff 1.0k–Thru 34–60 table#3

4 Output Level 0–127 0–127

10 Dry/Wet D63>W – D=W – D<W63 1–127

11 Edge(Clip Curve) 0–127 0–127 mild–sharp

3BAND EQ(MONO) (variation, insertion block)

No. Parameter Value See Table Control

1 EQ Low Gain -12–+12dB 52–76

2 EQ Mid Frequency 100Hz–10.0kHz 14–54 table#3

3 EQ Mid Gain -12–+12dB 52–76

4 EQ Mid Width 1.0–12.0 10–120

5 EQ High Gain -12–+12dB 52–76

6 EQ Low Frequency 50Hz–2.0kHz 8–40 table#3

7 EQ High Frequency 500Hz–16.0kHz 28–58 table#3

15 Input Mode mono/stereo 0–1

2BAND EQ(STEREO) (variation, insertion block)

No. Parameter Value See Table Control

1 EQ Low Frequency 32Hz–2.0kHz 4–40 table#3

2 EQ Low Gain -12–+12dB 52–76

3 EQ High Frequency 500Hz–16.0kHz 28–58 table#3

4 EQ High Gain -12–+12dB 52–76

AUTO WAH (variation, insertion block)

No. Parameter Value See Table Control

1 LFO Frequency 0.00Hz–39.7Hz 0–127 table#1

2 LFO Depth 0–127 0–127

3 Cutoff Frequency Offset 0–127 0–127 ●

4 Resonance 1.0–12.0 10–120

6 EQ Low Frequency 32Hz–2.0kHz 4–40 table#3

7 EQ Low Gain -12–+12dB 52–76

8 EQ High Frequency 500Hz–16.0kHz 28–58 table#3

9 EQ High Gain -12–+12dB 52–76

10 Dry/Wet D63>W – D=W – D<W63 1–127

11 Drive 0–127 0–127

AUTO WAH+DIST, AUTO WHA+ODRV (variation block)

No. Parameter Value See Table Control

1 LFO Frequency 0.00Hz–39.7Hz 0–127 table#1

2 LFO Depth 0–127 0–127

3 Cutoff Frequency Offset 0–127 0–127 ●

4 Resonance 1.0–12.0 10–120

6 EQ Low Frequency 32Hz–2.0kHz 4–40 table#3

7 EQ Low Gain -12–+12dB 52–76

8 EQ High Frequency 500Hz–16.0kHz 28–58 table#3

9 EQ High Gain -12–+12dB 52–76

10 Dry/Wet D63>W – D=W – D<W63 1–127

11 Drive 0–127 0–127

12 EQ Low Gain(distortion) -12–+12dB 52–76

13 EQ Mid Gain(distortion) -12–+12dB 52–76

14 LPF Cutoff 1.0kHz–thru 34–60 table#3

15 Output Level 0–127 0–127

TOUCH WAH 1 (variation, insertion block), TOUCH WAH+DIST (variation block)

No. Parameter Value See Table Control

1 Sensitive 0–127 0–127

2 Cutoff Frequency Offset 0–127 0–127 ●

3 Resonance 1.0–12.0 10–120

6 EQ Low Frequency 32Hz–2.0kHz 4–40 table#3

7 EQ Low Gain -12–+12dB 52–76

8 EQ High Frequency 500Hz–16.0kHz 28–58 table#3

9 EQ High Gain -12–+12dB 52–76

10 Dry/Wet D63>W – D=W – D<W63 1–127

11 Drive 0–127 0–127

TOUCH WAH 2 (variation, insertion block), TOUCH WAH+ODRV (variation block)

No. Parameter Value See Table Control

1 Sensitive 0–127 0–127

2 Cutoff Frequency Offset 0–127 0–127 ●

3 Resonance 1.0–12.0 10–120

6 EQ Low Frequency 32Hz–2.0kHz 4–40 table#3

7 EQ Low Gain -12–+12dB 52–76

8 EQ High Frequency 500Hz–16.0kHz 28–58 table#3

9 EQ High Gain -12–+12dB 52–76

10 Dry/Wet D63>W – D=W – D<W63 1–127

11 Drive 0–127 0–127

12 EQ Low Gain(distortion) -12–+12dB 52–76

13 EQ Mid Gain(distortion) -12–+12dB 52–76

14 LPF Cutoff 1.0kHz–thru 34–60 table#3

15 Output Level 0–127 0–127

PITCH CHANGE 1 (variation block)

No. Parameter Value See Table Control

1 Pitch -24–+24 40–88

2 Initial Delay 0–127 0–127 table#7

3 Fine 1 -50Hz–+50Hz 14–114

4 Fine 2 -50Hz–+50Hz 14–114

5 Feedback Level -99–+99% 1–127

10 Dry/Wet D63>W – D=W – D<W63 1–127 ●

11 Pan 1 L63–R63 1–127

12 Output Level 1 0–127 0–127

13 Pan 2 L63–R63 1–127

14 Output Level 2 0–127 0–127

PITCH CHANGE 2 (variation block)

No. Parameter Value See Table Control

1 Pitch -24–+24 40–88

2 Initial Delay 0–127 0–127 table#7

3 Fine 1 -50–+50cent 14–114

4 Fine 2 -50–+50cent 14–114

5 Feedback Level -99–+99% 1–127

10 Dry/Wet D63>W – D=W – D<W63 1–127 ●

11 Pan 1 L63–R63 1–127

12 Output Level 1 0–127 0–127

13 Pan 2 L63–R63 1–127

14 Output Level 2 0–127 0–127

COMPRESSOR (variation, insertion block)

No. Parameter Value See Table Control

1 Attack 1–40ms 0–19 table#8

2 Release 10–680ms 0–15 table#9

3 Threshold -48–-6dB 79–121

4 Ratio 1.0–20.0 0–7 table#10

5 Output Level 0–127 0–127

NOISE GATE (variation, insertion block)

No. Parameter Value See Table Control

1 Attack 1–40ms 0–19 table#8

2 Release 10–680ms 0–15 table#9

3 Threshold -72–-30dB 55–97

4 Output Level 0–127 0–127

MIDI Data Format

167

e#7

LFO

uenc

ever

(400

ever

Wid

;

igh

Data Value Data Value Data Value Data Value Data Value Data Value Data Value Data Value Data Value Data Value Data Value Data Value Data Value Data Value Data Value

0 0.00 32 1.35 64 2.69 96 8.41 0 0.3 32 3.5 64 17.0 0 0.1 32 100.9 64 201.6 96 302.4 0 0.5 32 8.8 64 17.6 96 27.5

1 0.04 33 1.39 65 2.78 97 8.75 1 0.4 33 3.6 65 18.0 1 3.2 33 104.0 65 204.8 97 305.5 1 0.8 33 9.1 65 17.9 98 28.1

2 0.08 34 1.43 66 2.86 98 9.08 2 0.5 34 3.7 66 19.0 2 6.4 34 107.2 66 207.9 98 308.7 2 1.0 34 9.4 66 18.2 99 28.5

3 0.13 35 1.47 67 2.94 99 9.42 3 0.6 35 3.8 67 20.0 3 9.5 35 110.3 67 211.1 99 311.8 3 1.3 35 9.6 67 18.5 100 28.8

4 0.17 36 1.51 68 3.03 100 9.76 4 0.7 36 3.9 68 25.0 4 12.7 36 113.5 68 214.2 100 315.0 4 1.5 36 9.9 68 18.8 101 29.2

5 0.21 37 1.56 69 3.11 101 10.1 5 0.8 37 4.0 69 30.0 5 15.8 37 116.6 69 217.4 101 318.1 5 1.8 37 10.2 69 19.1 102 29.5

6 0.25 38 1.60 70 3.20 102 10.8 6 0.9 38 4.1 6 19.0 38 119.8 70 220.5 102 321.3 6 2.0 38 10.4 70 19.4 103 29.9

7 0.29 39 1.64 71 3.28 103 11.4 7 1.0 39 4.2 7 22.1 39 122.9 71 223.7 103 324.4 7 2.3 39 10.7 71 19.7 104 30.2

8 0.34 40 1.68 72 3.37 104 12.1 8 1.1 40 4.3 8 25.3 40 126.1 72 226.8 104 327.6 8 2.6 40 11.0 72 20.0

9 0.38 41 1.72 73 3.45 105 12.8 9 1.2 41 4.4 9 28.4 41 129.2 73 230.0 105 330.7 9 2.8 41 11.2 73 20.2

10 0.42 42 1.77 74 3.53 106 13.5 10 1.3 42 4.5 10 31.6 42 132.4 74 233.1 106 333.9 10 3.1 42 11.5 74 20.5

11 0.46 43 1.81 75 3.62 107 14.1 11 1.4 43 4.6 11 34.7 43 135.5 75 236.3 107 337.0 11 3.3 43 11.8 75 20.8

12 0.51 44 1.85 76 3.70 108 14.8 12 1.5 44 4.7 12 37.9 44 138.6 76 239.4 108 340.2 12 3.6 44 12.1 76 21.1

13 0.55 45 1.89 77 3.87 109 15.5 13 1.6 45 4.8 13 41.0 45 141.8 77 242.6 109 343.3 13 3.9 45 12.3 77 21.4

14 0.59 46 1.94 78 4.04 110 16.2 14 1.7 46 4.9 14 44.2 46 144.9 78 245.7 110 346.5 14 4.1 46 12.6 78 21.7

15 0.63 47 1.98 79 4.21 111 16.8 15 1.8 47 5.0 15 47.3 47 148.1 79 248.9 111 349.6 15 4.4 47 12.9 79 22.0

16 0.67 48 2.02 80 4.37 112 17.5 16 1.9 48 5.5 16 50.5 48 151.2 80 252.0 112 352.8 16 4.6 48 13.1 80 22.4

17 0.72 49 2.06 81 4.54 113 18.2 17 2.0 49 6.0 17 53.6 49 154.4 81 255.2 113 355.9 17 4.9 49 13.4 81 22.7

18 0.76 50 2.10 82 4.71 114 19.5 18 2.1 50 6.5 18 56.8 50 157.5 82 258.3 114 359.1 18 5.2 50 13.7 82 23.0

19 0.80 51 2.15 83 4.88 115 20.9 19 2.2 51 7.0 19 59.9 51 160.7 83 261.5 115 362.2 19 5.4 51 14.0 83 23.3

20 0.84 52 2.19 84 5.05 116 22.2 20 2.3 52 7.5 20 63.1 52 163.8 84 264.6 116 365.4 20 5.7 52 14.2 84 23.6

21 0.88 53 2.23 85 5.22 117 23.6 21 2.4 53 8.0 21 66.2 53 167.0 85 267.7 117 368.5 21 5.9 53 14.5 85 23.9

22 0.93 54 2.27 86 5.38 118 24.9 22 2.5 54 8.5 22 69.4 54 170.1 86 270.9 118 371.7 22 6.2 54 14.8 86 24.2

23 0.97 55 2.31 87 5.55 119 26.2 23 2.6 55 9.0 23 72.5 55 173.3 87 274.0 119 374.8 23 6.5 55 15.1 87 24.5

24 1.01 56 2.36 88 5.72 120 27.6 24 2.7 56 9.5 24 75.7 56 176.4 88 277.2 120 378.0 24 6.7 56 15.4 88 24.9

25 1.05 57 2.40 89 6.06 121 28.9 25 2.8 57 10.0 25 78.8 57 179.6 89 280.3 121 381.1 25 7.0 57 15.6 89 25.2

26 1.09 58 2.44 90 6.39 122 30.3 26 2.9 58 11.0 26 82.0 58 182.7 90 283.5 122 384.3 26 7.2 58 15.9 90 25.5

27 1.14 59 2.48 91 6.73 123 31.6 27 3.0 59 12.0 27 85.1 59 185.9 91 286.6 123 387.4 27 7.5 59 16.2 91 25.8

28 1.18 60 2.52 92 7.07 124 33.0 28 3.1 60 13.0 28 88.3 60 189.0 92 289.8 124 390.6 28 7.8 60 16.5 92 26.1

29 1.22 61 2.57 93 7.40 125 34.3 29 3.2 61 14.0 29 91.4 61 192.2 93 292.9 125 393.7 29 8.0 61 16.8 93 26.5

30 1.26 62 2.61 94 7.74 126 37.0 30 3.3 62 15.0 30 94.6 62 195.3 94 296.1 126 396.9 30 8.3 62 17.1 94 26.8

31 1.30 63 2.65 95 8.08 127 39.7 31 3.4 63 16.0 31 97.7 63 198.5 95 299.2 127 400.0 31 8.6 63 17.3 95 27.1

e#5

Off

set

(200

ressor

ttac

Data Value Data Value Data Value Data Value Data Value Data Value Data Value Data Value Data Value

0 0.0 32 3.2 64 6.4 96 9.6 0 0.1 32 50.5 64 100.8 96 151.2 0 1

1 0.1 33 3.3 65 6.5 97 9.7 1 1.7 33 52.0 65 102.4 97 152.8 1 2

2 0.2 34 3.4 66 6.6 98 9.8 2 3.2 34 53.6 66 104.0 98 154.4 2 3

3 0.3 35 3.5 67 6.7 99 9.9 3 4.8 35 55.2 67 105.6 99 155.9 3 4

4 0.4 36 3.6 68 6.8 100 10.0 4 6.4 36 56.8 68 107.1 100 157.5 4 5

5 0.5 37 3.7 69 6.9 101 11.1 5 8.0 37 58.3 69 108.7 101 159.1 5 6

6 0.6 38 3.8 70 7.0 102 12.2 6 9.5 38 59.9 70 110.3 102 160.6 6 7

7 0.7 39 3.9 71 7.1 103 13.3 7 11.1 39 61.5 71 111.9 103 162.2 7 8

8 0.8 40 4.0 72 7.2 104 14.4 8 12.7 40 63.1 72 113.4 104 163.8 8 9

9 0.9 41 4.1 73 7.3 105 15.5 9 14.3 41 64.6 73 115.0 105 165.4 9 10

10 1.0 42 4.2 74 7.4 106 17.1 10 15.8 42 66.2 74 116.6 106 166.9 10 12

11 1.1 43 4.3 75 7.5 107 18.6 11 17.4 43 67.8 75 118.2 107 168.5 11 14

12 1.2 44 4.4 76 7.6 108 20.2 12 19.0 44 69.4 76 119.7 108 170.1 12 16

13 1.3 45 4.5 77 7.7 109 21.8 13 20.6 45 70.9 77 121.3 109 171.7 13 18

14 1.4 46 4.6 78 7.8 110 23.3 14 22.1 46 72.5 78 122.9 110 173.2 14 20

15 1.5 47 4.7 79 7.9 111 24.9 15 23.7 47 74.1 79 124.4 111 174.8 15 23

16 1.6 48 4.8 80 8.0 112 26.5 16 25.3 48 75.7 80 126.0 112 176.4 16 26

17 1.7 49 4.9 81 8.1 113 28.0 17 26.9 49 77.2 81 127.6 113 178.0 17 30

18 1.8 50 5.0 82 8.2 114 29.6 18 28.4 50 78.8 82 129.2 114 179.5 18 35

19 1.9 51 5.1 83 8.3 115 31.2 19 30.0 51 80.4 83 130.7 115 181.1 19 40

20 2.0 52 5.2 84 8.4 116 32.8 20 31.6 52 81.9 84 132.3 116 182.7

21 2.1 53 5.3 85 8.5 117 34.3 21 33.2 53 83.5 85 133.9 117 184.3

22 2.2 54 5.4 86 8.6 118 35.9 22 34.7 54 85.1 86 135.5 118 185.8

23 2.3 55 5.5 87 8.7 119 37.5 23 36.3 55 86.7 87 137.0 119 187.4

24 2.4 56 5.6 88 8.8 120 39.0 24 37.9 56 88.2 88 138.6 120 189.0

25 2.5 57 5.7 89 8.9 121 40.6 25 39.5 57 89.8 89 140.2 121 190.6

26 2.6 58 5.8 90 9.0 122 42.2 26 41.0 58 91.4 90 141.8 122 192.1

27 2.7 59 5.9 91 9.1 123 43.7 27 42.6 59 93.0 91 143.3 123 193.7

28 2.8 60 6.0 92 9.2 124 45.3 28 44.2 60 94.5 92 144.9 124 195.3

29 2.9 61 6.1 93 9.3 125 46.9 29 45.7 61 96.1 93 146.5 125 196.9

30 3.0 62 6.2 94 9.4 126 48.4 30 47.3 62 97.7 94 148.1 126 198.4

31 3.1 63 6.3 95 9.5 127 50.0 31 48.9 63 99.3 95 149.6 127 200.0

uenc

oom

ressor

ease

Data Value Data Value Data Value Data Value Data Value

8 50 40 2.0k 0 0.1 32 5.1 0 10

9 56 41 2.2k 1 0.3 33 5.3 1 15

10 63 42 2.5k 2 0.4 34 5.4 2 25

11 70 43 2.8k 3 0.6 35 5.6 3 35

12 80 44 3.2k 4 0.7 36 5.7 4 45

13 90 45 3.6k 5 0.9 37 5.9 5 55

14 100 46 4.0k 6 1.0 38 6.1 6 65

15 110 47 4.5k 7 1.2 39 6.2 7 75

16 125 48 5.0k 8 1.4 40 6.4 8 85

17 140 49 5.6k 9 1.5 41 6.5 9 100

18 160 50 6.3k 10 1.7 42 6.7 10 115

19 180 51 7.0k 11 1.8 43 6.8 11 140

20 200 52 8.0k 12 2.0 44 7.0 12 170

21 225 53 9.0k 13 2.1 13 230

22 250 54 10.0k 14 2.3 14 340

23 280 55 11.0k 15 2.5 15 680

24 315 56 12.0k 16 2.6

25 355 57 14.0k 17 2.8

26 400 58 16.0k 18 2.9

27 450 59 18.0k 19 3.1

28 500 60 THRU(20.0k) 20 3.2

29 560 21 3.4

30 630 22 3.5

ressor

31 700 23 3.7 Data Value

32 800 24 3.9 0 1.0

33 900 25 4.0 1 1.5

34 1.0k 26 4.2 2 2.0

35 1.1k 27 4.3 3 3.0

36 1.2k 28 4.5 4 5.0

37 1.4k 29 4.6 5 7.0

38 1.6k 30 4.8 6 10.0

39 1.8k 31 5.0 7 20.0

< Table 1-11 > Effect Data Value Assign Table

MIDI Data Format

168

[Portable Keyboard] Date: 14-APR-1997

Model: PSR-730

MIDI Implementation Chart

Version: 1.0

Function Transmitted Recognized Remarks

Basic Default 1~16 *1 1~16 *2

Channel Changed 1~16 *1 1~16 *2

Default 3 3

Mode Messages X X

Altered ************** X

Note 0~127 0~127

Number : True voice ************** 0~127

Velocity Note ON O 9nH, v=1~127 O 9nH, v=1~127

Note OFF X 9nH, v=0 X

After key’s X X

Touch Ch’s X O

Pitch Bender O O

Control Change 0, 32 O O Bank Select

1 O O Modulation

5 X O Portamento Time

7, 10, 11 O O

6, 38 O O Data Entry

64~67 O O

71, 74 O O Sound Controller

72, 73 X *3 O Sound Controller

84 X *3 O Portamento Controllers

91, 93, 94 O O Effect Depth

96~97 X O RPN Inc, Dec

98~99 X *3 O NRPN LSB, MSB

100~101 O O RPN LSB, MSB

120 X O All Sound Off

121 X O Reset All Controllers

Program O 0~127 O 0~127

Change : True # **************

System Exclusive O O

System : Song Position X X

: Song Select X X

Common : Tune X X

System : Clock O O

Real Time : Commands O O

Aux : Local ON/OFF X X

: All Notes OFF X O (123~127)

Messages: Active Sense O O

: Reset X X

Mode 1: OMNI ON, POLY Mode 2 : OMNI ON, MONO O: Yes

Mode 3: OMNI OFF, POLY Mode 4 : OMNI OFF, MONO X : No

MIDI Implementation Chart

169

[Portable Keyboard] Date: 14-APR-1997

Model: PSR-630

MIDI Implementation Chart

Version: 1.0

Function Transmitted Recognized Remarks

Basic Default 1~16 *1 1~16 *2

Channel Changed 1~16 *1 1~16 *2

Default 3 3

Mode Messages X X

Altered ************** X

Note 0~127 0~127

Number : True voice ************** 0~127

Velocity Note ON O 9nH, v=1~127 O 9nH, v=1~127

Note OFF X 9nH, v=0 X

After key’s X X

Touch Ch’s X O

Pitch Bender O O

Control Change 0, 32 O O Bank Select

1 X *3 O Modulation

5 X O Portamento Time

7, 10, 11 O O

6, 38 O O Data Entry

64~67 O O

71, 74 O O Sound Controller

72, 73 X *3 O Sound Controller

84 X *3 O Portamento Controllers

91, 93, 94 O O Effect Depth

96~97 X O RPN Inc, Dec

98~99 X *3 O NRPN LSB, MSB

100~101 O O RPN LSB, MSB

120 X O All Sound Off

121 X O Reset All Controllers

Program O 0~127 O 0~127

Change : True # **************

System Exclusive O O

System : Song Position X X

: Song Select X X

Common : Tune X X

System : Clock O O

Real Time : Commands O O

Aux : Local ON/OFF X X

: All Notes OFF X O (123~127)

Messages: Active Sense O O

: Reset X X

Mode 1: OMNI ON, POLY Mode 2 : OMNI ON, MONO O: Yes

Mode 3: OMNI OFF, POLY Mode 4 : OMNI OFF, MONO X : No

MIDI Implementation Chart

170

*1 The tracks for each channel can be selected on the panel. See page

125 for more information.

*2 Incoming MIDI messages control the PSR-730/630 as 16 channel

multi timbral tone generator when initially shipped (factory set). The

MIDI messages don’t affect the panel controls including the Panel

Voice selection since they are directly sent to the tone generator of

the PSR-730/630. However, the following MIDI messages affects

the panel controls such as Panel Voice, Style, Multi Pad and Song

settings:

• MIDI MASTER TUNE, MASTER TUNE (XG System Param-

eter).

• TRANSPOSE (XG System Parameter).

• System Exclusive Messages related to the REVERB, CHORUS,

DSP EFFECT and MULTI EFFECT (PSR-730 only) settings.

• XG MULTI EQ PARAMETER (PSR-730 only)

Also, the MIDI messages affect the panel settings when one of the

folowing MIDI reception modes is selected.

These modes can be selected on the panel (see page 127).

Remote : The Note On/Off messages received at the desig-

nated Remote (receive) channel are processed the

same as the notes normally played on the keyboard.

In this mode, only the following channel messages will be

recognized:

• Note On/Off

• Control Changes

Bank Select (R1 voice only)

Modulation

Volume

Expression

Sustain

Sostenute

Soft Pedal

All Notes Off

• Program Change (R1 voice only)

• Pitch Bend

MIDI Implementation Chart

Off : The MIDI channel messages will not be received at

the designated channel.

Bass : The note on/off messages received at the channel(s)

set to “Bass” are recognized as the bass notes in the

accompaniment section. The bass notes will be

detected regardless of the accompaniment on/off

and split point settings on the PSR-730/630 panel.

Chord : The note on/off messages received at the channel(s)

set to “Chord” are recognized as the fingerings in the

accompaniment section. The chords to be detected

depend on the fingering mode on the PSR-730/630.

The chords will be detected regardless of the ac-

companiment on/off and split point settings on the

PSR-730/630 panel.

*3 Though these messages will not output by playing the keyboard and

changing the panel settings, they may be included in the Song or

Style data and output.

171

Specifications

Keyboards

• 61 standard-size keys (C1 — C6) with touch

response.

Display

• Large multi-function LCD display

Setup

• Stand by/ON

• Master Volume : MIN — MAX

Control & Number Buttons

• MENU ▲▼, VOICE, STYLE, SONG, SUB

MENU ▲▼, [1] — [0], [+] (YES), [–] (NO)

Disk Drive

Demo

• 15 Songs

Voice

PSR-730

• 200 Panel Voices +12 Drum Kits + 480 XG

Voices

• Polyphony : 64

PSR-630

• 215 Panel Voices +12 Drum Kits + 480 XG

Voices

• Polyphony : 32

• Voice Set

• R1/R2/L Voices

• Revoice : Voice, Volume, Octave, Pan, Reverb

Depth, Chorus Depth, DSP Depth

• Split Voice Mode

• Dual Voice Mode

Auto Accompaniment

• 100 Styles

• Auto Accompaniment ON/OFF

• Accompaniment Track : RHYTHM1/2, BASS,

CHORD1/2, PAD, PHRASE1/2

• Accompaniment Track Settings : ON/OFF

• Accompaniment Control : SYNC START, SYNC

STOP, START/STOP, INTRO, MAIN A/B

(AUTO FILL), ENDING

• Beat Indicator

• Accompaniment Volume

• Revoice : Voice, Volume, Pan, Reverb Depth,

Chorus Depth

• Virtual Arranger

Groove & Dynamics

• Beat Groove Template : 49 types

• Measure Groove Template : 25 types

• Dynamics Template : 17 types

• Dynamics Rate : 0 — 100%

• Expand Rate : 0 — 400%

• Boost Rate : 0 — 400%

One Touch Setting

Overall Controls

• Tempo : 32 — 280

• Transpose

• Pitch Bend Range

• Modulation

• Touch Sensitivity

• Master Tuning

• Scale Tuning

• Song Transpose

• Metronome

• Split Voice Split Point

• Accompaniment Split Point

• Fingering Mode : SINGLE FINGER/FINGERED

1/FINGERED 2/FULL KEYBOARD/MULTI-

FINGER

• Voice Set

• Pedal 1/2

Digital Effect

• Reverb : 13 types

• Chorus : 10 types

• DSP (system/insertion) : 46 types

• Multi Effect : 42 types x 2

• Digital Equalizer : 5 types + 1 User Setting

• Harmony : 16 types

Registration Memory

• 32 Regist Bank : 1 — 4

• Naming

• Accompaniment Freeze

Multi Pads

• 36 Multi Pad Sets

• 4 Pads + STOP

• Chord Match

• Naming

Disk

• Song Recording/Playback

• Format

• Save

• Load

• Disk Copy

• Song Copy

• Delete File

Song

• Song Volume

• Minus One Practice

• Repeat Play

• Song Repeat

• Next Song

Song Recording

• Quick Record, Multi Record

• Recording Tracks :

Quick Record : ACCOMPANIMENT,

MELODY 1 — 4

Multi Record : 1 — 16

• Punch In/Punch Out

• Quantize

• Naming

• Song Clear, Track Clear

• Song Edit : Voice, Volume, Octave, Pan,

Reverb Depth, Chorus Depth, DSP Depth

Style Recording

• User Style : 4 (101 — 104)

• Recording Tracks : 5 Sections x 8 tracks

• Drum Cancel

• Quantize

• Naming

• Track Clear, All Clear

Multi Pad Recording

• User Pad Set : 4 (101 — 104)

• Naming

• Pad Clear, Bank Clear

MIDI

• Transmit Settings

• Receive Settings

• Local Control

• Clock

• Initial Data Send

• MIDI Template

Auxiliary Jacks

• DC IN 10-12V, PHONES, SUSTAIN, FOOT

VOL, AUX OUT R, L+R/L, MIDI IN/OUT, TO

HOST

Amplifiers

• 6 W + 6 W (when using PA-6 power adaptor)

• 4 W + 4 W (when using batteries)

Speakers

• 12 cm (4-3/4 ”) x 2

Power Consumption

• 24 W (when using PA-6 AC power adaptor)

Batteries

• Six SUM-1, “D” size, R-20 or equivalent

batteries

Rated Voltage

• DC 10-12V

Dimensions (W x D x H)

• 973 x 397 x 155 mm

(38-1/4 ” x 15-5/8 ” x 6-1/8 ”)

Weight

• 9.5 kg (20.9 lbs.) excluding batteries

Supplied Accessories

• Sample Disk

• Music Stand

• Owner’s Manual

Optional Accessories

• Headphones : HPE-150

• AC Power Adaptor : PA-6

• Foot Switch : FC4, FC5

• Foot Volume : FC7

• Keyboard Stand : L-6, L-7

* Specifications subject to change without notice.

172

Index

AC power adaptor ..................................................... 12

Accompaniment styles .............................................. 22

Accompaniment tracks, song .................................... 86

Auto accompaniment ................................................ 22

Auto accompaniment on/off ...................................... 23

Auto Fill ..................................................................... 27

AUX OUT .................................................................. 13

Bank, registration ...................................................... 57

Batteries.................................................................... 12

Beat Groove .............................................................. 36

Beat indicator ............................................................ 26

Boost Rate ................................................................ 40

Chord Match function................................................ 63

Chord types, auto accompaniment ........................... 34

Chorus ...................................................................... 44

Clock ....................................................................... 128

Connectors................................................................ 13

Contents...................................................................... 4

Control Change....................................................... 120

Data Dial ................................................................... 18

Delete File................................................................. 75

Demonstration playback............................................ 14

Digital Effect .............................................................. 42

Digital Equalizer ........................................................ 51

Disk Copy.................................................................. 72

Display operation ........................................................ 8

DOC .......................................................................... 66

Drum kit list ............................................................. 140

DSP........................................................................... 45

Dual voice mode ....................................................... 19

Dynamics Rate.......................................................... 39

Dynamics Template................................................... 38

Effects ....................................................................... 42

Ending, accompaniment ........................................... 25

Expand Rate ............................................................. 39

Features ...................................................................... 2

Freeze (Accompaniment Freeze function) ................ 60

Fill-in ......................................................................... 27

Fingered 1 fingering mode ........................................ 33

Fingered 2 fingering mode ........................................ 34

Fingering modes, accompaniment............................ 31

Floppy disk ................................................................ 64

Foot Volume .............................................................. 13

Format....................................................................... 67

Full Keyboard fingering mode ................................... 34

GM System Level 1 ..................................................... 3

Groove & Dynamics .................................................. 35

Harmony ................................................................... 47

Host Select.............................................................. 122

Icons ........................................................................... 8

Initial data send ....................................................... 128

Initialization (data backup) ...................................... 152

Insertion Effect .................................................. 45, 144

Intro, accompaniment................................................ 27

Keyboard percussion ................................................ 19

Local control............................................................ 127

Load .......................................................................... 70

Main A & Main B sections ......................................... 27

Master tuning .......................................................... 115

Measure Groove ....................................................... 37

Measure, song play from specified ........................... 78

Melody tracks, clearing ............................................. 94

Melody tracks, song .................................................. 84

Menu structure ........................................................ 130

Menus ....................................................................... 10

Metronome .............................................................. 116

MIDI connectors ...................................................... 121

MIDI data format ..................................................... 153

MIDI functions ......................................................... 125

MIDI implementation chart ...................................... 168

MIDI template.......................................................... 129

Minus-one practice.................................................... 79

Modulation wheel ...................................................... 55

Multi effect................................................................. 48

Multi-finger fingering mode ....................................... 35

Multi pad set selection .............................................. 61

Multi Pads, playing .................................................... 62

Music stand ................................................................. 7

Note On/Off ............................................................. 120

On bass chord........................................................... 34

One touch setting ...................................................... 40

Overall functions ..................................................... 114

173

Index

Panel controls ............................................................. 6

Pedal Function list................................................... 117

Phones jack .............................................................. 13

Pitch Bend................................................................. 54

Polarity .................................................................... 118

Polyphony ............................................................... 133

Power supply............................................................. 12

Precautions ................................................................. 1

R1, R2, & L voices .................................................... 16

Receive channel & mode ........................................ 126

Record Ready Mode ................................... 85, 99, 106

Registration bank ...................................................... 58

Registration memory................................................. 57

Rehearsal mode........................................ 86, 101, 108

Repeat play ............................................................... 80

Reverb....................................................................... 43

Revoicing ................................................................ 110

Root key .................................................................... 32

Sample disk .............................................................. 76

Save .......................................................................... 68

Scale tuning ............................................................ 115

SFF ......................................................................... 148

Shortcuts................................................................... 11

Single Finger fingering mode .................................... 32

Song clear ................................................................. 94

Song Copy ................................................................ 73

Song Edit .................................................................. 96

Song mode................................................................ 11

Song playback........................................................... 76

Song recording.......................................................... 83

Specifications .......................................................... 171

Split point, auto accompaniment ............................... 30

Split point, split voice................................................. 21

Split voice mode........................................................ 20

Stand by/ON switch................................................... 14

Start modes, accompaniment ................................... 23

Stop Accompaniment function .................................. 25

Style file .................................................................... 66

Style mode ................................................................ 11

Style selection ........................................................... 22

Style, revoice........................................................... 112

Sustain jack............................................................... 13

Sustain Pedal ............................................................ 13

Synchro Stop function ............................................... 28

Synchronized start .................................................... 24

System Effect .................................................... 45, 143

Tempo, accompaniment ............................................26

To Host .................................................................... 121

Touch sensitivity ...................................................... 115

Track assignment, minus-one ................................... 79

Track muting, accompaniment .................................. 28

Transmit channel & track.........................................125

Transposition ............................................................. 56

Troubleshooting.......................................................151

Variation (DSP) .........................................................46

Velocity.................................................................... 119

Virtual Arranger .........................................................29

Voice list .................................................................. 133

Voice set.................................................................. 116

Voice, revoice .......................................................... 110

Voices, about the....................................................... 16

Voices, selecting & playing........................................ 17

Volume control, accompaniment ............................... 29

Volume control, song................................................. 78

Volume, harmony ......................................................48

XG ...............................................................................3

Limited Warranty

90 DAYS LABOR 1 YEAR PARTS

Yamaha Corporation of America, hereafter referred to as Yamaha, warrants to the original consumer of a product included in the categories listed below,

that the product will be free of defects in materials and/or workmanship for the periods indicated. This warranty is applicable to all models included in

the following series of products:

PSR SERIES OF PORTATONE ELECTRONIC KEYBOARDS

If during the first 90 days that immediately follows the purchase date, your new Yamaha product covered by this warranty is found to have a defect in

material and/or workmanship, Yamaha and/or its authorized representative will repair such defect without charge for parts or labor.

If parts should be required after this 90 day period but within the one year period that immediately follows the purchase date, Yamaha will, subject to

the terms of this warranty, supply these parts without charge. However, charges for labor, and/or any miscellaneous expenses incurred are the consumers

responsibility. Yamaha reserves the right to utilize reconditioned parts in repairing these products and/or to use reconditioned units as warranty

replacements.

THIS WARRANTY IS THE ONLY EXPRESS WARRANTY WHICH YAMAHA MAKES IN CONNECTION WITH THESE PRODUCTS.

ANY IMPLIED WARRANTY APPLICABLE TO THE PRODUCT, INCLUDING THE WARRANTY OF MERCHANT ABILITY IS

LIMITED TO THE DURATION OF THE EXPRESS WARRANTY. YAMAHA EXCLUDES AND SHALL NOT BE LIABLE IN ANY

EVENT FOR INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES.

Some states do not allow limitations that relate to implied warranties and/or the exclusion of incidental or consequential damages. Therefore, these

limitations and exclusions may not apply to you.

This warranty gives you specific legal rights. You may also have other rights which vary from state to state.

CONSUMERS RESPONSIBILITIES

If warranty service should be required, it is necessary that the consumer assume certain responsibilities:

1. Contact the Customer Service Department of the retailer selling the product, or any retail outlet authorized by Yamaha to sell the product for assistance.

You may also contact Yamaha directly at the address provided below.

2. Deliver the unit to be serviced under warranty to: the retailer selling the product, an authorized service center, or to Yamaha with an explanation of

the problem. Please be prepared to provide proof purchase date (sales receipt, credit card copy, etc.) when requesting service and/or parts under

warranty.

3. Shipping and/or insurance costs are the consumers responsibility.* Units shipped for service should be packed securely.

*Repaired units will be returned PREPAID if warranty service is required within the first 90 days.

IMPORTANT: Do NOT ship anything to ANY location without prior authorization. A Return Authorization (RA) will be issued that has a

tracking number assigned that will expedite the servicing of your unit and provide a tracking system if needed.

4. Your owners manual contains important safety and operating instructions. It is your responsibility to be aware of the contents of this manual and to

follow all safety precautions.

EXCLUSIONS

This warranty does not apply to units whose trade name, trademark, and/or ID numbers have been altered, defaced, exchanged removed, or to failures

and/or damages that may occur as a result of:

1. Neglect, abuse, abnormal strain, modification or exposure to extremes in temperature or humidity.

2. Improper repair or maintenance by any person who is not a service representative of a retail outlet authorized by Yamaha to sell the product, an

authorized service center, or an authorized service representative of Yamaha.

3. This warranty is applicable only to units sold by retailers authorized by Yamaha to sell these products in the U.S.A., the District of Columbia, and

Puerto Rico. This warranty is not applicable in other possessions or territories of the U.S.A. or in any other country.

Please record the model and serial number of the product you have purchased in the spaces provided below.

Model___________________________ Serial #________________________________ Sales Slip #________________________________

Purchased from____________________________________________________________ Date______________________________________

(Retailer)

YAMAHA CORPORATION OF AMERICA

Electronic Service Division

6600 Orangethorpe Avenue

Buena Park, CA 90620

KEEP THIS DOCUMENT FOR YOUR RECORDS. DO NOT MAIL!

For details of products, please contact your nearest Yamaha or the

authorized distributor listed below.

Pour plus de détails sur les produits, veuillez-vous adresser à Yamaha

ou au distributeur le plus proche de vous figurant dans la liste suivante.

Die Einzelheiten zu Produkten sind bei Ihrer unten aufgeführten Nie-

derlassung und bei Yamaha Vertragshändlern in den jeweiligen

Bestimmungsländern erhältlich.

Para detalles sobre productos, contacte su tienda Yamaha más cercana

o el distribuidor autorizado que se lista debajo.

NORTH AMERICA

CANADA

Yamaha Canada Music Ltd.

135 Milner Avenue, Scarborough, Ontario,

M1S 3R1, Canada

Tel: 416-298-1311

U.S.A.

Yamaha Corporation of America

6600 Orangethorpe Ave., Buena Park, Calif. 90620,

U.S.A.

Tel: 714-522-9011

CENTRAL & SOUTH AMERICA

MEXICO

Yamaha de Mexico S.A. De C.V.,

Departamento de ventas

Javier Rojo Gomez No.1149, Col. Gpe Del

Moral, Deleg. Iztapalapa, 09300 Mexico, D.F.

Tel: 686-00-33

BRAZIL

Yamaha Musical do Brasil LTDA.

Av. Rebouças 2636, São Paulo, Brasil

Tel: 011-853-1377

ARGENTINA

Yamaha Music Argentina S.A.

Viamonte 1145 Piso2-B 1053,

Buenos Aires, Argentina

Tel: 1-371-7021

EUROPE

THE UNITED KINGDOM

Yamaha-Kemble Music (U.K.) Ltd.

Sherbourne Drive, Tilbrook, Milton Keynes,

MK7 8BL, England

Tel: 01908-366700

IRELAND

Danfay Ltd.

61D, Sallynoggin Road, Dun Laoghaire, Co. Dublin

Tel: 01-2859177

GERMANY/SWITZERLAND

Yamaha Europa GmbH.

Siemensstraße 22-34, 25462 Rellingen,

F.R. of Germany

Tel: 04101-3030

AUSTRIA

Yamaha Music Austria

Schleiergasse 20, A-1100 Wien Austria

Tel: 01-60203900

THE NETHERLANDS

Yamaha Music Nederland

Kanaalweg 18G, 3526KL, Utrecht, The Netherlands

Tel: 030-2828411

BELGIUM

Yamaha Music Belgium

Keiberg Imperiastraat 8, 1930 Zaventem, Belgium

Tel: 02-7258220

FRANCE

Yamaha Musique France,

Division Claviers

BP 70-77312 Marne-la-Vallée Cedex 2, France

Tel: 01-64-61-4000

AFRICA

Yamaha Corporation,

International Marketing Division

Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Hamamatsu, Japan

430-8650

Tel: 053-460-2312

MIDDLE EAST

TURKEY/CYPRUS

Yamaha Europa GmbH.

Siemensstraße 22-34, 25462 Rellingen,

F.R. of Germany

Tel: 04101-3030

OTHER COUNTRIES

Yamaha Corporation,

International Marketing Division

Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Hamamatsu, Japan

430-8650

Tel: 053-460-2312

ASIA

HONG KONG

Tom Lee Music Co., Ltd.

11/F., Silvercord Tower 1, 30 Canton Road,

Tsimshatsui, Kowloon, Hong Kong

Tel: 2737-7688

INDONESIA

PT. Yamaha Music Indonesia (Distributor)

PT. Nusantik

Gedung Yamaha Music Center, Jalan Jend. Gatot

Subroto Kav. 4, Jakarta 12930, Indonesia

Tel: 21-520-2577

KOREA

Cosmos Corporation

#131-31, Neung-Dong, Sungdong-Ku, Seoul

Korea

Tel: 02-466-0021~5

MALAYSIA

Yamaha Music Malaysia, Sdn., Bhd.

16-28, Jalan SS 2/72, Petaling Jaya, Selangor,

Malaysia

Tel: 3-717-8977

PHILIPPINES

Yupangco Music Corporation

339 Gil J. Puyat Avenue, P.O. Box 885 MCPO,

Makati, Metro Manila, Philippines

Tel: 819-7551

SINGAPORE

Yamaha Music Asia Pte., Ltd.

Blk 202 Hougang, Street 21 #02-01,

Singapore 530202

Tel: 747-4374

TAIWAN

Yamaha KHS Music Co., Ltd.

10F, 150, Tun-Hwa Northroad,

Taipei, Taiwan, R.O.C.

Tel: 02-2713-8999

THAILAND

Siam Music Yamaha Co., Ltd.

121/60-61 RS Tower 17th Floor,

Ratchadaphisek RD., Dindaeng,

Bangkok 10320, Thailand

Tel: 02-641-2951

THE PEOPLE’S REPUBLIC OF CHINA

AND OTHER ASIAN COUNTRIES

Yamaha Corporation,

International Marketing Division

Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Hamamatsu, Japan

430-8650

Tel: 053-460-2317

OCEANIA

AUSTRALIA

Yamaha Music Australia Pty. Ltd.

17-33 Market Street, South Melbourne, Vic. 3205,

Australia

Tel: 3-699-2388

NEW ZEALAND

Music Houses of N.Z. Ltd.

146/148 Captain Springs Road, Te Papapa,

Auckland, New Zealand

Tel: 9-634-0099

COUNTRIES AND TRUST

TERRITORIES IN PACIFIC OCEAN

Yamaha Corporation,

International Marketing Division

Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Hamamatsu, Japan

430-8650

Tel: 053-460-2317

HEAD OFFICE Yamaha Corporation, Electronic Musical Instrument Division

Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Hamamatsu, Japan 430-8650

Tel: 053-460-3273

[PK] 13

ITALY

Yamaha Musica Italia S.P.A.,

Home Keyboard Division

Viale Italia 88, 20020 Lainate (Milano), Italy

Tel: 02-935-771

SPAIN

Yamaha-Hazen Electronica Musical, S.A.

Jorge Juan 30, 28001, Madrid, Spain

Tel: 91-577-7270

PORTUGAL

Valentim de Carvalho CI SA

Estrada de Porto Salvo, Paço de Arcos 2780 Oeiras,

Portugal

Tel: 01-443-3398/4030/1823

GREECE

Philippe Nakas S.A.

Navarinou Street 13, P.Code 10680, Athens, Greece

Tel: 01-364-7111

SWEDEN

Yamaha Scandinavia AB

J. A. Wettergrens Gata 1

Box 30053

S-400 43 Göteborg, Sweden

Tel: 031 89 34 00

DENMARK

YS Copenhagen Liaison Office

Generatorvej 8B

DK-2730 Herlev, Denmark

Tel: 44 92 49 00

FINLAND

Warner Music Finland OY/Fazer Music

Aleksanterinkatu 11, P.O. Box 260

SF-00101 Helsinki, Finland

Tel: 0435 011

NORWAY

Norsk filial av Yamaha Scandinavia AB

Grini Næringspark 1

N-1345 Østerås, Norway

Tel: 67 16 77 70

ICELAND

Skifan HF

Skeifan 17 P.O. Box 8120

IS-128 Reykjavik, Iceland

Tel: 525 5000

OTHER EUROPEAN COUNTRIES

Yamaha Europa GmbH.

Siemensstraße 22-34, 25462 Rellingen, F.R. of

Germany

Tel: 04101-3030

PANAMA AND OTHER LATIN

AMERICAN COUNTRIES/

CARIBBEAN COUNTRIES

Yamaha de Panama S.A.

Torre Banco General, Piso 7, Urbanización Marbella,

Calle 47 y Aquilino de la Guardia,

Ciudad de Panamá, Panamá

Tel: 507-269-5311

VY78900 808POCP3.3-05E0 Printed in Japan

Documenttranscriptie

SPECIAL MESSAGE SECTION This product utilizes batteries or an external power supply (adapter). DO NOT connect this product to any power supply or adapter other than one described in the manual, on the name plate, or specifically recommended by Yamaha. This product should be used only with the components supplied or; a cart, rack, or stand that is recommended by Yamaha. If a cart, etc., is used, please observe all safety markings and instructions that accompany the accessory product. SPECIFICATIONS SUBJECT TO CHANGE: The information contained in this manual is believed to be correct at the time of printing. However, Yamaha reserves the right to change or modify any of the specifications without notice or obligation to update existing units. This product, either alone or in combination with an amplifier and headphones or speaker/s, may be capable of producing sound levels that could cause permanent hearing loss. DO NOT operate for long periods of time at a high volume level or at a level that is uncomfortable. If you experience any hearing loss or ringing in the ears, you should consult an audiologist. IMPORTANT: The louder the sound, the shorter the time period before damage occurs. NOTICE: Service charges incurred due to a lack of knowledge relating to how a function or effect works (when the unit is operating as designed) are not covered by the manufacturer’s warranty, and are therefore the owners responsibility. Please study this manual carefully and consult your dealer before requesting service. ENVIRONMENTAL ISSUES: Yamaha strives to produce products that are both user safe and environmentally friendly. We sincerely believe that our products and the production methods used to produce them, meet these goals. In keeping with both the letter and the spirit of the law, we want you to be aware of the following: battery is approximately five years. When replacement becomes necessary, contact a qualified service representative to perform the replacement. This product may also use “household” type batteries. Some of these may be rechargeable. Make sure that the battery being charged is a rechargeable type and that the charger is intended for the battery being charged. When installing batteries, do not mix batteries with new, or with batteries of a different type. Batteries MUST be installed correctly. Mismatches or incorrect installation may result in overheating and battery case rupture. Warning: Do not attempt to disassemble, or incinerate any battery. Keep all batteries away from children. Dispose of used batteries promptly and as regulated by the laws in your area. Note: Check with any retailer of household type batteries in your area for battery disposal information. Disposal Notice: Should this product become damaged beyond repair, or for some reason its useful life is considered to be at an end, please observe all local, state, and federal regulations that relate to the disposal of products that contain lead, batteries, plastics, etc. If your dealer is unable to assist you, please contact Yamaha directly. NAME PLATE LOCATION: The name plate is located on the bottom of the product. The model number, serial number, power requirements, etc., are located on this plate. You should record the model number, serial number, and the date of purchase in the spaces provided below and retain this manual as a permanent record of your purchase. Model Serial No. Battery Notice: This product MAY contain a small non-rechargeable battery which (if applicable) is soldered in place. The average life span of this type of 92-BP Purchase Date PLEASE KEEP THIS MANUAL FCC INFORMATION (U.S.A.) IMPORTANT NOTICE: DO NOT MODIFY THIS UNIT! This product, when installed as indicated in the instructions contained in this manual, meets FCC requirements. Modifications not expressly approved by Yamaha may void your authority, granted by the FCC, to use the product. IMPORTANT: When connecting this product to accessories and/or another product use only high quality shielded cables. Cable/s supplied with this product MUST be used. Follow all installation instructions. Failure to follow instructions could void your FCC authorization to use this product in the USA. NOTE: This product has been tested and found to comply with the requirements listed in FCC Regulations, Part 15 for Class “B” digital devices. Compliance with these requirements provides a reasonable level of assurance that your use of this product in a residential environment will not result in harmful interference with other electronic devices. This equipment generates/uses radio frequencies and, if not installed and used according to • This applies only to products distributed by Yamaha Corporation of America. the instructions found in the users manual, may cause interference harmful to the operation of other electronic devices. Compliance with FCC regulations does not guarantee that interference will not occur in all installations. If this product is found to be the source of interference, which can be determined by turning the unit “OFF” and “ON”, please try to eliminate the problem by using one of the following measures: • Relocate either this product or the device that is being affected by the interference. • Utilize power outlets that are on different branch (circuit breaker or fuse) circuits or install AC line filter/s. • In the case of radio or TV interference, relocate/reorient the antenna. If the antenna lead-in is 300 ohm ribbon lead, change the lead-in to co-axial type cable. If these corrective measures do not produce satisfactory results, please contact the local retailer authorized to distribute this type of product. If you can not locate the appropriate retailer, please contact Yamaha Corporation of America, Electronic Service Division, 6600 Orangethorpe Ave, Buena Park, CA90620 PRECAUTIONS PLEASE READ CAREFULLY BEFORE PROCEEDING * Please keep these precautions in a safe place for future reference. WARNING Always follow the basic precautions listed below to avoid the possibility of serious injury or even death from electrical shock, short-circuiting, damages, fire or other hazards. These precautions include, but are not limited to, the following: • Do not open the instrument or attempt to disassemble the internal parts or modify them in any way. The instrument contains no user-serviceable parts. If it should appear to be malfunctioning, discontinue use immediately and have it inspected by qualified Yamaha service personnel. • Do not expose the instrument to rain, use it near water or in damp or wet conditions, or place containers on it containing liquids which might spill into any openings. • If the AC adaptor cord or plug becomes frayed or damaged, or if there is a sudden loss of sound during use of the instrument, or if any unusual smells or smoke should appear to be caused by it, immediately turn off the power switch, disconnect the adaptor plug from the outlet, and have the instrument inspected by qualified Yamaha service personnel. • Use the specified adaptor (PA-6 or an equivalent recommended by Yamaha) only. Using the wrong adaptor can result in damage to the instrument or overheating. • Before cleaning the instrument, always remove the electric plug from the outlet. Never insert or remove an electric plug with wet hands. • Check the electric plug periodically and remove any dirt or dust which may have accumulated on it. CAUTION Always follow the basic precautions listed below to avoid the possibility of physical injury to you or others, or damage to the instrument or other property. These precautions include, but are not limited to, the following: • Do not place the AC adaptor cord near heat sources such as heaters or radiators, and do not excessively bend or otherwise damage the cord, place heavy objects on it, or place it in a position where anyone could walk on, trip over, or roll anything over it. • When removing the electric plug from the instrument or an outlet, always hold the plug itself and not the cord. • Do not connect the instrument to an electrical outlet using a multipleconnector. Doing so can result in lower sound quality, or possibly cause overheating in the outlet. • Unplug the AC power adaptor when not using the instrument, or during electrical storms. • Always make sure all batteries are inserted in conformity with the +/– polarity markings. Failure to do so might result in overheating, fire, or battery fluid leakage. • Always replace all batteries at the same time. Do not use new batteries together with old ones. Also, do not mix battery types, such as alkaline batteries with manganese batteries, or batteries from different makers, or different types of batteries from the same maker, since this can cause overheating, fire, or battery fluid leakage. • Do not dispose of batteries in fire. • Do not use the instrument near other electrical products such as televisions, radios, or speakers, since this might cause interference which can affect proper operation of the other products. • Do not place the instrument in an unstable position where it might accidentally fall over. • Before moving the instrument, remove all connected adaptor and other cables. • When cleaning the instrument, use a soft, dry cloth. Do not use paint thinners, solvents, cleaning fluids, or chemical-impregnated wiping cloths. Also, do not place vinyl or plastic objects on the instrument, since this might discolor the panel or keyboard. • Do not rest your weight on, or place heavy objects on the instrument, and do not use excessive force on the buttons, switches or connectors. • Use only the stand specified for the instrument. When attaching the stand, use the provided screws only. Failure to do so could cause damage to the internal components or result in the instrument falling over. • Do not operate the instrument for a long period of time at a high or uncomfortable volume level, since this can cause permanent hearing loss. If you experience any hearing loss or ringing in the ears, consult a physician. • Do not attempt to recharge batteries that are not intended to be charged. • If the instrument is not to be in use for a long time, remove the batteries from it, in order to prevent possible fluid leakage from the battery. • Keep batteries away from children. • Before connecting the instrument to other electronic components, turn off the power for all components. Before turning the power on or off for all components, set all volume levels to minimum. • Do not expose the instrument to excessive dust or vibrations, or extreme cold or heat (such as in direct sunlight, near a heater, or in a car during the day) to prevent the possibility of panel disfiguration or damage to the internal components. ■ SAVING USER DATA • Always save data to a floppy disk frequently, in order to help prevent the loss of important data due to a malfunction or user operating error. Yamaha cannot be held responsible for damage caused by improper use or modifications to the instrument, or data that is lost or destroyed. Always turn the power off when the instrument is not in use. Make sure to discard used batteries according to local regulations. (4) 1 Congratulations! You are the proud owner of a fine electronic keyboard. The Yamaha PSR-730/630 PortaTone combines the most advanced tone generation technology with state-of-the-art digital electronics and features to give you stunning sound quality with maximum musical enjoyment. A large graphic display and easy-to-use interface also greatly enhance the operability of this advanced instrument. In order to make the most of your PortaTone’s features and extensive performance potential, we urge you to read the manual thoroughly while trying out the various features described. Keep the manual in a safe place for later reference. ● The LCD displays as illustrated in this owner’s manual are for instructional purposes only, and may appear somewhat different from those on your instrument. The displays from the PSR-730 are used for the instructions and descriptions in this manual. Important Features PSR-730 Touch-sensitive 61-key keyboard for a wide range of dynamic musical expression (page 115). A variety of voices, 215 panel voices (200 panel voices for PSR-630), 12 drum kits and 480 XG voices, with the maximum polyphony of 64 voices (32 voices for PSR-630). The Groove & Dynamics function lets you individualize your arrangement of any style of music (page 35). Pian o 001 Large multi-function LCD display panel makes it easy to select and edit parameters. The functional layout of the track buttons below the panel display makes operation easy. Voice set feature automaticaly selects the appropriate voice parameter settings for the panel voices (page 116). 4 EZE FRE RY EMO N M ATIO R T S 3 Advanced auto-accompaniment technology gives you 100 fully-orchestrated accompaniment “styles” to back up what you play on the keyboard (page 22). Registration Memory saves your favorite panel settings for instant recall when needed (page 57). Minus-one and Repeat functions are ideal for learning new songs and polishing your keyboard technique (page 79). Virtual Arranger feature lets you add chord progressions to any of the auto-accompaniment styles for more musical, refined accompaniment (page 29). One Touch Setting feature automatically selects appropriate voice, effect, and other settings for the selected accompaniment style — all you have to do is select a style and play (page 40). 2 Digital effects (reverb, chorus, DSP and harmony) add depth and ambiance to your sound (page 42). PSR-730 The Multi Effect function lets you combine two digital effects (page 48). PSR-730 With the Digital Equalizer you can fine tune the sound of your performance on five different frequency bands (page 51). User Song recording feature makes it easy to record and playback four melody tracks with an accompaniment track (page 83). 15 AD TI P MUL Multi Pads record and play short rhythmic and melodic sequences that can be used to add impact and variety to your performances (page 106). DIS K The floppy disk drive plays XG disks and lets you easily manage User Song, User Style, User Pad and Registration data (page 64). 16 A total of sixteen tracks can be recorded with the Multi recording function, including keyboard, harmony and accompaniment (page 88). Create original accompaniment styles with the User Style feature (you can also establish your own rules for changing pitch based on chord changes (page 98). GM System Level 1 “GM System Level 1” is an addition to the MIDI standard which ensures that any GM-compatible music data can be accurately played by any GM-compatible tone generator, regardless of manufacturer. The GM mark is affixed to all software and hardware products that support the “GM System Level 1”. PSR-730/630 supports GM System Level 1. A range of MIDI functions for expanded musical enjoyment (XG format compatible), and a TO HOST terminal for easy connection to a personal computer (page 121) MIDI templates for easy MIDI settings (page 129). XG XG is a new MIDI format created by Yamaha which significantly improves and expands upon the “GM System Level 1” standard by providing a greater variety of high-quality voices plus considerably enhanced effect operation while being fully compatible with GM. PSR-730/630 supports the XG format. ◆ Packing List Please check that these items are packed with your PSR-730/630. • PSR-730/630 • Music Stand (page 7) • Sample Disk • Owner’s manual 3 Contents Panel Controls 6 The Music Stand ........................................................ 7 Basic Display Operation 8 The Display Icons ............................................................ 8 The Menus ..................................................................... 10 Shortcuts ................................................................. 11 Setting Up 12 Power Supply ................................................................. 12 Using An Optional AC Power Adaptor ......................... 12 Using Batteries ............................................................ 12 Connections .................................................................. 13 PHONES Jack ............................................................. 13 SUSTAIN Pedal Jack ................................................... 13 FOOT VOLUME Jack .................................................. 13 AUX OUT R and L/L+R Jacks ..................................... 13 MIDI IN/OUT and TO HOST Connectors .................... 13 The Demonstration 14 Playing the PSR-730/630 16 A Word About the “R1”, “R2”, and “L” Voices ............. 16 Selecting & Playing R1 Voices ..................................... 17 Keyboard Percussion ................................................ 19 The Dual Voice Mode ..................................................... 19 The Split Voice Mode ..................................................... 20 Changing the SPLIT VOICE Split Point ....................... 21 Auto Accompaniment 42 Reverb ...........................................................................43 Selecting a Reverb Type .............................................. 43 Reverb Return Level ....................................................43 Chorus ...........................................................................44 Selecting a Chorus Type ............................................. 44 Chorus Return Level ...................................................44 DSP ...........................................................................45 Select the DSP Type ...................................................45 DSP Return Level ........................................................46 Harmony .........................................................................47 Selecting a Harmony Type .......................................... 47 Adjusting the Harmony Volume ................................... 48 Multi Effect (PSR-730) ...................................................48 How Multi Effect Works ............................................... 48 Applying Multi Effect (PSR-730) .................................. 49 Setting Parts for Effect 1/2 .......................................... 49 Select the Effect Type for Effect 1/2 ............................. 50 Adjust the Dry/Wet Settings for Effect 1/2 ................... 50 The Digital Equalizer (PSR-730) ................................... 51 Using the Digital Equalizer (PSR-730) ......................... 51 Selecting a Digital EQ Type. ........................................ 52 Setting the Gain (User Setting) ................................... 53 The Pitch Bend Wheel 54 Setting the Pitch Bend Range ...................................... 54 The Modulation Wheel (PSR-730) 55 Changing the Modulation Wheel Function ................. 55 Transpose 22 What is Auto Accompaniment? ................................... 22 Using Auto Accompaniment ........................................ 22 Changing Tempo ...................................................... 26 The Beat Indicator .................................................... 26 Accompaniment Sections .......................................... 27 Accompaniment Track Muting .................................. 28 The Synchro Stop Function ....................................... 28 Using Virtual Arranger .................................................. 29 Accompaniment Volume Control ................................. 29 Changing the Accompaniment Split Point .................. 30 Interaction Between the AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT and SPLIT VOICE Split Points .............................. 31 The Auto Accompaniment Fingering Modes .............. 31 The Stop Accompaniment Function ........................... 35 Groove and Dynamics (PSR-730) ................................ 35 Applying Groove & Dynamics ...................................... 36 Arranging the Groove & Dynamics Effect (User Settings) ....................................................... 36 One Touch Setting ......................................................... 40 4 Digital Effects 56 Setting Transposition ....................................................56 Registration Memory 57 Registering the Panel Settings .................................... 57 Naming the Registration Banks ................................... 58 Recall the Registered Panel Settings .......................... 60 The Accompanient Freeze Function ........................... 60 The Multi Pads 61 Selecting a MULTI PAD Set ........................................... 61 Playing the MULTI PADs ............................................... 62 Turning the CHORD MATCH Function On/Off ............ 63 Disk Operations 64 Floppy Disk Handling Precautions ............................. 64 User Song Data ...........................................................65 User Style/User Pad/Registration Memory Data ......... 65 Data that Can be Saved or Loaded with the PSR-730/630 ........................................................65 Using Commercially Available Music Collections (Sold Separately) ................................................... 66 The Sample Disk ........................................................... 66 Format ........................................................................... 67 Save ........................................................................... 68 Load ........................................................................... 70 Disk Copy ....................................................................... 72 Song Copy ..................................................................... 73 Delete File ...................................................................... 75 Song Playback 76 Song Playback Procedure ............................................ 76 Song Volume Control ................................................... 78 Play from a Specified Measure ................................... 78 Minus-one Practice ....................................................... 79 Repeat Play .................................................................... 80 Song Repeat .................................................................. 81 Next Song ...................................................................... 82 Song Recording 83 Quick Recording Procedure ......................................... 84 Rehearsal Mode ....................................................... 86 Multi Recording Procedure .......................................... 88 About the Recording with the Digital Effects Applied . 90 Punch In/Punch Out .................................................... 92 Quantize ...................................................................... 93 Naming User Songs .................................................... 94 Clearing Song Data ..................................................... 94 Song Edit ..................................................................... 96 Style Recording 106 Multi Pad Recording Procedure ................................. 106 Naming Pads ............................................................. 109 Clearing User Pad Data ............................................ 109 Revoicing 114 Touch Sensitivity ........................................................ 115 Pitch Bend Range ..................................................... 115 Modulation Wheel ...................................................... 115 Master Tuning ............................................................ 115 Scale Tuning .............................................................. 115 Song Transpose ......................................................... 116 Metronome ................................................................ 116 Split Voice Split Point ................................................. 116 Accompaniment Split Point ....................................... 116 Fingering Mode ......................................................... 116 Voice Set ................................................................... 116 Pedal ......................................................................... 117 MIDI Functions 119 What’s MIDI? ................................................................ 119 MIDI Terminal/TO HOST Terminal ......................... 121 What You Can Do with MIDI ........................................ 121 Connecting to a Personal Computer (TO HOST Terminal/HOST SELECT Switch) .................... 122 Connect using the PSR-730/630 MIDI terminals ...... 122 Connect using the TO HOST terminal ....................... 124 The PSR-730/630 MIDI Functions .............................. 125 Transmit Channel & Transmit Track ........................... 125 Receive Channel & Receive Mode ........................... 126 Local Control ............................................................. 127 Clock ......................................................................... 128 Initial Data Send ........................................................ 128 MIDI Template ........................................................... 129 98 Style Recording Procedure .......................................... 98 Rehearsal Mode ..................................................... 101 Drum Cancel ............................................................. 103 Quantize .................................................................... 103 Naming Styles ........................................................... 104 Clearing User Style Data ........................................... 105 Multi Pad Recording Overall Functions 110 Revoicing the R1, R2, and L Voices ........................... 110 Revoicing a Style ......................................................... 112 Appendix 130 PSR-730/630 Display MENU/SUB MENU Structure .. 130 Voice List ..................................................................... 133 Maximum Polyphony ................................................. 133 Drum Kit List ................................................................ 140 Style List ...................................................................... 142 About Digital Effects (Reverb/Chorus/DSP) ............. 143 When DSP type Is Selected as a System Effect ....... 143 When DSP type Is Selected as a Insertion Effect ..... 144 Harmony Type List ...................................................... 147 Refining User Styles with Style File Format ............. 148 Style File (Auto Accompaniment) Format .................. 148 About the Source Chord Type ................................... 150 Troubleshooting .......................................................... 151 Data Backup & Initialization ....................................... 152 Data Backup .............................................................. 152 Data Initialization ....................................................... 152 MIDI Data Format ......................................................... 153 MIDI Implementation Chart ........................................ 168 Specifications .............................................................. 171 Index ............................................................................. 172 5 ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢ ,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,, QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ Panel Controls ,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,, QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢ PSR-730 STYLE 001 012 020 023 031 035 ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ PANEL VOICE 011 019 022 030 034 041 042 048 052 061 066 071 8BEAT 16BEAT 6/8 BALLAD DANCE DISCO ROCK ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ 047 051 060 065 070 081 STAND BY ON 082 084 088 092 096 RHYTHM&BLUES ROCK&ROLL COUNTRY&WESTERN TRADITIONAL JAZZ CONTEMPORARY JAZZ LATIN ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ 083 087 091 095 100 0 DIGITAL MULTI EFFECT 1 DIGITAL EQ MULTI EFFECT REVERB HARMONY MENU 001 DISK 4 5 6 MASTER VOLUME 2 DEMO 1 89 RECORD A 100 1 REVERB 3 2 3 4 ! VARIATION DSP 5 MEASURE BEAT FREEZE 4 1 2 REGISTRATION MEMORY CHORUS 6 8 3 RHYTHM RHYTHM 1 2 BASS CHORD 1 CHORD 2 119 513 dim 6 9 m M 7aug sus 4 FINGERING 10 11 12 14 ACMP 15 INTRO START VOICE R1 SPLIT SONG TRACK ACCOMPANIMENT TRACK SONG DUAL R2 L ^ R1 A B B 557 613 634 657 665 707 SYNTH PAD SYNTH EFFECTS ETHNIC PERCUSSIVE SOUND EFFECTS SFX PSR-730 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 – / NO 0 + / YES KEYBOARD SPLIT VOICE A ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ 1 & SONG START / STOP 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 ENDING BANK 10 11 12 13 14 15 1 2 ONE TOUCH SETTING 3 4 FREEZE 1 STOP # @ DUAL VOICE * $ 16 REGISTRATION MEMORY MEMORY 7 PITCH BEND STYLE STYLE VOICE R2 MAIN / AUTO FILL STOP 529 558 614 635 658 666 STRINGS ENSEMBLE BRASS REED PIPE SYNTH LEAD % 16 VOICE L GROOVE&DYNAMICS REVOICE SYNC 405 439 471 484 492 528 VOICE GROOVE & DYNAMICS 13 PHRASE PHRASE MELODY MELODY MELODY MELODY 1 2 3 4 1 2 PAD ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ VOICE VOICE 4 VARIATION AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT 394 406 440 472 485 493 MULTI PAD HARMONY SYNC STOP 7 228 ~ 266 PIANO 267 ~ 286 CHROMATIC PERCUSSION 287 ~ 322 ORGAN 323 ~ 351 GUITAR 352 ~ 393 BASS 001 001 ONE TOUCH SETTING 2 169 ~ 176 PIPE 177 ~ 194 SYNTH LEAD 195 ~ 215 SYNTH PAD 216 ~ 227 DRUM KITS BASS SOLO STRINGS ENSEMBLE SOLO BRASS BRASS ENSEMBLE REED Gra nd Piano B REPEAT ACMP/SONG VOLUME 096 108 128 137 153 168 001 001 001 001 001 001 001 001 001 001 001 001 001 001 001 001 DIGITAL EFFECT DSP TEMPO TRANSPOSE MULTI EFFECT DIGITAL EQ OVERALL ACMP / SONG VOLUME 116 000 DISK MIDI CHORUS ACCOMPANIMENT ON / OFF 3 STYLE SONG REGIST MEMORY MENU MAX MIN MULTI PAD TRANSPOSE ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ 8Beat Po p1 SUB MENU RESET TEMPO XG VOICE 082 097 109 129 138 154 001 ~ 019 PIANO 020 ~ 031 CHROMATIC PERCUSSION 032 ~ 054 ORGAN 055 ~ 061 ACCORDION 062 ~ 081 GUITAR CARIBBEAN BALLROOM LATIN BALLROOM STANDARD MARCH WALTZ 2 3 MULTI PAD 4 ( MODULATION MAX MIN q w PHONES e ) 36 T 37 F1 E1 D1 C1 CLICK 38 S 39 40 R 41 G1 42 1 43 B1 A1 44 1 45 46 C2 2 47 D2 3 48 49 F2 E2 2 50 51 3 52 G2 L 53 54 A2 H 55 56 B2 L 57 C3 M 59 L 58 D3 M 60 H C 61 1 E3 R 63 1 H 62 F3 64 G3 R 65 66 A3 S 67 B3 C 69 2 68 C4 R 71 2 70 D4 H 72 L 73 E4 74 H 75 F4 L 76 G4 H 77 L 78 H 79 A4 L 80 B4 81 82 C5 H 83 D5 L 84 S 85 E5 L 86 87 H 88 F5 L 89 G5 M 90 O 91 A5 92 B5 93 94 93 94 95 r PSR-630 STYLE 001 012 020 023 031 035 ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ PANEL VOICE 011 019 022 030 034 041 042 048 052 061 066 071 8BEAT 16BEAT 6/8 BALLAD DANCE DISCO ROCK ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ 047 051 060 065 070 081 RHYTHM&BLUES ROCK&ROLL COUNTRY&WESTERN TRADITIONAL JAZZ CONTEMPORARY JAZZ LATIN STAND BY ON 0 1 2 4 5 6 MAX MIN DEMO 3 ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ 083 087 091 095 100 TEMPO REVERB XG VOICE 8Beat Po p1 SUB MENU MENU 001 DISK MULTI PAD HARMONY STYLE SONG 116 TEMPO 1 2 3 RHYTHM RHYTHM 1 2 89 RECORD DSP 4 5 6 7 156 ~ 163 PIPE 164 ~ 181 SYNTH LEAD 182 ~ 200 SYNTH PAD 201 ~ 212 DRUM KITS BASS SOLO STRINGS ENSEMBLE SOLO BRASS BRASS ENSEMBLE REED 3 4 BEAT 1 BASS CHORD 1 CHORD 2 PAD ! 2 8 3 dim 6 HARMONY SYNC STOP INTRO START 390 424 456 469 477 513 9 A B B ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ 542 598 619 642 650 692 VOICE SYNTH PAD SYNTH EFFECTS ETHNIC PERCUSSIVE SOUND EFFECTS SFX PSR-630 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 – / NO 0 + / YES VOICE VOICE 4 10 11 119 513 12 13 14 15 STYLE ACMP STYLE 16 VOICE VOICE VOICE L R2 R1 & SPLIT SONG TRACK SONG SONG DUAL R2 L ^ R1 KEYBOARD START / STOP SPLIT VOICE A 514 543 599 620 643 651 STRINGS ENSEMBLE BRASS REED PIPE SYNTH LEAD m M 7aug sus 4 FINGERING PHRASE PHRASE MELODY MELODY MELODY MELODY 1 2 3 4 1 2 ACCOMPANIMENT TRACK 1 REVOICE STOP ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ MULTI PAD VARIATION AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT 379 391 425 457 470 478 % 001 001 MEASURE FREEZE 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 ENDING ONE TOUCH SETTING MEMORY REGISTRATION MEMORY 1 2 3 7 4 FREEZE 1 STOP # @ DUAL VOICE * 16 MAIN / AUTO FILL SYNC 213 ~ 251 PIANO 252 ~ 271 CHROMATIC PERCUSSION 272 ~ 307 ORGAN 308 ~ 336 GUITAR 337 ~ 378 BASS 001 001 001 001 001 001 001 001 001 001 001 001 001 001 001 001 DIGITAL EFFECT OVERALL ACCOMPANIMENT ON / OFF ONE TOUCH SETTING 2 VARIATION CHORUS 088 100 118 126 140 155 REGISTRATION MEMORY MIDI CHORUS DSP 1 ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ Gra nd Piano B REPEAT ACMP/SONG VOLUME TRANSPOSE REVERB ACMP / SONG VOLUME A 100 000 DISK REGIST MEMORY MENU TRANSPOSE 074 089 101 119 127 141 001 ~ 018 PIANO 019 ~ 030 CHROMATIC PERCUSSION 031 ~ 051 ORGAN 052 ~ 057 ACCORDION 058 ~ 073 GUITAR CARIBBEAN BALLROOM LATIN BALLROOM STANDARD MARCH WALTZ DIGITAL EFFECT RESET MASTER VOLUME 082 084 088 092 096 2 3 MULTI PAD 4 ( PITCH BEND q PHONES ) e 36 T 37 F1 E1 D1 C1 CLICK 38 S 39 40 R 41 G1 42 1 43 B1 A1 44 1 45 46 2 47 C2 3 48 D2 49 2 50 E2 51 3 52 F2 L 53 G2 54 H 55 A2 56 L 57 B2 58 M 59 L C3 M 60 H D3 C 61 1 H 62 E3 R 63 1 F3 64 G3 R 65 66 S 67 A3 68 C 69 2 B3 70 R 71 2 C4 H 72 D4 L 73 E4 74 H 75 F4 L 76 H 77 G4 L 78 H 79 A4 L 80 r PSR-730/630 MAC PC1 PC2 MIDI FOOT VOL TO HOST t y u 6 MIDI IN OUT i SUSTAIN o R AUX OUT L / L+ R p DC IN 10-12V Q B4 81 82 H 83 C5 L 84 D5 S 85 L 86 E5 87 H 88 F5 L 89 G5 M 90 O 91 A5 92 B5 95 ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢ ,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,, QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ ,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,, QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢ Panel Controls ■ Top Panel Controls q STAND BY/ON Switch ......................... page 14 e DEMO Button ....................................... page 14 r TEMPO Buttons ................................... page 26 !8 KEYBOARD SECTION t TRANSPOSE Buttons .......................... page 56 y ACCOMPANIMENT/SONG VOLUME Buttons .......................................... pages 29,78 u AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT SECTION 96 • AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT ON/OFF Button ................................. page 23 • SYNC STOP Button .......................... page 28 • SYNC START Button ........................ page 24 • INTRO Button ................................... page 24 • MAIN/AUTO FILL A & B Buttons ....... page 24 • ENDING Button ................................. page 25 i RECORD Button .................... pagse 84,99,106 o START/STOP Button ................ pages 15,23,25 !0 DIGITAL MULTI EFFECT SECTION (PSR-730) DIGITAL EFFECT SECTION (PSR-630) • DIGITAL EQ Button (PSR-730) ......... page 51 • REVERB Button ................................ page 43 • CHORUS Button ............................... page 44 • DSP Button ....................................... page 45 • VARIATION Button ............................ page 46 • MULTI EFFECT Button (PSR-730) ... page 49 • HARMONY Button ............................ page 47 !1 DISPLAY & RELATED CONTROLS C6 96 (PSR-730) ......................................... page 36 !5 NUMBER Buttons ................................ page 10 !6 + and – Buttons .................................... page 10 !7 Data Dial .............................................. page 10 w MASTER VOLUME Control.................. page 14 C6 !4 GROOVE & DYNAMICS Button • • • • • • • • DISPLAY ............................................. page 8 MENU Buttons .................................. page 10 SUB MENU Buttons .......................... page 10 VOICE Button.................................... page 10 STYLE Button ................................... page 10 SONG Button .................................... page 10 REVOICE Button............................. page 110 TRACK Buttons ......... pages 19,20,28,86,111 • DUAL VOICE Button ......................... page 19 • SPLIT VOICE Button ......................... page 20 !9 MULTI PAD SECTION • STOP Button ..................................... page 62 • 1, 2, 3, 4 Buttons ............................... page 62 @0 Keyboard .............................................. page 18 @1 PITCH BEND Wheel ............................ page 54 @2 MODULATION Wheel (PSR-730) ........ page 55 @3 PHONES Jack...................................... page 13 @4 Disk Drive ............................................. page 64 ■ Rear Panel Controls @5 FOOT VOL Jack ................................... page 13 @6 TO HOST Connector .......................... page 121 @7 HOST SELECT Switch ...................... page 122 @8 MIDI IN and OUT Connectors ............ page 121 @9 SUSTAIN Jack ...................................... page 13 #0 AUX OUT R, L/L+R Jacks .................... page 13 #1 DC IN 10-12V Jack .............................. page 12 ◆ The Music Stand !2 REGISTRATION MEMORY SECTION • • • • BANK [+], [ –] Buttons (PSR-730) ..... page 58 MEMORY Button ............................... page 58 1, 2, 3, 4 Buttons ............................... page 58 FREEZE Button ................................ page 60 !3 ONE TOUCH SETTING Button ............ page 41 The PSR-730/630 is supplied with a music stand that can be attached to the instrument by inserting it into the slot at the rear of the control panel. 7 ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢ ,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,, QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ Basic Display Operation ,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,, QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢ The PSR-730/630 LCD panel is a large multi-function type that simultaneously displays and provides access to a number of important parameters. Basic operation of the display as well as the MENU and SUB MENU buttons, and the meaning of the icons which appear in the display, are summarized briefly below. The Display Icons Style/Song Number The style number or song number is displayed here when in the Song/Style Mode. 001 001 XG Appears when one of the PSR-730/ 630’s XG voices is selected (page 16). Disk Appears when a floppy disk song is selected (page 76). DISK Voice Number (R1 Voice) The currently selected R1 voice number (page 17) appears here. XG Appears when XG voices are used in a floppy disk song. 8Beat Po p1 001 STYLE SONG DIGITAL EQ 1 116 TEMPO 000 DISK TRANSPOSE MULTI EFFECT REVERB 2 3 A 100 4 B ONE TOUCH SETTING REPEAT 1 ACMP/SONG VOLUME 2 3 4 DSP FREEZE 6 7 BEAT 1 2 3 8 9 VOICE 4 MULTI PAD dim 6 HARMONY SYNC STOP 001 001 MEASURE REGISTRATION MEMORY VARIATION CHORUS 5 Gra nd Piano 10 11 119 513 m M 7aug sus 4 FINGERING 12 GROOVE & DYNAMICS 13 14 15 16 001 001 001 001 001 001 001 001 001 001 001 001 001 001 001 001 RHYTHM RHYTHM 1 2 BASS CHORD 1 CHORD 2 PAD PHRASE PHRASE MELODY MELODY MELODY MELODY 1 2 3 4 1 2 ACMP VOICE VOICE VOICE L R2 R1 SPLIT ACCOMPANIMENT TRACK 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 219 219 340 322 324 407 324 347 RHYTHM RHYTHM 1 2 BASS 9 CHORD 1 CHORD 2 10 11 PAD 12 PHRASE PHRASE 1 2 8 L R2 R1 ACCOMPANIMENT TRACKS These icons display the on/off status and volume/velocity settings for each of the 8 accompaniment tracks. They are also used to specify tracks when using the REVOICE function (page 110). When doing Multi recording/playback of songs, the on/off status and volume settings are shown for tracks 1-8 (page 89). 13 471 201 252 213 213 MELODY MELODY MELODY MELODY 1 2 3 4 SONG TRACK DUAL ACMP MELODY TRACKS 1 … 4, ACCOMPANIMENT TRACK In Song Quick Record mode, the recording track is indicated(page 86). When doing Multi recording/playback of songs, the on/off status and volume settings are shown for tracks 9-13 (page 89). ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢ ,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,, QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ ,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,, QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢ Basic Display Operation 116 TEMPO Shows the current tempo of accompaniment/song playback (page 26). DIGITAL EQ (PSR-730) Appears when the DIGITAL EQUALIZER is turned on (page 51). 0 TRANSPOSE The current transpose value (page 56). MULTI EFFECT (PSR-730) Appears when the MULTI EFFECT is turned on (page 49). ACMP/SONG VOLUME In Song/Style Mode (page 11), the accompaniment or song volume is displayed (pagse 29,78). 100 A REPEAT Indicates the “A” and “B” repeat points when programming a repeat section, and whether REPEAT PLAY is on or off (page 80). B 2 3 CHORUS Appears when the CHORUS effect is turned on (page 44). DSP Appears when the DSP effect is turned on (page 45). ONE TOUCH SETTING Appears when the ONE TOUCH SETTING feature is engaged (page 41). ONE TOUCH SETTING 1 REVERB Appears when the PSR-730/630 REVERB effect is turned on (page 43). REGISTRATION 1 … 4 (Registration Memory) Indicates the currently selected REGISTRATION MEMORY or ONE TOUCH SETTING number (page 57). 4 VARIATION HARMONY Appears when the HARMONY effect is turned on (page 47). FREEZE Appears when the REGISTRATION MEMORY “FREEZE” function is on (page 60). FREEZE SYNC STOP Appears when AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT SYNC STOP function is engaged (page 28). MEASURE Indicates the current measure number during song recording and playback (page 78). 1 FINGERING Shows the currently selected fingering mode (page 32). BEAT Flashes at the current tempo and indicates the current beat during accompaniment and song playback. (page 26) mM 7 1 2 14 3 MULTI PAD 1 … 4 Indicates the currently playing MULTI PAD numbers (page 62). 4 15 16 064 048 001 VOICE VOICE VOICE L R2 R1 SPLIT DUAL DSP VARIATION Appears when the DSP VARIATION effect is turned on (page 46). CHORD Displays the current chord name during AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT playback or SONG recording/playback (page 25). GROOVE & DYNAMICS (PSR-730) Appears when the GROOVE & DYNAMICS function is engaged (page 36). Keyboard Settings (VOICE R1/VOICE R2/VOICE L) These icons indicate the on/off status and volume settings for the L, R2, and R1 voices when the DUAL VOICE and/or SPLIT VOICE functions are used (pages 19,20). They are also used to specify tracks when using the REVOICE function (page 110). During Multi recording/playback of songs, they indicate the on/off status, volume/velocity and voice settings for tracks 14-16 (page 86). 9 ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢ ,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,, QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ ,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,, QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢ Basic Display Operation The Menus MENU Main Menu Selection (VOICE/STYLE/SONG Buttons) You can select one of the three main VOICE/STYLE/SONG menus by pressing the appropriate button to the right of the display. The menu icon will move to indicate the menu you have selected. Selecting Other Menus (MENU [▲], [▼] Buttons) You can select one of the seven “DISK” “MULTI PAD” “REGIST MEMORY” “MIDI” “DIGITAL EFFECT” “OVERALL” “GROOVE & DYNAMICS” menus on the left of the display by pressing the [▲], [▼] MENU buttons at the lower left. The menu icon will move to indicate the menu you have selected. SUB MENU 8Beat Po p1 MENU 001 DISK MULTI PAD STYLE SONG REGIST MEMORY DIGITAL EQ MENU 116 TEMPO 100 000 DISK REVERB Gra nd Piano B ONE TOUCH SETTING REPEAT 1 ACMP/SONG VOLUME TRANSPOSE MULTI EFFECT A 2 4 DSP 001 001 MEASURE FREEZE BEAT 1 REGISTRATION MEMORY VARIATION CHORUS 3 2 3 VOICE 4 dim 6 HARMONY SYNC STOP 119 513 m M 7aug sus 4 FINGERING GROOVE & DYNAMICS MIDI 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 VOICE VOICE MULTI PAD 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 STYLE STYLE 001 001 001 001 001 001 001 001 001 001 001 001 001 001 001 001 DIGITAL EFFECT OVERALL RHYTHM RHYTHM 1 2 BASS CHORD 1 CHORD 2 PAD PHRASE PHRASE MELODY MELODY MELODY MELODY 1 2 3 4 1 2 ACMP VOICE VOICE VOICE L R2 R1 SPLIT GROOVE&DYNAMICS ACCOMPANIMENT TRACK SONG TRACK L SONG DUAL R2 SONG R1 SUB MENU Selection (SUB MENU [▲], [▼] Buttons) You can select one of the sub menus within the selected menu by pressing the [▲], [▼] SUB MENU buttons at the upper left of the display. At the top of the display, the MENU/SUB MENU you selected will displayed on the left and the current setting or value for that item on the right. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 – / NO 0 + / YES Dial Like the number buttons [1]-[0], [+],[–], the dial is used to change settings and values. Rotating it to the right (clockwise) increases the value, while rotating it to the left (counterclockwise) decreases it. The dial can also be used to toggle on/off settings. 10 Number Buttons [1]-[0], [+] (YES), [–] (NO) Buttons The number buttons [1] – [0], [+],[–], are used to change settings (values). Pressing the [+] button increases the displayed value by 1. Pressing the [–] button decreases it by 1. Pressing and holding either button causes a continuous increase or decrease. Pressing the [+] (YES) or [–] (NO) buttons also switches between on and off settings. For items that have initial default values, pressing the [+] and [–] buttons together at the same time will return the setting to the initial value. • When the value displayed is a number like a style number, pressing and holding either the [+] or [–] button will cause the number to continue to the lowest value after the highest is reached or viceversa (...99m100 m1 m2..., ...2m1 m100m 99...). If the number displayed is a value like a transpose value, it will stop changing when the maximum or minimum value is reached. ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢ ,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,, QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ ,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,, QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢ Basic Display Operation There are two modes in the PSR-730/630: Style Mode and Song Mode, and normally one of them is selected. Pressing the STYLE button selects Style Mode, lighting the STYLE icon, while pressing the Song button selects Song Mode and lights the SONG icon, displaying the current mode. Style Mode * Pressing the START/STOP button will start accompaniment playback. STYLE Currently selected style name and style number 8Beat Po p1 001 STYLE SONG Accompaniment volume DIGITAL EQ 1 116 TEMPO 100 000 DISK REVERB 2 3 1 ONE TOUCH SETTING 2 4 FREEZE DSP 6 HARMONY SYNC STOP 7 8 9 001 BEAT 1 2 3 VOICE 4 MULTI PAD dim 6 VARIATION 5 3 001 MEASURE REGISTRATION MEMORY CHORUS 4 Gra nd Piano B REPEAT ACMP/SONG VOLUME TRANSPOSE MULTI EFFECT A m M 7aug sus 4 FINGERING 10 11 119 513 12 GROOVE & DYNAMICS 13 14 15 16 219 219 355 337 339 407 324 362 888 888 888 888 888 084 109 001 RHYTHM RHYTHM 1 2 BASS CHORD 1 CHORD 2 PAD PHRASE PHRASE MELODY MELODY MELODY MELODY 1 2 3 4 1 2 ACMP VOICE VOICE VOICE L R2 R1 SPLIT SONG TRACK ACCOMPANIMENT TRACK L DUAL R2 R1 Information for accompaniment tracks 1-8 Song Mode * Pressing the START/STOP button will start song playback. SONG Currently selected song name and song number London B rid Gra nd Piano 001 STYLE SONG DIGITAL EQ Song volume 1 116 TEMPO 000 DISK TRANSPOSE MULTI EFFECT 2 REVERB 3 A 100 4 1 ACMP/SONG VOLUME ONE TOUCH SETTING 2 3 4 DSP FREEZE 6 7 BEAT 1 2 3 8 9 VOICE 4 MULTI PAD dim 6 HARMONY SYNC STOP 001 001 MEASURE REGISTRATION MEMORY VARIATION CHORUS 5 B REPEAT m M 7aug sus 4 FINGERING 10 11 119 513 12 GROOVE & DYNAMICS 13 14 15 16 213 213 337 391 259 434 468 442 471 219 252 213 213 213 213 213 RHYTHM RHYTHM 1 2 BASS CHORD 1 CHORD 2 PAD PHRASE PHRASE MELODY MELODY MELODY MELODY 1 2 3 4 1 2 ACMP VOICE VOICE VOICE L R2 R1 SPLIT ACCOMPANIMENT TRACK SONG TRACK L DUAL R2 R1 Information for song tracks 1-16 • When in Song Mode, AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT ON/OFF , SYNC START, SYNC STOP and other buttons connected with accompaniment will not function. Shortcuts To make operation as easy and as efficient as possible, the PSR-730/630 features a number of “shortcuts” which allow you to jump directly to certain functions without having to use the MENU and SUB MENU buttons. All of these shortcuts work in the same way: press and hold a panel button for a few seconds to go to the related function. For example, if you press and hold the [REVERB] button for a few seconds, you will go directly to the REVERB type selection function. The shorcuts will also be described where appropriate throughout this manual. 11 ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢ ,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,, QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ Setting Up ,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,, QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢ This section contains information about setting up your PSR-730/630 and preparing to play. Be sure to go through this section carefully before using your PSR-730/630. Power Supply Although the PSR-730/630 will run either from an optional AC adaptor or batteries, Yamaha recommends use of the more environmentally safe AC adaptor. Follow the instructions below according to the power source you intend to use. • Never interrupt the power supply (e.g. remove the batteries or unplug the AC adaptor) during any PSR-730/630 record operation! Doing so can result in a loss of data. ■ Using An Optional AC Power Adaptor z Plug an optional Yamaha PA-6 Power Adaptor into a wall AC outlet. x Then plug the DC output cable from the PA-6 into the DC IN 10-12V jack on the rear panel of the PSR-730/630. The internal batteries are automatically disconnected when an AC Power Adaptor is used. DC IN 10-12V PA-6 When turning the power OFF, simply reverse the procedure. • Use ONLY a Yamaha PA-6 AC Power Adaptor (or other adaptor specifically recommended by Yamaha) to power your instrument from the AC mains. The use of other adaptors may result in irreparable damage to both the adaptor and the PSR-730/630. • Unplug the AC Power Adaptor when not using the PSR730/630, or during electrical storms. ■ Using Batteries For battery operation the PSR-730/630 requires six 1.5V SUM-1, “D” size, R20 or equivalent batteries. When the batteries need to be replaced “Lo Battery!!” may appear on top of the display, the volume may be reduced, the sound may be distorted, and other problems may occur. When this happens, turn the power off and replace the batteries. Replace the batteries as follows: z Open the battery compartment cover located on the instrument’s bottom panel. x Insert the six new batteries, being careful to follow the polarity markings on the inside of the compartment. c Replace the compartment cover, making sure that it locks firmly in place. • When the batteries run down, replace them with a complete set of six new batteries. NEVER mix old and new batteries. • Do not use different kinds of batteries (e.g. alkaline and manganese) at the same time. • If the instrument is not to be in use for a long time, remove the batteries from it, in order to prevent possible fluid leakage from the battery. • Plugging or unplugging the AC power adaptor while the batteries are installed will reset the PSR730/630 to the defaults. ◆ Important Notes on Battery Use • Since the PSR-730 and PSR-630 consume a considerable amount of power, Yamaha recommends the use of an AC power adaptor rather than batteries. The batteries should be considered an auxiliary power source for data backup. • The floppy disk drive, in particular, uses a large amount of power, so it is important to always use an AC power adaptor when performing disk-intensive operations such as song recording/playback or data load/save. If you attempt to use battery power for these operations and the batteries do fail, you will lose not only the data you’re recording or saving, but also 12 other data in internal memory including user styles, user pads, registration memory, etc. • Taking the above precautions into consideration, always use an AC power adaptor when using the PSR-630/730 for an important performance or when creating important data. • When using batteries and the “Lo Battery!!” warning initially appears on the display, the volume will drop a little but you will be able to use the instrument for a while longer. When the “Lo Battery!!” warning begins to appear every few seconds, replace the batteries as soon as possible. ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢ ,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,, QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ ,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,, QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢ Setting Up Connections ■ PHONES Jack A standard pair of stereo headphones can be plugged in here for private practice or late-night playing. The internal stereo speaker system is automatically shut off when a pair of headphones is plugged into the PHONES jack. Do not listen with the headphones at high volume for long periods of time. Doing so may cause hearing loss. ■ SUSTAIN Pedal Jack The sustain function causes the sound from a depressed key to continue, even after the key is released. Plug an optional Yamaha FC4 or FC5 footswitch into the sustain jack and use it to switch sustain on and off. The footswitch connected to this jack can also be set to replicate the functions of some panel buttons, doing things like starting and stopping accompaniment (page 117). SUSTAIN ■ FOOT VOLUME Jack Connecting an optional Yamaha FC7 foot controller lets you use your foot to change the volume as you play the PSR-730/630 (expression function). The foot controller connected to this jack can also be set to replicate the functions of the main volume controls, such as accompaniment or song volume (page 117). FOOT VOL • Be sure that you do not press the footswitch while turning the power on. If you do, the ON/OFF status of the footswitch will be reversed. • When the sustain or sostenuto pedal functions are being used (page 117), some voices may sound continuously or have a long decay after the notes have been released while the pedal is held. ■ AUX OUT R and L/L+R Jacks ••••••••• R AUX OUT • • • • • • • • • L/L+R Stereo System The rear-panel AUX OUT R and L/L+R jacks deliver the output of the PSR-730/630 for connection to a keyboard amplifier, stereo sound system, a mixing console, or tape recorder. If you will be connecting the PSR-730/630 to a monaural sound system, use only the L/L+R jack. When a plug is inserted into the L/L+R jack only, the left- and right-channel signals are combined and delivered via the L/L+R jack so you don’t lose any of the PSR-730/630 sound. (Use phone plugs). • Connecting PSR730/630 to external equipment only after turning off power for all devices. To prevent damage to the speakers, set the volume of the external devices at the minimum setting before connecting them. Failure to observe these cautions may result in electric shock or equipment damage. ■ MIDI IN/OUT and TO HOST Connectors See page 121. 13 ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢ ,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,, QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ The Demonstration ,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,, QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢ Once you’ve set up your PSR-730/630, try listening to the pre-programmed demonstration songs. A total of 15 demo songs are provided. 1 Switch ON Turn the power ON by pressing the [STAND BY/ON] switch. • Even when the switch is in the “STAND BY” position, electricity is still flowing to the instrument at the minimum level. When you are not using the PSR-730/630 for a long time, make sure you unplug the AC power adoptor from the wall AC outlet, and/or remove the batteries from the instrument. STAND BY ON 2 Set an Initial Volume Level Turn the [MASTER VOLUME] control up (clockwise) about a quarter-turn from its minimum position. You can re-adjust the [MASTER VOLUME] control for the most comfortable overall volume level after playback begins. MASTER VOLUME MIN • If you play the PSR-730/630 with the volume at its maximum level when the batteries are used, the life of the batteries will be shorter. MAX 3 Press the [DEMO] Button Press the [DEMO] button to start demo playback. The PSR-730/630 SONG menu will automatically be selected and the number and name of the first demo song will appear on the top line of the display. The demo will begin playing automatically. The demo songs will play in sequence, and the sequence will repeat until stopped. DEMO Trumpet 14 t • You can either have all the demo songs played continuously, or have only one song play (page 77). ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢ ,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,, QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ ,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,, QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢ The Demonstration 4 Skip to the Beginning Of a Different Demo Song While the demonstration is playing you can select any of the demo songs by using the [–] and [+] buttons. Playback will skip to the beginning of the selected song. R&B d 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 – / NO 0 + / YES 5 Stop When Done Press the [DEMO] button or the [START/STOP] button to stop demo playback. DEMO START / STOP • Stopping demo song playback, then starting it again by pressing the [START/ STOP] button will cause demo song playback to automatically stop at the end of that song. • If the [DEMO] button is pressed in Style Mode (page 11), the instrument will automatically switch to Song Mode (page 11). 15 ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢ ,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,, QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ Playing the PSR-730/630 ,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,, QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢ The PSR-730/630 actually includes two voice sets: the “panel” voices and percussion kits, and the XG voices. The panel voices include 215 “pitched” voices (200 “pitched” voices for PSR-630) and 12 drum kits, while the XG voice set includes 480 voices. is displayed under the voice number at the top When an XG voice is selected, an XG icon of the display. PSR-730 PSR-630 Panel Voices Voice numbers 1-215 Voice numbers 1-200 Drum Kits Voice numbers 216-227 Voice numbers 201-212 XG Voices Voice numbers 228-707 Voice numbers 213-692 Choose a voice you like, and try it out! • Refer to the panel voice list or XG voice list when selecting voices (page 133). • See page 3 for information about XG. A Word About the “R1”, “R2”, and “L” Voices The PSR-730/630 allows up to three voices to be selected at the same time: “R1” (Right-hand 1), “R2”, (Right-hand 2) and “L” (Left-hand). The “R1” voice is the basic voice of the PSR-730/630 and it’s used when you’re playing a single voice over the entire range of the keyboard as with an acoustic piano. You can also have two voices play together at the same time (R1 voice and R2 voice) or play different voices with the right and left hands (R1 voice and L voice) (pages 19, 20). The numbers of the currently selected R1, R2, and L voices are all shown at the lower right of on the display panel. Normally, the R1 voice number is also shown at the upper right of the display panel. 084 109 001 VOICE VOICE VOICE L R2 R1 SPLIT The R1 (Right-hand 1), the R2 (Right-hand 2) and the L (Left hand) voices are shown. DUAL ● Playing with a Single Voice VOICE VOICE VOICE L R2 R1 SPLIT DUAL R1 Voice ● Playing with Two Voices (Dual Voice Mode m page 19). VOICE VOICE VOICE L R2 R1 SPLIT DUAL R1 Voice + R2 Voice ● Playing Separate Voices with the Right and Left Hands (Split Voice Mode m page 20) VOICE VOICE VOICE L R2 R1 SPLIT L Voice R1 Voice VOICE VOICE VOICE L R2 R1 SPLIT R1 Voice + R2 Voice L Voice (Split Voice Mode + Dual Voice Mode) 16 DUAL DUAL ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢ ,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,, QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ ,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,, QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢ Playing the PSR-730/630 Selecting & Playing R1 Voices 1 Select the VOICE Menu Press the [VOICE] button so that the triangular indicator appears in the display next to “VOICE” to the right of the display. The number and name of the currently selected “R1” voice appears on the top right of the display panel when the VOICE menu is selected. p1 Gra nd Piano 001 VOICE VOICE VOICE 2 Select a Panel Voice The PSR-730/630 voices can be selected by using the [–] and [+] buttons, the number buttons, the data dial, or the [VOICE] button. ● The [–] and [+] Buttons When the VOICE menu is selected these buttons step up or down through the PSR730/630’s voices. Press either button briefly to step to the next voice in the corresponding direction, or hold the button to scroll rapidly through the voices in the corresponding direction. p1 Bri ghtPiano 002 7 8 9 – / NO 0 + / YES ● The Number Buttons The number buttons can be used to directly enter the number of the desired voice, thereby immediately selecting that voice without having to step through a number of other voices. To select voice number 109, for example, press the [1], [0], and [9] number buttons in sequence. p1 Str ings 109 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 – / NO 0 + / YES * The above illustration shows the display of the PSR-730. 17 ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢ ,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,, QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ ,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,, QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢ Playing the PSR-730/630 One- or two-digit voice numbers can be entered without leading zeros. To select voice number “23”, for example, simply press the [2] button and then the [3] button. The bars below the voice number on the display will flash for a few seconds, and then disappear when the selected voice number has been recognized by the PSR730/630. p1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 – / NO 0 + / YES Xyl ophone 023 * The above illustration shows the display of the PSR-730. One- or two-digit voice numbers can also be entered with leading zeroes: e.g. “23” can be entered as “023” by pressing the [0], [2], and [3] buttons. In this case the specified voice number will be immediately recognized by the PSR-730/630. ● The Data Dial Simply rotate the dial clockwise to increment the voice number, or counterclockwise to decrement the voice number. ● The [VOICE] Button Pressing the [VOICE] button increments the voice number. Press briefly to increment by one, or hold for continuous incrementing. VOICE 3 Play & Adjust Volume You can now play the selected voice on the PSR-730/630 keyboard. Use the [MASTER VOLUME] control to adjust the overall volume level. If the Voice Set function (page 116) is turned “on”, whenever a panel voice is selected appropriate “R2” and “L” voices (i.e. DUAL VOICE and SPLIT VOICE modes) as well as digital effects, etc., will be automatically selected at the same time. MASTER VOLUME MIN 18 MAX • When a XG voice is selected the XG icon will appear below the voice number. • Refer to page 133 for a complete list of the panel and XG voices. ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢ ,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,, QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ ,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,, QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢ Playing the PSR-730/630 ◆ Keyboard Percussion When one of the 12 panel DRUM KIT voices are selected you can play different drums and percussion instruments on the keyboard. The drums and percussion instruments played by the various keys are marked by symbols below the keys. p1 Std .Kit1 216 VOICE * The above illustration shows the display of the PSR-730. ● The Drum Kits PSR-730 PSR-630 Kit Name PSR-730 PSR-630 Kit Name 216 201 Standard Kit1 222 207 Dance Kit 217 202 Standard Kit2 223 208 Jazz Kit 218 203 Room Kit 224 209 Brush Kit 219 204 Rock Kit 225 210 Classic Kit 220 205 Electronic Kit 226 211 SFX Kit 1 221 206 Analog Kit 227 212 SFX Kit 2 • The HARMONY effect (page 47) cannot be turned on while a drum kit is selected for the “R1” voice, and will automatically be turned off if a drum kit is selected while HARMONY is on. • The TRANSPOSE parameter (page 56) has no effect on the drum kit voices. • See page 140 for a complete listing of the keyboard percussion drum instrument assignments. The Dual Voice Mode When the DUAL VOICE mode is engaged you can play two voices (the R1 and R2 voices) simultaneously across the entire keyboard. The DUAL VOICE mode is turned on and off by pressing the [DUAL VOICE] button. When the DUAL VOICE mode is turned on both R1 and R2 icons in the display will light. Press the [DUAL VOICE] button a second time to turn the DUAL VOICE mode off: the R2 icon in the display will go out leaving only the R1 icon lit. 084 109 001 VOICE VOICE VOICE L R2 R1 SPLIT DUAL VOICE DUAL In the Syle mode, the R2 TRACK button below the display (second from the right) can also be used to turn the R2 voice on or off as required. 084 109 001 VOICE VOICE VOICE L R2 R1 SPLIT DUAL L R2 R1 14 15 16 • The R1/R2 voice settings (voice parameters) can be changed as required by using the REVOICE function, described on page 110. • The R1 voice cannot be turned off. • The DUAL VOICE mode can be used at the same time as the SPLIT VOICE mode, described below. In this case the L voice is played on the left-hand section of the keyboard while both the R1 and R2 voices are played on the righthand section of the keyboard. See the “The Split Voice Mode” section, below, for more information. 19 ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢ ,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,, QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ ,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,, QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢ Playing the PSR-730/630 The Split Voice Mode The SPLIT VOICE mode lets you play different voices with the left and right hands. The “split point” forms a boundary on the keyboard with the R voice playing on the right side, and the L voice on the left. Split Point The SPLIT VOICE mode is engaged by pressing the [SPLIT VOICE] button. When turned on, the L icon in the display will light in addition to the R1 or R1 and R2 icons. Press the [SPLIT VOICE] button a second time to disengage the SPLIT VOICE mode: the L icon will go out leaving only the R voice. 084 109 001 VOICE VOICE VOICE L R2 R1 SPLIT SPLIT VOICE DUAL In the Syle mode, the L TRACK button below the display (third from the right) can also be used to turn the L voice on or off as required. 084 109 001 VOICE VOICE VOICE L R2 R1 SPLIT 20 DUAL L R2 R1 14 15 16 • The L voice settings (voice parameters) can be changed as required by using the REVOICE function, described on page 110. • The split point can be changed as required as described below. ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢ ,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,, QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ ,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,, QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢ Playing the PSR-730/630 Changing the SPLIT VOICE Split Point The SPLIT VOICE split point can be set to any key on the PSR-730/630 keyboard to match your individual playing requirements. 1 Select the SPLIT VOICE Split Point Function Use the MENU [▲] and [▼] buttons to the left of the display to move the triangular indicator next to “OVERALL” on the left side of the display. MENU MIDI DIGITAL EFFECT OVERALL GROOVE&DYNAMICS Then use the SUB MENU [▲] and [▼] buttons to select the “Split Point” function from within the OVERALL menu . The MIDI note number (see the bottom of the keyboard) corresponding to the current split point will appear to the right of “Split Point” on the top line of the display. SplitPoi nt: 59 [ B2 ] 2 Set As Required Simply press the key you want to assign as the split point. The key number of the key you press will appear to the right of “SplitPoint” on the top line of the display. You can also use the [–] and [+] buttons, number buttons, or data dial to enter the split point key number. The lowest key on the keyboard (C1) is key number “36”, middle C (C3) is “60”, and the highest key (C5) is 96. The split point can be set at any key number from 0 through 127, allowing the split point to be set outside the range of the PSR-730/ 630 keyboard for MIDI applications. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 – / NO 0 + / YES • The split point key becomes the highest key in the left-hand section of the keyboard. • The default split point (54 for PSR-730 and 59 for PSR-630) can be instantly recalled by pressing the [–] and [+] buttons at the same time. • For the relationship between the SPLIT VOICE split point and the AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT split point, see page 31. • When setting the split point, that is, the sub menu “SplitPoint” is shown on the display, pressing the key on the keyboard doesn’t either produce notes or detect chords in the accompaniment section, but only designates the split point. 21 ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢ ,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,, QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ Auto Accompaniment ,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,, QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢ The PSR-730/630 has 100 different accompaniment “styles” from every musical type that can be used to provide fully-orchestrated or rhythm-only accompaniment. Just select one of the many styles available and play along. What is Auto Accompaniment? With the Auto Accompaniment feature, all you have to do is play the chords in your song and the accompaniment style that matches your music will automatically play along following the same chord progression. Using Auto Accompaniment, even a solo performer can enjoy playing with an entire band or orchestra backing them up. ● When Auto Accompaniment is turned on... The specified left-hand section of the keyboard becomes the “Auto Accompaniment” section, and chords played in this section are automatically detected and used as a basis for fully automatic accompaniment with the selected style. AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT split point (54) • The default setting for the Auto Accompaniment split point is [54] (the Auto Accompaniment sections extends to the left of key [54]). To change the Auto Accompaniment split point, see page 30. “auto accompaniment” section Using Auto Accompaniment 1 Select a Style Press the [STYLE] button to select the STYLE menu (the triangular indicator will appear next to “STYLE” to the right of the display). The number and name of the currently selected style will appear on the top left of the display, and the STYLE icon will light, indicating that the PSR-730/630 is in Style Mode. 8Beat Po p1 001 STYLE SONG DIGITAL EQ 1 116 TEMPO A 100 000 DISK TRANSPOSE MULTI EFFECT 2 REVERB 3 4 B ONE TOUCH SETTING REPEAT 1 ACMP/SONG VOLUME 2 3 4 DSP FREEZE 6 7 BEAT 1 2 8 9 VOICE 3 VOICE VOICE 4 MULTI PAD dim 6 HARMONY SYNC STOP 001 001 MEASURE REGISTRATION MEMORY VARIATION CHORUS 5 Gra nd Piano 10 11 119 513 m M 7aug sus 4 FINGERING 12 GROOVE & DYNAMICS 13 14 15 16 STYLE STYLE 219 219 355 337 339 407 324 362 888 888 888 888 888 084 109 001 RHYTHM RHYTHM 1 2 BASS CHORD 1 CHORD 2 PAD PHRASE PHRASE MELODY MELODY MELODY MELODY 1 2 3 4 1 2 ACMP VOICE VOICE VOICE L R2 R1 SPLIT ACCOMPANIMENT TRACK 22 SONG TRACK L DUAL R2 R1 SONG SONG ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢ ,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,, QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ ,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,, QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢ Auto Accompaniment Find the style you want by referring to the style list (page 142), then pressing the [1]– [0] number buttons, enter the 1-3 digits of its style number. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 – / NO 0 + / YES Example: Select style number “24” (Dance Pop 2) Press number buttons [2], [4] in sequence. Dance Po p2 • Just like the voice numbers, when selecting 1 or 2 digit style numbers, if you add [0] at the beginning and enter a 3 digit number, it will be immediately recognized. For example, to select style number “95” (Polka) press buttons [0], [9], [5] in sequence. 024 You can also change style numbers using the [+], [–] buttons or the Data Dial. Also you can increment the style number by pressing the [STYLE] button. Press briefly to increment by one, or hold for continuous incrementing. 7 8 9 – / NO 0 + / YES STYLE 2 Turn AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT On Press the AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT [ON/OFF] so that its indicator lights. • If AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT is off (not lit), only rhythm (drums and percussion) accompaniment will be produced. ACCOMPANIMENT ON / OFF • For information about the accompaniment tracks, see page 28. 3 Start the Accompaniment There are several ways to start the accompaniment: ● Straight start Press the [START/STOP] button. The rhythm will begin playing immediately without bass and chord accompaniment. The currently selected MAIN [A] or [B] section will play. START / STOP MAIN / AUTO FILL SYNC AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT STOP START INTRO A B A B ENDING • It is possible to select the MAIN A or B section prior to a straight start — refer to “7. Select the MAIN A and B Sections as Required,” below. 23 ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢ ,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,, QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ ,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,, QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢ Auto Accompaniment ● Start with an introduction followed by the MAIN A section Press the [INTRO] button so that its indicator lights, press the MAIN/AUTO FILL [A] button (not necessary if its indicator is already flashing), then press [START/STOP]. START / STOP MAIN / AUTO FILL SYNC STOP START INTRO IMENT A B A B ENDING ● Start with an introduction followed by the MAIN B section Press the [INTRO] button so that its indicator lights, press the MAIN/AUTO FILL [B] button (not necessary if its indicator is already flashing), then press [START/STOP]. START / STOP MAIN / AUTO FILL SYNC STOP START INTRO IMENT A B A B ENDING ● Synchronized start Any of the above start types can be synchronized to the first note or chord played on the left-hand section of the keyboard (i.e. keys to the left of and including the split-point key — normally 54) by first pressing the [SYNC START] button. MAIN / AUTO FILL SYNC STOP START INTRO IMENT A B A B ENDING • If you press the [SYNC START] button while the accompaniment is playing, the accompaniment will stop and the synchro start mode will be engaged. • The [INTRO] button can be used to select the INTRO section even while the accompaniment is playing. • The accompaniment split point can be changed via the “Accompaniment Split Point” function in the OVERALL menu — see page 30. Pressing the [SYNC START] button alone causes a straight start to occur when the first note or chord is played. Press the [SYNC START] button and then the appropriate [INTRO] and [MAIN/AUTO FILL] buttons for a synchronized introduction start. The BEAT indicator will flash at the current tempo when a synchronized start mode has been selected. The synchro start mode can be disengaged prior to actually starting the accompaniment by pressing the [SYNC START] button a second time. MAIN / AUTO FILL SYNC NIMENT 24 STOP START INTRO A B A B ENDING • When the AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT split point and SPLIT VOICE split point are set at different keys, the L voice can be played between the AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT split point and SPLIT VOICE split point when the AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT function is on. • When the AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT split point and SPLIT VOICE split point are set to the same key, the L voice can be played anywhere to the left of the AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT split point and SPLIT VOICE split point while AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT is not playing. ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢ ,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,, QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ ,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,, QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢ Auto Accompaniment 4 Play the Melody with the Accompaniment As soon as you play any chord that the PSR-730/630 can “recognize” on the lefthand section of the keyboard, the PSR-730/630 will automatically begin to play the chord along with the selected rhythm and an appropriate bass line. The name of the current chord will appear on the display. 1 2 3 VOICE 4 MULTI PAD dim 6 FINGERING 119 513 m M 7aug sus 4 GROOVE & DYNAMICS The chord will be recognized according to the rules set in the Fingering Mode. • For the method for entering chords, see page 32 “Auto Accompaniment Fingering Modes.” • When the Fingering Mode is set for “Single Finger,” “Fingered 1,” “Fingered 2,” or “Multi-Finger,” playing a chord in the auto accompaniment section while the rhythm is stopped will cause Bass + Chord to be played (for all styles). However, when the Auto Accompaniment split point and the Split Voice split point are the same key, playing a chord in the accompaniment section with the rhythm stopped will cause Bass + L voice to be played. The Auto Accompaniment will continue playing even if the left hand releases the keys. As you press each chord in the song, you can play the melody along with the accompaniment. 5 Changing Accompaniment Sections You can vary the song by pressing [INTRO], MAIN/AUTO FILL [A]/[B] or [ENDING] buttons and changing to a different accompaniment section (page 27). Try pressing the different buttons and see what happens. MAIN / AUTO FILL INTRO A B A B ENDING 6 Stop the Accompaniment Press the [START/STOP] button to stop the accompaniment. START / STOP If you want to stop after playing the ending, press the [ENDING] button. The accompaniment will stop after playing the ending . ENDING • The ending will begin playing immediately when you press the ENDING button while the accompaniment is playing the first beat of the measure. The ending will begin playing from the next measure when you press the button while the accompaniment is playing the second or larger numbered beat. • If you press the INTRO button while the ending is playing, the intro section will begin playing after the ending is finished. • If you press a MAIN/ AUTO FILL (A,B) button while the ending is playing, fill-in accompaniment will immediately start playing, continuing with the main section. • If you press the SYNC START while an accompaniment is playing, the accompaniment will stop and the PSR-730/630 will enter Synchronized Start standby status. 25 ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢ ,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,, QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ ,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,, QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢ Auto Accompaniment ◆ Changing Tempo You can change the tempo for accompaniment or song playback. When you select a different style while the accompaniment is not playing, the “default” tempo for that style is also selected, and the tempo is displayed immediately above “TEMPO” in the display in quarter-note beats per minute. If the accompaniment is playing, the same tempo is maintained even if you select a different style. You can change the tempo to any value between 32 and 280 beats per minute, however, by using the TEMPO [▼] and [▲] buttons. Press either button briefly to decrement or increment the tempo value by one, or hold the button for continuous decrementing or incrementing. Tempo: TEMPO 001 116 TEMPO 116 A 100 B REPEAT ONE TOUCH SETTING When either of the TEMPO buttons is pressed the current tempo value will appear on the top line of the display for a few seconds — during this time the [–] and [+] buttons, number buttons, or data dial can also be used to set the tempo. The default tempo for the selected style can be recalled at any time by pressing both the TEMPO [▼] and [▲] buttons simultaneously (or by pressing the [–] and [+] buttons simultaneously while the tempo value is showing on the top line of the display). ◆ The Beat Indicator When Auto Accompaniment or song playback is started, the four dots of the BEAT indicator provide a visual indication of the selected tempo as shown below. 4/4 time 1st beat 2nd beat 3rd beat 4th beat 26 3/4 time ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢ ,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,, QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ ,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,, QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢ Auto Accompaniment ◆ Accompaniment Sections There are 8 types of Auto Accompaniment sections that allow you to vary the arrangement of the accompaniment to match the song you are playing. They are: Intro, Main A and B, Fill-in (AA, AB, BA, BB) and Ending. By switching between them while playing you can put together a single song. MAIN / AUTO FILL INTRO A B A B ENDING ● INTRO Section This is the beginning of the song. When the intro finishes playing, accompaniment shifts to the main section. ● MAIN Section There are two variations that can play in the main section of the song: A and B. The Auto Accompaniment will automatically play following along with the chords that you play. ● FILL-IN Section Fill-in livens up pauses in the song. Whenever you press the MAIN/AUTO FILL [A] or [B] button during accompaniment, the PSR-730/630 will generate an appropriate “fill-in” (one of four types: AA, AB, BA, and BB) which will smoothly connect the current section to the selected section — even if it is the same section. • The MAIN A section is automatically selected whenever the PSR-730/ 630 power is initially turned on. • The indicator of the destination section (MAIN A or B) will flash while the corresponding fill-in is playing. During this time you can change the destination section by pressing the appropriate MAIN/AUTO FILL [A] or [B] button. • You can use the intro section even in the middle of the song by pressing the INTRO button during the song. • If the MAIN/AUTO FILL A/B button is pressed after the final half beat (eighth note) of the measure, fill-in will begin from the next measure. • You can begin the accompaniment by using the ending instead of the intro section. ● ENDING Section This is the ending portion of the song. When the ending is finished, Auto Accompaniment will stop. 27 ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢ ,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,, QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ ,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,, QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢ Auto Accompaniment ◆ Accompaniment Track Muting The PSR-730/630 has eight accompaniment tracks — RHYTHM 1, RHYTHM 2, BASS, CHORD 1, CHORD 2, PAD, PHRASE 1, and PHRASE 2 — that you can control to modify the “orchestration” and therefore the overall sound of the accompaniment. When a style is selected the icons corresponding to the tracks which contain data for any section of that style will light. Individual accompaniment tracks can be turned OFF (muted) or ON by pressing the TRACK buttons corresponding to the target tracks. The track icon will disappear when a track is muted. By turning the tracks OFF and ON in different combinations, you can create various arrangements from a single accompaniment style. • Individual track voices, volume, and other parameters can be changed by using the REVOICE function — page 112. ● What’s in the Tracks 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 219 219 340 322 324 407 324 347 RHYTHM RHYTHM 1 2 BASS CHORD 1 CHORD 2 PAD 2 3 4 5 6 These are the main rhythm tracks. The RHYTHM tracks produce the drum and percussion sounds. BASS The BASS track always plays a bass line, but the voice will change to fit the selected style … acoustic bass, synth bass, tuba, etc. CHORD 1 & 2 These tracks provide the rhythmic chordal accompaniment required by each style. You’ll find guitar, piano, and other chordal instruments here. PAD This track plays long chords where necessary, using sustained instruments such as strings, organ, choir. PHRASE 1 & 2 This is where the musical embellishments reside. The PHRASE tracks are used for punchy brass stabs, arpeggiated chords, and other extras that make the accompaniment more interesting. PHRASE PHRASE 1 2 ACCOMPANIMENT TRACK 1 RHYTHM 1 & 2 8 7 8 ◆ The Synchro Stop Function When the Synchro Stop function is engaged, accompaniment playback will stop completely when all keys in the auto-accompaniment section of the keyboard are released. Accompaniment playback will start again as soon as a chord is played. The BEAT indicators in the display will flash while the accompaneiment is stopped. The Synchro Stop function is engaged by pressing the [SYNC STOP] button so that the SYNC STOP icon in the display appears. Press the [SYNC STOP] button again so that the icon disappears to turn the Synchro Stop function off. SYNC AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT STOP p1 START Gra nd Piano ONE TOUCH SETTING FREEZE BEAT 1 MEMORY 2 28 3 4 VOICE MULTI PAD dim 6 SYNC STOP 001 001 MEASURE FINGERING 119 513 m M 7aug sus 4 GROOVE & DYNAMICS • The Synchro Stop function can not be turned on when the FULL KEYBOARD AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT fingering mode is selected. The Synchro Stop function will be automatically turned off if the FULL KEYBOARD fingering mode is selected while the Synchro Stop function is on. ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢ ,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,, QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ ,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,, QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢ Auto Accompaniment Using Virtual Arranger When the Virtual Arranger function is turned on while Auto Accompaniment is active, simply pressing chords in the auto accompaniment section causes the Auto Accompaniment to automatically play slightly different chord variations, which creates a livelier and more melodic accompaniment. Turning the Virtual Arranger function off returns to normal Auto Accompaniment. Press the [STYLE] button to select the STYLE menu. The triangular indicator will appear next to “STYLE” to the right of the display, and the PSR-730/630 will enter Style Mode (the STYLE icon will light). STYLE STYLE When Style Mode is selected with the Style Menu (the STYLE icon is lit), the on/off setting of the Virtual Arranger can be changed with the Sub Menu. Select the “V.Arranger” sub menu using the SUB MENU [▼], [▲] keys. The current on/off status will be shown at the top right of the display. • Simultaneously pressing the [SYNC STOP] and [SYNC START] buttons causes the Virtual Arranger to switch between off and on. The current on/off status will be shown at the top right of the display. (The on/off display will return to its original condition after a few seconds.) SUB MENU V.Arrang er: Off Change the on/off status using the [+], [–] buttons or the Data Dial. Accompaniment Volume Control The volume of the accompaniment in relation to the keyboard can be adjusted for the best overall balance by using the ACMP/SONG VOLUME [▼] and [▲] buttons. When either button is pressed the current accompaniment volume setting will appear on the top line of the display for a few seconds. The accompaniment volume range is from “0” (no sound) to “127” (maximum volume). The default setting is “100”. Press the ACMP/SONG VOLUME [▼] button to decrease the volume or the [▲] button to increase the volume. Press the button briefly to single step, or hold to continuously decrement or increment. ACMP / SONG VOLUME • While the accompaniment volume setting appears on the top line of the display the [–] and [+] buttons, number buttons, or Data Dial can also be used to set the accompaniment volume. AcmpVolu me: 100 001 STYLE 116 TEMPO 000 TRANSPOSE A 100 B REPEAT ONE TOUCH SETTING ACMP/SONG VOLUME 29 ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢ ,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,, QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ ,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,, QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢ Auto Accompaniment Changing the Accompaniment Split Point The AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT split point (the boundary point between the melody section and accompaniment section) can be set to any key on the PSR-730/630 keyboard to match your individual playing requirements. 1 Select the Accompaniment Split Point Function Use the MENU [▲] and [▼] buttons to the left of the display to move the triangular indicator next to “OVERALL” on the left side of the display. MENU MIDI DIGITAL EFFECT OVERALL GROOVE&DYNAMICS Then use the SUB MENU [▲] and [▼] buttons to select the “AcmpSplit” function from within the OVERALL menu . The MIDI note number corresponding to the current split point will appear to the right of “AcmpSplit” on the top line of the display. AcmpSpli t: 54 [F#2 ] 2 Set As Required Simply press the key you want to assign as the split point. The key number of the key you press will appear to the right of “AcmpSplit” on the top line of the display. You can also use the [–] and [+] buttons, number buttons, or Data Dial to enter the split point key number. The split point can be set at any key number from 0 through 127. 30 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 – / NO 0 + / YES • The split point key becomes the highest key in the Auto Accompaniment section of the keyboard. • When setting the split point, that is, the sub menu “AcmpSplit” is shown on the display, pressing the key on the keyboard doesn’t either produce notes or detect chords in the accompaniment section, but only designates the split point. ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢ ,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,, QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ ,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,, QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢ Auto Accompaniment ◆ Interaction Between the AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT and SPLIT VOICE Split Points The SPLIT VOICE split point (page 21) and AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT split point can be independently specified, with the following limitations. The SPLIT VOICE split point cannot be set at a lower key than the AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT split point (if you attempt to do this the AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT split point will be set to the same key as the SPLIT VOICE split point). Conversely, the AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT split point cannot be set at a higher key than the SPLIT VOICE split point (if you attempt to do this the SPLIT VOICE split point will be set to the same key as the AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT split point). AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT split point Accompaniment SPLIT VOICE split point R Voice L Voice AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT split point/ SPLIT VOICE split point R Voice Accompaniment/ L Voice The Auto Accompaniment Fingering Modes The PSR-730/630 AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT feature has five different fingering modes which can be selected as follows. 1 Select the Fingering Mode Function Use the MENU [▲] and [▼] buttons to the left of the display to move the triangular indicator next to “OVERALL” on the left side of the display. MENU MIDI DIGITAL EFFECT OVERALL GROOVE&DYNAMICS • You can jump directly to the “FingerMode” function by pressing and holding the AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT [ON/OFF] button for a few seconds. 31 ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢ ,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,, QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ ,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,, QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢ Auto Accompaniment Then use the SUB MENU [▲] and [▼] buttons to select the “FingerMode” function from within the OVERALL menu. The abbreviated name of the current fingering mode will appear to the right of “FingerMode” on the top line of the display. • The default Fingering Mode is “Multi”. FingerMo de: Mul ti 2 Select the Required Fingering Mode Use the [–] and [+] buttons or Data Dial to select the desired fingering mode: ● Single (Single Finger) ● Fingered 1 ● Fingered 2 ● Full Key (Full Keyboard) ● Multi (Multi-finger) ● The SINGLE FINGER Mode FingerMo de: Sin gle Single-finger accompaniment makes it simple to produce beautifully orchestrated accompaniment using major, seventh, minor and minor-seventh chords by pressing a minimum number of keys on the AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT section of the keyboard. The abbreviated chord fingerings described below are used: C ■ For a major chord, press the root key only. Root Key Diagram Cm C7 Cm 7 32 Auto Accompaniment Split Point [54] ■ For a minor chord, simultaneously press the root key and a black key to its left. C# E b ■ For a seventh chord, simultaneously press the root key and a white key to its left. ■ For a minor-seventh chord, simultaneously press the root key and both a white and black key to its left. F# A b Bb C# E b F# C D E F G A B C D E F Accompaniment Section ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢ ,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,, QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ ,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,, QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢ Auto Accompaniment ● The FINGERED 1 Mode FingerMo de: Fin gered 1 The Fingered 1 mode lets you finger your own chords on the AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT section of the keyboard (i.e. all keys to the left of and including the splitpoint key — normally 54) while the PSR-730/630 supplies appropriately orchestrated rhythm, bass, and chord accompaniment in the selected style. The FINGERED 1 mode recognizes the following chords: Chord Name/[Abbreviation] Normal Voicing Chord (C) Display Major [M] 1-3-5 C C Add ninth [(9)] 1-2-3-5 C(9) C(9) Sixth [6] 1 - (3) - 5 - 6 C6 C6 Sixth ninth [6(9)] 1 - 2 - 3 - (5) - 6 C6(9) C6(9) Major seventh [M7] 1 - 3 - (5) - 7 or 1 - (3) - 5 - 7 CM7 CM7 Major seventh ninth [M7(9)] 1 - 2 - 3 - (5) - 7 CM7(9) CM7(9) Major seventh add sharp eleventh [M7(#11)] 1 - (2) - 3 - #4 - 5 - 7 or 1 - 2 - 3 - #4 - (5) - 7 CM7(#11) CM7(#11) Flatted fifth [(b5)] 1 - 3 - b5 C(b5) C(b5) Major seventh flatted fifth [M7b5] 1 - 3 - b5 - 7 CM7b5 CM7(b5) Suspended fourth [sus4] 1-4-5 Csus4 Csus4 Augmented [aug] 1 - 3 - #5 Caug Caug Major seventh augmented [M7aug] 1 - (3) - #5 - 7 CM7aug CM7aug Minor [m] 1 - b3 - 5 Cm Cm Minor add ninth [m(9)] 1 - 2 - b3 - 5 Cm(9) Cm(9) Minor sixth [m6] 1 - b3 - 5 - 6 Cm6 Cm6 Minor seventh [m7] 1 - b3 - (5) - b7 Cm7 Cm7 Minor seventh ninth [m7(9)] 1 - 2 - b3 - (5) - b7 Cm7(9) Cm7(9) Minor seventh eleventh [m7(11)] 1 - (2) - b3 - 4 - 5 - (b7) Cm7(11) Cm7(11) Minor major seventh [mM7] 1 - b3 - (5) - 7 CmM7 CmM7 Minor major seventh ninth [mM7(9)] 1 - 2 - b3 - (5) - 7 CmM7(9) CmM7(9) Minor seventh flatted fifth [m7b5] 1 - b3 - b5 - b7 Cm7b5 Cm7(b5) Minor major seventh flatted fifth [mM7b5] 1 - b3 - b5 - 7 CmM7b5 CmM7(b5) Diminished [dim] 1 - b3 - b5 Cdim Cdim Diminished seventh [dim7] 1 - b3 - b5 - 6 Cdim7 Cdim7 Seventh [7] 1 - 3 - (5) - b7 or 1 - (3) - 5 - b7 C7 C7 Seventh flatted ninth [7(b9)] 1 - b2 - 3 - (5) - b7 C7(b9) C7(b9) Seventh add flatted thirteenth [7(b13)] 1 - 3 - 5 - b6 - b7 C7(b13) C7(b13) Seventh ninth [7(9)] 1 - 2 - 3 - (5) - b7 C7(9) C7(9) Seventh add sharp eleventh [7(#11)] 1 - (2) - 3 - #4 - 5 - b7 or 1 - 2 - 3 - #4 - (5) - b7 C7(#11) C7(#11) Seventh add thirteenth [7(13)] 1 - 3 - (5) - 6 - b7 C7(13) C7(13) Seventh sharp ninth [7(#9)] 1 - #2 - 3 - (5) - b7 C7(#9) C7(#9) Seventh flatted fifth [7b5] 1 - 3 - b5 - b7 C7b5 C7b5 Seventh augmented [7aug] 1 - 3 - #5 - b7 C7aug C7aug Seventh suspended fourth [7sus4] 1 - 4 - (5) - b7 C7sus4 C7sus4 One plus two plus five [1+2+5] 1-2-5 C1+2+5 C • Notes in parentheses can be omitted. • If you play any three adjacent keys (including black keys), the chord sound will be canceled and only the rhythm instruments will continue playing (CHORD CANCEL function). • Playing a single key or two same root keys in the adjacent octaves produces accompaniment based only on the root. • A perfect fifth (1 + 5) produces accompaniment based only on the root and fifth which can be used with both major and minor chords. • The chord fingerings listed are all in “root” position, but other inversions can be used — with the following exceptions: m7, m7b 5, 6, m6, sus4, aug, dim7, 7b 5, 6(9), m7(11), 1+2+5. • Inversion of the 7sus4 chord is not recognized if the 5th is omitted. • The AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT will sometimes not change when related chords are played in sequence (e.g. some minor chords followed by the minor seventh). • Two-note fingerings will produce a chord based on the previously played chord. 33 ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢ ,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,, QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ ,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,, QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢ Auto Accompaniment Example for “C” chords CmM 7 CmM 7 (9) ( ) ( ( CM7 b5 Cm 7 (9) Cm 7 (11) ) CM 7 aug C (b5) ( Caug CM7 (#11) ) Csus 4 CM 7 (9) CM 7 ) C6 ) C (9) ( C 6 (9) C Cm (9) Cm 6 Cm 7 Cm 7 b5 CmM 7 b5 Cdim Cdim 7 C7 C 7 (13) C 7 (#9) C 7 b5 C 7 aug C 7 sus4 ( ) ( ) ) C 1+2+5 ) ) ( ( ) ) ( ( ) ( C 7 (#11) C 7 (b13) ( ) ) C 7 (b9) ( ) ( C 7 (9) ( ( ( ) ) ( ) Cm ● The FINGERED 2 Mode FingerMo de: Fin gered 2 This is essentially the same as the FINGERED 1 mode, described above, except that the FINGERED 2 mode additionally allows you to specify the lowest note of each chord — simply, the lowest note played in the AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT section of the keyboard is used as the accompaniment bass note. This means you can specify “on-bass” chords in which the main bass note for the chord is not the root of the chord. For a C major chord, for example, you could use E (the third) or G (the fifth) as the bass note rather than C. C C on E C on G ● The FULL KEYBOARD Mode (Full Key) FingerMo de: Ful l Key When the FULL KEYBOARD Mode is selected, the PSR-730/630 will automatically create appropriate accompaniment while you play just about anything using both hands, anywhere on the keyboard. You do not have to worry about specifying the accompaniment chords. The name of the detected chord will appear in the display. • When the FULL KEYBOARD mode is selected, the split point setting (see page 30) for the auto accompaniment will be ignored. • Chord detection occurs at approximately 8th-note intervals. Extremely short chords — less than an 8th note in length — may not be detected. 34 ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢ ,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,, QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ ,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,, QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢ Auto Accompaniment ● The MULTI-FINGER Mode (Multi) FingerMo de: Mul ti This is the default accompaniment mode. The MULTI-FINGER mode automatically detects SINGLE FINGER or FINGERED 1 chord fingerings, so you can use either type of fingering without having to switch fingering modes. • If you want to play minor, seventh or minor seventh chords using the SINGLE FINGER operation in the MULTI-FINGER Mode, always press the closest white/black key(s) to the root of the chord. ◆ The Stop Accompaniment Function While the SINGLE FINGER, FINGERED 1, FINGERED 2, or MULTI-FINGER mode is selected chords played in the AUTO ACCOMPNIMENT section of the keyboard are also detected and played by the PSR-730/630 Auto Accompaniment system when the accompaniment is stopped (except when the FULL KEYBOARD mode is engaged). In this case the bass note and chord voices are selected automatically. • When the AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT split point and SPLIT VOICE split point are set to the same key, the L voice and the automatically selected bass note will sound. Groove and Dynamics (PSR-730) The PSR-730 Groove & Dynamics function lets you temporarily change the timing, velocity and gate time of notes during playback of any of the preset accompaniment styles (style numbers 1-100). ● Groove .......... Lets you play the music with some swing or put a little groove in the beat by making subtle shifts in the timing (clock) of the accompaniment. ● Dynamics ...... Changes the impression of the accompaniment by varying the velocity of the notes in relation to the timing. The Groove & Dynamics function is composed of the four items below. When you choose an accompaniment style, the most appropriate template or value for each item will be automatically set. • Beat Groove Template (Automatically selected from 49 types) • Measure Groove Template (Automatically selected from 25 types) • Dynamics Template (Automatically selected from 17 types) • Dynamics Rate (Automatically set within a range of 0-100%) • Expand Rate (Automatically set within a range of 0-400%) • Boost Rate (Automatically set within a range of 0-400%) 35 ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢ ,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,, QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ ,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,, QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢ Auto Accompaniment ■ Applying Groove & Dynamics When you press the [GROOVE & DYNAMICS] button, the GROOVE & DYNAMICS icon will light, and the Groove & Dynamics effect will be applied to the accompaniment. p1 Gra nd Piano 001 VOICE GROOVE & DYNAMICS ■ Arranging the Groove & Dynamics Effect (User Settings) You can arrange any of the Groove & Dynamics settings (Beat Groove Template, Measure Groove Template, Dynamics Template, Dynamics Rate, Expand Rate or Boost Rate) that have been preset for each accompaniment style, and apply any kind of effect you want. Use the MENU [s] and [t] buttons to the left of the display to move the triangular indicator next to “GROOVE & DYNAMICS” on the left side of the display. MENU MIDI DIGITAL EFFECT OVERALL GROOVE&DYNAMICS ● Select the Beat Groove Template Use the SUB MENU [s] and [t] buttons to select the “BeatGroove” function from within the GROOVE & DYNAMICS menu. The name of the currently selected Beat Groove Template will appear on the right of the top line of the display. SUB MENU BeatGroo ve: Thru Referring to the “Beat Groove Template List” below, use the [+], [–] buttons or the Data Dial to select one of the 49 template types. 36 ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢ ,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,, QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ ,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,, QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢ Auto Accompaniment Beat Groove Template List The templates in this list shift the timing of the accompaniments by beats. These templates add lifelike effect to your accompaniments by converting a specific beat to another and slightly shifting the converted beat. Name: Indicates each template name. No.1"Thru” (No.1) adds no effect as its name implies. Targeted Beat: Beats to be converted. 8 = Eighth note 12 = Eighth note triplet 16 = 16th note 24 = 16th note triplet Converted Beat: Converted results. For example, selecting one of the templates, 12-17 (16 as Targeted Beat and 8 as Converted Beat), indicates every 16th note will be converted to eighth notes. Swing: Delays the timing of the converted beat. There are six types: A (Min.), B, C, D, E (Max.) and off (no effect). No. Name 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 Targeted Converted Beat Beat Thru 8 off 8_off_A 8 off 8_off_B 8 off 8_off_C 8 off 8_off_D 8 off 8_off_E 8 off 16_off_A 16 off 16_off_B 16 off 16_off_C 16 off 16_off_D 16 off 16_off_E 16 off 16_16to8_off 16 8 16_16to8_A 16 8 16_16to8_B 16 8 16_16to8_C 16 8 16_16to8_D 16 8 16_16to8_E 16 8 16_16to12_off 16 12 12_12to8_off 12 8 12_12to8_A 12 8 12_12to8_B 12 8 12_12to8_C 12 8 12_12to8_D 12 8 12_12to8_E 12 8 12_12to16A_off 12 16A Swing off A B C D E A B C D E off A B C D E off off A B C D E off No. Name Targeted Converted Beat Beat 26 12_12to16A_A 12 16A 27 12_12to16A_B 12 16A 28 12_12to16A_C 12 16A 29 12_12to16A_D 12 16A 30 12_12to16A_E 12 16A 31 12_12to16B_off 12 16B 32 12_12to16B_A 12 16B 33 12_12to16B_B 12 16B 34 12_12to16B_C 12 16B 35 12_12to16B_D 12 16B 36 12_12to16B_E 12 16B 37 24_24to8_off 24 8 38 24_24to8_A 24 8 39 24_24to8_B 24 8 40 24_24to8_C 24 8 41 24_24to8_D 24 8 42 24_24to8_E 24 8 43 24_24to16_off 24 16 44 24_24to16_A 24 16 45 24_24to16_B 24 16 46 24_24to16_C 24 16 47 24_24to16_D 24 16 48 24_24to16_E 24 16 49 24_24to12_off 24 12 Swing A B C D E off A B C D E off A B C D E off A B C D E off ● Select the Measure Groove Template Use the SUB MENU [s] and [t] buttons to select the “MeasGroove” function from within the GROOVE & DYNAMICS menu. The name of the currently selected Measure Groove Template will appear on the right of the top line of the display. MeasGroo ve: Thru Referring to the “Measure Groove Template List” below, use the [+], [–] buttons or the Data Dial to select one of the 25 template types. 37 ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢ ,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,, QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ ,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,, QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢ Auto Accompaniment Measure Groove Template List The templates in this list shift the timing of the accompaniments by measures. These templates add lifelike effect to your accompaniments by hastening or delaying the timing of the first beat of every measure. Name: Indicates each template name and content. No.1"Thru” (No.1) adds no effect as its name implies. “Push” in the template names indicates those templates hasten the timing. “Heavy” indicates the templates delay the timing. The suffixes “A”, “B” and “C” indicate min., med. and max., respectively. Time Signature: Indicates the appropriate time signatures for you to use. Be sure to match the time signature here to your song. No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Name Thru 2_PushA 2_PushB 2_PushC 2_HeavyA 2_HeavyB 2_HeavyC 3_PushA 3_PushB Time Signature 2 2 2 2 2 2 3 3 No. 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 Name 3_PushC 3_HeavyA 3_HeavyB 3_HeavyC 4_PushA 4_PushB 4_PushC 4_HeavyA Time Signature 3 3 3 3 4 4 4 4 No. 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 Name 4_HeavyB 4_HeavyC 5_PushA 5_PushB 5_PushC 5_HeavyA 5_HeavyB 5_HeavyC ● Select the Dynamics Template Use the SUB MENU [s] and [t] buttons to select the “Dynamics” function from within the GROOVE & DYNAMICS menu. The name of the currently selected Dynamics Template will appear on the right of the top line of the display. Dynamics : Thru Referring to the “Dynamics Template List” below, use the [+], [–] buttons or the Data Dial to select one of the 17 template types. Dynamics Template List The templates in this list strengthen or weaken the notes on a specific timing. The stress degree can be determined by changing the Dynamics Rate. Name: Indicates each template name. No.1"Thru” (No.1) adds no effect as its name implies. The templates from No.7 to No.17 are programmed to put an emphasis on a specific timing. 38 Time Signature 4 4 5 5 5 5 5 5 ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢ ,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,, QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ ,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,, QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢ Auto Accompaniment No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 Name Thru 8beat_on 8beat_off 16beat_on 16beat_off 2nd Beat_Off Dance Disco Techno Fusion Reggae BossaNova Tango Rhumba Bass Rhumba Chord Latin Samba ● Set the Dynamics Rate The Dynamics Rate sets the amount of the Dynamics template applied to the PSR730/630 within the range, 0-100%. Use the SUB MENU [s] and [t] buttons to select the “DynamcsRate” function from within the GROOVE & DYNAMICS menu. The currently set Dynamics Rate value will appear on the right of the top line of the display. DynamcsR ate:100% Use the [1]–[0] number buttons, the [+], [–] buttons or the Data Dial to set the Dynamics Rate value within a range of 0-100%. ● Set the Expand Rate The Expand Rate widens or narrows the dynamic range of the Accompaniment within the range, 0-100 (original)-400%. Use the SUB MENU [s] and [t] buttons to select the “ExpandRate” function from within the GROOVE & DYNAMICS menu. The currently set Expand Rate value will appear on the right of the top line of the display. ExpandRa te: 100% Use the [1]–[0] number buttons, the [+], [–] buttons or the Data Dial to set the Expand Rate value within a range of 0-400%. • Though Expand Rate can be adjusted by a rate of 1 in 100, the rate actually applied will be rounded down to nearest 10. For example, the rates 1 through 9 result in 0, no effect. The rates 29 and 53 result in 20 and 50, respectively. When using the Registration Memory function, the result rate will be memorized. 39 ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢ ,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,, QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ ,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,, QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢ Auto Accompaniment ● Set the Boost Rate The Boost Rate strengthens or weakens the Accompaniment by offsetting the velocity value of the Style data, within the range, 0-100 (original)-400%. Use the SUB MENU [s] and [t] buttons to select the “BoostRate” function from within the GROOVE & DYNAMICS menu. The currently set Boost Rate value will appear on the right of the top line of the display. BoostRat e: 100% Use the [1]–[0] number buttons, the [+], [–] buttons or the Data Dial to set the Boost Rate value within a range of 0-400%. • You can jump directly to the “BeatGroove” sub menu of the GROOVE & DYNAMICS menu (Beat Groove Template selection screen) by pressing and holding the GROOVE & DYNAMICS button for a few seconds. • User settings will be lost when another accompaniment style is selected. To be able to recall your original settings anytime, save them using the Registration Memory function (page 57). • Though Boost Rate can be adjusted by a rate of 1 in 100, the rate actually applied will be rounded down to nearest 10. For example, the rates 1 through 9 result in 0, no effect. The rates 29 and 53 result in 20 and 50, respectively. When using the Registration Memory function, the result rate will be memorized. One Touch Setting The PSR-730/630’s 100 internal styles each have four recommended “panel setups” that can be instantly selected via the [ONE TOUCH SETTING] and REGISTRATION MEMORY [1] … [4] buttons. The One Touch Setting feature automatically sets the following parameters: ● One Touch Setting Parameter List • R1 Voice (Voice number, volume, octave, pan, reverb depth, chorus depth, DSP depth) • Dual Voice ON/OFF • R2 Voice (Voice number, volume, octave, pan, reverb depth, chorus depth, DSP depth) 40 • Auto Accompaniment=ON • Main A/B section • Accompaniment Track=ON • Synchro start=ON • Accompaniment volume=100 • Harmony ON/OFF, type, volume • Split Voice ON/OFF • Reverb ON/OFF • L Voice (Voice number, volume, octave, pan, reverb depth, chorus depth, DSP depth) • Chorus ON/OFF • Split Point : Split Voice=54 : Auto Accompaniment=54 • Multi Pad Set number • DSP ON/OFF, type, variation ON/OFF • Chord Match ON/OFF=Default (Multi Pad1…4) ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢ ,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,, QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ ,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,, QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢ Auto Accompaniment 1 Select a Style Select the STYLE menu and select an accompaniment style as described on page 22. 2 Press the [ONE TOUCH SETTING] Button Press the [ONE TOUCH SETTING] button. The ONE TOUCH SETTING and REGIST [1] icons will appear in the display, and the One Touch Setting type 1 panel settings will be recalled. At the same, Auto Accompaniment will automatically be turned on if it was off, and the Sync Start mode will be engaged. ONE TOUCH SETTING A B ONE TOUCH SETTING REPEAT 1 2 3 4 FREEZE REGISTRATION MEMORY 3 Select a ONE TOUCH SETTING Type, as Required If you want to select a different REGISTRATION MEMORY, use the REGISTRATION MEMORY buttons to select the desired ONE TOUCH SETTING type. The corresponding number will appear in the display, and all setting will change according to the recalled data. REGISTRATION MEMORY 1 2 3 A 4 B ONE TOUCH SETTING REPEAT 1 2 3 4 FREEZE REGISTRATION MEMORY 4 Turn ONE TOUCH SETTING Off When Done Press the [ONE TOUCH SETTING] button again and the ONE TOUCH SETTING icon in the display will disappear and the One Touch Setting feature will turn off. • If the style is changed when One Touch Setting is on, the panel settings appropriate to the selected style that have the same One Touch Setting number will immediately be set. • You can also try changing the established One Touch Setting data, making your own original settings. To be able to recall your original settings anytime, save them using the Registration Memory function (page 57). • If you press ONE TOUCH SETTING buttons [1]–[4] when a user style is selected, the voice data won’t be changed, but the style data will change to the user style settings (values). 41 ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢ ,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,, QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ Digital Effects ,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,, QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢ With the digital effects built into the PSR-730/630 you can add ambiance and depth to your music in a variety of ways—such as adding reverb that makes you sound like you are playing in a concert hall or adding harmony notes for a full, rich sound With the PSR-730, you can take advantage of even more sophisticated features like the Multi Effect function that lets apply several effects together or the Digital Equalizer that lets you adjust volume for each of 5 frequency bands. Digital Effects REVERB Button REVERB CHORUS Button CHORUS DSP Button DSP You can create a reverb effect that makes you sound like you are playing in places like a concert hall, or live in a club. You can add a chorus effect that makes your playing sound as though multiple parts were being played together at the same time. In addition to the reverb and chorus types, the effects usually used to a specific part, such as the distortion and tremolo, can be selected. VARIATION PSR-730 MULTI-EFFECT Button MULTI EFFECT You can apply reverb, chorus or DSP effects to particular parts, or combine them together. PSR-730 DIGITAL EQ Button DIGITAL EQ HARMONY Button HARMONY You can apply volume adjustments to the output of the PSR-730, to five different frequency bands, enhancing the impression your music gives. You can add a variety of harmony notes to the R1 voice, or to your playing in the right-hand section, as well as adding an tremolo or other effect. • For details about using Digital Effects (Reverb, Chorus, DSP, Multi-Effect, Digital Equalizer) see page 143. 42 ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢ ,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,, QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ ,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,, QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢ Digital Effects Reverb If you press the [REVERB] button, the REVERB icon will light up, and the Reverb effect will be turned on. After setting the Reverb type, the effect will be applied to the R1 voice from the keyboard. REVERB REVERB • The REVERB ON/OFF status will be set automatically according to the selected R1 panel voice. VARIATION CHORUS DSP ■ Selecting a Reverb Type Select one of the 13 Reverb types. Use the MENU [▲] and [▼] buttons to move the triangular indicator in the display next to “DIGITAL EFFECT”. MENU MIDI DIGITAL EFFECT • You can also jump directly to the DIGITAL EFFECT REVERB TYPE function by pressing and holding the [REVERB] button for a few seconds. OVERALL GROOVE&DYNAMICS Then use the SUB MENU [▲] and [▼] buttons to select “Reverb”. The name of the currently selected Reverb type will appear on the right of the top line of the display. Referring to the Reverb Type List on page 145, use the [–] and [+] buttons, [1]–[0] number buttons, or Data Dial to select the desired Reverb effect from 1-13. SUB MENU Reverb: 8 Roo m 4 ■ Reverb Return Level The Rev.Return (Reverb Return Level) parameter sets the amount of reverb effect returned from the reverb effect stage, thus making it possible to adjust the degree of reverb effect applied to the overall sound. • When you select a different Style, the appropriate Reverb type will be selected accordingly. Some of the Styles contain Reverb types which cannot be selected on the PSR730/630. In this case “XG Reverb” will be displayed when you select the SUB MENU Reverb of the DIGITAL EFFECT. • If you don’t want to apply the Reverb effect to Styles or Songs, select “13: OFF” from the Reverb types, or set the Reverb Return Level to [0]. In either case no Reverb will be applied to the entire system. If you use the Revoice function, you can set the Reverb Depth for each track of the Style independently (see page 110). Use the MENU [▲] and [▼] buttons to move the triangular indicator in the display next to “DIGITAL EFFECT”, then use the SUB MENU [▲] and [▼] buttons to select “Rev.Return”. The currently set return level will be displayed on the right of the top line of the display. Rev.Retu rn: 64 Use the [–] and [+] buttons, the [1]–[0] number buttons, or Data Dial to set the desired reverb return level (the current return level value appears to the right of “Rev.Return” on the display). The range is from “0” to “127”. The higher the value the greater the return level. 43 ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢ ,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,, QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ ,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,, QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢ Digital Effects Chorus If you press the [CHORUS] button, the CHORUS icon will light up, and the Chorus effect will be turned on. After setting the Chorus type, the effect will be applied to the R1 voice from the keyboard. • The CHORUS ON/OFF status will be set automatically according to the selected R1 panel voice. CHORUS REVERB CHORUS VARIATION DSP ■ Selecting a Chorus Type Select one of the 10 Chorus types. Use the MENU [▲] and [▼] buttons to move the triangular indicator in the display next to “DIGITAL EFFECT”. MENU MIDI DIGITAL EFFECT OVERALL GROOVE&DYNAMICS Then use the SUB MENU [▲] and [▼] buttons to select “Chorus”. The name of the currently selected Chorus type will appear on the right of the top line of the display. Referring to the Chorus Type List on page 145, use the [–] and [+] buttons, the [1]–[0] number buttons, or Data Dial to select the desired Chorus effect from 1-10. SUB MENU Chorus: 1 Cho rus 1 ■ Chorus Return Level The Cho.Return (Chorus Return Level) parameter sets the amount of chorus effect returned from the chorus effect stage, thus making it possible to adjust the degree of chorus effect applied to the overall sound. Use the MENU [▲] and [▼] buttons to move the triangular indicator in the display next to “DIGITAL EFFECT”, then use the SUB MENU [▲] and [▼] buttons to select “Cho.Return”. Cho.Retu rn: 64 Use the [–] and [+] buttons, the [1]–[0] number buttons, or Data Dial to set the desired chorus return level (the current return level value appears to the right of “Cho.Return” on the display). The range is from “0” to “127”. The higher the value the greater the return level. 44 • You can also jump directly to the DIGITAL EFFECT Chorus function by pressing and holding the [CHORUS] button for a few seconds. • When you select a different Style, the appropriate Chorus type will be selected accordingly. Some of the Styles contain Chorus types which cannot be selected on the PSR-730/630. In this case “XG Chorus” will be displayed when you select the SUB MENU Chorus of the DIGITAL EFFECT. • If you don’t want to apply the Chorus effect to Styles or Songs, select “10: OFF” from the Chorus types, or set the Chorus Return Level to [0]. In either case no Chorus will be applied to the entire system. If you use the Revoice function, you can set the Chorus Depth for each track of the Style independently (see page 110). ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢ ,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,, QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ ,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,, QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢ Digital Effects DSP If you press the [DSP] button, the DSP icon will light up, and the DSP effect will be turned on. After setting the DSP type, the effect will be applied when you play the R1, R2 and L voice from the keyboard. DSP VARIATION REVERB CHORUS VARIATION DSP ■ Select the DSP Type The PSR-730/630 features an extensive range of 46 DSP (Digital Signal Processor) effects. There are two types of digital effects, system effects and insertion effects. The illustration below will give you an idea of how DSP effects work, centering on the mixer. Insertion Effect • The DSP effect and variation settings may change according to the selected R1 panel voice. System Effect SEND • You can also jump directly to the DIGITAL EFFECT DSP function by pressing and holding the [DSP] button for a few seconds. RETURN (Depth) Amp Mixer Speaker ● System Effect: Applies to all of the parts input to the mixer. You can set the DSP Depth and DSP Return Level. The System Effect includes Reverb and Chorus types. ● Insertion Effect: Applies only to a designated part before inputting the signal to the mixer. You can effectively use the digital effects by applying the effect to the specific part. With the Insertion Effect, you can only designate the DSP Depth. The Insertion Effect includes Distortion and Tremolo. • DSP Depth cannot be modified for some Insertion effects. In this case the display shows “- - -”, indicating that it’s not accessible. (See page 143, “About Digital Effects” and the Type List) 45 ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢ ,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,, QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ ,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,, QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢ Digital Effects Use the MENU [▲] and [▼] buttons to move the triangular indicator in the display next to “DIGITAL EFFECT”. Then use the SUB MENU [▲] and [▼] buttons to select “DSP”. After a few seconds the name of the currently selected DSP effect will appear on the right of the top line of the display. SUB MENU DSP: 10 Sta ge 2 Referring to the DSP Type List on page 145, use the [–] and [+] buttons, the [1]– [0] number buttons, or Data Dial to select the desired DSP effect from 1-46 For each DSP type, there is a variation. Pressing the DSP VARIATION button will cause the VARIATION icon to display, and the variation type will be applied. DSP VARIATION REVERB CHORUS VARIATION DSP ■ DSP Return Level The DSP Return (DSP Return Level) parameter sets the amount of DSP effect returned from the DSP effect stage, thus making it possible to adjust the degree of DSP effect applied to the overall sound. Use the MENU [▲] and [▼] buttons to move the triangular indicator in the display next to “DIGITAL EFFECT”, then use the SUB MENU [▲] and [▼] buttons to select “DSP Return” (the current return level value appears to the right of “DSP Return” on the display). DSP Retu rn: 64 Use the [–] and [+] buttons, the [1]–[0]number buttons, or Data Dial to set the desired DSP return level. The range is from “0” to “127”. The higher the value the greater the return level. 46 • If DSP Insertion Effect is selected (page 145), you won’t be able to set the DSP Return Level. In this case, “- - -” will be shown on the display. • When the Voice Set function is ON (page 116), selecting the panel voice for the R1 voice will reset the DSP Return level to 64 (fixed at 64). ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢ ,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,, QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ ,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,, QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢ Digital Effects Harmony If you press the [HARMONY] button, the HARMONY icon will light up, and the Harmony effect will be turned on. After setting the Harmony type, it will be applied to the R1 voice. HARMONY CHORUS VARIATION DSP HARMONY The Harmonies except for the types 6, 7 and 9 are applied to the R1 voice according to the chords detected in the Accompaniment section. • Harmony can not be turned on when a drum kit is selected for the R1 voice. • Harmony can not be turned on when the Full Keyboard Auto accompaniment fingering mode is selected even if Auto Accompaniment is on. Harmony will be automatically turned off if the Full Keyboard fingering mode is selected while the Harmony effect is on. • If a drum kit voice is selected for R1 when Harmony is turned on, Harmony will be automatically be turned off. ■ Selecting a Harmony Type Select one of the 16 Harmony types. There are various harmony effects, depending on the Harmony type, with some adding a number of higher notes to the note of the pressed key, and some adding a number of lower notes. Use the MENU [▲] and [▼] buttons to move the triangular indicator in the display next to “DIGITAL EFFECT”. MENU MIDI DIGITAL EFFECT OVERALL • You can also jump directly to the DIGITAL EFFECT HARMONY TYPE function by pressing and holding the [HARMONY] button for a few seconds. GROOVE&DYNAMICS Then use the SUB MENU [▲] and [▼] buttons to select “Harmony”. The name of the currently selected Harmony type will appear on the right of the top line of the display. • When the Voice Set function is ON (see page 116), the HARMONY type may change according to the selected R1 panel voice. SUB MENU Harmony: 1 Due t Referring to the Harmony Type List on page 147, use the [–] and [+] buttons, the [1]–[0] number buttons, or Data Dial to select the desired Harmony effect from 116. 47 ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢ ,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,, QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ ,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,, QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢ Digital Effects ■ Adjusting the Harmony Volume The volume of the harmony sound in relation to the keyboard sound can be adjusted for Harmony types 1 through 16 as follows: Use the MENU [▲] and [▼] buttons to move the triangular indicator in the display next to “DIGITAL EFFECT”, then use the SUB MENU [▲] and [▼] buttons to select “Harm.Vol”. The current harmony volume setting will appear to the right of “Harm.Vol” on the display. Harm.Vol : 127 Use the [–] and [+] buttons, the [1]–[0] number buttons, or Data Dial to adjust the harmony volume as required. The range is from “0” to “127”. • When the Voice Set function is ON (see page 116), the Harmony Volume may change according to the selected R1 panel voice. • Changing the volume of the harmony sound may not produce audible effect for some R1 voices (ex. organ sounds) when you select Harmony types 1 through 6. Multi Effect (PSR-730) Multi Effect allows you to apply three types of effects (reverb, chorus and DSP) more powerfully and effectively. ■ How Multi Effect Works With Multi Effect, you can combine 2 effects (Effect 1/2) and apply them to the output from the keyboard (R1/R2/L parts). There are 2 ways to combine the effects; in series or in parallel. Example 1) Applying Effects 1 and 2 to separate parts (parallel) Part Effect1 Right1 Dist. Hard Effect1 In Effect1 Part Effect 2 Left Rotary SP.4 Effect2 In Effect2 Example 2) Applying Effects 1 and 2 to a single part (series) Part Effect1 Right1 Auto Pan Effect1 In Effect1 Effect1 Auto Wah Effect2 In Effect2 Effect 2 48 • By adding Multi-Effect to Reverb, Chorus and DSP, the PSR730 can have up to 5 system effects. • Since Multi-Effect is installed closer to the tone generator than Reverb, Chorus or DSP, it can function as an insertion effect. See page 143, “About Digital Effects.” ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢ ,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,, QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ ,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,, QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢ Digital Effects Applying Multi Effect (PSR-730) Pressing the [MULTI EFFECT] button will cause the Multi Effect icon to light on the display. After making part settings for Effect 1/2 and type settings, the Multi Effect will be applied. MULTI EFFECT DIGITAL EQ • The MULTI EFFECT ON/OFF status will be set automatically according to the selected R1 panel voice. • Some of the song files may contain Multi Effect settings. When you play back such songs, Multi Effect button on the panel will automatically be turned off. MULTI EFFECT ■ Setting Parts for Effect 1/2 Select a part each for Effect 1 and Effect 2 ● Effect 1 ...... Select Right 1 (R1 part), Right 2 (R2 part), Left (L part) . ● Effect 2 ...... Right 1 (R1 part), Right 2 (R2 part), Left (L part) or Effect 1 (Effect 1 in series). Use the MENU [▲] and [▼] buttons to move the triangular indicator in the display next to “DIGITAL EFFECT”. MENU MIDI DIGITAL EFFECT OVERALL GROOVE&DYNAMICS Then use the SUB MENU [▲] and [▼] buttons to select “Effect1 In” or “Effect2 In”. The name of the currently selected part will appear on the right of the top line of the display. Use the [–] and [+] buttons or Data Dial to select the part you want to apply the effect to. Effect1 In; Rig ht 1 Effect2 In; Lef t • You can jump directly to the “Effect1 IN” sub menu of the DIGITAL EFFECTS menu by pressing and holding the MULTI-EFFECT button for a few seconds. • The Effect 1/2 part settings may automatically change according to the selected R1 panel voice. • “- - -” may appear on the display if you play back the songs containing Multi Effect settings. 49 ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢ ,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,, QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ ,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,, QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢ Digital Effects ■ Select the Effect Type for Effect 1/2 Select one of the 42 effect types for Effect 1 and Effect 2 Use the MENU [▼] and [▲] buttons to move the triangular indicator in the display next to “DIGITAL EFFECT”. The icon for “DIGITAL EFFECT” will light. Then use the SUB MENU [▼] and [▲] buttons to select “Effect1” or “Effect2”. The name of the currently selected type will appear on the right of the top line of the display. Referring to the Multi-Effect Type List on page 146, use the [–] and [+] buttons, [1]– [0] number buttons, or Data Dial to select the desired effect type. Effect1: 01 Hal l 1 Effect2: 18 Fla nger 1 • The Effect 1/2 type settings may automatically change when a panel voice is selected for R1. • “** XG Ins Eff” may appear on the display if you play back the songs containing Multi Effect settings. ■ Adjust the Dry/Wet Settings for Effect 1/2 Set the Dry/Wet settings for Effect 1 and Effect 2 Dry refers to an original sound that has no effects applied to it, while Wet means that effects are applied to a sound. Dry/Wet is a setting value that regulates the level of effects that are applied. ● Dry/Wet [0] ............ Only dry sound is output. ● Dry/Wet [64] ......... Output with the same amount of the dry/wet sounds. ● Dry/Wet [127] ....... Only wet sound is output. Use the MENU [▼] and [▲] buttons to move the triangular indicator in the display next to “DIGITAL EFFECT”. The icon for “DIGITAL EFFECT” will light. Then use the SUB MENU [▼] and [▲] buttons to select “Eff1 Dry/Wet” or “Eff2 Dry/Wet”. The currently set Dry/Wet value will appear on the right of the top line of the display. Use the [–] and [+] buttons, the [1]–[0] number buttons, or Data Dial to select the Dry/Wet value within a range of 0-127. Eff1Dry/ Wet: 64 Eff2Dry/ Wet: 48 50 • The dry/wet settings cannot be done for some of the Effect 1/2 types. In that case, “- -” will be displayed. • The Dry/Wet settings for Effect 1/2 may automatically change when a panel voice is selected for R1. ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢ ,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,, QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ ,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,, QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢ Digital Effects The Digital Equalizer (PSR-730) Usually an equalizer is used to correct the sound output from amps or speakers to match the special character of the room. The sound is divided into several frequency bands, then by raising or lowering the level for each band, the correction is made. Adjusting the sound you play according to the genre—classical music more refined, pops music more crisp, and rock music more dynamic—can also serve to draw out the special characteristics of the music and make your performance more enjoyable. The PSR-730 possesses a high grade 5 band digital equalizer function. With this function, a final effect—tone control—can be added to the output of your instrument. Example) 04 (Bright) +12 0 -12 +7 LowGain -2 LowMidGain 0 MidGain +2 HighMidGain +7 HighGain Frequency Bands (5 bands) LowGain 80 Hz LowMidGain 500 Hz MidGain 1.0 kHz HighMidGain 4.0 kHz HighGain 8.0 kHz • The range of each frequency band can be changed by transmitting the system exclusive message from an external MIDI device to the PSR-730/630 (see page 156). The digital equalizer adjusts the gain (amplitude change) in each of the 5 frequency bands within a range of -12 to 0 to +12 decibels [dB]. Try listening to each of the five preset equalizer settings and compare them. Using the Digital Equalizer (PSR-730) If you press the [DIGITAL EQ] button, the DIGITAL EQ icon will light up, and the Digital EQ effect will be turned on. After setting the Digital EQ type, the equalizer effect will be applied to the overall output of the PSR-730. DIGITAL EQ DIGITAL EQ MULTI EFFECT 51 ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢ ,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,, QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ ,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,, QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢ Digital Effects ■ Selecting a Digital EQ Type. Select one of the 5 Digital EQ types. Use the MENU [▼] and [▲] buttons to move the triangular indicator in the display next to “DIGITAL EFFECT”. MENU MIDI DIGITAL EFFECT OVERALL GROOVE&DYNAMICS Then use the SUB MENU [▼] and [▲] buttons to select “EQ Type”. The name of the currently selected Digital EQ type will appear on the right of the top line of the display. Referring to the Equalizer Type List below, use the [–] and [+] buttons, the [1]–[5] number buttons, or Data Dial to select the desired equalizer type. SUB MENU EQ Type: 04 Bri ght ● Equalizer Type List 01 Standard +12 0 -12 +3 LowGain 0 LowMidGain -1 MidGain 0 HighMidGain +5 HighGain +7 LowGain -2 LowMidGain -1 MidGain +2 HighMidGain +7 HighGain +2 LowGain +2 LowMidGain -2 MidGain -5 HighMidGain 0 HighGain +7 LowGain -2 LowMidGain 0 MidGain +2 HighMidGain +7 HighGain -3 LowMidGain +10 MidGain -2 HighMidGain 02 Disco +12 0 -12 03 Mild +12 0 -12 04 Bright +12 0 -12 05 Lo Fi +12 0 -12 -12 LowGain 52 -10 HighGain • You can jump directly to the “Digital EQ” sub menu of the DIGITAL EFFECTS menu by pressing and holding the DIGITAL EQ button for a few seconds. ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢ ,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,, QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ ,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,, QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢ Digital Effects ■ Setting the Gain (User Setting) You can change the settings for any of the 5 preset equalizer types, adjusting the output to meet your own needs. Select the equalizer type you wish to use as a base for your settings, then use the SUB MENU [▼] and [▲] buttons to select “LowGain”.The current LowGain value for the type you selected will be shown on the right of the upper line of the display. LowGain: + 4 Use the [–] and [+] buttons, the [1]–[0] number buttons, or Data Dial to set the LowGain amplitude change within a range of -12 to 0 to +12 decibels [dB]. Switch to each of the other bands: “LowMidGain,” “MidGain,” “HighMidGain,” and “HighGain”, and set them in the same way as the “LowGain.” After finishing the gain settings, use the SUB MENU [▼] and [▲] buttons to select “EQ Type”. “** User” will appear on the right of the top line of the display. EQ Type: ** Use r 53 ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢ ,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,, QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ The Pitch Bend Wheel ,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,, QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢ Use the PSR-730/630 pitch bend wheel to bend notes up (roll the wheel away from you) or down (roll the wheel toward you) while playing the keyboard. The pitch bend wheel is selfcentering and will automatically return to nornal pitch when released. PITCH BEND Setting the Pitch Bend Range The maximum pitch bend range can be set via the PITCH BEND RANGE function in the OVERALL function group. Use the MENU [▼] and [▲] buttons to move the triangular indicator in the display next to “OVERALL”. MENU MIDI DIGITAL EFFECT OVERALL GROOVE&DYNAMICS Then use the SUB MENU [▼] and [▲] buttons to select “PB Range”. The current pitch bend range setting will appear to the right of the function name on the top line of the display. Use the [–] and [+] buttons, the [1]–[0] number buttons, or Data Dial to set the pitch bend range from “01” to “12” as required. Each increment corresponds to one semitone. PB Range : 54 2 • When the Voice Set function is ON (page 116), the Pitch Bend Range will be changed according to the selected R1 panel voice. • The default pitch bend range can be instantly recalled by pressing the [+] and [–] buttons simultaneously. ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢ ,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,, QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ The Modulation Wheel ,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,, QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢ (PSR-730) The Modulation function applies a vibrato effect to notes played on the keyboard (R1, R2, L voices). Rolling the MODULATION wheel all the way towards yourself minimizes the depth of the effect, while rotating it away from yourself increases it. MODULATION MAX MIN • In order to avoid accidentally applying modulation when you don’t intend to, set the depth at its minimum setting. • You can also assign other functions to the MODULATION Wheel (see below). Changing the Modulation Wheel Function It’s possible to change the effect that is applied when you rotate the MODULATION Wheel. You can select from 3 types: modulation, brightness or resonance ● Modulation ........... Applies vibrato effects to the voices from the keyboard. ● Brightness ........... Adjusts the brightness of the R1 voice played on the keyboard. Increasing the depth makes the sound brighter, while decreasing it makes it softer. ● Resonance ........... Adds resonance to the R1 voices played on the keyboard. Use the MENU [▼] and [▲] buttons to move the triangular indicator in the display next to “OVERALL”. Then use the SUB MENU [▼] and [▲] buttons to select “ModWheel”. The effect currently set for the modulation wheel will appear to the right of the top line of the display. ModWheel : Modulation Referring to the information above, use the [–] and [+] buttons or the Data Dial to select one of the 3 effects. 55 ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢ ,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,, QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ Transpose ,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,, QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢ This functions allow the overall pitch of the PSR-730/630 to be transposed up or down by a maximum of one octave in semitone increments. Setting Transposition Use the TRANSPOSE [▼] and [▲] buttons to set the desired degree of transposition. Press either button briefly to decrement or increment by one, or hold for continuous decrementing or incrementing. The current transpose value will appear on the top line of the display for a few seconds whenever one of the TRANSPOSE buttons is pressed — during this time the [–] and [+] buttons, number buttons, or data dial can also be used to set the transpose value (the transpose value also appears continuously above “TRANSPOSE” in the display). TRANSPOSE Transpos e: 001 STYLE 116 TEMPO 000 TRANSPOSE A 100 B REPEAT 0 ONE TOUCH SETTING ACMP/SONG VOLUME The transpose range is from –12 to +12. Each step corresponds to one semitone, allowing a maximum upward or downward transposition of 1-octave. A setting of “0” produces the normal pitch. 56 • The Transpose function cannot be applied when a drum kit is the selected voice (page 19). • Press the TRANSPOSE [▼ ] and [▲] buttons simultaneously to instantly reset the transpose value to “0”. • The new TRANSPOSE value will take effect from the next key played. • When the Transpose value is shown at the top of the display, you can use the [1]–[0] number keys, the [+],[–] buttons or the Data Dial to change it. ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢ ,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,, QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ Registration Memory ,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,, QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢ The PSR-730/630 Registration Memory feature can be used to memorize 128 complete control-panel setups (32 banks, 4 setups each) that you can recall whenever needed. • The PSR-730/630’s initial Registration Memory [1]–[4] settings (when it shipped from the factory) are the same panel settings as when the power switch is first turned on. Registering the Panel Settings 1 Set Up the Controls as Required Make the desired control settings. The following settings are memorized by the Registration Memory function: ● Data Stored By the Registration Memory VOICE PARAMETERS • R1 Voice (Voice number, volume, octave, pan, reverb depth, chorus depth, DSP depth) • Dual Voice ON/OFF • R2 Voice (Voice number, volume, octave, pan, reverb depth, chorus depth, DSP depth) • Split Voice ON/OFF • L Voice (Voice number, volume, octave, pan, reverb depth, chorus depth, DSP depth) • Pedal 1 function • Pedal 2 function ACCOMPANIMENT PARAMETERS • • • • • • • • • • • Split Point (Split Voice) Touch Sensitivity Reverb ON/OFF Chorus ON/OFF DSP ON/OFF, variation ON/OFF DSP type Multi Effect (ON/OFF, Effect 1/2: part, type, dry/ wet) Harmony ON/OFF, type, volume Pitch bend range Modulation wheel function Scale Tuning • • • • • • • • • Auto Accompaniment ON/OFF Fingering mode Tempo Split point (Auto Accompaniment) Accompaniment volume Track data (Track ON/OFF, voice, volume, pan, reverb depth, chorus depth) Accompaniment section (Main A/B) Multi Pad Set number Chord Match ON/OFF (Multi Pad1…4) • • • • Transpose Reverb type Chorus type Groove & Dynamics (ON/ OFF, templates, rates) • Style number (Style names [page 104] for the user styles) 2 Select a Registration Bank (if necessary) Use the MENU [▲] and [▼] buttons to move the triangular indicator next to “REGIST MEMORY “ in the menu list to the left of the display — the currently selected registration bank number and name will appear on the top line of the display. Then use the [–] and [+] buttons, [1]–[0] number buttons, or Data Dial to select the desired bank (1 through 32). Bank 01: • Press and hold the REGISTRATION MEMORY [MEMORY] button for a few seconds to go directly to the REGIST MEMORY display. Reg ist1 57 ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢ ,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,, QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ ,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,, QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢ Registration Memory On the PSR-730, there are BANK [▼] and [▲] buttons. Pressing these buttons will directly bring up the registration bank sub menu (example: Bank 1) of the “Regist Memory”, main menu item, and all you have to do is add the correct number. BANK REGISTRATION MEMORY MEMORY 1 3 Register the Settings While holding the [MEMORY] button, press one of the REGISTRATION MEMORY buttons — [1] through [4]. The corresponding REGISTRATION MEMORY number will appear below “REGISTRATION” in the display. REGISTRATION MEMORY MEMORY 1 2 3 Bank 01: 4 Reg ist1 A B ONE TOUCH SETTING REPEAT 1 2 3 4 FREEZE REGISTRATION MEMORY Naming the Registration Banks You can give your own names (up to 8 characters) to the registration banks where you have stored settings. After recalling the registration settings you wish to name, use the MENU [▲] and [▼] buttons to move the triangular indicator next to “REGIST MEMORY“ in the menu list to the left of the display. Then use the SUB MENU [▲] and [▼] buttons to select “Reg Naming”. The current name will appear on the top right of the display. Reg Nami ng: Reg ist1 58 • Any data that was previously recorded in the Registration Memory location you selected will be erased and replaced by the new settings. • The Registration Memory contents will be retained even after turning the power off. See page 152 for the details. ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢ ,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,, QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ ,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,, QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢ Registration Memory Referring to the information below, use the [1]–[0] number buttons, the [+], [–] buttons or the Data Dial to enter the name. [+].................. Select letter (cursor moves right) [–] .................. Select letter (cursor moves left) Dial ............... Change Character [1]–[0] ........... ”Jump” entry [Character List] • When entering letters with the Dial 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 • Lower case letters can’t be entered with the naming function. A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z - – • When doing “jump” entry with the [1]–[0] number buttons [1] .......... 1 A B C [2] .......... 2 D E F [3] .......... 3 G H I [4] .......... 4 J K L [5] .......... 5 M N O [6] .......... 6 P Q R [7] .......... 7 S T U [8] .......... 8 V W X [9] .......... 9 Y Z @ [0] .......... 0 - – R e g N a m i n g : L I V E 01 The same method can be used to give your own names to user songs (page 94), user pads (page 109), or user styles (page 104). 59 ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢ ,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,, QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ ,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,, QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢ Registration Memory Recall the Registered Panel Settings Simply select the appropriate bank as described above, then press the desired REGISTRATION MEMORY button at any time to recall the memorized settings. The corresponding Registration Memory number will appear above “REGISTRATION” in the display, and the appropriate setting changes will appear in the display. • When power is turned on, or the bank is changed, all of the numbers in the REGISTRATION MEMORY section of the display will be blank. REGISTRATION MEMORY 1 2 3 Bank 03: • Registration data cannot be recalled when the One Touch Setting function is on. 4 Reg ist3 A B ONE TOUCH SETTING REPEAT 1 2 3 4 FREEZE REGISTRATION MEMORY The Accompanient Freeze Function When the FREEZE function is engaged, the accompaniment parameters listed above will not be changed when a REGISTRATION MEMORY is recalled. This allows you to recall different REGISTRATION MEMORY settings while using Auto Accompaniment, without suddenly disturbing the flow of the accompaniment. The FREEZE function is turned on and off by pressing the [FREEZE] button. The “FREEZE” icon appears in the display when it is turned on. EMORY A 3 4 FREEZE B ONE TOUCH SETTING REPEAT 1 2 3 4 FREEZE REGISTRATION MEMORY 60 • FREEZE remains on even if a different registration bank is selected. • The Freeze function will automatically be turned on when one of the following modes, Song, Record or Style Revoice, is engaged. ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢ ,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,, QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ The Multi Pads ,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,, QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢ The PSR-730/630 MULTI PADS can be used to play a number of short pre-recorded rhythmic and melodic sequences that can be used to add impact and variety to your keyboard performances.You can also record your own MULTI PAD phrases as described in “MULTI PAD Recording” on page 106. Some pad phrases simply play back as programmed, while others are “chord match” types which, if the CHORD MATCH function is turned on, are automatically transposed to match chords played using the PSR-730/630 Auto Accompaniment feature. Selecting a MULTI PAD Set The PSR-730/630 has 36 multi pad sets, each containing a complete set of 4 MULTI PAD phrases — 144 phrases in all. Before using the MULTI PADS, select the MULTI PAD set containing the phrases you want to use as follows: 1 Select the Multi Pad Function To select a multi pad set first use the MENU [▲] and [▼] buttons to select the MULTI PAD function so that the triangular indicator in the display appears next to “MULTI PAD” to the left of the display. SUB MENU MENU DISK MULTI PAD REGIST MEMORY MENU MIDI DIGITAL EFFECT OVERALL GROOVE&DYNAMICS 2 Select a Multi Pad Set Number If necessary use the SUB MENU [▲] and [▼] buttons so that the name of the currently selected MULTI PAD set appears on the display (see list on page 62), then use the [–] and [+], number buttons, or data dial to select the MULTI PAD set you want to use. Bank 01: Fan fare1 • Press and hold the MULTI PAD [STOP] button for a few seconds to go directly to the MULTI PAD SET display. 61 ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢ ,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,, QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ ,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,, QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢ The Multi Pads Playing the MULTI PADs Simply tap any of the MULTI PADs at any time to play back the corresponding phrase at the currently set tempo. MULTI PAD playback begins as soon as the button is pressed. You can even play two, three, or four MULTI PADs at the same time. Also, you can create “retriggered sample” effects by repeatedly pressing a pad before its contents are completely played back. STOP 1 2 3 4 • Pressing the pad during its playback will stop playing and begin playing from the top again. MULTI PAD BEAT 1 2 3 4 MULTI PAD The MULTI PAD voices are indepedent from the voices you have currently selected for keyboard performance. You could, for example, play piano on the keyboard while a MULTI PAD plays a brass chord stab. When the CHORD MATCH function (page 63) for a pad is turned on, the corresponding phrase will be automatically transposed to match chords played using the PSR-730/630 Auto-accompaniment feature. MULTI PAD playback can be terminated by pressing the MULTI PAD [STOP] button. STOP 1 2 3 4 MULTI PAD ● The Multi Pad Sets Chord Match Set 62 Chord Match Pad 1 Pad 2 Pad 3 Pad 4 Pad 1 Pad 2 Pad 3 Pad 4 1 Fanfare1 O O O – 19 Classic O O O O 2 Fanfare2 O O O – 20 Jingle O O O O 3 Brassy1 O O O O 21 Horror SE – – – – 4 Brassy2 O O O O 22 Racing SE – – – – 5 Synth Brass O O O O 23 Stormy SE – – – – 6 Guitar Play1 O O O O 24 Water SE – – – – 7 Guitar Play2 O O O O 25 Animal SE – – – – 8 Guitar Play3 O O O O 26 Haha SE – – – – 9 Guitar Play4 O O O O 27 Rock Kit – – – – 10 Techno Synth1 O O O O 28 Techno Kit – – – – 11 Techno Synth2 O O O O 29 Analog Kit – – – – 12 Arpeggio O O O O 30 Tom Flam – – – – 13 Crystal O O O O 31 Latin Percusion1 – – – – 14 Twinkle O O O O 32 Latin Percussion2 – – – – 15 Magical O O O O 33 Timbales – – – – 16 Piano Sequence O O O O 34 Analog Sequence – – – – 17 Banjo Sequence O O O O 35 Conga Sequence – – – – 18 Gothic O O O O 36 Techno Sequence – – – – Set ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢ ,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,, QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ ,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,, QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢ The Multi Pads Turning the CHORD MATCH Function On/Off The CHORD MATCH function can be individually turned on or off for each of the MULTI PADs, as described below. • The chord match function has no effect with pads that contain percussion phrases. 1 Select the MULTI PAD Function Use the MENU [▲] and [▼] buttons to select the MULTI PAD function so that the triangular indicator in the display appears next to “MULTI PAD” to the left of the display. SUB MENU MENU DISK MULTI PAD REGIST MEMORY MENU MIDI DIGITAL EFFECT OVERALL GROOVE&DYNAMICS 2 Select a CHORD MATCH Function Use the SUB MENU [▲] and [▼] buttons to select “P1ChdMatch”, “P2ChdMatch”, “P3ChdMatch”, or “P4ChdMatch”, depending on the pad for which you want to turn the CHORD MATCH function on or off. • The chord match on/ off status depends on the selected Multi Pad. P1ChdMat ch: On 3 Turn the CHORD MATCH Function On or Off Use the [–] and [+] buttons or data dial to turn the CHORD MATCH function for the selected pad “on” or “off” as required. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 – / NO 0 + / YES • The CHORD MATCH ON/OFF setting is restored to its original status whenever a preset MULTI PAD set is selected. • When the CHORD MATCH ON/OFF status of a user MULTI PAD (see page 107) set is changed, the new status is recorded with the MULTI PAD data. 63 ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢ ,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,, QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ Disk Operations ,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,, QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢ There is a disk drive installed in the PSR-730/630. By inserting a floppy disk into it, you can do many things: record and playback user songs, save and load user styles (page 98), user pads (page 106), or registration memory data (page 57). You can save any number of user styles and registration data on floppy disks, make song libraries or find many other ways to make playing the PSR-730/630 more efficient. There is a sample disk packed with the PSR-730/630. It contains 20 XG songs and 8 style files. To play back the songs see page 76. To load the styles see page 70. ◆ Floppy Disk Handling Precautions Floppy disks are an inexpensive, convenient, and reliable way to store your music data. They are not indestructable, however, and should be handled with care. Observe the following points to ensure the long-term safety of your disks and data. Type of Disk • Use the 3.5-inch 2DD or 2HD floppy disks with the PSR-730/ 630. Taking Care of Your Floppy Disks • Never attempt to eject a disk during a read or write operation (i.e. while the disk drive is operating). Doing so can damage both the disk and the drive. • Never turn the power ON or OFF while a disk is in the drive. Always eject the disk before turning the power OFF. • To eject a floppy disk from the disk drive press the eject button slowly as far as it will go. Then when the disk is fully ejected, remove it by hand. The disk may not be ejected properly if the eject button is pressed too quickly or if it is not pressed in far enough (the eject button may become stuck halfway with the disk extending from the slot by only a few millimeters). If this is the case, do not attempt to pull out the partially ejected disk. Doing so may damage the disk drive mechanism and/or the floppy disk. To remove a partially ejected disk, try pressing the eject button once again or push the disk back into the slot, then repeat the eject procedure carefully. This lamp is always on when the power is on, regardless of Disk operation. • Do not insert anything but floppy disks into the disk drive. Other objects can damage the disk drive or floppy disk. • Never open the disk shutter by hand or touch the internal surface of the disk. Dirt, dust, or grease on the disk’s magnetic surface can cause data errors. • Do not store disks in places exposed to direct sunlight or other sources of heat. The acceptable storage temperature range is approximately 4° to 53° C (39° to 127° F). • Do not store disks in areas subject to extreme dryness or humidity. The acceptable relative humidity range is approximately 8 to 90%. • Do not store disks in areas contaminated with dust, sand, smoke, etc. • Do not place heavy objects such as books on top of a disk. • Avoid getting floppy disks wet, particularly with oily or sticky fluids. A disk that has been wet with water should be allowed to dry naturally before use. Disks contaminated by other fluids can cause damage to the disk drive and should be discarded. • Be sure to apply the disk label at the proper position. When changing the label never cover the old label with a new label; always remove the old label first. Head Cleaning • With extended use the read/write head of the disk drive will pick up dust and other particles that will eventually cause data errors. If this occurs, clean the head with a 3.5 inch head cleaning disk available from most computer supply stores. Data Backup • For maximum data security we strongly recommended that you keep two copies of important data on separate floppy disks. These disks should ideally be stored in separate locations. This gives you a backup if one disk is lost or damaged. Protecting Your Data (Write Protect Tab) • To prevent accidental erasure of important data, slide the disk’s write-protect tab to the “protect” position (tab open). If you attempt to modify the disk when the write-protect tab is set to ON position, “Disk Write Protected!!” will appear on the display indicating that the operation is not possible. • Never leave disks near a speaker, TV, or other device that emits a strong magnetic field. Strong magnetic fields can partially erase the data on the disk. Write protect tab ON (locked-write protected) 64 Write protect tab OFF (unlocked- write enabled) ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢ ,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,, QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ ,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,, QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢ Disk Operations ■ User Song Data User song data is saved directly to the disk without saving it in the PSR-730/630 itself. Record User Song Floppy Disk (Direct save) • It may not be possible to record the full 60 files to a disk, depending on the legnth of the recorded files. Playback (Direct read) Maximum of 60 files can be saved. ■ User Style/User Pad/Registration Memory Data The PSR-730/630 has User Style, User Pad and Registration Memory functions installed. The data recorded with these functions can also be saved individually or gathered together to floppy disks and also the data (files) saved on disks can be loaded individually or gathered together into the PSR-730/630. User Style Save User Pad Save or load individually or gathered together • The maximum number of files may vary according to the type and volume of the saved files (page 68). Floppy Disk Load Registration Memory Up to 43 “All” type files (page 68) can be recorded on a 2HD disk. Up to 21 “All” type files can be recorded on a 2DD disk. ■ Data that Can be Saved or Loaded with the PSR-730/630 Data Type Extension Save Load User Style (101-104) [Style File Format] .USR O O User Pad (bank 37-40) .USR O O Registration Memory (bank 01-32) .USR O O User Style + Registration Memory .USR O O User Pad + Registration Memory .USR O O User Style + User Pad .USR O O User Song .MID — — • When saving data, use a floppy disk formatted on the PSR730/630. • The three letters after the file name (after the period) are called the extension. The extension shows the type of file. • Since the user songs are directly recorded to the disk as you play during recording and read from the disk during playback, the Save/Load functions are not available. The Disk Copy, Song Copy and Delete File operations related to the user songs can be executed. 65 ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢ ,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,, QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ ,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,, QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢ Disk Operations ■ Using Commercially Available Music Collections (Sold Separately) The PSR-730/630 can playback commercially available XG/GM music collection or YAMAHA DOC collection (Disk Orchestra Collection) disk files. It can also load styles collected on YAMAHA style file disks. The PSR-730/630 can handle music disks (floppy disks) that bear the following marks: You can playback song files collected on these disks using the voices defined in the GM standard. You can playback songs using the XG format, an extension of the GM standard that allows for much higher sound quality. You can playback song files collected on these disks using the voices defined in Yamaha’s DOC format. You can load and play with the style files collected on these disks. The Sample Disk Try playing some of the songs on the included Sample Disk. 1 Insert the Sample Disk into the Disk Drive. Once the disk is inserted, the menu icon on the display will automatically switch to the song menu, and the currently selected song name and song number will appear at the upper left of the display. The PSR-730/630 will switch into Song Mode. The SONG icon will light along with the DISK (floppy disk) icon and the XG icon. PSR-730X G 001 STYLE SONG DISK 116 TEMPO 000 TRANSPOSE A 100 ACMP/SONG VOLUME B ONE T SET REPEAT 1 2 3 4 REGISTRATION ME 2 Start and Stop the Song Press the [START/STOP] button, and playback of the Sample Disk song will begin. START / STOP For details, see page 76 “Song Playback.” 66 • With song data software that includes lyrics, you can view the lyrics in the display during playback. Consult your Yamaha dealer for information on song data that is compatible with the Lyrics Display function of the PSR-730/ 630. ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢ ,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,, QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ ,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,, QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢ Disk Operations Format Setting up commercially available floppy disks (3.5 inch, 2HD/2DD type) for use with the PSR-730/630 is called formatting Follow the steps below to format a disk. • After formatting, the capacity of a 2HD disk will be 1 Mbyte, and of a 2DD disk will be 720 Kbyte. 1 Insert the Disk into the Disk Drive Insert a commercially available 3.5 inch floppy disk (unformatted) into the disk drive, with the shutter on the disk towards the drive, and with the label side facing upward. The “DISK” menu will be automatically selected, and the Sub Menu item “Format Disk? NO/YES” will appear on the top line of the display. Format D isk? NO/YES • If you insert an unformatted disk with the write protect tab in the ON position into the drive, “Format Disk? NO/YES” will appear, but when you try to format it, “Disk Write Protected!!” will be displayed. Eject the disk, move the protect tab to the OFF position, and reinsert it in the drive. • The “DISK” menu won’t be selected automatically when you insert the formatted disk. If you want to format the formatted disk to record from scratch, first insert the disk you want to format, then press the Menu button, next press the Sub Menu button to show the “Format Disk? YES” on the display. 2 Press the [+] (YES) Button When the [+] button is pressed, “Execute? NO/YES” will appear on the display. Execute? isk? NO/YES 3 Start Formatting Press the [+] (YES) button and disk formatting will begin. Once started, formatting cannot be canceled. During formatting, the display will read “Now Formatting... xx%.” Now Form atting. .. 20% When formatting is finished, the display will return to the one which was selected before inserting the disk. If you don’t want to format, press the [–] (NO) button before the step 3 or simply eject the disk. The display will return to the one which was selected before inserting the disk. • If data is already saved on the disk, be careful not to format it. If you format the disk, all the previously recorded data will be deleted. • While formatting is in progress (while “Now Formatting” is displayed) , never eject the disk or turn off the power to the PSR730/630. • If a disk that cannot be read by the PSR-730/630 is inserted into the disk drive, it will be treated the same as an unformatted floppy disk. Take care not to erase important data by accidentally formatting a disk. • If you want to reformat a disk that already has been formatted for the PSR-730/630, insert the disk in the drive, select the “Format Disk? YES” item from the sub menu of the “DISK” menu, then proceed as for a normal format. • If you insert the formatted disk and you press the [-] (NO) button or eject the disk in the step 2, the display will return to the “Format Disk?”. 67 ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢ ,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,, QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ ,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,, QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢ Disk Operations Save You can save PSR-730/630 user styles, user pad (banks 37-40) and registration memory data (banks 01-32) on floppy disks. 1 Insert a Formatted Floppy Disk. • After formatting, the capacity of a 2HD disk will be 1 Mbyte, and of a 2DD disk will be 720 Kbyte. If a disk has not been already inserted in the drive, insert a formatted floppy disk. 2 Select a Save Function SUB MENU MENU DISK MULTI PAD REGIST MEMORY MENU Use the MENU [▲] and [▼] buttons to select the Disk function so that the triangular indicator in the display appears next to “DISK” to the left of the display. MIDI DIGITAL EFFECT OVERALL GROOVE&DYNAMICS Use the SUB MENU [▲] and [▼] buttons so that “Save To Disk? YES” appears on the display. SUB MENU Save To Disk? YES 3 Select the File Type Press the [+] (YES) button, and the file type select screen “File Type: All” will appear on the display. File Typ e: All Use the [–] and [+] buttons or the Data Dial to select the file type for the data you want to save. Refer to the file type list below: All 68 Save all User Style (101-104), User Pad (bank 37-40), and Registration Memory (bank 01-32) data into one single file. Style Save all User Style (101-104) data gathered together into one single file. Pad Save all User Pad (bank 37-40) data gathered together into one single file. Regist Save all Registration Memory (bank 01-32) data gathered together into one single file. Style + Reg. Save all User Style (101-104) and Registration Memory (bank 01-32) data gathered together into one single file. Pad + Regist Save all User Pad (bank 37-40), and Registration Memory (bank 01-32) data gathered together into one single file. Style + Pad Save all User Style (101-104) and User Pad (bank 37-40) data gathered together into one single file. • If the DISK menu is selected when there is no floppy disk inserted into the disk drive, “- - -” will be displayed at the top of the display, and disk operations won’t be possible. • Although all User Style (101-104), User Pad (bank 37-40), and Registration Memory (bank 01-32) data can be saved gathered into one single file, the data can be recalled individually when loaded back into the PSR730/630. ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢ ,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,, QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ ,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,, QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢ Disk Operations 4 Save File Confirmation Use the SUB MENU [▼] button so that “Save File....” appears on the display, showing the new file the data will be saved to. Save Fil e: UF–0 0001.USR To overwrite the data already saved to an existing file, use the [–] and [+] buttons or the Data Dial to select the file you want to overwrite. 5 If Necessary Change the File Name Use the SUB MENU [▼] button so that “Rename:.....” appears on the display, and you can change the name of the file (the 8 characters before the extension). Rename: LIVE -001.USR • Even if you chose a file where data is already saved because you want to overwrite the data, renaming the file will cause the new data to be saved in a different file, and the old data won’t be overwritten. • While data is being saved (“Now Saving” is displayed), never eject the floppy disk or turn off power to the PSR-730/630. 6 Execute the File Save Use the SUB MENU [▼] button so that “Execute: NO/YES” appears on the display. Execute? isk? NO/YES Press the [+] (YES) button and the save operation will begin. While it is in progress, “Now Saving...” will appear at the top of the display. Now Savi ng...E -001.USR When the save operation is finished, the sub menu will return to “Save To Disk? YES.” • If you press the SUB MENU [s ] button the sub menu display will return to “Save To Disk? YES.” • If there isn’t enough space on the disk, “Disk Full” will be displayed, and you won’t be able to save any data. You can delete unneeded files on the disk (page 75), or exchange the disk for a new one and repeat the save operation. • If a write error occurs during a save operation, “Disk Error” will be displayed. If the error reoccurs after repeating the save operation, there could be something wrong with the disk. Insert a different disk in the drive and repeat the save operation. 69 ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢ ,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,, QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ ,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,, QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢ Disk Operations Load After saving User Style (101-104), User Pad (bank 37-40), and Registration Memory (bank 01-32) data onto a floppy disk, you can reload them into the PSR-730/ 630. You can also load style data from the included Sample Disk or commercially available Yamaha Style File disks. 1 Insert the Floppy Disk into the Disk Drive. Insert the floppy disk that has the data you want to load into the floppy disk drive. 2 Select a Load Function Use the MENU [▲] and [▼] buttons to select the Disk function so that the triangular indicator in the display appears next to “DISK” to the left of the display. Use the SUB MENU [▲] and [▼] buttons so that “Load To Disk? YES” appears on the display. SUB MENU Load Fro m Disk? YES • If the DISK menu is selected when there is no floppy disk inserted into the disk drive, “- - -” will be displayed at the top of the display, and disk operations won’t be possible. 3 Select the File to Load Press the [+] (YES) button, and “Load File.....” file select screen will appear on the display. Load Fil e: UF–0 0001.USR Use the [–] and [+] buttons or the Data Dial to select the file to load. 4 Select the File Type (Data Type) to Load Press the SUB MENU [▼] button and the sub menu “File Type:....” will be displayed. File Typ e: All Use the [–] and [+] buttons or the Data Dial to select the file type (data type) to load. The file types that you can load at this point will depend on the types of files that were originally saved to this file. File types that were saved All Style Pad Regist Style+Reg. Pad+Regist Style+Pad 70 File types that can be loaded All, Style, Pad, Regist Style Pad Regist Style, Regist, Style+Reg. Pad, Regist, Pad+Regist Style, Pad , Style+Pad • If the disk contains no file, the display shows “File Not Found!!” indicating that the Load function is not possible. ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢ ,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,, QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ ,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,, QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢ Disk Operations 5 Select the Data to Be Loaded If Necessary If the file type selected in step 4 was “Style,” “Pad,” or “Regist,” press the SUB MENU [▼] button so that the sub menu “Source:....” (load data selection screen) is displayed. Source: All le 1 • When the selected file type is “All,” “Style + Reg,” “Pad + Regist,” “Style + Pad,” step 5 is not necessary. Proceed from step 6. By setting the “source” and “destination,” the data can be individually loaded (or loaded as a group). Style ....... A single Style can be extracted from the file 4 Styles saved together on the disk and loaded into one of the PSR-730/630 User Style 101-104. Pad ......... A single bank can be extracted from the file 4 banks saved together on the disk and loaded into one of the PSR-730/630 User Pad banks 37-40. Regist .... A single bank can be extracted from the file 32 banks saved together on the disk and loaded into one of the PSR-730/630 Registration banks 1-32. File Type Source Destination Style Style 1-4, All Style 1-4 (User Style 101-104) Pad Pad bank 1-4, All Pad bank 1-4 (User Pad 37-40) Regist Regist bank 1-32 All Reg. bank 1-32 ● Source Selection Use the [–] and [+] buttons or the Data Dial to select the load source. If “All” is selected, all the data will be loaded. Source: Sty le 2 ● Select the Destination Press the SUB MENU [▼] button so that “Destination:....” appears on the display. Destinat ion:Sty le 4 Use the [–] and [+] buttons, [1]–[0] number buttons, or the Data Dial to select the destination for the data. Press the SUB MENU [▼] button so that “Execute NO/YES” (load execution screen) appears on the display. 71 ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢ ,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,, QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ ,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,, QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢ Disk Operations 6 Execute the Load Operation Execute? isk? NO/YES Press the [+] (YES) button, and the load operation will start. Once started, the operation can’t be canceled. As the file is loading, “Now Loading” will appear on the top line of the display. Now Load ing...E -001.USR When the load operation is finished, the display will return to the “Load From Disk? YES” sub menu. If you aren’t going to load, press the [–] (NO) button instead of the [+] (YES) button, or eject the disk. The display will return back to the previous “Load From Disk? YES”. • When data is loaded from a floppy disk to the PSR-730/630, the data already in the memory of the instrument will be replaced by the data on the disk. Save important data into a disk file before doing the load operation. • While data is loading (“Now Loading” is displayed), never eject the floppy disk or turn the power off. • “Not Enough Memory!!” may appear on the display, if a problem occurs that prevents the data from being loaded (the capacity of the PSR-730/630 [RAM] is exceeded, something is wrong with the floppy disk, or the data from the disk is corrupted, etc.). Disk Copy You can copy the entire data saved on a floppy disk onto another one using the disk copy feature. It’s a good idea to use disk copy to create backup disks of your important data. the Disk to Copy From (Source Disk) into the Disk 1 Insert Drive Insert the disk that you want to copy from (source disk) into the disk drive. 2 Select a Disk Copy Function Use the MENU [▲] and [▼] buttons to select the Disk function so that the triangular indicator in the display appears next to “DISK” to the left of the display. Use the SUB MENU [▲] and [▼] buttons so that “Disk Copy? YES” appears on the display. SUB MENU Disk Cop y? 72 Gra nd PiYES • If the DISK menu is selected when there is no floppy disk inserted into the disk drive, “- - -” will be displayed at the top of the display, and disk operations won’t be possible. ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢ ,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,, QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ ,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,, QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢ Disk Operations 3 Press the [+] (YES) Button Make sure that the disk you wish to copy from (source disk) is inserted in the disk drive, then press the [+] (YES) button. “Now Reading” will appear on the display. Now Read ing... nd PiYES • While data is copying (“Now Copying” or “Now Reading” is displayed), never eject the floppy disk or turn the power off. The contents of the disk will be copied to the PSR-730/630, and when reading is finished, “Insert Copy Disk” will be displayed. Insert C opy Dis kd PiYES • If you want to cancel the Disk Copy function in this step, press the [–] (NO) button to cancel the operation, returning to “Disk Copy? YES” display. 4 Insert the Destination Disk into the Floppy Drive Insert the destination disk for the copy operation into the disk drive. “Now Copying” will appear on the display. Now Copy ing... nd PiYES Data will be copied from the PSR-730/630 to the destination disk, and when copying is finished, the display will return to the “Disk Copy? YES”. If the quantity of data is large, it may be necessary for the data to be copied in parts. In such a case, “Insert Source Disk” will appear again on the display. Insert S ource D iskPiYES Eject the copy (destination) disk and insert the source disk. Follow the messages on the display and repeat to change the disks. The number of times you repeat the disk changes depend on the size of the data to be copied. Once all the data has been copied, the display will return to the “Disk Copy? YES” . • The disk type of both source disk and destination disk must be the same (2DD or 2HD). If the source disk is 2HD type, use 2HD blank disk for the destination. If you insert a wrong type, “Disk Media Type Error!!” will be shown on the display. • If you insert a wrong disk, different from the source or destination disk, during the disk copy operation, “Disk Type Error!!” will be shown on the display. Song Copy The songs recorded on a floppy disk can be copied in file units to another location on the same disk. 1 Insert the Floppy Disk into the Disk Drive Insert the disk with the songs you want to copy into the disk drive. 73 ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢ ,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,, QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ ,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,, QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢ Disk Operations 2 Select a Song Copy Function Use the MENU [▲] and [▼] buttons to select the Disk function so that the triangular indicator in the display appears next to “DISK” to the left of the display. Use the SUB MENU [▲] and [▼] buttons so that “Song Copy? YES” appears on the display. SUB MENU Song Cop y? Gra nd PiYES • If the DISK menu is selected when there is no floppy disk inserted into the disk drive, “- - -” will be displayed at the top of the display, and disk operations won’t be possible. 3 Select the (Source) Song File to Be Copied Press the [+] (YES) button, and the file select screen “File Name:.....” will appear on the display. File Nam e: SONG _001 Use the [–] and [+] buttons or the Data Dial to select the song file you wish to copy. 4 Confirm the Name of the (Destination) Song File to Copy Use the SUB MENU [▼] button so that “Copy File....” appears on the display, showing the name that will be given to the new song file being made. Copy Fil e: SONG _002 To overwrite an already recorded song, use the [–] and [+] buttons or the Data Dial to select the file you want to overwrite. Use the SUB MENU [▼] button so that “Rename:.....” appears on the display, and you can change the name of the file (8 characters before the extension). Rename: • When the floppy disk’s write-protect tab is set to ON (see page 64) or the disk is a “purposely copyprotected” disk, the display shows “Disk Write Protected!!” indicating that the Song Copy function is not possible. COPY _002YES 5 Execute the Copy Operation After changing the file name, or when you don’t want to change the name, use the SUB MENU [▼] button so that “Execute: NO/YES” appears on the display. Execute? isk? NO/YES Press the [+] (YES) button and the save operation will begin. While it is in progress, “Now Copying...” will appear at the top of the display. When the copy operation is finished, the sub menu will return to “Song Copy? YES.” 74 • While the song is copying (“Now Copying” is displayed), never eject the floppy disk or turn the power off. ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢ ,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,, QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ ,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,, QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢ Disk Operations Delete File You can delete saved data (User Songs, User Styles, User Pads, or Registration Memory) from the floppy disk in file units. 1 Insert the Floppy Disk into the Disk Drive Insert the disk with the files you want to delete into the disk drive. 2 Select a Delete File Function Use the MENU [▲] and [▼] buttons to select the Disk function so that the triangular indicator in the display appears next to “DISK” to the left of the display. Use the SUB MENU [▲] and [▼] buttons so that “Delete File? YES” appears on the display. SUB MENU Delete F ile? nd PiYES • If the DISK menu is selected when there is no floppy disk inserted into the disk drive, “- - -” will be displayed at the top of the display, and disk operations won’t be possible. 3 Select the File to Be Deleted Press the [+] (YES) button, and the file select screen “File Name:.....” will appear on the display. File Nam e: UF_0 0001.USR Use the [–] and [+] buttons or the Data Dial to select the file you wish to delete. • When the floppy disk’s write-protect tab is set to ON (see page 64) or the disk is a “purposely copy-protected” disk, the display shows “Disk Write Protected!!” indicating that the Delete File function is not possible. 4 Execute the Delete Operation Press the SUB MENU [▼] button so that “Execute: NO/YES” appears on the display. Execute? isk? NO/YES • While the file is being deleted (“Now Deleting” is displayed), never eject the floppy disk or turn the power off. Press the [+] (YES) button and the delete operation will begin. While it is in progress, “Now Deleting...” will appear at the top of the display. Now Dele ting... _002 When the delete operation is finished, the sub menu will return to “Delete File? YES.” 75 ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢ ,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,, QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ Song Playback ,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,, QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢ You can playback a wonderful variety of songs on the PSR-730/630, including the preset demo songs, the songs on the included Sample Disk, the User Songs you record on a floppy disk and the songs on commercially available XG/GM song collection disks. Except for the preset demo songs, a floppy disk must be inserted in the disk drive to playback a song. Song Playback Procedure 1 Select the Song Menu Press the [SONG] button to select the SONG menu (the triangular indicator will appear next to “SONG” to the right of the display). The name and number of the currently selected song will appear on the left of the top line of the display, and the PSR-730/630 will switch to Song Mode, lighting the SONG icon on the display. Trumpet 001 STYLE SONG 116 TEMPO A 100 000 DISK t TRANSPOSE B ONE TOUCH SETTING REPEAT 1 ACMP/SONG VOLUME 2 3 4 FREEZE REGISTRATION MEMORY • Entering the Song Mode automatically selects the following settings: Auto Accompaniment Off, Synchro Start Off, Synchro Stop Off, and Registration Memory Freeze On. These settings cannot be altered in Song Mode. SONG SONG When playing back a song recorded on a floppy disk, insert the disk into the disk drive. PSR-730X G 001 STYLE SONG DISK 116 TEMPO 000 TRANSPOSE A 100 B ONE T SET REPEAT 1 ACMP/SONG VOLUME 2 3 4 REGISTRATION ME Inserting the disk will cause the PSR-730/630 to automatically change to the “SONG” menu, and the name and number of the currently selected song will appear on the left of the top line of the display. The PSR-730/630 will switch to Song Mode, lighting the SONG icon on the display, and the (floppy disk icon) will be shown. DISK 2 Enter the Song Number Use the [–] and [+] buttons, [1]–[0] number buttons, or the Data Dial to select the song to be played back. The SONG button can also be pushed to increment the song number, and holding it down will cause the number to increment continuously. Always 002 STYLE SONG 76 DISK 116 TEMPO 000 TRANSPOSE 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 – / NO 0 + / YES d A 100 ACMP/SONG VOLUME B ONE TOUCH SETTING REPEAT 1 2 3 4 FREEZE REGISTRATION MEMORY • Inserting the disk containing no song data won’t automatically select the “SONG” menu. ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢ ,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,, QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ ,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,, QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢ Song Playback The songs will be displayed in sequence, as follows: Demo Song (001) m Disk Song (001) m Demo Song (001).... ● Selecting a Disk Song Quickly When selecting a Demo Song, hold the [3] button down until the icon lights, then enter the Disk Song number using the [1]–[0] number buttons. DISK Example) Selecting Disk Song number 2 Press [3] and hold until the DISK icon lights Press [2] Always 002 STYLE SONG DISK 116 TEMPO 000 TRANSPOSE 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 – / NO 0 + / YES d A 100 ACMP/SONG VOLUME B ONE TOUCH SETTING REPEAT 1 2 3 4 FREEZE REGISTRATION MEMORY • Song data of a certain commercially available song disk may use the voices which are not built in the PSR-730/630. In this case nothing will be shown on the voice number display of the appropriate track. 3 Select Play Mode Press the SUB MENU [▲] and [▼] buttons so that “Play Mode” appears on the display. On the right of the top line of the display, the current play mode will be displayed. Use the [–] and [+] buttons, or the Data Dial to select the play mode for playback. Play Mod e: • Selecting “All” here cancels the Next song setting (see page 82). Sin gle Single............... Play through the selected song, then stop. All ...................... Continue playback through all the songs on the floppy disk. If there is no floppy disk inserted in the drive, this setting will be ignored. 4 Start/Stop the Song Press the [START/STOP] button, and start playback of the song. To stop playback part way through the song, press the [START/STOP] button one more time. START / STOP 77 ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢ ,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,, QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ ,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,, QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢ Song Playback ■ Song Volume Control The volume of song playback can be adjusted for the best balance in relation to notes from the keyboard. While in Song Mode (the SONG icon is lit) press the ACMP/ SONG VOLUME [▲] and [▼] buttons. When either button is pressed the current song volume setting will appear on the top line of the display for a few seconds. The song volume is also shown on the display when in the Song Mode (the SONG icon is lit). SongVolu me ACMP / SONG VOLUME 001 STYLE SONG 116 A 100 TEMPO 000 DISK TRANSPOSE 100 B ONE TOUCH SETTING REPEAT ACMP/SONG VOLUME 1 2 3 4 FREEZE REGISTRATION MEMORY Press the ACMP/SONG VOLUME [▲] or [▼] buttons to button to decrease or increase the volume within a range of 0-127. Press briefly to single step, or hold for continuous decrementing/incrementing. • While the song volume setting appears on the top line of the display the [–] and [+] buttons, number buttons, or data dial can also be used to set the song volume. ■ Play from a Specified Measure Press the [SONG] button to select the SONG menu (the triangular indicator will appear next to “SONG” to the right of the display). Use the SUB MENU [▲] and [▼] buttons to select the “Measure” parameter in the display. The current measure number will appear to the right of “Measure” on the top line of the display (the current measure number is also continuously displayed next to “MEASURE” in the display). Measure: 001 STYLE SONG DISK 116 TEMPO 001 A 100 000 ONE TOUCH SETTING REPEAT ACMP/SONG VOLUME TRANSPOSE B 1 2 3 4 001 MEASURE FREEZE REGISTRATION MEMORY Use the [–] and [+] buttons, [1]–[0] number buttons, or the Data Dial to specify the measure from which to begin playback, then press the [START/STOP] button to start from that measure. Measure: 001 STYLE SONG 78 DISK 116 TEMPO 000 TRANSPOSE 009 A 100 ACMP/SONG VOLUME B ONE TOUCH SETTING REPEAT 1 2 3 4 FREEZE 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 – / NO 0 + / YES 009 MEASURE REGISTRATION MEMORY • You can move the measure number for playback back and forth even during the song playback. ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢ ,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,, QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ ,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,, QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢ Song Playback Minus-one Practice You can turn-off (mute) any of the parts of a song while it is playing, then practice playing that part yourself along with the other tracks of the song. This is called Minusone playback. Choose any one of the demo or sample disk songs, press one of the TRACK buttons 1-16 below the display, muting the part you want to play, and then try playing yourself. 1 Selecting the Song for Minus-one Playback To select the song, see (page 76). 2 Select the track for Minus-one playback Press one of the TRACK buttons below the display, and its number 1 – 16 will disappear from the display. The track you selected will go OFF and the part will be muted. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 213 213 337 391 259 434 468 442 471 219 252 213 213 213 213 213 RHYTHM RHYTHM 1 2 BASS CHORD 1 CHORD 2 PAD PHRASE PHRASE MELODY MELODY MELODY MELODY 1 2 3 4 1 2 ACMP VOICE VOICE VOICE L R2 R1 SPLIT SONG TRACK ACCOMPANIMENT TRACK 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 R2 L 13 DUAL 14 15 R1 16 3 Select the R1 Voice When you are going to play in place of the muted part, set the voice for the part you muted (listed under the TRACK Number 1 – 16 ) as the R1 voice. To select the R1 voice, see page (page 17). 4 START/STOP Minus-one Playback Just like starting regular song playback, press the [START/STOP] button to start and stop Minus-one playback. You can play the muted part yourself. START / STOP Pressing one of the TRACK buttons corresponding to the muted parts during song playback turns on that track/part again. 79 ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢ ,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,, QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ ,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,, QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢ Song Playback Repeat Play This function allows you to specify any section of a Demo or Sample disk song for continuous repeat playback. 1 Select the A-B Repeat Parameter While the SONG menu is selected, but no recording is in progress, use the SUB MENU [▲] and [▼] buttons to select the “A-B Repeat” parameter in the display. The MAIN/AUTO FILL [A] and [B] button indicators will flash. MAIN / AUTO FILL A-B Repe at A B A B 2 Start Playback Press the [START/STOP] button to start song playback. START / STOP 3 Specify the Repeat “A” and “B” Points While the song is playing, press the MAIN/AUTO FILL [A] button at the beginning of the section to be repeated (the [A] button indicator will light continuously, and the “A” repeat icon will appear in the display), then press the MAIN/AUTO FILL [B] button at the end of the section to be repeated (the [B] button indicator will light continuously, and the “B” repeat icon will appear in the display). Repeat playback will begin automatically from the A point as soon as the B point has been specified, and will continue until either the MAIN/AUTO FILL [A] button is pressed again to cancel the repeat function, or until song playback is stopped. MAIN / AUTO FILL A B A B A B ONE TOUCH SETTING REPEAT 1 2 3 4 MAIN / AUTO FILL B A B A B ONE TOUCH SETTING REPEAT 1 2 3 4 FREEZE REGISTRATION MEMORY 80 • If the MAIN/AUTO FILL [B] button is pressed during repeat playback, the previously specified “B” point will be cancelled and a new “B” point can be specified as required. FREEZE REGISTRATION MEMORY A • If only the “A” repeat point is specified, repeat playback will occur between the “A” point and the end of the song. • Repeat playback will continue even if a different menu is selected during repeat playback. • Repeat playback will be cancelled if a different SONG number selected or the record mode is engaged. ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢ ,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,, QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ ,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,, QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢ Song Playback Song Repeat The Song Repeat feature is handy when you want to repeat playback of a particular song. 1 Select a Song Number To select the song, see (page 76). 2 Turn on the Song Repeat After making sure that the “SONG” menu is selected, use the SUB MENU [▲] and [▼] buttons so that “SongRepeat” appears on the display. The current SongRepeat setting will be shown on the top line of the display. SongRepe at: Off Use the [–] and [+] buttons or the Data Dial to set the on/off state to the Song Repeat function. SongRepe at: On 3 Start Playback Playback will begin as soon as the [START/STOP] button is pressed. Until you press the [START/STOP] button once again, Song Repeat playback will continue. START / STOP • If the Song Repeat feature is ON, the song will replay repeatedly regardless of whether the play mode is set for Single or All. • Doing any of the following operations will automatically cause the song repeat function to turn off. • Changing the song number. • Specifying the Next Song function (page 82). • Setting the Play Mode to “All” (page 77). 81 ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢ ,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,, QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ ,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,, QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢ Song Playback Next Song The Next Song feature is handy when the next song you want to play isn’t the one with the next song number. 1 Select the first song you want to play To select the song, see (page 76). 2 Select the next song After making sure that the “SONG” menu is selected, use the SUB MENU [▲] and [▼] buttons so that “NextSong” appears on the display. The current NextSong setting will be shown on the top line of the display. NextSong :01 Tru mpet • When “All” is selected in the Play mode (see page 77), setting the Next song will automatically change the Play mode from “All” to “Single” Use the [–] and [+] buttons, [1]–[0] number buttons, or the Data Dial to select the next song. NextSong :04 E.P iano 3 Start Playback Playback will begin as soon as the [START/STOP] button is pressed. When the first song is finished, playback will continue with the next song. If the [START/STOP] button is pressed once again, or when the next song finishes, playback will automatically stop. START / STOP • If the Song Repeat feature is ON, the next song will play after the first song regardless of whether the play mode is set for Single or All. • While the selected next song is playing, the song to play after it finishes can be selected in the same way using the Next Song function. • If the first song and the next song are the same, the Next Song feature won’t work. • Doing any of the following operations will automatically cause the song repeat function to turn off. • Changing the song number. • Turning on the Song Repeat function (page 81). • Setting the Play Mode to “All” (page 77). 82 ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢ ,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,, QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ Song Recording ,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,, QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢ You can record your own music performance on a floppy disk as a user song. • User Songs are recorded on floppy disks. They can’t be recorded unless a floppy disk is inserted into the disk drive. • The Shortcut functions are not available when one of the Record modes is engaged. ● Quick Recording You can easily record four tracks from the PSR-730/630 keyboard together with on track of Auto Accompaniment. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 213 213 337 391 259 434 468 442 001 124 133 064 204 084 109 001 RHYTHM RHYTHM 1 2 BASS CHORD 1 CHORD 2 PAD PHRASE PHRASE MELODY MELODY MELODY MELODY 1 2 3 4 1 2 ACMP VOICE VOICE VOICE L R2 R1 SPLIT DUAL • The quick recording method is different from the multi recording method but for both of them, the recorded data is recorded on tracks 1– 16. ● Multi Recording In Multi Recording, the different parts of the some are divided among tracks 1–16, with keyboard playing on tracks 1–5, harmony notes on tracks 6–8, and auto accompaniment (RHYTHM1-PHRASE2) on tracks 9–16. This lets you fine tune the recording settings for each track, then carefully edit. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 001 213 337 391 259 434 468 442 471 216 252 213 213 213 213 213 RHYTHM RHYTHM 1 2 BASS CHORD 1 CHORD 2 PAD PHRASE PHRASE MELODY MELODY MELODY MELODY 1 2 3 4 1 2 ACMP VOICE VOICE VOICE L R2 R1 SPLIT DUAL After finishing your recording of a user song, you can play it back in the same way as one of the preset demo songs. The data you can record in user songs using Quick Recording or Multi Recording are as follows: The accompaniment tracks record the following and data: • Accompaniment style number* • Accompaniment track changes* (8 tracks: track on/off, voice number, volume, pan, reverb depth, chorus depth) • Section changes and their timing • Chord changes and their timing. • Accompaniment volume • Reverb type. • Chorus type. • Tempo and time signature* The keyboard (R1/R2/L) tracks record the following and data: • Note on/off (key press and release) • Velocity (strength of key press) • R1/R2/L voice number, volume, octave*, pan, reverb depth, chorus depth, DSP depth. • Reverb on/off and type • Chorus on/off and type • DSP (including variation) on/off and type • Multi effect on/off, type and settings (PSR-730) • Harmony on/off, type • Sustain pedal on/off • Pitch bend, pitch bend range. • Tempo The maximum amount of song memory is 65,000 notes for 2DD disks and 130,000 notes for 2HD disks. * Recorded only at the beginning of a song; changes cannot be made during recording. • Being able to record note on/off and velocity means being able to record forte or piano, crescendo or diminuendo, and other subtle elements of expression from the keyboard as you play them. • Note ON (key press), note OFF (key release), and velocity (strength of key press) are MIDI data events (playing information)(page 119). • Be careful to avoid the song data loss that will occur during recording if the power is turned off, the AC adaptor is unplugged from the outlet, or the batteries lose power. 83 ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢ ,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,, QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ ,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,, QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢ Song Recording Quick Recording Procedure With quick recording, you can use 5 tracks for recording each song. ● ACMP track ....................... Used to record auto accompaniment notes (such as chord change and section change data). ● MELODY 1–4 track ......... Used to record keyboard melody notes. 1 Insert Floppy Disk and Change to Record Mode Insert the floppy disk you will use to record the user song into the floppy disk drive. Press the [RECORD] button to engage the Record Ready Mode. The [RECORD] button indicator will light, and the SONG, STYLE, and MULTI PAD [1] … [4] icons will flash, indicating that you must select one of the corresponding record modes. and Piano 001 001 RECORD BEAT 1 2 3 VOICE 4 MULTI PAD dim 6 m M 7aug sus 4 FINGERING 11 119 513 12 GROOVE & DYNAMICS 13 14 15 16 STYLE 252 213 213 213 213 213 2 MELODY MELODY 3 4 ACMP VOICE VOICE VOICE L R2 R1 SPLIT DUAL SONG The SONG icon will be lit on the display indicating that the Song mode is engaged and the User song number will be shown above the icon. 8Beat Po p1 001 DISK SONG 84 Gra nd Piano ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢ ,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,, QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ ,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,, QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢ 2 Select the SONG Record Mode Press the [SONG] button to select the SONG record mode. The SONG menu icon will light. The beat indicator dots will flash at the currently set tempo, indicating that the record ready (Synchro Start) mode is engaged. The track bars for MELODY 1–4 and ACMP tracks will flash at the bottom of the display (Record Ready Mode). • In Song Record Ready Mode, the track numbers (9-13) for corresponding to tracks where data is already recorded will light. • If the [RECORD] button is pressed, the lowest-numbered user song which does not contain any recorded data will automatically be selected. • The following panel setting changes will occur when the record ready mode is engaged: • The measure number will be reset to “1”. • If the Metronome function is on (page 116), the metronome will sound at the current tempo. • The Registration Memory Freeze function will be turned on (it cannot be turned off while the record mode is engaged). • The SYNCHRO STOP function wil be turned off. 3 If Necessary, Select a User Song Number When you want to change the user song number selected in step two, use the [–] and [+] buttons, [1]–[0] number buttons, or Data Dial to change it as required. 4 Select the Track to be Recorded ● When recording a melody track. Use the TRACK buttons to select a MELODY 1–4 track to record. For example, if you press the track button below the MELODY 1 track, the MELODY 1 track bar will stop flashing, and the track bars for the other tracks will go out. This shows that you have selected the MELODY 1 track as the track for recording. 85 ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢ ,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,, QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ ,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,, QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢ Song Recording 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 468 442 471 201 252 213 213 084 109 001 PHRASE PHRASE MELODY MELODY MELODY MELODY 1 2 3 4 1 2 ACMP VOICE VOICE VOICE L R2 R1 SPLIT SONG TRACK 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 DUAL R2 L • If you start recording without selecting a specific track while the panel AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT button is ON, the MELODY 1 and ACMP tracks will automatically be selected for recording. 14 R1 15 16 ● Recording the ACMP track If you press the TRACK button below the ACMP track, the ACMP track bar will light and the ACMP track will be selected as the recording track. (If you do this when AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT is off, AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT will automatically be turned on.) 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 • The ACMP track and one MELODY track can be recorded together at the same time. • If the ACMP track is turned off, AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT on the panel will also be turned off. 16 468 442 471 201 252 213 213 084 109 001 PHRASE PHRASE MELODY MELODY MELODY MELODY 1 2 3 4 1 2 ACMP VOICE VOICE VOICE L R2 R1 SPLIT SONG TRACK 7 8 9 10 11 R2 L 12 13 14 • If AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT is turned on, the ACMP track will be automatically selected for recording. DUAL 15 R1 • AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT cannot be turned on or off during recording. 16 5 Record Recording will begin as soon as you play a note on the keyboard or press the [START/STOP] button, and the BEAT indicator dots will begin to indicate the current beat as in the Auto Accompaniment mode. The MEASURE parameter will also show the current measure number during recording. START / STOP 009 MEASURE BEAT 1 2 3 4 MULTI PAD ◆ Rehearsal Mode If the SYNC START button is pressed while in Record Ready Mode, it will be canceled (the beat indicator dots will go out) and the PSR-730/630 will enter Rehearsal Mode. In this mode, you can try playing your song before actually recording it. Pressing the SYNC START button will return to Record Ready Mode. 86 SYNC NIMENT STOP START ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢ ,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,, QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ ,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,, QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢ Song Recording • Before actually starting to record you can try playing the PSR-730/630 the way it is set up by using the “Rehearsal Mode”: press the [SYNC START] button to temporarily disengage the record ready mode, rehearse as necessary, then press the [SYNC START] button again to return to the record ready mode. • Recording is carried out in 1-measure increments. If you stop recording in the middle of a measure, rests will automatically be recorded until the end of that measure. • Whenever you record using a SONG, any previously recorded material in the same track will be erased. • If you start recording by pressing the [START/STOP] button, nothing will be recording on a MELODY track until you begin playing on the keyboard. Only rhythm accompaniment will be recorded on the ACCOMPANIMENT track until you play a chord in the auto accompaniment section of the keyboard. • If the SONG memory becomes full while recording, “Disk FULL!!” will appear on the display and recording will stop (the “Rehearsal Mode” will be engaged). • During recording you can use the TRACK buttons to turn playback of previously-recorded MELODY tracks or the ACCOMPANIMENT track on or off as required. 6 Stop Recording Stop recording by pressing the [START/STOP] button. If you press the [ENDING] button while recording the ACCOMPANIMENT track, recording will stop automatically after the ending section has finished. When recording is stopped the MEASURE number on the display will return to “1” and the record-ready mode will be engaged. START / STOP • You can also press the [SYNC START] button to stop recording and return to the record ready mode. ENDING 7 Record Additional Tracks as Required By repeating steps 4 through 6, above, you can select and record additional tracks as required. ● Recording from the Middle of the Song It is possible to initiate recording from the middle of the song. If you want to change the latter half of the song (track), select the Measure number from which you want to record and start recording. When the AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT is on, this method is not available for the quick recording procedure. • While the record ready mode is engaged you can press the [VOICE] button to go to the VOICE menu and change the R1 voice as required. The R2 voice, however, cannot be changed (If the Voice Set function is on — page 116 — the R2 voice will automatically be changed when an R1 panel voice is selected). The record-ready mode must be disengaged in order to change the R2 voice and other settings. • You can rerecord a part of an already recorded track if desired, using the Punch In/Punch Out feature (page 92) 8 Exit From the Record Mode When you’re finished recording a song, press the [RECORD] button so that its indicator goes out, to exit from the record mode. The recorded user song can now be played back in the same way as the demonstration songs. RECORD • You can edit the data recorded in user songs (page 96). • You can edit the recorded accompaniment data recorded on accompaniment tracks (page 96). 87 ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢ ,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,, QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ ,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,, QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢ Song Recording Multi Recording Procedure With Multi Recording, you can record up to 16 tracks for a single song. The default settings for the tracks are as follows: Track 1 ............... For recording keyboard playing (R1 part). Track 2 ............... For recording keyboard playing (R2 part). Track 3 ............... For recording keyboard playing (L part). Tracks 4,5 ......... For recording keyboard playing (R1 part). Tracks 6–8 ........ For recording harmony notes (Harmony type 7–16). Tracks 9–16 ...... For recording Auto Accompaniment notes (RHYTHM 1– PHRASE 2) 1 Engage the Song Record Mode and Select the User Song In the same way as steps 1–3 for Quick Recording, engage the Song Recording Mode and select the user song number. • Even though three tracks, track 1, 4 and 5, are prepared for R1 part as the default, the R1 part performance cannot be recorded to the multiple tracks at the same time. In such cases, the last track you select is designated for the R1 part recording. • When you insert an commercially available song disk and try to record and overwrite one of the song files which is not writeprotected, “Convert NO/ YES” will appear and the recording will not be initiated. If you select “YES” to execute recording, “Don’t remove the disk” appears and the PSR730/630 starts converting the selected song’s format to the PortaTone’s. After completing the conversion, Record-ready mode is engaged to indicate recording becomes possible. 2 Select the Record Method Use the SUB MENU [▲] and [▼] buttons so that “Quick Record” or “Multi Record” (record method selection screen) appears on the display. Multi Re cord Use the [–] and [+] buttons or the Data Dial to select Multi Record as the record method. 3 Select the Track and Part to Record Select the track and the part to be recorded on that track.. Default parts are already set for recording, but you can change them as needed. Use the SUB MENU [▲] and [▼] buttons so that “Part Select” (record part selection screen) appears on the display. Part Sel ect:Voi ce R1 88 • If you begin recording without selecting the record method, Quick Record Mode will automatically be selected. ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢ ,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,, QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ ,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,, QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢ Song Recording Press the TRACK button to select one of the tracks 1–16 for recording. For example, if you press the Track button below the track 1, the track 1 bar will light, showing that the track 1 is selected for recording. If you press the same TRACK button once again, the track bar will go out and that track will not be recorded. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 001 213 337 391 259 434 468 442 471 216 252 213 213 213 213 213 RHYTHM RHYTHM 1 2 BASS CHORD 1 CHORD 2 PAD PHRASE PHRASE MELODY MELODY MELODY MELODY 1 2 3 4 1 2 ACMP VOICE VOICE VOICE L R2 R1 SPLIT SONG TRACK ACCOMPANIMENT TRACK 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 DUAL R2 L 12 13 14 15 R1 16 At this time, the part to be recorded for that track will be shown at the top of the display. As needed, use the [–] and [+] buttons or the Data Dial to change the part. Track 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 Default Part R1 R2 L R1 R1 Harmony 1 Harmony 2 Harmony 3 ACMP 1ch (RHYTHM2) ACMP 2ch (RHYTHM1) ACMP 3ch (BASS) ACMP 4ch (CHORD1) ACMP 5ch (CHORD2) ACMP 6ch (PAD) ACMP 7ch (PHRASE1) ACMP 8ch (PHRASE2) Other Parts that Can Be Set R2, L R1,L R1, R2 R2, L R2, L R1, R2, L R1, R2, L R1, R2, L R1, R2, L — R1, R2, L R1, R2, L R1, R2, L R1, R2, L R1, R2, L R1, R2, L When recording accompaniment tracks (9–16), first turn Auto Accompaniment on and then press the TRACK buttons numbered 9–16 to select 9–16 tracks for recording. Pressing any of the TRACK buttons under the tracks will let you select any tracks (such as RHYTHM 1 track and BASS track only) for recording. 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 468 442 471 216 252 213 213 213 213 213 ACCOMPANIMENT ON / OFF PHRASE PHRASE MELODY MELODY MELODY MELODY 1 2 3 4 1 2 ACMP VOICE VOICE VOICE L R2 R1 SPLIT SONG TRACK 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 DUAL R2 L 14 • If the part selected for a track is the same one as that being recorded, that track cannot be set for recording at the same time. Only one track can be selected, with the last chosen having priority. 15 • Auto Accompaniment cannot be turned on or off once recording has started. R1 16 89 ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢ ,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,, QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ ,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,, QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢ Song Recording The harmony notes (type 7–16) can be recorded to the tracks 6–8. To record harmony notes, first turn Harmony on and then press the TRACK buttons numbered 6–8 to select 6–8 tracks for recording. 1 HARMONY 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 001 213 337 391 259 434 468 442 471 216 252 213 213 213 213 213 RHYTHM RHYTHM 1 2 BASS CHORD 1 CHORD 2 PAD PHRASE PHRASE MELODY MELODY MELODY MELODY 1 2 3 4 1 2 ACMP VOICE VOICE VOICE L R2 R1 SPLIT SONG TRACK ACCOMPANIMENT TRACK DUAL R2 L R1 ACCOMPANIMENT ON / OFF 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 4 Start/Stop Recording Record the track(s) in the same way as steps 5-7 for Quick Recording. Since the recorded accompaniment data is recorded on each accompaniment track, it can be edited using the Song Edit function (page 97). ■ About the Recording with the Digital Effects Applied Only one type of each of the Digital Effects, Reverb, Chorus, DSP and Multi Effect (PSR-730) can be set at one time. Be aware of the following facts, especially when recording a song with different effects applied to the different tracks. A Reverb type and Chorus type effects can be set and recorded independently for each of the 16 tracks. However, only the latest settings made (one each) will be effective if several effects are used in a song (the latest setting priority). [EX.] While the panel REVERB button is turned on: 1. Select the Hall 1 (Reverb) for the Accompaniment track, and record the Accompaniment track for ten measures from the beginning. 2. Start recording the keyboard (R1) track with the Hall 1 (Reverb) selected from the beginning and then change the effect type to Room 1 (Reverb) respectively from the fifth measure through the end. When you play back the song recorded as above, the first four measures will be played back with the Hall 1 applied to both the Accompaniment track and keyboard (R1) track, and the remaining six measures, from fifth through the end, with the Room 1 applied to both tracks. The effect types set for the Accompaniment track are replaced with the latest settings. Only the Depth for each track remains the same. 90 • You can also use Rehearsal Mode to practice before recording when doing Multi Recording. ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢ ,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,, QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ ,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,, QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢ Song Recording B DSP type effects can be set and recorded for R1/R2/L part(s) when used as System effect and for R1 part when used as Insertion effect. They can’t be recorded for the track used as the Accompaniment and/or Harmony part. During playback, only the latest setting will be effective if several types are used for the tracks in a song (the latest setting priority). [EX.] 1. Turn on the panel DSP button, and start recording on the track 1 with the Distortion (DSP type: No.42 Dist.Hard) selected for ten measures from the beginning. 2. Turn off the panel DSP button, and start recording on the track 2 without any effect from the beginning. Then turn on the panel DSP button again at the fifth measure, and continue recording to the end with the Rotary Speaker (DSP type: No.28 Rotary SP.1) selected. When you play back the song recorded with the above condition, the first four measures will be played back with the Distortion applied only to track 1, and the remaining six measures, from the fifth through the end, with the Rotary Speaker applied only to track 2. The DSP type set for track 1 is replaced by the one set for the track 2. C (PSR-730) Multi effects can be set and recorded for R1/R2/L part(s). They can’t be recorded for the track used as the Accompaniment and/or Harmony part. During playback, only the latest setting will be effective if several types are used for the tracks in a song (the latest setting priority). [EX.] Two Multi Effect types set in series for R1 1. Multi Effect is turned on and 10 measures are recorded for R1 on track 1. 2. Recording is started for R1 on track 2 with Multi effect off, and then it is turned on at the fifth measure. When you play back the song recorded with the above conditions, the first four measures will be played back with the Multi Effect applied only to track 1, and the remaining six measures, from the fifth through the end, with Multi Effect applied only to track 2. 91 ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢ ,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,, QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ ,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,, QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢ Song Recording Punch In/Punch Out The data recorded on tracks for keyboard playing (R1/R2/L) can be re-recorded in parts with the Punch In/Punch Out feature. ● Before re-recording 1 2 3 4 5 6 Recording start (Punch In) 7 8 Recording stop (Punch Out) ● After Re-recording 1 2 Previously played data 3 4 5 6 7 8 Previously played data Newly played data 1 In the Record Ready Mode (page 88) for the track you will re-record or in the Rehearsal Mode, use the SUB MENU [▲] and [▼] buttons so that “Punch In:Off” appears on the display. Punch In : 2 Use the SUB MENU [▼] button so that “Punch Out:Off” appears on the display. 5 Use the [–] and [+] buttons, [1]–[0] number buttons, or the Data Dial to enter the measure number for using the Punch Out feature. 3 Start and Stop Recording Start recording as usual. Even though you start playing from the beginning, only the data played within the Punch In/Punch Out range will be re-recorded. 92 • If you select the tracks set as the Accompaniment or Harmony, “Punch In: - - -” or “Punch Out: - - -” appears on the display and Punch In/ Punch Out recording is not accessible. 3 Use the [–] and [+] buttons, [1]–[0] number buttons, or the Data Dial to enter the measure number for using the Punch In feature. Punch Ou t: • Punch In/Punch Out recording is available only when Multi record mode is engaged. When in the Quick record-ready mode, “Punch In: - - -” or “Punch Out: - - -” appears on the display and Punch In/ Punch Out recording is not accessible. • You can use Punch In/Punch Out to rerecord multiple tracks at the same time. • Punch In/Punch Out cannot be used for songs that have no data recorded in them. “Punch In: - - -” will be shown on the display. • The Punch Out measure number cannot be set lower than the Punch In measure number. ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢ ,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,, QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ ,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,, QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢ Song Recording Quantize With the Quantize feature, the timing of data recorded in a user songs can be adjusted. 1 In the Record Ready Mode for the track you want to quantize (page 88) or in the Rehearsal Mode, use the SUB MENU [▲] and [▼] buttons so that “Quantize: YES” appears on the display. Quantize ? YES • Quantize setting is available only when Multi record-ready mode is engaged. When in the Quick record-ready mode, “Quantize? - - -” appears on the display and Quantize setting is not accessible. 2 Press the [+] YES button and “Quantize” will be displayed, with the value at the upper right of the display. Quantize : 32 2 Use the [–] and [+] buttons, or the Data Dial to select the Quantize value (4, 6, 8, 12, 16, 24, 32). Set the Quantize value to correspond to the smallest notes in the track you are working with. For example, if the data was recorded with quarter notes and eighth notes, use 1/8 for the quantize value. If the quantize function is applied in this case with the value set to 1/4, the eighth notes would be moved on top of the quarter notes. Quantize Value Note 4 Quarter note 6 Quarter note triplet 8 Eighth note 12 Eighth note triplet 16 Sixteenth note 24 Sixteenth note triplet 32 Thirty-second note One measure of 8th notes before quantization After quantization 3 After making the setting in step 2, use the SUB MENU [▼] button so that “Execute? No/Yes” appears on the display. Execute? : 1/3 NO/YES Pressing the [+] YES button to execute the quantize function. Press the [–] (NO) button, and the quantize function won’t execute. The display will return to “Quantize?”. 4 When Quantize is finished, the display will return to “Quantize? YES” 93 ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢ ,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,, QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ ,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,, QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢ Song Recording Naming User Songs You can give your own name (8 characters or less) to user songs. In the Record Ready Mode (pages 84, 88) for the song you want to name, or in the Rehearsal Mode, use the SUB MENU [▲] and [▼] buttons so that “Song Name” appears on the display. The current name for the song will be displayed at the upper right of the display. _ SON G _001 SongName The method of setting the characters is the same as for Registration Naming (page 58). _ LES SON01 SongName Clearing Song Data You can clear unneeded song data in two different ways: Clearing Selected Tracks or Clearing an Entire Song. In either Quick Record or Multi Record Mode, this operation is done in Record Ready Mode or in Rehearsal Mode. ● Clearing Selected Tracks While the Song record ready or rehearsal mode is engaged use the SUB MENU [▲] and [▼] buttons to select the “Track Clear?” function. The track bars for tracks which contain data will flash, showing that those tracks can be cleared. Track Cl ear? YES ● Quick Record 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 001 213 337 391 259 434 468 442 001 016 252 213 219 213 213 213 RHYTHM RHYTHM 1 2 BASS CHORD 1 CHORD 2 PAD PHRASE PHRASE MELODY MELODY MELODY MELODY 1 2 3 4 1 2 ACMP VOICE VOICE VOICE L R2 R1 SPLIT DUAL ● Multi Record 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 001 213 337 391 259 434 468 442 471 216 252 213 213 213 213 213 RHYTHM RHYTHM 1 2 BASS CHORD 1 CHORD 2 PAD PHRASE PHRASE MELODY MELODY MELODY MELODY 1 2 3 4 1 2 ACMP VOICE VOICE VOICE L R2 R1 SPLIT • When in Quick Record Mode, Clear Selected Track will clear data as follows: • If the ACMP track is cleared, data that would be in tracks 916 in the Multi Record mode will be cleared at the same time. • If Melody tracks that were recorded with Dual Voice are cleared, tracks recorded with Multi Record Mode R1/R2 parts will be cleared at the same time. • The tracks recorded by Quick recording can be cleared using the Multi recording Track Clear function, and vice versa. DUAL • Demo song tracks cannot be cleared. 94 ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢ ,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,, QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ ,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,, QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢ Song Recording Use the TRACK buttons to select the track you want to clear. The track bar for the track you selected will light steadily and the track bars for the other tracks will be turned off. ● Quick Record 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 001 213 337 391 259 434 468 442 001 016 252 213 219 213 213 213 RHYTHM RHYTHM 1 2 BASS CHORD 1 CHORD 2 PAD PHRASE PHRASE MELODY MELODY MELODY MELODY 1 2 3 4 1 2 ACMP VOICE VOICE VOICE L R2 R1 SPLIT SONG TRACK ACCOMPANIMENT TRACK 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 7 8 9 10 11 12 R2 L 13 DUAL 14 R1 15 16 ● Multi Record 1 2 3 4 5 6 11 12 13 14 15 16 001 213 337 391 259 434 468 442 471 216 252 213 213 213 213 213 RHYTHM RHYTHM 1 2 BASS CHORD 1 CHORD 2 PAD PHRASE PHRASE MELODY MELODY MELODY MELODY 1 2 3 4 1 2 ACMP VOICE VOICE VOICE L R2 R1 SPLIT SONG TRACK ACCOMPANIMENT TRACK 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 R2 L 13 DUAL 14 15 R1 16 Once the desired track has been selected, “Are You Sure?” will appear on the display. Are You Sure? NO/YES Press the [+] (YES) button to actually clear the currently selected track. While the track is being cleared, “Now Deleting” will appear in the top of the display. Now Dele ting... NO/YES • While the track is being cleared, (“Now Deleting” is displayed) never eject the floppy disk or turn off the power to the PSR-730/630. When track clear is finished, the display will return to “Track Clear?” If you press the [–] (NO) button, track clear will not be executed and the display will return to “Track Clear?” 95 ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢ ,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,, QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ ,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,, QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢ Song Recording ● Clearing an Entire Song Use the song selection sub menu (pages 85, 88) to be sure that you have selected the song that you want to clear. While the SONG record-ready or rehearsal mode (page 87) is engaged use the SUB MENU [▲] and [▼] buttons to select the “Song Clear? YES” function. Song Cle ar? NO/YES Press the [+] (YES) button and “Are You Sure? NO/YES” will appear on the display. Press the [+] (YES) button a second time to actually clear the currently selected user song. Are You Sure? NO/YES While the song is being cleared, “Now Deleting” will appear at the top of the display. When the operation is finished, the display will show “Song Clear? - - -” Press [–] (NO) if you want to abort the clear operation. The display will return to “Song Clear? YES” Song Edit The data in user songs can be edited in a way similar to using the Revoice function for Voices and Styles (page 110). The edited data can be written into the user song data. 1 While the SONG record-ready or rehearsal mode (page 87) is engaged use the SUB MENU [▲] and [▼] buttons to select the “Song Edit? YES” function. Song Edi t? NO/YES 2 When the [+] YES button is pressed, the track bar will flash under the lowest numbered track that has data in it. This shows that this is the track that is selected for editing. On the top line of the display, the current voice parameter and value for the track will be displayed. Voice:00 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 Gra nd Piano 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 001 213 337 391 259 434 468 442 471 216 252 213 213 213 213 213 RHYTHM RHYTHM 1 2 BASS CHORD 1 CHORD 2 PAD PHRASE PHRASE MELODY MELODY MELODY MELODY 1 2 3 4 1 2 ACMP VOICE VOICE VOICE L R2 R1 SPLIT 96 DUAL • While the track is being cleared, (“Now Deleting” is displayed) never eject the floppy disk or turn off power to the PSR-730/630. • Demo Songs cannot be cleared. ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢ ,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,, QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ ,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,, QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢ Song Recording 3 Press the TRACK button to select the track you will edit. The track bar for the selected track will light. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 001 213 337 391 259 434 468 442 471 216 252 213 213 213 213 213 RHYTHM RHYTHM 1 2 BASS CHORD 1 CHORD 2 PAD PHRASE PHRASE MELODY MELODY MELODY MELODY 1 2 3 4 1 2 ACMP VOICE VOICE VOICE L R2 R1 SPLIT SONG TRACK ACCOMPANIMENT TRACK 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 R2 L 13 DUAL 14 15 R1 16 4 Use the SUB MENU [▼] button so that the voice parameter you wish to change appears on the display. The parameter and value will appear at the top of the display. Voice:00 1 Gra nd Piano Volume: 127 nd Piano Pan; 0 ReverbDe pth: 0 nd Piano ChorusDe pth: 0 nd Piano DSPDepth : 26 nd Piano Octave: 0 nd Piano • When in Quick Record Mode, if both R1 and R2 voices are recorded on one track, only the R1 voice can be edited. • When in Quick Record Mode, you cannot edit the ACMP track. • If a track with no data is selected, [- - -] will appear at the top of the display and you won’t be able to edit. • Each parameter can be recorded for one track (one each for a track). The parameter changes done in the middle of the song will be lost. In the same way as for the revoice function (page 111), use the [–] and [+] buttons, [1]–[0] number buttons, or the Data Dial to change the setting. See page 110 for information about each value. 5 Repeat steps 3–4 as needed. 6 When editing is finished, press the SUB MENU [▲] button so that “Disk Save? YES” is shown on the display. Press the [+] YES button and the song data will be replaced. Disk Sav e? NO/YES 7 Exit the Record Mode and try playing the song. 97 ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢ ,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,, QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ Style Recording ,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,, QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢ The PSR-730/630 lets you record up to three original “user styles” which can be used for autoaccompaniment in the same way as the preset styles. The user styles are recorded as style numbers 101, 102, 103, and 104, and each style can be recorded with the full complement of 8 tracks (RHYTHM 1, RHYTHM 2, BASS, CHORD 1, CHORD 2, PAD, PHRASE 1, PHRASE 2) and 5 sections (INTRO, MAIN A, MAIN B, ENDING, FILL). • Material recorded on the STYLE tracks will be retained even after turning the power off. See page 152 for the details. • The recorded data will be lost if the power is turned off, the AC adaptor is unplugged, or the batteries fail during recording. • The REGISTRATION MEMORY cannot be recalled during style recording. • The Shortcut functions are not available when one of the Record modes is engaged. ● The STYLE tracks record the following operations and data: • • • • Note on/off. Velocity. Voice number (drum kit number).* Pitch bend. • Up to approximately 1,980 notes for a section (totally ca. 5,940 notes) can be recorded in the PSR-730/630 STYLE tracks. Only one event of the item marked with * can be recorded for each track of the sections. Style Recording Procedure 1 Select a Style To Begin With Select the style from one of the 100 presets that is closest to the type of style you want to create. You will use this style as a starting point for the user style you will create. Example 1) When you want to create a user style with 8 beats in 4/4 time, select style number 001 “8 Beat Pop.” 8Beat Po p1 001 Example 2) When you want to create a user style with 3/4 waltz time, select user style 099 “Vien. Waltz.” Vien. Wa ltz 099 98 • If none of the preset styles is appropriate, select one that has the same time signature and number of measures as the one you want to create, then use the “All Clear” function (page 105) to clear all preset data before entering your own. • If you select a blank user style to begin with (101 … 104), the style will be in 4/4 time and all sections except FILL will be 2 measures long. FILL will be 1 measure long. ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢ ,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,, QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ ,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,, QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢ Style Recording 2 Engage the Record Ready Mode Press the [RECORD] button to engage the record ready mode. The [RECORD] button indicator will light, and the SONG, STYLE, and MULTI PAD [1] … [4] icons will flash, indicating that you must select one of the corresponding record modes. and Piano 001 001 RECORD BEAT 1 2 3 VOICE 4 MULTI PAD dim 6 m M 7aug sus 4 FINGERING 11 119 513 12 GROOVE & DYNAMICS 13 14 15 STYLE 16 252 213 213 213 213 213 2 MELODY MELODY 3 4 ACMP VOICE VOICE VOICE L R2 R1 SPLIT SONG DUAL 3 Select the Style Record Mode Press the [STYLE] button to select the Style record mode. The STYLE menu will automatically be selected and a user style number will appear on the top line of the display. The beat indicator dots will flash at the currently set tempo, indicating that the record ready (synchro start) mode is engaged. Also, the indicators for the auto-accompaniment section buttons (INTRO, MAIN A, MAIN B, and ENDING) will flash, indicating that a section and track must be selected before recording can begin. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 15 16 219 219 340 322 324 434 468 442 471 213 213 RHYTHM RHYTHM 1 2 VOICE VOICE R2 R1 BASS CHORD 1 CHORD 2 PAD PHRASE PHRASE MELODY 1 1 2 STYLE DUAL MAIN / AUTO FILL INTRO A B A B ENDING STYLE • The icons of tracks which already contain data will appear continuously rather than flashing when the style record mode is selected. • If the style record mode is selected while a preset style is selected, a user style which does not contain any recorded data will automatically be selected. If all user styles already contain data, however, user style number 101 (user style number 1) will be selected. • If the style record mode is engaged when a user style has already been selected, that user style number will be used for recording. • The following panel setting changes will occur when the style record mode is engaged: • The measure number will be reset to “1”. • If the Metronome function is on (page 116), the metronome will sound at the current tempo. • The Synchro Stop function will be turned off. 99 ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢ ,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,, QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ ,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,, QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢ Style Recording 4 If Necessary, Select a User Style Number If the desired user style is not already selected, use the [–] and [+] buttons, [1]–[0] number buttons, or the Data Dial to select it. 5 Select a Section to Record Press the [INTRO], MAIN [A]/[B], [ENDING], or [FILL] button to select a section for recording. To select the INTRO section Press the INTRO button ....................... the INTRO lamp will light To select the MAIN A section Press the MAIN A button ...................... the MAIN A lamp will light To select the MAIN B section Press the MAIN B button ...................... the MAIN B lamp will light To select the ENDING section Press the ENDING button .................... the ENDING lamp will light To select the FILL section Press the MAIN A/B button twice ......... the MAIN A /B lamp will light • Multiple sections cannot be recorded at the same time. • If you don’t specifically select a section, the MAIN A section will automatically be selected for recording. • Although the preset FILL sections have 4 variations (refer to page 27), user-style FILL sections can have only 1. When using a preset style as a basis for a user style, the AA FILL variation is used. For example, press the [INTRO] button, lighting the INTRO indicator. The indicators for the other sections will go out. This shows that the INTRO section has been selected as the section for recording. MAIN / AUTO FILL INTRO A B A B ENDING At the bottom of the display, the RHYTHM1 track bar will appear (not flashing). This shows that RHYTHM1 has been selected as the recording track. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 219 219 340 322 324 434 468 442 471 RHYTHM RHYTHM 1 2 BASS CHORD 1 CHORD 2 PAD PHRASE PHRASE MELODY 1 1 2 6 Select a Track to Record When using a preset style as a basis for a user style, the BASS, CHORD 1, CHORD 2, PAD, PHRASE 1, and PHRASE 2 tracks must be cleared before they can be selected for recording (see page 105). The RHYTHM 1 and RHYTHM 2 tracks can be “overdubbed” — i.e. new notes can be added without erasing the original data. Use the TRACK buttons to select RHYTHM 1, BASS, CHORD 1/2, PAD, or PHRASE 1/2 as the style track you want to record. 100 • Only one track can be recorded at a time. • If you don’t specifically select a track, the RHYTHM 1 track will automatically be selected when you start recording. ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢ ,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,, QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ ,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,, QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢ Style Recording 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 219 219 340 322 324 434 468 442 471 RHYTHM RHYTHM 1 2 BASS CHORD 1 CHORD 2 PAD PHRASE PHRASE MELODY 1 1 2 ACCOMPANIMENT TRACK 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 ◆ Rehearsal Mode If the [SYNC START] button is pressed while in Record Ready Mode, it will be canceled (the beat lamps will go out) and the PSR-730/630 will enter Rehearsal Mode. In this mode, you can try playing your song before actually recording it. Pressing the [SYNC START] button will return to Record Ready Mode. SYNC STOP START NIMENT 7 Select a Voice, If Necessary If necessary, select a voice for the track to be recorded by pressing the [VOICE] button and selecting in the normal way. • The Registration Memory buttons will be disabled in the Style record mode. 8 Record Recording will begin as soon as you play a note on the keyboard or press the [START/STOP] button. The BEAT indicator dots will begin to indicate the current beat, and the MEASURE parameter will show the current measure number during recording. START / STOP 009 MEASURE BEAT 1 2 3 4 MULTI PAD The style will repeat continuously when recording is started, so you can continue to add (“overdub”) notes until the current track is complete. The style should be recorded based on a CM7 chord (C Major Seven) in order for it to function properly when used for auto-accompaniment. C S C C = chord tone C S C C, S = scale tones • Before actually starting to record you can try playing the PSR-730/630 the way it is set up by using the “Rehearsal Mode”: press the [SYNC START] button to temporarily disengage the record ready mode, rehearse as necessary, then press the [SYNC START] button again to return to the record ready mode. • If the memory becomes full while recording, “Full” will appear on the display and recording will stop (the rehearsal mode will be engaged). • Even though you can start recording with the user style memory space thoroughly consumed, “Full” will be shown on the display and the recording will forcibly be stopped. In this case, first exit from the record mode, next select the unnecessary user style, and then enter the record mode again and execute the Clear function (see page 105) to secure the free space to record. 101 ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢ ,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,, QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ ,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,, QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢ Style Recording Observe the following rules when recording the MAIN and FILL sections: • Use only the CM7 scale tones when recording the BASS and PHRASE tracks (i.e. C, D, E, G, A, and B). • Use only the chord tones when recording the CHORD and PAD tracks (i.e. C, E, G, and B). Any appropriate chord or chord progression can be used for the INTRO and ENDING sections. The basic chord for the accompaniment is called the source chord. The default source chord is set as CM7, but you can change it to whatever chord is easy for you to play. For details, see “Refining User Styles with Style File Format” (page 148). • During recording you can use the TRACK buttons to turn playback of previously-recorded tracks on or off as required. • For recording the RHYTHM 1/2 tracks, the instrument symbols printed on the front edge of the panel show you the instrument assignments to each key. See Keyboard Percussion on page 140 for playing each drum/ percussion sound. 9 Stop Recording Stop recording by pressing the [START/STOP] button. The PSR-730/630 will return to Record Ready Mode. When recording is stopped the MEASURE number on the display will return to “1”. START / STOP • You can also press the [SYNC START] button to stop recording and return to the Record Ready Mode. 10 Record Additional Sections & Tracks as Required By repeating steps 5 through 9, above, you can select and record additional sections and tracks as required. 11 Exit From the Record Mode When you’re finished recording a style, press the [RECORD] button so that its indicator goes out to exit from the record mode. The recorded user style can now be used in the same way as the preset styles (page 22). RECORD 102 • The voice data in specific user style tracks can be “revoiced” in the same way as the preset styles, as described on page 112. This, however, does not actually rewrite the user style data. In order to actually change the user style data first use the revoice function, then immediately engage and disengage the style record mode without recording any data. ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢ ,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,, QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ ,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,, QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢ Style Recording Drum Cancel This function makes it possible to erase specific drum instruments from the RHYTHM 1 and RHYTHM 2 tracks. It’s handy, for example, when you want to erase just the bass drum recorded on the RHYTHM 1 track. While recording either the RHYTHM 1 or RHYTHM 2 track, use the SUB MENU [▲] and [▼] buttons to select “Drum Cancel”. • Drum Cancel cannot be used for the BASS, CHORD 1/2, PAD, or PHRASE 1/2 tracks. Drum Can cel Then, press the key on the key board corresponding to the instrument you want to cancel. Quantize Quantize can be used to align notes to the nearest specified beat to tighten up loose timing. 1 With the style Record Ready Mode (or Rehearsal Mode) engaged and the target style and its section selected, use the SUB MENU [▲] and [▼] buttons to select “Quantize? YES”. Quantize ? YES 2 Press the [+] (YES) button to engage the quantize function (or [–] to abort) . The current quantize value will appear to the left of “Quantize:” on the top line of the display. Use the [–] and [+] buttons, or the Data Dial to select the desired quantize value (4, 6, 8, 12, 16, 24, 32). When the quantize function is executed, all notes in the target track will be aligned with the nearest note of the corresponding value. Quantize : 32 2 103 ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢ ,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,, QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ ,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,, QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢ Style Recording Quantize Value One measure of 8th notes before quantization Note 4 Quarter note 6 Quarter note triplet 8 Eighth note 12 Eighth note triplet 16 Sixteenth note 24 Sixteenth note triplet 32 Thirty-second note After quantization 3 Press the SUB MENU [▼] button once so that “Execute? NO/YES” appears on the display. Then press the [+] (YES) button to execute the quantize function, or the [–] (NO) button to cancel (the display will return to “Quantize? YES”). 4 After the quantize operation is completed, “Undo” will appear on the top line of the display. Undo lets you undo the effect of applying the quantize function. Undo? nd PiYES Pressing the [START/STOP] button will cause the quantized style to replay so that you can check it. Press the [+] (YES) button to undo the quantize operation. Press the [–] (NO) button and the undo won’t be executed. The display will return to “Quantize? YES.” Naming Styles You can give your own name (8 characters or less) to user styles. With the Style Record Ready Mode (or Rehearsal Mode) engaged and the target style selected, use the SUB MENU [▲] and [▼] buttons so that “UserStyle...” appears on the display. The current name for the style will be displayed at the upper right of the display. UserStyl e: Use rSty1 The method of setting the characters is the same as for Registration Naming (page 58). UserStyl e: 104 ORI GINAL • After exiting from the “Undo” screen, the undo function cannot be applied. ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢ ,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,, QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ ,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,, QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢ Style Recording Clearing User Style Data This function makes it possible to clear unneeded data from the PSR-730/630 User Style tracks. ● Clearing an Entire Style While the STYLE record-ready or rehearsal mode is engaged use the SUB MENU [▲] and [▼] buttons to select the “All Clear? YES” function, then press the [+] (YES) button: “Are You Sure? NO/YES” will appear on the display. Press the [+] (YES) button a second time to actually clear the currently selected user style (the preset styles cannot be cleared). Press [–] (NO) if you want to abort the clear operation. All Clea r? Are You Gra nd PiYES Sure? NO/YES ● Clearing Selected Style Tracks While the STYLE record-ready or rehearsal mode is engaged and a section is selected, use the SUB MENU [▲] and [▼] buttons to select the “Track Clear?” function. The style track icons corresponding to tracks which contain data will flash. Use the TRACK buttons to select track(s) you want to clear (the selected tracks will be bracketed by two horizontal bars). Track Cl ear? 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 nd PiYES 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 219 219 340 322 324 434 468 442 471 201 252 213 213 213 213 213 RHYTHM RHYTHM 1 2 BASS CHORD 1 CHORD 2 PAD PHRASE PHRASE MELODY MELODY MELODY MELODY 1 2 3 4 1 2 ACMP VOICE VOICE VOICE L R2 R1 SPLIT 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 DUAL 9 219 219 340 322 324 434 468 442 471 RHYTHM RHYTHM 1 2 BASS CHORD 1 CHORD 2 PAD PHRASE PHRASE MELODY 1 1 2 ACCOMPANIMENT TRACK 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Once the desired tracks have been selected, “Are You Sure? NO/YES” will appear on the display. Press the [+] (YES) button to actually clear the currently selected track(s). Press [–] (NO) if you want to abort the clear operation. 105 ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢ ,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,, QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ Multi Pad Recording ,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,, QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢ In addition to the preset MULTI PAD sets, the PSR-730/630 has 16 user-recordable sets that you can use to store your own creations. • Material recorded in the MULTI PADs will be retained even after turning the power off. See page 152 for the details. • The recorded data will be lost if the power is turned off, the AC adaptor is unplugged, or the batteries fail during recording. • The Shortcut functions are not available when one of the Record modes is engaged. ● The MULTI PADs record the following operations and data: • • • • • • • • • • Note on/off. Velocity. R1 voice (voice number, volume, reverb depth, chorus depth, pan). Chord match on/off. Pitch bend, pitch bend range. Modulation. Sustain on/off. Expression ( with Pedal2 ). Brightness ( with Pedal2 ). Resonance ( with Pedal2 ). Multi Pad Recording Procedure 1 Engage the Record Ready Mode Press the [RECORD] button to engage the record-ready mode. The [RECORD] button indicator will light, and the SONG, STYLE, and MULTI PAD [1] … [4] icons will flash, indicating that you must select one of the corresponding record modes. and Piano 001 001 RECORD BEAT 1 2 3 VOICE 4 MULTI PAD dim 6 m M 7aug sus 4 FINGERING 11 119 513 12 GROOVE & DYNAMICS 13 14 15 16 STYLE 252 213 213 213 213 213 2 MELODY MELODY 3 4 ACMP VOICE VOICE VOICE L R2 R1 SPLIT 106 DUAL SONG • Up to approximately 100 notes for each pad can be recorded in the PSR-730/630 MULTI PADs. ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢ ,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,, QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ ,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,, QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢ Multi Pad Recording 2 Select the MULTI PAD Record Mode Press any MULTI PAD button ([1] … [4]) to select the MULTI PAD record mode (the MULTI PAD button you press will be selected for recording). The MULTI PAD menu will automatically be selected and a user pad set number will appear on the top line of the display. The beat indicator dots will flash at the currently set tempo, indicating that the record ready (synchro-start) mode is engaged. 1 STOP 2 3 Bank 37: MENU 007 DISK MULTI PAD STYLE SONG REGIST MEMORY DISK 116 TEMPO 000 TRANSPOSE MULTI PAD 4 Use rPad1 A 100 B ONE TOUCH SETTING REPEAT ACMP/SONG VOLUME 1 2 3 4 FREEZE REGISTRATION MEMORY 001 001 MEASURE BEAT 1 2 3 VOICE 4 MULTI PAD • If the [RECORD] button is pressed while a preset pad set is selected, the lowestnumbered user pad set which does not contain any recorded data will automatically be selected. If other user pad sets already contain data, however, user pad number 1 will be selected. • The DSP effect cannot be turned on during MULTI PAD recording or the MULTI PAD record standby mode. If the DSP effect is on when the MULTI PAD record mode is engaged, it will automatically be turned off. • If the Metronome function is on (page 116), the metronome will sound at the current tempo. 3 If Necessary, Select a User Pad Set Number If the desired user pad set is not already selected, use the [–] and [+] buttons, [1]– [0] number buttons, or the Data Dial to select as required. 4 If Necessary, Select a MULTI PAD to Record If the MULTI PAD you pressed in step 2, above, is not the one you want to record, you can select any other pad at this point simply pressing the appropriate MULTI PAD button. The selected MULTI PAD icon will appear in the display. 1 2 3 4 MULTI PAD BEAT 1 2 3 4 MULTI PAD 5 Specify Chord Match if Required If you record a MULTI PAD with a pitched voice, the Chord Match function (see page 63) can be specified for that pad by using the SUB MENU buttons to select the Chord Match function for the corresponding pad (“P1ChdMatch” … “P4ChdMatch”) while in the record standby or rehearsal mode, and then using the [+] button to turn it “On” or “Off” as you like. P1ChdMat ch: On • The Chord Match on/ off status can be changed in the SUB MENU “MULTI PAD” even after exiting the recording mode. eggio 107 ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢ ,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,, QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ ,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,, QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢ Multi Pad Recording 6 Record Recording will begin as soon as you play a note on the keyboard (synchro start) or press the [START/STOP] button, and the BEAT indicator dots will begin to indicate the current beat as in the Auto Accompaniment mode. If you are recording a Chord Match phrase, be sure to base your phrase on a CM7 chord to ensure proper Chord Match operation. See page 101 for more details on recording around a CM7 chord. START / STOP • Before actually starting to record you can try playing the PSR-730/630 the way it is set up by using the “Rehearsal Mode”: press the [SYNC START] button to temporarily disengage the record ready mode, rehearse as necessary, then press the [SYNC START] button again to return to the record ready mode. • Whenever you record a MULTI PAD, any previously recorded material in the same MULTI PAD will be erased. 009 MEASURE BEAT 1 2 3 4 MULTI PAD 7 Stop Recording Stop recording by pressing the [START/STOP] button. When recording is stopped, the record-ready mode will be engaged. START / STOP 8 Record Additional Pads as Required By repeating steps 3 through 7, above, you can select and record additional pads as required. 9 Exit From the Record Mode When you’re finished recording pads, press the [RECORD] button so that its indicator goes out to exit from the record mode. The recorded user pad can now be played back in the same way as the preset pads (page 61). RECORD 108 • If the memory becomes full while recording, “Full” will appear on the display and recording will stop (the recordready mode will be engaged). ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢ ,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,, QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ ,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,, QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢ Multi Pad Recording Naming Pads You can give your own name (8 characters or less) to user pad sets. With the Pad Record Ready Mode (or Rehearsal Mode) engaged and the target Pad set selected, use the SUB MENU [▲] and [▼] buttons so that “Pad Naming...” appears on the display. The current name for the Pad set will be displayed at the upper right of the display. _se rPad1 Pad Nami ng: U The method of setting the characters is the same as for Registration Naming (page 58). Pad Nami ng: LIV EPAD1 Clearing User Pad Data This function makes it possible to clear unneeded data from the PSR-730/630 MULTI PADs. ● Clearing an Entire Pad Set While the MULTI PAD record-ready or rehearsal mode is engaged use the SUB MENU [▲] and [▼] buttons to select the “Bank Clear? YES” function, then press the [+] (YES) button: “Are You Sure? NO/YES” will appear on the display. Press the [+] (YES) button a second time to actually clear the currently selected pad set (the preset pad sets cannot be cleared). Press [–] (NO) if you want to abort the clear operation. Bank Cle ar? • If the pad you selected has already been cleared, “Bank Clear? - - -” will appear on the display. YES ● Clearing Selected MULTI PADs While the MULTI PAD record-ready or rehearsal mode is engaged use the SUB MENU [▲] and [▼] buttons to select the “Pad Clear?” function. The MULTI PAD icons corresponding to pads which contain data will flash (preset pad set data cannot be cleared). Pad Clea r? YES Use the MULTI PAD buttons to select the pad you want to clear (the icon corresponding to the selected pad will appear continuously on the display). “Are You Sure? NO/YES” will appear on the display. Press the [+] (YES) button to actually clear the currently selected pad. Press [–] (NO) if you want to abort the clear operation. • If the pad you selected has already been cleared, “Pad Clear? - - -” will appear on the display. 109 ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢ ,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,, QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ Revoicing ,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,, QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢ The PSR-730/630 REVOICE function lets you change the following parameters for the R1, R2 and L voices and the AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT tracks. ● Revoice Parameters Parameter Display Range Voice Voice Name PSR-730: 1 … 707 Comments Assigns a voice number to the specified PSR-730/630 voice or track. PSR-630: 1 … 692 Volume Volume 0 … 127 Sets the volume of the specified PSR-730/ 630 voice or track. Octave Octave –2 … 2 Shifts the pitch of the specified voice or track up or down by one or two octaves. A setting of “0” produces normal pitch. Pan Pan –7 … 7 Positions the sound of the specified voice or track from left to right in the stereo sound field. “–7” is full left, “7” is full right, “0” is center, and all other settings are corresponding positions in between. Reverb Depth RevDepth 0 … 127 Sets the reverb depth for the specified voice or track, and thus the amount of reverb effect applied to that voice or track. Chorus Depth ChoDepth 0 … 127 Sets the chorus depth for the specified voice or track, and thus the amount of chorus effect applied to that voice or track. DSP Depth DspDepth 0 … 127 Sets the DSP depth for the specified voice or track, and thus the amount of DSP effect applied to that voice or track. • You cannot enter Revoice Mode when one of the Record Modes is engaged. • With Style Revoice, the octave and the DSP depth cannot be changed. • When using Style Revoice for the RHYTHM1 track, only drum kit voices (see page 19) can be selected. • When using Style Revoice for the RHYTHM2 track, any of the voices can be selected but no chord changes will occur when using Auto Accompaniment. Revoicing the R1, R2, and L Voices 1 Select the VOICE REVOICE Mode While the VOICE menu is selected, press the [REVOICE] button (actually, the order here is not important: you can also press the [VOICE] button after pressing the [REVOICE] button). The [REVOICE] button indicator will light and the R1 voice track will be bracketed by two horizontal bars (i.e. the R1 voice is initially selected for revoicing). Gra nd Piano 001 VOICE 14 15 16 VOICE STYLE STYLE 084 109 001 VOICE VOICE VOICE L R2 R1 SPLIT 110 DUAL • The VOICE REVOICE mode cannot be selected while one of the record modes is engaged. VOICE GROOVE & DYNAMICS REVOICE SONG SONG • The VOICE REVOICE mode will automatically be selected if the [REVOICE] button is pressed while any menu other than STYLE or SONG is selected. ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢ ,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,, QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ ,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,, QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢ Revoicing 2 If Necessary Select a Voice to Revoice Use the three rightmost TRACK buttons to select the voice you want to revoice: L, R2, or R1. The selected tracks will be bracketed by two horizontal bars. 14 15 16 084 109 001 VOICE VOICE VOICE L R2 R1 SPLIT DUAL L R2 14 15 R1 • The TRACK button below the selected voice can be used to turn the voice on or off. Make sure that the voice is turned on if you want to monitor the sound while revoicing (the R1 voice cannot be turned off). 16 3 Select and Edit the Revoice Parameters Use the SUB MENU [▲] and [▼] buttons to select the desired parameter. The name of the selected parameter will appear on the top line of the display to the right of the parameter’s current value. Use the [–] and [+] buttons, the number buttons, or the data dial to set the parameter’s value as required. Refer to the “Revoice Parameters” chart on page 111. R1Voice: 001 Gra nd Piano R1Volume : 100 R1Octave : 0 R1Pan: 0 : R1RevDep th: 28 R1ChoDep th: 70 R1DspDep th: 26 4 Repeat as Required and Exit When Done Repeat steps 2 and 3, above, to revoice the voices as required, then press the [REVOICE] button so that its indicator goes out to exit from the REVOICE mode. REVOICE • You can jump directly to the REVOICE R2 VOICE display by pressing and holding the [DUAL VOICE] button for a few seconds. • You can jump directly to the REVOICE L VOICE display by pressing and holding the [SPLIT VOICE] button for a few seconds. • Minus settings for the Octave and Pan parameters can be directly entered by pressing the appropriate number button while holding the [–] button. • When the DSP type is set as insertion, the DSP depth parameter cannot be changed. • The REVOICE mode will automatically be exited if the MENU [▲ ] and [▼ ] buttons are used to select any of the menus to the left of the display. • Save any revoice settings you want to keep to the PSR-730/630 REGISTRATION MEMORY (page 57). The revoice setting are temporary and will be lost if the power is turned off, a different R1 panel voice is selected while the Voice Set function is on, or a REGISTRATION MEMORY is recalled. 111 ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢ ,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,, QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ ,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,, QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢ Revoicing Revoicing a Style 1 Select the STYLE REVOICE Mode While the STYLE menu and the style you want to revoice are selected, press the [REVOICE] button (actually, the order here is not important: you can also press the [STYLE] button after pressing the [REVOICE] button). The [REVOICE] button indicator will light and the RHYTHM 1 track will be bracketed by two horizontal bars (i.e. the RHYTHM 1 track is initially selected for revoicing). 8Beat Po p1 001 STYLE SONG DIGITAL EQ 1 116 TEMPO A 100 000 DISK TRANSPOSE MULTI EFFECT 2 REVERB 3 4 1 2 3 VOICE FREEZE 4 DSP 6 HARMONY SYNC STOP 7 8 STYLE STYLE 9 219 219 355 337 339 406 228 362 888 RHYTHM RHYTHM 1 2 BASS CHORD 1 CHORD 2 • The STYLE REVOICE mode cannot be selected while a voice is being revoiced during song playback. VOICE REGISTRATION MEMORY VARIATION CHORUS 5 ONE TOUCH SETTING REPEAT ACMP/SONG VOLUME • The STYLE REVOICE mode cannot be selected while one of the record modes is engaged. Sra B PAD • The STYLE REVOICE mode can even be selected by pressing the [REVOICE] button while an accompaniment is playing. REVOICE PHRASE PHRASE MELODY 1 2 1 SONG SONG • The Registration Memory Freeze function will automatically be turned on when entering the Style Revoice Mode. 2 Select the Section(s) to be Revoiced Press INTRO, MAIN A/B or ENDING button(s) to select the section(s). • Style revoicing affects all sections of the selected style. 3 If Necessary Select a Track to Revoice Use the TRACK buttons to select the accompaniment track you want to revoice: RHYTHM 1, RHYTHM 2, BASS, CHORD 1, CHORD 2, PAD, PHRASE 1, or PHRASE 2. The selected tracks will be bracketed by two horizontal bars. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 • The TRACK button below the selected track can be used to turn the track on or off. Make sure that the track is turned on if you want to monitor the sound while revoicing. 219 219 355 337 339 406 228 362 888 RHYTHM RHYTHM 1 2 BASS CHORD 1 CHORD 2 PAD PHRASE PHRASE MELODY 1 2 1 • Any voice can be selected for the RHYTHM 2 track, but please note that the RHYTHM 2 track is not affected by the AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT feature. ACCOMPANIMENT TRACK 1 112 2 3 4 5 6 • Only drum kits (see page 19) can be selected for the RHYTHM 1 track. 7 8 • The OCTAVE parameter and the DSP depth cannot be edited in the STYLE REVOICE mode. ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢ ,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,, QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ ,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,, QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢ Revoicing 4 Select and Edit the Revoice Parameters Use the SUB MENU [▲] and [▼] buttons to select the desired parameter. The name of the selected parameter will appear on the top line of the display to the right of the parameter’s current value. Use the [–] and [+] buttons, the number buttons, or the data dial to set the parameter’s value as required. Refer to the “Revoice Parameters” chart on page 110. • “- - -” will appear on the top line of the display if you select an accompaniment track which contains no data for revoicing, and revoicing will not be possible. • Minus settings for the Octave and Pan parameters can be directly entered by pressing the appropriate number button while holding the [–] button. • When a voice (especially bass voices) used for a Style is changed from the XG Voice to the Panel Voice using the Revoice function, the octave played for the voice may change. 5 Repeat as Required and Exit When Done Repeat steps 2 and 4, above, to revoice the tracks as required, then press the [REVOICE] button so that its indicator goes out to exit from the REVOICE mode. REVOICE • The REVOICE mode will automatically be exited if the MENU [ ▲] and [ ▼] buttons are used to select any of the menus to the left of the display. • Save any revoice settings you want to keep to the PSR-730/630 REGISTRATION MEMORY (page 57). The revoice setting are temporary and will be lost if the power is turned off, a different style is selected, or a REGISTRATION MEMORY is recalled. 113 ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢ ,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,, QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ Overall Functions ,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,, QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢ Some of the functions in the OVERALL function group have already been described in appropriate sections of this manual. Others will be introduced for the first time in this section. Refer to the chart below for the page numbers on which each function is described. The chart also lists the full name of each function, the abbreviated name which appears on the display, and the available settings or range of settings. Ranges are indicated by two or more values separated by ellipsis (…). Function Touch Sensitivity Pitch Bend Range Master Tuning Scale Tuning Note Scale Tuning Song Transpose Metronome Split Voice Split Point Accompaniment Split Point Fingering Mode Voice Set Pedal1 Display TouchSense PB Range Tuning S.TuneNote S.TuneValue SongTrans Metronome SplitPoint AcmpSplit FingerMode VoiceSet Pedal1 Pedal2 Pedal2 Pedal1 Polarity Pedal2 Polarity Modulation Wheel P1 Polarity P2 Polarity ModWheel Settings 0 … 127 01 … 12 –50 … +50 C…B –64 … 63 –12 … +12 Off, On 0 … 127 0 … 127 Multi,Single, Fingered1, Fingered2, Full Key, Multi Off, On Sustain … Groove&Dyn. Expression … Groove&Dyn. Normal, Revers Normal, Revers Modulation, Brightness, Resonance Page 115 54 115 115 115 116 116 21 30 31 116 117 117 118 118 55 To access an OVERALL function first use the MENU [▲] and [▼] buttons to move the triangular indicator in the display next to “OVERALL”. MENU MIDI DIGITAL EFFECT OVERALL GROOVE&DYNAMICS Then use the SUB MENU [▲] and [▼] buttons to select the desired function from within the OVERALL menu. When a function is selected the current setting will appear to the right of the function name on the top line of the display. Once the function has been selected, use the [–] and [+] buttons or data dial (or number buttons, where applicable) to set the function as required. SUB MENU 114 TouchSen se: 100 ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢ ,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,, QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ ,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,, QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢ Overall Functions ■ Touch Sensitivity This function sets the keyboard touch sensitivity. The range is from “0” to “127”. The higher the value the higher the sensitivity. When the touch sensitivity value is set to “0”, “Off” appears in the display and the same volume is produced no matter how hard you play the keys. — this setting can produce a more realistic effect with voices that normally do not have touch response: e.g. organ and harpsichord. TouchSen se: 100 ■ Pitch Bend Range See page 54. ■ Modulation Wheel See page 55. ■ Master Tuning The Tuning function sets the overall pitch of the PSR-730/630 over a ±100 cent range (from –100 to +100) in 1-cent increments. Since 1 cent is 1/100th of a semitone, the total tuning range is from a semitone below normal pitch to a semitone above normal pitch. Tuning: 0 • The “normal” tuning value (“0”) can be recalled by simultaneously pressing the [–] and [+] buttons. • Minus values can be entered by using the number buttons while holding the [–] button. ■ Scale Tuning Scale tuning allows each individual note of the octave to be tuned over range from –64 to +63 cents in 1-cent increments (1 cent = 1/100th of a semitone). This makes it possible to produce subtle tuning variations, or tune the instrument to totally different scales (e.g. classic or Arabic scales). First use the S.TuneNote function to select the note to be tuned. The range is from C to B: C, C#, D, D#, E, F, F#, G, G#, A, A#, B. S.TuneNo te: C note C# D# F# G# A# Db Eb C# D# Gb Ab Bb F# G# A# C note D E F G A • The scale tuning settings are common to each octave on the keyboard. • The Accompaniment and Multi Pad sound is affected by Scale Tuning. • The “normal” tuning value (“0”) can be recalled by simultaneously pressing the [–] and [+] buttons. • Minus values can be entered by using the number buttons while holding the [–] button. B C D E F G A B Then use the S.TuneValue function to tune the selected note as required. S.TuneVa lue:-50 115 ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢ ,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,, QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ ,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,, QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢ Overall Functions ■ Song Transpose This function allows you to transpose only the song to be played back. That means you can play along with your desired song (Minus-one function) in the desired key without affecting your performance. SongTran s.: 0 ■ Metronome When turned “on” the PSR-730/630 metronome will sound during AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT playback as well as SONG playback and recording. Metronom e: Off • Since the Transpose function (page 56) sets the overall transpose value, if it is changed, the Song Transpose value will be changed by the same amount at the same time. • The “normal” transpose value (“00”) can be recalled by simultaneously pressing the [–] and [+] buttons. • Minus values can be entered by using the number buttons while holding the [–] button. • The Song Transpose value is automatically set to “00” when the user song record mode is engaged. ■ Split Voice Split Point See page 21. ■ Accompaniment Split Point See page 30. ■ Fingering Mode See page 31. ■ Voice Set The VOICE SET feature brings out the best in each individual voice by automatically setting a range of important voice-related parameters whenever an R1 panel voice is selected. The parameters that may be set by the VOICE SET feature are listed below. This function lets you turn VOICE SET on or off, as required. VoiceSet : On ● Voice Set parameter list • R1 Voice (Volume, pan) • R2 Voice (Voice number, volume, octave, pan, reverb depth, chorus depth, DSP depth) • Harmony type, volume • Pitch Bend Range • DSP Return Level 116 The parameter below is set whether or not the voice set function is on or off. • R1 Voice (Octave, reverb depth, chorus depth, DSP depth) • Reverb ON/OFF • Chorus ON/OFF • DSP ON/OFF, variation ON/OFF • DSP type • Multi Effect ON/OFF • Multi Effect Part setting • Multi Effect 1 type, Dry/Wet • Multi Effect 2 type, Dry/Wet • The Voice Set function is on by default when the power is initially turned on. ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢ ,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,, QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ ,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,, QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢ Overall Functions ■ Pedal The various functions can be assigned to the Pedals 1/2: the footswitch connected to the SUSTAIN jack (Pedal 1) and the foot controller connected to the FOOT VOL. jack (Pedal 2) on the rear panel. ● Select the Functions to Be Controlled by the Pedals Select one of the 16 functions that can be controlled by Pedal 1, and one of the 24 functions that can be controlled by Pedal 2. Pedal1: Sus tain Pedal2: Exp ression Pedal Function List Pedal 1/2 Functions SUSTAIN When you step on the foot switch, sustain is applied to the keyboard notes. SOSTENUTO When you step on the foot switch, the sostenuto effect is applied to the keyboard notes. SOFT When you step on the foot switch, the soft effect is applied to the keyboard notes. REGIST.+ When you step on the foot switch, a register with one number higher is recalled. For example, if you step on the foot switch with bank 1-3 recalled, 1-4 will be recalled, then next 1-1 will be recalled. REGIST. - When you step on the foot switch, a register with one number lower is recalled. For example, if you step on the foot switch with bank 3-2 recalled, 3-1 will be recalled, then next 3-4 will be recalled. TAP TEMPO When the accompaniment is stopped (including synchro start standby), stepping on the switch the number of beats in a measure will cause the tempo value to be set at the actual speed at which you tapped the switch, and the accompaniment will start. For 3/4 time, tap three times, and for 4/4 time, tap 4 times. The tempo can be set in a range from 32-280. START/STOP Stepping on the foot switch has the same effect as pressing the START/STOP button on the panel. BREAK When you step on the foot switch, accompaniment will stop. Releasing the switch with the foot will cause it to play again from the next measure. BASS HOLD When one of the Fingering Modes other than Full Keyboard is selected, the bass root note will be held as long as you step on the footswitch. INTRO Stepping on the foot switch has the same effect as pressing the INTRO button on the panel. MAIN A/AUTO FILL Stepping on the foot switch has the same effect as pressing the MAIN A/AUTO FILL button on the panel. MAIN B/AUTO FILL Stepping on the foot switch has the same effect as pressing the MAIN B/AUTO FILL button on the panel. ENDING Stepping on the foot switch has the same effect as pressing the ENDING button on the panel. DSP VARIATION Stepping on the foot switch has the same effect as pressing the DSP VARIATION button on the panel. HARMONY Stepping on the foot switch has the same effect as pressing the HARMONY button on the panel. GROOVE & DYNAMICS Stepping on the foot switch has the same effect as pressing the GROOVE & DYNAMICS button on the panel. 117 ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢ ,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,, QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ ,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,, QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢ Overall Functions Only Pedal 2 Functions EXPRESSION Simultaneously controls the volume of the R1, R2 and L voices (your performance). R1 VOLUME Controls the R1 voice volume. R2 VOLUME Controls the R2 voice volume. L VOLUME Controls the L voice volume. ACMP/SONG VOLUME Controls the accompaniment/song volume in the same way as the ACMP/SONG VOLUME [▼] and [▲] buttons. HARMONY VOLUME Controls the harmony volume. BRIGHTNESS Controls the brightness of the R1 voice. RESONANCE Controls the resonance of the R1 voice. ● Polarity Change (Normal/Reverse) You can change the polarity of PEDAL 1/2 (foot switch/foot controller). For example, when you are controlling volume with the foot controller, you can set whether it increases or decreases when you step on the pedal. P1 Polar ity:Nor mal P2 Polar ity:Rev ers 118 ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢ ,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,, QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ MIDI Functions ,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,, QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢ In the rear panel of your PSR-730/630, there are MIDI terminals (MIDI IN, MIDI OUT), a TO HOST terminal, and a HOST SELECT switch. By using the MIDI functions you can expand your musical possibilities. This section explains what MIDI is, and what it can do, as well as how you can use MIDI on your PSR-730/630. What’s MIDI? No doubt you have heard the terms “acoustic instrument” and “digital instrument.” In the world today, these are the two main categories of instruments. Let’s consider an acoustic piano and a classical guitar as representative acoustic instruments. They are easy to understand. With the piano, you strike a key, and a hammer inside hits some strings and plays a note. With the guitar, you directly pluck a string and the note sounds. But how does a digital instrument go about playing a note? ● Acoustic guitar note production ● Digital instrument note production L Sampling Note Tone Generator (Electronic circuit) Sampling Note R Playing the keyboard Pluck a string and the body resonates the sound. Based on playing information from the keyboard, a sampling note stored in the tone generator is played through the speakers. As shown in the illustration above, in an electronic instrument the sampling note (previously recorded note) stored in the tone generator section (electronic circuit) is played based on information received from the keyboard. So then what is the information from the keyboard that becomes the basis for note production? For example, let’s say you play a “C” quarter note using the grand piano sound on the PSR-730/630 keyboard. Unlike an acoustic instrument that puts out a resonated note, the electronic instrument puts out information from the keyboard such as “with what voice,” “with which key,” “about how strong,” “when was it pressed,” and “when was it released.” Then each piece of information is changed into a number value and sent to the tone generator. Using these numbers as a basis, the tone generator plays the stored sampling note. Example of Keyboard Information Voice number (with what voice) Note number (with which key) Note on (when was it pressed) and note off (when was it released) Velocity (about how strong) 01 (grand piano) 60 (C3) Timing expressed numerically (quarter note) 120 (strong) 119 ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢ ,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,, QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ ,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,, QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢ MIDI Functions MIDI is an acronym that stands for Musical Instrument Digital Interface, which allows electronic musical instruments to communicate with each other, by sending and receiving compatible Note, Control Change, Program Change and various other types of MIDI data, or messages. The PSR-730/630 can control a MIDI device by transmitting note related data and various types of controller data. The PSR-730/630 can be controlled by the incoming MIDI messages which automatically determine tone generator mode, select MIDI channels, voices and effects, change parameter values and of course play the voices specified for the various parts. MIDI messages can be divided into two groups: Channel messages and System messages. Below is an explanation of the various types of MIDI messages which the PSR-730/630 can receive/transmit. ● Channel Messages The PSR-730/630 is an electronic instrument that can handle 16 channels. This is usually expressed as “it can play 16 instruments at the same time.” Channel messages transmit information such as Note ON/OFF, Program Change, for each of the 16 channels. Message Name PSR-730/630 Operation/Panel Setting Note ON/OFF Messages which are generated when the keyboard is played. Each message includes a specific note number which corresponds to the key which is pressed, plus a velocity value based on how hard the key is stuck. Program Change Voice setting (control change bank select MSB/LSB setting) Control Change Revoice setting(volume, pan pot, etc.) ● System Messages This is data that is used in common by the entire MIDI system. System messages include messages like Exclusive Messages that transmit data unique to each instrument manufacturer and Realtime Messages that control the MIDI device. Message Name PSR-730/630 Operation/Panel Setting Exclusive Message Reverb/chorus/DSP settings, etc. Realtime Messages Clock setting Start/stop operation The messages transmitted/received by the PSR-730/630 are shown in the MIDI Data Format and MIDI Implementation Chart on pages 168 and 169. 120 ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢ ,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,, QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ ,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,, QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢ MIDI Functions ◆ MIDI Terminal/TO HOST Terminal In order to exchange MIDI data between multiple devices, each device must be connected by a cable. There are two ways to connect: from the MIDI terminals of the PSR-730/630 to the MIDI terminals of an external device using a MIDI cable, or from the TO HOST port of the PSR-730/630 to the serial port of a personal computer using a special cable. If you connect from the PSR-730/630 TO HOST terminal to a personal computer, the PSR-730/630 will be used as a MIDI interface device, meaning that a specialized MIDI interface device is not necessary. In the rear panel of the PSR-730/630, there are two kinds of terminals, the MIDI terminals and the TO HOST terminal. • MIDI IN ......... Receives MIDI data from another MIDI device. • MIDI OUT ..... Transmits the PSR-730/630’s keyboard information as MIDI data to another MIDI device. • TO HOST ...... Transmits and receives MIDI data to and from a personal computer. •••••••••••••••• TO HOST IN • When using the TO HOST terminal to connect to a personal computer using Windows, a Yamaha MIDI driver must be installed in the personal computer. The Yamaha MIDI driver can be obtained at Yamaha’s home page on the World Wide Web, <http://www.yamaha.co.jp/ english/xg/>. • Special MIDI cables (sold separately) must be used for connecting to MIDI devices. They can be bought at music stores, etc. • Never use MIDI cables longer than about 15 meters. Cables longer than this can pick up noise which can cause data errors. MIDI • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • OUT What You Can Do with MIDI ● Remotely play another PSR-730/630 MIDI transmit MIDI OUT MIDI IN PSR-730/630 PSR-730/630 MIDI IN MIDI OUT MIDI receive Initial send transmit/receive (page 128). ● Use the PSR-730/630 as a multi tone generator (playing 16 channels at one time). Receive mode for all channels set to “normal.” PSR-730/630 MIDI IN MIDI OUT MIDI Receive MIDI receive settings (page 126). Personal computer, QY700, etc. 121 ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢ ,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,, QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ ,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,, QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢ MIDI Functions ● Play music from another keyboard (no tone generator) using the PSR-730/630 XG tone generator. MIDI receive PSR-730/630 MIDI IN MIDI keyboard with no tone generator MIDI OUT MIDI receive settings (page 126). ● Record performance data (1-16 channels) using the PSR-730/630 Auto Accompaniment and Multi Pad features on a external sequencer (such as a personal computer). After recording, edit the data with the sequencer, then play it again on the PSR-730/630 (playback). Can be used to edit and arrange after recording MIDI transmit MIDI OUT MIDI IN PSR-730/630 PSR-530 MIDI IN MIDI OUT MIDI receive (playback) MIDI transmit setting (page 125). Initial send (page 128). Personal computer, QY700, etc. Connecting to a Personal Computer (TO HOST Terminal/HOST SELECT Switch) You can enjoy using personal computer music software when you connect your PSR-730/630’s TO HOST terminal or MIDI terminals to a personal computer. There are two ways to connect. ● Connect using the PSR-730/630 MIDI terminals. ● Connect using the TO HOST terminal. ■ Connect using the PSR-730/630 MIDI terminals Using a MIDI interface device installed in the personal computer, connect the MIDI terminals of the personal computer and the PSR-730/630. For the connection cable, use a special MIDI cable. ● When the computer has a MIDI interface installed, connect the MIDI OUT terminal of the personal computer to the MIDI IN terminal of the PSR-730/630. Set the HOST SELECT switch to “MIDI.” 122 • When using a personal computer, special software (sequencer software) is needed. ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢ ,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,, QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ ,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,, QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢ MIDI Functions Computer (sequencer software) MAC PC1 PC2 MIDI MIDI OUT MIDI IN MIDI IN PSR-730/630 MIDI OUT ● When using a MIDI interface with a Macintosh series computer, connect the RS422 terminal of the computer (modem or printer terminal) to the MIDI interface, then connect the MIDI OUT terminal on the MIDI interface to the MIDI IN terminal of the PSR-730/630, as show in the diagram below. Set the HOST SELECT switch on the PSR-730/630 to “MIDI.” Computer (sequencer software) MAC PC1 PC2 MIDI MIDI interface RS-422 MIDI IN PSR-730/630 MIDI OUT • When the HOST SELECT switch is set in the “MIDI” position, input and output in the TO HOST switch is ignored. • When using a Macintosh series computer, set the MIDI interface clock setting in the application software to match the setting of the MIDI interface you are using. For details, carefully read the owner’s manual for the software you are using. Macintosh is a registered trademark of Apple Computer, Inc. IBM PC/AT is a trademark of International Business Machines Corp. Other company names and product names, etc. in this manual are registered trademarks or trademarks of those companies. 123 ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢ ,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,, QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ ,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,, QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢ MIDI Functions ■ Connect using the TO HOST terminal Connect the serial port of the personal computer (RS-232C terminal or RS-422 terminal) to the TO HOST terminal of the PSR-730/630. For the connection cable, use the cable below (sold separately) that matches the personal computer type. Macintosh Series Connect the RS-422 terminal (modem or printer terminal) on the computer to the TO HOST terminal on the PSR-730/630 using a serial cable (system peripheral cable, 8 bit). Set the PSR-730/630 HOST SELECT switch in the “MAC” position. MAC PC1 PC2 MIDI mini DIN 8-pin mini DIN 8-pin • Set the MIDI interface clock in the sequencer software you are using to 1 MHz. For details, carefully read the owner’s manual for the software you are using. IBM-PC/AT Series Connect the RS-232C terminal on the computer to the TO HOST terminal on the PSR-730/630 using a serial cable (D-SUB 9P—>MINI DIN 8P cross cable). Set the PSR-730/630 HOST SELECT switch in the “PC-2” position. MAC PC1 PC2 MIDI mini DIN 8-pin D-SUB 9-pin • When using a D-SUB 25P—>MINI DIN 8P cross cable, connect using a D-SUB 9P plug adaptor on the computer side of the cable. mini DIN 8-pin D-SUB 25-pin D-SUB 9-pin For details about the necessary MIDI settings for computer and sequence software you are using, see the owner’s manuals for each of them. 124 • If you connect from the PSR-730/630 TO HOST terminal to a personal computer, the PSR-730/630 will be used as a MIDI interface device, meaning that a specialized MIDI interface device is not necessary. • When the HOST SELECT switch is set to “MAC,” “PC-1,” or “PC-2,” don’t use the MIDI IN/OUT terminals. (MIDI data cannot be sent or received through the MIDI terminals). • “Host is Offline!!” will be shown on the display, when the Host Select switch is set appropriately and the serial cable is connected to the PSR730/630 TO HOST but not to the PC’s serial port (or the cable is properly connected to the PC which is currently turned off). ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢ ,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,, QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ ,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,, QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢ MIDI Functions The PSR-730/630 MIDI Functions The PSR-730/630 has the following MIDI functions. Function Display Settings Page Transmit Channel TransmitCh~ 1 ... 16 125 Transmit Track TransmitTr Right1 ... Off 126 Receive Channel Receive Ch 1 ... 16 126 Receive Mode ReceiveMode Normal, Off, Remote, Bass, Chord Local Control Local~~~ Off, On 127 External Clock Ext.Clock Off, On 128 Initial Data Send Init.Send None 128 Template Template User ... Song Out 129 127 To access a MIDI function first use the MENU [▲] and [▼] buttons to move the triangular indicator in the display next to “MIDI”, then use the SUB MENU [▲] and [▼] buttons to select the desired function from within the MIDI menu. When a function is selected the current setting will appear on the top line of the display. Once the function has been selected, use the [–] and [+] buttons or data dial (or number buttons, where applicable) to set the function as required. SUB MENU MENU DISK Transmit Ch: 1 MULTI PAD REGIST MEMORY MENU MIDI DIGITAL EFFECT OVERALL GROOVE&DYNAMICS ■ Transmit Channel & Transmit Track The PSR-730/630 can simultaneously transmit data on all 16 MIDI channels. The Transmit Channel and Transmit Track functions determine what PSR-730/630 data is transmitted via which MIDI channels. ● Transmit Channel The “TransmitCh” function selects a MIDI channel to which a PSR-730/630 track can be assigned via the Transmit Track function, below. First select a transmit channel, then the transmit track for that channel. Different tracks can be assigned to each of the 16 MIDI channels. Any of the standard MIDI channels - 1 through 16 — can be specified. Transmit Ch: 1 ht1 125 ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢ ,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,, QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ ,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,, QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢ MIDI Functions ● Transmit Track The “Transmit Tr” function selects the track to be transmitted via the transmit channel specified by the Transmit Channel function, above. The available settings are as follows: Transmit Tr: Rig ht1 Right1 Right-hand keyboard playing (R1 voice) Right2 Right-hand keyboard playing (R2 voice) Left Left-hand keyboard playing (L voice) Harmony1 Harmony notes 1 Harmony2 Harmony notes 2 Harmony3 Harmony notes 3 Rhythm2/Tr2 Auto Accompaniment RHYTHM2 track/Track 2 Rhythm1/Tr1 Auto Accompaniment RHYTHM1 track/Track 1 Bass/Tr3 Auto Accompaniment BASS track/Track 3 Chord1/Tr4 Auto Accompaniment CHORD1 track/Track 4 Chord2/Tr5 Auto Accompaniment CHORD2 track/Track 5 Pad/Tr6 Auto Accompaniment PAD track/Track 6 Phrase1/Tr7 Auto Accompaniment PHRASE1 track/Track 7 Phrase2/Tr8 Auto Accompaniment PHRASE2 track/Track 8 Track 9-16 Track 9-16 Off Off (nothing is transmitted) • The initial default channel/track settings are: Channel Channel Channel Channel Channel Channel Channel Channel 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 = = = = = = = = R1 voice L voice Bass / Track3 Chord1 / Track4 Chord2 / Track5 Pad / Track6 Phrase1 / Track7 Phrase2 / Track8 Channel Channel Channel Channel Channel Channel Channel Channel 9 = Rhythm1 / Track1 10 = Rhythm2 / Track2 11 = R2 voice 12 = Harmony1 13 = Harmony2 14 = Harmony3 15 = Off 16 = Off ■ Receive Channel & Receive Mode The PSR-730/630 can simultaneously receive data on all 16 MIDI channels, allowing it to function as a 16-channel multi-timbral tone generator. The Receive Channel and Receive Mode functions determine how each channel will respond to received MIDI data. ● Receive Channel The “Receive Ch” function selects a MIDI channel to which a receive mode is to be assigned via the Receive Mode function, below. First select a receive channel, then the receive mode for that channel. Any of the standard MIDI channels — 1 through 16 — can be specified. Receivee Ch: 126 1 nd Piano • When a track is assigned to more than one MIDI channel, the data from that track is transmitted via the lowest-numbered channel. • To avoid MIDI loops which can cause operational errors, check the PSR-730/630 Local Control setting (page 127), and the MIDI THRU settings of any external MIDI devices. • MIDI transmit track settings will be retained even after turning the power off. See page 152 for the details. • The channels set for Rhythm1/Tr1Phrase2/Tr8 will be used to transmit accompaniment data when the PSR-730/ 630 is in Style Mode, and to transmit song track data when the PSR-730/630 is in Song Mode. ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢ ,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,, QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ ,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,, QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢ MIDI Functions ● Receive Mode The “ReceiveMode” function specifies the receive mode for the channel selected via the Receive Channel function, above. The receive mode settings are as follows: R e c e i v e M o d e : N o r mnadl P i a n o Normal Received MIDI data is sent directly to the PSR-730/630 tone generator. If all channels are set to “Normal”, the PSR-730/630 functions as a 16-channel multi-timbral tone generator. Off No MIDI data is received on channels set to “Off”. Remote Received MIDI data is handled in the same way as data generated by the PSR-730/630’s own keyboard. In other words, a remote keyboard could be used to control the PSR-730/630 AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT functions, etc. Bass The note on/off messages received at the channel(s) set to “Bass” are recognized as the bass notes in the accompaniment section. The bass notes will be detected regardless of the accompaniment on/off and split point settings on the PSR-730/630 panel. Chord The note on/off messages received at the channel(s) set to “Chord” are recognized as the fingerings in the accompaniment section. The chords to be detected depend on the fingering mode on the PSR-730/630. The chords will be detected regardless of the accompaniment on/off and split point settings on the PSR-730/630 panel. • MIDI receive mode settings will be retained even after turning the power off. See page 152 for the details. • The initial default setting for all channels is “Normal.” • In the Record mode, the Receive mode cannot be set. ■ Local Control “Local Control” refers to the fact that, normally, the PSR-730/630 keyboard controls the internal tone generator, allowing the internal voices to be played directly from the keyboard. This situation is “Local Control on” since the internal tone generator is controlled locally by its own keyboard. Local control can be turned off, however, so that the keyboard does not play the internal voices, but the appropriate MIDI information is still transmitted via the MIDI OUT connector when notes are played on the keyboard. At the same time, the internal tone generator can respond to MIDI information received on channels set to the “Normal” mode via the MIDI IN connector. This means that while an external MIDI sequencer, for example, plays the PSR-730/630 internal voices, an external tone generator can be played from the PSR730/630 keyboard. The default Local Control setting is “On”. Local::: Ch; On nd Piano 127 ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢ ,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,, QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ ,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,, QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢ MIDI Functions ■ Clock Reception of an external MIDI clock signal can be enabled or disabled as required. When disabled (“Off”), all of the time-based functions (Auto Accompaniment, SONG recording and playback, etc.) are controlled by its own internal clock. When MIDI clock reception is enabled (“On”), however, all timing is controlled by an external MIDI clock signal received via the MIDI IN terminal (in this case the PSR-730/630 TEMPO setting has no effect). The default setting is “Off”. Ext.Cloc k: Off nd Piano • External Clock is “Off” be default when the power is initially turnd on. • When External Clock is turned “On”, AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT playback cannot be started via the panel [START/STOP] button, or started via the synchro start function. Also, the MULTI PAD playback cannot be initiated by pressing the MULT PADs. • When External Clock is turned “On”, “EC” will appear on the TEMPO display, and tempo cannot be changed with the panel button. ■ Initial Data Send Transmits all current panel settings to a second PSR-730/630 or a MIDI data storage device. To send the initial data select the “Init.Send Sure?”. Then press the [+] (YES) to begin transmission of the initial data. Init.Sen d Sure? nd PiYES If you want to have the song play back with the panel settings used for recording, execute the Initial Data Send function before recording the performance on the PSR730/630 to an external sequencer. 128 • During Style/Song/ Multi Pad playback, in the synchro start mode and in one of the Record modes, the display shows “Init.Send Sure? - - -” indicating that you cannot execute the initial data send operation. ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢ ,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,, QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ ,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,, QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢ MIDI Functions ■ MIDI Template The MIDI settings can be collected into a template (pattern). Just by selecting the template that fits your purpose, you can set all the MIDI settings in one operation. Use the MENU [▲] and [▼] buttons to select the MIDI menu so that the triangular indicator in the display appears next to “MIDI” to the left of the display. Use the SUB MENU [▲] and [▼] buttons so that “Template” appears on the display. Referring to the template list below, use the [–] and [+] buttons or the Data Dial to select a template. Template : XG • When you change the transmit/receive channel settings after selecting one of the templates other than the “User”, the “User” Template will automatically be selected. Module MIDI Template list 1. XG Module All receive channels are set to “Normal.” When using the PSR-730/630 as the multi-timbral XG tone generator. 2. Accordion The receive channels are set as follows: 1ch: Remote, 2ch: Chord, 3ch: Bass, 4-16ch: Off When playing the PSR-730/630 by an external MIDI Accordion. The connected MIDI accordion can play the PSR-730/630 and detect chords and basses in the auto accompaniment section. 3. MIDI Pedal All receive channels are set to “Bass.” When playing the PSR-730/630 using a connected (optional) MIDI pedal. The connected MIDI pedal detects chords and basses in the auto accompaniment section, allowing you to play on-bass chords. 4. Keyboard Out The transmit channels are set as follows: 1ch: Right1, 2ch: Right2, 4ch: Left, 3ch, 5-16ch: Off When outputting the performance data (note on/off messages). Used to play the PSR-730/630 note on/off data with an external tone generator and to record the PSR-730/630 note on/off data to an external sequencer. 5. Acmp.Out The transmit channels 9-16 are set with the Accompaniment tracks. 9-10ch: Rhythms, 11ch: Bass, 12-13ch: Chords, 14ch: Pad, 1516ch: Phrases When outputting the style data. Used to play the PSR-730/630 auto accompaniment data with an external tone generator and to record the PSR-730/630 auto accompaniment data to an external sequencer. 6. Song Out All transmit channels are set with the Song tracks 1-16. When outputting the song data. Used to play the PSR-730/630 song data with an external tone generator and to record your entire performance on the PSR-730/630 to an external sequencer. 7. User Other than the above settings 1-6. 129 ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢ QQQQQQQQQQQQQQ ,,,,,,,,,,,,,, Appendix PSR-730/630 Display MENU/SUB MENU Structure MENU SUB MENU FUNCTION PAGE ex Grand Piano (R1 voice name) ............................... R1 voice selection .......................................... 17 VOICE ex 8Beat Pop1 (Style name) ........................................ Accompaniment style selection ...................... 22 STYLE V.Arranger ............................................................. Virtual Arranger on/off .................................... 29 ex UserSty1 ................................................................... User style selection ...................................... 100 STYLE REC S.ChordRoot ........................................................... Source chord root setting ............................. 148 S.ChordType ........................................................... Source chord type setting ............................. 148 NTR ........................................................................... Note transposition rule setting ...................... 148 NTT ........................................................................... Note transposition table setting .................... 149 HighestKey ............................................................. Highest key setting ....................................... 149 LowLimit ................................................................... Note range (Low limit) setting ....................... 149 HighLimit ................................................................ Note range (high limit) setting ...................... 149 RTR ........................................................................... Retrigger rule setting .................................... 149 Quantize? ................................................................ Quantize ....................................................... 103 UserStyle ................................................................ User style name ........................................... 104 All Clear? ............................................................. User style clear ............................................. 105 Track Clear? ........................................................ Track clear .................................................... 105 Drum Cancel ........................................................... Drum cancel ................................................. 103 ex Trumpet (Song name) ............................................... Song selection ................................................ 76 SONG Play Mode ................................................................ Play mode selection ....................................... 77 Measure ..................................................................... Measure from which to start playback ............ 78 A-B Repeat ............................................................. Repeat playback setting ................................. 80 SongRepeat ............................................................. Song repeat setting ........................................ 81 NextSong ................................................................... Next song setting ............................................ 82 ex SONG REC SONG–001 ................................................................... User Song selection ................................. 85, 88 QuickRecord ........................................................... Record mode (Quick/Multi) selection ............. 88 Part Select ........................................................... Part selection (Multi record) ........................... 88 Punch In ................................................................... Measure selection (Multi record) .................... 92 Punch Out ................................................................ Measure selection (Multi record) ................... 92 Quantize? ................................................................ Quantize ......................................................... 93 SongName ................................................................... User song name ............................................. 94 Song Clear? ........................................................... Song clear ...................................................... 96 Track Clear? ........................................................ Track clear ...................................................... 94 Measure ..................................................................... Measure from which to start playback ............ 78 Song Edit? ............................................................. Song edit ........................................................ 96 Voice ........................................................................... Voice selection (Song edit) ............................. 97 Volume ........................................................................ Volume setting (Song edit) ............................. 97 Pan ........................................................................... Pan setting (Song edit) ................................... 97 ReverbDepth ........................................................... Reverb depth setting (Song edit) .................... 97 ChorusDepth ........................................................... Chorus depth setting (Song edit) .................... 97 DSPDepth ................................................................... DSP depth setting (Song edit) ........................ 97 Octave ........................................................................ Octave setting (Song edit) .............................. 97 130 ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢ QQQQQQQQQQQQQQ ,,,,,,,,,,,,,, PSR-730/630 Display MENU/SUB MENU Structure MENU SUB MENU FUNCTION PAGE Load From Disk? ................................................ Loading data from a disk ................................ 70 DISK Save To Disk? ..................................................... Saving data to a disk ...................................... 68 Format Disk? ........................................................ Formatting a disk ............................................ 67 Disk Copy? ............................................................. Copying disk ................................................... 72 Song Copy? ............................................................. Copying a song in a disk ................................ 73 Delete File? ........................................................ Deleting a file in a disk ................................... 75 Bank 01 (Bank name) ................................................ Registration bank selection ............................ 57 REGISTRATION REGISTRATION MEMORY Button Reg Naming ............................................................. Registration bank name ................................. 58 Bank 01 (Multi Pad set name) ................................... Multi pad set selection .................................... 61 MULTI PAD MULTI PAD STOP Button P1ChdMatch ............................................................. Chord match on/off (pad 1) ............................ 63 P2ChdMatch ............................................................. Chord match on/off (pad 2) ............................ 63 P3ChdMatch ............................................................. Chord match on/off (pad 3) ............................ 63 P4ChdMatch ............................................................. Chord match on/off (pad 4) ............................ 63 Bank 37 (Multi Pad set name) ................................... User pad set selection .................................. 107 MULTI PAD REC P1ChdMatch ............................................................. Chord match on/off (user pad 1) .................. 107 P2ChdMatch ............................................................. Chord match on/off (user pad 2) .................. 107 P3ChdMatch ............................................................. Chord match on/off (user pad 3) .................. 107 P4ChdMatch ............................................................. Chord match on/off (user pad 4) .................. 107 Bank Clear? ........................................................... Bank clear .................................................... 109 Pad Clear? ............................................................. Pad clear ...................................................... 109 Pad Naming ............................................................. User pad name ............................................. 109 TransmitCh ............................................................. Transmit channel setting .............................. 125 MIDI TransmitTr ............................................................. Transmit track setting ................................... 126 Receive Ch ............................................................. Receive channel setting ............................... 126 ReceiveMode ........................................................... Receive mode setting ................................... 127 Local ........................................................................... Local on/off ................................................... 127 Ext.Clock ................................................................ External/internal clock selection ................... 128 Init.Send ................................................................ Initial data send ............................................ 128 Template ................................................................... MIDI template selection ................................ 129 ex Reverb: 1 Hall 1 .............................................. Reverb type selection ..................................... 43 DIGITAL EFFECT REVERB Button Rev.Return ............................................................. Reverb return level setting ............................. 43 Chorus: 1 Chorus1 ........................................... Chorus type selection ..................................... 44 CHORUS Button ex Cho.Return ............................................................. Chorus return level setting ............................. 44 DSP: 1 Hall 1 ..................................................... DSP type selection ......................................... 46 DSP Button DSP Return ............................................................. DSP return level setting .................................. 46 131 ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢ QQQQQQQQQQQQQ ,,,,,,,,,,,,, PSR-730/630 Display MENU/SUB MENU Structure MENU SUB MENU FUNCTION PAGE ex Harmony: 1 Duet ................................................ Harmony type selection .................................. 47 HARMONY Button Harm.Vol ................................................................... Harmony volume setting ................................. 48 Effect1 In (PSR-730) ........................................... Effect1 part setting ......................................... 49 MULTI EFFECT Button Effect2 In (PSR-730) ........................................... Effect2 part setting ......................................... 49 Effect1 (PSR-730) ................................................... Effect1 type selection ..................................... 50 Effect2 (PSR-730) ................................................... Effect2 type selection ..................................... 50 Eff1Dry/Wet (PSR-730) ......................................... Effect1 dry/wet setting .................................... 50 Eff2Dry/Wet (PSR-730) ......................................... Effect2 dry/wet setting .................................... 50 EQ Type (PSR-730) ................................................... Equalizer type selection ................................. 52 DIGITAL EQ Button LowGain (PSR-730) ................................................... Low Gain setting (Equalizer) .......................... 53 LowMidGain (PSR-730) ........................................... LowMidGain setting (Equalizer) ..................... 53 MidGain (PSR-730) ................................................... MidGain setting (Equalizer) ............................ 53 HighMidGain (PSR-730) ......................................... HighMidGain setting (Equalizer) ..................... 53 HighGain (PSR-730) ................................................. HighGain setting (Equalizer) .......................... 53 OVERALL TouchSense ............................................................. Touch sensitivity setting ............................... 115 PB Range ................................................................... Pitch bend range setting ................................. 54 Tuning ........................................................................ Overall tuning ............................................... 115 S.TuneNote ............................................................. Scale tuning (note) setting ............................ 115 S.TuneValue ........................................................... Scale tuning (value) setting .......................... 115 SongTrans. ............................................................. Song transposition setting ............................ 116 Metronome ................................................................ Metronome on/off ......................................... 116 SplitPoint ............................................................. Split point setting (Split voice) ........................ 21 AcmpSplit ................................................................ Split point setting (Auto accompaniment) ....... 30 FingerMode ............................................................. Fingering mode selection ............................... 31 AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT ON/OFF Button VoiceSet ................................................................... Voice set on/off ............................................. 116 Pedal1 ........................................................................ Selecting Pedal1 function ............................. 117 Pedal2 ........................................................................ Selecting Pedal2 function ............................. 117 P1 Polarity ........................................................... Pedal1 polarity setting .................................. 118 P2 Polarity ........................................................... Pedal2 polarity setting .................................. 118 ModWheel (PSR-730) ................................................. Selecting modulation wheel function .............. 55 GROOVE & DYNAMICS (PSR-730) BeatGroove ............................................................. Beat groove template selection ...................... 36 GROOVE & DYNAMICS Button MeasGroove ............................................................. Measure groove template selection ............... 37 Dynamics ................................................................... Dynamics template selection .......................... 38 DynamcsRate ........................................................... Dynamics rate setting ..................................... 39 ExpandRate ............................................................. Expand rate setting ........................................ 39 BoostRate ................................................................ Boost rate setting ........................................... 40 • Sub-menu items with “ ” have shortcut access (press and hold the specified button for a few seconds to jump directly to the associated sub-menu function). In addition to the shortuts listed above, the [DUAL VOICE] button can be held to jump to the R2 voice revoice function, and the [SPLIT VOICE] button can be held to jump to the L voice revoice function. 132 ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢ QQQQQQQQQQQQQ ,,,,,,,,,,,,, Voice List ■ Maximum Polyphony The PSR-730 has 64-note maximum polyphony and the PSR-630 has 32. Auto Accompaniment uses a number of the available notes, so when Auto Accompaniment is used the total number of notes that can be played on the keyboard is correspondingly reduced. The same applies to the Dual Voice, Split Voice, Multi Pad, and Song functions. When the maximum polyphony is exceeded, notes are played using lastnote priority. [PSR-730] Panel Voice List Voice MIDI Program Voice Name Change LSB Number Piano 112 0 Grand Piano 112 1 BrightPiano 112 3 Honky Tonk 112 2 Midi Grand 113 2 CP 80 114 4 Galaxy EP 117 5 Super DX 112 5 DX Modern 112 4 Funk EP 115 5 Modern EP 113 5 Hyper Tines 116 5 New Tines 114 5 Venus EP 113 4 Tremolo EP 114 2 Rock Piano 112 7 Clavi 113 7 Wah Clavi 112 6 Harpsichord 113 6 GrandHarpsi Chromatic Percussion 112 11 Vibraphone 113 11 Jazz Vibes 112 12 Marimba 112 13 Xylophone 112 114 Steel Drums 112 8 Celesta 112 9 Glocken 112 10 Music Box 112 14 TubularBells 112 108 Kalimba 112 47 Timpani 112 15 Dulcimer Organ 112 16 Jazz Organ1 113 16 Jazz Organ2 112 17 Click Organ 113 17 Dance Organ 115 16 Drawbar Org 115 17 Mellow Draw 116 16 Bright Draw 112 18 Rock Organ1 113 18 Rock Organ2 114 18 Purple Org 116 17 60’s Organ 117 17 Blues Organ 120 16 Mellow Org 120 17 Perc.Organ 117 16 16+1 Organ 118 16 16+2 Organ 119 16 16+4 Organ 118 17 Elec.Organ 114 16 TheatreOrg1 114 17 TheatreOrg2 Bank Select Number MSB 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Voice Bank Select Number MSB LSB 52 53 54 0 0 0 112 113 112 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 112 115 113 112 113 114 112 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 112 113 112 113 112 113 114 116 118 112 119 113 114 113 112 113 112 112 115 114 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 112 114 112 112 112 113 119 112 112 113 112 112 113 113 114 97 98 99 100 101 0 0 0 0 0 112 113 112 112 112 • The Voice List includes MIDI program change numbers for each voice. Use these program change numbers when playing the PSR-730/630 via MIDI from an external device. • When the sustain or sostenuto pedal functions are being used (page 117), some voices may sound continuously or have a long decay after the notes have been released while the pedal is held. MIDI Program Voice Name Change Number 19 Pipe Organ 19 ChapelOrgan 20 Reed Organ Accordion 21 Musette 21 Accordion 21 Trad. Accrd 23 Tango Accrd 23 Bandoneon 21 Soft Accrd 22 Harmonica Guitar 24 Classic Gtr 24 Spanish Gtr 25 Folk Guitar 25 12StrGuitar 26 Jazz Guitar 26 Octave Gtr 26 HawaiianGtr 27 BrightClean 27 SolidGuitar 27 CleanGuitar 27 Elec.12Str 27 Tremolo Gtr 27 Slap Guitar 28 Funk Guitar 28 MutedGuitar 29 FeedbackGtr 29 Overdrive 30 Distortion 27 PedalSteel 25 Mandolin Bass 32 Aco.Bass 32 Bass&Cymbal 33 FingerBass 34 Pick Bass 35 Fretless 35 Jaco Bass 17 Organ Bass 36 Slap Bass 37 Funk Bass 36 Fusion Bass 38 Synth Bass 39 Analog Bass 39 Dance Bass 38 Hi Q Bass 38 Rave Bass Solo Strings 40 Solo Violin 40 Soft Violin 110 Fiddle 41 Viola 42 Cello 133 ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢ QQQQQQQQQQQQQQ ,,,,,,,,,,,,,, Voice List Bank Select Voice Number MSB LSB 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 112 112 113 112 112 112 112 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 128 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 112 113 114 113 114 115 115 112 116 112 112 112 112 112 112 113 112 113 113 112 129 130 131 132 133 134 135 136 137 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 115 112 114 113 112 112 114 112 112 138 139 140 141 142 143 144 145 146 147 148 149 150 151 152 153 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 112 113 116 117 118 119 113 114 115 120 121 113 112 112 113 114 154 155 156 157 158 159 160 161 162 163 164 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 112 112 113 112 114 112 116 112 113 113 115 134 MIDI Program Voice Name Change Number 43 Contrabass 46 Harp 46 Hackbrett 106 Shamisen 107 Koto 104 Sitar 105 Banjo Ensemble 48 Strings 48 OrchStrings 48 Symphon. Str 49 SlowStrings 49 Str.Quartet 48 ConcertoStr 49 MarcatoStrs 49 ChamberStrs 48 Mellow Orch 44 TremoloStrs 45 PizzStrings 50 Syn Strings 51 Analog Strs 52 Choir 54 Air Choir 52 Vocal Ensbl 53 Vox Humana 53 Gothic Vox 54 Voices 55 Orch.Hit Solo Brass 56 Sweet Trp 56 SoloTrumpet 56 SoftTrumpet 56 Flugel Horn 59 Muted Trp 57 Trombone 57 MelTrombone 60 French Horn 58 Tuba Brass Ensemble 61 BrasSection 61 BigBandBrs 61 MellowBrass 61 Small Brass 61 Pop Brass 61 MellowHorns 59 BallroomBrs 61 Full Horns 61 High Brass 61 BrightBrass 61 Big Brass 57 Trb.Section 62 Synth Brass 63 Analog Brs 62 Jump Brass 62 TechnoBrass Reed 64 Soprano Sax 65 Alto Sax 65 BreathyAlto 66 Tenor Sax 66 BreathTenor 67 BaritoneSax 66 Sax Section 71 Clarinet 71 MelClarinet 66 WoodwindEns 66 Brass Combo Bank Select Voice Number MSB LSB 165 166 167 168 0 0 0 0 112 112 112 112 169 170 171 172 173 174 175 176 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 112 112 112 113 112 112 112 112 177 178 179 180 181 182 183 184 185 186 187 188 189 190 191 192 193 194 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 112 112 113 112 114 115 113 113 112 116 114 115 117 116 117 118 118 119 195 196 197 198 199 200 201 202 203 204 205 206 207 208 209 210 211 212 213 214 215 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 113 112 113 112 112 114 112 112 112 115 112 112 112 113 115 113 113 114 116 117 113 216 217 218 219 220 221 222 223 224 225 226 227 127 127 127 127 127 127 127 127 127 127 126 126 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 MIDI Program Voice Name Change Number 68 Oboe 69 EnglishHorn 70 Bassoon 109 Bagpipe Pipe 73 Flute 75 Pan Flute 72 Piccolo 73 EthnicFlute 77 Shakuhachi 78 Whistle 74 Recorder 79 Ocarina Synth Lead 80 Square Lead 81 Saw.Lead 81 Big Lead 98 Stardust 81 Blaster 81 Analogon 80 Vintage Ld 98 Sun Bell 83 Aero Lead 81 Fire Wire 80 Mini Lead 80 Vinylead 81 Warp 80 Hi Bias 80 Meta Wood 80 Tiny Lead 81 Sub Aqua 81 Fargo Synth Pad 94 Insomnia 90 Krypton 99 Cyber Pad 95 Wave 2001 94 Equinox 88 Stargate 92 DX Pad 93 Loch Ness 88 Fantasia 88 Golden Age 91 Xenon Pad 89 Area 51 99 Atmosphere 89 Dark Moon 94 Ionosphere 93 Phase IV 88 Symbiont 94 Solaris 88 Time Travel 88 Millenium 95 Transform Drum Kits 0 Std.Kit1 1 Std.Kit2 8 Room Kit 16 Rock Kit 24 Electro Kit 25 Analog Kit 27 Dance Kit 32 Jazz Kit 40 Brush Kit 48 Classic Kit 0 SFX Kit1 1 SFX Kit2 ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢ QQQQQQQQQQQQQQ ,,,,,,,,,,,,,, Voice List [PSR-630] Panel Voice List Voice MIDI Program Voice Name Change LSB Number Piano 112 0 Grand Piano 112 1 BrightPiano 112 3 Honky Tonk 112 2 Midi Grand 113 2 CP 80 114 4 Galaxy EP 112 5 DX Modern 112 4 Funk EP 115 5 Modern EP 113 5 Hyper Tines 116 5 New Tines 114 5 Venus EP 113 4 Tremolo EP 114 2 Rock Piano 112 7 Clavi 113 7 Wah Clavi 112 6 Harpsichord 113 6 GrandHarpsi Chromatic Percussion 112 11 Vibraphone 113 11 Jazz Vibes 112 12 Marimba 112 13 Xylophone 112 114 Steel Drums 112 8 Celesta 112 9 Glocken 112 10 Music Box 112 14 TubularBells 112 108 Kalimba 112 47 Timpani 112 15 Dulcimer Organ 112 16 Jazz Organ1 113 16 Jazz Organ2 112 17 Click Organ 113 17 Dance Organ 115 16 Drawbar Org 115 17 Mellow Draw 116 16 Bright Draw 112 18 Rock Organ1 113 18 Rock Organ2 114 18 Purple Org 116 17 60’s Organ 117 17 Blues Organ 117 16 16+1 Organ 118 16 16+2 Organ 119 16 16+4 Organ 118 17 Elec.Organ 114 16 TheatreOrg1 114 17 TheatreOrg2 112 19 Pipe Organ 113 19 ChapelOrgan 112 20 Reed Organ Accordion 113 21 Trad. Accrd 112 21 Musette 112 23 Tango Accrd 113 23 Bandoneon 114 21 Soft Accrd 112 22 Harmonica Guitar 112 24 Classic Gtr Bank Select Number MSB 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 52 53 54 55 56 57 0 0 0 0 0 0 58 0 Voice Bank Select Number MSB LSB 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 113 112 113 112 113 114 112 113 114 113 112 113 112 112 115 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 112 114 112 112 112 113 119 112 112 113 112 112 113 113 114 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 112 113 112 112 112 112 112 113 112 112 112 112 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 112 113 114 113 114 115 115 112 112 112 112 112 112 112 113 112 113 112 MIDI Program Voice Name Change Number 24 Spanish Gtr 25 Folk Guitar 25 12StrGuitar 26 Jazz Guitar 26 Octave Gtr 26 HawaiianGtr 27 CleanGuitar 27 Tremolo Gtr 27 Slap Guitar 28 Funk Guitar 28 MutedGuitar 29 FeedbackGtr 29 Overdrive 30 Distortion 27 PedalSteel Bass 32 Aco.Bass 32 Bass&Cymbal 33 FingerBass 34 Pick Bass 35 Fretless 35 Jaco Bass 17 Organ Bass 36 Slap Bass 37 Funk Bass 36 Fusion Bass 38 Synth Bass 39 Analog Bass 39 Dance Bass 38 Hi Q Bass 38 Rave Bass Solo Strings 40 Solo Violin 40 Soft Violin 110 Fiddle 41 Viola 42 Cello 43 Contrabass 46 Harp 46 Hackbrett 106 Shamisen 107 Koto 104 Sitar 105 Banjo Ensemble 48 Strings 48 OrchStrings 48 Symphon. Str 49 SlowStrings 49 Str.Quartet 48 ConcertoStr 49 MarcatoStrs 49 ChamberStrs 44 TremoloStrs 45 PizzStrings 50 Syn Strings 51 Analog Strs 52 Choir 54 Air Choir 52 Vocal Ensbl 53 Vox Humana 53 Gothic Vox 55 Orch.Hit 135 ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢ QQQQQQQQQQQQQQ ,,,,,,,,,,,,,, Voice List Bank Select Voice Number MSB LSB 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 112 114 113 112 112 114 112 112 127 128 129 130 131 132 133 134 135 136 137 138 139 140 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 113 112 116 117 118 119 113 114 115 113 112 112 113 114 141 142 143 144 145 146 147 148 149 150 151 152 153 154 155 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 112 112 113 112 114 112 116 112 113 113 115 112 112 112 112 156 157 158 159 160 161 162 163 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 112 112 112 113 112 112 112 112 164 165 166 167 168 169 170 171 172 173 174 175 176 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 112 112 113 112 114 115 113 113 112 116 114 115 117 136 MIDI Program Voice Name Change Number Solo Brass 56 SoloTrumpet 56 SoftTrumpet 56 Flugel Horn 59 Muted Trp 57 Trombone 57 MelTrombone 60 French Horn 58 Tuba Brass Ensemble 61 BigBandBrs 61 BrasSection 61 MellowBrass 61 Small Brass 61 Pop Brass 61 MellowHorns 59 BallroomBrs 61 Full Horns 61 High Brass 57 Trb.Section 62 Synth Brass 63 Analog Brs 62 Jump Brass 62 TechnoBrass Reed 64 Soprano Sax 65 Alto Sax 65 BreathyAlto 66 Tenor Sax 66 BreathTenor 67 BaritoneSax 66 Sax Section 71 Clarinet 71 MelClarinet 66 WoodwindEns 66 Brass Combo 68 Oboe 69 EnglishHorn 70 Bassoon 109 Bagpipe Pipe 73 Flute 75 Pan Flute 72 Piccolo 73 EthnicFlute 77 Shakuhachi 78 Whistle 74 Recorder 79 Ocarina Synth Lead 80 Square Lead 81 Saw.Lead 81 Big Lead 98 Stardust 81 Blaster 81 Analogon 80 Vintage Ld 98 Sun Bell 83 Aero Lead 81 Fire Wire 80 Mini Lead 80 Vinylead 81 Warp Bank Select Voice Number MSB LSB 177 178 179 180 181 0 0 0 0 0 116 117 118 118 119 182 183 184 185 186 187 188 189 190 191 192 193 194 195 196 197 198 199 200 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 113 112 113 112 112 114 112 112 112 115 112 112 112 113 115 113 113 114 113 201 202 203 204 205 206 207 208 209 210 211 212 127 127 127 127 127 127 127 127 127 127 126 126 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 MIDI Program Voice Name Change Number 80 Hi Bias 80 Meta Wood 80 Tiny Lead 81 Sub Aqua 81 Fargo Synth Pad 94 Insomnia 90 Krypton 99 Cyber Pad 95 Wave 2001 94 Equinox 88 Stargate 92 DX Pad 93 Loch Ness 88 Fantasia 88 Golden Age 91 Xenon Pad 89 Area 51 99 Atmosphere 89 Dark Moon 94 Ionosphere 93 Phase IV 88 Symbiont 94 Solaris 95 Transform Drum Kits 0 Std.Kit1 1 Std.Kit2 8 Room Kit 16 Rock Kit 24 Electro Kit 25 Analog Kit 27 Dance Kit 32 Jazz Kit 40 Brush Kit 48 Classic Kit 0 SFX Kit1 1 SFX Kit2 ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢ QQQQQQQQQQQQQQ ,,,,,,,,,,,,,, Voice List [PSR-730/630] XG Voice List PSR-730 PSR-630 Bank Select MIDI Program Voice Voice Voice Name Number Number MSB LSB Change Number Piano 228 213 0 0 0 GrandPno 229 214 0 1 0 GrndPnoK 230 215 0 18 0 MelloGrP 231 216 0 40 0 PianoStr 232 217 0 41 0 Dream 233 218 0 0 1 BritePno 234 219 0 1 1 BritPnoK 235 220 0 0 2 E.Grand 236 221 0 1 2 ElGrPnoK 237 222 0 32 2 Det.CP80 238 223 0 40 2 ElGrPno1 239 224 0 41 2 ElGrPno2 240 225 0 0 3 HnkyTonk 241 226 0 1 3 HnkyTnkK 242 227 0 0 4 E.Piano1 243 228 0 1 4 El.Pno1K 244 229 0 18 4 MelloEP1 245 230 0 32 4 Chor.EP1 246 231 0 40 4 HardEl.P 247 232 0 45 4 VX El.P1 248 233 0 64 4 60sEl.P 249 234 0 0 5 E.Piano2 250 235 0 1 5 El.Pno2K 251 236 0 32 5 Chor.EP2 252 237 0 33 5 DX Hard 253 238 0 34 5 DXLegend 254 239 0 40 5 DX Phase 255 240 0 41 5 DX+Analg 256 241 0 42 5 DXKotoEP 257 242 0 45 5 VX El.P2 258 243 0 0 6 Harpsi. 259 244 0 1 6 Harpsi.K 260 245 0 25 6 Harpsi.2 261 246 0 35 6 Harpsi.3 262 247 0 0 7 Clavi. 263 248 0 1 7 Clavi. K 264 249 0 27 7 ClaviWah 265 250 0 64 7 PulseClv 266 251 0 65 7 PierceCl Chromatic Percussion 267 252 0 0 8 Celesta 268 253 0 0 9 Glocken 269 254 0 0 10 MusicBox 270 255 0 64 10 Orgel 271 256 0 0 11 Vibes 272 257 0 1 11 VibesK 273 258 0 45 11 HardVibe 274 259 0 0 12 Marimba 275 260 0 1 12 MarimbaK 276 261 0 64 12 SineMrmb 277 262 0 97 12 Balafon2 278 263 0 98 12 Log Drum 279 264 0 0 13 Xylophon 280 265 0 0 14 TubulBel 281 266 0 96 14 ChrchBel 282 267 0 97 14 Carillon 283 268 0 0 15 Dulcimer 284 269 0 35 15 Dulcimr2 285 270 0 96 15 Cimbalom 286 271 0 97 15 Santur Organ 287 272 0 0 16 DrawOrgn MIDI PSR-730 PSR-630 Bank Select Program Voice Voice Change Number Number MSB LSB Number 288 273 0 32 16 289 274 0 33 16 290 275 0 34 16 291 276 0 35 16 292 277 0 36 16 293 278 0 37 16 294 279 0 38 16 295 280 0 40 16 296 281 0 64 16 297 282 0 65 16 298 283 0 66 16 299 284 0 67 16 300 285 0 0 17 301 286 0 24 17 302 287 0 32 17 303 288 0 33 17 304 289 0 37 17 305 290 0 0 18 306 291 0 64 18 307 292 0 65 18 308 293 0 66 18 309 294 0 0 19 310 295 0 32 19 311 296 0 35 19 312 297 0 40 19 313 298 0 64 19 314 299 0 65 19 315 300 0 0 20 316 301 0 40 20 317 302 0 0 21 318 303 0 32 21 319 304 0 0 22 320 305 0 32 22 321 306 0 0 23 322 307 0 64 23 Guitar 323 308 0 0 24 324 309 0 16 24 325 310 0 25 24 326 311 0 43 24 327 312 0 96 24 328 313 0 0 25 329 314 0 16 25 330 315 0 35 25 331 316 0 40 25 332 317 0 41 25 333 318 0 96 25 334 319 0 0 26 335 320 0 18 26 336 321 0 32 26 337 322 0 0 27 338 323 0 32 27 339 324 0 0 28 340 325 0 40 28 341 326 0 41 28 342 327 0 43 28 343 328 0 45 28 344 329 0 0 29 345 330 0 43 29 346 331 0 0 30 347 332 0 40 30 348 333 0 41 30 349 334 0 0 31 Voice Name DetDrwOr 60sDrOr1 60sDrOr2 70sDrOr1 DrawOrg2 60sDrOr3 EvenBar 16+2’2/3 Organ Ba 70sDrOr2 CheezOrg DrawOrg3 PercOrgn 70sPcOr1 DetPrcOr LiteOrg PercOrg2 RockOrgn RotaryOr SloRotar FstRotar ChrchOrg ChurOrg3 ChurOrg2 NotreDam OrgFlute TrmOrgFl ReedOrgn Puff Org Acordion AccordIt Harmnica Harmo 2 TangoAcd TngoAcd2 NylonGtr NylonGt2 NylonGt3 VelGtHrm Ukulele SteelGtr SteelGt2 12StrGtr Nyln&Stl Stl&Body Mandolin Jazz Gtr MelloGtr JazzAmp CleanGtr ChorusGt Mute.Gtr FunkGtr1 MuteStlG FunkGtr2 Jazz Man Ovrdrive Gt.Pinch Dist.Gtr FeedbkGt FeedbGt2 GtrHarmo MIDI PSR-730 PSR-630 Bank Select Program Voice Voice Voice Name Number Number MSB LSB Change Number 350 335 0 65 31 GtFeedbk 351 336 0 66 31 GtrHrmo2 Bass 352 337 0 0 32 Aco.Bass 353 338 0 40 32 JazzRthm 354 339 0 45 32 VXUprght 355 340 0 0 33 FngrBass 356 341 0 18 33 FingrDrk 357 342 0 27 33 FlangeBa 358 343 0 40 33 Ba&DstEG 359 344 0 43 33 FngrSlap 360 345 0 45 33 FngBass2 361 346 0 65 33 ModAlem 362 347 0 0 34 PickBass 363 348 0 28 34 MutePkBa 364 349 0 0 35 Fretless 365 350 0 32 35 Fretles2 366 351 0 33 35 Fretles3 367 352 0 34 35 Fretles4 368 353 0 96 35 SynFretl 369 354 0 97 35 Smooth 370 355 0 0 36 SlapBas1 371 356 0 27 36 ResoSlap 372 357 0 32 36 PunchThm 373 358 0 0 37 SlapBas2 374 359 0 43 37 VeloSlap 375 360 0 0 38 SynBass1 376 361 0 18 38 SynBa1Dk 377 362 0 20 38 FastResB 378 363 0 24 38 AcidBass 379 364 0 35 38 Clv Bass 380 365 0 40 38 TeknoBa 381 366 0 64 38 Oscar 382 367 0 65 38 SqrBass 383 368 0 66 38 RubberBa 384 369 0 96 38 Hammer 385 370 0 0 39 SynBass2 386 371 0 6 39 MelloSB1 387 372 0 12 39 Seq Bass 388 373 0 18 39 ClkSynBa 389 374 0 19 39 SynBa2Dk 390 375 0 32 39 SmthBa 2 391 376 0 40 39 ModulrBa 392 377 0 41 39 DX Bass 393 378 0 64 39 X WireBa Strings 394 379 0 0 40 Violin 395 380 0 8 40 SlowVln 396 381 0 0 41 Viola 397 382 0 0 42 Cello 398 383 0 0 43 Contrabs 399 384 0 0 44 Trem.Str 400 385 0 8 44 SlowTrStr 401 386 0 40 44 Susp Str 402 387 0 0 45 Pizz.Str 403 388 0 0 46 Harp 404 389 0 40 46 YangChin 405 390 0 0 47 Timpani Ensemble 406 391 0 0 48 Strings1 407 392 0 3 48 S.Strngs 408 393 0 8 48 SlowStr 409 394 0 24 48 ArcoStr 137 ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢ QQQQQQQQQQQQQQ ,,,,,,,,,,,,,, Voice List MIDI PSR-730 PSR-630 Bank Select Program Voice Voice Number Number MSB LSB Change Number 410 395 0 35 48 411 396 0 40 48 412 397 0 41 48 413 398 0 42 48 414 399 0 45 48 415 400 0 0 49 416 401 0 3 49 417 402 0 8 49 418 403 0 40 49 419 404 0 41 49 420 405 0 64 49 421 406 0 65 49 422 407 0 0 50 423 408 0 27 50 424 409 0 64 50 425 410 0 65 50 426 411 0 0 51 427 412 0 0 52 428 413 0 3 52 429 414 0 16 52 430 415 0 32 52 431 416 0 40 52 432 417 0 0 53 433 418 0 0 54 434 419 0 40 54 435 420 0 41 54 436 421 0 64 54 437 422 0 0 55 438 423 0 35 55 439 424 0 64 55 Brass 440 425 0 0 56 441 426 0 16 56 442 427 0 17 56 443 428 0 32 56 444 429 0 0 57 445 430 0 18 57 446 431 0 0 58 447 432 0 16 58 448 433 0 0 59 449 434 0 0 60 450 435 0 6 60 451 436 0 32 60 452 437 0 37 60 453 438 0 0 61 454 439 0 35 61 455 440 0 40 61 456 441 0 41 61 457 442 0 42 61 458 443 0 0 62 459 444 0 12 62 460 445 0 20 62 461 446 0 24 62 462 447 0 27 62 463 448 0 32 62 464 449 0 45 62 465 450 0 64 62 466 451 0 0 63 467 452 0 18 63 468 453 0 40 63 469 454 0 41 63 470 455 0 45 63 471 456 0 64 63 138 Voice Name 60sStrng Orchestr Orchstr2 TremOrch VeloStr Strings2 S.SlwStr LegatoSt Warm Str Kingdom 70s Str Str Ens3 Syn.Str1 ResoStr Syn Str4 SS Str Syn.Str2 ChoirAah S.Choir Ch.Aahs2 MelChoir ChoirStr VoiceOoh SynVoice SynVox2 Choral AnaVoice Orch.Hit OrchHit2 Impact Trumpet Trumpet2 BriteTrp WarmTrp Trombone Trmbone2 Tuba Tuba 2 Mute.Trp Fr.Horn FrHrSolo FrHorn2 HornOrch BrasSect Tp&TbSec BrssSec2 HiBrass MelloBrs SynBras1 QuackBr RezSynBr PolyBrss SynBras3 JumpBrss AnaVelBr AnaBrss1 SynBras2 Soft Brs SynBrss4 ChoirBrs VelBrss2 AnaBrss2 MIDI PSR-730 PSR-630 Bank Select Program Voice Voice Voice Name Number Number MSB LSB Change Number Reed 472 457 0 0 64 SprnoSax 473 458 0 0 65 Alto Sax 474 459 0 40 65 Sax Sect 475 460 0 43 65 HyprAlto 476 461 0 0 66 TenorSax 477 462 0 40 66 BrthTnSx 478 463 0 41 66 SoftTenr 479 464 0 64 66 TnrSax 2 480 465 0 0 67 Bari.Sax 481 466 0 0 68 Oboe 482 467 0 0 69 Eng.Horn 483 468 0 0 70 Bassoon 484 469 0 0 71 Clarinet Pipe 485 470 0 0 72 Piccolo 486 471 0 0 73 Flute 487 472 0 0 74 Recorder 488 473 0 0 75 PanFlute 489 474 0 0 76 Bottle 490 475 0 0 77 Shakhchi 491 476 0 0 78 Whistle 492 477 0 0 79 Ocarina Synth Lead 493 478 0 0 80 SquareLd 494 479 0 6 80 Square 2 495 480 0 8 80 LMSquare 496 481 0 18 80 Hollow 497 482 0 19 80 Shmoog 498 483 0 64 80 Mellow 499 484 0 65 80 SoloSine 500 485 0 66 80 SineLead 501 486 0 0 81 Saw.Lead 502 487 0 6 81 Saw 2 503 488 0 8 81 ThickSaw 504 489 0 18 81 DynaSaw 505 490 0 19 81 DigiSaw 506 491 0 20 81 Big Lead 507 492 0 24 81 HeavySyn 508 493 0 25 81 WaspySyn 509 494 0 40 81 PulseSaw 510 495 0 41 81 Dr. Lead 511 496 0 45 81 VeloLead 512 497 0 96 81 Seq Ana 513 498 0 0 82 CaliopLd 514 499 0 65 82 Pure Pad 515 500 0 0 83 Chiff Ld 516 501 0 64 83 Rubby 517 502 0 0 84 CharanLd 518 503 0 64 84 DistLead 519 504 0 65 84 WireLead 520 505 0 0 85 Voice Ld 521 506 0 24 85 SynthAah 522 507 0 64 85 VoxLead 523 508 0 0 86 Fifth Ld 524 509 0 35 86 Big Five 525 510 0 0 87 Bass &Ld 526 511 0 16 87 Big&Low 527 512 0 64 87 Fat&Prky 528 513 0 65 87 SoftWurl Synth Pad 529 514 0 0 88 NewAgePd 530 515 0 64 88 Fantasy2 531 516 0 0 89 Warm Pad 532 517 0 16 89 ThickPad MIDI PSR-730 PSR-630 Bank Select Program Voice Voice Voice Name Change Number Number MSB LSB Number 533 518 0 17 89 Soft Pad 534 519 0 18 89 SinePad 535 520 0 64 89 Horn Pad 536 521 0 65 89 RotarStr 537 522 0 0 90 PolySyPd 538 523 0 64 90 PolyPd80 539 524 0 65 90 ClickPad 540 525 0 66 90 Ana Pad 541 526 0 67 90 SquarPad 542 527 0 0 91 ChoirPad 543 528 0 64 91 Heaven2 544 529 0 66 91 Itopia 545 530 0 67 91 CC Pad 546 531 0 0 92 BowedPad 547 532 0 64 92 Glacier 548 533 0 65 92 GlassPad 549 534 0 0 93 MetalPad 550 535 0 64 93 Tine Pad 551 536 0 65 93 Pan Pad 552 537 0 0 94 Halo Pad 553 538 0 0 95 SweepPad 554 539 0 20 95 Shwimmer 555 540 0 27 95 Converge 556 541 0 64 95 PolarPad 557 542 0 66 95 Celstial Synth Effects 558 543 0 0 96 Rain 559 544 0 45 96 ClaviPad 560 545 0 64 96 HrmoRain 561 546 0 65 96 AfrcnWnd 562 547 0 66 96 Caribean 563 548 0 0 97 SoundTrk 564 549 0 27 97 Prologue 565 550 0 64 97 Ancestrl 566 551 0 0 98 Crystal 567 552 0 12 98 SynDrCmp 568 553 0 14 98 Popcorn 569 554 0 18 98 TinyBell 570 555 0 35 98 RndGlock 571 556 0 40 98 GlockChi 572 557 0 41 98 ClearBel 573 558 0 42 98 ChorBell 574 559 0 64 98 SynMalet 575 560 0 65 98 SftCryst 576 561 0 66 98 LoudGlok 577 562 0 67 98 XmasBell 578 563 0 68 98 VibeBell 579 564 0 69 98 DigiBell 580 565 0 70 98 AirBells 581 566 0 71 98 BellHarp 582 567 0 72 98 Gamelmba 583 568 0 0 99 Atmosphr 584 569 0 18 99 WarmAtms 585 570 0 19 99 HollwRls 586 571 0 40 99 NylonEP 587 572 0 64 99 NylnHarp 588 573 0 65 99 Harp Vox 589 574 0 66 99 AtmosPad 590 575 0 67 99 Planet 591 576 0 0 100 Bright 592 577 0 64 100 FantaBel 593 578 0 96 100 Smokey 594 579 0 0 101 Goblins 595 580 0 64 101 GobSyn 596 581 0 65 101 50sSciFi ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢ QQQQQQQQQQQQQQ ,,,,,,,,,,,,,, Voice List MIDI PSR-730 PSR-630 Bank Select Program Voice Voice Voice Name Number Number MSB LSB Change Number 597 582 0 66 101 Ring Pad 598 583 0 67 101 Ritual 599 584 0 68 101 ToHeaven 600 585 0 70 101 Night 601 586 0 71 101 Glisten 602 587 0 96 101 BelChoir 603 588 0 0 102 Echoes 604 589 0 8 102 EchoPad2 605 590 0 14 102 Echo Pan 606 591 0 64 102 EchoBell 607 592 0 65 102 Big Pan 608 593 0 66 102 SynPiano 609 594 0 67 102 Creation 610 595 0 68 102 Stardust 611 596 0 69 102 Reso Pan 612 597 0 0 103 Sci-Fi 613 598 0 64 103 Starz Ethnic 614 599 0 0 104 Sitar 615 600 0 32 104 DetSitar 616 601 0 35 104 Sitar 2 617 602 0 96 104 Tambra 618 603 0 97 104 Tamboura 619 604 0 0 105 Banjo 620 605 0 28 105 MuteBnjo 621 606 0 96 105 Rabab 622 607 0 97 105 Gopichnt 623 608 0 98 105 Oud 624 609 0 0 106 Shamisen 625 610 0 0 107 Koto 626 611 0 96 107 T. Koto 627 612 0 97 107 Kanoon 628 613 0 0 108 Kalimba 629 614 0 0 109 Bagpipe 630 615 0 0 110 Fiddle 631 616 0 0 111 Shanai 632 617 0 64 111 Shanai2 633 618 0 96 111 Pungi 634 619 0 97 111 Hichriki Percussive 635 620 0 0 112 TnklBell 636 621 0 96 112 Bonang 637 622 0 97 112 Gender 638 623 0 98 112 Gamelan 639 624 0 99 112 S.Gamlan 640 625 0 100 112 Rama Cym 641 626 0 101 112 AsianBel 642 627 0 0 113 Agogo 643 628 0 0 114 SteelDrm 644 629 0 97 114 GlasPerc 645 630 0 98 114 ThaiBell 646 631 0 0 115 WoodBlok 647 632 0 96 115 Castanet 648 633 0 0 116 TaikoDrm 649 634 0 96 116 Gr.Cassa 650 635 0 0 117 MelodTom 651 636 0 64 117 Mel Tom2 652 637 0 65 117 Real Tom 653 638 0 66 117 Rock Tom 654 639 0 0 118 Syn.Drum 655 640 0 64 118 Ana Tom 656 641 0 65 118 ElecPerc 657 642 0 0 119 RevCymbl Sound Effects 658 643 0 0 120 FretNoiz MIDI PSR-730 PSR-630 Bank Select Program Voice Voice Change Number Number MSB LSB Number 659 644 0 0 121 660 645 0 0 122 661 646 0 0 123 662 647 0 0 124 663 648 0 0 125 664 649 0 0 126 665 650 0 0 127 SFX 666 651 64 0 0 667 652 64 0 1 668 653 64 0 3 669 654 64 0 16 670 655 64 0 32 671 656 64 0 33 672 657 64 0 34 673 658 64 0 35 674 659 64 0 36 675 660 64 0 37 676 661 64 0 48 677 662 64 0 49 678 663 64 0 50 679 664 64 0 54 680 665 64 0 55 681 666 64 0 64 682 667 64 0 65 683 668 64 0 66 684 669 64 0 67 685 670 64 0 68 686 671 64 0 69 687 672 64 0 70 688 673 64 0 80 689 674 64 0 81 690 675 64 0 82 691 676 64 0 83 692 677 64 0 84 693 678 64 0 85 694 679 64 0 86 695 680 64 0 87 696 681 64 0 88 697 682 64 0 89 698 683 64 0 90 699 684 64 0 96 700 685 64 0 97 701 686 64 0 98 702 687 64 0 99 703 688 64 0 100 704 689 64 0 112 705 690 64 0 113 706 691 64 0 114 707 692 64 0 115 Voice Name BrthNoiz Seashore Tweet Telphone Helicptr Applause Gunshot CuttngNz CttngNz2 Str Slap Fl.KClik Rain Thunder Wind Stream Bubble Feed Dog Horse Bird 2 Ghost Maou Tel.Dial DoorSqek Door Slam Scratch Scratch 2 WindChm Telphon2 CarEngin Car Stop Car Pass CarCrash Siren Train Jetplane Starship Burst Coaster SbMarine Laughing Scream Punch Heart FootStep MchinGun LaserGun Xplosion FireWork 139 ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢ QQQQQQQQQQQQQQ ,,,,,,,,,,,,,, Drum Kit List • “<——” indicates that the drum kit is the same as “Standard Kit1”. • Each percussion voice uses one note. • The note numbers and note names printed on the keyboard are one octave higher than the MIDI note numbers and note names shown in the list. For example, the note number and note name, #36 and C1, on the keyboard correspond to the MIDI note number and note name, #24 and C0, shown in the list. • Voices with the same Alternate Note Number (*1 … 4) cannot be played simultaneously. PSR-730 Voice# PSR-630 Voice# Bank MSB# Bank LSB# Program Change# MIDI Note# Note 13 C#-1 *3 14 D-1 *3 15 D#-1 16 E-1 17 F-1 *4 18 F#-1 *4 19 G-1 20 G#-1 21 A-1 22 A#-1 23 B-1 24 C0 25 C#0 26 D0 27 D#0 28 E0 29 F0 30 F#0 31 G0 32 G#0 33 A0 34 A#0 35 B0 36 C1 37 C#1 38 D1 39 D#1 40 E1 41 F1 42 F#1 *1 43 G1 44 G#1 *1 45 A1 46 A#1 *1 47 B1 48 C2 49 C#2 50 D2 51 D#2 52 E2 53 F2 54 F#2 55 G2 56 G#2 57 A2 58 A#2 59 B2 60 C3 61 C#3 62 D3 63 D#3 64 E3 65 F3 66 F#3 67 G3 68 G#3 69 A3 70 A#3 71 B3 72 C4 73 C#4 74 D4 75 D#4 76 E4 77 F4 78 F#4 79 G4 80 G#4 *2 81 A4 *2 82 A#4 83 B4 84 C5 85 C#5 86 D5 87 D#5 88 E5 89 F5 90 F#5 91 G5 140 216 201 127 0 0 Standard Kit 1 Surdo Mute Surdo Open Hi Q Whip Slap Scratch Push Scratch Pull Finger Snap Click Noise Metronome Click Metronome Bell Seq Click L Seq Click H Brush Tap Brush Swirl L Brush Slap Brush Swirl H Snare Roll Castanet Snare L Sticks Bass Drum L Open Rim Shot Bass Drum M Bass Drum H Side Stick Snare M Hand Clap Snare H Floor Tom L Hi-Hat Closed Floor Tom H Hi-Hat Pedal Low Tom Hi-Hat Open Mid Tom L Mid Tom H Crash Cymbal 1 High Tom Ride Cymbal 1 Chinese Cymbal Ride Cymbal Cup Tambourine Splash Cymbal Cowbell Crash Cymbal 2 Vibraslap Ride Cymbal 2 Bongo H Bongo L Conga H Mute Conga H Open Conga L Timbale H Timbale L Agogo H Agogo L Cabasa Maracas Samba Whistle H Samba Whistle L Guiro Short Guiro Long Claves Wood Block H Wood Block L Cuica Mute Cuica Open Triangle Mute Triangle Open Shaker Jingle Bell Bell Tree 217 202 127 0 1 Standard Kit 2 <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— Snare Roll 2 <—— Snare L 2 <—— <—— Open Rim Shot 2 Bass Drum M 2 Bass Drum H 2 <—— Snare M 2 <—— Snare H 2 <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— 218 203 127 0 8 Room Kit <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— BD Room <—— SD Room L <—— SD Room H Room Tom 1 <—— Room Tom 2 <—— Room Tom 3 <—— Room Tom 4 Room Tom 5 <—— Room Tom 6 <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— 219 204 127 0 16 Rock Kit <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— SD Rock M <—— Bass Drum M <—— Bass Drum H 3 BD Rock <—— SD Rock <—— SD Rock Rim Rock Tom 1 <—— Rock Tom 2 <—— Rock Tom 3 <—— Rock Tom 4 Rock Tom 5 <—— Rock Tom 6 <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— 220 205 127 0 24 Electronic Kit <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— Reverse Cymbal <—— Hi Q Snare M <—— Bass Drum H 4 <—— BD Rock BD Gate <—— SD Rock L <—— SD Rock H E Tom 1 <—— E Tom 2 <—— E Tom 3 <—— E Tom 4 E Tom 5 <—— E Tom 6 <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— Scratch Push Scratch Pull <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— 221 206 127 0 25 Analog Kit <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— Reverse Cymbal <—— Hi Q SD Rock H <—— Bass Drum M <—— BD Analog L BD Analog H Analog Side Stick Analog Snare L <—— Analog Snare H Analog Tom 1 Analog HH Closed 1 Analog Tom 2 Analog HH Closed 2 Analog Tom 3 Analog HH Open Analog Tom 4 Analog Tom 5 Analog Cymbal Analog Tom 6 <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— Analog Cowbell <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— Analog Conga H Analog Conga M Analog Conga L <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— Analog Maracas <—— <—— <—— <—— Analog Claves <—— <—— Scratch Push Scratch Pull <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢ QQQQQQQQQQQQQQ ,,,,,,,,,,,,,, Drum Kit List PSR-730 Voice# PSR-630 Voice# Bank MSB# Bank LSB# Program Change# MIDI Note# Note 13 C#-1 *3 14 D-1 *3 15 D#-1 16 E-1 17 F-1 *4 18 F#-1 *4 19 G-1 20 G#-1 21 A-1 22 A#-1 23 B-1 24 C0 25 C#0 26 D0 27 D#0 28 E0 29 F0 30 F#0 31 G0 32 G#0 33 A0 34 A#0 35 B0 36 C1 37 C#1 38 D1 39 D#1 40 E1 41 F1 42 F#1 *1 43 G1 44 G#1 *1 45 A1 46 A#1 *1 47 B1 48 C2 49 C#2 50 D2 51 D#2 52 E2 53 F2 54 F#2 55 G2 56 G#2 57 A2 58 A#2 59 B2 60 C3 61 C#3 62 D3 63 D#3 64 E3 65 F3 66 F#3 67 G3 68 G#3 69 A3 70 A#3 71 B3 72 C4 73 C#4 74 D4 75 D#4 76 E4 77 F4 78 F#4 79 G4 80 G#4 *2 81 A4 *2 82 A#4 83 B4 84 C5 85 C#5 86 D5 87 D#5 88 E5 89 F5 90 F#5 91 G5 222 207 127 0 27 Dance Kit <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— Reverse Cymbal <—— Hi Q AnSD Snappy <—— AnBD Dance-1 AnSD OpenRim AnBD Dance-2 AnBD Dance-3 Analog Side Stick AnSD Q <—— AnSD Ana+Acoustic Analog Tom 1 AnHH Closed-3 Analog Tom 2 Analog HH Closed 2 Analog Tom 3 AnHH Open-2 Analog Tom 4 Analog Tom 5 Analog Cymbal Analog Tom 6 <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— Analog Cowbell <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— Analog Conga H Analog Conga M Analog Conga L <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— Analog Maracas <—— <—— <—— <—— Analog Claves <—— <—— Scratch Push Scratch Pull <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— 223 208 127 0 32 Jazz Kit <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— BD Jazz <—— SD Jazz L <—— SD Jazz H Jazz Tom 1 <—— Jazz Tom 2 <—— Jazz Tom 3 <—— Jazz Tom 4 Jazz Tom 5 <—— Jazz Tom 6 <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— 224 209 127 0 40 Brush Kit <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— Brush Slap L <—— <—— <—— <—— BD Soft <—— Brush Slap <—— Brush Tap Brush Tom 1 <—— Brush Tom 2 <—— Brush Tom 3 <—— Brush Tom 4 Brush Tom 5 <—— Brush Tom 6 <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— 225 210 127 0 48 226 211 126 0 0 227 212 126 0 1 Classic Kit SFX 1 SFX 2 <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— Bass Drum L2 <—— Gran Casa Gran Casa Mute <—— Marching Sn M <—— Marching Sn H Jazz Tom 1 <—— Jazz Tom 2 <—— Jazz Tom 3 <—— Jazz Tom 4 Jazz Tom 5 Hand Cym.Open L Jazz Tom 6 Hand Cym.Closed L <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— Hand Cym.Open H <—— Hand Cym.Closed H <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— Guitar Cutting Noise Guitar Cutting Noise 2 String Slap Dial Tone Door Creaking Door Slam Scratch Scratch 2 Windchime Telephone Ring2 FL.Key Click Engine Start Tire Screech Car Passing Crash Siren Train Jetplane Starship Burst Noise Coaster SvMarine Rain Thunder Wind Stream Bubble Feed Laughing Screaming Punch Heartbeat Footsteps Dog Horse Gallop Bird 2 Machine Gun Laser Gun Explosion FireWork Ghost Maou 141 ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢ QQQQQQQQQQQQQ ,,,,,,,,,,,,, Style List No Name No Name 8BEAT Name LATIN 1 8Beat Pop 1 35 8Beat Rock Ballad 71 Bossa Nova 1 2 8Beat Pop 2 36 16Beat Rock Ballad 72 Bossa Nova 2 3 8Beat Uptempo 37 Hard Rock 73 Bossa Nova 3 4 8Beat Standard 38 Rock Shuffle 74 Salsa 5 Folkrock 39 6/8 Heavy Rock 75 Samba 6 Pop Rock 1 40 US Rock 76 Mambo 7 Pop Rock 2 41 8 8Beat Medium 9 8Beat Ballad 10 11 16Beat Rock 77 Beguine RHYTHM&BLUES 78 Merengue 42 R&B 79 Bolero Lento Epic Ballad 43 Funk 2 80 Espagnole Piano Ballad 44 Soul 81 Cajun 45 Gospel Shuffle 16BEAT CARIBBEAN 12 16Beat Pop 46 6/8 Gospel 82 Reggae 12 13 16Beat Shuffle 1 47 4/4 Blues 83 Pop Reggae 14 16Beat Shuffle 2 15 16Beat Ballad 1 48 Rock & Roll 1 84 Cha Cha 16 16Beat Ballad 2 49 Rock & Roll 2 85 Rhumba 17 16Beat Ballad 3 50 Boogie 86 Pasodoble 18 Funk 1 51 Twist 87 Tango Continental 19 Soul Ballad 52 Bluegrass 1 88 Foxtrot 20 Slow Rock 1 53 Bluegrass 2 89 Jive 21 Slow Rock 2 54 Country 2/4 90 Hully Gully 22 6/8 Ballad 55 8Beat Country 91 Big Band Quickstep DANCE 56 Country Rock 23 Dance Pop 1 57 Cowboy Boogie 92 March 1 24 Dance Pop 2 58 Country Ballad 93 March 2 25 Techno 59 Country Shuffle 94 6/8 March 1 26 Eurobeat 60 Country Waltz 95 Polka 27 Euro House 28 Hip Hop 61 Swing 96 Standard Waltz 29 Trip Hop 62 Big Band Swing 97 Pop Waltz 30 Synth Boogie 63 Big Band Ballad 98 German Waltz DISCO 64 Jazz Quartet 99 Viennese Waltz Dixieland 100 Musette Waltz 6/8 BALLAD 142 No ROCK ROCK & ROLL BALLROOM LATIN COUNTRY&WESTERN BALLROOM STANDARD MARCH TRADITIONAL JAZZ 31 70s Disco 32 Disco Tropical 65 33 Party Pop 66 Cool Jazz 34 Polka Pop 67 Jazz Ballad 68 Jazz Waltz 69 Fusion 70 Funky Fusion CONTEMPORARY JAZZ WALTZ ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢ QQQQQQQQQQQQQ ,,,,,,,,,,,,, About Digital Effects (Reverb/Chorus/DSP) There are three types of digital effects installed in the PSR-630: the reverb effect (system effect), the chorus effect (system effect) and the DSP effect (can be set as either as a system effect or insertion effect). In the PSR-730, the Multi Effect (EFFECT 1/2: insertion) is added to the three PSR-630 effects, for a total of five effects. There are basically two ways to use the effects: with the DSP effect set as a system effect or as a insertion effect. Each different way will be explained here. Although not all the effect settings cannot be made by operating the PSR-730/630 panel manually, some of them may be accessible through MIDI. ■ When DSP type Is Selected as a System Effect • The three PSR-630 effects or the five PSR-730 effects will be connected as shown below. • Since the PSR-730 Multi Effect (EFFECT 1/2) is an insertion effect, it will be applied to only one part from among the R1/R2/L parts. • The signal will enter reverb/chorus/DSP according to the send level (Depth) set for each, and the signal with the effect applied will be output according to the return level that is set. The reverb/chorus/DSP send levels (Depth) are set for each part (track) with the Revoice mode. The reverb/chorus/DSP return levels value are set in common for all the parts. • The stereo panning is available for each of the reverb, chorus and DSP at the output for their signals. Using MIDI, the panning position for the effect can be set (page 158). • If a “Send Chorus to Reverb” (page 158) signal is transmitted to the PSR-730/630 from an external MIDI device, a signal can be sent from the chorus to the reverb (connected in series). Also, if a “Send Variation (DSP) to Reverb” (page 159) signal is transmitted, a signal can be sent from the DSP to the reverb and in the same way if a “Send Variation (DSP) to Chorus” signal (page 159) is transmitted a signal can be sent from DSP to the chorus. If these signals are used, the three effects can be connected in series, or used separately, and a lot of different effects can be produced. The bold lines are stereo lines. Effect 1 is valid for only one part. Effect 1 part Effect 2 is valid for only one part. Effect 2 part Dry/Wet R1 Voice Dry/Wet EFF1 Effect 1 on/off EFF2 Effect 2 on/off dry level rev send REVERB cho send DSP send Dry/Wet Dry/Wet R2 Voice EFF1 Effect 1 on/off EFF2 Effect 2 on/off PAN reverb pan reverb return PAN chorus pan chorus return dry level rev send send chorus to reverb cho send DSP send Dry/Wet Dry/Wet L Voice EFF2 EFF1 Effect 1 on/off Effect 2 on/off dry level cho send DSP send send variation to chorus Dry/Wet Dry/Wet EFF1 Effect 1 on/off EFF2 Effect 2 on/off dry level rev send DSP (VARIATION) cho send DSP send Channel 16 OUT EQ Digital Equalizer (PSR-730) send variation to reverb All tracks that can be revoiced. MIDI Channel 1 CHORUS rev send PAN variation pan DSP return Multi Effect (PSR-730) DRY LINE 143 ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢ QQQQQQQQQQQQQQ ,,,,,,,,,,,,,, About Digital Effects (Reverb/Chorus/DSP) ■ When DSP type Is Selected as a Insertion Effect • The three PSR-630 effects or the five PSR-730 effects will be connected as shown below. • Since the PSR-730 Multi Effect (EFFECT 1/2) is an insertion effect, it will be applied to only one part from among the R1/R2/L parts. • The signal will enter reverb and chorus according to the send level (Depth) set for each, and the signal with the effect applied will be output according to the return level that is set. The reverb and chorus send levels (Depth) are set for each part (track) with the Revoice mode. The reverb and chorus return level value is set in common for all the parts. • The stereo panning is available for each of the reverb and chorus at the output for their signals. Using MIDI, the panning position for the effect can be set (page 158). • If a “Send Chorus to Reverb” (page 158) signal is transmitted to the PSR-730/630 from an external MIDI device, a signal can be sent from the chorus to the reverb (connected in series). • The signal will enter DSP with the Dry/Wet (Depth) that is set, and a signal with the effect applied will be output.The DSP Dry/Wet (Depth) are set for only R1 voice with the revoice mode. The DSP return level cannot be set. The bold lines are stereo lines. Effect 1 is valid for only one part. Effect 1 part Effect 2 is valid for only one part. Effect 2 part Dry/Wet R1 Voice Dry/Wet EFF1 Effect 1 on/off EFF2 Effect 2 on/off EFF1 Effect 1 on/off dry DSP rev send DSP on/off EFF2 reverb reverb return pan REVERB PAN rev send cho send send chorus to reverb dry Dry/Wet EFF1 Effect 1 on/off cho send dry Effect 2 on/off Dry/Wet L Voice DSP Dry/Wet (Depth) Dry/Wet Dry/Wet R2 Voice Variation is valid for only one part. variation part EFF2 rev send cho send Effect 2 on/off CHORUS PAN chorus chorus return pan All tracks that can be revoiced. Dry/Wet Dry/Wet MIDI Channel 1 EFF1 Effect 1 on/off Channel 16 144 EFF2 Effect 2 on/off Multi Effect (PSR-730) DSP Dry/Wet (Depth) dry DSP rev send DSP on/off OUT EQ Digital Equalizer (PSR-730) cho send DRY LINE ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢ QQQQQQQQQQQQQQ ,,,,,,,,,,,,,, About Digital Effects (Reverb/Chorus/DSP) The Digital Effect List No. Effect Type Features REVERB 01~04 Hall1~4 System Concert hall reverb. 05~08 Room1~4 System Small room reverb. 09, 10 Stage1, 2 System Reverb for solo instruments. 11, 12 Plate1, 2 System Simulated steel plate reverb. 13 OFF — No effect. CHORUS 01~05 Chorus1~5 System Conventional chorus program with rich, warm chorusing. 06~09 Flanger1~4 System Pronounced three-phase modulation with a slight metallic sound. 10 OFF — No effect. DSP 01~04 Hall1~4 System Concert hall reverb. 05~08 Room1~4 System Small room reverb. 09, 10 Stage1, 2 System Reverb for solo instruments. 11, 12 Plate1, 2 System Simulated steel plate reverb. 13, 14 Early Reflection1, 2 System Early reflections only. 15 Gate Reverb System Gated reverb effect, in which the reverberation is quickly cut off for special effects. 16 Reverse Gate System Similar to Gate Reverb, but with a reverse increase in reverb. 17~21 Chorus1~5 System Conventional chorus program with rich, warm chorusing. 22~25 Flanger1~4 System Pronounced three-phase modulation with slight metallic sound. 26 Symphonic System Exceptionally rich & deep chorusing. 27 Phaser System Pronounced, metallic modulation with periodic phase change. 28~32 Rotary Speaker 1~5 Insertion Rotary speaker simulation. 33, 34 Tremolo 1, 2 Insertion Rich Tremolo effect with both volume and pitch modulation. 35 Guitar Tremolo Insertion Simulated electric guitar tremolo. 36 Auto Pan Insertion Several panning effects that automatically shift the sound position (left, right, front, back). 37 Auto Wah Insertion Repeating filter sweep “wah” effect. 38 Delay L, C, R System Three independent delays, for the left, right and center stereo positions. 39 Delay L, R System Initial delay for each stereo channel, and two separate feedback delays. 40 Echo System Stereo delay, with independent Feedback Level controls for each channel. 41 Cross Delay System Complex effect that sends the delayed repeats “bouncing” between the left and right channels. 42 Distortion Hard Insertion Hard-edge distortion. 43 Distortion Soft Insertion This type is not so hard compared with Distortion Hard. 44 EQ Disco Insertion Discotype equalizer program to boost high and low frequencies. 45 EQ Telephone Insertion Equalizer program which eliminates higher and lower frequencies to simulate the sounds through telephone. 46 OFF — No effect. 145 ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢ QQQQQQQQQQQQQ ,,,,,,,,,,,,, About Digital Effects (Reverb/Chorus/DSP) The Multi Effect List (PSR-730) No. Effect Type Features 01~04 Hall1~4 Concert hall reverb. 05~08 Room1~4 Small room reverb. 09, 10 Stage1, 2 Reverb for solo instruments. 11, 12 Plate1, 2 Simulated steel plate reverb. 13~17 Chorus1~5 Conventional chorus program with rich, warm chorusing. 18~21 Flanger1~4 Pronounced three-phase modulation with a slight metallic sound. 22 Symphonic Exceptionally rich & deep chorusing. 23 Phaser Pronounced, metallic modulation with periodic phase change. 24~28 Rotary Speaker 1~5 Rotary speaker simulation. 29, 30 Tremolo 1, 2 Rich Tremolo effect with both volume and pitch modulation. 31 Guitar Tremolo Simulated electric guitar tremolo. 32 Auto Pan Several panning effects that automatically shift the sound position (left, right, front, back). 33 Auto Wah Repeating filter sweep “wah” effect. 34 Delay L, C, R Three independent delays, for the left, right and center stereo positions. 35 Delay L, R Initial delay for each stereo channel, and two separate feedback delays. 36 Echo Stereo delay, with independent Feedback Level controls for each channel. 37 Cross Delay Complex effect that sends the delayed repeats “bouncing” between the left and right channels. 38 Distortion Hard Hard-edge distortion. 39 Distortion Soft This type is not so hard compared with Distortion Hard. 40 EQ Disco* Discotype equalizer program to boost high and low frequencies. 41 EQ Telephone* Equalizer program which eliminates higher and lower frequencies to simulate the sounds through telephone. 42 Off No effect. • When the effect type marked with * is selected, Dry/Wet section on the display will show “- - -” indicating that Dry/Wet setting is disabled. 146 ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢ QQQQQQQQQQQQQ ,,,,,,,,,,,,, Harmony Type List No. Type Description 1 Duet This harmony type produces a duophonic melody with the second voice below the melody line. 2 Trio This harmony type generates two voices in addition to the melody voice. 3 4Part Three harmony notes are generated to produce a four-note chord. 4 4 Part Jazz Similar to the preceding type, but depending on the chords played this type will sometimes produce a more colorful sound. 5 Country Similar to Duet, but the second voice is above the melody line. 6 Octave One note is added an octave below the melody. 7 Tremolo The note(s) pressed and held is(are) repeatedly played at the preset tempo. 8 Tremolo Duet Combination of Tremolo and Duet; produces a duophonic melody with two voices played alternately. 9 Tremolo Octave Combination of Tremolo and Octave; produces a duophonic melody with two voices played alternately (the second voice is an octave below the melody). 10 Strumming This type adds arpeggiated pattern to the melody. 11 Trio Delay Two notes slightly below the melody are added to create three parts. Additional notes are delayed slightly. 12 Vibraphone & Jazz Guitar Two voices, Vibraphone and Jazz Guitar, below the melody are added to create three parts. 13 Trumpet & Sax Two voices, Trumpet and Saxophone, below the melody are added to create three parts. 14 Back Vocal “Vocal” voice is added to the melody to get a vocal part in the background. 15 Strings “Strings” voice is added to the melody to create an orchestral atmosphere. 16 Forest “Twitterings” of a bird are added to the melody to create an effect as if you were playing outside. • The Harmonies except for the types 6,7 and 9 are applied to the R1 voice according to the chords detected in the Accompaniment section. 147 ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢ QQQQQQQQQQQQQQ ,,,,,,,,,,,,,, Refining User Styles with Style File Format ■ Style File (Auto Accompaniment) Format Source Pattern ZSource chord root setting XSource chord type setting Chord change NTR (Note Transposition Rule) CNote Transposition rule setting NTT (Note Transposition Table) VNote Transposition table setting The Style File Format (SFF) is a compilation of all of Yamaha’s auto accompaniment know-how into a single unified format. Since the PSR-730/630 supports the SFF format, you can enjoy many styles in addition to the 100 preset SFF styles. Just insert a disk with SFF styles on it into the disk drive and you can load them into the PSR-730/630. By using the user style function, you can take advantage of the power of the SFF format and freely create your own user styles. With the Auto Accompaniment function, chord changes (transpositions) are applied to the source pattern that forms the basis for the accompaniment. The “Note Transposition Rule” and “Note Transposition Table” that are set for each track are used for this. After the transposition is made, the transposed notes are checked to see if they can be correctly played within the range of the instrument, then the accompaniment is played. The following SFF settings can be executed only after recording each track (still in the Record Ready Mode or Rehearsal Mode). Other Settings BHighest Key setting NNote range (Low Limit, High Limit) settings MRetrigger Rule (RTR) setting • The SFF settings can be done only when the Record Ready Mode or Rehearsal Mode is engaged. • The SFF settings cannot be made for the RHYTHM 1/2 tracks. Accompaniment Source Pattern Settings Z Source Chord Root setting X Source Chord Type setting C Note Transposition rule setting Set the key in which the source pattern will be played when the user style is created. The default setting is CM7. (The source chord root is “C” and the source chord type is “M7.” After finishing recording, with the recorded track selected, select the “S.ChordRoot” sub menu and use the [–] and [+] buttons or the Data Dial to select the chord root. S.ChordR oot:A nd P After setting the source chord root, select the “S.Chord Type” sub menu and use the [–] and [+] buttons or the Data Dial to select the chord type. S.ChordT ype:m nd P See page 150 for the available chord types, chord notes and scale notes. 148 NTR (Note Transposition Rule) Setting Set the transposition rule for using the transposition table (see item 4 below) when transposing. There are two types of rules. Root Transposition Rule This rule maintains the mutual relationship in pitch between each note when transposing. Set this for tracks that contain melody-like phrases. Root Fixed Rule To the extent possible, this rule maintains the pitch of each note in the source pattern. Set it for piano-type or guitar-type chord picking tracks. After finishing recording, with the recorded track selected, select “NTR” from the sub menu and use the [–] and [+] buttons or the Data Dial to select the transposition rule. NTR::::: ooooooF ixed ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢ QQQQQQQQQQQQQQ ,,,,,,,,,,,,,, Refining User Styles with Style File Format NTT (Note Transposition Table) Setting V Note Transposition table setting Set the table for making the chord change (transposition) in the source pattern. There are 6 tables, as explained below. Bypass No transposition is done. N Note range (Low Limit, High Limit) settings Set the note range (low and high limits) for the voices recorded on user style tracks. By setting the note range, you can prevent unrealistic notes (such as high notes from a bass or low notes from a piccolo) from being produced and have them shifted to an octave within the note range. Example) When low limit is “C3” and high limit is “D4.” Melody This table is suitable for melody line transposition. Use it for tracks with melodies like PHRASE 1/2. Bass This table is suitable for bass line transposition. The table contents are the same as for “Melody,” but it recognizes on-bass chords such as in the Fingered2 mode. Use it for tracks with low pitched instruments such as bass tracks. Chord This table is suitable for chord transposition. Use it for tracks like the CHORD 1/2 tracks, with piano-type or guitar-type chord picking tracks. M-m Only (M) This table lowers the third by a semitone when changing from a major chord to a minor chord or raises the minor third by a semitone when changing from a minor chord to a major chord. It doesn’t change any other notes. M-m Only (H) When changing from a major chord to a minor chord, this flattens both the third and the sixth by a semitone. When changing from a minor chord to a major, it raises the flatted third and sixth by a semitone. It doesn’t change any other notes. After finishing recording, with the recorded track selected, select “NTT” from the sub menu and use the [–] and [+] buttons or the Data Dial to select the transposition table. NTT::::: ooBypas s Other Settings B Highest Key setting Set the highest key (upper limit of the octaves) of the note transposing for the Source Chord Root setting [1]. The notes designated higher than the highest key will actually be played back in the octave just below the highest key. This setting is effective only when you select the Root Transposition Rule from the item [3]. Root change Notes played CM E3-G3-C4 C#M F3-G#3-C#4 .... .... FM F3-A3-C4 After finishing recording, with the recorded track selected, select “LowLimit” and “HighLimit” from the submenu and use the [-] and [+] buttons or the Data Dial to set the note range. LowLimit : HighLimi t: 28 nd P 127 nd P M Retrigger Rule (RTR) setting Set the method for handling notes as they are being produced during chord change (transposition). There are 5 rule types, as explained below. Stop The note is stopped while being produced, and the next note is sounded. PitchShift The pitch of the note being produced is shifted to match the new chord type. PShftToRoot The pitch of the note being produced is shifted to the note of the new chord root. The octave of the note is not changed by the shift. Retrigger The note is stopped while being produced, and it is sounded again with its pitch matching that of the new chord type. Ret.ToRoot The note is stopped while being produced, and it is sounded again with the note of the new chord root. After finishing recording, with the recorded track selected, select “RTR” from the sub menu and use the [–] and [+] buttons or the Data Dial to select the retrigger rule. RTR::::: o oSto p Example) When highest key is “F”. Root change Notes played CM C#M DM .... FM F#M C3-E3-G3 C#3-F3-G#3 D3-F#3-A3 .... F3-A3-C4 F#2-A#2-C#3 After finishing recording, with the recorded track selected, select “HighestKey” from the submenu and use the [-] and [+] buttons or the Data Dial to select the highest key. HighestK ey: D# nd P 149 ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢ QQQQQQQQQQQQQ ,,,,,,,,,,,,, Refining User Styles with Style File Format ■ About the Source Chord Type When you change the chord of the source pattern from the default CM7 to others (see “Source Pattern Settings” on page 148), the chord notes and scale notes will change depending on the currently selected chord type. See page 101 for the information on the chord note and scale note. [ex.] Source Chord Root of “C” CM 6 [Maj6] CM [Maj] CM 7 CM 7 (#11)[Maj7(#11)] CM add9 [Maj7] [Maj(9)] C C S C C 7 (9) C S C S C C 6 (9) [Maj7(9)] C C S C S C Caug [Maj6(9)] C S C C S C Cm [aug] Cm 7 C S C Cm 7 b5 [min7] C C C C C C S C S C S C C 7 sus4 CmM 7 (9) [minMaj7(9)] Cdim C C C C 7 b5 [7b5] [7sus4] C C C 150 C C C [1+8] C C 1+5 C C 7 (#9) [7(#9)] C C C S C [1+5] C S C C C C S C Csus 4 [sus4] C S C C C C S C C C C 7 (13) C S CM 7 aug [Maj7aug] [7(13)] C C S C C 7 aug C 1+2+5 C C S S C [1+2+5] C S C C [7aug] C C S C S C C C S C C C C C C 7 [7] C 7 (#11) [7(#11)] [7(9)] C C S C S C C C S C S C C 7 (b13) [7(b13)] C [min7(11)] C C S Cdim 7 [dim7] C S C C 7 (9) C S C [7(b9)] C C S C S C C Cm 7 (11) C C C [dim] C S C C C S C [min6] C S C C C C C S C 1+8 C S C C C S C S C Cm 7 (9) [min7(9)] [min(9)] C S C C C S C S C Cm (9) [min7b5] C CmM 7 [minMaj7] C 7 (b9) C C S C C C Cm 6 [min] S C S C C C C S C S C C C S C ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢ QQQQQQQQQQQQQ ,,,,,,,,,,,,, Troubleshooting Something not working as it should? In many cases what appears to be a malfunction can be traced to a simple error that can be remedied immediately. Before assuming that your PSR730/630 is faulty, please check the following points. PROBLEM The speakers produce a “pop” sound whenever the power is turned ON or OFF. POSSIBLE CAUSE/SOLUTION This is normal and is no cause for alarm. The volume is reduced or the sound is distorted. The registration memory doesn’t work properly. Recorded song data will not play back properly. The batteries probably need to be replaced. Either replace all six batteries, or use an AC power adaptor. The display goes bland and all panel controls are reset. No sound when the keyboard is played. Not all simultaneously-played notes sound. Auto Accompaniment seems to “skip” when the keyboard is played. Auto Accompaniment doesn’t sound when started. The R1/R2/L voice volume settings could be set too low. Make sure the voice volumes are set at appropriate levels (pages 14, 111). The Local Control function could be turned off. Make sure Local Control is turned on (page 127). You are probably exceeding the maximum polyphony of the PSR-730/630. The PSR-730 can play up to 64 notes (32 notes for PSR-630) at the same time — including split, dual, autoaccompaniment, song, and multi pad notes. Notes exceeding this limit will not sound. The MIDI Clock mode may be set to “on”. Make sure it is turned “off” (page 128). Make sure that all accompaniment tracks are turned on, and that the they are all set to appropriate volume levels. Auto accompaniment won’t function properly. No lower keyboard sound. Make sure you are using fingerings recognized by the selected fingering mode, and are playing in the Auto Accompaniment section of the keyboard. Are you sure you’re playing in the Auto-Accompaniment section of the keyboard? Make sure that the Auto Accompaniment split point is set appropriately (page 30). Are you playing chords that the PSR-730/630 can recognize (see chord types on page 31~)? The Harmony function will not turn on. Harmony cannot be turned on when the FULL KEYBOARD fingering mode is selected or if a percussion kit voice is selected. Select an appropriate fingering mode or voice. Certain notes sound at the wrong pitch. Make sure that the scale tuning value for those notes is set to “0” (page 115). 151 ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢ QQQQQQQQQQQQQ ,,,,,,,,,,,,, Data Backup & Initialization ■ Data Backup Except for the data listed below, all PSR-730/630 panel settings are reset to their initial settings whenever the power is turned on. • Registration Memory • User Style Data • User Pad Data • MIDI Transmit Settings • MIDI Receive Settings The data listed above can be backed up — i.e. retained in memory — as long as a working set of batteries is installed and you keep the following Off/On procedure. z Turn the power OFF by pressing the [STAND BY/ON] switch. x Unplug the DC output cable of the PA-6 from the DC IN 10-12V jack on the rear panel of the PSR-730/630. c Then unplug the PA-6 Power Adaptor from the wall AC outlet. When turning the power ON, simply reverse the procedure. ■ Data Initialization All data can be initialized and restored to the factory preset condition by turning on the power while holding the highest (rightmost) white key on the keyboard. “Backup RAM Clear” will appear briefly on the display. STAND BY ON Backup R AM Clea r 152 • All registration and User Style/Pad memory data, plus the other settings listed above, will be erased and/or changed when the data initialization procedure is carried out. • Carrying out the data initialization procedure will usually restore normal operation if the PSR730/630 freezes or begins to act erratically for any reason. ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢ QQQQQQQQQQQQQ ,,,,,,,,,,,,, MIDI Data Format Many MIDI messages listed in the MIDI Data Format are expressed in decimal numbers, binary numbers and hexadecimal numbers. Hexadecimal numbers may include the letter “H” as a suffix. Also, “n” can freely be defined as any whole number. To enter data/values, refer to the table below. Decimal 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 Hexadecimal 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 0A 0B 0C 0D 0E 0F 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 1A 1B 1C 1D 1E 1F 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 2A 2B 2C 2D 2E 2F 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 3A 3B 3C 3D 3E 3F Binary 0000 0000 0000 0001 0000 0010 0000 0011 0000 0100 0000 0101 0000 0110 0000 0111 0000 1000 0000 1001 0000 1010 0000 1011 0000 1100 0000 1101 0000 1110 0000 1111 0001 0000 0001 0001 0001 0010 0001 0011 0001 0100 0001 0101 0001 0110 0001 0111 0001 1000 0001 1001 0001 1010 0001 1011 0001 1100 0001 1101 0001 1110 0001 1111 0010 0000 0010 0001 0010 0010 0010 0011 0010 0100 0010 0101 0010 0110 0010 0111 0010 1000 0010 1001 0010 1010 0010 1011 0010 1100 0010 1101 0010 1110 0010 1111 0011 0000 0011 0001 0011 0010 0011 0011 0011 0100 0011 0101 0011 0110 0011 0111 0011 1000 0011 1001 0011 1010 0011 1011 0011 1100 0011 1101 0011 1110 0011 1111 Decimal 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 Hexadecimal 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 4A 4B 4C 4D 4E 4F 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 5A 5B 5C 5D 5E 5F 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 6A 6B 6C 6D 6E 6F 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 7A 7B 7C 7D 7E 7F Binary 0100 0000 0100 0001 0100 0010 0100 0011 0100 0100 0100 0101 0100 0110 0100 0111 0100 1000 0100 1001 0100 1010 0100 1011 0100 1100 0100 1101 0100 1110 0100 1111 0101 0000 0101 0001 0101 0010 0101 0011 0101 0100 0101 0101 0101 0110 0101 0111 0101 1000 0101 1001 0101 1010 0101 1011 0101 1100 0101 1101 0101 1110 0101 1111 0110 0000 0110 0001 0110 0010 0110 0011 0110 0100 0110 0101 0110 0110 0110 0111 0110 1000 0110 1001 0110 1010 0110 1011 0110 1100 0110 1101 0110 1110 0110 1111 0111 0000 0111 0001 0111 0010 0111 0011 0111 0100 0111 0101 0111 0110 0111 0111 0111 1000 0111 1001 0111 1010 0111 1011 0111 1100 0111 1101 0111 1110 0111 1111 • Except the table above, for example 144-159(decimal)/9nH/1001 0000-1001 1111(binary) displays the Note On Message for each channel (1-16). 176-191/ BnH/1011 0000-1011 1111 displays the Control Change Message for each channel (1-16). 192-207/CnH/1100 0000-1100 1111 displays the Program Change Message for each channel (1-16). 240/FOH/1111 0000 denotes the start of a System Exclusive Message. 247/F7H/1111 0111 denotes the end of a System Exclusive Message. • aaH (hexidecimal)/0aaaaaaa (binary) denotes the data address. The address contains High, Mid, and Low. • bbH/0bbbbbbb denotes the byte count. • ccH/0ccccccc denotes the check sum. • ddH/0ddddddd denotes the data/value. (1) TRANSMIT FLOW MIDI ← NOTE ON/OFF OUT CONTROL CHANGE BANK SELECT MSB BANK SELECT LSB DATA ENTRY MSB DATA ENTRY LSB MAIN VOLUME PANPOT EXPRESSION SUSTAIN SOSTENUTE SOFT PEDAL REVERB SEND LEVEL VARIATION SEND LEVEL PROGRAM CHANGE PITCH BEND 9nH BnH BnH,00H BnH,20H BnH,06H BnH,26H BnH,07H BnH,0AH BnH,0BH BnH,40H BnH,42H BnH,43H BnH,5BH BnH,5EH CnH EnH SYSTEM EXCLUSIVE MESSAGE <YAMAHA MIDI FORMAT> <UNIVERSAL> UNIVERSAL REALTIME F0H 7FH.....F7H UNIVERSAL NON-REALTIME F0H 7EH.....F7H <XG STANDARD> XG PARAMETER CHANGE F0H 43H 1nH 4CH aaH aaH aaH ddH .....ddH F7H XG BULK DUMP F0H 43H 0nH 4CH bbH bbH aaH aaH aaH ddH.....ddH ccH F7H SPECIAL OPERATORS SYSTEM REALTIME MESSAGE MIDI CLOCK START STOP ACTIVE SENSING F8H FAH FCH FEH (2) RECEIVE FLOW MIDI → NOTE OFF IN NOTE ON/OFF CONTROL CHANGE BANK SELECT MSB BANK SELECT LSB MODULATION PORTAMENTO TIME DATA ENTRY MSB DATA ENTRY LSB MAIN VOLUME PANPOT EXPRESSION SUSTAIN PORTAMENTO SOSTENUTO SOFT PEDAL HARMONIC CONTENT RELEASE TIME ATTACK TIME BRIGHTNESS PORTAMENTO CONTROL REVERB SEND LEVEL CHORUS SEND LEVEL VARIATION SEND LEVEL DATA INCREMENT DATA DECREMENT NRPN LSB NRPN MSB VIBRATO RATE VIBRATO RATE VIBRATO DEPTH VIBRATO DELAY FILTER CUTOFF FREQ. FILTER RESONANCE AEG ATTACK TIME AEG DECAY TIME AEG RELEASE DRUM INST CUTOFF FREQ. FILTER RESONANCE AEG ATTACK RATE AEG DECAY RATE PITCH COARSE 8nH 9nH BnH,00H BnH,20H BnH,01H BnH,05H BnH,06H BnH,26H BnH,07H BnH,0AH BnH,0BH BnH,40H BnH,41H BnH,42H BnH,43H BnH,47H BnH,48H BnH,49H BnH,4AH BnH,54H BnH,5BH BnH,5DH BnH,5EH BnH,60H BnH,61H BnH,62H BnH,63H BnH,63H,01H,62H,08H,06H,mmH BnH,63H,01H,62H,08H,06H,mmH BnH,63H,01H,62H,09H,06H,mmH BnH,63H,01H,62H,0AH,06H,mmH BnH,63H,01H,62H,20H,06H,mmH BnH,63H,01H,62H,21H,06H,mmH BnH,63H,01H,62H,63H,06H,mmH BnH,63H,01H,62H,64H,06H,mmH BnH,63H,01H,62H,66H,06H,mmH BnH,63H,14H,62H,rrH,06H,mmH BnH,63H,15H,62H,rrH,06H,mmH BnH,63H,16H,62H,rrH,06H,mmH BnH,63H,17H,62H,rrH,06H,mmH BnH,63H,18H,62H,rrH,06H,mmH 153 ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢ QQQQQQQQQQQQQQ ,,,,,,,,,,,,,, MIDI Data Format PITCH FINE LEVEL PANPOT REVERB SEND CHORUS SEND VARIATION SEND RPN LSB RPN MSB PITCH BEND SENS. FINE TUNING BnH,63H,19H,62H,rrH,06H,mmH BnH,63H,1AH,62H,rrH,06H,mmH BnH,63H,1CH,62H,rrH,06H,mmH BnH,63H,1DH,62H,rrH,06H,mmH BnH,63H,1EH,62H,rrH,06H,mmH BnH,63H,1FH,62H,rrH,06H,mmH BnH,64H BnH,65H BnH,65H,00H,64H,00H,06H,mmH BnH,65H,00H,64H,01H,06H,mmH, 26H,llH BnH,65H,00H,64H,02H,06H,mmH BnH,65H,7FH,64H,7FH BnH,78H,00H BnH,79H,00H BnH,7BH,00H BnH,7CH,00H BnH,7DH,00H BnH,7EH BnH,7FH COARSE TUNING NULL ALL SOUND OFF RESET ALL CONTROLLERS ALL NOTES OFF OMNI OFF OMNI ON MONO POLY PROGRAM CHANGE CnH CHANNEL AFTER TOUCH DnH PITCH BEND CHANGE EnH SYSTEM EXCLUSIVE MESSAGE <YAMAHA MIDI FORMAT> <UNIVERSAL> UNIVERSAL REALTIME F0H 7FH.....F7H UNIVERSAL NON-REALTIME F0H 7EH.....F7H <XG STANDARD> XG PARAMETER CHANGE F0H 43H 1nH 4CH aaH aaH aaH ddH .....ddH F7H XG BULK DUMP F0H 43H 0nH 4CH bbH bbH aaH aaH aaH ddH.....ddH ccH F7H PARAMETER REQUEST F0H 43H 3nH 4CH aaH aaH aaH F7H DUMP REQUEST F0H 43H 2nH 4CH aaH aaH aaH F7H <CLAVINOVA MIDI COMPLIANCE> <SPETIAL OPERATORS> <Others> SYSTEM REALTIME MESSAGE MIDI CLOCK START STOP ACTIVE SENSING F8H FAH FCH FEH (3) TRANSMIT/RECEIVE DATA (3-1) CHANNEL VOICE MESSAGES (3-1-1) NOTE OFF (Recive only) STATUS NOTE NUMBER VELOCITY 1000nnnn (8nH) 0kkkkkkk 0vvvvvvv n = 0 - 15 VOICE CHANNEL NUMBER k = 0 (C-2) - 127 (G8) v: ignored 1001nnnn (9nH) 0kkkkkkk 0vvvvvvv 00000000 n = 0 - 15 VOICE CHANNEL NUMBER k = 0 (C-2) - 127 (G8) (v π 0) NOTE ON (v = 0) NOTE OFF (3-1-2) NOTE ON/OFF STATUS NOTE NUMBER VELOCITY (3-1-3) PROGRAM CHANGE STATUS 1100nnnn (CnH) PROGRAM NUMBER 0ppppppp n = 0 - 15 VOICE CHANNEL NUMBER p = 0 - 127 * PROGRAM NUMBER: XG DRUM VOICE number correspondence P=1 Standard Kit P=2 Standard2 Kit P=9 Room Kit P = 17 Rock Kit P = 25 Elctrnic Kit P = 26 Analog Kit P = 28 Dance Kit P = 33 Jazz Kit P = 41 Brush Kit P = 49 Classic Kit * PROGRAM NUMBER: XG SFX KIT number correspondence P=1 SFX1 Kit P=2 SFX2 Kit When DRUM VOICE is selected and program change data for a different DRUM VOICE is received, the currently selected DRUM VOICE will be replaced with the new DRUM VOICE. 154 (3-1-4) CHANNEL AFTER TOUCH (Recive only) STATUS VALUE 1101nnnn (DnH) n = 0 - 15 VOICE CHANNEL NUMBER 0vvvvvvv v = 0 - 127 AFTER TOUCH VALUE (3-1-5) PITCH BEND CHANGE STATUS LSB MSB 1110nnnn (EnH) 0vvvvvvv 0vvvvvvv n = 0 - 15 VOICE CHANNEL NUMBER PITCH BEND CHANGE LSB PITCH BEND CHANGE MSB (3-1-6) CONTROL CHANGE STATUS CONTROL NUMBER CONTROL VALUE 1011nnnn (BnH) 0ccccccc 0vvvvvvv * Transmit CONTROL NUMBER. c=0 BANK SELECT MSB c = 32 c= 6 c = 38 c= 7 c = 10 c = 11 c = 64 c = 66 c = 67 c = 91 c = 94 0:XG NORMAL, 64:SFX NORMAL, 126:XG SFX KIT, 127:XG DRUM BANK SELECT LSB ; v = 0 - 127 *3 DATA ENTRY MSB ; v = 0 - 127 *1 DATA ENTRY LSB ; v = 0 - 127 *1 MAIN VOLUME ; v = 0 - 127 PANPOT ; v = 0 - 127 EXPRESSION ; v = 0 - 127 SUSTAIN ; v = 0-63:OFF , 64-127:ON *2 SOSTENUTO ; v = 0-63:OFF , 64-127:ON *2 SOFT PEDAL ; v = 0-63:OFF , 64-127:ON *2 REVERB SEND LEVEL ; v = 0 - 127 VARIATION SEND LEVEL ; v = 0 - 127 (When only Connection = 1[System]) * Receive CONTROL NUMBER. c= 0 BANK SELECT MSB c = 32 c= 1 c= 5 c= 6 c = 38 c= 7 c = 10 c = 11 c = 64 c = 65 c = 66 c = 67 c = 71 c = 72 c = 73 c = 74 c = 84 c = 91 c = 93 c = 94 c = 96 c = 97 n = 0 - 15 VOICE CHANNEL NUMBER ;v= ;v= 0:XG NORMAL, 64:SFX NORMAL, 126:XG SFX KIT, 127:XG DRUM BANK SELECT LSB ; v = 0 - 127 *3 MODULATION ; v = 0 - 127 *2 PORTAMENTO TIME ; v = 0 - 127 *2 DATA ENTRY MSB ; v = 0 - 127 *1 DATA ENTRY LSB ; v = 0 - 127 *1 MAIN VOLUME ; v = 0 - 127 PANPOT ; v = 0 - 127 EXPRESSION ; v = 0 - 127 SUSTAIN ; v = 0-63:OFF , 64-127:ON *2 PORTAMENTO ; v = 0-63:OFF , 64-127:ON *2 SOSTENUTO ; v = 0-63:OFF , 64-127:ON *2 SOFT PEDAL ; v = 0-63:OFF , 64-127:ON *2 HARMONIC CONTENT ; v = 0:-64 - 64:0 - 127:+63 *2 RELEASE TIME ; v = 0:-64 - 64:0 - 127:+63 *2 ATTACK TIME ; v = 0:-64 - 64:0 - 127:+63 *2 BRIGHTNESS ; v = 0:-64 - 64:0 - 127:+63 *2 PORTAMENT CONTROL ; v = 0 - 127 *2 REVERB SEND LEVEL ; v = 0 - 127 CHORUS SEND LEVEL ; v = 0 - 127 VARIATION SEND LEVEL ; v = 0 - 127 (When only Connection = 1[System]) DATA INCREMENT ; v = 127 *1 DATA DECREMENT ; v = 127 *1 *1 Only when setting the appointed parameter with RPN, NRPN. *2 Does not effect Rhythm Voice. *3 MSB=0, anything other than 63 is 0. • Until a PROGRAM CHANGE message is received, the BANK SELECT operation will be suspended. When a Voice, including VOICE BANK, is changed, set the BANK SELECT and Program Change Message, and transmit in the following order, BANK SELECT MSB, LSB, PROGRAM CHANGE. • MODULATION controls the Vibrato Depth. • PORTAMENTO TIME controls the Pitch Change Speed when the Portamento Switch = ON. 0 being the shortest time, and 127 being the longest. • PANPOT changes the value for the melody voice and rhythm voice in relation to the preset value. • Portamento time is fixed to 0 when the PORTAMENTO CONTROL is used. • HARMONIC CONTENT applies adjustment to the resonance value that is set by the voice. This parameter specifies relative change with the value of 64 producing 0 adjustment. As values get higher the sound becomes increasingly eccentric. Note that for some voices the effective parameter range is narrower than the legal parameter range. • RELEASE TIME applies adjustment to the envelope release time set by the voice. This parameter specifies relative change with the value of 64 producing 0 adjustment. ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢ QQQQQQQQQQQQQQ ,,,,,,,,,,,,,, MIDI Data Format • ATTACK TIME applies adjustment to the envelope attack time set by the voice. This parameter specifies relative change with the value of 64 producing 0 adjustment. • BRIGHTNESS applies adjustment to the cut-off frequency set by the voice. This parameter specifies relative change with the value of 64 producing 0 adjustment. Lower voices produce a softer sound. For some voices the effective parameter range is narrower than the legal parameter range. (3-2) CHANNEL MODE MESSAGES STATUS CONTROL NUMBER CONTROL VALUE 1011nnnn (BnH) 0ccccccc 0vvvvvvv n = 0 - 15 VOICE CHANNEL NUMBER c = CONTROL NUMBER v = DATA VALUE (3-2-1) ALL SOUND OFF (Recive only) (CONTROL NUMBER = 78H , DATA VALUE = 0) Switches off all sound from the channel. Does not reset Note On and Hold On conditions established by Channel Messages. (3-2-2) RESET ALL CONTROLLERS (Recive only) (CONTROL NUMBER = 79H , DATA VALUE = 0) Resets controllers as follows. PITCH BEND CHANGE AFTER TOUCH MODULATION EXPRESSION SUSTAIN SOSTENUTO SOFT PEDAL NRPN RPN PORTAMENT CONTROL PORTAMENTO 0 (Center) 0 (min.) 0 (min.) 127 (max.) 0 (off) 0 (off) 0 (off) Sets number to null. (Internal data remains unchanged) Sets number to null. (Internal data remains unchanged) Resets portamento source note number 0 (off) (3-2-3) ALL NOTES OFF (Recive only) (CONTROL NUMBER = 7BH , DATA VALUE = 0) Switches off all of the channel’s “on” notes. However, any notes being held by SUSTAIN or SOSTENUTO continue to sound until SUSTAIN/SOSTENUTO goes off. (3-2-4) OMNI OFF (Recive only) (CONTROL NUMBER = 7CH , DATA VALUE = 0) Same processing as for All Notes Off. (3-2-5) OMNI ON (Recive only) (CONTROL NUMBER = 7DH , DATA VALUE = 0) First appoints the parameter for NRPN MSB/LSB, then sets the parameter value for data entry MSB/LSB. NRPN MSB LSB 01H 08H 01H 09H 01H 0AH 01H 20H 01H 21H 01H 63H 01H 64H 01H 66H 14H rrH 15H rrH 16H rrH 17H rrH 18H rrH 19H rrH 1AH rrH 1CH rrH D.ENTRY MSB LSB mmH — mmH — mmH — mmH — mmH — mmH — mmH — mmH — mmH — mmH — mmH — mmH — mmH — mmH — mmH — mmH — 1DH rrH 1EH rrH 1FH rrH mmH — mmH — mmH — PARAMETER NAME VIBRATO RATE VIBRATO DEPTH VIBRATO DELAY FILTER CUTOFF FREQUENCY FILTER RESONANCE EG ATTACK TIME EG DECAY TIME EG RELEASE DRUM FILTER CUTOFF FREQ. DRUM FILTER RESONANCE DRUM AEG ATTACK RATE DRUM AEG DECAY RATE DRUM PITCH COARSE DRUM PITCH FINE DRUM LEVEL DRUM PANPOT DATA RANGE 00H - 40H - 7FH (-64 - 0 - +63) 00H - 40H - 7FH (-64 - 0 - +63) 00H - 40H - 7FH (-64 - 0 - +63) 00H - 40H - 7FH (-64 - 0 - +63) 00H - 40H - 7FH (-64 - 0 - +63) 00H - 40H - 7FH (-64 - 0 - +63) 00H - 40H - 7FH (-64 - 0 - +63) 00H - 40H - 7FH (-64 - 0 - +63) 00H - 40H - 7FH (-64 - 0 - +63) 00H - 40H - 7FH (-64 - 0 - +63) 00H - 40H - 7FH (-64 - 0 - +63) 00H - 40H - 7FH (-64 - 0 - +63) 00H - 40H - 7FH (-64 - 0 - +63) 00H - 40H - 7FH (-64 - 0 - +63) 00H - 7FH (0 - max.) 00H ,01H - 40H - 7FH (random,left - center - right) DRUM REVERB SEND LEVEL 00H - 7FH (0 - max.) DRUM CHORUS SEND LEVEL 00H - 7FH (0 - max.) DRUM VARIATION SEND LEVEL 00H - 7FH (0 - max.) The MSG14H-1FH (for drums) message is accepted as long as the channel is set with a drum voice. rrH : drum instrument note number (3-5) SYSTEM REALTIME MESSAGES (3-5-1) MIDI CLOCK STATUS 11111000 (F8H) Transmission: 96 clocks per measure are transmitted. Reception: If the instrument’s clock is set to external, after FAH is received from the external device the instrument’s clock will sync with the 96 beats per measure received from the external device. Decides whether the internal clock, or Timing Clocks received via the MIDI IN will be used. (3-5-2) START STATUS 11111010 (FAH) Transmission: Transmitted when instrument’s Rhythm or Song playback is started. Reception: Depending upon the condition, Rhythm, Song Playback, or Song Rec will start. Same processing as for All Notes Off. Omni On is not executed. (3-5-3) STOP (3-2-6) MONO (Recive only) (CONTROL NUMBER = 7EH , DATA VALUE = 0) Same processing as for All Notes Off. If the 3rd byte is in a range of 0-16 the corresponding channel will be changed to Mode 4 (m=1). (3-2-7) POLY (Recive only) (CONTROL NUMBER = 7FH , DATA VALUE = 0) Same processing as for All Sounds Off and the corresponding channel will be changed to Mode 3. STATUS (3-5-4) ACTIVE SENSING STATUS (3-3) REGISTERED PARAMETER NUMBER (RPN) STATUS RPN LSB RPN LSB NUMBER RPN MSB RPN MSB NUMBER DATA ENTRY MSB DATA VALUE DATA ENTRY LSB DATA VALUE 1011nnnn (BnH) 01100100 (64H) 0ppppppp 01100101 (65H) 0qqqqqqq 00000110 (06H) 0mmmmmmm 00100110 (26H) 0lllllll n = 0 - 15 VOICE CHANNEL NUMBER p = RPN LSB(refer to the list below) 11111100 (FCH) Transmission: Transmitted when instrument’s Rhythm or Song playback is stopped. Reception: Depending upon the condition, Rhythm, Song Playback, or Song Rec will stop. 11111110 (FEH) Transmission: Transmitted approximately once every 200msec. Reception: Sensing is started once this Code is received. If Status or Data is not received within 400ms, the MIDI Receive Buffer will be cleared, and all notes, including those being sustained, will be cut OFF. Also, all control values will be reset to their factory defaults. q = RPN MSB(refer to the list below) m = Data Value (3-6) SYSTEM EXCLUSIVE MESSAGE (3-6-1) YAMAHA MIDI FORMAT l = Data Value First appoints the parameter for RPN MSB/LSB, then sets the parameter value for data entry MSB/LSB. RPN LSB MSB 00H 00H 01H 00H D.ENTRY MSB LSB PARAMETER NAME DATA RANGE mmH — PITCH BEND SENSITIVITY 00H - 18H (0 - 24 semitones) mmH llH FINE TUNE {mmH,llH} = {00H,00H} - {40H,00H} - {7FH,7FH} (-8192*100/8192) - 0 - (+8192*100/8192) 02H 00H mmH — COARSE TUNE 28H - 40H - 58H (-24 - 0 - +24 semitones) 7FH 7FH — — NULL Clears the current RPN number setting. Does not change the internal parameter settings. (3-6-1-1) SECTION CONTROL binary 11110000 01000011 01111110 00000000 0sssssss hexadecimal F0 43 7E 00 SS 0ddddddd 11110111 DD F7 (3-4) NON-REGISTERED PARAMETER NUMBER (NRPN) (Recive only) STATUS NRPN LSB NRPN LSB NUMBER NRPN MSB NRPN MSB NUMBER DATA ENTRY MSB DATA VALUE 1011nnnn (BnH) 01100010 (62H) 0ppppppp 01100011 (63H) 0qqqqqqq 00000110 (06H) 0mmmmmmm n = 0 - 15 VOICE CHANNEL NUMBER p = NRPN LSB(refer to the list below) q = NRPN MSB(refer to the list below) m = Data Value Exclusive status YAMAHA ID Style Switch No. 00H : INTRO A 01H~07H : INTRO B 08H : MAIN A 09H~0FH : MAIN B 10H : FILL IN AA 11H~17H : FILL IN BB 18H : FILL IN AB 19H~1FH : FILL IN BA 20H : ENDING A 21H~27H : ENDING B Switch On/Off : 00H (Off),7FH (On) End of Exclusive When an ON code is received, the appointed section will be changed. 155 ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢ QQQQQQQQQQQQQQ ,,,,,,,,,,,,,, MIDI Data Format (3-6-1-2) TEMPO CONTROL binary 11110000 01000011 01111110 00000000 0ttttttt 0ttttttt 0ttttttt 0ttttttt 11110111 hexadecimal F0 43 7E 01 TT TT TT TT F7 (3-6-3-1-2) XG PARMETER CHANGE Exclusive status YAMAHA ID Style Tempo4 Tempo3 Tempo2 Tempo1 End of Exclusive The internal clock will be set to the received Tempo value. Tempo Meta Event is a large data block (24-bit), it is divided into 4 groups with 7-bits going into each of the Tempos 1-4 (4 receives the remaining 3 bits). (3-6-2) UNIVERSAL SYSTEM EXCLUSIVE (3-6-2-1) UNIVERSAL REALTIME MESSAGE (3-6-2-1-1) MIDI MASTER VOLUME (Recive only) binary 11110000 01111110 01111111 00001001 00000001 0sssssss 0ttttttt 11110111 or 11110000 01111110 0xxxnnnn hexadecimal F0 7F 7F 04 01 SS TT F7 00001001 00000001 0sssssss 0ttttttt 11110111 04 01 SS TT F7 F0 7F XN Exclusive status Universal Realtime ID of target Device Sub-ID #1=Device Control Message Sub-ID #2=Master Volume Volume LSB Volume MSB End of Exclusive Exclusive status Universal Realtime When N is received N=0-F, whichever is received. When N is transmitted N always=0. X = don’t care Sub-ID #1=Device Control Message Sub-ID #2=Master Volume Volume LSB Volume MSB End of Exclusive The volume for all channels will be changed simultaneously. The TT value is used as the MIDI Master Volume value. (the ss value is ignored.) (3-6-2-2) UNIVERSAL NON REALTIME MESSAGE (3-6-2-2-1) GENERAL MIDI SYSTEM ON binary 11110000 01111110 01111111 00001001 00000001 11110111 or 11110000 01111110 0xxxnnnn hexadecimal F0 7E 7F 09 01 F7 00001001 00000001 11110111 09 01 F7 F0 7E XN Exclusive status Universal Non-Realtime ID of target Device Sub-ID #1=General MIDI Message Sub-ID #2=General MIDI On End of Exclusive Exclusive status Universal Non-Realtime When N is received N=0-F, whichever is received. When N is transmitted N always=0. X = don’t care Sub-ID #1=General MIDI Message Sub-ID #2=General MIDI On End of Exclusive Depending upon the received ON message, the System Mode will be changed to XG. Except MIDI Master Tuning, all control data be reset to default values. This message requires approximately 50ms to execute, so sufficient time should be allowed before the next message is sent. (3-6-3) XG STANDARD (3-6-3-1) XG PARAMETER CHANGE (3-6-3-1-1) XG SYSTEM ON binary 11110000 01000011 0001nnnn 01001100 00000000 00000000 01111110 00000000 11110111 hexadecimal F0 43 1N 4C 00 00 7E 00 F7 Exclusive status YAMAHA ID Device Number Model ID Address High Address Mid Address Low Data End of Exclusive Depending upon the received ON message, the SYSTEM MODE will be changed to XG.Controllers will be reset, all values of Multi Part and Effect, and All System values denoted by “XG” data within All System will be reset to default values in the table. This message requires approximately 50ms to execute, so sufficient time should be allowed before the next message is sent. 156 binary 11110000 01000011 0001nnnn 01001100 0aaaaaaa 0aaaaaaa 0aaaaaaa 0ddddddd | 11110111 hexadecimal F0 43 1N 4C AA AA AA DD | F7 Exclusive status YAMAHA ID Device Number Model ID Address High Address Mid Address Low Data End of Exclusive For parameters with data size of 2 or 4, transmit the appropriate number of data bytes. For more information on Address and Parameters, refer to < Table 1-2 > ~ < Table 1-8 > (pages 157-162). The 4 data types listed below are transmitted and received. (These are transmitted only after a Parameter change request is received.) XG System Data Multi Effect Data Multi EQ Data Multi Part Data Drums Setup Data (3-6-3-2) XG BULK DUMP binary 11110000 01000011 0000nnnn 01001100 0bbbbbbb 0bbbbbbb 0aaaaaaa 0aaaaaaa 0aaaaaaa 0ddddddd | 0ccccccc 11110111 hexadecimal F0 43 0N 4C BB BB AA AA AA DD | CC F7 Exclusive status YAMAHA ID Device Number Model ID ByteCount ByteCount Address High Address Mid Address Low Data Check sum End of Exclusive For more information on Address and Byte Count, refer to < Table 1-2 > ~ < Table 1-8 > (pages 157-162). The Check Sum value is set such that the sum of Byte Count, Address, Data, and Check Sum has value zero in its seven least significant bits. If the top of the block is appointed to the Address the XG Bulk Dump, Bulk Request will be received. The Block is a unit that consists of the data, arranged in the list, as the Total Size. The 5 data types listed below are transmitted and received. (These are transmitted only after a Bulk Dump request is received.) System Data Multi Effect Data(Individual effect unit) Multi EQ Data Multi Part Data(Individual part unit) Drums Setup Data(Individual note unit) System Information(Individual only) (3-6-3-3) XG PARAMETER REQUEST (Recive only) binary 11110000 01000011 0011nnnn 01001100 0aaaaaaa 0aaaaaaa 0aaaaaaa 11110111 hexadecimal F0 43 3n 4C AA AA AA F7 Exclusive status YAMAHA ID Device Number Model ID Address High Address Mid Address Low End of Exclusive For more information on Address and Byte Count refer to < Table 1-2 > ~ < Table 1-8 > (pages 157-162). The 4 data types listed below are received. System Data Multi Effect Data Multi EQ Data Multi Part Data Drums Setup Data (3-6-3-4) XG DUMP REQUEST (Recive only) binary 11110000 01000011 0010nnnn 01001100 0aaaaaaa 0aaaaaaa 0aaaaaaa 11110111 hexadecimal F0 43 2n 4C AA AA AA F7 Exclusive status YAMAHA ID Device Number Model ID Address High Address Mid Address Low End of Exclusive For more information on Address and Byte Count refer to < Table 1-2 > ~ < Table 1-8 > (pages 157-162). ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢ QQQQQQQQQQQQQQ ,,,,,,,,,,,,,, MIDI Data Format (3-6-5) Others The 5 data types listed below are received. System Data Multi Effect Data(Individual module unit) Multi EQ Data Multi Part Data(Individual part unit) Drums Setup Data(Individual note unit) System Information (3-6-5-1) MIDI MASTER TUNING (Recive only) (3-6-4) SPECIAL OPERATORS (3-6-4-1) VOLUME ,EXPRESSION AND PAN REALTIME CONTROL OFF binary 11110000 01000011 01110011 01000101 00010001 0000nnnn 01001001 0vvvvvvv 11110111 hexadecimal F0 43 73 45 11 0N 45 VV F7 Exclusive status YAMAHA ID Clavinova ID CVP-98/96/94/92 ID Sub ID N = MIDI Channel Volume and Expression Realtime Control Off Value VV: off=7FH, on=00H End of Exclusive binary 11110000 01000011 0001nnnn 00100111 00110000 00000000 00000000 0mmmmmmm 0lllllll 0ccccccc 11110111 hexadecimal F0 43 1N 27 30 00 00 MM LL CC F7 Exclusive status YAMAHA ID When N is received N=0-F, whichever is received. Model ID Sub ID Master Tune MSB Master Tune LSB don’t care End of Exclusive Changes tuning of all channels. MM, LL values are used to define the MIDI Master Tuning value. T = M-128 T : Tuning value (-99cent - +99cent) M : A single byte value (28-228) consists of bytes 0-3 of MM = MSB, bytes 0-3 of LL = LSB. When “On” is received, subsequent volume, expression, and PAN changes are only valid after the reception of the next key on. Normal operation resumes when “Off” is received. In this setting, GM System ON, XG System ON will not be reset. < Table 1-1> Parmeter Basic Address SYSTEM Parameter Change Address (H) (M) (L) 00 00 00 00 00 7D 00 00 7E 00 00 7F Description System Drum Setup Reset XG System On All Parameter Reset INFORMATION 01 00 00 System Information EFFECT 1 02 01 00 Effect1(Reverb,Chorus,Variation) MULTI EQ 02 40 00 Multi EQ(PSR-730 ONLY) EFFECT 2 03 00 00 Effect2(PSR-730 ONLY) MULTI PART 08 00 00 : 00 Multi Part 1 08 0F DRUM 30 0B 00 31 0B 00 Multi Part 16 Drum Setup 1 → Address Drum Setup 2 : 3n 0B 00 3n 0C 00 : : : 3n 5B 00 Parameter : note number 13 note number 14 : note number 91 < Table 1-2 > MIDI Parameter Change table ( SYSTEM ) Address (H) 00 00 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 7D 7E 7F TOTAL SIZE 6 Size (H) 4 Data (H) 0000 ..07FF Prameter Name Description Master Tune 1 1 1 00..7F Master Volume Not Used Transpose Drum Setup Reset XG System On All Parameter Reset -102.4..+102.3[cent] 1st bit3-0 -> bit15-12 2nd bit3-0 -> bit11-8 3rd bit3-0 -> bit7-4 4th bit3-0 -> bit3-0 0..127 28..58 n 00 00 -24..+24[semitones] n=Drum Setup Number 00=XG Sytem on 00=on (receive only) Default Value(H) 00 04 00 00 (0400) (With XG, GM On, it will not reset.) 7F 40 157 ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢ QQQQQQQQQQQQQQ ,,,,,,,,,,,,,, MIDI Data Format < Table 1-3 > MIDI Parameter table ( System information ) Address (H) 01 00 Size (H) D Data (H) 20..7F Prameter Name 00 Model Name : 0D 0E 1 00 0F 1 00 TOTAL SIZE 10 (Transmitted by Dump Request. Not received. Bulk Dump Only) Description 32..127(ASCII) < Table 1-4 > MIDI Parameter Change table (EFFECT 1) Address (H) 02 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 0A 0B 0C 0D TOTAL SIZE 0E 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Data (H) 00..7F 00..7F 00..7F 00..7F 00..7F 00..7F 00..7F 00..7F 00..7F 00..7F 00..7F 00..7F 00..7F 01..7F 02 01 10 11 12 13 14 15 TOTAL SIZE 6 1 1 1 1 1 1 00..7F 00..7F 00..7F 00..7F 00..7F 00..7F Reverb Parameter 11 Reverb Parameter 12 Reverb Parameter 13 Reverb Parameter 14 Reverb Parameter 15 Reverb Parameter 16 Refer to the Ef. Parameter List Refer to the Ef. Parameter List Refer to the Ef. Parameter List Refer to the Ef. Parameter List Refer to the Ef. Parameter List Refer to the Ef. Parameter List Depend on Reverb type Depend on Reverb type Depend on Reverb type Depend on Reverb type Depend on Reverb type Depend on Reverb type 02 01 2 Chorus Type MSB Chorus Type LSB Chorus Parameter 1 Chorus Parameter 2 Chorus Parameter 3 Chorus Parameter 4 Chorus Parameter 5 Chorus Parameter 6 Chorus Parameter 7 Chorus Parameter 8 Chorus Parameter 9 Chorus Parameter 10 Chorus Return Chorus Pan Send Chorus To Reverb Refer to the Ef. Type List 00 : basic type Refer to the Ef. Parameter List Refer to the Ef. Parameter List Refer to the Ef. Parameter List Refer to the Ef. Parameter List Refer to the Ef. Parameter List Refer to the Ef. Parameter List Refer to the Ef. Parameter List Refer to the Ef. Parameter List Refer to the Ef. Parameter List Refer to the Ef. Parameter List -∞..0..+6dB(0..96..127) L63..C..R63(1..64..127) -∞..0..+6dB(0..96..127) 41(=Chorus1) 00 Depend on Chorus Type Depend on Chorus Type Depend on Chorus Type Depend on Chorus Type Depend on Chorus Type Depend on Chorus Type Depend on Chorus Type Depend on Chorus Type Depend on Chorus Type Depend on Chorus Type 60 40 00 00 Prameter Name Description Reverb Type MSB Reverb Type LSB Reverb Parameter 1 Reverb Parameter 2 Reverb Parameter 3 Reverb Parameter 4 Reverb Parameter 5 Reverb Parameter 6 Reverb Parameter 7 Reverb Parameter 8 Reverb Parameter 9 Reverb Parameter 10 Reverb Return Reverb Pan Refer to the Ef. Type List 00 : basic type Refer to the Ef. Parameter List Refer to the Ef. Parameter List Refer to the Ef. Parameter List Refer to the Ef. Parameter List Refer to the Ef. Parameter List Refer to the Ef. Parameter List Refer to the Ef. Parameter List Refer to the Ef. Parameter List Refer to the Ef. Parameter List Refer to the Ef. Parameter List -∞..0..+6dB(0..96..127) L63..C..R63(1..64..127) Default Value(H) 01(=HALL1) 00 Depend on Reverb type Depend on Reverb type Depend on Reverb type Depend on Reverb type Depend on Reverb type Depend on Reverb type Depend on Reverb type Depend on Reverb type Depend on Reverb type Depend on Reverb type 60 40 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 2A 2B 2C 2D 2E TOTAL SIZE 0F 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 00..7F 00..7F 00..7F 00..7F 00..7F 00..7F 00..7F 00..7F 00..7F 00..7F 00..7F 00..7F 00..7F 01..7F 00..7F 02 01 30 31 32 33 34 35 TOTAL SIZE 6 1 1 1 1 1 1 00..7F 00..7F 00..7F 00..7F 00..7F 00..7F Chorus Parameter 11 Chorus Parameter 12 Chorus Parameter 13 Chorus Parameter 14 Chorus Parameter 15 Chorus Parameter 16 Refer to the Ef. Parameter List Refer to the Ef. Parameter List Refer to the Ef. Parameter List Refer to the Ef. Parameter List Refer to the Ef. Parameter List Refer to the Ef. Parameter List Depend on Chorus Type Depend on Chorus Type Depend on Chorus Type Depend on Chorus Type Depend on Chorus Type Depend on Chorus Type 02 01 40 2 42 2 44 2 46 2 48 2 4A 2 00..7F 00..7F 00..7F 00..7F 00..7F 00..7F 00..7F 00..7F 00..7F 00..7F 00..7F 00..7F Variation Type MSB Variation Type LSB Vari. Param. 1 MSB Vari. Param. 1 LSB Vari. Param. 2 MSB Vari. Param. 2 LSB Vari. Param. 3 MSB Vari. Param. 3 LSB Vari. Param. 4 MSB Vari. Param. 4 LSB Vari. Param. 5 MSB Vari. Param. 5 LSB Refer to the Ef. Type List 00 : basic type Refer to the Ef. Parameter List Refer to the Ef. Parameter List Refer to the Ef. Parameter List Refer to the Ef. Parameter List Refer to the Ef. Parameter List Refer to the Ef. Parameter List Refer to the Ef. Parameter List Refer to the Ef. Parameter List Refer to the Ef. Parameter List Refer to the Ef. Parameter List “05(=DELAY L,C,R)” 00 Depend on Vari. Type Depend on Vari. Type Depend on Vari. Type Depend on Vari. Type Depend on Vari. Type Depend on Vari. Type Depend on Vari. Type Depend on Vari. Type Depend on Vari. Type Depend on Vari. Type 158 20 Size (H) 2 ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢ QQQQQQQQQQQQQQ ,,,,,,,,,,,,,, MIDI Data Format Address (H) Size (H) 4C 2 56 57 58 59 5A 5B 5C 5D 5E 5F 60 TOTAL SIZE 21 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Data (H) 00..7F 00..7F 00..7F 00..7F 00..7F 00..7F 00..7F 00..7F 00..7F 00..7F 00..7F 01..7F 00..7F 00..7F 00..01 00..1F 01..7F 01..7F 01..7F 01..7F 01..7F 02 1 1 1 1 1 1 00..7F 00..7F 00..7F 00..7F 00..7F 00..7F 4E 2 50 2 52 2 54 2 01 70 71 72 73 74 75 TOTAL SIZE 6 Prameter Name Description Vari. Param. 6 MSB Vari. Param. 6 LSB Vari. Param. 7 MSB Vari. Param. 7 LSB Vari. Param. 8 MSB Vari. Param. 8 LSB Vari. Param. 9 MSB Vari. Param. 9 LSB Vari. Param. 10 MSB Vari. Param. 10 LSB Variation Return Variation Pan Send Vari. To Reverb Send Vari. To Chorus Variation Connection Variation Part MW Vari. Ctrl Depth PB Vari. Ctrl Depth CAT Vari. Ctrl Depth Not Used Not Used Refer to the Ef. Parameter List Refer to the Ef. Parameter List Refer to the Ef. Parameter List Refer to the Ef. Parameter List Refer to the Ef. Parameter List Refer to the Ef. Parameter List Refer to the Ef. Parameter List Refer to the Ef. Parameter List Refer to the Ef. Parameter List Refer to the Ef. Parameter List -∞..0..+6dB(0..96..127) L63..C..R63(1..64..127) -∞..0..+6dB(0..96..127) -∞..0..+6dB(0..96..127) 0:insertion,1:system part1..32(0..31),off(127) -63..+63 -63..+63 -63..+63 Default Value(H) Depend on Vari. Type Depend on Vari. Type Depend on Vari. Type Depend on Vari. Type Depend on Vari. Type Depend on Vari. Type Depend on Vari. Type Depend on Vari. Type Depend on Vari. Type Depend on Vari. Type 60 40 00 00 00 7F 40 40 40 Variation Parameter 11 Variation Parameter 12 Variation Parameter 13 Variation Parameter 14 Variation Parameter 15 Variation Parameter 16 option Parameter option Parameter option Parameter option Parameter option Parameter option Parameter Depend on Variation Type Depend on Variation Type Depend on Variation Type Depend on Variation Type Depend on Variation Type Depend on Variation Type < Table 1-5 > MIDI Parameter Change table ( MULTI EQ )(PSR-730 ONLY) Address (H) 02 40 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 0A 0B 0C 0D 0E 0F 10 11 12 13 14 TOTAL SIZE 15 Size (H) 1 Data (H) 34..4C Prameter Name Description EQ Type 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 34..4C 04..28 01..78 00..01 34..4C 0E..36 01..78 EQ Gain1 EQ Frequency1 EQ Q1 EQ Shape1 EQ Gain2 EQ Frequency2 EQ Q2 Not Used EQ Gain3 EQ Frequency3 EQ Q3 Not Used EQ Gain4 EQ Frequency4 EQ Q4 Not Used EQ Gain5 EQ Frequency5 EQ Q5 EQ Shape5 0:FLAT 1:JAZZ 2:POPS 3:ROCK 4:CLASSIC -12..+12[dB] 32..2000[Hz] 0.1..12.0 00:Shelving,01:Peaking -12..+12[dB] 0.1..10[KHz] 0.1..12.0 40 0C 07 00 40 1C 07 -12..+12[dB] 0.1..10[KHz] 0.1..12.0 40 22 07 -12..+12[dB] 0.1..10[KHz] 0.1..12.0 40 2E 07 -12..+12[dB] 0.5..16.0[KHz] 0.1..12.0 00:Shelving,01:Peaking 40 3C 07 00 34..4C 0E..36 01..78 34..4C 0E..36 01..78 34..4C 1C..3A 01..78 00..01 Default Value(H) 0 < Table 1-6 > MIDI Parameter change table (Effect2))(PSR-730 ONLY) Address (H) 03 0n 00 (H) 2 02 03 04 05 06 07 1 1 1 1 1 1 Size (H) 00..7F 00..7F 00..7F 00..7F 00..7F 00..7F 00..7F 00..7F Data Prameter Name Insertion Type MSB Insertion Type LSB Insertion Parameter1 Insertion Parameter2 Insertion Parameter3 Insertion Parameter4 Insertion Parameter5 Insertion Parameter6 Refer to the Ef. Type List “49(=DISTORTION)” 00 : basic type Refer to the Ef. Parameter List Refer to the Ef. Parameter List Refer to the Ef. Parameter List Refer to the Ef. Parameter List Refer to the Ef. Parameter List Refer to the Ef. Parameter List Description Default Value(H) 00 159 ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢ QQQQQQQQQQQQQQ ,,,,,,,,,,,,,, MIDI Data Format Address (H) 08 09 0A 0B 0C 0D 0E 0F 10 11 TOTAL SIZE 12 20 21 22 23 24 25 TOTAL SIZE 06 Size (H) 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Data (H) 00..7F 00..7F 00..7F 00..7F 00..7F 00..7F 00..7F 00..7F 00..7F 00..7F Prameter Name Description Insertion Parameter7 Insertion Parameter8 Insertion Parameter9 Insertion Parameter10 Insertion Part MW INS CTRL DPT BEND INS CTRL DPT CAT INS CTRL DPT Not Used Not Used Refer to the Ef. Parameter List Refer to the Ef. Parameter List Refer to the Ef. Parameter List Refer to the Ef. Parameter List Part1..16,OFF 1 1 1 1 1 1 00..7F 00..7F 00..7F 00..7F 00..7F 00..7F Insertion Parameter11 Insertion Parameter12 Insertion Parameter13 Insertion Parameter14 Insertion Parameter15 Insertion Parameter16 Refer to the Ef. Parameter List Refer to the Ef. Parameter List Refer to the Ef. Parameter List Refer to the Ef. Parameter List Refer to the Ef. Parameter List Refer to the Ef. Parameter List 00..7F 00..7F 00..7F 00..7F 00..7F 00..7F 00..7F 00..7F 00..7F 00..7F 00..7F 00..7F 00..7F 00..7F 00..7F 00..7F 00..7F 00..7F 00..7F 00..7F Ins. Param.1 MSB Ins. Param.1 LSB Ins. Param.2 MSB Ins. Param.2 LSB Ins. Param.3 MSB Ins. Param.3 LSB Ins. Param.4 MSB Ins. Param.4 LSB Ins. Param.5 MSB Ins. Param.5 LSB Ins. Param.6 MSB Ins. Param.6 LSB Ins. Param.7 MSB Ins. Param.7 LSB Ins. Param.8 MSB Ins. Param.8 LSB Ins. Param.9 MSB Ins. Param.9 LSB Ins. Param.10 MSB Ins. Param.10 LSB Refer to the Ef. Parameter List Refer to the Ef. Parameter List Refer to the Ef. Parameter List Refer to the Ef. Parameter List Refer to the Ef. Parameter List Refer to the Ef. Parameter List Refer to the Ef. Parameter List Refer to the Ef. Parameter List Refer to the Ef. Parameter List Refer to the Ef. Parameter List Refer to the Ef. Parameter List Refer to the Ef. Parameter List Refer to the Ef. Parameter List Refer to the Ef. Parameter List Refer to the Ef. Parameter List Refer to the Ef. Parameter List Refer to the Ef. Parameter List Refer to the Ef. Parameter List Refer to the Ef. Parameter List Refer to the Ef. Parameter List 03 0n 03 0n 30 2 03 0n 32 2 03 0n 34 2 03 0n 36 2 03 0n 38 2 03 0n 3A 2 03 0n 3C 2 03 0n 3E 2 03 0n 40 2 03 0n 42 2 Default Value(H) 7F TOTAL SIZE 14 For effect types that do not require MSB, the Parameters for Address 02-0B will be received. Address 30-42 will not be received. For effect types that require MSB, the Parameters for Address 30-42 will be received. Address 02-0B will not be received. When Bulk Dumps that include Effect Type data are transmitted, the Parameters for Address 02 - 0B will always be transmitted. But, effects that require MSB, when the bulk dump is received the Parameters for Address 02 - 0B will not be received. n=Insertion Effect No.(0-1) < Table 1-7 > MIDI Parameter Change table (MULTI PART) Address (H) 08 nn nn nn nn nn 00 01 02 03 04 Size (H) 1 1 1 1 1 nn nn 05 06 1 1 Data (H) 00..20 00..7F 00..7F 00..7F 00..0F, 7F 00..01 00..02 nn 07 1 00..02 Part Mode nn nn nn 08 09 0A 1 2 28..58 00..FF Note Shift Detune nn nn nn nn 0B 0C 0D 0E 1 1 1 1 00..7F 00..7F 00..7F 00..7F Volume Velocity Sense Depth Velocity Sense Offset Pan nn nn nn nn 0F 10 11 12 1 1 1 1 00..7F 00..7F 00..7F 00..7F Note Limit Low Note Limit High Dry Level Chorus Send 160 Prameter Name Description Element Reserve Bank Select MSB Bank Select LSB Program Number Rcv Channel 0..32 0..127 0..127 1..128 0..16;1..16,127;off Mono/Poly Mode Same Note Number Key On Assign 0:mono,1:poly 0:single 1:multi 2:inst (for DRUM) 0:normal 1..3:drum thru,drum1..2 -24..+24[semitones] -12.8..+12.7[Hz] 1st bit3..0 -> bit7..4 2nd bit3..0 -> bit3..0 0..127 0..127 0..127 0:random L63..C..R63(1..64..127) C-2..G8 C-2..G8 0..127 0..127 Default Value(H) 0(Part10),2(Others) 7F(Part10),00(Others) 00 00 Part No. 01 00 00 (Except Part10) 01 (Part10) 40 08 00 (80) 64 40 40 40 00 7F 7F 00 ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢ QQQQQQQQQQQQQQ ,,,,,,,,,,,,,, MIDI Data Format Address (H) nn nn Data (H) 00..7F 00..7F Prameter Name Description 13 14 Size (H) 1 1 Reverb Send Variation Send 0..127 0..127 Default Value(H) 28 00 nn nn nn nn nn nn nn nn 15 16 17 18 19 1A 1B 1C 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 00..7F 00..7F 00..7F 00..7F 00..7F 00..7F 00..7F 00..7F Vibrato Rate Vibrato Depth Vibrato Delay Filter Cutoff Freq. Filter Resonance EG Attack Time EG Decay Time EG Release Time -64..+63 -64..+63 -64..+63 -64..+63 -64..+63 -64..+63 -64..+63 -64..+63 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 nn nn nn nn nn nn 1D 1E 1F 20 21 22 1 1 1 1 1 1 28..58 00..7F 00..7F 00..7F 00..7F 00..7F MW Pitch Control MW Filter Control MW Amp. Control MW LFO PMod Depth MW LFO FMod Depth MW LFO AMod Depth -24..+24[semitones] -9600..+9450[cent] -100..+100[%] 0..127 0..127 0..127 40 40 40 0A 00 00 1 1 1 1 1 1 28..58 00..7F 00..7F 00..7F 00..7F 00..7F Bend Pitch Control Bend Filter Control Bend Amp. Control Bend LFO PMod Depth Bend LFO FMod Depth Bend LFO AMod Depth -24..+24[semitones] -9600..+9450[cent] -100..+100[%] 0..127 0..127 0..127 42 40 40 00 00 00 nn 23 nn 24 nn 25 nn 26 nn 27 nn 28 TOTAL SIZE 29 nn nn 30 : 40 nn nn nn nn nn nn nn nn nn nn nn nn 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 4A 4B 4C 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 00..7F 00..7F 00..7F 00..7F 00..7F 00..7F 00..7F 00..7F 00..7F 00..7F 00..7F 00..7F Scale Tuning C Scale Tuning C# Scale Tuning D Scale Tuning D# Scale Tuning E Scale Tuning F Scale Tuning F# Scale Tuning G Scale Tuning G# Scale Tuning A Scale Tuning A# Scale Tuning B -64..+63[cent] -64..+63[cent] -64..+63[cent] -64..+63[cent] -64..+63[cent] -64..+63[cent] -64..+63[cent] -64..+63[cent] -64..+63[cent] -64..+63[cent] -64..+63[cent] -64..+63[cent] 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 nn nn nn nn nn nn 4D 4E 4F 50 51 52 1 1 1 1 1 1 28..58 00..7F 00..7F 00..7F 00..7F 00..7F CAT Pitch Control CAT Filter Control CAT Amplitude Control CAT LFO PMod Depth CAT LFO FMod Depth CAT LFO AMod Depth -24..+24[semitones] -9600..+9450[cent] -100..+100[%] 0..127 0..127 0..127 40 40 40 00 00 00 nn 53 : 66 nn nn 67 68 off/on 0..127 00 00 nn 69 : 6E TOTAL SIZE 3F Not Used : Not Used Not Used : Not Used 1 1 00..01 00..7F Portamento Switch Portamento Time Not Used : Not Used nn = PartNumber If there is a Drum Voice assigned to the Part, the following parameters are ineffective. • Bank Select LSB • Pitch EG • Portamento • Soft Pedal • Mono/Poly • Scale Tuning 161 ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢ QQQQQQQQQQQQQQ ,,,,,,,,,,,,,, MIDI Data Format < Table 1-8 > MIDI Parameter Change table ( DRUM SETUP ) Address (H) 3n rr 3n rr 3n rr 3n rr 3n rr 00 01 02 03 04 3n rr 05 3n rr 06 3n rr 07 3n rr 08 3n rr 09 3n rr 0A 3n rr 0B 3n rr 0C 3n rr 0D 3n rr 0E 3n rr 0F TOTAL SIZE 10 Size (H) 1 1 1 1 1 Data (H) 00..7F 00..7F 00..7F 00..7F 00..7F Prameter Name Description Pitch Coarse Pitch Fine Level Alternate Group Pan 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 00..7F 00..7F 00..7F 00..01 00..01 00..01 00..7F 00..7F 00..7F 00..7F 00..7F Reverb Send Level Chorus Send Level Variation Send Level Key Assign Rcv Note Off Rcv Note On Filter Cutoff Freq. Filter Resonance EG Attack Rate EG Decay1 Rate EG Decay2 Rate -64..+63 -64..+63[cent] 0..127 0:off,1..127 0:random L63..C..R63(1..64..127) 0..127 0..127 0..127 0:single,1:multi off/on off/on -64..63 -64..63 -64..63 -64..63 -64..63 Default Value(H) 40 40 Depend on the Note Depend on the Note Depend on the Note Depend on the Note Depend on the Note 7F 00 Depend on the Note 01 40 40 40 40 40 n:Drum Setup Number(0 - 1) rr:note number(0DH - 5BH) If XG SYSTEM ON and/or GM On message is received, all Drum Setup Parameter will be reset to default values. According to the Drum Setup Reset message, individual Drum Setup Parameters can be reset to default values. < Table 1-9 > Effect Type List XG ESSENTIAL EFFECT Same as LSB=0 XG OPTION EFFECT * If the received value does not contain an effect type in the TYPE LSB, the LSB will be directed to TYPE 0. * Panel Effects are based on the “[Number] Effect Name”. * Using an external sequencer, capable of editing and transmitting the system exclusive messages and parameter changes, allows you to select the reverb, chorus and DSP effect types which are not accessible from the PSR-730/630 panel operation. When one of the effects is selected by the external sequencer, “XG Rev.,” “XG Cho.” or “XG Eff.” will be shown on the display. REVERB TYPE TYPE MSB 000 001 002 003 004 005..015 016 017 018 019 020..127 TYPE LSB 00 NO EFFECT [1]HALL1 [6]ROOM1 [10]STAGE1 [13]PLATE NO EFFECT [14]WHITE ROOM [15]TUNNEL CANYON [16]BASEMENT NO EFFECT 01 02 [2]HALL2 ROOM2 [11]STAGE2 [8]ROOM2 01 02 CHORUS2 CELESTE2 FLANGER2 CHORUS3 CELESTE3 03...07 08 09...15 16 17 18 19 [3]HALL3 [7]ROOM3 STAGE PLATE [4]HALL4 ROOM [12]STAGE3 PLATE [5]HALL5 ROOM [9]ROOM4 16 17 18 19 CELESTE FLANGER CELESTE FLANGER 20 21... 20 21... CHORUS TYPE TYPE MSB 000 001..064 065 066 067 068 069..071 072 073..086 087 088..127 162 TYPE LSB 00 NO EFFECT NO EFFECT CHORUS1 CELESTE1 FLANGER 1 SYMPHONIC NO EFFECT PHASER 1 NO EFFECT ENSEMBLE DETUNE NO EFFECT 03...07 08 CHORUS4 CELESTE4 FLANGER3 09...15 ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢ QQQQQQQQQQQQQQ ,,,,,,,,,,,,,, MIDI Data Format DSP(VARIATIOM) EFFECT TYPE TYPE MSB 000 001 002 003 004 005 006 007 008 009 010 011 012..015 016 017 018 019 020 021..063 064 065 066 TYPE LSB 00 NO EFFECT [1]HALL1 [4]ROOM1 [7]STAGE1 PLATE DELAY L,C,R [18]DELAY L,R [19]ECHO [20]CROSS DELAY ER1 GATE REVERB REVERS GATE NO EFFECT WHITE ROOM TUNNEL CANYON BASEMENT KARAOKE 1 NO EFFECT THRU CHORUS1 [13]CELESTE 067 068 069 070 071 072 073 FLANGER 1 SYMPHONIC ROTARY SP. TREMOLO AUTO PAN [24]PHASER DISTORTION 074 075 076 077 078 OVER DRIVE AMP SIM. 3BAND EQ 2BAND EQ AUTO WAH 079 080 081 082 THRU PITCH CHANGE THRU TOUCH WAH 1 083 084 085 086 087 088 089..127 COMPRESSOR NOISE GATE VOICE CANCEL 2WAY ROTARY SP ENSEMBLE DETUNE AMBIENCE THRU 01 02 [2]HALL2 ROOM2 [8]STAGE2 [5]ROOM2 03...07 08 09...15 16 17 18 19 20 [3]HALL3 [6]ROOM3 STAGE PLATE [17]DELAY LCR HALL ROOM [9]STAGE3 PLATE HALL ROOM ROOM CHORUS [10]CHORUS1 [22]ROTARY FAST [23]ROTARY SLOW Rotary Sp Tremolo Gtr Tremolo 20 21... ER2 KARAOKE 2 KARAOKE 3 CHORUS2 [12]CHORUS3 CHORUS CELESTE3 CHORUS [11]CHORUS2 FLANGER FLANGER [14]FLANGER FLANGER [15]SYMPHONIC Rotary Sp [21]TREMOLO Rotary Sp [16]AUTO PAN Rotary Sp PHASER COMP+ DISTORTION DIST.HARD EQ DISCO AUTO WAH+ DIST AUTO WAH+ OVERDRIVE DIST.SOFT EQ TEL [25]WAH PITCH CHANGE2 TOUCH WAH+ DIST TOUCH WAH+ OVERDRIVE TOUCH WAH 2 MULTI EFFECT (INSERTION) TYPE TYPE MSB 000 001 002 003 004 005 006 007 008 009..019 020 021..064 065 066 067 068 069 070 071 072 073 074 075 076 077 078 079..081 082 083 084 085..086 087 088..127 TYPE LSB 00 THRU HALL 1 ROOM 1 STAGE 1 PLATE DELAY L,C,R DELAY L,R ECHO CROSS DELAY THRU KARAOKE 1 THRU CHORUS 1 CELESTE 1 FLANGER 1 SYMPHONIC ROTARY SPEAKER 1 TREMOLO AUTO PAN PHASER 1 DISTORTION OVER DRIVE AMP SIMULATOR 3BAND EQ 2-BAND EQ AUTO WAH(LFO) THRU TOUCH WAH 1 COMPRESSOR NOISE GATE THRU ENSEMBLE DETUNE THRU 01 02 HALL 2 ROOM 2 STAGE 2 ROOM 3 KARAOKE 2 KARAOKE 3 CHORUS 2 CELESTE 2 FLANGER 2 CHORUS 3 CELESTE 3 03...07 08 CHORUS 4 CELESTE 4 FLANGER 3 09...15 16 17 18 19 HALL ROOM STAGE PLATE Delay LCR HALL ROOM STAGE PLATE HALL ROOM ROOM CHORUS FLANGER Symphonic Rotary Sp Tremolo AutoPan CHORUS FLANGER Rotary Sp Rotary Sp Rotary Sp DIST.HARD EQ DISCO DIST.SOFT EQ TEL Rotary Sp Tremolo 21... Gtr Tremolo Auto Wah TOUCH WAH 2 163 ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢ QQQQQQQQQQQQQQ ,,,,,,,,,,,,,, MIDI Data Format < Table 1-10 > Effect Parameter List HALL1,HALL2, ROOM1,ROOM2,ROOM3, STAGE1,STAGE2 PLATE (reverb, variation, insertion block) No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Parameter Reverb Time Diffusion Initial Delay HPF Cutoff LPF Cutoff 11 12 13 14 15 16 Er/Rev Balance High Damp Feedback Level CROSS DELAY (variation, insertion block) 0.3–30.0s 0–10 0–63 Thru–8.0kHz 1.0k–Thru Value 0–69 0–10 0–63 0–52 34–60 Dry/Wet D63>W – D=W – D<W63 1–127 Rev Delay Density 0–63 0–4 (reverb, variation block) 0–2 (insertion block) E63>R – E=R – E<R63 0.1–1.0 -63–+63 0–63 0–4 0–2 1–127 1–10 1–127 See Table table#4 Control table#5 table#3 table#3 ● Parameter Reverb Time Diffusion Initial Delay HPF Cutoff LPF Cutoff Width Heigt Depth Wall Vary Dry/Wet 0.3–30.0s 0–10 0–63 Thru–8.0kHz 1.0k–Thru 0.5–10.2m 0.5–20.2m 0.5–30.2m 0–30 D63>W – D=W – D<W63 Value 0–69 0–10 0–63 0–52 34–60 0–37 0–73 0–104 0–30 1–127 See Table table#4 11 12 13 14 15 16 Rev Delay Density Er/Rev Balance High Damp Feedback Level 0–63 0–4 E63>R – E=R – E<R63 0.1–1.0 -63–+63 0–63 0–4 1–127 1–10 1–127 table#5 Value 1–14860 1–7429 1–14860 1–7429 1–14860 1–7429 1–14860 1–7429 1–127 0–127 1–10 See Table Control table#5 table#3 table#3 table#11 table#11 table#11 ● Rch Delay 3 Cch Delay 4 Feedback Delay 5 6 7 8 9 10 Feedback Level Cch Level High Damp Dry/Wet D63>W – D=W – D<W63 1–127 11 12 13 14 15 16 EQ EQ EQ EQ 32Hz–2.0kHz -12–+12dB 500Hz–16.0kHz -12–+12dB 4–40 52–76 28–58 52–76 Control ● 2 Rch Delay 3 Feedback Delay 1 4 Feedback Delay 2 5 6 7 8 9 10 Feedback Level Input Select High Damp Dry/Wet D63>W – D=W – D<W63 1–127 11 12 13 14 15 16 EQ EQ EQ EQ 32Hz–2.0kHz -12–+12dB 500Hz–16.0kHz -12–+12dB 4–40 52–76 28–58 52–76 See Table Control ● Low Frequency Low Gain High Frequency High Gain table#3 table#3 No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Parameter Type Room Size Diffusion Initial Delay Feedback Level HPF Cutoff LPF Cutoff S-H, L-H, Rdm, Rvs, Plt, Spr 0.1–7.0 0–10 0–63 -63–+63 Thru–8.0kHz 1.0k–Thru Value 0–5 0–44 0–10 0–63 1–127 0–52 34–60 Dry/Wet D63>W – D=W – D<W63 1–127 Liveness Density High Damp 0–10 0–3 0.1–1.0 0–10 0–3 1–10 See Table Control table#6 table#5 table#3 table#3 ● Feedback Level High Damp 0.1–1486.0ms (variation block) 0.1–742.9ms (insertion block) 0.1–1486.0ms (variation block) 0.1–742.9ms (insertion block) 0.1–1486.0ms (variation block) 0.1–742.9ms (insertion block) 0.1–1486.0ms (variation block) 0.1–742.9ms (insertion block) -63–+63 0.1–1.0 Dry/Wet D63>W – D=W – D<W63 Value 1–14860 1–7429 1–14860 1–7429 1–14860 1–7429 1–14860 1–7429 1–127 1–10 No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 Parameter Type Room Size Diffusion Initial Delay Feedback Level HPF Cutoff LPF Cutoff TypeA,TypeB 0.1–20.0 0–10 0–127 -63–+63 Thru–8.0kHz 1.0k–Thru Value 0–1 0–127 0–10 0–127 1–127 0–52 34–60 Dry/Wet D63>W – D=W – D<W63 1–127 Liveness Density High Damp 0–10 0–3 0.1–1.0 0–10 0–3 1–10 See Table Control table#6 table#5 table#3 table#3 ● table#3 KARAOKE1,2,3 (variation, insertion block) table#3 DELAY L,R (variation, insertion block) Parameter Lch Delay block) block) block) block) GATE REVERB, REVERSE GATE (variation block) 0.1–1486.0ms (variation block) 0.1–742.9ms (insertion block) 0.1–1486.0ms (variation block) 0.1–742.9ms (insertion block) 0.1–1486.0ms (variation block) 0.1–742.9ms (insertion block) 0.1–1486.0ms (variation block) 0.1–742.9ms (insertion block) -63–+63 0–127 0.1–1.0 2 No. 1 R->L Delay 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 DELAY L,C,R (variation, insertion block) Low Frequency Low Gain High Frequency High Gain 2 (variation (insertion (variation (insertion Value 1–7430 1–3714 1–7430 1–3714 1–127 0–2 1–10 0.1–743.0ms 0.1–371.4ms 0.1–743.0ms 0.1–371.4ms -63–+63 L,R,L&R 0.1–1.0 EARLY REF1,EARLY REF2(variation block) No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Parameter Lch Delay Parameter L->R Delay table#5 WHITE ROOM, TUNNEL, CANYON, BASEMENT (reverb, variation block) No. 1 No. 1 See Table Control No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Parameter Delay Time Feedback Level HPF Cutoff LPF Cutoff 0–127 -63–+63 Thru–8.0kHz 1.0k–Thru Value 0–127 1–127 0–52 34–60 Dry/Wet D63>W – D=W – D<W63 1–127 See Table table#7 Control table#3 table#3 ● 11 12 13 14 15 16 ● 1–127 CHORUS1,2,3,4, CELESTE1,2,3,4 (chorus, variation, insertion block) 11 12 13 14 15 16 EQ EQ EQ EQ Low Frequency Low Gain High Frequency High Gain 32Hz–2.0kHz -12–+12dB 500Hz–16.0kHz -12–+12dB 4–40 52–76 28–58 52–76 table#3 table#3 ECHO (variation, insertion block) No. 1 Parameter Lch Delay1 8 9 10 Delay2 Level 0.1–743.0ms 0.1–371.4ms -63–+63 0.1–743.0ms 0.1–371.4ms -63–+63 0.1–1.0 0.1–743.0ms 0.1–371.4ms 0.1–743.0ms 0.1–371.4ms 0–127 Dry/Wet D63>W – D=W – D<W63 1–127 11 12 13 14 15 16 EQ EQ EQ EQ 32Hz–2.0kHz -12–+12dB 500Hz–16.0kHz -12–+12dB 4–40 52–76 28–58 52–76 2 3 Lch Feedback Level Rch Delay1 4 5 6 Rch Feedback Level High Damp Lch Delay2 7 Rch Delay2 Low Frequency Low Gain High Frequency High Gain (variation block) (insertion block) Value 1–7430 1–3714 1–127 1–7430 1–3714 1–127 1–10 1–7430 1–3714 1–7430 1–3714 0–127 (variation block) (insertion block) (variation (insertion (variation (insertion block) block) block) block) See Table Control No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 0.00Hz–39.7Hz 0–127 -63–+63 0–127 Value 0–127 0–127 1–127 0–127 EQ Low Frequency EQ Low Gain EQ High Frequency EQ High Gain Dry/Wet 32Hz–2.0kHz -12–+12dB 500Hz–16.0kHz -12–+12dB D63>W – D=W – D<W63 4–40 52–76 28–58 52–76 1–127 EQ Mid Frequency EQ Mid Gain EQ Mid Width 100Hz–10.0kHz (variation block) -12–+12dB (variation block) 1.0–12.0 (variation block) Input Mode mono/stereo 14–54 52–76 10–120 See Table table#1 Control table#2 table#3 table#3 ● table#3 0–1 FLANGER1,2,3 (chorus, variation, insertion block) ● table#3 table#3 No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 164 Parameter LFO Frequency LFO Depth Feedback Level Delay Offset Parameter LFO Frequency LFO Depth Feedback Level Delay Offset 0.00Hz–39.7Hz 0–127 -63–+63 0–127 Value 0–127 0–127 1–127 0–127 EQ Low Frequency EQ Low Gain EQ High Frequency EQ High Gain Dry/Wet 32Hz–2.0kHz -12–+12dB 500Hz–16.0kHz -12–+12dB D63>W – D=W – D<W63 4–40 52–76 28–58 52–76 1–127 EQ Mid Frequency EQ Mid Gain EQ Mid Width LFO Phase Difference 100Hz–10.0kHz (variation block) -12–+12dB (variation block) 1.0–12.0 (variation block) -180–+180deg(resolution=3deg.) 14–54 52–76 10–120 4–124 See Table table#1 Control table#2 table#3 table#3 ● table#3 ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢ QQQQQQQQQQQQQQ ,,,,,,,,,,,,,, MIDI Data Format SYMPHONIC (chorus, variation, insertion block) No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 TREMOLO (variation, insertion block) Parameter LFO Frequency LFO Depth Delay Offset 0.00Hz–39.7Hz 0–127 0–127 Value 0–127 0–127 0–127 EQ Low Frequency EQ Low Gain EQ High Frequency EQ High Gain Dry/Wet 32Hz–2.0kHz -12–+12dB 500Hz–16.0kHz -12–+12dB D63>W – D=W – D<W63 4–40 52–76 28–58 52–76 1–127 EQ Mid Frequency EQ Mid Gain EQ Mid Width 100Hz–10.0kHz (variation block) -12–+12dB (variation block) 1.0–12.0 (variation block) See Table table#1 Control table#2 table#3 table#3 ● 14–54 52–76 10–120 table#3 Value 14–114 0–127 0–127 See Table ENSEMBLE DETUNE (chorus, variation, insertion block) Parameter Detune Lch Init Delay Rch Init Delay Dry/Wet D63>W – D=W – D<W63 1–127 11 EQ Low Frequency 4–40 table#3 12 EQ Low Gain 13 EQ High Frequency 28–58 table#3 14 EQ High Gain 32Hz–2.0kHz (variation, insertion -12–+12dB 52–76 (variation, insertion 500Hz–16.0kHz (variation, insertion -12–+12dB (variation, insertion Control table#2 table#2 ● block) block) block) EQ Low Frequency EQ Low Gain EQ High Frequency EQ High Gain Dry/Wet 32Hz–2.0kHz -12–+12dB 500Hz–16.0kHz -12–+12dB 4–40 52–76 28–58 52–76 11 12 13 14 15 16 EQ Mid Frequency EQ Mid Gain EQ Mid Width LFO Phase Difference Input Mode Low Frequency Low Gain High Frequency High Gain 100Hz–10.0kHz (variation block) -12–+12dB (variation block) 1.0–12.0 (variation block) -180–+180deg(resolution=3deg.) mono/stereo See Table table#1 Control ● table#3 table#3 14–54 52–76 10–120 4–124 0–1 table#3 See Table table#1 No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Parameter LFO Frequency L/R Depth F/R Depth PAN Direction 0.00Hz–39.7Hz 0–127 0–127 L<->R,L->R,L<-R,Lturn,Rturn,L/R Value 0–127 0–127 0–127 0–5 EQ EQ EQ EQ 32Hz–2.0kHz -12–+12dB 500Hz–16.0kHz -12–+12dB 4–40 52–76 28–58 52–76 11 12 13 14 15 16 EQ Mid Frequency EQ Mid Gain EQ Mid Width Low Frequency Low Gain High Frequency High Gain 100Hz–10.0kHz (variation block) -12–+12dB (variation block) 1.0–12.0 (variation block) Control ● table#3 table#3 14–54 52–76 10–120 table#3 See Table table#1 Parameter LFO Frequency LFO Depth Phase Shift Offset Feedback Level 0.00Hz–39.7Hz 0–127 0–127 -63–+63 Value 0–127 0–127 0–127 1–127 0–127 normal/invers 32Hz–2.0kHz -12–+12dB 500Hz–16.0kHz -12–+12dB D63>W – D=W – D<W63 Value 0–127 0–1 table#3 EQ Low Frequency EQ Low Gain EQ High Frequency EQ High Gain Dry/Wet 32Hz–2.0kHz -12–+12dB 500Hz–16.0kHz -12–+12dB D63>W – D=W – D<W63 4–40 52–76 28–58 52–76 1–127 4–40 52–76 28–58 52–76 1–127 table#3 11 Stage 12 13 14 15 16 Diffusion 4,5,6 (chorus, insertion block) 4–12 (variation block) mono/stereo See Table table#2 Control ● Control table#3 table#3 ● 4–6 4–12 0–1 PHASER 2 (variation block) ROTARY SPEAKER (variation, insertion block) 11 12 13 14 15 16 EQ EQ EQ EQ No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Value 0–127 0–127 0–127 PHASER 1 (chorus, variation, insertion block) block) AMBIENCE (variation block) Parameter Delay Time Output Phase 0.00Hz–39.7Hz 0–127 0–127 52–76 15 16 No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Parameter LFO Frequency AM Depth PM Depth AUTO PAN (variation, insertion block) No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 -50–+50cent 0–127 0–127 No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Parameter LFO Frequency LFO Depth 0.00Hz–39.7Hz 0–127 EQ Low Frequency EQ Low Gain EQ High Frequency EQ High Gain Dry/Wet 32Hz–2.0kHz -12–+12dB 500Hz–16.0kHz -12–+12dB D63>W – D=W – D<W63 EQ Mid Frequency EQ Mid Gain EQ Mid Width 100Hz–10.0kHz (variation block) -12–+12dB (variation block) 1.0–12.0 (variation block) Value 0–127 0–127 4–40 52–76 28–58 52–76 1–127 14–54 52–76 10–120 See Table table#1 Control ● table#3 No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Parameter LFO Frequency LFO Depth Phase Shift Offset Feedback Level 0.00Hz–39.7Hz 0–127 0–127 -63–+63 Value 0–127 0–127 0–127 1–127 EQ Low Frequency EQ Low Gain EQ High Frequency EQ High Gain Dry/Wet 32Hz–2.0kHz -12–+12dB 500Hz–16.0kHz -12–+12dB D63>W – D=W – D<W63 4–40 52–76 28–58 52–76 1–127 Stage 3,4,5,6 LFO Phase Difference -180deg–+180deg(resolution=3deg.) See Table table#1 Control table#3 table#3 ● table#3 11 12 13 14 15 16 table#3 3-6 4–124 DISTORTION, OVERDRIVE (variation, insertion block) 2WAY ROTARY SPEAKER (variation block) No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Parameter Rotor Speed Drive Low Drive High Low/High 0.0Hz–39.7Hz 0–127 0–127 L63>H – L=H – L<H63 Value 0–127 0–127 0–127 1–127 See Table table#1 EQ EQ EQ EQ 32Hz–2.0kHz -12–+12dB 500Hz–16.0kHz -12–+12dB 4–40 52–76 28–58 52–76 table#3 11 12 13 14 15 16 Crossover Frequency Mic L-R Angle 100Hz–10.0kHz 0deg–180deg(resolution=3deg.) 14–54 0–60 Low Frequency Low Gain High Frequency High Gain Control ● No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Parameter Drive EQ Low Frequency EQ Low Gain LPF Cutoff Output Level Value 0–127 4–40 52–76 34–60 0–127 See Table 0–127 32Hz–2.0kHz -12–+12dB 1.0k–Thru 0–127 EQ Mid Frequency EQ Mid Gain EQ Mid Width Dry/Wet 100Hz–10.0kHz -12–+12dB 1.0–12.0 D63>W – D=W – D<W63 14–54 52–76 10–120 1–127 table#3 Edge(Clip Curve) 0–127 0–127 mild–sharp Control ● table#3 table#3 table#3 table#3 11 12 13 14 15 16 COMP+DIST (variation block) No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 Parameter Drive EQ Low Frequency EQ Low Gain LPF Cutoff Output Level Value 0–127 4–40 52–76 34–60 0–127 See Table 0–127 32Hz–2.0kHz -12–+12dB 1.0k–Thru 0–127 EQ Mid Frequency EQ Mid Gain EQ Mid Width Dry/Wet 100Hz–10.0kHz -12–+12dB 1.0–12.0 D63>W – D=W – D<W63 14–54 52–76 10–120 1–127 table#3 Edge(Clip Curve) Attack Release Threshold Ratio 0–127 1ms–40ms 10ms–680ms -48dB–-6dB 1.0–20.0 0–127 0–19 0–15 79–121 0–7 mild–sharp table#8 table#9 Control ● table#3 table#3 table#10 165 ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢ QQQQQQQQQQQQQQ ,,,,,,,,,,,,,, MIDI Data Format AMP SIMULATOR (variation, insertion block) No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 Parameter Drive AMP Type LPF Cutoff Output Level 0–127 Off,Stack,Combo,Tube 1.0k–Thru 0–127 TOUCH WAH 2 (variation, insertion block), TOUCH WAH+ODRV (variation block) Value 0–127 0–3 34–60 0–127 Dry/Wet D63>W – D=W – D<W63 1–127 Edge(Clip Curve) 0–127 0–127 See Table Control ● table#3 mild–sharp 11 12 13 14 15 16 3BAND EQ(MONO) (variation, insertion block) No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 Parameter EQ Low Gain EQ Mid Frequency EQ Mid Gain EQ Mid Width EQ High Gain EQ Low Frequency EQ High Frequency Input Mode -12–+12dB 100Hz–10.0kHz -12–+12dB 1.0–12.0 -12–+12dB 50Hz–2.0kHz 500Hz–16.0kHz mono/stereo Parameter EQ Low Frequency EQ Low Gain EQ High Frequency EQ High Gain 32Hz–2.0kHz -12–+12dB 500Hz–16.0kHz -12–+12dB See Table Control table#3 table#3 table#3 0–1 See Table table#3 Control table#3 0.00Hz–39.7Hz 0–127 0–127 1.0–12.0 EQ Low Frequency EQ Low Gain EQ High Frequency EQ High Gain Dry/Wet Drive 11 12 13 14 15 16 See Table table#1 32Hz–2.0kHz -12–+12dB 500Hz–16.0kHz -12–+12dB D63>W – D=W – D<W63 4–40 52–76 28–58 52–76 1–127 table#3 0–127 0–127 Control ● table#3 11 12 13 14 15 16 166 EQ Low Frequency EQ Low Gain EQ High Frequency EQ High Gain Dry/Wet 32Hz–2.0kHz -12–+12dB 500Hz–16.0kHz -12–+12dB D63>W – D=W – D<W63 4–40 52–76 28–58 52–76 1–127 Drive EQ Low Gain(distortion) EQ Mid Gain(distortion) LPF Cutoff Output Level 0–127 -12–+12dB -12–+12dB 1.0kHz–thru 0–127 0–127 52–76 52–76 34–60 0–127 See Table Control ● table#3 table#3 table#3 Parameter Pitch Initial Delay Fine 1 Fine 2 Feedback Level -24–+24 0–127 -50Hz–+50Hz -50Hz–+50Hz -99–+99% Value 40–88 0–127 14–114 14–114 1–127 Dry/Wet D63>W – D=W – D<W63 1–127 Pan 1 Output Level 1 Pan 2 Output Level 2 L63–R63 0–127 L63–R63 0–127 1–127 0–127 1–127 0–127 See Table Control table#7 ● Parameter Pitch Initial Delay Fine 1 Fine 2 Feedback Level -24–+24 0–127 -50–+50cent -50–+50cent -99–+99% Value 40–88 0–127 14–114 14–114 1–127 Dry/Wet D63>W – D=W – D<W63 1–127 Pan 1 Output Level 1 Pan 2 Output Level 2 L63–R63 0–127 L63–R63 0–127 1–127 0–127 1–127 0–127 See Table Control table#7 ● No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Parameter Attack Release Threshold Ratio Output Level 1–40ms 10–680ms -48–-6dB 1.0–20.0 0–127 Value 0–19 0–15 79–121 0–7 0–127 See Table table#8 table#9 Value 0–19 0–15 55–97 0–127 See Table table#8 table#9 Control table#10 11 12 13 14 15 16 NOISE GATE (variation, insertion block) Parameter LFO Frequency LFO Depth Cutoff Frequency Offset Resonance Value 0–127 0–127 0–127 10–120 0.00Hz–39.7Hz 0–127 0–127 1.0–12.0 EQ Low Frequency EQ Low Gain EQ High Frequency EQ High Gain Dry/Wet 32Hz–2.0kHz -12–+12dB 500Hz–16.0kHz -12–+12dB D63>W – D=W – D<W63 4–40 52–76 28–58 52–76 1–127 Drive EQ Low Gain(distortion) EQ Mid Gain(distortion) LPF Cutoff Output Level 0–127 -12–+12dB -12–+12dB 1.0kHz–thru 0–127 0–127 52–76 52–76 34–60 0–127 See Table table#1 Control ● table#3 table#3 Parameter Sensitive Cutoff Frequency Offset Resonance 0–127 0–127 1.0–12.0 Value 0–127 0–127 10–120 table#3 EQ Low Frequency EQ Low Gain EQ High Frequency EQ High Gain Dry/Wet 32Hz–2.0kHz -12–+12dB 500Hz–16.0kHz -12–+12dB D63>W – D=W – D<W63 4–40 52–76 28–58 52–76 1–127 Drive 0–127 0–127 See Table Control ● table#3 table#3 No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 TOUCH WAH 1 (variation, insertion block), TOUCH WAH+DIST (variation block) No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Value 0–127 0–127 10–120 COMPRESSOR (variation, insertion block) Value 0–127 0–127 0–127 10–120 AUTO WAH+DIST, AUTO WHA+ODRV (variation block) No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 Parameter LFO Frequency LFO Depth Cutoff Frequency Offset Resonance 0–127 0–127 1.0–12.0 PITCH CHANGE 2 (variation block) Value 4–40 52–76 28–58 52–76 AUTO WAH (variation, insertion block) 11 12 13 14 15 16 No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 11 12 13 14 15 16 No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Parameter Sensitive Cutoff Frequency Offset Resonance PITCH CHANGE 1 (variation block) Value 52–76 14–54 52–76 10–120 52–76 8–40 28–58 2BAND EQ(STEREO) (variation, insertion block) No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Parameter Attack Release Threshold Output Level 1–40ms 10–680ms -72–-30dB 0–127 Control ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢ QQQQQQQQQQQQQQ ,,,,,,,,,,,,,, MIDI Data Format < Table 1-11 > Effect Data Value Assign Table Table#1 LFO Frequency Table#4 Reverb time Table#7 Delay Time(400.0ms) Table#11 Reverb Width;Depth;Height Data Data Data Data 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 Value Data Value Data Value Data Value 0.00 32 1.35 64 2.69 96 8.41 0.04 33 1.39 65 2.78 97 8.75 0.08 34 1.43 66 2.86 98 9.08 0.13 35 1.47 67 2.94 99 9.42 0.17 36 1.51 68 3.03 100 9.76 0.21 37 1.56 69 3.11 101 10.1 0.25 38 1.60 70 3.20 102 10.8 0.29 39 1.64 71 3.28 103 11.4 0.34 40 1.68 72 3.37 104 12.1 0.38 41 1.72 73 3.45 105 12.8 0.42 42 1.77 74 3.53 106 13.5 0.46 43 1.81 75 3.62 107 14.1 0.51 44 1.85 76 3.70 108 14.8 0.55 45 1.89 77 3.87 109 15.5 0.59 46 1.94 78 4.04 110 16.2 0.63 47 1.98 79 4.21 111 16.8 0.67 48 2.02 80 4.37 112 17.5 0.72 49 2.06 81 4.54 113 18.2 0.76 50 2.10 82 4.71 114 19.5 0.80 51 2.15 83 4.88 115 20.9 0.84 52 2.19 84 5.05 116 22.2 0.88 53 2.23 85 5.22 117 23.6 0.93 54 2.27 86 5.38 118 24.9 0.97 55 2.31 87 5.55 119 26.2 1.01 56 2.36 88 5.72 120 27.6 1.05 57 2.40 89 6.06 121 28.9 1.09 58 2.44 90 6.39 122 30.3 1.14 59 2.48 91 6.73 123 31.6 1.18 60 2.52 92 7.07 124 33.0 1.22 61 2.57 93 7.40 125 34.3 1.26 62 2.61 94 7.74 126 37.0 1.30 63 2.65 95 8.08 127 39.7 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 Value Data Value Data Value 0.3 32 3.5 64 17.0 0.4 33 3.6 65 18.0 0.5 34 3.7 66 19.0 0.6 35 3.8 67 20.0 0.7 36 3.9 68 25.0 0.8 37 4.0 69 30.0 0.9 38 4.1 1.0 39 4.2 1.1 40 4.3 1.2 41 4.4 1.3 42 4.5 1.4 43 4.6 1.5 44 4.7 1.6 45 4.8 1.7 46 4.9 1.8 47 5.0 1.9 48 5.5 2.0 49 6.0 2.1 50 6.5 2.2 51 7.0 2.3 52 7.5 2.4 53 8.0 2.5 54 8.5 2.6 55 9.0 2.7 56 9.5 2.8 57 10.0 2.9 58 11.0 3.0 59 12.0 3.1 60 13.0 3.2 61 14.0 3.3 62 15.0 3.4 63 16.0 Table#2 Modulation Delay Offset Table#5 Delay Time(200.0ms) Data Data 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 Value Data Value Data Value Data Value 0.0 32 3.2 64 6.4 96 9.6 0.1 33 3.3 65 6.5 97 9.7 0.2 34 3.4 66 6.6 98 9.8 0.3 35 3.5 67 6.7 99 9.9 0.4 36 3.6 68 6.8 100 10.0 0.5 37 3.7 69 6.9 101 11.1 0.6 38 3.8 70 7.0 102 12.2 0.7 39 3.9 71 7.1 103 13.3 0.8 40 4.0 72 7.2 104 14.4 0.9 41 4.1 73 7.3 105 15.5 1.0 42 4.2 74 7.4 106 17.1 1.1 43 4.3 75 7.5 107 18.6 1.2 44 4.4 76 7.6 108 20.2 1.3 45 4.5 77 7.7 109 21.8 1.4 46 4.6 78 7.8 110 23.3 1.5 47 4.7 79 7.9 111 24.9 1.6 48 4.8 80 8.0 112 26.5 1.7 49 4.9 81 8.1 113 28.0 1.8 50 5.0 82 8.2 114 29.6 1.9 51 5.1 83 8.3 115 31.2 2.0 52 5.2 84 8.4 116 32.8 2.1 53 5.3 85 8.5 117 34.3 2.2 54 5.4 86 8.6 118 35.9 2.3 55 5.5 87 8.7 119 37.5 2.4 56 5.6 88 8.8 120 39.0 2.5 57 5.7 89 8.9 121 40.6 2.6 58 5.8 90 9.0 122 42.2 2.7 59 5.9 91 9.1 123 43.7 2.8 60 6.0 92 9.2 124 45.3 2.9 61 6.1 93 9.3 125 46.9 3.0 62 6.2 94 9.4 126 48.4 3.1 63 6.3 95 9.5 127 50.0 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 Value Data Value Data 0.1 32 50.5 64 1.7 33 52.0 65 3.2 34 53.6 66 4.8 35 55.2 67 6.4 36 56.8 68 8.0 37 58.3 69 9.5 38 59.9 70 11.1 39 61.5 71 12.7 40 63.1 72 14.3 41 64.6 73 15.8 42 66.2 74 17.4 43 67.8 75 19.0 44 69.4 76 20.6 45 70.9 77 22.1 46 72.5 78 23.7 47 74.1 79 25.3 48 75.7 80 26.9 49 77.2 81 28.4 50 78.8 82 30.0 51 80.4 83 31.6 52 81.9 84 33.2 53 83.5 85 34.7 54 85.1 86 36.3 55 86.7 87 37.9 56 88.2 88 39.5 57 89.8 89 41.0 58 91.4 90 42.6 59 93.0 91 44.2 60 94.5 92 45.7 61 96.1 93 47.3 62 97.7 94 48.9 63 99.3 95 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 Value Data Value Data Value Data Value 0.1 32 100.9 64 201.6 96 302.4 3.2 33 104.0 65 204.8 97 305.5 6.4 34 107.2 66 207.9 98 308.7 9.5 35 110.3 67 211.1 99 311.8 12.7 36 113.5 68 214.2 100 315.0 15.8 37 116.6 69 217.4 101 318.1 19.0 38 119.8 70 220.5 102 321.3 22.1 39 122.9 71 223.7 103 324.4 25.3 40 126.1 72 226.8 104 327.6 28.4 41 129.2 73 230.0 105 330.7 31.6 42 132.4 74 233.1 106 333.9 34.7 43 135.5 75 236.3 107 337.0 37.9 44 138.6 76 239.4 108 340.2 41.0 45 141.8 77 242.6 109 343.3 44.2 46 144.9 78 245.7 110 346.5 47.3 47 148.1 79 248.9 111 349.6 50.5 48 151.2 80 252.0 112 352.8 53.6 49 154.4 81 255.2 113 355.9 56.8 50 157.5 82 258.3 114 359.1 59.9 51 160.7 83 261.5 115 362.2 63.1 52 163.8 84 264.6 116 365.4 66.2 53 167.0 85 267.7 117 368.5 69.4 54 170.1 86 270.9 118 371.7 72.5 55 173.3 87 274.0 119 374.8 75.7 56 176.4 88 277.2 120 378.0 78.8 57 179.6 89 280.3 121 381.1 82.0 58 182.7 90 283.5 122 384.3 85.1 59 185.9 91 286.6 123 387.4 88.3 60 189.0 92 289.8 124 390.6 91.4 61 192.2 93 292.9 125 393.7 94.6 62 195.3 94 296.1 126 396.9 97.7 63 198.5 95 299.2 127 400.0 Value Data Value 100.8 96 151.2 102.4 97 152.8 104.0 98 154.4 105.6 99 155.9 107.1 100 157.5 108.7 101 159.1 110.3 102 160.6 111.9 103 162.2 113.4 104 163.8 115.0 105 165.4 116.6 106 166.9 118.2 107 168.5 119.7 108 170.1 121.3 109 171.7 122.9 110 173.2 124.4 111 174.8 126.0 112 176.4 127.6 113 178.0 129.2 114 179.5 130.7 115 181.1 132.3 116 182.7 133.9 117 184.3 135.5 118 185.8 137.0 119 187.4 138.6 120 189.0 140.2 121 190.6 141.8 122 192.1 143.3 123 193.7 144.9 124 195.3 146.5 125 196.9 148.1 126 198.4 149.6 127 200.0 Data Value 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 12 14 16 18 20 23 26 30 35 40 Table#3 EQ Frequency Table#6 Room Size Table#9 Compressor Release Time Data Data 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 Value Data Value 0.1 32 5.1 0.3 33 5.3 0.4 34 5.4 0.6 35 5.6 0.7 36 5.7 0.9 37 5.9 1.0 38 6.1 1.2 39 6.2 1.4 40 6.4 1.5 41 6.5 1.7 42 6.7 1.8 43 6.8 2.0 44 7.0 2.1 2.3 2.5 2.6 2.8 2.9 3.1 3.2 3.4 3.5 3.7 3.9 4.0 4.2 4.3 4.5 4.6 4.8 5.0 Value Data Value Data Value Data Value 0.5 32 8.8 64 17.6 96 27.5 0.8 33 9.1 65 17.9 98 28.1 1.0 34 9.4 66 18.2 99 28.5 1.3 35 9.6 67 18.5 100 28.8 1.5 36 9.9 68 18.8 101 29.2 1.8 37 10.2 69 19.1 102 29.5 2.0 38 10.4 70 19.4 103 29.9 2.3 39 10.7 71 19.7 104 30.2 2.6 40 11.0 72 20.0 2.8 41 11.2 73 20.2 3.1 42 11.5 74 20.5 3.3 43 11.8 75 20.8 3.6 44 12.1 76 21.1 3.9 45 12.3 77 21.4 4.1 46 12.6 78 21.7 4.4 47 12.9 79 22.0 4.6 48 13.1 80 22.4 4.9 49 13.4 81 22.7 5.2 50 13.7 82 23.0 5.4 51 14.0 83 23.3 5.7 52 14.2 84 23.6 5.9 53 14.5 85 23.9 6.2 54 14.8 86 24.2 6.5 55 15.1 87 24.5 6.7 56 15.4 88 24.9 7.0 57 15.6 89 25.2 7.2 58 15.9 90 25.5 7.5 59 16.2 91 25.8 7.8 60 16.5 92 26.1 8.0 61 16.8 93 26.5 8.3 62 17.1 94 26.8 8.6 63 17.3 95 27.1 Table#8 Compressor Attack Time Data Value Data Value 50 40 2.0k 56 41 2.2k 63 42 2.5k 70 43 2.8k 80 44 3.2k 90 45 3.6k 100 46 4.0k 110 47 4.5k 125 48 5.0k 140 49 5.6k 160 50 6.3k 180 51 7.0k 200 52 8.0k 225 53 9.0k 250 54 10.0k 280 55 11.0k 315 56 12.0k 355 57 14.0k 400 58 16.0k 450 59 18.0k 500 60 THRU(20.0k) 560 630 700 800 900 1.0k 1.1k 1.2k 1.4k 1.6k 1.8k 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 Value 10 15 25 35 45 55 65 75 85 100 115 140 170 230 340 680 Table#10 Compressor Ratio Data 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Value 1.0 1.5 2.0 3.0 5.0 7.0 10.0 20.0 167 ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢ QQQQQQQQQQQQQQ ,,,,,,,,,,,,,, MIDI Implementation Chart [Portable Keyboard] Model: PSR-730 Function Basic Default Channel Changed Transmitted 1~16 1~16 Recognized *1 *1 1~16 1~16 Default Messages Altered 3 X ************** 3 X X : True voice 0~127 ************** 0~127 0~127 Velocity Note ON Note OFF O 9nH, v=1~127 X 9nH, v=0 O 9nH, v=1~127 X After Touch key’s Ch’s X X X O O O O O X O O O O X X O X X O X X O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O Mode Note Number Pitch Bender Control Change 0, 32 1 5 7, 10, 11 6, 38 64~67 71, 74 72, 73 84 91, 93, 94 96~97 98~99 100~101 120 121 *3 *3 *3 Program Change : True # O 0~127 ************** O 0~127 System Exclusive O O System : Song Position : Song Select Common : Tune X X X X X X System : Clock Real Time : Commands O O O O Aux X X O X X O (123~127) O X : Local ON/OFF : All Notes OFF Messages : Active Sense : Reset Mode 1 : OMNI ON, POLY Mode 3 : OMNI OFF, POLY 168 Date: 14-APR-1997 Version: 1.0 MIDI Implementation Chart Mode 2 : OMNI ON, MONO Mode 4 : OMNI OFF, MONO Remarks *2 *2 Bank Select Modulation Portamento Time Data Entry Sound Controller Sound Controller Portamento Controllers Effect Depth RPN Inc, Dec NRPN LSB, MSB RPN LSB, MSB All Sound Off Reset All Controllers O : Yes X : No ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢ QQQQQQQQQQQQQQ ,,,,,,,,,,,,,, MIDI Implementation Chart [Portable Keyboard] Model: PSR-630 Function Basic Default Channel Changed Transmitted 1~16 1~16 Recognized *1 *1 1~16 1~16 Default Messages Altered 3 X ************** 3 X X : True voice 0~127 ************** 0~127 0~127 Velocity Note ON Note OFF O 9nH, v=1~127 X 9nH, v=0 O 9nH, v=1~127 X After Touch key’s Ch’s X X X O O O Mode Note Number Pitch Bender Control Change 0, 32 1 5 7, 10, 11 6, 38 64~67 71, 74 72, 73 84 91, 93, 94 96~97 98~99 100~101 120 121 O X X O O O O X X O X X O X X *3 *3 *3 *3 O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O Program Change : True # O 0~127 ************** O 0~127 System Exclusive O O System : Song Position : Song Select Common : Tune X X X X X X System : Clock Real Time : Commands O O O O Aux X X O X X O (123~127) O X : Local ON/OFF : All Notes OFF Messages : Active Sense : Reset Mode 1 : OMNI ON, POLY Mode 3 : OMNI OFF, POLY Date: 14-APR-1997 Version: 1.0 MIDI Implementation Chart Mode 2 : OMNI ON, MONO Mode 4 : OMNI OFF, MONO Remarks *2 *2 Bank Select Modulation Portamento Time Data Entry Sound Controller Sound Controller Portamento Controllers Effect Depth RPN Inc, Dec NRPN LSB, MSB RPN LSB, MSB All Sound Off Reset All Controllers O : Yes X : No 169 ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢ QQQQQQQQQQQQQ ,,,,,,,,,,,,, MIDI Implementation Chart *1 The tracks for each channel can be selected on the panel. See page 125 for more information. *2 Incoming MIDI messages control the PSR-730/630 as 16 channel multi timbral tone generator when initially shipped (factory set). The MIDI messages don’t affect the panel controls including the Panel Voice selection since they are directly sent to the tone generator of the PSR-730/630. However, the following MIDI messages affects the panel controls such as Panel Voice, Style, Multi Pad and Song settings: • • • • MIDI MASTER TUNE, MASTER TUNE (XG System Parameter). TRANSPOSE (XG System Parameter). System Exclusive Messages related to the REVERB, CHORUS, DSP EFFECT and MULTI EFFECT (PSR-730 only) settings. XG MULTI EQ PARAMETER (PSR-730 only) *3 Also, the MIDI messages affect the panel settings when one of the folowing MIDI reception modes is selected. These modes can be selected on the panel (see page 127). Remote : The Note On/Off messages received at the designated Remote (receive) channel are processed the same as the notes normally played on the keyboard. In this mode, only the following channel messages will be recognized: • Note On/Off • Control Changes Bank Select (R1 voice only) Modulation Volume Expression Sustain Sostenute Soft Pedal All Notes Off • Program Change (R1 voice only) • Pitch Bend 170 Off : The MIDI channel messages will not be received at the designated channel. Bass : The note on/off messages received at the channel(s) set to “Bass” are recognized as the bass notes in the accompaniment section. The bass notes will be detected regardless of the accompaniment on/off and split point settings on the PSR-730/630 panel. Chord : The note on/off messages received at the channel(s) set to “Chord” are recognized as the fingerings in the accompaniment section. The chords to be detected depend on the fingering mode on the PSR-730/630. The chords will be detected regardless of the accompaniment on/off and split point settings on the PSR-730/630 panel. Though these messages will not output by playing the keyboard and changing the panel settings, they may be included in the Song or Style data and output. ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢ QQQQQQQQQQQQQ ,,,,,,,,,,,,, Specifications Keyboards • 61 standard-size keys (C1 — C6) with touch response. Display • Large multi-function LCD display Setup Overall Controls • User Style : 4 (101 — 104) • Transpose • Recording Tracks : 5 Sections x 8 tracks • Pitch Bend Range • Modulation • Drum Cancel • Quantize • Touch Sensitivity • Naming • Master Tuning • Track Clear, All Clear • Stand by/ON • Scale Tuning • Song Transpose • Master Volume : MIN — MAX • Metronome Control & Number Buttons • MENU ▲▼, VOICE, STYLE, SONG, SUB MENU ▲▼, [1] — [0], [+] (YES), [–] (NO) Disk Drive Demo • 15 Songs Voice PSR-730 • 200 Panel Voices +12 Drum Kits + 480 XG Voices • Split Voice Split Point • Accompaniment Split Point • Fingering Mode : SINGLE FINGER/FINGERED 1/FINGERED 2/FULL KEYBOARD/MULTIFINGER • Voice Set • Pedal 1/2 Digital Effect • 215 Panel Voices +12 Drum Kits + 480 XG Voices • Polyphony : 32 Multi Pad Recording • User Pad Set : 4 (101 — 104) • Naming • Pad Clear, Bank Clear MIDI • Transmit Settings • Receive Settings • Local Control • Clock • Reverb : 13 types • Initial Data Send • Chorus : 10 types • MIDI Template • DSP (system/insertion) : 46 types • Multi Effect : 42 types x 2 • Digital Equalizer : 5 types + 1 User Setting • Harmony : 16 types • Polyphony : 64 PSR-630 Style Recording • Tempo : 32 — 280 Registration Memory • 32 Regist Bank : 1 — 4 • Naming • Accompaniment Freeze Auxiliary Jacks • DC IN 10-12V, PHONES, SUSTAIN, FOOT VOL, AUX OUT R, L+R/L, MIDI IN/OUT, TO HOST Amplifiers • 6 W + 6 W (when using PA-6 power adaptor) • 4 W + 4 W (when using batteries) • Voice Set • R1/R2/L Voices • Revoice : Voice, Volume, Octave, Pan, Reverb Depth, Chorus Depth, DSP Depth • Split Voice Mode • Dual Voice Mode Auto Accompaniment Multi Pads • 36 Multi Pad Sets • 4 Pads + STOP • Chord Match • Naming Disk • 100 Styles • Auto Accompaniment ON/OFF • Song Recording/Playback • Accompaniment Track : RHYTHM1/2, BASS, CHORD1/2, PAD, PHRASE1/2 • Save • Load • Accompaniment Track Settings : ON/OFF • Disk Copy • Accompaniment Control : SYNC START, SYNC STOP, START/STOP, INTRO, MAIN A/B (AUTO FILL), ENDING • Beat Indicator • Song Copy • Delete File • Accompaniment Volume • Revoice : Voice, Volume, Pan, Reverb Depth, Chorus Depth • Virtual Arranger Groove & Dynamics • Dynamics Template : 17 types • Dynamics Rate : 0 — 100% • Expand Rate : 0 — 400% • Boost Rate : 0 — 400% One Touch Setting • 12 cm (4-3/4 ”) x 2 Power Consumption • 24 W (when using PA-6 AC power adaptor) Batteries • Six SUM-1, “D” size, R-20 or equivalent batteries • Format Song • Song Volume • Minus One Practice • Repeat Play • Song Repeat • Next Song Rated Voltage • DC 10-12V Dimensions (W x D x H) • 973 x 397 x 155 mm (38-1/4 ” x 15-5/8 ” x 6-1/8 ”) Weight • 9.5 kg (20.9 lbs.) excluding batteries Supplied Accessories • Sample Disk • Beat Groove Template : 49 types • Measure Groove Template : 25 types Speakers Song Recording • Quick Record, Multi Record • Recording Tracks : Quick Record : ACCOMPANIMENT, MELODY 1 — 4 Multi Record : 1 — 16 • Punch In/Punch Out • Quantize • Naming • Song Clear, Track Clear • Music Stand • Owner’s Manual Optional Accessories • Headphones : HPE-150 • AC Power Adaptor : PA-6 • Foot Switch : FC4, FC5 • Foot Volume : FC7 • Keyboard Stand : L-6, L-7 • Song Edit : Voice, Volume, Octave, Pan, Reverb Depth, Chorus Depth, DSP Depth * Specifications subject to change without notice. 171 ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢ QQQQQQQQQQQQQ ,,,,,,,,,,,,, Index A AC power adaptor ..................................................... 12 G Accompaniment styles .............................................. 22 GM System Level 1 ..................................................... 3 Groove & Dynamics .................................................. 35 Accompaniment tracks, song .................................... 86 Auto accompaniment ................................................ 22 H Harmony ................................................................... 47 Host Select .............................................................. 122 Auto accompaniment on/off ...................................... 23 Auto Fill ..................................................................... 27 AUX OUT .................................................................. 13 I Icons ........................................................................... 8 Initial data send ....................................................... 128 B Bank, registration ...................................................... 57 Initialization (data backup) ...................................... 152 Batteries .................................................................... 12 Insertion Effect .................................................. 45, 144 Beat Groove .............................................................. 36 Intro, accompaniment ................................................ 27 Beat indicator ............................................................ 26 C Boost Rate ................................................................ 40 K Keyboard percussion ................................................ 19 Chord Match function ................................................ 63 L Local control ............................................................ 127 Chord types, auto accompaniment ........................... 34 Load .......................................................................... 70 Chorus ...................................................................... 44 Clock ....................................................................... 128 M Main A & Main B sections ......................................... 27 Connectors ................................................................ 13 Master tuning .......................................................... 115 Contents ...................................................................... 4 Measure Groove ....................................................... 37 Control Change ....................................................... 120 Measure, song play from specified ........................... 78 Melody tracks, clearing ............................................. 94 D Data Dial ................................................................... 18 Melody tracks, song .................................................. 84 Delete File ................................................................. 75 Menu structure ........................................................ 130 Demonstration playback ............................................ 14 Menus ....................................................................... 10 Digital Effect .............................................................. 42 Metronome .............................................................. 116 Digital Equalizer ........................................................ 51 MIDI connectors ...................................................... 121 Disk Copy .................................................................. 72 MIDI data format ..................................................... 153 Display operation ........................................................ 8 MIDI functions ......................................................... 125 DOC .......................................................................... 66 MIDI implementation chart ...................................... 168 Drum kit list ............................................................. 140 MIDI template .......................................................... 129 DSP ........................................................................... 45 Minus-one practice .................................................... 79 Dual voice mode ....................................................... 19 Modulation wheel ...................................................... 55 Dynamics Rate .......................................................... 39 Multi effect ................................................................. 48 Dynamics Template ................................................... 38 Multi-finger fingering mode ....................................... 35 Multi pad set selection .............................................. 61 E Effects ....................................................................... 42 Multi Pads, playing .................................................... 62 Ending, accompaniment ........................................... 25 Music stand ................................................................. 7 Expand Rate ............................................................. 39 F Note On/Off ............................................................. 120 O On bass chord ........................................................... 34 Features ...................................................................... 2 Freeze (Accompaniment Freeze function) ................ 60 Fill-in ......................................................................... 27 One touch setting ...................................................... 40 Fingered 1 fingering mode ........................................ 33 Overall functions ..................................................... 114 Fingered 2 fingering mode ........................................ 34 Fingering modes, accompaniment ............................ 31 Floppy disk ................................................................ 64 Foot Volume .............................................................. 13 Format ....................................................................... 67 Full Keyboard fingering mode ................................... 34 172 N ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢ QQQQQQQQQQQQQ ,,,,,,,,,,,,, Index P R Panel controls ............................................................. 6 T Tempo, accompaniment ............................................ 26 Pedal Function list ................................................... 117 To Host .................................................................... 121 Phones jack .............................................................. 13 Touch sensitivity ...................................................... 115 Pitch Bend ................................................................. 54 Track assignment, minus-one ................................... 79 Polarity .................................................................... 118 Track muting, accompaniment .................................. 28 Polyphony ............................................................... 133 Transmit channel & track ......................................... 125 Power supply ............................................................. 12 Transposition ............................................................. 56 Precautions ................................................................. 1 Troubleshooting ....................................................... 151 R1, R2, & L voices .................................................... 16 V Variation (DSP) ......................................................... 46 Receive channel & mode ........................................ 126 Velocity .................................................................... 119 Record Ready Mode ................................... 85, 99, 106 Virtual Arranger ......................................................... 29 Registration bank ...................................................... 58 Voice list .................................................................. 133 Registration memory ................................................. 57 Voice set .................................................................. 116 Rehearsal mode ........................................ 86, 101, 108 Voice, revoice .......................................................... 110 Repeat play ............................................................... 80 Voices, about the ....................................................... 16 Reverb ....................................................................... 43 Voices, selecting & playing ........................................ 17 Revoicing ................................................................ 110 Volume control, accompaniment ............................... 29 Root key .................................................................... 32 Volume control, song ................................................. 78 Volume, harmony ...................................................... 48 S Sample disk .............................................................. 76 Save .......................................................................... 68 X XG ............................................................................... 3 Scale tuning ............................................................ 115 SFF ......................................................................... 148 Shortcuts ................................................................... 11 Single Finger fingering mode .................................... 32 Song clear ................................................................. 94 Song Copy ................................................................ 73 Song Edit .................................................................. 96 Song mode ................................................................ 11 Song playback ........................................................... 76 Song recording .......................................................... 83 Specifications .......................................................... 171 Split point, auto accompaniment ............................... 30 Split point, split voice ................................................. 21 Split voice mode ........................................................ 20 Stand by/ON switch ................................................... 14 Start modes, accompaniment ................................... 23 Stop Accompaniment function .................................. 25 Style file .................................................................... 66 Style mode ................................................................ 11 Style selection ........................................................... 22 Style, revoice ........................................................... 112 Sustain jack ............................................................... 13 Sustain Pedal ............................................................ 13 Synchro Stop function ............................................... 28 Synchronized start .................................................... 24 System Effect .................................................... 45, 143 173 Limited Warranty 90 DAYS LABOR 1 YEAR PARTS Yamaha Corporation of America, hereafter referred to as Yamaha, warrants to the original consumer of a product included in the categories listed below, that the product will be free of defects in materials and/or workmanship for the periods indicated. This warranty is applicable to all models included in the following series of products: PSR SERIES OF PORTATONE ELECTRONIC KEYBOARDS If during the first 90 days that immediately follows the purchase date, your new Yamaha product covered by this warranty is found to have a defect in material and/or workmanship, Yamaha and/or its authorized representative will repair such defect without charge for parts or labor. If parts should be required after this 90 day period but within the one year period that immediately follows the purchase date, Yamaha will, subject to the terms of this warranty, supply these parts without charge. However, charges for labor, and/or any miscellaneous expenses incurred are the consumers responsibility. Yamaha reserves the right to utilize reconditioned parts in repairing these products and/or to use reconditioned units as warranty replacements. THIS WARRANTY IS THE ONLY EXPRESS WARRANTY WHICH YAMAHA MAKES IN CONNECTION WITH THESE PRODUCTS. ANY IMPLIED WARRANTY APPLICABLE TO THE PRODUCT, INCLUDING THE WARRANTY OF MERCHANT ABILITY IS LIMITED TO THE DURATION OF THE EXPRESS WARRANTY. YAMAHA EXCLUDES AND SHALL NOT BE LIABLE IN ANY EVENT FOR INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES. Some states do not allow limitations that relate to implied warranties and/or the exclusion of incidental or consequential damages. Therefore, these limitations and exclusions may not apply to you. This warranty gives you specific legal rights. You may also have other rights which vary from state to state. CONSUMERS RESPONSIBILITIES If warranty service should be required, it is necessary that the consumer assume certain responsibilities: 1. Contact the Customer Service Department of the retailer selling the product, or any retail outlet authorized by Yamaha to sell the product for assistance. You may also contact Yamaha directly at the address provided below. 2. Deliver the unit to be serviced under warranty to: the retailer selling the product, an authorized service center, or to Yamaha with an explanation of the problem. Please be prepared to provide proof purchase date (sales receipt, credit card copy, etc.) when requesting service and/or parts under warranty. 3. Shipping and/or insurance costs are the consumers responsibility.* Units shipped for service should be packed securely. *Repaired units will be returned PREPAID if warranty service is required within the first 90 days. IMPORTANT: Do NOT ship anything to ANY location without prior authorization. A Return Authorization (RA) will be issued that has a tracking number assigned that will expedite the servicing of your unit and provide a tracking system if needed. 4. Your owners manual contains important safety and operating instructions. It is your responsibility to be aware of the contents of this manual and to follow all safety precautions. EXCLUSIONS This warranty does not apply to units whose trade name, trademark, and/or ID numbers have been altered, defaced, exchanged removed, or to failures and/or damages that may occur as a result of: 1. Neglect, abuse, abnormal strain, modification or exposure to extremes in temperature or humidity. 2. Improper repair or maintenance by any person who is not a service representative of a retail outlet authorized by Yamaha to sell the product, an authorized service center, or an authorized service representative of Yamaha. 3. This warranty is applicable only to units sold by retailers authorized by Yamaha to sell these products in the U.S.A., the District of Columbia, and Puerto Rico. This warranty is not applicable in other possessions or territories of the U.S.A. or in any other country. Please record the model and serial number of the product you have purchased in the spaces provided below. Model___________________________ Serial #________________________________ Sales Slip #________________________________ Purchased from____________________________________________________________ Date______________________________________ (Retailer) YAMAHA CORPORATION OF AMERICA Electronic Service Division 6600 Orangethorpe Avenue Buena Park, CA 90620 KEEP THIS DOCUMENT FOR YOUR RECORDS. DO NOT MAIL! For details of products, please contact your nearest Yamaha or the authorized distributor listed below. Pour plus de détails sur les produits, veuillez-vous adresser à Yamaha ou au distributeur le plus proche de vous figurant dans la liste suivante. NORTH AMERICA CANADA Yamaha Canada Music Ltd. 135 Milner Avenue, Scarborough, Ontario, M1S 3R1, Canada Tel: 416-298-1311 U.S.A. Yamaha Corporation of America 6600 Orangethorpe Ave., Buena Park, Calif. 90620, U.S.A. Tel: 714-522-9011 CENTRAL & SOUTH AMERICA Die Einzelheiten zu Produkten sind bei Ihrer unten aufgeführten Niederlassung und bei Yamaha Vertragshändlern in den jeweiligen Bestimmungsländern erhältlich. Para detalles sobre productos, contacte su tienda Yamaha más cercana o el distribuidor autorizado que se lista debajo. ASIA ITALY Yamaha Musica Italia S.P.A., Home Keyboard Division Viale Italia 88, 20020 Lainate (Milano), Italy Tel: 02-935-771 SPAIN Yamaha-Hazen Electronica Musical, S.A. Jorge Juan 30, 28001, Madrid, Spain Tel: 91-577-7270 PORTUGAL Valentim de Carvalho CI SA Estrada de Porto Salvo, Paço de Arcos 2780 Oeiras, Portugal Tel: 01-443-3398/4030/1823 GREECE MEXICO Yamaha de Mexico S.A. De C.V., Departamento de ventas Javier Rojo Gomez No.1149, Col. Gpe Del Moral, Deleg. Iztapalapa, 09300 Mexico, D.F. Tel: 686-00-33 BRAZIL Yamaha Musical do Brasil LTDA. Av. Rebouças 2636, São Paulo, Brasil Tel: 011-853-1377 Philippe Nakas S.A. Navarinou Street 13, P.Code 10680, Athens, Greece Tel: 01-364-7111 SWEDEN Yamaha Music Argentina S.A. Viamonte 1145 Piso2-B 1053, Buenos Aires, Argentina Tel: 1-371-7021 PANAMA AND OTHER LATIN AMERICAN COUNTRIES/ CARIBBEAN COUNTRIES Yamaha de Panama S.A. Torre Banco General, Piso 7, Urbanización Marbella, Calle 47 y Aquilino de la Guardia, Ciudad de Panamá, Panamá Tel: 507-269-5311 EUROPE THE UNITED KINGDOM Yamaha-Kemble Music (U.K.) Ltd. Sherbourne Drive, Tilbrook, Milton Keynes, MK7 8BL, England Tel: 01908-366700 IRELAND Danfay Ltd. 61D, Sallynoggin Road, Dun Laoghaire, Co. Dublin Tel: 01-2859177 GERMANY/SWITZERLAND Yamaha Europa GmbH. Siemensstraße 22-34, 25462 Rellingen, F.R. of Germany Tel: 04101-3030 AUSTRIA Yamaha Music Austria Schleiergasse 20, A-1100 Wien Austria Tel: 01-60203900 THE NETHERLANDS Yamaha Music Nederland Kanaalweg 18G, 3526KL, Utrecht, The Netherlands Tel: 030-2828411 BELGIUM Yamaha Music Belgium Keiberg Imperiastraat 8, 1930 Zaventem, Belgium Tel: 02-7258220 FRANCE Yamaha Musique France, Division Claviers BP 70-77312 Marne-la-Vallée Cedex 2, France Tel: 01-64-61-4000 Tom Lee Music Co., Ltd. 11/F., Silvercord Tower 1, 30 Canton Road, Tsimshatsui, Kowloon, Hong Kong Tel: 2737-7688 INDONESIA PT. Yamaha Music Indonesia (Distributor) PT. Nusantik Gedung Yamaha Music Center, Jalan Jend. Gatot Subroto Kav. 4, Jakarta 12930, Indonesia Tel: 21-520-2577 KOREA Cosmos Corporation #131-31, Neung-Dong, Sungdong-Ku, Seoul Korea Tel: 02-466-0021~5 MALAYSIA Yamaha Music Malaysia, Sdn., Bhd. 16-28, Jalan SS 2/72, Petaling Jaya, Selangor, Malaysia Tel: 3-717-8977 Yamaha Scandinavia AB J. A. Wettergrens Gata 1 Box 30053 S-400 43 Göteborg, Sweden Tel: 031 89 34 00 PHILIPPINES Yupangco Music Corporation 339 Gil J. Puyat Avenue, P.O. Box 885 MCPO, Makati, Metro Manila, Philippines Tel: 819-7551 DENMARK ARGENTINA HONG KONG YS Copenhagen Liaison Office Generatorvej 8B DK-2730 Herlev, Denmark Tel: 44 92 49 00 SINGAPORE FINLAND Warner Music Finland OY/Fazer Music Aleksanterinkatu 11, P.O. Box 260 SF-00101 Helsinki, Finland Tel: 0435 011 NORWAY Norsk filial av Yamaha Scandinavia AB Grini Næringspark 1 N-1345 Østerås, Norway Tel: 67 16 77 70 Yamaha Music Asia Pte., Ltd. Blk 202 Hougang, Street 21 #02-01, Singapore 530202 Tel: 747-4374 TAIWAN Yamaha KHS Music Co., Ltd. 10F, 150, Tun-Hwa Northroad, Taipei, Taiwan, R.O.C. Tel: 02-2713-8999 THAILAND Siam Music Yamaha Co., Ltd. 121/60-61 RS Tower 17th Floor, Ratchadaphisek RD., Dindaeng, Bangkok 10320, Thailand Tel: 02-641-2951 ICELAND Skifan HF Skeifan 17 P.O. Box 8120 IS-128 Reykjavik, Iceland Tel: 525 5000 OTHER EUROPEAN COUNTRIES Yamaha Europa GmbH. Siemensstraße 22-34, 25462 Rellingen, F.R. of Germany Tel: 04101-3030 THE PEOPLE’S REPUBLIC OF CHINA AND OTHER ASIAN COUNTRIES Yamaha Corporation, International Marketing Division Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Hamamatsu, Japan 430-8650 Tel: 053-460-2317 AFRICA OCEANIA Yamaha Corporation, International Marketing Division Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Hamamatsu, Japan 430-8650 Tel: 053-460-2312 MIDDLE EAST AUSTRALIA Yamaha Music Australia Pty. Ltd. 17-33 Market Street, South Melbourne, Vic. 3205, Australia Tel: 3-699-2388 NEW ZEALAND Music Houses of N.Z. Ltd. 146/148 Captain Springs Road, Te Papapa, Auckland, New Zealand Tel: 9-634-0099 TURKEY/CYPRUS Yamaha Europa GmbH. Siemensstraße 22-34, 25462 Rellingen, F.R. of Germany Tel: 04101-3030 COUNTRIES AND TRUST TERRITORIES IN PACIFIC OCEAN OTHER COUNTRIES Yamaha Corporation, International Marketing Division Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Hamamatsu, Japan 430-8650 Tel: 053-460-2312 Yamaha Corporation, International Marketing Division Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Hamamatsu, Japan 430-8650 Tel: 053-460-2317 HEAD OFFICE Yamaha Corporation, Electronic Musical Instrument Division [PK] 13 Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Hamamatsu, Japan 430-8650 Tel: 053-460-3273 M.D.G., EMI Division © 1997 Yamaha Corporation VY78900 808POCP3.3-05E0 Printed in Japan